'LIBRARY
UNlv .RSfTY
SAN DIEGO
presented to the
UNIVERSITY LIBRARY
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA
SAN DIEGO
by
MRS. HELEN K. HULL
THE
COMBINED SPANISH METHOD.
A NEW
PRACTICAL AND THEORETICAL SYSTEM OF LEARNING
THE CASTHIP LANGUAGE,
EMBRACING THE MOST ADVANTAGEOUS FEATtJEES OF THE BEST
METHODS.
PBOHOflKCING VOCABULARY,
CONTAINING ALL THE WORDS USED IN THE COURSE OF THE WORK, AND REFERENCES
TO THE LESSONS IN WHICH EACH ONE IS EXPLAINED, THUS ENABLING
ANY ONF. TO BE HIS OWN INSTRUCTOR.
BY
ALBERTO DE TORNOS, A.M.,
FOBMERLY DIRECTOR OP NORMAL SCHOOLS IN SPAIN, AND NOW TE.VCITEB OP SPANISH IN
THE NEW TORK MERCANTILE LIBRARY, NEW YORK EVENING niGII SCHOOL, AND
THE POLYTECHNIC AND PACKEE INSTITUTES, BROOKLYN.
NEW YORK:
D. APPLETON & COMPANY,
90, 93 & 94 GRAND STREET.
1869.
ENTEEED, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1867, by
D. APPLETON & COMPANY,
In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern District
of New York.
NOTICE. A Key to the Exercises of this Grammar is
published in a separate volume.
PREFACE.
IT is an undoubted fact that in teaching, not only lan-
guages, but any other science or art, there neither is, nor
can be, any other method than that of uniting theory
with practice ; and the various modes of applying the one
to the other, the extent of the application, .and the time at
which it should be commenced, have produced the great
number of methods hitherto published.
This fact is now universally acknowledged, and each new
author proclaims himself to be the only one who has put it
into execution. The most insignificant little phrase-book
does not fail to announce, in its introduction, that it com-
bines theory and practice / and grammars containing noth-
ing more than confused masses of rules, heaped one upon
another, are entitled " Theoretical and Practical" It is
admitted on all hands that much progress has been made
within the last few years in the art of teaching languages ;
and, in testimony of this, we have only to mention the ex-
cellent oral and practical methods of Jacotot, Manesca, Ollen-
dorif, Boulet, Robertson, and others who have -followed in
their footsteps, all of which are ably treated, and have done
much good in their way. But each one of the grammarians
referred to, satisfied with his own invention, looked with
disdain upon that of his predecessor. Hence the enmity
PREFACE.
and the almost unaccountable diversify of opinion which we
observe amongst them. Had they studied each other with
impartiality, and endeavored to profit by the experience
and even the defects of the several systems, their labors
would certainly have been attended with still more favora-
ble results, and of course more considerable benefit would
have accrued thereby to the art in general. Numberless
points of excellence are to be found, scattered here and
there, throughout the various ancient and modern systems,
and chiefly those already alluded to; and it has been
thought that, if carefully sifted out and judiciously com-
bined, they would form a new method which would be in
details essentially superior to any of the old ones.
This conviction, joined to twenty years' experience
in teaching the Spanish language, sometimes through the
medium of one, sometimes of another of the before-men-
tioned systems, has led the author to prepare and publish
the COMBINED METHOD, which he now offers to those desir-
ing to learn the noble language of Cervantes.
Whether he has successfully attained his object, the pub-
lic will decide.
OBSERVATIONS
SOME OF THE ADVANTAGEOUS FEATURES OF THE "DE TORNOS'S
COMBINED METHOD."
1st. THE advantage of presenting the verb as the first and
principal part of speech, which serves as the axis upon which
all the other parts revolve. These, too, have been introduced
in their turn, not in grammatical order, nor by mere chance,
but in the logical and natural order in which they occur in
discourse, whether written or spoken.
2d. That of explaining these parts of speech in the order
just mentioned, not in an isolated manner, but united to form/
a homogeneous whole, and in such a way that the learner will
have no difficulty in finding the explanation relative to the use of
each one of them respectively, as often as occasion may require.
3d. These explanations, which embrace the whole theory,
and form a complete grammar of the language, are separate
from and independent of the exercises ; the latter being com-
posed in strict accordance with the examples accompanying
each lesson, in such a manner that those unacquainted with
grammar in general, and those who have no desire to enter
into the theory of the language, or, finally, those who are too
young or too old to learn grammar, may acquire a thorough
conversational knowledge of Spanish, by merely committing to
memory the Vocabulary, studying the Compositions, and care-
fully writing the Exercises.
4th. From the arrangement alluded to, arises another great
advantage, namely, all the elements are found in the vocabu-
lary of each lesson, separated and detached from the examples
and rules given in the explanation ; thus enabling the student
to see at one glance all that he has to commit to memory for
each recitation.
vi OBSERVATIONS.
5th. And this division of the lessons into Elements, Compo-
sition, Explanation, Version, and Exercise, enables the teacher
to divide each lesson into two, three, or even four parts, accord-
ing to the age and capacity of the learner.
6th. Repetition, and constant repetition, is indispensable for
acquiring any language ; but by repetition should not be under-
stood the simple reiteration of single words and easy phrases ;
but repetition of the idioms, and of those forms of expression
differing most widely from the idiomatical construction of the
learner's native tongue. It is true, that though this is the
proper plan for acquiring a thorough knowledge of a language,
that feature might tend to make the present work appear, at
first sight, more difficult than the books hitherto used ; but
such will not be found the case ; for when there is frequent
change of matter there cannot be monotony ; and variety ren-
ders study at the same time easy and agreeable. This repetition,
then, of useful forms of expression, and contrast of idiom, will
be found in every pa^e of our " COMBINED METHOD," in which
it has been our endeavor to introduce gradually and with the
necessary explanations of each, the most important idioms of
the Spanish language.
7th. Although we are of opinion that to learn a language,
and, above all, to learn to pronounce it, it is always preferable
to have the assistance of a skilful teacher, and one who speaks
his native tongue with purity and correctness ; yet, a? it is not
always possible to procure such, we have placed at the end a
Vocabulary, containing all the words used in the course of the
work, and the pronunciation of each, so that nothing may be
wanting to second the efforts of those who, from choice or
necessity, may be their own instructors.
8th. The Vocabulary, besides giving the pronunciation and
meaning of the words, indicates the lesson in which the expla-
nation of each has been given in the Grammar. By this means
the learner can with easo refer to the explanation of all those
words of which it has been deemed essential to give one.
CONTENTS.
PREFACE
A FEW REMARKS OK THE COMBINED METHOD, . . v V1
. vii-xvi
CONTENTS, . ...
PRELIMINARY LESSON ON ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION,
KVLK
LESSON I.
1
1. Ecgular verbs, classified in three conjugations, ....
o Roots ***"
3.' Terminations of the three model verbs, corresponding to all the regular verbs, 2
. Suppression of the nominative pronouns, . ...
4. V. (Vsied) requires the verb in the third person, 3
LESSON II.
5. Senor, senorito, senora, senorita, use of these words, ....
6. Don and Dona, use of these words,
7. No, placed before the verb, ..... 5
LESSON III.
8. The conjunction y changed into e, .7
9. Que, interrogative pronoun, .
10. Sine. When but is to be translated by sino, 7
11. Pen. When but is to be translated by pero, ..... 7
12. Espanol, ingles, &c., one word may belong to different parts of speech, , 7
LESSON IV.
13. A, preposition to, used after active verbs, when the object is a person, . 10
14. De, used to express position or the material of which any thing is made, . 10
15. El, the article the, used to determine a noun masculine singular, . . 10
. Contraction of the article d and the prepositions a and de into at, del, . 10
16. Un, the indefinite pronoun used before masculine nouns, ... 10
. Uao is only used as a numeral adjective, ...... 10
LESSON V.
17. Gender, how ascertained, ....... 13
. Tna, used before feminine nouns, ....... 13
IS. Tow, how translated, ........ 13
Vlll CONTENTS.
LESSON VI.
ECU PACK
19. The terminations of the persons of the present indicative ; how they differ
in the three conjugations, ........ 1C
20. Muy, how translated, ........ 16
21. Nouns ending in o change that vowel into a for the feminine, . . .17
LESSON VII.
22. Adjectives ending in o, an, or on form their feminine in a, . .
. Adjectives signifying nationality and ending in a, . . . .20
. Adjectives are generally placed after their nouns, .... 20
. Adjectives used metaphorically are always placed before the nouns, . . 20
. Some adjectives drop their last letter or syllable, .... 20
LESSON VIII.
23. The endings of the second and third conjugations, how they differ, . . 23
2-1. The conjunction 6 when changed into ,..... 23
25. 2V7, how translated, ......... 23
26. The plural of nouns, . . . . . . . 23
27. Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender, number, and case, . . 24
28. The article agrees also, ........ 24
. Feminine nouns that take the masculine article, . . . . .24
23. The neuter article lo, ........ 24
LESSON IX.
30. Papa, mama, pie, are exceptions, ....... 27
31. Nouns which are not monosyllables and end in s, their plural, . . 28
. Words ending in z, their plural, . . . . . .28
32. Words which are compounds of two nouns, their plural, ... 28
33. The days of the week, when they take the article, . . . .28
31. Donde, adonde, cuando, placed before the verb, .... 28
33. Donde, adonde, cuando, in interrogations require an accent, . . .28
LESSON X.
36. Irregular verbs. . . . . . . . . . 31
. Tmer not included in the seven verbs, . . . . .31
. Objective case of the third person U, los, la, la$,lo,. . . . "1
37. TM and fe, the difference between them, . . . . . "2
. It and so are translated sometimes by lo, . . . . 32
38. Qiiien, mal, que, de qnicn. used interrogatively do not take the article, . 32
39. When the interrogative is governed by a preposition, the same preposition
must be repeated in the answer, ....... <32
LESSON XI.
40. Alr/vien, alyimo, the difference between them, . . . . .35
. Any one or any liody, when translated by cualquiera, ... 35
41. A'ad/e, ninrrimn, their distinction, ....... 35
42. Alguno and ninrr>ino, when they lose the o, . . . . 36
43. Alyo, aJfjuna cosa, used affirmatively, . . . . .36
CONTENTS. ix
BCLK PAOB
44. Nada, ninyima cosa, used negatively, ...... 36
45. Negatives, when placed before the verb, . . . . . .36
. Two negatives render the negation more emphatic than one, . . 36
40. A or an, when not translated, ....... 36
LESSON XII.
47. Tener and haber, their distinction, ...... 39
. To have and to be, followed by an infinitive, how they are translated, . . 39
48. Preterit Indefinite, ......... 40
LESSON XIII.
49. Mo, tnyo, &c., change the o into a for the feminine, . . . .43
50. Possessive pronouns agree in gender and number with the name of the thing
possessed, ......... 43
51. As pronominal adjectives, mio, tuyo, suyo precede the noun and drop their
final syllable, ...... . . . . . . . .43
52. 3fio, when placed after the noun, ' . . . . . 44
53. Possessives used as pronouns agree in gender and number with the nouns
they represent, and take the article, . . . . . .44
54. When used indefinitely they take the neuter article, ... 44
53. When connected with the verb to be, the article is omitted, . . .44
56. Yu&tro, vuestra, when used, ....... 44
LESSON XIV.
57. Formation of compound numbers, . . . . . . .48
58. Numbers are indeclinable, except uno and the compounds of tiento, . 48
59. I'no, its agreement ; when it loses the o, . . . . .48
60. Ciento, its agreement ; when it loses the last syllable, . ' . . 48
LESSON XV.
61. Ordinals, their agreement and place, . . . . . .51
. Primero and tercero, when they drop their final letter, ... 52
62. Ordinals, when used, ... . . . . . .52
. N. B. When ordinals do not require the definite article, ... 52
LESSON XVI.
63. Preterit Definite, 56
64. Ante, its meaning, . ... . . .
65. Mas and menos, how used, ........ 57
LESSON XVII.
66. Quien, how used, ....
67. Who, when translated by que, and when by quien, . . . .61
68. Cual and <fue relate to persons and things, . . . . .
69. Cuyo refers to persons and things : its agreement, . . . . '
. It partakes of the nature of the relatives and of the possessivcs, . . 61
: CONTENTS.
uu
70. The preposition placed before the relative, . . '
71. Relative pronouns can never be suppressed in Spanish, . . .
LESSON XVIII.
72. Declension of the demonstrative pronouns este, ese, ayuel,
73. Este, how used, ...
74. Este, ese, forming one -word with the adjective otro,
75. The demonstrative pronouns used as neuter, .
76. The farmer and the latter, translated by aqud and este, .
77. That of, that who, or that which, translated by el de, d que,
78. English personal pronouns rendered in Spanish by demonstrative pronouns,
79. Aqui, ahi, oca, olid, how employed, .
LESSON XIX.
80. Para and por, how they differ, .......
81. Entre, its meaning, ....... TO
82. Hasta, its meaning, ........ 73
LESSON XX.
83. Tanto and cuanto, when they lose the last syllable, . . . .77
84. Comparison of equality, bow formed, ......
85. Cuan may be employed, ........ 77
86. Comparison of superiority, how formed, ..... 77
87. Comparison of inferiority, ........ 77
88. Mayor, menor, mejor, peor, are already in the comparative degree, . 77
89. Than, translated by de and que, ....... 78
90. Comparison relating to nouns, verbs, and adverbs. .... 73
LESSON XXI.
91. Superlatives ending in est, or formed by most, how translated, . . 82
92. Most, or most of, when translated by la mayor parte, or by mas, . . 83
93. In, preposition, when translated by de, . . . . .83
94. Superlatives formed by very, most, etc., when formed in Spanish by muy and
when by isimo, ......... 83
95. Adjectives drop the last vowel on taking the termination mmo, . . 83
96. Other superlatives ending in errimo, . . . . . . 83
97. Adjectives which change their endings before the termination isimo, . . 83
93. Superlatives in isimo irregularly formed, ..... 84
99. Irregular comparatives and superlatives, . . . . . .84
. These make also a superlative in isimo, ..... 84
. Also with muy, and a comparative with mas or menof, . . . .84
100. Substantives used adjectively admit the degrees of comparison, . . 84
LESSON XXII.
101. Ser and estar, the distinction between them, . . . . .89
102. " " their employment, ...... 89
CONTENTS. XI
LESSON XXIII.
BULB PAGE
103. Future simple, .......... 90
104. The definite article used with numerals, indicating the hour of the day, . 96
105. Evening and night, translated by noc/ie, . . . . . .96
106. The conjunction si, when it governs the subjunctive, and when the indica-
tive, 96
LESSON XXIV.
107. Compound future, ......... 100
108. Acabar de, its meaning, ........ 100
. N. B. How the pupil may learn a great number of words with little or no
difficulty, . .101
109. Nouns ending in tion are the same in Spanish, changing the letter t into c, 101
110. The days of the month are counted by the cardinal numbers, preceded by the
article, . . .101
LESSON XXV.
111. Saber and conocer, how they differ, ...... 107
112. Ann, ya, todavfa, their different meaning and uses, . . . .107
. Once, twice, &c., translated by una vez, dos veces, &c., . . . 107
. Miedo, valor, &c., take the preposition de after them, . . . .107
113. To be afraid, to be thirsty, &c., how translated, .... 107
114. Jamas and nunca, how used, ........ 107
LESSON XXVI.
115. Pronoun subject, or nominative, ...... 112
116. Two objective cases of the personal pronouns, how used, . . . 113
117. The objective case, when not preceded by a preposition, is affixed to infini-
tives, gerunds, &c., . . . . . . . . 113
118. When the verb drops the final letter followed by nos oros,. . . 113
. The reason of this, ........ 113
119. When the objective case may follow the verb, . . . . .113
120. When the objective. may be placed before the first verb, or after the second, 113
121. Prepositions, when expressed, always govern the second objective case, . 113
122. Mi, tl, si, when preceded by con, ...... 114
123. Entre, how used, ......... 114
124. The second objective case is used after comparatives, . . . 114
125. When the first objective case is used, . . . . . .114
126. The objective case of the third person is rendered by le, les, if the preposition
to govern it in English, . . . . . . . .114
LESSON XXVII.
127. The third person rendered in Spanish by se, . . . . . 119
128. The object of the verb is to be placed last, when two first objective cases
occur in the sentence, ........ 119
129. Placed first when the object of the verb is the reflective pronoun, . . 120
130. Both of the objective cases belonging to the same person used together, . 120
131. The expressions a tl quiero, a ti amo, are incorrect, . . . 120
Xll CONTEXTS.
132. The pronouns tl, la, lo, tos, and las, how distinguished from the articles d, la,
lo, los, las, ......... 120
133. The adjective mismo, how used, . . . . . . .120
LESSON XXVIII.
134. When the imperfect is used, ....... 125
135. When the pluperfect is used, . . . . . . . .126
136. How the expressions to have just and to be just are translated before a past
participle, ......... 126
LESSON XXIX..
137. The preterit anterior, its use, . . . . . .130
138. Derivation of adverbs of manner and quality, .... 131
139. How adverbs are formed from adjectives, ...... 131
140. Adverbs terminating in mente admit, like adjectives, the degrees of compari-
son, .......... 131
141. How these adverbs can be substituted, . . . . . .131
LESSON XXX.
142. What impersonal verbs are, . . . . ' .
143. Amanecer and arwcJier, used in the three persons, ....
144. Saber and hacer, and other verbs used impersonally,
145. The pronoun it, accompanying impersonal verbs, not translated,
. Nouns taken in a definite sense require the article, ....
. Nouns used in their most general sense take the article,
146. Names of nations, countries, mountains, &c., take the article,
147. Nations, countries, and provinces, when preceded by a preposition, do not
take the article, . . . ' .1:38
. Names of some places that always take the article, . . . . 133
LESSON XXXI.
148. Gustar, signifying to give pleasure to, how used, .
149. Gustar, followed by the preposition de,
150. Gustar, used as an active verb,
151. Verbs that require the same idiomatic construction as that of the verb gusto)', 1
152. The verb pcsar, when meaning to regret,
LESSON XXXII.
153. How the passive voice is formed,
154. When the passive form is used with the verb ser in the present and import
tenses of the indicative,
155. When the preposition de or par is to be used after passive verbs,
150. Passive voice formed by se, ....
157. When the passive, formed with , is to be preferred, . *
LESSON XXXIII.
158. I&Jlectice verbs, what they are,
CONTENTS. Xlll
BCLI PAGB
159. When are the verbs made reflective ? . . . . . .156
100. When a verb denotes reciprocity, how it is conjugated, ... 156
LESSON XXXIV.
161. Which are the irregular verbs, 161
162. Verbs which, although they undergo slight changes in their radical letters,
are not to be considered as irregular, ..... 161
163,164. Verbs which change i into y, 102
165. How the irregular verbs are divided, .
166. What is to be observed relative to the object of the verb pagar, . . 163
LESSON XXXV.
167. Irregularity of the verb acostar, . ....
168. Imperative mood, when used, ....... 168
169. The s of the first person plural, and the d of the second, suppressed before
nos and os, ....
170. The subjunctive, used when the imperative is negative in English, .
171. The future of the indicative, used for the imperative,
172. Adjectives ending in ous, how rendered into Spanish, .
173. Nouns and adjectives ending in English in ic or ical, how rendered into
Spanish, 1G9
LESSON XXXVI.
174. Irregularity of the verb mover, .... . 173
175. Se, as the Spanish indefinite personal pronoun, .... 173
176. The pronoun se, in its four functions, .... . 174
177. Nouns cndins in English in (y, how rendered into Spanish, . . 174
178. Doler, how used, ..... . 175
LESSON XXXVII.
179. Irregularity of the verb atmder, . 179
180. 181, 182, 183. Subjunctive Mood, when used in Spanish, . .180
134. Present tense of the subjunctive, Igl
185. Perfect tense, ... 181
LESSON XXXVIII.
186. Present Participles, . . jgg
187. Gerunds, . jgg
. The verb ester used with the gerund in Spanish, .... 186
189. When in English the present participle, preceded by a preposition, is used,
how rendered into Spanish, . . . . . . .187
190. The infinitive used as a verbal noun 187
191. The infinitive governed by an other verb, how rendered into English, . 187
LESSON XXXIX.
102. Irregularity of the verb pedir, . . . 192
193. The usual forms of salutations, . . 192
iv CONTENTS.
LESSON XL.
K01J PAa
191 Conducir, its Irregularity, 197
195. Seyun as a preposition and an adverb, . . . . . .198
196. Collective nouns, 193
LESSON XLI.
197. Defective verbs podrir, placer, &c., 203
198. 1'acer, its use, .......... 203
199. Soler, its use, 203
200. Desde, its meaning and use, ....... 203
201. Contra, rendered into English by against, . . . . . .204
202. Sobre, its signification, ........ 201
203. Tras, its meaning, ......... 204
204. The conjunction pues, its use, . . . . . . .204
LESSON XLII.
205. Conjunction*, their classification, 209
206. What is to be observed in relation to the government of conjunctions, . 210
207. Some conjunctions that govern the subjunctive mood, .... 210
208. Compound conjunctions which require the infinitive mood, . . 210
209. Compound conjunctions which require the indicative, .... 210
LESSON XLIII.
210. Imperfect and pluperfect of the subjunctive, ..... 215
211. How to render into Spanish the auxiliaries may, might, can, cmtld, will,
would, and should, ......
212. What the imperfect subjunctive denotes, .....
213. What the pluperfect denotes, 217
ESSON XLIV.
214. Augmentative and diminutive nouns, ...... 22-2
215. Irregular terminations of certain diminutives, ..... 234
216. Diminutives may be formed from adjectives, participles, gerunds, and ad-
verbs, .......... 224
217. Some of the primitive words do not admit all the diminutive terminations, . 224
218. There are derivatives which, although they appear to be augmentatives or
diminutives, are not so, ....... 225
LESSON XLV.
219. The future simple of the subjunctive, ...... 230
220. How the present of the subjunctive may be substituted by the future, . 230
221. The future compound. ......... 230
222. The compound present of the subjunctive may be substituted by the future
compound, ......... 231
223. What is to be observed in order not to misapply the imperfect and pin-
perfect, .......... 231
224. Government of the future simple and compound future of the subjunctive
mood, 231
CONTENTS. XV
LESSON XLVI.
RULS PACK
225-226. Interjections, . . . . . . .. .237
LESSON XLVII.
227. Use of the article, ......... 242
228. The definite article used with common nouns taken in a general sense, . 242
229. The article before the names of the four parts of the globe, names of empires,
kingdoms, &c., ......... 243
230. Nouns of measure, weight, &c., when they require the article, . . 243
231. The article repeated before every noun enumerated, ... 243
232. The definite article used before nouns indicating rank, office, &c., . . 243
233. Used instead of the possessive adjective, ..... 244
234. Used as in English, before nouns, taken hi a particular or definite sense, . 244
LESSON XLVIII.
235. Correspondence of the tenses with each other, . . . . 249
236. When the determined verb is put in the infinitive, . . . .250
237. When the determining verb is ser, or any impersonal verb, and the governing
verb has no subject, ........ 250
238. Put hi the subjunctive when the determining verb has a nominative, . . 251
239. When the governing verb is put in the present or future of the subjunctive, 251
240. Government of the preterit indefinite, and compound future of the indica-
tive, ........... 251
241. The nominative being the same for both verbs and the governing one in the
indicative, in what mood the determining verb is put, ... 252
LESSON XLIX.
242. 243, 244, 245, 246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 251, 252. Derivative nouns, . . 257
LESSON L.
264
253. Compound nouns, .
254. The natural construction,
LESSON LI.
. 269
255, 256. Figurative construction, . '
257. Which of the two constructions is preferable,
LESSON LII.
276
253. Past Participles, ..... 276
259. Agreement of past participles, ' '
260. When a verb has two past participles, one regular and the other irreguu r, ^
how they are used, ...
261. Irregular past participles that may be used with the verb Jiaber,
262. Extraordinary irregularity of the verb morir, .
263. Some past or passive participlea take an active signification, . -^
264. Past participles may sometimes take the place of substantives, .
265. Other tenses in the infinitive mood, .....
XVI CONTENTS.
LESSON LIII.
nuu PAOS
266. Idiomatic expressions, in which the English preposition differs in meaning
from that which most generally constitutes its proper signification, . 284
LESSON LIV.
2C7. Conjunctions in English that are frequently used as substitutes for other
words, how rendered into Spanish, ... . 399
208. Spanish conjunctions used as substitutes for other words, . . 289
. Different uses of the conjunction ', ...... 289
LESSON LV.
269. Some of the principal uses of the conjunction que, . . . .295
LESSON LVI.
270. Epistolary correspondence, ....... 301
LESSON LVII.
271. Observation in regard to verbs that change their meaning according to the
preposition by which they are followed, ..... 310
LESSON LVIII.
272. The verbs to be glad and to be rejoiced, how translated, .... 314
273. The verbs to be sorry and to grieve, how translated, .... 314
274. How the verb caber is used, ........ 314
LESSON LIX.
275. Idioms with the verbs caer, dar, decir, echar, ..... 320
LESSON LX.
276. Idioms with the verbs entrar, Mcer, ir, Uetar, mandar, oler a, saber a, taHr,
seiiir, tardar, and roller, ... .... 320
LESSONS LXI TO LXY.
On the Principal Idioms of the Spanish Language, ." . . . . 329 to 354
General observations on some grammatical and idiomatical peculiarities of the
Spanish language, not hitherto treated of in the Grammar, .... S55
Recapitulation of all the rules of the Grammar, . . . . 365 to 382
Complete list of the conjugations of all the Spanish verbs, . . . 383 to 40$
List of all the irregular verbs, ........ 439,440
VOCABULABT, containing all the Spanish words used in the grammar, . 441 to 470
PRELIMINARY LESSON
ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION.
THE ALPHABET.
THE SPANISH ALPHABET contains twenty-seven letters, ex-
clusive of 1C and TPJ which are used in foreign words only,
and are pronounced as in English. The TF" appears in a very
few historical names, like Wamba, Witiza. The letters are all
of the feminine gender, and their names and pronunciation are
as follows :
A,
a,
ah.
N, n,
aynay.
B,
!>,
lay.
$, fi,
ain-yay.
o,
c,
thay.
O, o,
0.
cn,
cli,
cliay.
P, P,
pay.
D,
a,
day.
Q, q,
Icoo.
E,
c,
ay.
R, r,
air-ray.
F,
f,
ay-fay.
S, 8,
aysay.
G,
ft
hay.
1, t,
tay.
II,
h,
at-chay.
U, 11,
00.
I,
i,
e.
V, v,
vay.
J,
j,
liotali.
X, x,
aykiss.
!>,
1,
a-lay.
Y, y,
c-grce-ay'-gah.
LL,
H,
ail-yay.
Z, Z ,
thay -tali.
M,
m,
aymay.
XVlll PRELIMINARY LESSON.
All the letters are invariable in sound, except c and g, which
have each two sounds, as will he seen in the proper place; and
every letter is pronounced in all positions, except the A, which
is always silent, and the u, which is not sounded in the sylla-
bles gue, gui, and que, qui.
So that, with a few exceptions, the Spanish language is
pronounced exactly as it is written, and does not present those
difficulties met with in the orthography and pronunciation of
most other languages. The system of representing, in each les-
son, the pronunciation of each word by an incorrect orthography
only augments the doubts and labor of the learner, besides in-
creasing unnecessarily the size of the work ; one lesson of an
hour's duration w 7 ith a native Spanish teacher will do more to\s'ard
the acquisition of a pure Castilian pronunciation, than all the
w r orks that could be written on the subject.
As the English vowels differ in sound from those of all
other languages, great care ought to be taken to learn the
true sound of the Spanish vowels ; they are :
a, e, i, o, u.
ah, ay, e, 0, oo.
Y is sometimes a vowel. (See the letter Y.)
A has an invariable sound, as heard in the words art, father ;
as, arte, padre (not varying as in the English words fare, fat,
far, fall, swallow, many, courage, mustard).
E has the sound of a in made ; as, hccho.
I sounds like the first e in even ; as, ingles. (See letter Y.)
O is pronounced like the English o in the word ode ; as, amo.
TJ sounds as the English u in bull; as, bula: it is silent in
the syllables gue, gtd, guerra, except it has a diaeresis marked
over it, agilero. In the syllables que, qui, it is always silent.
SOUNDS OF THE CONSONANTS.
B has the same sound as in English ; but in Castile and
Aragon (where in other respects the Castilian language is most
PRELIMINARY LESSON. xix
purely spoken and pronounced), they do not press the lips
quite so close as the English do, which causes it very frequent-
ly to be confounded with the v, although they are distinct
letters, and should be pronounced as in English.
O, when followed by a, o, ^l, or any consonant, sounds like
k ; before e and /, it sounds like tli in thanks ; as, gracias, lec-
cion, caballero. (See letter Z.}
CH is not a double consonant, but a letter which, although
of a double form, has by itself a particular denomination and
sound ; it is pronounced like ch in chess ; as, chico, chocolate.
Formerly, in words of Hebrew and Greek origin, it had the
sound of 7t, when the vowel following it was marked with the
circumflex accent ; as, archangel, chimica : but this practice is
obsolete, and such words are now written arcangel, qu'miica.
D is pronounced like the English d, except when found be-
tween two vowels or at the end of words, when it sounds
softer than the English d, like th in the article the, but not like
th lisped, as in thin, as Madrid (like the), not Maclrfg (like
thin) ; TJstec? (like the), not Ustez (like thin). This lisped
pronunciation on the d is considered vulgar.
F is always proiounced like the English/, and is now used
instead ofph ; as, Filosofia, Filadelfia, instead of Phtlosophia,
Philadelphia.
G has two distinct sounds : one, before a, o, u, or a conso-
nant, is the same sound as in English go, good', as, gato, gra-
cias : before e and i it has another strong, guttural, aspirated
sound, for which the English has no equivalent, and which
even a very strongly aspirated h, as in the words hot, holy, does
not represent ; as, gente, people ; gesto, gesture ; gigante, giant.
H is never pronounced in the Spanish language ; as, hace,
higo, pronounced as if no such h were there. It is, properly
speaking, only a sign used to mark the etymology of words,
and is now omitted in many words in which it was formerly
used ; as, Cristo, Filosofia, Teatro, Pitdgoras, Filadelfia.
XX PRELIMINARY LESSON.
This letter is always written before tbe words that begin
by ue and ie, and here it has a very soft, almost imperceptible,
aspiration ; as, httevo, egg; hueso, bone; huesped, guest ; 1-.
iron ; hielo, ice : but great care must be taken not to pronounce
it too strong, as the lower classes of certain provinces do, pro-
nouncing juevo, or guevo ; jueso, or gileso, which is considered
vulgar.
J has always an aspirated guttural sound, like that which
the g has before e and /, and is written before the vowels a, o,
?,', instead of the letter ce, which formerly represented the same
aspirated sound ; as, Alejandro, Alexander ; Don Quijote, Doa
Quixote.
L always sounds as in English.
LL is, like the ch, a single letter, although of double form,
which therefore cannot be divided at the end of a line. It lias
a liquid sound, resembling that of the English U in William,
brilliant; as, Guillermo, brillante.
1M, N, and P have the English sound.
N is always pronounced like ni in the English word pinion.
Q is pronounced like the English k before ue and iti, in
which combination alone it is now used ; in all other positions
it has been replaced by c ; as, cuando, cama, comer, quien, querer.
R, .when single, is sounded soft, as in English; a?, qucrido,
oro: and when double, or at the beginning of a word, and
when it comes after Z, n, or s, or in compound words, in which
the second begins by r, it is pronounced with a very strong
rolling sound ; as, reloj, malrotar, enriquecer, Israel, prerogati-
va, maniroto, cariredondo, &c.
& is pronounced like the English s in say ; as, sablo, wise ;
solo, alone ; senor, sir.
T is pronounced as in English.
V has the sound of the English v. (See letter J?.)
PRELIMINARY LESSON. XXI
X has the sound of the x in the English word tax ; as,
exdmen, extrangero. It no longer represents its former guttu-
ral sound, as has been observed. (See letter 7i) Some replace
it by the letter s, when it comes before a consonant, and write
estrangero instead of extrangero. The grammar of the Span-
ish Academy does not authorize this practice.
Y is a consonant letter, but use makes it serve as a
vowel when it stands alone, used as a copulative conjunction
(meaning and] ; it is also used instead of the vowel i, in the
combinations at, ei, ui at the end of a word ; as, verdegay, rey,
ley, convoy, muy.
When used in its proper place, that is to say, as a conso-
nant, it has the same sound in Spanish as in the English words
young, year.
Z has always the sound of th, as heard in thank, bath.
Such syllables only will be noted here as may be subject
to doubt as to the pronunciation and orthography.
ca,
Jsah.
quo,
Tcay.
qui,
l-ee.
CO,
led.
cu,
00.
za,
tliah.
ce,
thay.
ci,
thee.
zo,
tho.
zu,
thoo.
az,
ath.
ez,
aith.
iz,
eeth.
oz,
oth.
uz,
ooth.
gah.
gay-
ghee.
go,
go.
goo.
hah.
hay.
hce.
Jo,
ho.
hoo.
ya, ye. yi. yo.
This sound cannot be properly represented in English.
(See letter T).
cha,
tcJiciJi.
che,
tchay.
ehi,
tehee.
cho,
tcho.
chu,
icAo<2.
XX11
PRELIMINARY LESSON.
lla,
lyaJi.
lie,
lyay.
115,
lyee.
lib,
lyo.
Uu,
lyoo.
Da,
nyah.
fie,
nyai.
fii,
nye.
no,
nyo.
fin,
nyoo.
cua,
Tcwah
cue,
Tcway.
cui,
Tcwee.
cuo,
kwv.
gwah.
gue,
gway.
gui,
gwee.
guo,
gwo.
DIPHTHONGS.
ai,
as in
dabcw's,
dah'-fiah-eess.
You gave.
ay,
"
hay,
ah'~e.
There is.
au,
u
pawsa,
pah'-oo-sa.
Pause.
ei,
((
veis,
vai'-eess.
You see.
ey,
"
ley,
lai'-e.
Law.
ea,
u
Hnea,
U'-nai-a.
Line.
eo,
((
virgineo,
veer-Tie' -nai-o.
Virginal.
eu,
u
dewda,
dai'-oo-da.
Debt.
ia,
u
gracia,
grah' -tJie-a.
Grace.
ie,
((
cMo,
tlie-ai'-lo.
Heaven.
io,
u
precz'0,
prai' -the-o.
Price.
iu,
u
ciwdad,
the-oo-dath'.
City.
oe,
"
h6roe,
ai'-ro-ai.
Hero.
oi,
u
sois,
so'-eess.
You are.
oy,
(C
voy,
vo'-e.
I go.
ua,
u
fragwa,
frah'-gwa.
Forge.
ue,
u
dwefio,
doo-airi-yo.
Owner.
ui,
((
rui&o,
roo-e'-do.
Noise.
v y,
muy,
moo'-e.
Very.
uo,
(C
ardm
ar'-doo-o.
Arduous.
10,1,
ui,
uai,
uay,
uey,
TRIPHTHONGS.
as in -prcciais, prai-tlie-aJi' -eess.
"
vacms,
santigtmzs,
Paraguay,
bwy,
vah-the-ai'-eess. .
san-te-giraJi'-eess.
pah-rali -rjiraJi'-c.
a7i.-rai-re-ffwai'-ccss.
"bwai'-e.
PRELIMINARY LESSON. XX111
^Whenever one of the vowels is accented (generally the i
and ), these combinations do not form diphthongs, because
each vowel belongs then to a separate syllable ; as, kia, varia,
efecttia, &c. And in poetry the diphthongs as well as the
triphthongs may be divided into different syllables by a di-
seresis, when the verse requires an additional syllable, as :
" si rodeo tal vez,
For el Istmo de Siicz,"
ACCENTS.
"Words that end in a consonant are accented on the last
syllable ; as, virtud, virtue ; hablar, to speak ; fusil, gun ;
papel, paper.
Words that end in a vowel are accented on the penultimate ;
as, banco, bench ; mesa, table ; libra, book.
Of course we need not put any written accent on the last
syllable, when it ends in a consonant ; nor on the next to the
last, when it ends in a vowel, because the fact of ending in any
of these letters is a sufficient mark where to lay the stress of
the voice.
The written accent is used only over the words that do not
follow the above two general rules, to show they are excep-
tions ; as, papa, papa ; periddico, newspaper ; lapiz, pencil ;
lunes, Monday ; martes, Tuesday ; miercoles, "Wednesday, *tc.
REMARKS.
Monosyllables having only one signification are never ac-
cented ; as, pan, mal. But monosyllables or any other word
having more than one signification should be accented when
they are more slowly pronounced ; as, mi, me ; mi, my ; tti,
thou ; tu, thy ; el, he ; el, the, &c.
The vowels a, e, 6, ft, when used alone are always accented.
The verb is an exception to what has been stated about the
accent, since many persons of it, in different tenses, have the
stress of the voice on the syllable next to the last, although
they end in a consonant ; as, hablan, they speak ; compraron,
XXIV PRELIMINARY LESS OX.
they bought, &c. ; and although this may be an exception, it
is not customary to place the written accent over them as is
done in the case of other words.
The employment of the written accent in the verbs is now
generally confined to the first and third persons singular, and
first person plural of the perfect indicative, and every person
of the future indicative.
If one or more pronouns of the dative or accusative case be
affixed to an unaccented person of a verb, the syllable on which
the stress falls should be marked with the accent ; as from
busca, btiscalo, buscaselo ; from venda, vendalo, vendaselo.
PUWCTUATIOSf.
The marks arc the same as in English, and are similarly
applied, excepting those of interrogation and exclamation,
which both precede and succeed the sentence; the former it
should be remarked are inverted. Ex., j Como estd V. ?
/ Oh, si V. supiera !
DE TOKITOS'S
SPANISH GRAMMAR,
LESSON I.
REGULAR VERBS. First Conjugation.
Hobl-ox. | To speak.
INDICATIVE PEESEXT.
Yo habl-o.
I speak.
Tu habi-as.
Thou speakest.
El or ella habl-a.
He or she speaks.
Usted (V.) habl-a.
You speak.
Nosotros, or )
Nosotras, f ^bl-amos.
"We speak.
Vosotros, or ) ,
-r 7 t nabl-ais.
Vosotras, J
You speak.
Ellos, or ellas, habl-an.
They speak.
Ustedes (Vds.) habl-an.
You speak.
Si (adverb).
Yes.
No
No, or not.
Seiior.
Sir.
COMPOSITION.
6 Habla V. ?
Si, senor, yo hablo.
4 Hablan Vds. ?
1
Do you speak ?
Yes, sir, I speak.
Do you speak ?
LESSON I.
No, seuor, cilas hablan.
6 Hablais vosotras ?
No, sefior, cllos hablan.
No, senor, ella no habla.
6 Hablas tu ?
No, seuor, el habla.
6 Habla V. ?
Si, senor, hablo.
6 Hablan ellas ?
No, scuor, no hablan.
e Hablamos nosotros ?
Si, seuor, hablamos.
f, Ilablais vosotras ?
Nosotras no hablarnos.
No, sir, they speak.
Do you speak ?
No, sir, they speak.
Does she speak ?
No, sir, she does not speak.
Dost thou speak ?
No, sir, he speaks.
Do you speak ?
Yes, sir, I speak.
Do they speak ?
No, sir, they do not speak.
Do we speak ?
Yes, sir, we speak.
Do you speak ?
We do not speak.
EXPLANATION.
1. REGULAR VERBS. All the verbs of the Spanish language
have their endings, in the infinitive mood, either in ar, er, or
>; hence their classification in three conjugations: 1st, those
ending in ar; 2d, those ending in er; and 3d, in ir\ as, habl-ar,
aprend-er, escrib-ir.
2. ROOTS. The letters before the terminations ar, er, ir, in
the preceding verbs, are habl, aprend, escrib, and are called the
roots.
3. TERMINATIONS. All regular verbs of the first conjugation
vary the endings in their respective tenses, so as to correspond
with those of the verb lidbl-ar\ all those of the second conjuga-
tion correspond to the terminations of aprend-er ; and all those
of the third correspond to escrib-ir.
Consequently, when the student has learned how to conju-
gate one of the regular verbs of each conjugation, lie can con-
jugate all the regular A'erbs of the Spanish language (about
8,000). For this reason we recommend the scholars to devote
their attention, in the first place, to committing to memory the
different moods and tenses of these three model verbs. They
will be found complete at the end of the book.
The terminations of the verbs being different for each per-
son, as well in the plural as in the singular number, the nomina-
tive pronouns are ordinarily dispensed with, and arc only usc-1
LESS ONI. 3
to give emphasis ; except the pronoun Usted, which must
always be expressed. Usted, meaning You, is a contraction
from vuestra merced, Your Honor ; and, being a title, its omis-
sion would be considered impolite.
4. You. In addressing an individual in Spanish, the third
person is used with the pronoun Usted: as, Usted habla, you
speak ; the second person is employed only in speaking to rela-
tives or intimate friends.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Hablan ellas? Si, seflor, ellas hablan.
2. i Hablais vosotros ? No, seiior ; ellos liablan.
3. i Ilablamos nosotras ? No, seiior ; ella habla.
4. i Hablais vosotros ? No, senor ; el habla.
5. g Ilabla ella ? Si, seiior, habla.
G. i Ilabla el? No, seflor, no habla.
7. gHablas tu? Si, seiior, yo hablo.
8. g-Hablais vosotras? Si, seiior, nosotras hablamos.
9. i Hablo yo? Si, sefior, V. habla.
10. i Habla el? No, seiior, no habla.
11. No hablan ellos? Si, senor, ellos liablan.
12. i ITabla V. ? No, sefior, yo no hablo.
13. jNo habla V.? No, senor, yo no hablo.
14. $ No liablan ellas? Si, seiior, hablan.
15. ^ No hablais vosotras? No, sefior, nosotras no hablamos.
EXCERCISE.
1. Do you speak? I speak.
2. Do they speak? Yes, sir, they speak.
3. Dost thou speak ? No, sir, he speaks.
4. Do you speak? No, sir, we do not speak.
5. Dost thou speak ? No, sir, I do not speak.
G. Does he not speak? Yes, sir, he speaks.
Y. Do you not speak ? No, sir, we do not speak.
8. Does she not speak ? No, sir, she does not speak.
9. Do we not speak ? Yes, sir, we speak.
10. Do they (fern.} not speak? No, sir, they (fern.) do not speak.
11. Do we (fern.) not speak? Yes, sir, we (fern.) speak.
12. Do you speak? No, sir, I do not speak; they (fern.) speak.
LESSON II.
LESSON II.
MASCULINE
FEMIXIXE XOfXS.
Sefior (Sr.). Sir, Mr., or Lord.
Caballero. Gentleman, Sir.
Sefiorito. Young gentleman.
Don. (Dn.,orD.). Mr., Esq.
Manuek
Espailol.
Ingles,
Frances.
Aleman.
Emanuel.
Spanish.
English.
French.
German.
SeDora (Sra.). Madam, or Mrs.
" " Lady, or My Lady.
Senorita (Srita). Miss, or young lady.
Dona (Da.) Mrs.
Luisa.
Louisa.
COMPOSITION.
Senorita, f, habla Y. espauol ?
Si, senor, hablo espafiol.
Luisa, ^ hablas francos ?
No, senor, no hablo frances.
,5 Hablan Yds. ingles ?
Hablamos ingles,
j Hablan ellos, 6 ellas, francos ?
SeSora, habla Y. espauol ?
Don Manuel, ^ habla V. aleraan ?
Caballero, ^ habla V. espauol ?
Seuorita Luisa, j habla Y. frances ?
Do you speak Spanish, Miss?
Yes, sir, I speak Spanish.
Louisa, dost thou speak French ?
No, sir, I do not speak French.
Do you speak English ?
We speak English.
Do they speak French ?
Madam, do you speak Spanish ?
Mr. Emanuel, do you speak German ?
Sir, do you speak Spanish ?
Miss Louisa, do you speak French ?
EXPLANATION.
5. SEXOE. This word, used alone, i. e., in the vocative case,
implies inferiority on the part of the speaker, and answers to
the word Lord in English. It is used in addressing God, or
the King ; or by servants when speaking to their masters.
With an equal, the proper term is cabattero, gentleman ; never-
theless, Senor may also be used among equals : in the affirma-
tive, /Si, senor, or in the negative, no, senor, in -which cases it
means sir ; or together with the name of the person ; as, . v
Jicmp, which means Mr. Kemp.
/Senora, Senorita. In addressing ladies, the word Senora,
Madam, and Senorita ^ Young Lady, or Miss, may be used
LESSON II. 5
alone; as, Senora, or Senorita, ^ habla V. espanol? Madam,
or Young Lady, or Miss, do you speak Spanish ?
Sefiorito, like Senor, implies inferiority on the part of the
speaker, for Avhich reason it is seldom used, except by servants.
6. DON, Mr., applies to gentlemen, and Dona, Mrs., to la-
dies. These terms are only used in conjunction with the Christ-
ian names ; as, Don Manuel, Dona Luisa, and, still more re-
spectfully, Senor Don Manuel, Senora Dona Luisa. This
title, conferred, in old times, only upon members of noble
families, is now used in addressing all persons, except those
of very humble station, and is written in abbreviation thus,
Dn., Da.
7. The negative no, is always placed immediately before
the verb.
CONVERSATION 1 AND VERSION.
1. i Habla Y. espanol ? liable espanol.
2. Luisa, j hablas frances? Hablo frances.
3. i Habla Manuel ingles ? Ilabla ingles.
4. Caballero, g habla V. alcinan ? Si, senor, hablo aleman.
5. ^Ilablan Vds. frances? Hablainos frances.
C. i Hablan ellos ingles ? No, senor, no hablan ingles.
7. llablan ellas espanol? No, seflor, no hablan espanol.
8. $ Habla Luisa frances? No, senor, no habla frances; ella habla
espanol.
9. i No habla Manuel aleman ? No, senor, no habla aleman ; 1- habla
ingles.
10. i Habla V. espanol ? No, senor, no hablo espauol.
11. i Ilabla Manuel espanol ? Si, seuor, el habla espanol.
12. Don Manuel, \ habla V. frances? No, senor, no hablo frances.
13. Senora Da. Luisa, i habla V. espanol? No, senor ; hablo ingles.
14. Senorita Da. Luisa, $ habla V. frances? Yo hablo francos.
15. Caballero, $ habla V. aleman? No, senorita, hablo espauol.
EXERCISE.
1. Do they speak French? They speak French.
2. Do you speak English ? We speak English.
3. Do they speak Spanish ? No, madam, they do not speak Spanish.
4. Sir, do you speak German ? Yes, madam, I speak German.
5. Does Emanuel speak French? No, sir; he speaks English.
G LESSON III.
6. Do you speak Spanish? No, sir, I do not speak Spanish.
7. Does uot Louisa speak German? No, sir, she does not speak Ger-
man; she speaks French.
8. Emanuel, dost thou speak English ? I speak English.
9. Does Louisa speak Spanish ? Yes, sir, she speaks Spanish.
10. Do you speak French? No, sir, I speak English.
11. Sir, do you speak French? No, sir.
12. Miss Louisa, do you speak Spanish ? Yes, madam.
13. (Don) Emanuel, do you speak English? Yes, sir, I speak Eng-
lish.
14. Do TVO speak Spanish? "We do not speak Spanish; we speak
French.
LESSON III.
JEstudi-ar.
Estudi-o.
Estudi-as.
Estudi-a.
Estudi-amos.
Estudi-ais.
Estudi-an.
El (masc. sing.}.
Yore.
Que (interrogative pronoun).
Pero, sino.
Bien (adterV).
Mai "
ADJECTIVES.
Espauol.
Ingles.
Frances.
Aleman.
Americano.
MASCULINE KOUXS.
Alejandro. Alexander.
To study.
I study.
Thou studiest.
He studies.
We study.
You study.
They study.
The.
And.
What or -which.
But.
Well.
Badly.
Spaniard.
Englishman.
Frenchman.
German.
American.
FKMIXIXE STOUXS.
Margarita. Margaret.
LESSON III.
COMPOSITION.
<j Estudia V. cspauol ?
No, sefior, cl Frances estudia espafiol ;
pero yo cstudio ingles.
f, Quo estudia el Americano ?
Estudia espafiol y francos.
Alejandro, f, estudias francos y aleman ?
No, sefior, estudio espafiol 6 ingles.
Manuel no estudia sino francos.
(, Que hablan ellos sino espafiol ?
<j Ilabla bien ingles el Espafiol ?
No, sefior, 61 habla el ingles mal, pero
habla bien el espaiiol.
Do you study Spanish ?
Xo, sir, the Frenchman studies Spanish ;
but I study English.
What does the American study ?
lie studies Spanish and French.
Alexander, do you study French and
German ?
No, sir, I study Spanish and English.
Emanucl studies but (only) French.
What do they speak but Spanish ?
Docs the Spaniard speak English well ?
No, sir, he speaks English badly, but
speaks Spanish well.
EXPLANATION.
8. Y. The conjunction y is changed into 'e when the fol-
lowing word begins with i or hi; as, espafiol e ingles, Spanish
and English ; algodon 'e kilo, cotton and thread.
9. QUE, interrogative pronoun, is written with an accent,
to distinguish it from que, relative pronoun, or conjunction.
10. Snsro. When we translate but into Spanish, we must
first ascertain its meaning ; because this conjunction is used in
English to express many very different things. In Spanish it
is translated sino, when it is used in antithesis, that is, when it
means except; and also after an interrogation, or a negation.
The verb is not repeated with this conjunction; as, El no habla
sino ingles. Pie speaks but (only) English. Que habla sino
espaiiol ? What (else) does he speak but Spanish ?
11. PERO is used when it is not preceded by a negative,
and the verb is repeated ; as, hallo espafiol, pero no hablo
frances. I speak Spanish, but do not speak French.
N. B. We will see hereafter that but, according to its dif-
ferent meanings in English, must be translated by different
words in Spanish.
12. We have again introduced the words cspanol, ingles,
frances, and aleman into this lesson, because, while they were
given before as substantives, they are now employed as adjec-
tives. The pupil will observe that, in Spanish, as in English,
some words are, at different times, different parts of speech ; as,
.8 LESSON III.
El Espaiiol habla lien frances. The Spaniard speaks French
well. Here the word Espanol is used as an adjective,
meaning Spaniard \ and the word frances as a substantive,
meaning the French language; bien is employed as an ad-
verb, meaning well, and it will appear hereafter as a substan-
tive, meaning good. Consequently, the learner, before trans-
lating a word, must first ascertain the part of speech to which
it belongs.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Habla espafiol Margarita? Margarita no liabla cspaiiol, pero
habla ingles.
2. i Habla V. espaiiol ? No, sefior, hablo francos y aleman.
3. Alejandro, ^hablas ing!6s? Si, sefior, hablo ingles.
4. i Ilablan Yds. espafiol ? Hablamos espaiiol 6 ingles.
5. i Que liablan ellos ? Ilablan aleman.
G. Caballero, j cstudia V. espaiiol ? Si, senor, cstudio espafiol e in-
gles.
V. i Que estudia el Aleman ? Estudia espafiol.
8. i Estudian Yds. espafiol ? Estudiamos frances y alemau.
9. i liabla bien Luisa el ingles? Habla bien espafiol 6 intiliV-.
10. ^liabla bien Manuel el alemau? No, sefior, liabla mal el aleman,
pero habla bien el frances.
11. i Habla Men ingles el Americano ? liabla bien ingles, pero habla
mal el espafiol.
12. Sefiora, g estudia V. frances? No, sefior, estudio espafiol.
13. i Quo estudia Alejandro? El no estudia sino frances.
14. i Qu6 hablan ellos sino espafiol ? Ellos liablan frances.
EXERCISE.
1. Do yon study German? We study French and Spanish.
2. Does Alexander speak Spanish ? Alexander does not speak Span-
ish, but he speaks English.
3. Margaret, do you speak French? No, sir, I speak German and
Spanish.
4. What do they speak ? They speak Spanish and German, but do
not speak French.
5. Do you speak Spanish? No, sir, I do not speak Spanish, but I
speak English.
G. Does Louisa speak French well? She speaks French badly, but
speaks German well.
LESSON IV.
9
7. What do you study? We study Spanish, and Alexander studies
Frcnci'i.
8. What does the German study? He studies Spanish.
9. Does ho study well ? No, madam, he studies badly.
10. Do you speak Spanish, madam? No, sir, I do not speak Spanish,
but I speak English and German.
11. Does the Frenchman speak English well? No, madam, he speaks
English badly, hut the Spaniard speaks English well.
12. What docs the German study ? He studies English, and the Eng-
lishman studies German.
13. What does Alexander study? He studies French only.
14. What do they speak but Spanish ? )
What else do they speak but Spanish? \
s P cak French '
LESSO'N IV.
Compr-ar.
Compr-o.
Compr-as.
Compr-a.
Compr-amos.
Compr-ais.
Oompr-an.
Busc-ar.
A.
De.
Al.
Del.
Un (masc* sing.).
Libro. Book.
Cuaderno. Copy-book.
Papel. Paper.
Caballo. Horse.
Tintero. Inkstand.
<; Quo compra V. ?
Compro un libro.
To buy.
I buy.
Thou buyest.'
He buys.
We buy.
You buy.
They buy.
To look for, to seek.
To.
Of, or from.
To the.
Of the, or from the.
A, or an.
Madcra. Wood;
COMPOSITION.
What do you buy ?
I buy a book.
10 LESSON IV.
f, Coinpran Vds. papcl ?
(, No, senor, no compramos papcl,
compramos un cuadcrno.
Busco al Americano.
El busca el libro.
El caballo del Frances.
El tintero de madera.
Do you buy paper ?
No, sir, we do not buy paper, we buy
a copy-book.
I look for the American.
He looks for the book.
The Frenchman's horse.
The wooden inkstand.
EXPLANATION.
13. A. The preposition d, to. Active verbs govern their
objectives with the aid of the preposition a, if that objective be
a person ; as, JBusco al Americano, I look for the American ;
J3usco el papel, I look for the paper.
14. DE. The preposition de, of, or from, is used to ex-
press possession, being always placed before the possessor ; as,
El caballo del Frances: The Frenchman's horse. It is also
used to denote the material of which any thing consists, or is
made ; as, El tintero de madera, The wooden inkstand.
15. EL. The article el, the, is used to determine a noun
masculine singular ; as, el libro, the book.
N. B. When the article el comes after the preposition d
(to), or de (of, or from), the e is suppressed, and the two words
compounded into one ; thus, al, del, instead of d el, de el.
16. UN. The indefinite pronoun un is used before mascu-
line nouns ; as, un ingles, an Englishman ; un caballo, a horse.
N. B. Uho is only used as a numeral adjective.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Que compra el Frances? Compra el caballo del Ingle's.
2. $Qu6 comprais vosotras? Compramos un cuaderno.
3. i Qu6 compra Y. ? Compro un libro.
4. "jCompran Vds. un cuaderno? No, seuor, compramos un tintero
de madera.
5. j Qu6 buscas tu ? Busco un libro espafiol.
6. i Qu6 buscais vosotros ? Xosotros buscamos on tintero.
7. i Qu6 buscan ellas ? Buscan el papel.
8. Alejandro, gbuscas el papel? Xo, sefior, busco el cuaderno.
9. gEstmlia Margarita ingles? No, sefior, cstndia trances.
LESSOX I V. 11
10. g Quo estudia el Americano ? Estudia espafiol.
11. ^Estudian Vds. frances? No, seuor, estudiamoa ingles.
12. gQue estudia clla? Estudia aleman.
13. i Que compra Y. ? Corapro el caballo del EspaQol.
14. i Que compran ellos ? Compran tin tintcro de madera.
15. gBuscais vosotros al Aleman? No, sefior, buscamos al Frances.
10. ^Hablais vosotros aleman? Si, senor, hablamos aleman.
17. ^Hablan ellas espaflol? No, sefior, hablan frauces.
18. $ Que estudia V. ? Estudio ingles y espafiol.
19. Compra ella un libro? Si, seuor, compra nn libro.
20. i Busca el al Frances ? Xo, seuor, busca al Aleman.
21. i Que habla el Americano ? Habla espafiol.
22. Manuel i que estudias tii? Estudio aleman.
23. i Que comprau ellos ? Compran un caballo.
24. i Que buscan Vds. ? Buscamos el libro espafiol.
EXERCISE.
1. "What do they look for? They look for an inkstand.
2. What docs she look for? She looks for a book.
3. Do you look for a copy-book? Yes. sir, we (fern.) look Ibr a
copy-book.
4. Do they (fern.) buy a v.'oodcn inkstand? Yes, sir, they buy a
wooden inkstand.
5. "What do you buy ? "We buy the Frenchman's horse.
G. Do you buy paper? No, sir, I buy a book.
7. Do you buy a copy-book ? Yes, sir, I buy a copy-book.
8. "What does the Frenchman study? He studies German.
9. Do you study Spanish ? No, sir, I study French.
10. "What does she study ? She studies English.
11. "What do they (fern.} study? They study Spanish.
12. Do you speak French? Yes, sir, I speak French.
13. Does she speak English ? No, sir, she speaks German.
14. Do you speak German? No, sir, we (fern.) speak English.
15. Do you look for the Frenchman? Yes, sir, I look for the French-
man.
16. Do you look for paper? No, sir, I look for a copy-book.
17. "What do they look for? They look for a book.
18. Do you look for the German? Yes, sir, we (fcm.) look for the
German.
19. Do you speak French? Yes, sir, I speak French.
20. "What does Margaret speak? She speaks English.
12
LESSON V.
21. What do they buy ? They buy a wooden inkstand.
22. "What dost thou look for? I look for a horse.
23. "What do you study? We (fern.} study Spanish.
24. What do you speak ? I speak English.
LESSON V.
Necesitar.
Necesit-o.
Necesit-as.
Necesit-a.
To need, or to bo in want of.
I need.
Thou needest.
lie needs.
Necesit-amos.
N"ecesit-ais.
Neccsit-an.
Mi.
Su.
Su
de V., or
El () de V.
We need.
You need.
They need.
My.
His, her, its, their.
Your.
El papa.
El abogado.
El comerciante.
El lacre.
El polio.
El algodon.
El jabon.
El panuelo.
El zapatero.
The papa.
The lawyer.
The merchant.
The sealing-wax.
The chicken.
The cotton.
The soap.
The handkerchief.
The shoemaker.
COMPO
La mama.
La pluma.
La tinta.
La gramatica.
La gallina.
La seda.
La lavandera.
La camisa.
3ITIOK
The mamma.
The pen.
The ink.
The grammar.
The hen.
The silk.
The washerwoman.
The shirt.
I Nccesita el abogado la pluina ?
Si, sefior, nccesita la pluina y cl tintero.
j Quo nccesita comprar la lavandera ?
Necesita comprar jabon.
Necesita cl comerciante mi algodon?
Docs the lawyer want the pen ?
Yes, sir, he wants the pen and the ink-
stand.
What does the washerwoman want to
buy?
She wants to buy soap.
Does the merchant want my cotton ?
LESSON V. 13
Nccesita comprar el algodon de V. y
la seda del Frances.
f, Xecesita V. su panuelo de algodon ?
No, sefiora, necesito su panuelo de seda
deV.
i Que necesitan Vds. ?
Necesitamos un polio y una gallina.
He wants to buy your cotton, and the
Frenchman's silk.
Do you want your cotton handkerchief ?
No, madam, I want your silk handker-
chief.
What do you want ?
We want a chicken and a hen.
EXPLANATION.
1 7. GENDER. In Spanish all nouns are either masculine or
feminine; the neuter gender is only applied to those things so
indefinitely used that their gender cannot be discovered.
The gender of nouns may be ascertained either by their
signification or their termination.
Nouns which signify males, or which denote dignities or
professions, &c., applicable to men, are masculine; and those
which signify females, or professions, &c., applicable to women,
are feminine, without regard to their terminations: so that,
hombre, man; caballero, gentleman; polio, chicken; zapatero,
shoemaker; abogado, lawyer, are masculine; and mujer, wo-
man ; senora, lady ; gallina, hen ; lavanclera, washerwoman,
are feminine.
Nounds ending in a, d, or ion, are generally feminine, and
those ending in other letters are masculine ; as,
Papel. Paper.
Tintero. Inkstand.
Billete. Billet.
Leccion. Lesson.
Pluma. Pen.
Ciudad. City.
N. B. Una (indefinite article] is used before feminine nouns.
To facilitate the pupils in the distinction of gender, the left-
hand side, in the vocabulary, is reserved for masculine, the
right for feminine nouns.
18. When your is preceded by you, it is sometimes trans-
lated by Su ; otherwise, it is generally rendered by el de V.,
or su ^de V. ; as,
V. neccsita su carta.
g Que nccesita el papa de Y. ?
KM llbro dc V.
You need your letter.
What does your father need ?
Tie needs your book.
14 LESSON V.
CONVERSATION AXD VERSION.
1. $ Necesita V. mi gramatica? No, sefior, no necesito su gramatica
deV.
2. i Necesita clla el pafiuelo de seda ? Si, sefior, ella neccsita el pafiuelo
de seda.
3. i Necesita V. comprar un libro ? Necesito comprar un cuaderno.
4. i Necesitan ellas el lacre ? No, sefior, necesitan el pafiuelo de al-
godon.
5. i Que necesita comprar el abogado ? Necesita comprar una pluma.
G. i Qu6 necesita comprar la lavandera ? Necesita comprar jabon.
V. i Busca V. su pafiuelo ? Si, sefior, busco mi pafiuelo.
8. i Busca V. el cuaderno fle Manuel ? No, sefior, busco el cuaderno
deY.
9. i Habla V. bien el aleman ? No, sefiorita, hablo mal el aleman.
10. $Estudian Yds. frances? No, sefior, estudiamos espafiol.
11. i Compra V. un caballo ingles? Si, sefior, compro un caballo
inglds.
12. $Que compran ellos? Compran una pluma y tinta.
13. g Que comprais vosotras? Nosotras compramos un pafiuelo de
seda.
14. i Que compra la lavandera ? Compra jabon.
15. i Busca V. a mi abogado ? Si, sefior, busco al abogado de Y.
16. i Compra la lavandera un polio ? Compra una gallina.
IT. i Compra jabon el comerciante ? No, sefior, el comerciante com-
pra algodon.
18. i Buscan ellas el pafiuelo de Y. ? Buscan el pafiuelo de Y.
19. i Necesita Y. hablar al abogado ? Si, sefiora, necesito hablar al
abogado.
20. i Necesita Y. comprar un libro ? No, sefior, necesito comprar una
pluma y papel.
21. i Necesita Y. estudiar ingles ? Si, sefior, necesito cstudiar ingles.
22. i Qu6 necesitais vosotras ? Necesitamos comprar lacre.
23. g Necesita Y. hablar al Frances? No, sefior, necesito hablar al
Aleman.
24. j Qud necesita Y. ? Necesito un pafinelo de algodon.
EXERCISE.
1. "What do you need? I need a book and paper.
2. "What does she need ? She needs your handkerchief.
3. Do you need a horse ? Yes, sir, I need an English horse.
4. "What do you need? I need soap.
LESSON VI.
15
5. Docs the American need the Spanish, book ? Yes, sir, he needs the
Spanish book.
6. Do they need a lawyer ? Yes, sir, they need a lawyer.
V. Do you buy a silk handkerchief? No, sir, we (fern.) buy a cot-
ton handkerchief.
8. Do you look for the Frenchman's horse ? No, sir, I look for tho
Englishman's horse.
9. Dost thou study German ? No, sir, I study English.
10. "What docs the merchant buy? He buys cotton.
11. "What does the washerwoman buy ? She buys a hen and a chicken.
12. Does the lawyer buy a book ? No, sir, he buys paper.
13. Do they (fern.) speak well ? No, sir, they speak badly.
14. Do you speak French, sir ? No, sir, I speak English.
15. Do you study much (mucho) ? No, sir, we study very little (poco).
16. Do you study fast (aprisd) ? No, sir, I study slowly (despacio).
17. Do you buy cotton from the merchant? No, sir, I buy silk from
your brother (hermano).
18. What does your papa need? He needs the lawyer's book.^
19. "What are they looking for ? They are looking for paper.
20. Do you need a copy-book ? No, sir, I need a book.
21. Do you study Spanish ? Yes, madam, I study Spanish.
22. Do you need paper and pen ? Yes, sir, I need paper and pen.
23. "What do they need ? They need a silk handkerchief.
24. What do you need ? I need an English horse.
LESSON VI.
Aprend-Qv.
Aprend-o.
Aprend-es.
Aprend-e.
Aprend-emos.
Aprend-eis.
Aprend-cn.
To learn.
I learn.
Thou learnest.
He learns.
"We learn.
You learn.
They learn.
Vender.
To sell.
LESSON VI.
Muy.
Mucho.
Poco.
Aprisa.
Despacio.
Estudioso.
Holgazan.
Hombre.
Mucliacho.
Padre.
Ilijo.
Ilermano.
Man.
Boy.
Father.
Son.
Brother.
Very.
Much, a great deal.
Little.
Quickly.
Slowly.
Studious.
Idle.
"Woman.
Girl.
Mother.
Daughter.
Sister.
Mujer.
Muchacha.
Madrc.
Ilija.
Herinana.
COMPOSITION.
Aprcnde muy aprisa cl mucliacho ?
El mucliacho estudioso aprende muy
aprisa; pcro el muchacho holgazan
aprende muy despacio.
<: Aprenden ingles su padre y su her-
mano de V. ?
Si, senor, y mi madre y mi hermana
aprenden frances.
6 Apreude mucho la muchacha ?
No, seuor, aprende poco.
(, Aprenden aprisa su hijo y su hija
deV.?
No, seSor, aprenden despacio.
Does the boy learn very fast ?
The studious boy learns very fast ; but
the idle one learns very slowly.
Do your father and brother learn Eng-
lish?
Yes, sir, and my mother and sister
learn French.
Does the girl learn much ?
No, sir, she learns little.
Do your son and daughter learn fast ?
No, sir, they learn slowly.
EXPLANATION.
19. THE TERMINATION of the first person in the present in-
dicative is always o in all the verbs of the Spanish language,
to whatever conjugation they may belong, except six irregular
^erbs, as we shall see in future ; so that the only difference be-
tween the termination of the second and first conjugations is
the changing the a into e in the second and third persons
singular, and in all the plural.
20. MUY is generally translated by very or very much ; as
muy bien, very well ; muy bueno, very good, &c. ; but it can
LESSON VI. 17
never qualify a verb nor stand alone in discourse ; as, Does
he speak very well ? Yes, very. ^ Hdbla el muy bien ? Si,
mucho.
21. Many masculine nouns ending in o, change this letter
into a for the feminine ; as.
Hermano. Brother.
Hijo. SOD.
Muchacho. Boy.
Hermana. Sister.
Hija. Daughter.
Muchacha. Girl.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Aprende V. bien elfrances? No, sefior, aprendo muy mal cl
francos.
2. i Aprcnden cllas aprisa ? No, sefior, aprenden despacio.
3. i Aprende mucho el muckacho holgazan ? No, sefior, aprcnde muy
poco.
4. g Aprendeis vosotros aprisa? Si, sefior, aprisa y bien.
5. g Que vende el hermano de su padre de V. ? Vende algodon.
6. i Venden ellas papel ? No, sefior, venden plumas y lacre.
7. i Que vende Margarita ? Yende una gallina.
8. g Vende lacre el comerciante ? No, sefior, vende papel.
9. i Necesita V. el pafiuelo de su hermana ? No, sefior, necesito el
pafiuelo de su hija de V.
10. ^ Busca su mania de V. el pafiuelo de seda? No, sefior, busca cl
pafiuelo de algodon.
11. g Que necesita su hija de V.? Necesita hablar al hermano de V.
12. g Necesita la muchacha comprar papel ? No, sefiora, necesita com-
prar un cuaderno.
13. ^Habla V. del Frances? No, sefiorita, hablo del Aleman.
14. Que compra su padre de V.? Compra cl caballo del hijo del
abogado.
15. i Que busca V. ? Busco un libro y una pluma.
16. i Que busca la muchacha? Busca el jabon de la hermana de V.
17. Aprende mucho el muchacho estudioso? Si, seiior, aprendo
mucho.
18. Aprende V. su leccion de frances? No, sefior, aprendo mi lee-,
cion de aleman.
19. jHabla bien Don Manuel el espafiol? Si, sefior, habla muy bien
cl espafiol.
20. gEstudia Y. gramutica inglesa? No, sefior, estudio gramatica
franecsa.
21. $ Compra Y. un tintero y papel? No compro sino un tintero.
18 LESSON VI.
22. i Busca V. a mi padre ? Si, sefiorita, busco ii su padre de V.
23. ^Necesita "V. comprar un tintero? No, sefiora, necesito liablar a
mi hermana.
24. ^Necesitamos nosotras aprender espattol? Si, sefior, necesitamos
mucho aprender espafiol.
EXERCISE.
1. Does your sister learn English ? Yes, sir, she learns English.
2. What does your brother learn ? My brother learns Spanish.
3. Do you learn quickly? No, sir, we learn very slowly.
4. Does the studious boy learn well ? Yes, sir, he learns very well.
5. "What does your brother sell ? He sells cotton and silk.
6. Do you sell paper ? No, sir, I sell sealing wax and ink.
7. Do they (fern.) need a French book ? No, sir, they need a copy-
book, a pen, and ink.
8. Do you need the English grammar ? No, sir, I need the Spanish
grammar.
9. Do you want to speak to my father ? Yes, sir, I want to speak to
your father.
10. Do you want to speak to my sister's son ? No, sir, I want to
speak to the Frenchman.
11. Does he want to buy a horse ? Yes, sir, he wants to buy a horse.
12. Do you need my book ? No, madam, I need your wooden ink-
stand.
13. Do you look for the merchant ? No, sir, I look for your father.
14. Do they look for papa? No, sir, they look for the lawyer.
15. Do you buy a book ? No, sir, we buy a copy-book and paper.
16. Do they study English? Yes, sir, they study English.
17. Do you study German, sir ? No, I study Spanish, madam.
18. Do you speak English well ? No, sir, I speak English badly.
19. Does your sister speak French very well? No, sir, she speaks
very little French.
20. TVhat does your father speak ? He speaks but (only) English.
21. Does he not speak German ? No, sir, he does not speak German.
22. Does your daughter speak to your sister ? Yes, sir, she speaks to
my sister.
23. Do you learn very quickly ? Yes, sir, I learn very quickly.
24. Do you sell your book ? No, sir, I sell my paper.
LESSON VII.
LESSON VII.
Le-cr.
Le-o.
Le-es.
Le-e.
Le-emos.
Le-eis.
Le-en.
Comer.
Bebcr.
MASCULINE ADJECTIVES.
Bueno. Good.
Hermoso. Handsome.
Feo. Ugly.
Pequeflo. Little or small.
Grande (m. &/.). Large.
Espanol. Spanish, also Spaniard.
Americano. American.
To read.
I read.
Thou readest.
He reads.
We read.
You read.
They read.
To eat, to dine.
To drink.
FEMININE ADJECTIVES.
Bucna.
Hermosa.
Fea.
Pequefla.
Good.
Handsome.
Ugly.
Little or small.
Espafiola. Spanish.
Americana. American.
Pan.
Bread.
Carne.
Meat.
Pescado.
Fish.
Leche.
Milk.
Queso.
Vino.
Cheese.
Wine.
Agua.
Cerveza.
Water.
Beer.
Billetc.
Billet or note.
Carta.
Letter.
COMPOSITION.
(, Lee V. un billcte ?
No, sefior, leo una carta.
(, Quo come el Espanol ?
Come bueii pescado, pero come mala
carne.
(, Beben Vds. vino bueno ?
Bebemos buen vino y bucna ccrvcza.
(, Quo compra el Americano ?
Compra un caballo pequeflo.
i Habla V. al gran hombre ?
No, sefior, hablo al hombre grande.
<j Quo vende la Francesa ?
Vende hermosa scda.
Do you read a note ?
No, sir, I read a letter.
What does the Spaniard eat ?
He cats good fish, but bad meat.
Do you drink good wine ?
We drink good wine and good beer.
What does the American buy ?
He buys a small horse.
Do you speak to the great man ?
No, sir, I speak to the large man.
What does the French woman sell ?
She sells handsome silk.
20 LESSON VII.
EXPLANATION.
22. ADJECTIVES terminating in o, an, or on, form their
feminine termination in a. ' Those terminating otherwise are
common to both genders ; as,
El muchacho holgazan.
La muchacha holgazana.
El hombre comilon.
La mujer comilona.
El hombre feliz.
La mujer feliz.
La gallina buena.
The idle boy.
The idle girl.
The gluttonous man.
The gluttonous woman.
The happy man.
The happy woman.
The good hen.
Adjectives signifying nationality, and ending in a conso-
nant, take an a to form their feminine terminations ; as,
Espafiol.
Espauola.
Libro ingles.
Gramatica inirlesa.
Spaniard.
Spanish.
English book.
English grammar.
Those ending in o change this letter into a ; as,
Americano.
Americana.
American.
American.
Adjectives are generally placed after their nouns; but in
poetry, or in an elevated style, and even in conversation, AVC
place many before the noun. Reading and practice will form
the ear of the scholar so as to use them properly.
Adjectives used metaphorically, or in a signification differ-
ent from their proper one, arc always placed before ; as,
I7n gran caballo. A great horse.
Some adjectives lose their last letter, or syllable, when pre-
fixed to the singular masculine noun ; as,
M al muchacho. Bad boy.
Buen libro.
Gran caballo.
Good book.
Great horse, &c.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Lee Y. tm buen libro? Si, sefior, leo un libro bueno.
2. ^Leemos nosotros bien el ingles ? Xo, sefior, leemos mal el ingle-::,
pcro leeraos bien el espaftol.
3. i Bebc V. vino ? Xo, scfior, yo btbo agua.
LESSON VII. 21
4. i Quo beben ellos ? Beben cerveza.
5. i Comeis vosotros queso y pan ? No, sefior, comemos pcscado.
G. i Que coinen los Inglescs ? Los Ingleses comen buena carno.
V. I Que bebe el Espafiol ? Bebe buen vino y cerveza mala.
8. 4 Que lee la Americana ? Lee un libro de mi hermana.
9. i Qu6 estudia el hijo pequefio de V. ? Estudia gramatica.
10. i Que neccsita la mucliacha hermosa ? Necesita un pequefio paQuelo
de seda.
11. g Necesita V. un caballo grande? No, sefior, yo no necesito un
caballo graude, sino un gran caballo.
12. i Que estudia la Espafiola ? Estudia ingles.
13. i Estudia V. la gramatica francesa? No, sefior, estudio la grama-
tica inglesa.
14. g Come pan la Inglesa ? Si, sefior, come pan y carne.
15. i Que bebeu Vds. ? Bebemos leche.
1C. Lee V. un libro ingles? No, sefior, leo un libro franccs.
17. i Que lee la Americana ? Lee su leccion.
IS. i Que vende la Inglesa ? Vende un pafiuelo.
19. ^Compra V. algodon al comerciante americano? Si, sefior, corn-
pro algodon al comerciante americano.
20. i Necesita la Francesa un pafiuelo grande ? No, sefior, necesita un
pafiuelo hermoso.
21. i Que busca el muchacho ? Busca a sn hermana.
22. i Que compra V. ? Compro un pafiuelo feo, pero bueno.
2:>. i Necesita V. seda ? No, sefior, necesito algodon.
24. i Que lee V. ? Leo el libro de mi padre.
25. i Que comeis vosotros ? Comemos pan y pescado.
26. i Que bebe el Aleman ? Bebe vino y cerveza.
EXERCISE.
1. "\Yhat do you read ? I read a great book.
2. Do you read English -well ? Yes, sir, I read English very well.
3. Does the German drink wine ? No, sir, he drinks beer.
4. "What do they (fern.} drink ? They drink water.
5. Do you eat meat ? No, sir, I eat fish.
G. "What does the Englishman eat ? He eats bread and meat.
V. "What does your daughter buy? She buys a silk handkerchief
from the American woman.
8. Does the studious boy buy a book ? Yes, sir, he buys a French
grammar.
9. Does the handsome American woman buy a large book ? No, sir,
she buys a little book.
22
LESSON VIII.
10. Docs your mamma want a large handkerchief? No, sir, she Brants
a handsome handkerchief.
11. Do you need your book ? No, sir, I do not need my book.
12. Do they need a Spanish grammar? Yes, sir, they need a Spanish
grammar.
13. Does the woman sell bread? Yes, sir, she sells bread and fish.
14. What do you read ? I read my letter.
15. "What does your brother read ? He reads a note.
1C. Does the girl sell soap ? No, sir, she sells milk.
17. Does the lazy boy learn well? No, sir, he learns badly.
18. Do you learn much ? No, sir, I learn little.
19. Do you read the book? No, sir, I read the letter.
20. Do you buy cheese ? Yes, sir, I buy cheese.
21. Do they buy bread ? No, sir, they buy meat and beer.
22. Do you need a handkerchief? No, sir, I need soap.
23. Do you read your father's letter? No, sir, I read my brother's letter.
24. Does your father buy an English grammar ? No, sir, he buys a
French book.
25. Does your brother read my note ? No, sir, he reads my sister's letter.
LESSON VIII.
Escrib-ir.
Escrib-o.
Escrib-es.
Escrib-e.
Escrib-imos.
Escrib-is.
Escrib-en.
Recibir.
En.
Ni.
El (mass. sing.).
La (fern. sing.}.
Lo (neuter).
Los (masc. plural).
Las (fern, plural).
THIRD CONJUGATION'. .
To write.
I write.
Thou writest.
lie writes.
We write.
You write.
They write.
To receive.
In, into, or at.
No, neither, nor.
The.
LESSON VIII.
23
ADJECTIVES.
Mucho.
Muchos.
Much.
Many.
Poco.
Pocos.
SUBSTANTIVES.
Little.
Few.
Periouico.
Newspaper.
Lcccion.
Lesson.
Periodicos.
Newspapers.
Lecciones.
Lessons.
Ejercicio.
Exercise.
Ley.
Law.
Ejercicios.
Exercises.
Leyes.
Laws.
Zapfttero.
Shoemaker.
Plata.
Silver.
Sombrerero.
Hatter.
Semana.
Week.
Semanas.
Weeks.
COMPOSITION.
i Escribe V. las leccioacs 6 los ejerci-
cios ?
No escribo ni las lecciones ni los ejerci-
cios.
(, E.scriben las seuoritas muchos billetes ?
Ellas cscribcn muchos.
(, Eecibo el comerciante plata u oro ?
El rccibe oro y pluta.
f, Escribe V. la carta en ingles ?
Si, souor, cscribo la carta en ingles.
Do you write the lessons or the exer-
cises ?
I write neither the lessons nor the ex-
ercises.
Do the young ladies write many notes ?
They write many.
Docs the merchant receive silver or
gold?
He receives gold and silver.
Do you write the letter in English ?
Yes, sir, I write the letter hi English.
EXPLANATION.
23. THE ENDINGS of the third conjugation and those of the
second are the same, except in the first and second persons of
the plural ; in which the e of the second conjugation is changed
into i in the third, as the learner must have observed.
24. THE CONJUNCTION 6 is changed into ti when the fol-
lowing word begins with 6 or ho ; as,
Plata u oro. | Silver or gold.
25. Ni. Neither and nor are rendered by ni ; as,
El no necesita ni la carne ni el pescado. | He wants neither the meat nor the fish.
26. THE PLUEAL OF NOUNS is formed by adding an s to
.those terminating in a vowel not accented ; as,
Ejcivieio. Exercise. | Ejercicios. Exercises.
24 LESSON" VIII.
And adding es
1st. To those ending in an accented vowel; as,
Aleli. Gilliflower. | Alelies. Gilliflowers.
2d. To those ending in a consonant ; as,
Lection. Lesson. | Lecciones. Lessons.
3d. To those ending in y ; as,
Ley. Law. | Leyes. Laws.
27. AN ADJECTIVE agrees with its noun in gender, number
and case, and forms the plural according to the rules laid down
for nouns ; as,
Buen hombre.
Buenos hombres.
Buena mujer.
Buenas mujeres.
Good man.
Good men.
Good woman.
Good women.
28. THE ARTICLE must agree also with the noun to which it
refers, in number, gender and case ; as,
El libro.
Los libros.
La pluma.
Las plumas.
Lo bueno.
The book.
The books.
The pen.
The pens.
What is good.
Feminine nouns beginning with d accented, take the mascu-
line article el in the singular number, instead of the feminine
la, in order to avoid the disagreeable meeting of two a's ; as,
El alma.
El agua.
El alba.
El hambre.
The soul.
The water.
The dawn of day.
The hunger, &c.
29. THE NEUTER ARTICLE lo has no plural number, and is
placed only before adjectives used as substantives, in an abso-
lute indeterminate case ; as,
Lo bueno.
Lo malo.
What is good.
What is bad.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Escribe Y. a sn padre? No, seilor, escribo a mi hermano.
2. i Qne escribe V. ? Escribo una carta a la mnchaclia.
LESSON VIII. 25
3. $ Escribe V. muchos billetes? No, sofior, oscribo muy pocos.
4. gEscriben cllos bicn los ejercicios? Si, senor, ellos escriben bien
los ejercicios.
0. i Rccibe V. libros ingloses ? No, senor, recibo libros frar.;-
6. j Que reciben ellos ? Recibcn plata y oro.
V. gKeeiben mucbo oro? No, senor, reciben muy poco.
8. i Lee V. sus cartas 6 sus billetes ? No leo ni mis cartas, ni mis
billetes ; leo mis ejercicios.
9. i Neccsjta V. muchos pafiuelos ? No, sefior, necesito muy pocos.
10. g'Estudia V. muchas lecciones? No, sefior, estudio pocas.
11. i Busca V, una pluma? No, sefior, busco una gramutica.
12. Que busea su hertnana de V. ? Busca los ejercicios en ingles.
13. g Estudia A", trances 6 aleman? No estudio ni francos, ni aleinan ;
estudio espafiol.
14. gNeccsita V. lai ejercicio? Si, senor, necesito su ejercicio ingle.-.
13. ^Escribe V. al comerciante 6 al abogado? No escribo al comer-
ciante, ni al abogado ; escribo a su padre de V.
1G. Escriben ellas los ejercicios de ingles? No, senor, escriben las
ejercicios de espaflol.
17. ^Recibe V. muchas cartas dc su padre? No, sefior, recibo muy
pocas.
18. i Reclbs el comerciants mucho algodon ? Si, senor, recibe mucho.
19. g Compra V. mtichos pafiuelos? Si, sefior, compro muchos.
20. g Compra su padre de Y. muchos caballos ? No, sefior, com[>ra
pocos.
21. i Compra V. la gramutica del muchacho ? No. sefior, compro el
cuaderno de la mnchacha.
22. i Ilabla mucho el Frances? No, sefior, habla poco.
20. ^Escribe A", bien el ingles? No, sefior, escribo nial.el ingK-s, pero
escribo bien el espafiol.
EXERCISE.
1. Does your brother -write English well? Yes, sir, he writes Eng-
lish well.
2. Do you write to my brother ? No, sir, I write to my father.
3. Do you write in English or in Spanish ? I write in English.
4. Do they (fern.) write the lessons or the exercises ? They write
neither the lessons nor the exercises ; they write letters.
5. Do you receive many notes ? No, sir, I receive but few.
G. Do they receive gold ? No, sir, they receive silver.
7. Do you receive many letters from your father ? Yes, sir, I receive
many.
26 LESSOKIX.
8. Do you eat fish ? No, sir, I cat bread and cheese.
9. Do the Germans drink water? No, sir, they drink beer.
10. Do you read your brother's letter? No, sir, I read my sister's
letter.
11. Does the merchant sell French paper? No, sir, he sells English
paper.
12. Does your brother learn German and English? No, sir, he learns
neither German nor English ; he learns Spanish.
13. Do you need silver or gold ? I need neither gold nor silver.
14. Do you look for my father? No, madam, I look for the lawyer.
15. Do you buy a grammar from the merchant? Yes, sir, I buy a
grammar from the merchant.
16. Do they study their lessons well? Yes, sir, they study their les-
sons well.
17. Do you speak much to your sister? Yes, madam, I speak much
to my sister.
18. Do you speak Spanish or English ? . I speak English.
19. Do you receive French books ? No, sir, I receive English books.
20. Does the merchant receive silver or gold ? He receives gold and
silver.
21. Do you write your exercises? No, sir, I write my letters.
22. Do you write a letter to your father? No, sir, I write to my
sister.
LESSON IX.
Viv-o.
Yiv-es.
Viv-e.
Viv-imos.
Viv-5s.
Viv-en.
Eesidir.
Mis (plural).
Sus (plural).
Cuando.
Donde (wit7iout motion).
Adonde (with motion).
To live.
I live.
Thou livest.
He lives.
"We live.
You live.
They live.
To reside.
My.
Your.
When.
Where.
LESSOR IX.
27
Campo, pais.
Country.
Flor. Flower.
Dia.
Day.
Flores. Flowers.
Dias.
Days.
Casa. House, or home.
Lapiz.
Pencil.
Nneva York. New York.
Lapices.
Pencils.
Francia. France.
Aleli.
Gilliflower.
Espafia. Spain.
Alelies.
Gilliflower?.
Inglaterra. England.
Cortaplumas.
Penknife.
Alemania. Germany.
Hotel, fonda.
Hotel.
Tienda. Store.
Ciudad. City.
Dias de la scmana.* Days of the week.
Luues.
Monday.
Murtes.
Tuesday.
Miercoles.
Wednesday.
Jueves.
Thursday.
Yiernes.
Friday.
Sabado.
Saturday.
Sabados.
Saturdays.
Domingo.
Sunday.
Domingos.
Sundays.
COMPOSITION.
I Vive V. en el cainpo 6 en la ciudad ?
Vivo en la ciudad.
j En donde residen sus papas de Y. ?
Papa reside en Francia, y mama en
Xueva York.
(, Cuando come Y. en casa de sus her-
manos de Y. ?
Los domingos, martes yjueves como en
casa de mis herrnanos.
t, Y en donde come Y. los lunes, mier-
coles, viernes y sabados ?
Como en casa.
Do you live in the country or in the city ?
I live in the city.
Where do your parents reside ?
Father resides in France, and mother in
Xev York.
When do you dine at your brothers' ?
On Sundays, Tuesdays and Thursdays
I dine at my brothers'.
And where do you dine on Mondays,
Wednesdays, Fridays and Saturdays ?
I dine at home.
EXPLANATION.
30. Papa, papa; mama, mamma; pie, foot; are exceptions
to the general rule, and form the plural by the addition of s ;
as, papas, papas ; mamas, mammas ; pies, feet.
* All of the masculine gender.
28 LESSON. IX.
31. Nouns which are not monosyllables, and end in s, the
last syllable not being accented, do not change their termina-
tion in the plural number ; as, Ltines, Monday or Mondays ;
Martes, Tuesday or Tuesdays, etc. Words ending in z take es,
and change the z into c in the plural ; as, lapiz, Idpices, pencil,
pencils ; jucz,jueces, judge, judges.
32. Words which are confounds of two nouns differ so va-
riously that it is not possible to give rules for the formation of
their plurals ; but compounds of a verb and a noun in the singu-
lar number form the plural in the same manner as simple nouns ;
and compound words of a verb and a noun in the plural will be
used the same in both numbers ; as, cortaplumas, penknife, or
penknives.
33. The days of the week always take the article when they
are employed to- mark, or express time ; as,
Estudio espauol el lunes y el viernes. | I study Spanish ou Monday and Friday.
34. Donde, where (without motion) ; adonde, where (with
motion) ; cuando, when. These adverbs are placed always be-
fore the verb; as,
, Donde reside V. ?
Cuando escribe Y. ?
Where do you reside ?
When do you write ?
35. Donde, adonde, and cuando, when used interrogatively
require an accent; thus, g Donde vive? Where does he live?
g Cuando lee V. ? When do you read ?
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. gEn d6nde vive V. ? Vivo en Xucva York.
2. i D6nde viven sus padres de V. ? Mi padre vivo en la ciudad y mi
madre en el campo.
3. i D6nde viven sus liermanos ? Viven en Francia.
4. 2 Donde come V. los sabados y los domingos? Como en el hotel
de los Franceses.
5. $Y donde come V. los lanes j los niartes? Como en cl hotel
Americano.
G. i Donde reside V. ? Eesido en el campo.
7. Y donde reside su mama de V.? Eeside en los Estados Unidos.
8. i Cuando estudia V. sus lecciones de frances? Los miercolcs y los
jueves.
LESSON IX. 29
9. i Y qne estudia V. los viernes ? Los viernes estudio una leccion
do frances.
10. gCuando lee V. los periodicos? To leo los periodicos los do-
mingos.
11. i Oompran alelies sus hermanas? Si, sefior, ellas compran alelies.
12. g Estudia V. las leyes de Inglaterra? No, sefior, estudio las de
los Estados Unidos (United States).
13. ^Aprende bien la muchacha el ingles? Si, sefior, aprende bien
el ingles.
14. gQu6 beben los Espanoles y los Alemanes? Los Espafioles beben
buen vino, y los Alemanes buena cerveza.
15. i D6nde compra el comerciante el algodon? Compra el algodon en
los Estados Unidos.
16. i Y donde vende el oro y la plata ? En Inglaterra.
17. ^Caando necesita su hermano de Y. la' gramatica? Mi hermano
necesita sn gramatica el lunes.
18. 2 En que hotel come V.? Como en el hotel de Inglaterra.
19. $Que compra el comerciante, plata u oro? El comerciante no
compra ni oro ni plata, compra seda.
20. i Que estudia V. ? Estudio los dias de la semana en ingles.
21. g Escribe V. a Francia? No, sefior, escribo a Inglaterra.
22. gQue escribe Y.? Escribo los ejercicios de la semana en ingles.
23. i D6nde reside su hermana de Y. ? Reside en el campo.
24. i En qu6 pais vive su papa ? Yive en Alernania.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you live in the country? No, sir, I live in town.
2. Where does your sister live ? She lives in Few York.
3. "Where do your parents (padres) live ? They live in France.
4. "Where does your brother reside ? He resides in England.
5. Do you not reside in the United States ? No, sir, in Spain.
6. In which country does your mother live ? She lives in the United
States.
7. Do you write to your father in Spanish or in English ? I write
in English.
8. Where does the merchant buy the cotton ? He buys the cotton in
England.
9. Which do you sell, silver or gold? I sell gold.
10. Where do you dine on Sundays and Mondays ? I dine in the
French hotel.
11. And where on Wednesdays, Fridays and Saturdays? In the
German hotel.
30
L E S S O X X .
12. "When do they study their lesson? On (los) Tuesdays.
13. Does the lawyer study the laws of England? No, sir, he studies
the laws of the United States.
14. Where does your mother reside ? She resides in Germany.
15. When do you need your grammar ? On Friday.
16. When do your sons study the French lessons? They study the
French lessons on Mondays and Saturdays.
17. Where does the merchant buy the good penknives? In England.
18. What day do you (fern.) receive the newspapers? We receiv
newspapers on Sundays.
19. Does your sister buy gilliflowers ? Yes, sir, she buys gilliflowers.
20. Where do you buy your pencils ? In the French store.
21. What do you study? I study the days of the week in Spanish.
22. Where do your parents reside ? My mother resides in Spain, and
my father in Germany.
23. Where does your sister reside ? She resides in the country.
24. Do you need my books ? Yes, sir, I need your books.
LESSON X.
Tcner.
Tengo.
Tienes.
Tiene.
Tenemos.
Teneis.
Tienen.
Le, los (masc. pi.).
La, las (fern. pi.).
Lo (neuter).
To have.
I have.
Thou hast.
He has.
We have.
You have.
They have.
OBJECTIVE CASE.
It, him, them.
It, her, them.
It, (sometimes) so.
INTERROGATIVE PROXOUXS.
quienes (pl.)l
iil, cuales (pi.) ?
De quien, de quienes
Con.
Who?
Which one, which ones?
What, or which?
Whose ?
With.
L E S S O X X .
31
Zapato.
Chaleco.
Button.
Sombrero.
Shoo.
Vest.
Cane.
Hat.
Botas.
Casaca.
Corbata.
Medias.
Boots.
Coat.
Cravat.
Stockings.
,5 Quicn tienc mi baston ?
Yo lo tengo.
6 Quo corbuta tiene V. ?
Tengo la bonita.
<; Ticnen cllos mi chaleco ?
No, sefior, tiencn la corbata dc V.
<: De quien habla V. '?
Hablo de los Franceses.
,5 Teneis vosotros casacas ?
Si, sciior, las tenemos.
6 Quien tiene sombreros ?
Los tiene el comerciante.
i Necesita V. a mi padre ?
Si, sefior, le necesito.
6 Tiene V. mi casaca ?
Si, sefior, la tengo.
6 Que betas tiene V. ?
i Que tiene V. ?
COMPOSITION.
Who has my cane ?
I have it.
Which cravat have you ?
I have the pretty one.
Have they my waistcoat ?
No, sir, they have your cravat.
Of whom do you speak ?
I speak of the Frenchmen.
Have you coats ?
Yes, sir, we have (them).
Who has hats ?
The merchant hds (them).
Do you need my father ?
Yes, sir, I need him.
Have you my coat ?
Yes, sir, I have it.
Which boots have you ?
What is the matter with you ?
EXPLANATION.
36. IRREGULAR VERBS are those which do not retain in-
tact the radical letters and the terminations designated for
each tense and person.
The verb tener, to have, is the first of the irregular verbs
here introduced; and, like all the auxiliary verbs, is not in-
cluded in the seven groups in which the irregular Spanish
verbs are classified, on account of their multifarious irregulari-
ties. The auxiliaries require, therefore, to be learned separate-
ly, or each one by itself.
A complete list of the irregular conjugations will be found
at the end of the book.
When the objective case of the third person is the object
of the English verb, it is translated by le, los, for the masculine ;
la, las, for the feminine ; and lo for the neuter ; as,
El lc busca.
Ella los compra.
Ellos lo necesitan.
He looks for him.
She buys them,
They want it.
32 LESSON X.
37. Lo and LTS. It must be observed, however, with regard
to the objective forms le and lo, that their use is very doubtful
in Spanish, since many correct writers employ the neuter lo,
instead of the masculine le. Consequently, while custom or
general use does not give the preference to either, the learner
may use them according to his own discretion or taste, in the
accusative case, masculine gender; as,
M;n:ucl ticue un buen iibro y lo (le)
veude.
Emanuel has a good book and sells it.
Lo is sometimes employed to avoid the repetition of a
Avhole or part of a sentence, and then it is equivalent to so, or
it. Of this, however, more will be said when treating of the
regimen of verbs.
38. THE INTTERKOGATTFE PROXOUSTS quien, cm'd, que, de
quien, who, which, what, and whose, do not require the arti-
cle ; as,
6 Quien habla ?
<j Cual tengo yo ?
(, Que escribe V. ?
(, De quien sou los caballos ?
Who speaks ?
Which one have I ?
What do you write ?
Whose are the horses ?
39. When, in a question, the interrogative pronoun is
governed by a preposition, that preposition must also be re-
peated in the answer; as,
g Con quien vivc V. ?
Con mi amigo.
I DC quien es cl eaballo ?
De mi amisro.
With Trhom do you live ?
With my friend.
Whose is the horse ?
My friend's.
COXYERSATIOX AND TERSIOX.
1. i Quo tienc V. ? Tengo un hermoso baston.
2. ^Tiencs tu tin bucn sombrero? Si, sefior, lo (le) tengo.
3. i Que pafiuelo tiene ella? Tiene el de sctla.
i. i Cnal tiene V. ? Tengo mi pafiuelo.
5. i Teneis vosotros buenos chalecos ? Si, sofior, los tenemos.
G. gDe quien hablau ellos? Ilablan de las Americanas.
V. i Tiene V. las corbatas ? Si, sefior, las tengo.
8. i Tiencn ellos los hermosos pafiuelos de seda ? Si, sefior, los ticnen.
9. i Quien tiene las medias ? Yo las tengo.
10. $ Tienc "V"- 11U ' chaleco? Si, sefior, lo (le) tengo.
LESSON .X. 33
11. ^Quien ticne mi baston ? Su hermano lo (le) tienc.
12. i Ilabla V. a. su hermana ? Si, sefior.
13. flBusca V. a su liermana? Si, sefiorita, la busco.
14-. ^Estudia V. su Icccion? Si, sefior, la estudio. .
15. gNecesita V. a su papa? Si, sefior, le (lo) necesito.
16. i Que sombrero tieno V. ? Tengo el de V.
IT. jQue botas busca V.? Busco las buenas.
18. i Con quien aprende V. el ingles ? Con -an Americano.
19. i A quien busca V. ? Busco al abogado.
20. i Que compra V. ? Compro liipiccs ingleses.
21. gTiene V. una buena gramatica ? Si, scfior, tengo una muy buena.
22. ^Tiene V. mucbos libros? No, sefior, tengo pocos.
23. ^Tiencn ellas mucha seda? No, sefior, tienen muypoca.
24. Dondc reside V. ? Reside en el campo.
25. gDonde vivo su abogado de V. ? Vive en la ciudad.
26. g Vivo en Francia su hermano de V.? No, sefior, vivo en Espafia.
EXERCISE.
1. "Who has the stockings ? I have them.
2. What has he ? He has my grammar.
3. Have they my vest ? Yes, sir, they have it.
4. Which books have they (fern.) ? They have yours.
5. Of whom do you speak ? I speak of the JFrenchman.
G. Who has my coat ? They have it.
7. Have you my cravat ? No, sir, I have it not.
8. Have we very good coats ? Yes, sir, we have.
9. Who has the handsome stockings ? They (fern.} have them.
10. Do you speak to the Frenchman? Yes, sir, I speak to the French-
man.
11. Do you need my hat? No, sir, I have my hat.
12. Whom do you look for ? I look for your father.
13. What do you buy ? I buy English books.
14. Which shoes do you buy ? I buy the handsome shoes.
15. Which hats have you? I have the merchant's hats.
1C. With whom do you learn English? I learn with an American.
IV. Have you good coats? Yes, sir, I have good coats.
18. Have tliey many grammars? No, sir, they have very few.
19. Where do you live ? I live in the country.
20. Does your father reside in France ? No, sir, he resides in England.
21. Does your mother live in Germany? No, sir, she lives in the
United States.
2*
4 LESSON XI.
22. Do you buy many books ? No, sir, I buy very few.
23. "Who has ray handsome boots? I have them.
24. Which hat have you ? I have yours.
25. What have you? I have my stockings.
26. Of whom do you speak? I speak of your father.
LESSON XI.
Ser.
Soy.
Eres.
Es.
Somos.
Sois.
Son.
To be.
I am.
Thou art.
He is.
We are.
You arc.
They are.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
Alguien.
Alguno.
Nadie.
Ninguno.
Algo, alguna cosa.
Nada, ninguna cosa.
Todo.
Todos.
Librero.
Panadero.
Carnicero.
Sastre.
Bookseller.
Baker
Butcher.
Tailor.
Some one, somebody, anybody,
any one.
Some, somebody, anybody.
No one, nobody.
None, no one, nobody.
Something, anything.
Nothing, not anything.
All, everything.
Every one, everybody.
Libreria.
Panaderin.
Carniceria.
Sastreria.
Bookstore.
Bakery.
Butcher's shop.
Tailor's shop.
COMPOSITION.
(, Son Vds. carniceros ?
No, seuor, somos panaderos.
,; Es V. carnicero ?
No, seuor, yo soy sastre.
6 Tienc V. algun pan ?
Are you butchers ?
No, sir, we are bakers.
Arc you a butcher ?
No, sir, I am a tailor.
Have you some bread ?
LESSON XI.
35
No, sefior, no tengo ninguno.
f, Ticncn Yds. algo ?
No, seiior, no tcnemos nada.
i, Quien liene el sombrero ?
El Americano lo tiene.
^Donde compra V. pan?
En la panaderia.
f, Donde compra V. sus libros ?
En la librcria.
f, Eres tii muy estudioso ?
No, sefior, no lo soy.
(, Tieneu todos Vds. buenas grama-
ticas.
Si, seiior.
Quien tieno papel ?
Nadic lo (le) tienc.
No, sir, I have none.
Have you anything ?
No, sir, we have nothing.
Who has the hat ?
The American has it.
Where do you buy bread ?
In the bakery.
Where do you buy your books ?
In the bookstore.
Art thou very studious ?
No, 'sir, I am not (so).
Have you all good grammars ?
Yes, sir.
Who has paper ?
Nobody has (it).
EXPLANATION.
40. ALGUTEIT, ALGinsro. Alguien refers only to persons,
and always in the singular number ; as,
Vivo con alguien.
Escribo a ulguicn.
I live with some one.
I write to somebody.
When some one, any one, is followed by the preposition, of,
we must use alguno in Spanish, and not dlguien ; as, alguno de
ellos escribe en el pcriodico, some one of them writes in the
newspaper.
Any one, or anybody, not used interrogatively, is trans-
lated by cualquiera, as will be seen when we introduce the in-
definite pronoun.
Alguien is used only in the affirmative. Alguno may, on
the contrary, be employed either in affirmative or negative
sentences ; in the affirmative it always precedes the noun to
which it refers, and in the negative it invariably comes after
it ; as,
No estudian leccion alguna. They study no lesson (or do not study
any lesson).
41. N"ADIE, NINGTHSTO. Ninguno relates to persons and
things, and is used in the negative in the same manner as al-
guno in the affirmative ; nadie relates to persons only, and is
36 LESS OX XI.
used in the negative in the same way as the pronoun dlyuicn
in the affirmative. In a word, nadie and ninguno are merely
the negative forms of dlguien and alguno.
42. ALGUXO and STXGUXO lose the o when they come im-
mediately before the noun.
43. ALGO, and ALGUXA COSA, are used in the affirmative ; as,
Como algo, or alguna cosa.
(jRecibeV. alyo, or alguna cosa?
I cat something.
Do you receive anything
Anything, when not used interrogatively, is translated
cualqiiiera cosa, as will be seen in its proper place.
44. NADA, XISTGUNA COSA are used in the negative form.
45. NADA, XUXGUXO, NADIE, the adverb no, as well as any
other words expressing negation, are placed before the verb ;
but when no precedes the verb, another negative may be placed
after it, and the two negatives serve to strengthen each other,
contrary to the practice of the English language ; as,
No cstudio nada.
No hablo a naclic.
No recibo ninguno
I study nothing.
I speak to nobody, or no one.
I receive none.
But in omitting the negative no, the words which express
the negation must be placed before the^verb ; as,
Nada estudio. I I study nothing.
A nadie hablo.
Ninguno recibo;
I speak to nobody.
I receive none.
The two negatives are always preferable.
46. The indefinite article a or an, is not translated into
Spanish when accompanied by a noun which expresses nation
ality, profession, &c. ; as,
6 Es V. Ingles ? I Are you an Englishman ?
No, senor, soy Espafiol. No, sir, I am a Spaniard. .
i, Es el sastre ?
No, senor, es zapatero.
Is he a tailor ?
No, sir, he is a shoemaker.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Es V. Frances? Xo, seiior, soy Americano.
2. $Son Yds. Alemanes? Xo, senor, soinos Ingleses.
3. ^Eros tu bnen r.iucliacho ? Si ssfior, lo soy.
4. g Sois vosotros sastrcs ? is"o, sefior, soinos panaderos.
LESSON XI. 37
5. i Es bueno el libro de su hermano de V. ? Si, scfior, lo es.
6. ^Son buenos sus zapatos de V. ? No, sefior, son muy malos.
7. Tiene alguno mi sombrero? Si, seftor, alguien lo (le) tiene.
8. g Tiene alguien papel ? Wo, sefior, ninguno tiene papel.
9. i Tiene V. alguna cosa ? No, scfior, no tengo nada.
10. i No tiene V. cosa alguna ? Si, sefior, tengo alguna cosa.
11. gCompran pan todos Yds. ? Si, sefior. todos compramos pan.
12. gDonde conipran Yds. todo su pan? Lo (le) compramos en la
panaderia.
13. ^ Son Yds. panaderos? No, scfior, nosotros soraos zapateros.
14. ^Tieue alguien mi sombrero bueno? Si, sefior, alguien le (lo)
tiene.
15. 2 No compra Y. algo? Si, sefior, compro alguna cosa.
16. $ Escribe V. algo? No, sefior, no escribo nada.
17. gNecesita Y. todo el papel? Si, sefior, lo (le) neccsito todo.
18. ^Necesita V. todas las plumas? Si, sefior, las necesito todas.
19. gEs Y. sastre? Si, sefior, yo soy sastre.
20. ^Donde tiene Y. su sastreria? La tengo en Nueva York.
21. ^Es su padre de V. librero? Si, sefior, lo es.
22. i Yende muchos libros ? Si, sefior, vcnde muchos.
23. i Domic tiene el su libreria ? La tiene en Francia.
24. i Tiene Y. una panaderia? No, sefior, tengo una carniceria.
25. ^Ilabla Y. a alguien ? No, sefior, no hablo a nadie.
EXERCISE.
1. Are you an Englishman? No, sir, I am an American.
2. Are you good boys ? Yes, sir, we are very good boys.
3. Is Louisa a good girl ? Yes, sir, she is a very good girl.
4. Art thou a Frenchman ? No, sir, I am a German.
5. Is yours a good book ? Yes, sir, mine is a very good one.
6. Are they (fern.) studious ? Yes, sir, they are very studious.
7. Have you anything ? No, sir, I have nothing.
8. Have you nothing ? Yes, sir, I have something.
9. Has anybody a good grammar ? Yes, sir, the Frenchman has one.
10. Who speaks French ? The American speaks French.
11. Do you write an exercise? Yes, sir, I write an exercise.
12. "Where do you buy all yonr books? I buy them in the bookstore.
13. Are you a bookseller? No, sir, I am a baker.
14. Where have you your bakery ? I have it in New York.
15. Where do you buy your coats? In the tailor's shop.
16. Have you all of your books? Yes. sir, I have all.
38
LESSON XII.
17. Do you all reside in the United States? Yes, sir, we reside in the
United States.
18. Have you any bread ? No, sir, I have none.
19. Do you speak to anybody? Yes, sir, I speak to the Americans.
20. Do you buy anything ? No, sir, I buy nothing.
21. Are you a baker? No, sir, I am a tailor.
22. Are they French ? No, sir, they are English.
23. Art thou a Spaniard ? No, sir, I am an American.
24. Who is studious ? Emanuel is very studious.
LESSON XII.
Haber.
He.
Has.
Ha.
Hemos.
Habeis.
Han.
To have.
I have.
Thou hast.
He has.
We have.
You have.
They have.
PAST PARTICIPLES. First Conjugation.
Habl-ado.
Estudi-ado.
Spoke.
Studied.
Compr-ado.
Busc-ado.
Necesit-ado.
Bought."
Looked for, sought.
Needed.
Second and Third.
Aprend-ido.
Vend-ido.
Learned.
Sold.
Le-ido.
Bead.
Beb-ido.
Drunk.
Com-ido.
Kecib-ido.
Eaten, dined.
Received.
Yiv-ido.
Lived.
Resid-ido.
Resided.
Escrito (irregular in this
participle only).
Written.
LESSON XII.
39
Hoy.
Paris.
Londres.
Madrid.
Pano.
Paris.
London.
Madrid.
Cloth.
To-day.
Ilabana.
Viena.
Havana.
Vienna.
Filadelfia. Philadelphia.
Esquela. Note.
COMPOSITION.
(, Cuando ha escrito Y. a su padre ?
He escrito hoy a mi padre.
i Ha rccibido V. sus cartas ?
Si, sefior, las he recibido.
f, Ha vivido V. en Paris ?
Si, sefior, he vivido una semana.
f, Ha residido V. en Londres ?
Si, sefior, he residido algunos dias.
f, Han comido.ellos ?
Si, senor, han comido.
6 Hemos leido bien nosotros ?
Si, sefior, Yds. han leido muy bien.
.jHabeis vendido vosotros muchos pa-
fiuelos ?
Hemos yendido muy pocos.
f, Cuando habeis aprendido vucstra lec-
cion?
La hemos aprendido hoy.
6 Habeis comprado pan ?
Si, sefior, lo hemos comprado.
f, Ha estudiado V. aleman ?
No, sefior, no lo he estudiado.
I, Ha hablado V. con el Frances ?
Si, sefior, he hablado con el.
When have you written to your father ?
I have written to my father to-day.
Have you received your letters ?
Yes, sir, I have received them.
Have you lived in Paris ?
Yes, sir, I have lived a week.
Have you resided in London ?
Yes, sir, I resided some days.
Have they eaten (or dined) ?
Yes, sir, they have eaten.
Have we read well ?
Yes, sir, you have read very well.
Have you sold many handkerchiefs ?
We have sold very few.
When have you learned your lesson ?
We have learned it to-day.
Have you bought bread ?
Yes, sir, we have bought it.
Have you studied German ?
No, sir, I have not studied it.
Have you spoken with the Frenchman ?
Yes, sir, I have spoken with him.
EXPLANATION.
47. TEXER AXD HABEE. To have, used ns an active verb,
is translated by tencr, as an auxiliary, by haber ; as,
To have horses.
I have gold.
To have spoken.
Tener caballos,
Tengo oro.
Iluber hablado.
Hemos hablado.
We have spoken.
When the auxiliaries to have and to be, followed by an infi-
40 LESSON XII.
nitivc, denote some future action, to have is rendered by tencr
que,, and to be by haber do ; as,
Tcnemos que escribir.
Hemos do recibir dincro.
We have to write.
We are to receive money.
48. PRETERIT -INDEFINITE. This tense not only refers to
wli.it is past, but also conveys an allusion to the present time ; as,
Alejandro ha estudiado el cspauol. | Alexander has studied Spanish.
It must also be used when we speak indefinitely of any
thing past, as happening or not happening in the day, year,
or age, in which we mention it ; as,
He escrito hoy muchas cartas. | I have written many letters to-day.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. gHa escrito V. BUS cartas? No, sefior, lie cscrito los xyercicios de
la leccion.
2. i Ila rccibido V. sn dinero ? Si, scfior, lo lie recibido.
3. i Ha escrito V. a, su bermnna? Si, sefior, be escrito boy u mi hcr-
maua.
4. i Cuando ha rccibido V. los periodicos de Paris ? Los be recibido
boy.
5. Ha leido V. mi libro? Si, sefior, lo be leido.
6. i Han vivido Yds. en L6ndres ? Si, sefior, beraos vivido una scmana.
7. i Ila comido V. ? Si, sefior, be comido.
S. i Ila leido V. la carta de mi hermano ? Si, sefiora, la be leido.
9. i Ila vendido V. su baston ? Si, sefior, lo be vendido boy.
10. Ha necesitado V. el libro de mi bennana? No, sefior, no lo be
necesitado.
11. glla buscado V. bicn el pafitielo? Si, sefiora, lo be buscado bien.
12. ^ Ha comprado V. pan ? No, sefior, be comprado vino.
13. $ Ha aprendido V. su leccion dc espafiol? La be estudiado, pcro
be aprendido muy poco.
14. Ila bablado Y. con mi padre? Si, sefior, be bablado con el.
15. Ila estudiado Y. cl aleman? Si, sefior, lo be estudiado con un
Frances.
16. $ Ha vivido Y. en la Habana? No, sefior, be vivido en Filadelfia.
17. ^ Ha vendido Y. muchos lapices? No, sefior, be vendido muy
pocos.
18. glla recibido Y. sus cartas? No, sefior, be recibido los periodicos
del juevcs.
LESSON -XII. 41
19. gHa leido Y. mi esquela? No, seiior, no la he leido.
20. i Ha buscado V. Men mi baston ? Si, sefior, lo he buscado bien.
21. glla comprado V. un sombrero? Si, sefior.
-2. ^Ilan hablado ellos a su padre? No, sefior.
23. i Ha aprendido V. el ingles ? No, seiior, lo he estudiado un poco ;
pero no lo he aprendido.
24. i Ha leido V. el periodico de hoy ? Si, seuor, lo he leido.
EXERCISE.
1. Have you received your letters? Yes, sir, I have received them
to-day.
2. Have you read the newspapers? Yes, sir, I have read them.
3. Have you written to my sister? No, sir, I have not written to
her (le).
4. Have you received your letters from Vienna? I have received
them.
5. Have you read the English newspapers? Ye?, sir, I have (read
them).
6. Have you dined with your sister? I have dined with her.
7. Have you bought your hat ? I have bought it to-day.
8. Have you looked for my father in Paris ? Yes. sir, I have looked
for him.
9. Have you spoken with him ? Yes, sir, 1 have spoken with him.
10. "Where have you spoken with him ? I have spoken with him at
his house.
11. Have you studied your Spanish lesson? Yes, sir, I have studied it.
12. Have you learned it well? No, sir, I have learned it little.
13. Have the bakers sold much bread ? No, sir, they have sold very
little.
14. Has the tailor bought much cloth ? Yes, sir, he has (bought).
15. Have they (fern.) dined with your sister? Yes, sir, they have
dined with my sister.
16. Have they dined with your brother? Yes sir.
17. What have they eaten? They have eaten bread and meat.
18. What have they drunk? They have drunk water, wine and ale.
19. Have you spoken with the Spaniard? Yes, sir, I have spoken
with him.
20. Have you spoken with him in Spanish or English? I have spoken
with him in English.
21. Have you received your letters from Philadelphia? Yes, sir, I
have received them.
22. Have you received them all ? I have received them all.
42
LESS-ON XIII.
23. Have you lived in London ? No, sir, I have lived in Vienna.
24. Have you lived with your father ? No, sir, I have lived with my
brother.
LESSON XIII.
Q uerer.
To wish, to be willing, to love.
Querido.
"Wished, loved, dear.
Quiero.
I wish, or am willing.
Quieres.
Thou wishest.
Quiere.
He wishes.
Queremos.
"We wish.
Quereis.
You wish.
Quieren.
They wish.
Desear.
To desire.
POSSESSIVE PKONOUNS.
Mio.
My, or mine.
Tuyo.
' Thy, or thine.
Suyo.
His, hers or its.
Nuestro.
Our, or ours.
Vuestro.
Your, cr yours.
Util.
Useful.
Caro.
Dear.
Barato.
Cheap.
Viejo.
Old.
Joven.
Young.
Rico.
Eich.
Pobre.
Poor.
Amigo. Friend,
Amiga. Friend.
Primo. Cousin.
Prima. Cousin.
Dinero. Money.
Moneda. Coin.
COMPOSITION.
I Quiere V. un sombrero ?
No, senor, quiero un baston.
i, Quiere V. mucho a su primo ?
Si, sefior, le quiero mucho.
Do you wish a hat ?
No, sir, I wish a cane.
Do you love your cousin much ?
Yes, sir, I love him much.
LESSON XIII.
43
Quiere V. escribir ?
No, sefior, quiero leer.
ft Quiere V. hablar con mi hermana ?
Si, sefior, quiero hablar con ella.
i Qaiere V. comprar el caballo de nues-
tro amigo ?
Si, sefior, quiero comprar el caballo del
amigo de V.
ft Quieres escribir a mi hermano ?
Si, sefior, quiero escribirle.
i Tiene V. mi baston ?
No, sefior, tengo el mio.
j Ticnen ellas nuestros libros ?
Si, sefior, tienen los de Vds.
A Es viejo su padre de V. ?
Si, setior, es un poco viejo.
i Es joven su hermana de V. ?
Si, sefior, es muy joven.
6 Es pobre el comerciante ?
No, sefior, es muy rico.
6 Ha escrito V. a su amigo ?
Si, sefior, he escrito hoy a mi amigo.
6 Ha hablado V. con su prima ?
No, sefior, he hablado con mi amigo.
j Donde vive su primo de V. ?
Vive en Filadelfia.
Do you wish to write ?
No, sir, I wish to read.
Do you wish to speak to my sister ?
Yes, sir, I wish to speak to her.
Do you wish to buy our friend's horse ?
Yes, sir, I wish to buy your friend's
horse.
Do you wish to write to my brother ?
Yes, sir, I wish to write to him.
Have you my cane ?
No, sir, I have mine.
Have they our books ?
Yes, sir, they have yours.
Is your father old ? .
Yes, sir, he is rather old.
Is your sister young ?
Yes, sir, sBe is very young.
Is the merchant poor ?
No, sir, he is very rich.
Did you write to your friend ?
Yes, sir, I have MTitten to my friend
to-day.
Have you spoken with your cousin ?
No, sir, I have spoken with my friend.
Where does your cousin live ?
He lives in Philadelphia.
EXPLANATION.
49. Mio, TUYO, STJTO, NUESTKO, vuESTKO, change the final
o into or, to form the feminine termination.
50. In Spanish, the possessive pronouns always agree with
the name of the thing possessed, in gender, number, and case ; as,
Nuestra gramatica.
Nucstros libros.
Our grammar.
Our books.
51. When used as pronominal adjectives, they precede the
noun with which they agree ; and it is to be observed that, in
this case, mio, tuyo and suyo drop their final syllable ; as,
Nucstros caballos.
Mi pluma.
Tu papel.
Su cuaderno.
Our horses.
My pen.
Thy paper.
His copy-book.
44 LESSON XIII.
Mis plumas.
Tus papelcs.
Sus cuadcrnos.
My pens.
Thy papers.
His copy-books.
52. Mio, when used in the vocative case that is, in ad-
dressing persons is placed after the noun governing it ; as,
Escribe, hijo mio. | Write, my son.
53. When possessivcs are used as pronouns, they agree in
gender, number and case with the noun which they represent,
and are preceded by the definite article ; as,
Tu gramatica y la mia.
De mis muchachos y los tuyos.
Su hermano y el nucstro.
Sus zapatos y 70s nucstrcs.
Tus caballos y los suyos.
Thy grammar and mine.
Of my boys and thine.
His brother and ours.
His shoes and ours.
Thy horses and tficirs, &c.
54. POSSESSIVES are preceded by the neuter article, when
they are indefinitely used ; as,
Lo mio, lo tuyo, lo suyo. | What is mine, what is thine, what is his.
55. When the possessive pronoun is connected with the
noun by the verb to be, the article is omitted ; as,
Este billete es mio.
Esa carta es tuya.
El caballo es suyo.
Muchachos, j es este vusstro libro ?
Niflos, (, es este el vucstro ?
This note is mine.
That letter is thine.
The horse is his.
Boys, is this your book ?
Children, is this yours ?
56. VUESTRO, VUESTEA, is chiefly used in addressing per-
sons in very high positions ; as,
ScSor, vuestra patria lo exije. | Sir, your country demands it.
CONVERSATION AND YERSIOX.
1. gQuiere V. vino? No, sefior, quicro agua.
1. Quiorcn Vds. mis libros? No, sefior, queremos los nuestros.
3. ^Tienen ellos nuestros periodicos? No, sefior, ellos tienen los
suyos.
4. ^Tiene V. nuestro libro? No, sefior, yo tengo el inio.
5. ^Tcneis vuestros ejercicios? Si, sefior, tenemos los nuestros.
6. ^Es vieja sn amiga de V. ? No, sefior, es joven.
7. ^Es rico el comerciante? Si, sefior, es miry rico.
8. i Veude barato ? No, sefior, compra barato ; pero vende caro.
LESSON XIII. 45
9. $ Es util la granuitica ? Si, sefior, es muy util.
10. jQuicre V. mucho a sn hermana? Si, sefior, la quicro mucho.
11. j Quiere V. beber vino? No, sefior, quiero beber agua.
12. i Quiere V. comprar un pafiuelo de algodon? No, scfior, quiero
comprar nno de seda.
13. i Quiere V. vivir en nuestra casa? No, sefior, quiero vivir en la mia.
14. i Quiere V. estudiar espafiol? Si, senor, quiero estudiarlo.
15. i Quo quieren ellos ? Quieren hablar con V.
16. i Quiere V. ir (to go) a mi casa el martes ? No, sefior, quiero ir hoy.
17. i Necesita V. un libro ? Si, sefior, necesito el mio.
13. i Necesita V. hablar con el abogado? No, sefior, necesito hablar
con el comcrciante.
19. g Necesita su prima un lapiz? No, sefior, ella no lo necesita.
20. Ha querido V. mucho a su padre? Si, sefior, le he querido
mucho.
21. Ha neccsitado V. dinero? No, sefior, he necesitado amigos.
22. i Ha cscrito V. sus cartas ? Si, scfior, las he escrito.
23. i Ha leido V. los pcriodicos ? Si, sefior, los lie leido hoy.
24. i Quiere V. apr cnder espafiol ? Si, sefior, quiero aprcndcrlt).
EXERCISE.
1. Do you wish to eat anything? No, sir, I wish to drink.
2. What do you wish to drink ? I wish to drink water.
3. Do you wish to speak to your brother ? Yes, sir, I wish to speak
to him (le).
4. Do you wish to learn Spanish ? No, sir, I wish to learn French.
5. Do they wish to live in New York ? No, sir, they wish to live in
Philadelphia.
6. Have you read your note ? Yes, sir, I have read it.
Y. Do you want some wine ? No, sir, I want some water.
8. Do they want my book ? Yes, sir, they want your book.
9. Does your brother want to speak to my father ? No, sir, he
wants to speak to the lawyer.
10. Did you want my father's letter? No, sir, we did not want your
father's letter.
11. Did you want any money? Yes, sir, I wanted some.
12. Do you wish to live in France? No, sir, I wish to live in the
United States.
13. Do you wish to speak French ? No, sir, I wish to speak Spanish.
14. Do they wish to buy a grammar ? No, sir, they wish to buy news-
papers.
46
LESSON XIV.
15. What do you wish to buy ? I wish to boy a handkerchief.
16. What do you wish to read? I wish to read the English news-
papers.
17. What do you wish to drink ? I wish to drink some wine and
water.
18. What do they want to sell? They want to sell their horses.
1 9. When did you receive your letters from Englafid ? We have re-
ceived them to-day.
20. When did you dine with your friends ? I have dined with them
to-day.
21. Have you a useful book ? Yes, sir, I have a Spanish grammar.
22. Does the merchant sell his hats dear? No, sir, he sells them
cheap.
23. Is your friend young? No, sir, he is old.
24. Are you rich? No, sir, I am poor.
25. Do you wish to have money ? Yes, sir, I wish to have it.
26. Do your friend and- cousin live m New York ? No, sir, they live
in Philadelphia.
LESSON XIV.
To bring, brought, to take.
To send, sent.
To take, taken.
To pay, paid.
Llevar, llevado, traer.
Enviar, enviado.
Tomar, tornado.
Pagar, pagado.
Cuanto.
Cuantos.
Bastante.
Peso. Dollar.
Centavo. Cent.
Cafe. Coffee,
Chocolate. Chocolate.
NUMERAL ADJECTIVES CAEDIXAL IJOJUBEBS.
Uno, una. One.
Dos. Two.
Tres. Three.
Cuatro. Four.
Cinco. Five.
How much.
How many.
Enough.
Chair.
Table.
Bed.
Silla.
Mesa.
Cam a.
LESSON XIV.
47
Seis.
Siete.
Oeho.
Nueve.
Diez.
Once.
Docfi.
Trece.
Catorce.
Quince.
Diez y seis.
Diez y siete.
Diez y ocho.
Diez y nuevc.
Veinte.
Yeinte y uno, etc.
Treinta.
Cuarenta.
Cincuenta.
Sesenta.
Setenta.
Ochenta.
Noventa.
Ciento.
Doscientos.
Trescientos.
Cuatrocientos.
Quinientos.
Seiscientos.
Setecientos.
Ochocientos.
Novecientos.
Mil.
Dos mil.
Mil ciento.
Cien mil.
Un millon.
Six.
Seven.
Eight.
Nine.
Ten.
Eleven.
Twelve.
Thirteen.
Fourteen.
Fifteen.
Sixteen.
Seventeen.
Eighteen.
Nineteen.
Twenty.
Twenty-one, &c.
Thirty.
Forty.
Fifty.
Sixty.
Seventy.
Eighty.
Ninety.
A or one hundred.
Two hundred.
Three hundred.
Four hundred.
Five hundred.
Six hundred.
Seven hundred.
Eight hundred.
Nine hundred.
A or one thousand.
Two thousand.
Eleven hundred.
A or one hundred thousand.
A or one million.
COMPOSITION.
i Han llcvado mi sombrero al sombrc-
rero?
Si, scnor, lo ban llevado.
Have they taken my bat to the hatter?
Yes, sir, they have taken it.
48
LESSON XIV.
Ha enviado V. la carta a su priino ?
La he enviado.
f ; Ha tornado V. cafe ?
No, seuor, he tornado chocolate.
t, Cuiinto dinero tiene V. ?
Tengo bastantc.
,; Cuanto tiene V. ?
Tengo diez pesos.
<j Ha comido V. con su hermano hoy ?
No, senor, no he comido con 61.
,; Cuanto ha pagado V. al sombrercro ?
Ocho pesos y seis centavos.
(, Cuantas sillas ha comprado V. ?
He comprado seis.
Have you sent the letter to your cousin ?
I have sent it.
Have you taken coffee ?
No, sir, I have taken chocolate.
How much money have you ?
I have enough.
How much have you ?
I have ten dollars.
Have you dined with your brother to-
day?
No, sir, I have not dined with him.
How much have you paid to the hatter ?
Eight dollars and six cents.
How many chairs have you bought ?
I have bought six.
EXPLANATION.
NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.
5 7. In the formation of compound numbers, the same order
is observed in Spanish as in English, except as to the place of
the conjunction ; as,
Mil ochocientos sesenta y seis. | 18GG.
58. All these numbers, except uno, one, and the compounds
ofciento, one hundred, are indeclinable.
59, UNO agrees in gender with the noun to which it refer?,
but drops the o when it conies immediately before a masculine
noun; as.
Uiw de los hombres.
Una, mujer.
Un hombre.
Uh gran caballo.
One of the men.
A woman.
A man.
A great horse.
60. CIENTO drops the last syllable when it comes immedi-
ately before a noun. Its compounds agree in number and
gender with the nouns to which they refer ; as,
Cicn horn):.; 1 '.yores.
Cicnio veintc y tres caballos.
Doscienios libros.
frcscicntas cajas.
One hundred men and one hundred
women.
One hundred and twenty-three horses.
Two hundred books.
Three hundred boxes.
LESSON XIV. 49
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. jlla eserito V. sus cartas? Si, senor, las he escrito.
2. Las ha cnviado V. al correo*? Si, sefior, las lie enviado hoy.
3. glla tornado V. cafe 6 chocolate? He tornado cafe.
4. i Tiene V. bastante diaero ? Si, sefior, tengo bastante.
5. i Cuanto tiene V. ? Tengo veinte pesos y treinta ceutavos.
C. I Cuanto ha pagado V. a su sastre ? lie pagado a mi sastre veinte
y cinco pesos y cuarenta ceatavos.
7. i Cuando ha comido V. con su amigo ? He comido con el hoy.
8. i Cmintos oaballos ha comprado V. ? He comprado ocho.
9. $ Ha comprado V. sillas? Si, sefior, he comprado doce.
10. i Tiene Y. muclio dinero? Tengo cien pesos y cincuenta centavos.
11. i Cuanto tiene su hermano ? Tiene quinientos (500) pesos.
12. jDonde vive V.? Vivo en Nueva York.
13. gQue numero (number) tiene la casa de Y. ? Tiene el numero
ti-escientos treinta y ocho (338).
1-1. i Ha recibido Y. sns periodicos de Paris ? Si, senor, los he recibido.
15. iQue nuiueros ha recibido Y. ? lie recibido cl once, doce, trecc,
catorce, y diez y ocho.
10. Los ha leido Y. ? No, senor, no los he leido.
17. i Cuautos afios (year) ha vivido Y. en Paris? He vivido cinco.
18. jCuantas lecciones ha aprendido Y. ? He aprendido trece.
19. i Cuantas gramuticas tiene Y. ? Ko tengo sino una.
20. i Quieu ha recibido hoy periodicos? Kadie los ha recibido hoy.
21. $Es rico el amigo de Y. ? Si, sefior, tiene quinientos mil (500,000)
pesos.
22. ^Ha llevado V. mis cartas al correo? ISTo he llevado sino dos.
23. ^Ila enviado Y. mis zapatos al zapatero? Si, sefior, los he envia-
do hoy.
24. slla tornado Y muchas lecciones de espafiol? He tornado doce.
25. i Cuanto ha pagado Y. u su amigo ? Trcs mil ochocientos cuarenta
y cuatro pesos (3,844).
EXERCISE.
1. Do you \vish to send anything to your cousin? Yes, sir, I wish to
send money to my cousin.
2. How much money do you wish to send ? I wish to send $31 T.
3. "\Vlio lias taken the money to the tailor? My cousin (Jem.) has
taken it.
4. Where have you sent the horses ? I have sent them to Paris.
5. How many have you sent? I have sent two very good ones.
* Correo, post-office.
50 LESSOST xv.
C. My son, Lave you taken the $31.50 to the baker ? Yes, sir, I have
(taken them).
7. Has your brother sent some chairs to your house ? Xo, sir, but he
has sent some to his.
8. How many has he sent ? lie has sent ten chairs and three tables.
9. Has the woman bought no chairs? Yes, sir, she has bought
twenty- six.
10. How many letters have they written this (esta) week ? They have
written three hundred and ten letters and one thousand and one notes.
11. Which newspapers have you sent to your father ? I have sent him
numbers three, fifteen and eighteen.
12. Has he read them all ? He has read only number fifteen.
13. Has the butcher much money ? He has $1,000.
14. How much have you sent to your friend (fern.) ? I have sent
$111.17.
15. Whom do you wish to pay ? I wish to pay my tailor.
16. Where does your tailor reside? He resides in Vienna.
17. When have you written to Alexander? I have written to Alex-
ander to-day.
18. Have you received a letter from him to-day ? Yes, sir, I have re-
ceived six.
19. What day do you receive letters from France ? I receive them on
Tuesdays and Saturdays.
20. How many has your cousin written to you ? K"one.
LESSON XV.
Pronunciar, pronunciado.
Tocar, tocado.
Cantar, cant ado.
Reinar, reinado.
To pronounce, pronounced.
To touch, touched; to play,
played.
To sing, sung.
To reign, reigned.
Como. | How, like, as.
ORDINAL NUMBERS.
Primero (primer before a noun}.
Segundo.
Tercero (or tercer before a nouii).
First.
Second.
Third.
LESSON XV.
51
Cuarto.
Fourth.
Quinto.
Sexto.
Fifth.
Sixth.
Septimo.
Octavo.
Noveno, or nono.
Decimo.
Piano.
Violin.
Seventh.
Eighth.
Ninth.
Tenth.
Song.
Word.
Piano.
Violin.
Cancion.
Palabra.
Musi co.
Musician.
Guitarra.
Guitar.
Pianista.
Cantor.
Tonio or volumcn.
Pianist.
Singer.
Volume*
Ilistoria.
Arpa.
Obra.
History.
Harp.
Work.
Carlos.
Charles.
Musica.
Music.
Luis.
Enrique.
Key.
Trabajo.
Louis.
Henry.
King.
Work, labor.
Cantora, cantatriz.
Calle.
Avcnida.
Singer.
Street.
Avenue.
COMPOSITION
Como pronuncia Manuel el espauol ?
Lo pronuncia bien.
6 Toca V. la guitarra ?
No, scuor, toco el violin y cl piano.
<i Cauta V. canciones espanolas ?
No, seaor, canto canciones inglcsas.
(, Quicn reina en Rusia ?
Alejandro Segnndo.
<;.En que calle vive V. ?
Vivo en la calle Once.
6 Y V., dondc vive ?
Yo vivo en la calle Veinte y tres.
i Quc toca el musico ?
Toca cl arpa, el violin y el piano.
<; Ticne V. el primer tonio de mi libro ?
No, scuor, tengo el segundo.
s Ila leido V. el tomo terccro ?
No, sefior, he leido el cuarto.
Cuantos afios ticne V. ?
How docs Emanuel pronounce Spanish ?
lie pronounces it well.
Do you play the guitar ?
No, sir, I play the violin and the piaao.
Do you sing Spanish, songs ?
No, sir, I sing English songs.
Who reigns in Russia ?
Alexander the Second.
In which street do you live ?
I live in Eleventh street.
And where do you live ?
I live in Twenty-third street.
What does the musician play ?
He plays the harp, violin and piano.
Have you thefirst volume of my book ?
No, sir, I have the second.
Have you read the third volume?
No, sir, I have read the fourth.
How old are you ?
EXPLANATION.
61. The ordinals always agree in gender and number with
52 LESSON XV.
the noTin, expressed or understood, to which they refer, and may
be placed either before or after that noun ; as,
El primer tomo (or el tonio primcro).
El primer buen libro.
Los primeros cnadernos.
Las primcras Icccioncs.
El segundo tomo.
Las segundas intenciones.
The first volume.
The first good book.
The first copy-books.
The first lessons.
The second volume.
The second intentions.
It has been seen, in the list of ordinal numbers at the open-
ing of the present lesson, that primero and tercero lose the final
letter when they immediately precede their noun, or are separ-
ated from it only by an adjective. We may observe here, that
tercero is by some written entire ; the contracted form, how-
ever, is much to be preferred; as,
El tercer tomo. | The third volume.
62. The ordinals are not so frequently used in Spanish as
in English ; and, except primero, first, their place is generally
supplied by the cardinal numbers ; as, for instance, in speaking
of the days of the month, which are expressed by el dos, tres,
cuatro, etc., the second, third, fourth, &c. The following are
the principal cases in which the ordinals are employed: 1st,
with the names of sovereigns, popes, &c. ; 2d, in the enum-
eration of books, chapters, lessons, &c., and a few others;
but, even in these cases, after decimo, tenth, they are, by rea-
son of their great length, generally replaced by the numerals ;
as.
Carlos Quinto.
Pio Nono.
Capitulo decimo.
Calle Veinte y trcs.
Luis Catorce.
Charles the Fifth.
Pius the Ninth.
Chapter tenth.
Twenty-third street.
Louis the Fourteenth.
N. B. The definite article is not required in the above ex-
amples.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Pronuncia V. bicn el ingles? No, sefior, lo pronuncio mal.
2. i Es V. cantor ? No, sefior, pero toco.
3. i Que toca V.? Toco el violin.
LESSON XV. 53
4. i Canta bien su hcrmana de V. ? No, sefior, clla canta mal ; pero
toca bien el piano.
5. i Qu6 leccion cstudia Y. ? Estudio la cuarta.
G. i En quo calle vivo su padre de V. ? Vive en la calle Catorce.
7. i Quo toinos ha leido V. ? lie leido el primero, scgundo, tercero y
cuarto.
8. $ Cuantos tomos tiene la obra? Tiene seis.
9. i Quo libro lee V. ? Leo la historia de Carlos Qtiinto.
10. i Ha leido V. la historia de Enrique Octavo de Inglaterra ? Si,
sefior, la he leido.
11. gQue torao lee su hermana de V. ? Lee el noveno.
12. ^Cuanto dinero ha recibido V. hoy? lie recibido cincuenta y un
pesos.
13. i Cuantos hermanos tiene V. ? Tengo cinco.
14. i Cuantos afto.s tiene su hermana de V. ?. Tiene quince.
15. ^Cuanto ticmpo ha vivido V. en Paris? lie vivido seis anos.
16. ^Que nuinero tiene su casa? El doscientos seis (20C).
17. i Quo dia de la semana es hoy ? Hoy es miercoles.
18. i Qu6 hora tiene V. ? Las dicz.
19. i Cnantos dias tiene una semana? Tiene siete.
20. Ocho y doce g cuantos son ? Son veinte.
21. $ Cuantos afios tiene su papa de V. ? Tiene sesenta.
22. i Cuantos dias tiene el ailo ? Tiene trescientos sesenta y cinco (365).
23. ^Como ha leido V.? He leido despacio.
24. i Ha llevado V. mi piano al pianista ? Si, sefior, lo he llevado.
25. i Ha cantado V. mucho hoy ? Hoy he cantado poco.
26. i Cuando ha vendido V. su caballo ? Lo he vendido hoy.
EXERCISE.
1. "What book have you ? A music-book.
2. How many volumes has it? Three.
3. Which volume have you read ? The first.
4. Has your father not read the second volume ? No, sir ; but my
cousin lias read it.
5. What are you reading, miss? I am reading the History of Charles
the Fifth.
6. Who has sold your sister's History of England? She has sold it.
7. Who has bought the violin ? The pianist.
8. Where does he live ? In Seventeenth street.
9. In what street does the butcher live ? In Sixth avenue.
10. Have you bought good meat in the butcher's shop? The meat
(which) I have bought is very bad.
54
LESSON XV I.
11. What things have you sent to the tailor? I have sent stockings,
vests, and pocket-handkerchiefs.
12. What day of the week is to-day? Monday.
13. Is Monday the first day of the week? Xo, sir, it is the second;
Sunday is the first.
1-i. How much money does the merchant require ? He requires $1,500.
15. How much money do you wish to send to your friend? I wish to
send my friend $50.
16. Does he need much money? Yes, madam, he is very poor.
17. How many letters have your brothers written to Emanuel? Very
few.
18. How do your sisters pronounce Spanish? They pronounce it well
when they read, but not when they speak.
19. When do they write their exercises? When they have studied
their lessons.
20. And you, when do you write yours? When my brothers write
theirs.
21. How do the poor buy? The poor buy dear, and the rich buy
cheap.
22. Has your father sold his old horse ? He has sold it.
23. Have you read the History of Louis XVI. ? I have read volumes
first, second, and third.
ITaW-c.
Habl-aste.
Habl-6.
Habl-amos.
Habl-asteis.
Habl-aron.
Aprend-i.
Aprend-iste.
Aprend-io.
Aprend-imos.
Aprend-isteis.
Aprend-ieron.
LESSON XVI.
COXJTGATIOX Preterit Defin ite.
I spoke.
Thou spokest.
He spoke.
We spoke.
You spoke.
They spoke.
SECOXD COXJTGATIOX.
I learned.
Thou learnedst.
He learned.
We learned.
You learned.
They learned.
LESSON XVI.
55
Escrib-i.
Escrib-iste.
Escrib-i6.
Escrib-imos.
Escrib-istcis.
Escrib-i eron.
Pasar.
Aycr. Anoche.
Antes de ayer, or anteayer.
El aiio pasado.
El mes pasado.
La semana pasada.
Ante (prep.).
Ante todas cosas.
Ante todo.
Antes (ad.).
Delante (ad.).
Despues (ad.).
Mas (ad.).
Menos (ad.).
Que (conj.).
THIRD CONJUGATION.
I wrote.
Tbou wrote.
He wrote.
We wrote.
You wrote.
They wrote.
To pass, to spend (in relation
to time).
Yesterday. Last night.
The day before yesterday.
Last year.
Last month.
Last week.
Before, in the presence of.
Before all things.
Above all.
Before (refers to time). .
Before (refers to place).
Afterwards, after.
More.
Less, fewer.
That, than.
COMPOSITION.
6 Uablo V. con mi padre ?
Si, seuor, liable con el antes de aycr.
(, Han aprendido Yds. su leccion ?
Si, seuor, la hemos aprendido hoy.
(, Cuando escribio Y. a su hermana ?
Escribi la semana pasada a mi hermana.
i, Ha recibido V. sus periodicos del
mes pasado ?
Si, sefior, los he recibido hoy.
6 Cuando vendio Y. su caballo ?
Lo vcndi el afio pasado.
(, Estudia Y. antes 6 despues de comer ?
Estudio antes dc comer.
6 Hablo V. mucho ante el juez ?
Did you speak with my father ?
Yes, sir, I spoke with him the day be-
fore yesterday.
Have you learned your lesson ?
Yes, sir, we have learned it to-day.
When did you write to your sister ?
I wrote to my sister last week.
Have you received your newspapers of
last month (last month's newspapers)?
Yes, sir, I have received them to-day.
When did you sell your horse ?
I sold it last year.
Do you study before or after dining (or
dinner) ?
I study before dining.
Did you speak much before the judge?
56
LESSON XVI.
Xo, scfior, liable muy poco.
t ; Que Hbro tiene V. dclante ?
Tengo la graruatica cspauola.
,; E-eribi6 V. sus i-art,i> ''.
Si, scfior, las cseribi cl dorningo pa?a-
do.
6 Come V. mcnos que TO ?
Xo, scfior, como mas que V.
f ; Ha visto V. a su amigo ?
i, seiior, lo vi aver.
6 Donde lo vio V. ?
Lo TI dclante de la iglesia.
i Hablo V. con 61 1
Si, sefior ; pero muy poco.
6 Ha comido V. 'i
Si, scfiora, he comiJo pan y be bebido
vino,
g Ha leido V. y cstudiado sus ejercicios ?
Si, sefior, Ics he leido y estudiado.
i Ha escrito V. a su padre ?
Si, sefior, escribi ayer.
i, Cuando ha recibido V. las cartas de
el?
Las he recibido hoy.
6 Ha cnviado V. mis cartas despues de
las suras '?
Las he enriado antes.
(, Hablo V. ante el rey ?
Xo, sefior, hable ante el juez.
6 Cuanto tiempo ?
Xo, sir, I spoke very little.
What book have you before you ?
I have the Spanish grammar.
Did you write your letters ?
Yes, sir, I wrote them last Sunday.
%
Do you eat less than I ?
Xo, sir, I eat more than you.
Have you seen your friend ?
Yes, sir, I saw him yesterday.
Where did you see him ?
I saw him before (in front of) the
church.
Did you speak with him ?
Yes, sir ; but very little.
Have you dined ?
Yes, sir, I have eaten bread and drunk
wine.
Have you read and studied your exer-
cises ?
Yes, sir, I have read and studied them.
Have you written to your father ?
Yes, sir, I wrote yesterday.
When have you received the letters
from hmi ?
I have received them to-day.
Have you sent my letters after yours ?
I (have) sent them before.
Did you speak before the king ?
No, sir, I spoke before the judge.
How long ?
EXPLANATION'.
63. The PRETERITE DEFINITE refers to a time past, and
generally specified in the sentence, and denotes the thing or
action past in such a manner that nothing remains of that
time in which it was done; as,
Escribi a mi padre en cl auo 1864.
Aprendi el francos el afio pasado.
I wrote to my father in the year 1864.
I learned French last year.
In colloquial language, the preterite indefinite (which has
been treated of in Lesson xii.), is sometimes, though incorrect-
LESSON XVI. 57
ly, substituted for the preterite definite. The following example
will show the impropriety of such a substitution :
He escrito a mi padre ayer. | I have written to my father yesterday.
Nothing remains of yesterday ; it is time past, and has no
connection with the present ; and, as it has been already seen
that the preterite indefinite conveys an allusion to the present
time, the incorrectness of the foregoing example is at once
apparent.
We may, however, say with propriety :
Escribi la carta a las tres, a las cua-
tro, etc.
I wrote the letter at three o'clock, at
four o'clock, &c.
for the time specified is completely past.
64. ANTE. This preposition means before, or in the pres-
ence of; as,
Hablo ante cl juez. | He spoke before the'judge.
And it sometimes denotes priority, antecedence, &c. ; as,
Ante todas cosas. | Before all things.
65. MAS, more ; MENOS, less, fewer. These two adverbs are
used to form the comparative degree of several adjectives,
which last they always precede in the sentence ; as,
El vino es mas caro quo la cerveza.
Yo soy mas rico quo V.
Wine is dearer than beer.
I am richer than you.
AVhen used to express some quality or circumstance re-
specting verbs, their usual place in the sentence is immediate-
ly after these last ; as,
Yo escribo mas. I I write more.
Tu hablas menos. \ Thou speakest less.
It is needless to observe here, that mas and menos are them-
selves the comparatives of mucho and poco, respectively.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. gCuando hab!6 V. con el abogado? liable con 61 anteayer.
2. i Ha hablado V. con mi hermana ? No, sefior, hable ayer con su
amigo de V.
3. i Ha hablado V. con el pianista? Si, sefior, le liable ayer.
58 LESSON XVI.
4. i Ha aprendido V. su leccion ? No, sefior ; pero he escrito el
cjercicio.
5. j Han aprendido ellos sus lecciones de frances? Si, sen or, ban
aprendido las de frances y de espafiol.
6. i Cuando apreudio su hermana a tocar el piano ? Aprendio el afio
pasado.
Y. i Ha leido V. la historia de los Estados Unidos ? He leido el toino
primero y el segundo.
8. ^Ila leido V. la carta de su hermana y la de su amiga? He leido
la de mi hermana; pero no la de mi amiga.
9. i Que ha leido V. hoy ? He leido los ejercicios de la semana pasada.
10. ^Caando compr6 V. su cahallo? Lo compre el mes pasado.
11. ^Donde hablo V. con mi padre? Delante de su casa de V.
12. i Ley6 V. la carta de su padre antes que la de su hermano ? Xo,
seiior, la lei despues.
13. Cuando residio V. en Paris? Residi antes que V.
14. i Cuantos afios tiene su hermana ? Tiene veinte.
15. i Cnantos pesos pago V. el mes pasado al comerciante ? Quinien-
tos.
16. i Ha llevado V. mis zapatos al zapatero? Si, sefior, los lleve ayer.
17. Cuando ha recibido V. su dinero? Lo recibi anteayer.
18. i Ha escrito V. despues que escribi6 nii padre? No, sefior, escribi
antes.
19. ^Escribi6 V. su carta despues que recibi6 la de su hermano? Si,
sefior, la escribi mucho despnes.
20. i Ha hablado V. con la madre antes que con la hija ? No, sefior,
liable antes con la hija que con la madre.
21. ^Estudio V. su leccion de ayer? No, sefior, estudie la de antes de
ayer ; pero no he estudiado la de ayer ni la de hoy.
22. i Habl6 V. ante el juez ? Si, sefior, liable ante el jtiez y ante el rey.
23. i Habla V. mas que yo ? No, sefior, hablo menos ; pero escribo
mas.
EXERCISE.
1. Did you speak more yesterday than to-day? I spoke less; but I
read more.
2. How many newspapers did your father read yesterday ? Very few.
3. How old is your sister ? She is nineteen.
4. Who took the vest to the tailor last year? The baker took it.
5. How much did the tailor pay to the baker afterwards ? ."59.10.
6. Did he receive the vest after or before the coat ? He received it
after.
LESSON XVII. 59
V. Did yoxir sisters .sing yesterday ? Yes, sir, they sang and played.
8. What did they sing ? They sang Spanish songs and played on the
piano.
9. Have you (plural) played to-day? No, madam, we have .not
played ; but we have written our French exercises.
10. How many words have your brothers written in Spanish to-day?
Fewer than last Thursday.
11. Do they speak more English than Spanish? No, madam, they
speak more Spanish.
12. What have the singers received from Paris ? They have received
some good songs and French music.
13. Have the singers (fern.) enough Spanish music? Yes, sir, they
have received some to-day.
14. Did they sing well last month? Not very well.
15. Who sang in your house the day before yesterday? Nobody sang.
16. How long did you reside in Vienna? Five years, six mouths, and
thirteen days.
17. How many churches has Paris? Paris has many churches.
18. How did your cousins pronounce their Spanish yesterday? Very
well.
19. Are you a musician? Yes, madam.
20. Is your sister a pianist or a singer^ or does she play on the guitar ?
She sings and plays on the piano.
21. When did you speak before the judge? The day before yesterday
and last week.
22. Do you sing much with the musicians ? I sing a little ; but be-
fore all things I study my Spanish lessons.
Trdbajar.
Mandar
Quien, quienes,
A quien, a quienes.
LESSON XVII.
To work.
To command, to send.
Cual, cuales.
Cuyo (masc. sing.}, cuya (fem.~\
sing.}.
Cuyos (masc. plural), cuyas
(fern, plural).
Varios. Algunas veces.
Who.
Whom, to whom.
What (inter.}, who, that, or which.
Which one, which ones.
Whose, which, or of whom.
Several. Sometimes.
60
LESSON XVII.
lictrato.
Portrait.
Criada.
Pan talon es.
Criado.
Pantaloons.
Servant.
Iglesia.
Calle.
Concicrto.
Concert.
Plaza.
Teatro.
Mercado.
Theatre.
Market.
Compafiia.
Juana.
Parque.
Juan.
Park.
John.
Trabajador.
Ultimo (a).
Workman.
Last.
Servant.
Church.
Street.
Square, market.
Company.
Jane.
COMPOSITION.
^Es viejo cl caballero d quien Y. hablo
en cl concicrto ?
No, sefior, pero lo es la senora que ha
hablado con Y. en el teatro.
I A. quien busca Y. ?
Busco a la senorita d quien Y. busca.
I Quien es el joven que ha hablado con
Y.?
Es un criado del hotel.
El muchacho que lee, y al cual Y. man-
do trabajar, es mi hermano.
La gramatica que el tiene, y en la cual
estudia, es mia.
El caballero cuya casa Y. compro es
amigo mio.
El comerciante cuyo vino Y. compro,
vende muy barato.
El libro en que leemos.
La senora a quien hable es mi madre.
I Manda Y. sus nifios al Parque Cen-
tral?
j A quien manda Y. trabajar ?
A mis criados.
; Juan !
j Sefior ! que manda Y. ?
Quiero la comida.
i En donde trabajan hoy los trabaja-
dores ?
Trabajan en la callc.
Is the gentleman to whom yon spoke
at the concert old ?
Xo, sir ; but the lady who spoke to you
at the theatre is (so).
For whom do you look ?
I am looking for the young lady that
you look for.
Who is the young man that has spoken
with you ?
He is a servant in the hotel.
The boy that reads, and whom you
commanded to work is my brother.,
The grammar which he has, and in
which he studies, is mine.
The gentleman whose house you bought
is my friend.
The merchant whose wine you bought
sells very cheap.
The book in which we read (or which
we read in).
The lady I spoke to is my mother.
Do you send your children to the Cen-
tral Park ?
Whom do you command to work ?
My servants.
John !
Sir ! what do you wish ?
I wish my dinner.
Where do the workmen work t-vday ?
They work in the street
LESSON XVII. 61
EXPLANATION.
66. QUIEN. The relative pronoun quien refers to persons
only, and is always preceded by the preposition a, when gov-
erned by a verb ; as,
El horabre d quien V. quiere. | The man whom you love.
67. WHO, coming immediately after its antecedent, is
translated by que ; when it stands alone, or is governed by a
preposition, it is rendered by quien ; as,
El muchacho que cstudia.
La muchacha con quien hablas.
The boy who studies.
The girl with whom you speak.
68. CUAL and QUE relate to persons and things ; as,
El muchacho que lee, y al cual V.
mando trabajar, es mi hermano.
La gramatica que el tiene, y en la
cual estudia, es mia.
The boy that reads, and whom you
commanded to work, is my brother.
The grammar which he has, and in
which he studies, is mine.
69. CUYO also refers to persons and things, but agrees with
the word by which it is immediately followed ; as,
El caballero cuya casa V. compro es
amigo mio.
El comerciante cuyo vino V. compro
vende muy barato.
The gentleman whose house you bought
is my friend.
The merchant whose wine you bought
sells very cheap.
This pronoun partakes of the nature, both of the relatives
and the possessives.
70. In English the preposition does not always precede the
relative pronoun ; but in Spanish it is indispensable to place
the preposition before the relative ; as,
El libro en que leemos.
The book which we read in (or, in
which we read).
71. The relative pronoun can never be suppressed in Span-
ish ; so that we cannot say, as in English, the lady I spoke to,
but, in full ; as,
La sefiora d quien hable, es mi
madre.
The lady to whom I spoke is my
mother.
, CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I A quin mand6 V. ayer al mercado ? Mande a mi criado Juan.
2. ^Cuiil de sns criados trabaja mas? Juan trabaja mas que todos.
3. i Quien cs el liombre a quien V. busca? El hombre a quien busco
es trabajador.
62 LESSON XVII.
4. i Quien es el caballero con quicn hablo V. ayer en el concierto ?
Es un cliscipulo mio.
5. i A quien quiere V. hablar ? Quiero hablar a la seuorita quo toca
el piano.
6. ^Corno pasaron Yds. el tiempo en el campo ? Lo pasamos muy
bien en compania de nuestros amigos.
V. i Es Frances el comerciante a quien compro Y. el cabal! o ? Si,
seiior, es el Frances cuya casa compro V.
8. $ Manda (envia) V. sus ninos al Parque Central? Si, senor, los
mando al Parque Central.
9. i Con quien los envia V. ? Con sus primos.
10. Quo libro quiere V. leer? Qniero leer el de Manuel.
11. 3X0 quiere V. leer el quo yo tengo? No, seiior, quiero leer el de
Alejandro.
12. i A quien manda V. trabajar ? A mis criados.
13. jJuau! ;Seuor! i Que manda V. ? Quiero la comida.
14. i Cauta V. bien ? Xo, sen or ; pcro la seuorita que reside en su
casa de V. canta rauy bien.
15. Estudia V. muclio? Xo, senor, pero trabajo mucho.
16. $ Ha estndiado V. lioy su leccion? No, sefior, la estudie aver; boy
be escrito los ejercicios.
17. i C6mo pronuncia su maestro de V. el espafiol ? Lo pronuncia
bien ; pero pronuncia muy mal el ingles.
18. g Toco V. ayer el piano en casa de sus amigos ? Si, senor, tocamos
y cantamos.
19. $ Que cantaron Vds.? Cantamos canciones espafiolas y la cau-
cion americana llamada, " The Star Spangled Banner."
20. j Caballeros ! g Quieren Yds. tomar chocolate 6 cafe ? Querenios
beber vino.
21. i Cuantos dias pas6 V. en el campo ? Pase toda una semana.
22. i Porque no pasa V. un mes en el campo con nosotros ? Porque
necesito residir en la ciudad.
23. i Cual de sus amigos habla bien espafiol ? El que estudia mucho
habla bien.
24. i Cual de sus hermanos estudia mas ? El mas peqnefio.
25. i De quien recibe V. cartas ? De mi padre y mis hermanos.
20. i Es de V. el libro en el cual estudia su hermano ? Xo, senor, es
suyo.
27. i Trabajo Y. mucho ayer? Xo, sefior; pero he trabajado mucho
hoy.
28. i Cuando estudia Y. sus lecciones ? Las estudio los miercoles y los
sabados.
LESSON XVII. 63
EXERCISE.
1. "Whose is the portrait (which) you sent me yesterday ? It is the
portrait of my brother who lives in Germany.
2. Which portrait have you sent to Charles? I have sent no portrait
to Charles ; but I have sent mine to the musician.
3. With whom did you spend last week ? I spent last week with my
cousin John.
4. In which city of France does the pianist's brother live ? He lives
in the city in which your sister Jane resides.
5. To whom did you send the first volume of your work ? I sent it
to Louis.
C. Whom do you order to work ? My servant John.
7. Who is the lady you are looking for ? She is the mother of the
singer (fern.} whose piano Charles bought last year.
8. With whom did you send your children to the concert last night ?
I sent them with a servant.
9. With which servant did you send them ? With one of mine (my
own).
10. In which church does Miss Garcia sing ? She sings in Twenty-
eighth street church.
11. How did you (plural) pass the time in Philadelphia? "Very well.
12. Did you study many lessons ? We studied very little, and neither
read nor wrote our exercises.
13. How much did you write the day before yesterday? I studied a
good deal, but wrote little.
14. Which volumes of Kobertson's History has your son ? He has re-
ceived the first, second, third and fourth.
15. Did you buy any books at the bookstore in Walker street? Yes,
madam, I bought the History of Charles V. and some music books.
16. Whom have you paid with the money I sent you? I have paid
the man who worked in my house yesterday.
17. Does your servant work much ? No, sir ; but she reads a great deal.
18. From whom do you receive letters every day ? I receive letters
from Henry on Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays, and from my father
on Tuesdays.
19. Who has the boots that I bought in Fourth avenue? John has
taken them to his cousin who lives in Philadelphia.
20. Has your servant bought any good meat iu the market ? He has
not bought any to-day.
21.. How many songs have you received from Spain ? I have received
several from Spain and two from England.
64
LESSON XVIII.
22. Have you sung any of them ? None ; but ray sister sang one or
two last night at the concert.
23. Are they very good? One of them is very good, and my cousin
(fern.) sings it very well.
21. How many pencils does the hatter wish ? He wants twelve pen-
cils and three penknives.
25. Does Louisa play much on the piano ? Xo, sir, she is very lazy,
and will neither play nor study.
26. The tailor has a handsome vest, very cheap ; will you buy it ? I
do not wish to buy a vest ; but I want pantaloons.
27. Has he any pantaloons ? He has none, he sold them all last week.
LESSOX XVIII.
Ir.
Voy.
Vas.
Va.
Vamos.
Yais.
Van.
Fui.
Fuiste.
Fue.
Fuimos.
Fuisteis.
Fueron.
Vcnir.
Ycngo.
Yienes.
Yiene.
Yenimos.
Venis,
Yienen.
PRESENT.
Togo.
I go (or, am going).
Thou goest.
He, or she, goes.
"VTe go.
You go.
They go.
PRETERIT DEFINITE.
I went.
Thou wentcst.
He, or she, went.
"We went.
You went.
They went.
PRESENT.
To come.
I come (or, am coming).
Thou comest.
lie, or she, comes.
We come.
You come.
Thev come.
LESS OX XVIII.
65
PRETERIT DEFINITE.
Vine. I came.
Viniste. Thou earnest.
Vino. He, or she, came.
Vinhnos. AVe came.
Vinisteis. You came.
Vinieron. They came.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
Singular.
Neuter.
Esto.
Eso.
Masculine. Feminine.
Este. Esta.
Ese. Esa.
Aquel. Aquella.
Estos. Estas.
Esos. Esas.
Aquellos. Aquellas
Ello.
Aqui, aca.
Ahi.
Alii, alia, aculla.
Porque.
Porque.
Lejos.
Cerca.
Otro. Amhos.
Ni uno ni otro (ind. pro.).
Aquello.
Plural.
No neuter.
This.
Hurt.
That (yonder).
Profesor.
Discipulo.
Lado.
Jardin.
Professor.
Pupil.
Side.
Garden.
These.
Those.
Those (yonder).
It.
Here.
There.
Why.
Because.
Far.
Near.
Another. Both.
Xeither.
Juana. Jane.
Discipula. Pupil.
Zapateria. Shoemaker's shop.
Manteca. Butter.
COMPOSITION.
4 De quien es este libro quc lengo aqui?
Ese quc tiene V. ahi, y este que yo ten-
go aqui, son del profesor.
gQuicn 63 aquel caballero que reside
alii del otro lado de la calle ?
Aquel cabellero es mi discipulo.
Whose book is this which I have here ?
That one which you have there, and this
one which I have here, are the pro-
fessor's.
Who is that gentleman who resides
there on the other side of the street ?
That gentleman is my pupil.
06
LESSON XVIII.
i Adonde va V. ?
Voy alia, al otro lado del parque.
6 Xo quicre V. venir aca dc este lado ?
Xo, sefior, voy alia del otro lado.
6 Quiere V. comprar aquel libro ?
Xo, sefior, quiero comprar ese otro.
Quierc V. venir al teatro con nosotros ?
Eso quiero.
(, Llevo V. aquello a la sastreria ?
Lo Ilev6.
^ Manda V. algo mas ?
No, eso es todo.
6 Envio V. el chaleco a la sastreria, y
las botas a la zapateria ?
Envie lo uno y lo otro (or ambos).
i Fucron a su casa de V. el medico
francos y cl profesor aleman ?
Vino aqucf, pero no vino cste.
(, Hablo V. de aquello a mi madre ?
No, sefior, pero liable de ello a su pa-
dre de V.
En mi casa y en la de su hermano de Y.
El jardin de esta casa y el de la que V.
compro.
Estc caballo v cl de mi amigo.
Where do you go ?
I go there to the other side of the park.
Will you not come here to this side ?
Xo, sir, I go there to the other side.
Do you \vish to buy that book ?
Xo, sir, I wish to buy that other one.
Will you come to the theatre with us ?
That (is what) I wish.
Did you take that (thing) to the tailor's ?
I did (or I took it).
Do you command anything more (or
have you any more commands) ?
Xo, that is all.
Did you send the vest to the tailor' ^
and the boots to the shoemakei '
I sent both.
Did the French physician and the Ger-
man professor go to your house ?
The former came, but the latter did not
come.
Did you speak of that to my mother ?
Xo, sir, but I spoke of it to your father.
In my house and in your brother's.
The garden of this house and that of
the one you bought.
This horse and my friend's (that of ray
friend).
EXPLAXATIOX.
72. The demonstrative pronouns este, this, ese, aquel, that,
are thus declined :
Este, ese, aquel (masc. sing.).
Esta, esa, aquella (fern. sing.).
Estos, esos, aquellos (masc. plural).
Estas, esas, aquellas (fern, plural).
Esto, eso, aquello (neuter).
73. ESTE is used to point out what is near to us, and cor-
responds to the meaning of the adverb here ; ese points out
that which is at some distance, and corresponds to the adverb
LESSON XVIII.
67
there; and aquel denotes remoteness, and corresponds to the ad-
verb yonder ; as,
Eslc libro quo icii'-O a->ui. This book which I have here.
Esc que done V. alii. Thai one which you have there.
Aquel que llcvo V. add. Thai one which you took there.
74. When the pronouns este, ese precede the adjective otro,
another, they may sometimes be written together, so as to form
but one word with it, in the following manner :
Estotro. "I Estotros. "
Estotra. I This other. . Estotras. These others.
Esotro. I That other. Esotros. Those others.
Esotra. j Esotras. .
These forms, however, are now rarely used.
75. The demonstrative pronouns, in their quality of adjec-
tives, are used also as neuter. J?so, that, is the most used of
the three, and almost as much as the personal pronoun lo, and
in the same manner; as,
Eso se hara. That will be done.
I Eso es ! That is it !
76. The former and the latter is translated in Spanish by
aquel and este ; thus,
La aplicacion y la pcreza hacen al
hombre muy diferente ; aquella le
eleva y esta le rebaja.
77. When in English the demonstrative pronoun that is
followed by the preposition of, or either of the relatives who^
which, expressed or understood, referring to a noun already
mentioned, the definite article, in the corresponding number
and gender, is employed in Spanish ; as,
Industry and slothfulness have a very
different effect upon man ; the former
elevates him, the latter lowers him.
En mi casa y en la de su hermano de
V.
El jardin dc esta casa y el de la quo
V. compro.
Este caballo y el do mi amigo.
In my house and in your brother's.
The garden of this house and that of
the one (which) you bought.
This horse and my friend's (i. c., that
of my friend).
78. English personal pronouns, followed by a relative not
agreeing in case, are generally rendered in Spanish by the de-
monstrative : as.
Quiero comprar a aqucllos que venden
barato.
I want to buy from those who
cheap.
sell
68 LESSON XVIII.
79. AQUI, ALLI, ACA, ALLA. Although the adverbs aqui,
here, alii, yonder, are employed as synonyms of acd, here, and
alld, yonder, respectively, we must observe that aqu't and all't
refer to a place more circumscribed or determinate than acd,
alia ; for the same reason we can say, mas acd, mas alia,
nearer, farther ; and we cannot say, mas aqu't, more here, mas
all't, more there.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Viene V. del campo? No, sefior, voy alia.
2. $De dondc viene su amigo de V.? Viene de Espafia.
3. i Ad6nde va V. este aflo? Este afio quiero ir a Paris.
4. i De quien es ese retrato que tiene V. ahi ? Este quo tengo aqui
es el de mi padre, y aquel que tiene su amigo de V. alii, es dc mi madre.
5. #Es discipulo de V. el caballero que reside en aquella hermosa
casa? No, sefior; pero su prima. que reside de este otro lado de la calle,
es mi discipula.
6. i Va. V. u su casa todos los dias ? No, sefior, voy alii los Junes,
miercoles y viernes.
7. i Cuantas lecciones toma el caballcro que vino ayer ;i su casa dc V. ?
Toma dos a la semana.
8. i Quien trabaja mas, el profesor 6 el discipulo? El uno y el otro
trabajan mucho.
9. $Es este nifio su hijo de V. ? Si, sefior, cs mi hijo Manuel.
10. [Manuel! ^quieres venir aqui a mi lado? No, sefior, no quiero ir.
11. ^Porque? Porque quiero ir con mi padre.
12. i Cuantos nifios tiene V. ? Tengo cinco, tres nifias y dos nifios.
13. ^Quiere V. venir con nosotros al Parque Central? No, sefior, por-
quo tengo que ir con mis nifios al campo.
14. gHa de ir V. (tiene V. que ir) hoy? Si, sefior, tengo que ir hoy.
15. 2 No quiere V. venir aca de este lado? No, sefior, voy alia del
otro lado.
16. ^Llevo V. aquello a la sastreria? Si, sefior, lo lleve.
17. ^Manda V. algo mas? No, eso estodo.
18. ^Hablo V. de aquello a mi amigo? No, sefior; pero liable de cllo
a su hcrmano.
19. j En donde trabajo V. ayer? Trabaje en la casa de V. y en la de
su hermano.
20. ^ Trabajo V. en mi jardin 6 en el de mi amigo ? Trabaje en el uno
y en el otro.
LESSON XVIII. 69
21. i Adonde va V. a trabajar hoy ? Yoy a trabajar en el jardin de
esta casa y en el do la que Y. compro el ailo pasado.
22. i Llevo Y. mis botas a la zapateria, y compro V. el pan que necesita-
mos ? Lleve las botas ; pero no be comprado el pan.
23. i Que llevas alii, Alejandro? Llevo mis libros.
24. iQue quiere tu hermano? Quierc pan y manteea.
25. ^ Pago V. al sastre? Si, senor, ayer pague al sastre, y hoy he pa-
gado al zapatero.
26. i De quiun son esos caballos ? Este es el de mi padre, y aquel es el
de mi hermano.
27. $Cual es el de Y. ? Yo no tengo ninguno.
28. i Quiere Y. tenor uno ? Quiero tener mucbos.
29. i Escribio Y. la carta y la leccion ? Escribi aquella, pero no ho
escrito esta.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you go to church every day ? I only (solo) go on Sundays.
2. "Where is your servant Jane going? She is going to the bakery to
buy bread.
3. Do your music teacher (maestro) and your Spanish professor come
to your house every day ? The former comes every day, but the latter
only comes on Tuesdays and Saturdays.
4. "Which of the two works the more ? Both have to work much.
5. "Which of the two horses is the older, this one here or that one
there f This one here is the younger.
6. Have you that letter which you received last Monday ? I have not
that one; but I have here the one* I received the day before yesterday.
7. Who has written these two histories, that of France and that of
America ? Rollin has written the former, and Robertson the latter.
8. Does the piano teacher live far from here ? The piano teacher
does not live far from here ; but the French professor lives very far.
9. Is that all (lo que) your brother has studied? Yes, sir, that is all.
10. "Which lesson have you studied? I have studied the one (In que)
we read the other day.
11. Which did we read, the fifteenth or the sixteenth? "We read both.
12. Which one do you wish to read first ? I require to read the former.
13. Why do you require to read the former? Because I have not
studied it well.
14. Which exercise have you there? I have mine and my brother's.
15. Is your brother not coming to take his lesson to-day? No, sir, he
has to take his music lesson to-day.
16. John! Sir!
* La que.
70
LESSON XIX.
17. Have you taken my coat to tlie tailor's? Yes, sir, I took it last
night.
18. Have you paid that man? Yes, sir, I have paid him to-day.
19. How much have you paid him ? I have paid him three dollars and
seventy-five cents.
20. Why did you pay him three dollars and seventy-five cents ? lie-
cause he worked one day in this garden, and two in that of the Twenty-
third street house.
21. How many pupils have you? I have thirty: seventeen learn
Spanish and the thirteen others French.
22. Do they study well ? Some of them study very well ; but none
write their exercises well.
23. When do you sing and play on the piano? I study my lessons
before singing and playing.
24. Who is that gentleman that came from Vienna last month? That
gentleman is the one to whom I spoke last week at the concert.
ILacer.
Hacicndo.
Hecho.
Hago.
Ilaces.
Ilace.
Hacenos.
Haceis.
Ilacen.
Ilice.
Hiciste.
Hizo.
Ilicimos.
Ilicisteis.
Ilicieron.
Partir.
Marchar.
Cambiar,
PRESENT.
LESSON XIX.
To do, or to make.
Doing, making.
Done, made.
I do, or make.
Thou doest, or makest.
He does, or makes.
We do, or make.
You do, or make.
They do, or make.
PEETEEIT DEFI^TE.
I did, or made.
Thou didst, or madest.
lie did, or made.
We did, or made.
You did, or made.
They did, or made.
To set out, to depart, to divide.
To go, set out, set off, to march.
Change.
LESSON XIX.
PREPOSITIONS.
Para.
Asi.
For.
Entrc.
Ilasta.
Hacia.
Sin. Hasta donde.
Pedro.
Escritor.
Escribano.
Estado.
M6dico.
Cuarto.
Aragon.
Tio.
Peter.
"Writer.
Notary.
State.
j Physician.
( Doctor.
Boom.
Aragon.
Uncle.
For, or in order to.
So, thus.
By, for, through.
Between, among.
Until, even.
Towards.
Without. How far.
Helena.
Helen.
Escritora
Tienda.
Provincia.
Writer (female).
Store, shop.
Province.
Manera.
Manner.
Escritura.
Writing, convey-
.
ance.
Comida.
Dinner.
COMPOSITION.
una
<, Quo hizo V. aycr en su cuarto ?
Estudle mi leccion.
i Quc ha hecho V. hoy ?
He cscrito los ejercicios.
i, Quo hace el zapatero en la zapatcria V
Hace zapatos y botas para V.
,jTiene V. papcl para cscribir
carta ?
Si, scSora, lo tcngo.
,; Quiere V. cscribir u :a eavta par n.i
hermano ?
i Para quien cs la carta ?
Es para Manuel.
Yo parto para Madrid.
I Para clonde parte V. ?
Parto para los Estados Unidos.
j Hablo V. a su padre por rai hermano ?
liable por el a mi padre y a mi tio.
What did you do yesterday in your
room ?
I studied my lesson.
What have you done to-day ?
I have written my exercises.
What does the shoemaker do in the
shoe-shop ?
He makes shoes and boots for you.
Ilave you paper to write a letter ?
Yes, madam, I have.
Will you write a letter for my brother ?
For whom is the letter ?
It is for Emanuel.
I set out for Madrid.
For where do you set out ?
I set out for the United States.
Did you speak to your father for my
brother ?
I spoke foi 1 him to my father and to my
uncle.
LESSON XIX.
4 Habla V. bien el francos ?
Lo hablo muy bien, y hasta paso por
frances.
I Por cuanto vendio V. el caballo ?
Lo vendf por doscientos cincuenta pesos.
(, Xccesita Y. enviar por algo ?
X'ecesito enviar por el medico.
I Por quo envia Y. ?
Envio por vino.
<j Yive Y. para comer ?
Xo, sefior, como para vivir.
,; Marcho ayer mucho el regimiento
Septimo.
Marcho hasta el Parque Central.
Do you speak French well ?
I speak it very well, and I eveo pass
for a Frenchman.
For how much did you sell the horse ?
I sold it for two hundred and fifty dol-
lars.
Do you want to send for anything ?
I want to send for the physician.
What do you send for ?
I send for wine.
Do you live to eat ?
Xo, sir, I cat to live.
Did the Seventh regiment march much
(far) yesterday ?
They marched to the Central Park.
EXPLANATION.
80. PAEA and POR. As both these prepositions very fre-
quently answer to the English for, they are apt to be con-
founded by foreigners. Such confusion may, however, be
avoided by bearing in mind the following rules :
Para expresses aim, object, destination.
Por conveys the idea of want or requirement, substitution,
favor, duration of time, direction, &c. Examples :
WITH PARA.
Tapelpara escribir.
Paper for writing.
Este libro es para Y.
This book is for you.
Tartopara Xucva York.
I start for Xew York.
Comer para vivir.
To eat to live.
Trabajo/xzra ganar la vida.
I work in order to earn a living.
Para el domingo.
For Sunday.
Estc caballo C3 para su padre do Y.
This horse n for your father.
Lo hare para tu hermano.
I shall do it for thy brother.
"WITH POE.
Escribopor mi hermano.
I write for my brother.
Cambie mi sombrero por el suyo.
I changed my hat for his.
Pasa por docto.
lie passes for a man of learning.
Yendera la casa por diez mil pesos.
He will sell the house for ten thousand
dollars.
Trabajo por ganar la vida.
I work to (endeavor to) earn my living,
liable por tu amigo.
I spoke for (in favor of) thy friend.
Envio por pan.
I send for bread.
Lo hare por tu hermano.
I will do it for thy brother (for thy
brother's sake).
LESSON XIX. 73
81. ENTRE. The general meaning of this preposition is
between and amongst] as,
Entre los dos.
Entre V. y yo.
Entre todos.
Between the two.
Between you and me.
Amongst all.
82. HASTA signifies till, until, even, to, as many as, GJ far
as : as.
Ilasta el domingo.
Pasaron hasta mil.
Voy hasta el Farque Central.
Estudio cl espauol hasta que lo
Till (or until) Sunday.
As many as a thousand passed.
I go as far as the Central Park.
He studied Spanish till he learned it.
aprcndio.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. gEscribio V. la carta para su padre, y los ejercicios de la leccion de
espafiol ? Hico aquello ; pero no he hecho esto.
2. gTiene V- papel para escribir una carta? Si, scfior; pero tengo
que escribir antes mis ejercicios.
3. i Hizo el sastre mi casaca ? La Mzo.
4. i Qu6 ha hecho el zapatero ? Ha hecho unas botas para V. y unos
zapatos para Manuel.
5. i Para donde parte V. ? Parto pava los Estados Unidos.
6. ^Quiere V. escribir una carta por mi hermano? Si, senor, gpara
quien es la carta? Es para Dn. Manuel.
7. I Hablo V. d su padre por mi hermano ? liable por el u mi padre
y u mi amigo.
8. i Habla V. bien el francos ? Lo hablo muy bien, y hasta paso por
francos..
9. i Por cuanto vendio V. la casa ? La veudi por ocho mil pesos.
10. i Por quo envia V. ? Envio por mis libros.
11. ^ Vive V. para comer? No, scfior, como para vivir.
12. gMarcho V. ayer con el regimiento Septimo? Marche hasta el
Parque Central.
13. $Es Dn. Pedro escritor? No, senor, Dn. Pedro es escribano.
14. gDe que manera hace Y. eso? Lo hago asi.
15. $Que hizo V. ayer? Estudie la leccion de espafiol, y hoy he
escrito los ejercicios.
16. ^Tiene V. que trabajar mas que yo? Tcngo que escribir mas que
V. ; pero no teugo que trabajar mucho.
17. g Ilacia donde van Vds. ? Vamos hacia la iglesia.
18. $En donde vive V. ? Vivo en la Cuarta avenida niimcro, trcscien-
tos treinta y oclio, entre las calles Ycinte y cinco y Veinte y seis.
4
74 LESSON XIX.
19. Para que quiere V. mi libro ? Para leerlo.
20. i Quien pago la comida ? La pagamos entre todos.
21. i March an bien estos hombres ? Marchan muy bien.
22. i Por donde pasaron Vds. cuando fueron a la iglesia ? Pasamos
por la callo Veinte y tres.
23. jEs esa seflora escritora? Si, sefior, y escribe muy bien.
24. j De qu6 pais es V. ? Soy de Espafia.
25. i De qu< provincia ? De Aragon.
26. i Pronuncian bien el espafiol en Aragon ? Lo pronuncian muy bien.
27. gllablan bien el ingles en los Estados Unidos ? Lo liablan bien.
28. i Quiere V. vcnir a mi casa para comer con nosotros ? No, sefior,
porque tengo que ir a comer a casa de mi amigo.
EXERCISE.
1 . How far did the Seventh regiment march yesterday ? They (it)
marched to the Central Park.
2. Did your sister set out yesterday for Philadelphia? No, madam,
she did not set out yesterday.
3. When does she start ? She starts to-day.
4. What does your servant look for ? He looks for my cousin's (/cm.)
letter.
5. What do you do to learn Spanish ? I study the lessons of my
Spanish grammar and read good writers.
6. To whom did you speak last night at the concert ? I spoke to the
physician for Peter.
7. Who is that man who came to your house last night? He is my
brother's servant.
8. Do you speak Spanish well ? No, sir ; but I speak Italian very
well, and I even pass for an Italian (italiano).
9. How did your uncle spend the day yesterday ? Studying his les-
sons and writing to Madrid.
10. Will your uncle write a letter for (in favor of) Charles ? He will
write it.
11. Do the young ladies want to send for anything? They want to
send for the physician.
12. For what do they send for the physician? To speak for their
servant (fern.).
13. Where does he live ? In Fifth avenue, between Twenty -fourth
and Twenty-fifth streets.
14. Where do you send ? I send to the shoemaker's.
15. What do you send there for? For some boots and shoes for
Emanuol.
LESSON XX. 75
16. How do you write your exercises without ink? I write them with
a pencil.
17. How did Louis write his exercise the other day? He and his sis-
ter wrote it between them.
18. Have you sold your old hat? I changed it for Peter's new one.
19. "Will you pass me that paper to write a letter for my brother?
This paper is not for letters.
20. "What is it for ? It is for my exercises.
21. Whose letter is that ? This letter is for your mother.
22. Where did the singer go last year ? He went to Aragon, a prov-
ince in Spain.
23. What have you sent for ? I have sent for notliing.
2-i. Will you go for wine? I do not want wine, but bread and meat.
25. Do you live to eat ? No, sir, I eat to live.
26. Have you read the newspapers to-day? No, sir; but I have
marched with my regiment.
27. Has the tailor made my vest ? Yes, sir, he made it last week.
28. Will you go to the pianist's for my piano? No; I have to study
my lessons.
29. Do you write before studying? No; I study first and write after-
wards.
Salir.
Saliendo.
Salido.
Salgo.
Sales.
Sale.
Salimos.
Salis.
Salen.
Sali.
Salisto.
8ali6.
TEESEXT.
LESSON XX.
To go out, to leave.
Going out.
Gone out.
I go out.
Thou goest out.
He goes out.
"We go out.
You go out.
They go out.
PEKTEKIT DF.FIXITE.
I went out.
Thou wentest out.
He went out.
LESSON XX.
Salimos.
Salisteis.
Salieron.
Tanto.
Cuanto.
Como.
Presto.
Pronto.
Temprano.
Tarde.
Mejor.
Peor.
Mayor.
Menor.
Mcjor.
Peor.
Prudcntc.
Imprudente..
Pronto.
Presto.
Callado.
Hablador.
Limpio.
Vivo.
Situado.
Cansado.
Mejico.
Mexico.
We went out.
You went out.
They went out.
So, so much, as much.
How much.
As, how.
Soon, speedily.
Promptly, quickly.
Early.
Late.
Better.
Worse.
Greater, larger, older.
Smaller, younger.
Better.
Worse.
Prudent.
Imprudent.
Prompt, quick, ready.
Ready, prepared.
Silent, taciturn.
Talkative.
Cleanly, clean.
Lively, alive.
Situated.
Tiresome, tired.
Fecha.
Date.
COMPOSITION.
^Es Alejandro tan prudente corno su
hermano ?
No, sefior, Alejandro cs inuy impru-
dente. Es tan imprudente como ha-
blador.
6 Son los comerciantes mas ricos quc
los medicos ?
Algunos son mas ricos ; pero otros lo
son menos que los medicos.
Es Nucva York mayor que Madrid ?
Madrid es menor que Nueva York.
Is Alexander as prudent as his brother?
No, sir, Alexander is very imprudent.
He is as imprudent as talkative.
Arc merchants richer than physicians ?
Some are richer; but others are less
rich than physicians.
Is New York larger than Madrid ?
Madrid is smaller than New York.
LESSOX XX.
4 Quo caballo cs rncjor, el de Y. 6 cl
mio?
El de V. cs mayor ; pcro es pcor que cl
mio.
i, Tiene V. mas de cincucnta pesos ?
Xo tcngo mas que veinte j tres.
El tiene tanto dinero como V.
Yo estudio tanto como Y. ; pero no
aprendo tanto.
El habla espanol tan bien como Y. ;
pero no lo escribe Ian bien.
Kl tiene tanto cuanto quiere.
Tengo tan'.os libros j tanto papcl como
cl.
Yo cscribo mas que Y. ; pcro V. lee
mas que yo.
El habla mcnos que Y.
Which horse is the better, yours or
mine ?
Yours is larger; but it is worse than
mine.
Have you more than fifty dollars ?
I have not more than twenty-three.
He has as much money as you.
I study as much as you ; but I do not
learn so much.
He speaks Spanish as well as you ; but
he does not write it as well.
He has as much as he wishes.
I have as many books and as much
paper as he.
I write more than you ; but you read
more than I.
He speaks less than you.
EXPLANATION.
DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
83. The adverbs tanto and cuanto lose the last syllabic, to,
before an adjective or another adverb.
84. The comparative of equality is formed by placing the
adverb tan, so or as, before, and como, as, after the adjec-
tive ; as,
Alejandro cs tan prudente como su
hcrmana.
Alexander is as prudent as his sister.
85. CUAX may be employed, if the comparative is followed
by an adjective instead of a noun ; as,
Es tan hablador cuan imprudente. | He is as talkative as imprudent.
But como is more frequently used.
86. The comparative of superiority is formed by placing
the word mas, more, before the adjective, and que, than, after
it; as,
El es mas rico que Y. | He is richer than you.
87. The comparative of inferiority is formed by placing
the word menos, less, before, and que after ; as,
El es iitinos rico que Y. | He is less rich than you.
88. MAYOR, greater or larger; MEXOE, smaller; MEJOK, bet-
78 LESSON XX.
ter, and PEOE, worse, are already in the comparative degree,
and do not require mas or menos before them ; as,
Esta casa es mayor 6 mcnor que esa.
Este caballo es mejor 6 pcor que el
This house is larger or smaller than
that one.
This horse is belter or worse than mine.
89. Than, after comparatives coming before numeral ad-
jectives, is also generally translated by de in the affirmative,
and que in the negative ; as,
Tengo mas de cincuenta libros.
No tengo mas que veinte pesos.
I have more than fifty books.
I have not more than twenty dollars.
90, Comparison may also take place with relation to n<>
verbs, and adverbs; but its form is so similar to that laid do\vn
for the adjectives that the learner will not re'[iiire any other
explanation than the examples given in the Composition.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. $ Sale 'V. tanto como su hermano? !N"o, seilor, mi hermano sale
mas que yo.
2. ^Cuando salimos nosotros? ]S"osotros, salimos muy pronto.
3. ^Salio su hermano temprano de casa? Xo, sefior, salio tnrde.
4. ^Salieron Yds. pronto del teatro? Si, senor, salimos muy pronto.
5. g Sale V. presto a la calle ? Si, sefior, salgo muy presto.
C. ^Salieron Vds. temprano de la iglesia? Salimos tarde.
7. ^Cual de estas dos gramdticas es mejor? La que V. tienc delantc
es mejor que la otra.
8. i Es malo este caballo ? Es peor que el de V.
9. i Es buena la pluma de su hermano de V. ? Es mejor que la mia y
peor que la de V.
10. i Cuanto dinero tiene V. ? Tengo cuarenta pesos.
11. ^Cuantos libros tiene su hermana? Tiene tantos como su prima.
12. Cuanto tiempo vivi6 V. en Paris? Yivi cuatro afios.
13. i Es su hermano mayor 6 menor que V. ? Es mayor.
14. i Quien de su familia de V. habla mejor el ingles? Mi hermano
menor lo habla mejor que todos.
15. gDonde lo aprendi6? En Londrcs.
16. i Cnanto tiempo vivio alia? Seis afios.
17. i Cuando vino de alia ? Vino el afio pasado.
18. ^Cual de Vds. dos estudia mas? El estudia menos que yo; pero
aprende mas.
LESSON XX. 79
19. Cual de sus hermanos de V. es mas prudente? El mayor es muy
callado y prudente ; pero el menor es vivo e imprudente.
20. i Salieron Vds. del concicrto antes que nosotros ? No, sefior, sali-
mos despucs.
21. i Cuundo salio su amigo dc Vds. de NuevaYork? Salio el ines
pasado para Paris.
22. i Cuando sale V. para Filadelfia ? No salgo hasta la semaaa que
viene.
23. ^Ilacia donde vive su amigo de V. ? Vivo luicia la plaza.
24. i For donde vino V. de Paris ? Vine por Inglaterra.
25. g En d6nde vive V. ? En la Quinta avenida entre las calles Trcinta
y Treinta y uiui.
26. $Qu6 caballo es mejor, el de V. 6 el mio? El do V. es mayor;
pero no tan bueno como el mio.
27. I Tiene V. mas de cien pesos ? Tengo mas de ciento.
28. i No tiene V. mas quo tres pesos ? No, sefior, no tengo mas que
dos.
29. ^Habla V. espailol mejor que Luisa? No, senor, lo hablo peor;
pero lo escribo mejor que ella.
30. i Salio V. ayer temprano ? Sail tcmprano ; pero boy be salido
muy tarde.
EXERCISE.
1. Have you written your letter? Yes, sir, I bave written it.
2. What is the date of it (what date has it)? The 6rst of this month.
3. Do you {plural) go out much ? We go out this year as much as
last year.
4. Which is the better grammar, mine or yours? Yours is better
than mine, but not so large.
5. Which of the two goes out earlier? you or your cousin? I go out
earlier than he.
6. Are merchants as rich as singers ? Some singers are richer than
merchants.
7. Is this horse not as lively as that one ? That one is a little more
lively than this one.
8. Is Mexico as large as the United States ? No, miss, the latter are
much larger than the former.
!.. When do the musicians leave for Havana ? They leave next week
(the week that is coming).
10. When did you take your music lesson? I took it the day before
yesterday, early.
80 LESSON XX.
11. Did your brothers take theirs as early as you ? No, sir, they took
theirs very late.
12. Which of you two speaks Italian "better? He speaks it better
than I : but I write it better than he.
13. Do you sing much every day? I do not sing as much as last
month.
14. Does the notary write as well as the physician ? The former
writes better than the latter.
15. Is that man not very tiresome ? He is very talkative and very
tiresome.
1C. Is Lewis as prudent as his uncle? He is more prudent than he;
but not so taciturn.
17. Are you less tall (alto) than Louisa? No, she is less tall than I.
18. Is your uncle, the merchant, as rich as your father? No, sir, my
father is richer than he.
19. When do your cousins leave for Paris? They leave very soon.
20. Is your servant as cleanly as ours ? Ours is more cleanly than
yours, but not so talkative.
21. Have you any paper for writing? I have as much paper and as
much ink as I wisli for.
22. Is Henry very prudent ? He is as imprudent as talkative.
23. Who goes to the bakery quicker than John? Nobody goes as
quick as he.
24. Have the merchants sent as much silver to France as to Spain ?
They have sent more to France.
25. Did the shoemaker make the shoes as quickly as the tailor made
the coat ? The former made the shoes quicker, because he worked more
than the latter.
26. Which works the later, the tailor or the baker? The latter does
1
not work so late as the former.
27. Are your father's books larger than ours ? Yours are smaller than
Ms.
28. Are those horses bad ? They are worse than the others.
29. Will you go with your friend (fern.) to the concert ? I will not go.
30. Why will you not go ? Because it is very late, and I have to play
on the piano.
31. Where did your mother learn Spanish? She learned it here.
32. And does she speak it well? She does not speak it as well as slm
writes it.
33. How much money have you ? I have not more than seven dollars.
' 34. lias your friend as much as you ? He has more than I ; he has
received more than two hundred dollars from Spain.
LESSON XXI.
81
LESSON XXI.
Saber.
Sabicndo.
Sabido.
Se.
Sabcs.
Sabe.
Sabemos.
Sabeis.
Saben.
Supe.
Supiste.
Supo.
Supimos.
Supisteis.
Supieron.
Amar.
Viajar.
Trinidad (fern).
Sabio, sapientisimo.
Ilubil, habilisimo.
Dificil, dificilisimo.
Facil, facilisimo.
Corto, cortisimo.
Alegre, alegrisimo.
Triste, tristisimo.
Feliz, felicisimo.
Largo, larguisimo.
Fuertc, fortisimo.
Jmevo, novisimo.
Fiel, ildclisimo.
Alto, altisimo.
4*
To know.
Knowing.
Known.
I know.
Thou knowest.
He knows.
AVc know.
You know.
They know.
I knew.
Thou knewest.
He knew.
We knew.
You knew.
They knew.
To love.
To travel.
Trinity.
"Wise, learned ; very, most or ex-
'trernely wise.
Clever, skilful ; very clever.
Difficult, very or most difficult.
Easy ; very or most easy.
Short ; very or most short.
Cheerful ; very or most cheerful.
Sad ; very or most sad.
Happy ; very or most happy.
Long ; very or most long.
Strong ; very or most strong.
New ; very or most new.
Faithful ; very or most faithful.
Tall ; very or most tall.
82
LESSON XXI.
IP.EEGULAR COMPAEATH
Bueno, niejor, 6ptimo.
Malo, peor, pesiino.
Grande, mayor, maximo.
Pequeflo, menor, minimo.
Alto, superior, supremo.
Bajo, inferior, infiino,
E3 AXD SfPEBLATITES.
Good, better, best.
Bad, worse, worst.
Great, greater, greatest.
Small, smaller, smallest.
High, J m 'g her , highest.
( superior, supreme.
L W) {Inferior, } lo st '
Combinada. 1 Combined.
COMPOSITIOX.
Es el mas sabio de mis discipulos.
Esta senorita es la mas amable.
La mayor parts del regimiento.
La mayor parle, 6 los mas, de los solda-
dos.
La mejor casa de la callc.
Manuel, j cuales son los profesores que
saben mas en tu escuela ?
El profesor de aritmetica sabe mucho,
el de francos, sabe mas ; pero el
profesor de historia es el que mas
sabe.
i, Es bueno este caballo ?
Este caballo es muy bueno ; pero el de
V. es mejor, y el mio es el mejor de
los tres.
i Es esta leccion muy fiicil ?
Es facilisima.
f, Es su casa de V. tan alta como la mia ?
La mia es mas alta que la de V., y la
de su hermano de V. es la mas alta.
Ese Frances es muy caballcro.
Es alegre 6 triste su amigo de V. ?
Es alegrisimo ; pero es muy nifio.
,:Es muy j oven?
Xo, senor, es riejo.
He is the wisest of my pupils.
This young lady is the most amiable.
The greater part of the regiment.
The greater part, or the most, of the
soldiers.
The best house in the street.
Emanuel, which are the professors in
your school who know the most ?
The professor of arithmetic is learned,
the French professor is more learned ;
but the professor of history is the
most learned.
Is this horse good ?
This horse is very good ; but yours is
better, and mine is the best of the
three.
Is this lesson very easy ?
It is most, or very easy.
Is your house as high as mine ?
Mine is higher than yours, and your
brother's Is the highest.
That Frenchman is very gentlemanly.
Is your friend cheerful or sad ?
. He is most cheerful ; but he is very
childish.
Is he very young ?
Xo, sir, he is old.
EXPLANATION.
91. English superlatives ending in cst, or formed by most,
LESSON XXI. 83
arc rendered by placing the definite article before the Spanish
comparative ; as,
El mas sabio. -
La mas amablc.
The wisest.
The most amiable.
Most of the soldiers.
92. Most, or most of, when followed by a noun (singular),
is translated by la mayor parte ; as,
La mayor parte del regimiento. | Most of the regiment.
But if the noun is in the plural, most may also be translated by
mas, with the corresponding article ; as,
La mayor parte, 6 los mas, de los
soldados.
93. The preposition in, after the English superlative, is
translated by de in Spanish ; as,
i.a mejor casa de la calle. | The best house in the street.
94. Those superlatives which in English are formed with
the aid of very, most, &c., may in Spanish be formed either
with the help of muy before the adjective, or by adding to the
latter the termination 'tsimo ; as,
MIIAJ habil, or habilfozmo.
Muy facil, or facih'szmo.
Very clever.
Very, or most easy.
The termination isimo is, however, more expressive of the
positive superlative degree than is the adverb muy.
95. Observe that adjectives ending in a vowel drop that
vowel on taking the termination isimo ; as,
Corto, cort&z'mo.
Alegre, alegrfctmo.
Triste, tristzsimo.
Short, very short.
Cheerful, most cheerful.
Sad, very sad.
96. There are other superlatives ending in errimo; as,
Celebre, celebemmo.
Salubre, saluberrimo.
Celebrated, most celebrated.
Salubrious, very salubrious.
But these forms are not the most used.
97. Adjectives ending in the following letters change them
before admitting the termination isimo : .
Co becomes qu ; as, rico, riywisimo.
Go " ffu ; as, largo, larywisimo.
Ble " bil] as, amable, a,mafo7isiino.
Z " c ; as, feliz, felicisimo.
84 LESSON XXI.
98. Superlatives in isimo irregularly formed :
Hueno, good, makes bonlsiino, very good.
Fucrte, strong, makes fortisimo, very strong.
Nuevo, new, makes novisimo, very new.
tiabio, wise, makes sapientisimo, very wise.
Sacro, sacred, makes sacratisimo, very sacred.
fid, faithful, makes JUUUimo, very faithful.
99. Irregular comparatives and superlatives:
Bueno, mejor, optimo.
Malo, peor, pesimo.
Grande, mayor, maximo.
Pequeuo, menor, minimo.
Alto, superior, supremo.
Bajo, inferior, infimo.
Mucho, mas, lo mas.
Poco, mcnos, lo menos.
All these adjectives form also a superlative in tsimo, accord-
ing to the rules already given ; as, malisimo, poqu'isimo, mu-
chtsimo.
They admit also a comparative formed with mas or menos ;
and a superlative with muy ; as,
Henos malo.
Los mas grandes.
Muy pequefios.
Less bad.
The greatest.
Very small.
100. Substantives used adjectively admit the degrees of
comparison; as,
Es mas caballero que tii.
Es muy hombre.
Este hombre es muy niiio.
He is more gentlemanly than thou.
He is very much of a man, or very
manly.
This man is very childish.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. gSupo V. su leccion antes de aver? La supe muy Men, y la s6
todos los dias.
2. i Ama V. a su hermano ? Le amo.
3. |Le ama a Y. su hermano? Xo lo se.
4. A quien nma "V. ? Amo a mis papas.
5. i Ha viajado V. muclio? Ho viajado mucho en Europa; pero he
viajado muy poco en America.
LESSON XXI. 85
G. g Sabe V. el espafiol ? Muy poco, scfiorita ; pcro lo aprendo.
7. Y V., sefiorita, ^lo sabe V. ? No, sailor, no lo se, ni lo aprendo.
8. Porqu6 no estudia V. el espafiol ? Porque aprendo la musica, y
DO tengo ticmpo para estudiarlo.
9. $Es muy hdbil su profesor de musica de V. ? Es habilisimo.
10. jSabe V. cantar? No, sefiora, pero se tocaruun poco el piano.
11. &No sabe V. tocar la guitarra? No, sefiora, toco el violin.
12. ^Aprende bien ese caballero el espanol? Estudia muchd" y lo
apren.de muy bien.
13. Qui6n aprendo mas pronto el espafiol, las sefioras 6 los caballeros ?
Las seiioras aprenden mucbo mas pronto.
14. 2 Quien es el mas sabio de sus discipulos de V. ? La sefiorita N., es
la mas sabia de todos mis discipulos.
15. i Cual de estos niflos es el mejor ? El quo ama a sus padres, y es-
tudia mas sus lecciones, es el mejor.
10. jMarcb.6 todo el regimiento 7. por Broadway basta el Parque
Central ? No, sefior, pero la mayor parte de 61.
17. ^Fueronal campo los soldados? Los mas de los soldados fucron
alia.
18. gEs esta la mejor casa delacalle? No, senor, esta casa es muy
buena ; pero la de Astor es mejor y la de Stewart es la mejor do la
ciudad.
19. jSabe V. quien paso por aqni anocbe? No, sefior, pero se quien
paso por la 5 a aveuida.
20. i Es bueno este caballo ? Este caballo es muy bueno ; pero el de
V. es mejor, y el mio es el mejor de los tres.
21. gEs caballero esc Frances? Si, sefior, es muy caballero.
22. ^Es ese bombre alegre 6 triste? Es muy alegre; pero es muy
nifio.
2:!. ^Fue V. al concierto la scmana pasada? Fui antes de ayer.
24. i Quiere V. tocar el piano ? Quiero, pcro no se.
25. ^Ha venido su amigo do V. ? Ha venido.
26. jCudndo vino ? Vino antes de ayer.
27. i Cuaiido sale V. ? Quiero salir la semana quo viene.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you know Frencb ? No, sir, but my brother knows it.
2. Is that physician clever ? He is most clever.
3. Which is the most skilful physician ? Ours is the most skilful iu
the city.
4. Is Miss Louisa very amiable ? Yes, she is very amiable.
86 LESSON XXI.
5. Alexander, which is the most learned teacher in your school i
The English teacher is learned, the teacher of arithmetic is more learned ;
but the Italian teacher is the most learned of all.
G. Is your school-mistress cheerful, Louisa? Yes, mamma, she is most
cheerful and very happy.
7. Did you know, your lessons well yesterday? Yes, I knew them
very well, better than to-day's, for I have not had time to study them.
8. Does your brother know his every day ? I do not know ; but he
works very little.
9. Is he taciturn ? No, sir, he is very talkative.
10. Which is the largest church in New York? Trinity Church is the
largest and the handsomest in the city.
11. "Whose is that handsome house there ? It is my uncle's.
12. Is it not the finest in the street ? No ; Mr. Emanuel's is the finest
in the city.
13. Did the 12th Regiment go out to march yesterday? Not all, but
the greater part went out.
14. Did not all the soldiers march through Fourteenth street last
Thursday ? The most of them marched through Fourteenth street, but
not all.
15. Is your Spanish lesson for to-day difficult ? Yes, it is the most
difficult (that) I have had this month.
16. Is your French lesson very difficult, Charles ? No, sir ; my French
lesson for to-day is the easiest one in the grammar.
1Y. Which is the best Spanish grammar? The Combined Spanish
Grammar is the best and the easiest.
18. Is not your table very low for writing? Yes, it is very low; I
write better on a higher one.
19. Will you take this small pen to write your exercise? No; I do
not write well with my own, which is very small, but larger than
yours.
20. Have you travelled much in Europe ? I have travelled very much
in America, but very little in Europe.
21. Which is the longest street in New York ? Broadway is the
longest in the United States.
22. Do you love your parents ? Yes, I love them very much.
23. Why does Margaret not love her cousin? She does not love him
because he is very taciturn.
24. Which of your pupils is the wisest ? Henry and Louisa are the
wisest of all my pupils.
25. Who reads the most newspapers in your house? I do not know ;
but papa reads a great many.
LESSON XXII.
87
20. To whom have you paid the most money to-day ? I have paid
most to the tailor, because he has worked most for me.
27. Does not your washerwoman work very much ? Yes, she works
very much, but earns (ganar) very little money.
28. Whose horse is the most lively, yours, Charles', or mine ? Charles'
is lively, mine is more li vely, but yours is the liveliest of the three.
29. In what street do you live? I live in Twenty -third street.
30. Is that a fine street ? Yes, it is one of the finest streets up-town
(of the upper part (parte alto) of the city).
Estar
Estoy.
Estas.
Esta,
Estamos.
Estais.
Estan.
Prestar.
Hablando.
Estudiando.
Comprando.
Buscando.
Necesitando.
Aprendiendo.
Vendiendo.
Leyendo.
Bebiendo.
Comiendo.
Escribiendo.
Eecibiendo.
Viviendo.
Residiendo.
Teniendo.
Siendo.
Queriendo.
LESSON XXII.
GERUSTDS.
To be (in a certain place,
state or condition).
I am.
Thou art.
He is.
We are.
You are.
They are.
To lend.
Speaking.
Studying.
Buying.
Looking for.
Needing, wanting, requiring.
Learning.
Selling.
Eeading.
Drinking.
Eating, dining.
Writing.
Receiving.
Living.
Residing.
Having, holding.
Being.
"Wishing, desiring, loving.
88
LESSON XXII.
Llevando.
Enviando.
Tomando.
Pagando.
Pronunciandcf.
Cantando.
Tocando.
Haciendo.
Pasando.
Trabajando.
Mandando.
Yendo.
Yinicndo.
Estando.
Norte, sur, este, oeste.
Carrying, taking.
Sending.
Taking.
Paying.
Pronouncing.
Singing, chanting.
Touching, playing.
Doing, making.
Passing.
Working.
Sending, commanding.
Going,
Corning.
Being (in a certain state, &c.).
North, south, east, west.
COMPOSITION.
I Es su casa dc V. grande ?
Es grande ; pero estd en mal estado.
6 En que calle estd la casa de su herma-
no de V. ?
Estd en la Cuarta avenida.
I Es Luisa bonita ?
Es muy bonita.
i Estd ella contenta ?
No estd contenta, porquc estd enferma.
I Es enfermiza ?
Lo es mucho.
(, DC qui6n cs csta casa ?
Es de mi hermano.
Estd muy bicn situada.
Esta carta cs para Margarita.
Nueva York estd entre el rio del Norte
y el del Este.
El senor "Walker cs pintor.
La mesa cs de madera.
Estuve en casa hasta que Y. llcgo.
Mi amigo estd para partir.
Estoy sin comer.
f, Qu6 estd Y. haciendo ?
Estoy escribicndo.
Is your house large ?
It is large ; but it is in a bad state.
In what street is your brother's house ?
It is in (the) Fourth Avenue.
Is Louisa pretty ?
She is very pretty.
Is she contented ?
She is not contented, because she is
sick.
Is she sickly ?
She is very much so.
Whose house is thb V
It is my brother's.
It is very well sitiuit. .!.
This letter is for Maip;
New York is between the Kcrll
East rivers.
Mr. Walker is a painter
The table is of wood.
I was at home until you arrived.
My friend is about to set out.
I have not dined (I am without eating).
What arc you doing ?
I am writing.
LESSON XXII. 89
De quien es V. amado ?
JSoy amado dc mis niiios.
Manuel es bucno.
Manuel cstd malo.
i Esta Pedro causado ?
Estii cansado y cs cansado.
i Porque esttl tail callado Alejandro ?
Forque es callado.
P.y \vhom arc you loved ?
I am loved by my c'r.Hren.
Ernanuel is good.
Emanuel is ill.
Is Peter tired ?
lie is tired, and he i.; tiresome.
Why is Alexander so silent ?
Because he is taciturn.
EXPLANATION.
101. SER and ESTAK. These two verbs have in English but
one equivalent TO BE ; but their respective significations and
uses are so materially different as to constitute one of the chief
difficulties of the Spanish language. By careful observation,
however, of the folio wing simple rule, the learner will, we are
assured, be enabled to overcome that difficulty, and know ex-
actly when to use the one and when the other of these two
verbs.
102. Whenever we wish to express what persons or things
are, and their mode of being, in an absolute manner, SER is the
verb to be employed ; but if we desire to express the state or
condition of persons or things, and the mode of that state or
condition in a relative manner, then ESTAK must be used.
The following examples will serve to render the application
of this rule more clear :
1st. Esta casa cs grande.
2d. Esta casa estd limpia.
3d. Esta casa estd en Broadway.
4th. Luisa es bonita.
5th. Luisa cs feliz.
Cth. Luisa estd contenta.
7th. Luisa cstd enferma.
8th. Luisa cs enfermiza.
This house is large.
This house is clean.
This house is in Broadway.
Louisa is pretty.
Louisa is happy.
Louisa is content.
Louisa is sick.
Louisa is sickly.
In the first example we use SER to express what kind of a
bouse the one referred to is i. e. large ; in the second, ESTAK,
inasmuch as we desire to express how, or in what state the
house is, i. e. in a clean state ; ESTAR is also employed in the
third, sixth and seventh examples, the object being to make
known respectively ichere the house is, and in what state or
90
LESSOR XXII.
condition Louisa is OY finds herself ; while in the fourth, fifth
and eighth SEE again comes into play, seeing we wish to desig-
nate Louisa's mode of being in an absolute manner.
From the above general rule may be deduced the following
observations :
1st. That SEE must be used whenever we wish to express
possession, use, purpose or destination ; to point out the nation-
ality, profession or calling of persons ; the place of production
of things or the materials of which they are composed ; the
pimple fact of existence, the occurrence of events; and, finally,
as an auxiliary in forming the passive voice of verbs.
2d. That ESTAK is to be employed in speaking of situation
or position, place, state or condition, in making the progressive
form in ndo (corresponding to the English ing] of other verbs ;
and, lastly, to govern verbs in the infinitive mood with the aid
of a preposition, or past participles without such aid.
N". B. The verb ESTAE can never be used with the present
participles of ir and venir.
Examples of the uses of SEE and ESTAE :
SEE.
La casaca cs de mi hermano.
The coat is my brother's.
La carta es para Margarita.
The letter is for Margaret.
El senor Walker es pintor.
Mr. Walker is a painter.
Este vino es de Espana.
This wine is from Spain.
La mesa es de madera.
The table is of wood.
Has sido prudente en hacerlo asi.
Thou hast been prudent in so doing
Hoy es la celebracion.
The celebracion is to-day.
Son las diez.
It is ten o'clock.
Fite el caso como yo escribi a V.
The case was as I wrote to you.
Soy amado.
I am loved.
ESTAE.
Esta casa estd bien situada.
This house is well situated.
Xueva York estd cntre el rio del
Norte y el del Este.
New York is between the North and
East rivers.
Estuve en casa hasta que llego.
I was at home until he arrived.
El cstd escribiendo.
He is writing.
Mi amigo estd para partir.
My friend is about to set out
Estoy por no hacerlo.
I am inclined not to do it.
Estamos siu comer.
We have not dined (or eaten).
Esta carta csld fechada en Madrid.
This letter is dated from Madrid.
LESSON XXII.
91
N. B. As it frequently occurs that, iu perfect accordance
with the rules of grammar, the same sentence may be construed
with either SER or ESTAR, though conveying entirely different
ideas, it is essential to inquire thoroughly into the respective
value of these two verbs, in order to avoid the confusion which
must necessarily arise from their misapplication. The impor-
tant nature of this remark may be seen from the following
examples :
WITH SER.
Manuel es bucno.
Emanucl is good.
Juan cs mulo.
John is bad (or wicked).
Pedro cs cansado.
Peter is tiresome.
Juana cs viva.
Jane is lively.
Alejandro cs callado.
Alexander is taciturn.
Este nifio cs limpio.
This child is cleanly.
Esta naranja es agria.
This is a sour orange (i. c. of the sour
species).
WITH ESTAE.
Manuel csld bueno.
Emanuel is well.
Juan csld malo.
John is sick.
Pedro cstd cansado.
Peter is tired.
Juana estd viva.
Jane is alive.
Alejandro estd callado.
Alexander is silent.
Este nino estd limpio.
This child is clean.
Esta naranja estd agria.
This orange is sour (i. c. unripe).
What is said in the course of the present lesson relative
to SEK and ESTAR, being all that is requisite to enable the
student to determine which of the two is to be used in any
ordinary case, his attention shall not again be called to them
until we come to treat of their idiomatic uses.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Que esta haciendo el muchacho ? Esta estudiando su leccion.
2. i Ila estudiado V. la suya ? La estudie ayer.
3. i De qnic'ii cs V. amado ? Soy araado de mis nifios.
4. gEsta V. escribiendo sus ejercicios? No, sefior, estoy cscribiendo
una carta.
5. i Esta Margarita cansada ? Margarita no esta cansada ; pero es
cansada.
6. j Porquo esta Pedro tan callado ? Porque es callado.
7. i Para quien cs esta carta ? Es para V.
92 L E S S O X X X 1 1 .
8. 2 En donde csta situada Xucva York? Esta situada cntre el rio del
Xorte y el del Este.
9. $Es Y. Espafiol? Xo, sefior, soy Americano.
10. $Es ese caballero abogado? Xo, sefior, es medico.
11. i Como esta Alejandro ? Estu bueno.
12. $Es Alejandro buen muchacho ? Es bueno.
13. ^Estuvo Y. ayer en mi casa? Estuve alii hasta quo su padro do
Y. vino.
1-i. ; DC quc es cstc tintero? Es dc rnadera.
15. ;Es grand e su jardiii de Y. ? Es grandisimo ; pero esta en inal
estado.
16. ^En que calle esta su casa de Y. ? Esta en la Cuarta avenida.
17. ^Es bermosa la casa de su amigo de Y. ? Es hermosisima.
18. $Es Luisa feliz? Luisa es muy feliz; pero no esta contenta, por-
que no vino Y. a verla (to see her).
19. $Es Y. enfcrmizo? Xo, sefior; pero estoy enfermo.
20. i De quien es aquella casa tail alta ? Es de un amigo mio ; pero
qaiere venderla porque esta mal situada en esta calle tan fca.
21. i Cuando parte Y. ? Xo se, quiero partir boy, porque tengo mucbo
que hacer.
22. i Partio su amigo de Y. aycr ? Xo, sefior, ha partido boy.
23. i Fue Y. a la iglesia el domingo pasado ? Si, sefior, voy a la iglcsia
todos los domingos, cuando no estoy enfermo.
24. i Yive su amigo dc Y. en el campo ? Xo, sefior, reside en la
ciudad.
25. [ Que bace en la ciudad ? Trabaja de abogado.
26. i Que bace V. ? Yo vendo y cornpro : soy comerciantc.
27. i Paso Y. por Paris, cuando fuu a Madrid ? Si, sefior, y por otras
mucbas ciudades de Francia y Espafia.
28. i . Yiaja Y. mucbo? He viajado mucbo; pero no viajo mas.
29. i Yiaj6 Y. en Mejico? Si, sefior, estuve alii el afio pasado.
30. i Es bonito pais ? El pais es bermosisimo.
EXCERCISE.
1. "Wbere is your bouse situated ? In Eleventh street.
2. Is it very large? Xo, sir, it is not as large as my uncle's.
3. Which of the three languages* English, French or Spanish, is the
richest ? The Spanish is much richer than the other two.
4. Do you speak Spanish ? Xo, madam ; but I am learning it.
5. Do you and your sister take a lesson to-day? Xo, our teacher is
not coming (does not come) to-day, he is sick.
* Lcnguas.
L K s s o x X x 1 1 . 93
C. What lesson arc you at (in). We are at the twenty-second, one
of the most difficult in the grammar.
V. Is Louis very taciturn ? he speaks very little. No, sir, he is not
taciturn ; but he is silent to-day, because he is unwell.
8. "Why is Henry so cheerful to-day? He is cheerful because he has
received letters from his father and mother.
9. Is he a good boy ? lie is a very good boy ; he is studying his
Italian lesson.
10. How is your friend to-day ? Ho is much better than yesterday.
11. Where is that wine from that Charles is drinking ? It is from Spain.
12. Has your father been prudent in selling his horse ? He has been
most imprudent in selling it.
13. Whom do you love ? I love my father and mother, and I am loved
by them.
14. Where is that letter from ? It is (comes) from Paris.
15. Have you (plural) dined to-day? .No, sir, we have not dined;
our servant is very ill.
1C. What do you do every day to pass the time ? Sometimes I sing
and play on the piano, and at others I read the newspapers and go out
to ;walk (pasear).
17. What does Mr. Emanuel do ? He is a merchant.
18. For whom is that letter that Louisa is writing? It is for her
cousin (fern.).
19. Is Alexander a tiresome boy? No, madam, but he went to walk
very early, and he is tired.
20. Was Louis at your house yesterday ? Yes, sir, he was there until
my uncle came.
21. How is your uncle to-day? He is very well ; he is about to set
out for Paris.
22. Is Henry tired ? No ; but he is very tiresome.
23. Whose book is that ? It is my friend's ; but he wants to sell it,
because it is very badly written.
24. How much docs he want for it ? He wants five dollars and a half.*
25. Is it in French ? No, sir, it is in Spanish.
2G. When do you (plural) leave for Europe ? We leave very soon.
27. Have you a garden at your house ? Yes, sir, I have a very fine
garden.
28. Is it very large ? It is very large.
29. What is your friend doing in Paris ? He is studying law (for a
lawyer).
30. And you, what do you do in Philadelphia ? I work as a notary.
31. Whom is this letter from? It is from the pianist, and for you.
* Mcdio.
94
LESSON XXIII.
Habl-are.
Habl-aras.
Habl-ara.
Habl-aremos.
Habl-areis.
Habl-aran.
Aprend-ere".
Aprend-eras.
Apr end-era.
Aprend-eremos.
Aprend-ereis.
Aprend-eran.
Escrib-ire.
Escrib-iras.
Escrib-ira.
Escrib-iremos.
Escrib-ireis.
Ecrib-iran.
Desear.
Practicar.
Bailar.
Principiar.
Acabar.
Medio.
Pr6ximo.
Entonces.
Anocbe.
Antes de anocbe.
Mafiana.
LESSON XXIII.
FUTURE SIMPLE.
First Conjugation.
I sball speak.
Thou wilt speak.
He Avill speak.
We sball speak.
You will speak.
They will speak.
Second Conjugation.
I shall learn.
Thou wilt learn.
He will learn.
We sball learn.
You will learn.
They will learn.
Third Conjugation.
I shall write.
Thou wilt write.
He will write.
We shall write.
You will write.
They will write.
To desire.
To practise.
To dance.
To commence, to begin.
To finish.
Half.
Next.
Then.
Last night.
The night before last.
To-morrow.
LESSOR XXIII.
95
Pasado maflana.
La mafiana.
Si.
The day after to-morrow.
The morning.
If.
Gusto.
Taste, pleasure.
Noche.
Night.
Deseo.
Desire, mind.
Gracias.
(to give) Thanks.
Negocios.
Business, occupa-
Familia.
Family.
tion.
Practica.
Practice.
Oficio.
Office.
Teoria.
Theory.
Minuto.
Minute.
Ilora.
Hour.
Segundo.
Second.
Polca.
Polka.
Vals.
Waltz.
Lengua.
Tongue, language.
Idioma.
Language.
COMPOSITION.
(, Estudiara Y. maiiana su leccion de cs-
panol ?
Si, scnor, la estudiare maiiana por la
mafiana.
6 A que bora principiara V. ?
Principiare a las tres de la manana.
Seuorita, <; quiorc Y. bailar un vals ?
Gracias, caballcro, no se bailar vals.
^ Bailara V. una polca ?
Si, scnor, con mucho gusto.
Ilablo mal cl espaiiol, porquo no lo
practice.
V. necesita practical- mucho para aprcn-
der una lengua.
Practicare en Espafia, porque ire alii
muy pronto.
;, Quo dias toma V. sus lecciones de
piano ?
Las tomo los lines y los viernes, ii las
once de la manana.
j A que hora tomara Y. las lecciones
de Frances.
Las tomare a las diez.
f, Que bora es ?
Es la una.
Will you study your Spanish lesson to-
morrow ?
Yes, sir, I will study it to-morrow
morning.
At what hour will you commence ?
I shall commence at three o'clock in
the morning.
Will you (dance a) waltz, Miss ?
Thank you, sir, I do not know how to
waltz.
Will you dance a polka ?
Yes, sir, with great pleasure.
I speak Spanish badly, because I do
not practise it.
You require to practise a great de;il in
order to learn a language.
I will practise in Spain, because I shall
go there very soon.
On what days do you take your piano
lessons ?
I take them on Mondays and Fridays,
at 1 1 o'clock in the morning.
At what hour will you take your French
lessons ?
I shall take them at 10 (o'clock).
What o'clock is it ?
It is one (o'clock).
96
LESSON XXIII.
Son las once y cuarto.
Son las tres menos diez minutos.
Maiiana ire al campo, y pasado mafla-
na tendre el gusto de pasar cl dia
con V.
Gracias ; entonces sere muy feliz.
(, Bailaremos en su casa de Y. ?
Si, senor, bailaremos, cantaremos, toca-
remos y practicarcmos el espanol
toda la noche,
Muy bien, muy bien ; entonces seremos
inas que felices, seremos felicisimos.
t, En donde pas 6 V. ayer la noche ?
La pase con mis amigos los seilores
Martinez y su familia.
(, Cudnto tiempo estuvo V. en su casa ?
Fui a las siete de la noclie y sali a los
once y media.
It is a quarter-past eleven.
It is ten minutes to three.
I shall go to the country to-morrow,
and shall have the pleasure of spend-
ing the day after to-morrow with vou.
Thank you ; then I shall be very happy.
Shall we dance at your house ?
Ye?, sir, we shall dance, sing, play and
practise Spanish all the evening (the
whole night).
Yury well, very well ; then we shall be
more than happy ; we shall be most
happy.
Where did you spend the evening
yesterday ?
I spent it with my friends, Mr. and Mrs.
Martinez and (their) family.
How long were you at their house ?
I went at seven in the evening and left
(went out) at half past eleven o'clock.
EXPLANATION.
103. FUTURE SIMPLE. This tense affirms what is yet to be
or to take place at a future time (mentioned or not) ; as,
Sere comerciante.
Juan estudiard mauana.
I shall be a merchant.
John will study to-morrow.
This tense is also used as imperative, as will be seen when
that mood is introduced.
104. The DEFINITE ARTICLE is to be used before numerals
indicating the hour of the day, and the word o'clock is never
translated into Spanish ; as,
A las trcs de la tarde. J At three o'clock in (of) the afternoon.
105. NOCHE (evening or night), commences at sundown;
so that evening and night both are translated into Spanish by
noche.
106. The conjunction si, when conditional, does not gov-
ern the subjunctive in Spanish as it does in English, unless (lie
latter be followed by should, as will be seen in the proper
place ; in all other cases, si is followed by the present of the
indicative ; as,
Si V. tiene papel, i escribira ? | If you have paper, will you write ?
LESSON XXIII. 97
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. gCuaudo principiani V. a escribir sus ejercicios? Principiar6
mafiana.
2. i A quo hora acabara V. ? Acabare a las diez y media.
3. Alejandro, qiu6 quieres ser, abogado 6 escritor? No sere ni abo-
gado ni escritor, sere comerciante.
4. Sefiorita, jquiere V. bailar una polca? Gracias, caballero, no
bailare, porque estoy muy cansada.
5. i Bailara V. la proxinaa ? Si, sefior, con inucho gusto.
6. i Practicara Y. el piano hoy ? No, sefior, hoy no tengo ticrapo ;
pero practicare mafiana por la mafiana.
7. $Qu6 hard V. mafiana? Mafiana por la mafiana escribire mis
ejercicios y practicare el espafiol con mi hermano.
8. i Qu6 dias toma V. leccion de piano? Los liines y viernes.
9. i A que hora tomani V. su leccion mafiana ? A las once y cuarto.
10. i Vendra V. a mi casa en el campo ? Ir6 pasado mafiana y tendre
el gusto de pasar el dia con V.
11. gBailare"mos en su casa,de V.? Si, sefior, bailaremos, cantaremos
y practicar6mos el espafiol tcda la noche.
12. gEn donde pasara V. mafiana la noche? La pasar6 con mis ami-
gos los sefiores Martinez y su familia.
13. i A qu6 hora iran Vds. alii? Ire'inos a las siete de la noche.
14. i Ilasta qu6 hora estaran Vds ? Hasta la una y media.
15. ^Estara V. mafiana por la mafiana en su cuarto ? Estar6 hasta las
nueve y diez minutos.
16. gEs triste su hermano de V. ? No, sefiora, no es triste ; pero esta
triste.
17. $Es V. feliz ? Soy felicisimo ; pero no estoy contento esta tarde.
18. gEs Y. mayor que su hermano ? No, sefiora, soy el menor de toda
la familia.
19. ^Quie'n es el mayor? Juan es el mayor.
20. i Sale V. de casa temprano ? Salgo tempranisimo.
21. i A qu6 hora? Salgo a las ocho y media.
22. i Salio V. ayer tan temprano ? No, sefior, ayer sali mas tarde ;
pero hoy he salido temprano.
23. i A quo hora saldra V. mafiana ? Mafiana saldr6 a la una de la tarde.
24. i Para quien escribe V. una carta ? Escribo al abogado, por el
pobre Juan, qne lo necesita para un negocio.
25. i Partira Y. mafiana para la Habana ? No, sefior, no partir6 hasta
la scmana proxima.
26. ^Es este caballo muyfuerte? Es fortisimo ; pero ese que estu
alii es mas fuerte y el quo esta alii al otro lado es el mas fnertc.
5
98 LESSON XXIII.
EXERCISE.
1. When shall you commence to study music ? I desire to commence
next month.
2. Do you know how * to dance? I do not dance very well; but I
am going to take lessons soon.
3. Do you study in the morning or in the evening ? I study in the
morning.
4. At what o'clock do you take your lessons ? At a quarter to three
in the afternoon (tarde).
5. Does your teacher come so late ? Yes, he has a great many pupils
this year.
6. Will you dance a waltz, Miss? Thank you, sir, I danced so much
the night before last that I am tired.
7. Then it will be better to talk. I shall talk with much pleasure.
8. When shall your cousin write his exercise ? He shall write it to-
morrow morning.
9. At what time do you receive~your newspapers ? I receive them
every day at eight o'clock in the morning.
10. Mr. Louis, will you come and dine at my house? I shall be very
happy to go Avith you.
11. How did you spend the evening at your friend's? Very well; his
wife (lady) i 3 most amiable.
12. Has she not travelled in Europe? No, sir; but they spoke last
night of travelling very soon.
13. Is their family large? No, they have no children.
14. Does not your friend speak Spanish very well ? Yes, sir, he some-
times even passes for a Spaniard.
15. Did you practise much with him? No; his cousin speaks French
very well, and so we spoke that language all the evening.
10. Where shall you spend this evening? I do not know; but the
day after to-morrow we shall go to your house.
17. Thank* you ! then I shall be more than happy; I shall be most
happy.
18. How many seconds make a minute? Sixty.
1 ;>. How many minutes make an hour ? Sixty minutes.
20. And how many hours has a day ? A day has twenty-four hours,
n week seven days, a month four weeks, and a year twelve months.
21. Peter, what o'clock is it ? It is half- past two.
22. Then I am going to take my lesson : will you come? No, thank
you ; I wish to read this morning's paper.
23. Until what o'clock shall you be ? I shall finish at one.
* Hoic is not translated when it does not refer to the manner of doine anvtliiiuj.
LESSON XXIV.
99
24. Peter! Sir?
25. Has the tailor finished my vest? Yes, sir, here he is with the
vest and the coat.
26. When will the shoemaker make my boots? He will make them
for next Tuesday.
27. Have you any business in Philadelphia ? Yes, sir, I am writing
the history of Louis XVI., for a gentleman of that city.
28. Mr. Henry, are you happy? Yes, sir, thank you, I am very
happy ; but I am not very contented this evening.
29. Why are you not contented? Because my father has not written
to me this week.
LESSON XXIV.
COMPOUND FUTURE.
Habre escrito.
I shall have \
Habras escrito.
Thou wilt have > written.
Habra escrito.
He will have j
Habremos escrito.
We shall have }
Habreis escrito.
You will have > written.
Ilabran escrito.
They will have )
Coser.
To sew.
Lavar.
To wash.
Barrer.
To sweep.
Pasear.
To walk (take a walk).
Dedal. Thimble.
Aguja. Needle.
Hilo. Thread.
Primavera. Spring.
Verano. Summer.
Accion. Action.
Invierno. Winter.
Nacion. Nation.
Otofio. Autumn (Fall).
Afectacion. Affectation.
Enero. January.
Navegacion. Navigation.
Febrero. February.
Agitacion. Agitation.
Marzo. March.
Aprobacion. Approbation.
Abril. April.
Aceptacion. Acceptation.
Mayo. May.
Atraccion. Attraction.
Junio. June.
Conversacion. Conversation.
Julio. July.
Direccion. Direction.
Agosto. August.
Circunspeceiou. Circumspection.
100
LESSON XXIV,
Setiembre.
Octubrc.
Nbvicmbrc.
Dicieinbro.
September.
October.
November.
December.
Clasificacion.
Coleccion.
Combination.
Comparacion.
Composicion.
Reputation.
Classification.
Collection.
Combination.
Comparison.
Composition.
Reputation.
COMPOSITION.
Habre 1 escrito mi leccion antes de ir a
casa del profesor.
Habrc acabado a las diez.
El abogado acaba de hablar.
Yo acabo de estudiar mi leccioa.
La lavandera habra acabado de lavar
a las cuatro.
6 A cuantos estamos ?
Estamos a seis.
(, Que dia del mes es hoy ?
Es el primero.
f, Que fecba tiene csa carta ?
El primero de Eaero de mil oehocientos
sesenta y seis.
En que ano fue V. a Mejico ?
Fui en Setiembre de mil oehocientos
cincuenta y dos.
(, Ira V. este verano a Europa ?
No, senor, ire en el invierno.
t, Paseara Y. mucho esta primavera ?
No, senor, trabajare mucho.
I shall have written my lesson before
going to the professor's.
I shall have finished at ten o'clock.
The lawyer has just spoken.
I have just studied my lesson.
The washerwoman will have finished
washing at four o'clock.
What day of the month is it ?
It is the sixth.
What day of the month is to-day ?
It is the first.
YHiat is the date of that letter ?
January 1st, 1866.
In what year did you go to Mexico ?
I went in September, 1852.
Will you go to Europe this summer ?
No, sir, I shall go in the winter.
Will you walk much this spring ?
No, sir, I shall work a great deal.
EXPLANATION.
107. The COMPOUND FUTURE affirms something future that
have taken place before or at the time of some other future
action or event expressed in the sentence; and is composed of
the simple future of the verb haber, to have, and the past parti-
ciple of another verb ; as,
liable escrito mi ejercicio antes de
ir a casa del profesor.
Habre acabado a las diez.
I will have written my exercise before
going to the professor's.
I will have finished at ten o'clock.
108. ACAEAE DE is employed before an infinitive in the
LESSON XXIV. 101
sense of to have just, and the infinitive is translated in English
as a past participle ; as,
Acaba dc hablar.
Acabo de cstudiar.
He has just spoken.
I have just studied.
N. B. In order to facilitate the acquisition of words, we
shall give now and then a few rules, with the help of which the
learner will be enabled to convert several thousand English
words into Spanish. And, although we have proposed not to
introduce many new words or elements at one time, these
observations will enable the pupil to learn a greater number of
words with little or no difficulty at all, from the striking re-
semblance that those words bear to the English ones.
109. The greater part of English nouns ending in tion are
rendered into Spanish by changing the letter t into c; as, appro-
bation, aprobacion. It is to be observed that the only conso-
nants that can be doubled in Spanish are c, n and r. All nouns
of the above termination are feminine.
110. The days of the month are all counted in Spanish by
the cardinal numbers, preceded by the article, except the first
day; and there are several forms of asking the day of the
month ; e. g.,
j Quo dia del mes tenemos ?
i Que dia es hoy ?
What day of the month is it ?
6 A cuantos estamos del mes ?
There is no preference between these ; but the answer must
be made in the same form as the question ; as,
6 Quo dia tenemos ?
Tenemos el seis.
(, A cuantos estamos ?
Estamos a dos.
a Quc dia es hoy ?
Es el primero.
What day of the month is it ?
It is the sixth.
What day of the month is it ?
It is the second.
What day of the month is to-day ?
It is the first.
CONVERSATION AXD YERSIOX.
1. i Habrii V. acabado de escribir su leccion a las diez y media ? No,
se ; pero la habre acabado antes de ir a casa del profesor.
2. i Ha hablado aquel abogado ? !N"o, seflor, acaba de bablar este.
3. $ Ha hablado bien? May bien, pero cou afectacion.
102 LESSOK XXIV.
4. i Hard Y. una buena composicion para la leccion proxiraa ? Si,
sefior, si tengo tiempo, la hare.
5. Lava bien su lavandera de Y. ? Lava muy bien.
6. i A donde en via Y. sus nifios ? Los euvio a pasear con la criada.
7. A donde ? A la plaza de Madison.
8. $ Esta cerca de su casa de V. ? Esta muy cerca.
9. $Barri6 el criado ayer mi cuarto? No, seflor, no lo barrio ayer;
pero lo ha barrido hoy.
10. $Lo barrera maiiana ? Lo habra barrido antes de las nueve.
11. Muchacho, ^esta el sastre en la sastreria? No, sefior, acaba de
salir.
12. i A que hora principiaron Yds. a bailar? Principiamos a las diez
de la noche.
13. gDesea Y. practicar el ingles? Si, sefior, si tengo tiempo princi-
piare pasado mafiana.
14. $ Donde esta su amigo ? Esta viajando por Francia.
15. i Ama su hermana de Y. mucho a sus hijos? Si,'sefior, los ama
muchisimo.
16. i Saldra Y. muy pronto para Europa? Quiero salir mafiana.
17. $Sabe Y. bailar el vals? No, sefior, pero se bailar el rigodon y
la polka.
18. ^De donde vienen Yds.? Yenimos de Francia, y varnos para
Filadelfia.
19. g Quiere V. salir a pasear ? Muy bien, ireinos al Parque Central.
20. i Quien lavo estos pauuelos? Estan muy mal lavados. Su lavan-
dera de V. los lavo.
21. i D6nde paso Y. el verano ? Lo pase en el campo. i Y el invienio ?
En la ciudad.
22. i Cuales son los meses mas alcgres del afio? Los de la primavera.
23. i Sabe Y. la direccion de la casa de su hermano de V. ( Si. sufior,
calle Catorce, numero ciento veinte y cinco.
24. -A qu6 hora comen Yds. ? Comemos a las tres de la tarde.
25. i Que hora tiene V. ? Tengo las dos y veinte.
26. i A que hora salieron sus hcrmanas para el parque ? Salieron a las
seis y media de la mafiana.
27. e Y a que hora volvieron ? A las once menos cuarto.
28. ; Buenos dias! Buenos dias. ^Esta Y. bueno? Muy bueno, gra-
cias. i Y su familia de Y. ? Muy buena, gracias.
29. i Baila Y. la polca ? No, sefior, estoy principiando a aprenderla.
LESSON XXIV. 103
EXERCISE.
1. When shall your uncle have finished his letter? He shall have it
finished at eight o'clock.
2. When shall you have your letter written ? I shall have it written
before going to the professor's.
3. When shall the notary make the conveyance (writing) ? He has just
made it.
4. Shall your servant have swept my room before the lesson hour to-
morrow ? Yes, sir, she shall have it swept at six o'clock.
5. What day of the month is it? It is the thirteenth.
6. Does your washerwoman come to wash in your house ? She does
not, but she washes very well.
7. How many lessons do those gentlemen take every month ? They
take four every week ; that makes sixteen every month.
8. Which are the best months for walking ? The three months of
spring, and the three of autumn (or fall).
9. Where are you coming (do you come) rrom ? I am coming from
walking.
10. Will you give* me a needle and thread and a thimble to sew?
Here is the needle ; I am going to look for the thread and thimble.
11. In what year did your sister Margaret go to England? She went
in June, 1865.
12. What is the date of that letter? Madrid, 7th July, 1866.
13. Shall you go t6 Europe this summer? No, madam, I shall not go
before next spring.
14. Is December a good month for travelling? No, it is one of the
worst in the year.
15. How did you (plural) spend the day yesterday? We walked in
die Central Park.
16. Did you walk the whole day ? No, we walked until twelve o'clock,
and then we read and played on the piano.
17. Did you not pass the evening at Mr. Martinez's? No, we did not
go out all (in all) the evening, Margaret was a little sick.
18. Do you know which are the longest months ? Yes ; they are Jan-
uary, March, May, July, August, October and December.
19. And which are the shortest? April, June, September and No-
vember.
20. But what do you do with February ? February is the shortest of
all ; it has but twenty-eight days.
21. Shall you walk much this spring? No, miss, I shall work a great
deal.
*ar.
104
LESSOR XXV.
22. ^Vhen shall the tailor sew my vest ? He shall se\v it to-morrow
evening.
23. Has the lawyer not spoken ? lie has just spoken.
24. Until what hour did he speak ? Until half-past one.
2-j. Did he speak in Spanish ? Xo, he spoke in French to-day ; but
to-morrow he shall speak in Spanish.
26. Do you not wish to practise Italian ? Yes, sir, and I shall prac-
tise the day after to-morrow, if I have time.
27. If your teacher comes to-day, will you take a lesson ? I shall
take it if he comes.
28. Does he pronounce well? lie pronounces very well, but with
some affectation.
29. How many Spanish words do you know that end in cion ? I know
very many.
30. Which are they? Conversation, approbation, agitation, complica-
tion, classification, intention, desertion, circumspection, nation, naviga-
tion, and very many others.
LESSON XXV.
Conoccr.
Conozco.
Conoces.
Conoce.
Conocemos.
Coneceis.
Conocen.
Conoci.
Conociste.
Conocio.
Conocimos.
Conocisteis.
Couocieron.
To know, to be acquainted with.
PRESENT INDICATIVE.
I know.
Thou knowest.
He knows.
We know.
You know.
They know.
PRETERIT DEFINITE.
I knew.
Thou knewest.
He knew.
We knew.
You knew.
They knew.
LESSON XXV.
105
FUTURE SIMPLE.
Conocere. I shall know.
Conocenis. Thou wilt know.
Conoccra. lie will know.
Conoceremos. We shall know.
Conocereis. You will know.
Conoceran. They wiU know.
PEETEEIT INDEFINITE.
lie conoculo. | I have known.
COMPOUND FUTURE.
Habre conocido. I I shall have known.
Gozar.
Promoter.
To enjoy.
To promise.
Una vez.
Once.
Dos veces, &c.
Alto.
Bajo.
Siempre.
Nunca.
Twice.
High, loud.
Low.
Always.
Never.
Jamas.
Never.
Ya.
Ya (with a negative).
Aim.
Todavia.
Already, yet (interrogatively}.
No longer.
-' Still, yet, even.
Still, yet, even.
A menudo.
Often.
Demasiaddr
Bastante.
Too, too much.
Enough, pretty.
Frio. Cold (the).
Calor. Heat.
Verguenza. Shame. .
Razon. Keason.
Miedo. Fear.
Sed. Thirst.
Suefio. Sleep.
Hambre. Hunger.
Valor. Courage, worth, value.
Maestro. Master, teacher.
Lastima. Pity.
Salud. Health.
Moda. Fashion.
Maestra. Mistress (school).
6 Conocc V. a ese hombre ?
COMPOSITION.
Do you know that man ?
No lo conozco ; pcro se quicn le co-
I do not know him ; but I know who
knows him.
106
LESSON XXV.
6 Porquc no aprcnde V. sus Icccioncs ?
Conozco que he hecho mal en no
aprenderlas ; pcro prometo saber-
las para mafmna.
f, Sabe V. frances ?
No, senor, pero voy & aprenderlo;
,; conoce V. un buen maestro ?
6 Estudia V. aun (todavia) el espauol ?
Ya no lo estudio.
(, Sabe V. hablarlo ya ?
No, todavia.
j Ha principiado ya sa hcrmano de V.
sus lecciones ?
Ya ha principiado ; pero no las apren-
dera jamas (nunca), porque no estu-
dia bastante.
5 Cuantas veces ha estado V. este mes
en el teatro ?
He estado una vez ; pero el mes pasa-
do estuve tres veces.
6 Tiene V. miedo de su maestro ?
No tengo miedo de 61 ; pero tengo ver-
giienza de 61.
,: De quien tiene V. lastima ?
Tengo lasthna de esc pobre hombre.
k Tiene V. calor 6 frio ?
No tengo ni calor ni frio ; tengo ham-
bre y sed.
f, Tiene razon el abogado ?
El abogado no tiene razon.
f ; Tiene 61 razon alguna vez ?
Tiene razon algunas veces, pero no
siempre.
,j Hara V. eso otra vez ?
No lo hare jamas (nunca).
6 Amara V. a su amigo ?
Le amare por siempre jamas.
(, Ha leido V. jamas ese libro ?
Nunca jamas lo hare.
(, Tiene su madre de V. buena salud ?
Si, seflor, goza de muy buena salud.
i Tiene V. hambre 6 sed ?
No tengo ni hambre ni sed, tengo
sueno.
Why do you not learn your lessons ?
I know that I have done wrong in not
learning them ; but I promise to
know them for to-morrow.
Do you know French ?
No, sir, but I am going to learn it ; do
you know a good teacher ?
Do you still study Spanish ?
I study it no longer.
Do you know how to speak it already ?
Not yet.
Has your brother commenced his les-
sons yet ?
He has (already) commenced ; but he
will never learn them, for he does
not study enough.'
How many times have you been hi the
theatre this month ?
I have been once ; but last month I
was there three times.
Are you afraid of your master ?
I am not afraid of him ; but I am
ashamed before him.
On whom do you take pity ?
I take pity on that poor man.
Are you warm or cold ?
I am neither warm nor cold ; I am
hungry and thirsty.
Is the lawyer right ?
The lawyer is not right.
Is he right sometimes ?
He is right sometimes, but not always.
Will you do that again (another time) ?
I will never do it.
Will you love your friend ?
I shall love him always (for ever).
Have you ever read that book ?
I shall never do it.
[s your mother in good health (has
your mother good health)?
Yes, sir, she enjoys very good health.
Are you hungry or thirsty ?
[ am neither hungry nor thirsty, I am
sleepy.
LESSON XXV. 107
EXPLANATION.
111. SABER, to know, and CONOCER, to be acquainted with.
It must be observed, in order not to confound these two
verbs, that saber is employed to signify the act of knowing,
being informed of, having learned, or having a knowledge of
something ; whereas conocer is used to express the fact of
being acquainted with, perceiving, or being able to distinguish
persons or things ; as,
i Sale V. quien conoce a cstc hombrc ? | Do you know who knows that man ?
112. Aux, TA, TODAVIA. The adverb aim indicates that
the subject of the sentence continues in the same state as be-
fore ; quite the reverse with the adverb ya, which always
signifies discontinuance of a former state (expressed or under-
stood) ; e. g.,
I Escribe V. aun ?
Xo cscribo ya.
Do you write yet ?
I do not write any longer.
Todav'ta, yet, still, is synoninious with aun ; as,
Esta trabajando todavia (or atm). \ He is still working.
Once, twice, etc., are rendered in Spanish by una vez, dos
veces, etc.
Jfiedo, valor, verguenza, Idstima, tiempo, take the preposi-
tion de after them ; as,
Tengo miedo de salir.
Tengo vcrgiienza de esc hombre.
I am afraid to go out.
I am ashamed of that man.
113. When in English the verb to be precedes the adjec-
tives hungry, thirsty, afraid, ashamed,right, wrong, warm, cold,
sleepy, it is changed into the Spanish verb tener, and the adjec-
tive into a corresponding substantive ; as,
; Tiene Y. miedo ?
Tiene V. sed ?
Tiene V. calor.
, Tiene V. frio ?
Are you afraid ?
Are you thirsty ?
Are you warm ?
Are you cold ?
114. JAMAS and XUXCA may be used indiscriminately, or
one for the other ; as,
Jamas (or nunca) le he conocido. | I have never been acquainted with him.
108 LESSON XXV.
Sometimes they are used together, to give more energy to
the expression ; as,
;:;s lo hare. | Never, no never, shall I do so.
But jamas has the peculiarity of being used after the words
por siempre and _para siempre, for ever; where, instead of being
a negative, it affirms, meaning eternally as,
Le amarc por siempre jamas. \ I will love him forever.
Sometimes it is used alone interrogatively, meaning ever ; as,
(, Ha leido V. jamas esc libro ? | Have you ever read that book ?
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. gD6nde conoci6 V. a su arnigo? Lc conoci en Paris el invicrno
pasado.
2. i Sabe V. qui6n conocc a, csa hoinbre ? Mi padre le conoce muy
bien.
3. i Cuando conocere a su hcrmano de V. ? En el otoilo le conocera Y.
4. i Ila conocido V. en. L6ndres a ese caballero 2 Si, sefior, le conoci
alii cl aiio pasado.
5. i C6mo esta su hijo de Y. ? Mai ; no goza de bucna salud.
6. i Bail6 V. mucho en el baile de anoche ? Si, sefior, muchisimo.
7. i Quien es ese caballero ? Es un escritor de gran reputacion.
8. i Tienen mucba aceptacion sus obras ? Tienen mucliisima.
9. i Sabe V. lo que ban prometido sus auiigas de V. ? No lo se. Han
prometido estndiar sus lecciones.
1 0. Vendra V. mauana a comer con nosotros ? No, sefior, he prome-
tido comer con mis amigos los Alemanes.
11. i , Ilabla ya espanol su primo de V.? E"o lo babla aun, y no lo
hablani janias (nunca), porque no estudia bastante.
12. ^ Barrio Y. mi cuarto? No, sefior, pero prometo barrerlo mafiana
temprano.
13. i Cuantas voces prometio V. buscar mi sombrero ? Jamas lo pro-
meti.
14. ; Xo desea V. ya ir a su pais? Lo deseo muchisimo.
15. i Sale V. ya a pasear todos losdias ? No salgo sino algunas veces.
10. i Llev6 V. ya mi carta al correo ? Todavia no la be llevado.
17. i No ha estado V. jamas en Paris ? No, sefior, jamas be estado.
18. jNo ha leido V. jainus la historia de los Estados Unidos? Si, la
be leido una vez.
19. i Habla bien cl abogado ? Ilabla bien, pero muy bajo.
20. ^Compreude V. ya el espafloH Si bablan alto, y despacio, si, sefior.
LESSON XXV. 109
21. i Ticne V. bastante quo hacer ? Tengo dcmasiado.
22. g Cudntos aflos tiene V. ? Tengo veinte y uno.
23. gCuando vi6 V. por ultima vez & su familia? El dia seis de Se-
tiembre del afio de mil ochocientos cincuenta y cinco.
24. gCuando conoci6 V. al pianista? Le conoci ayer por primera vez.
25. i Han salido sus hermanas para el campo ? Todavia no, pero sal-
dran muy pronto.
26. gQue hacc su padre de Vds. ? Esta gozando del buen tiempo en
el campo.
27. g Que tiene su niQo de V. ? Tiene frio y suefio.
28. i Tienen cllos harubre ? No, sefior, tienen sed.
29. g Tiene V. valor para haceiio? Si, sefior, pero tengo verguenza.
30. $ No tiene V. lastiina de esa mujer? Si, sefior, tengo lastima de
ella, porque no tiene buena salud.
31. g Tiene suefio su rnadro de Y. ? No, sefior, pero estamuy cansada.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you know that man? Yes, sir, that gentleman is my uncle.
2. Are you still writing ? No, I am no longer writing.
3. Has Charles come from the country yet ? No, be has not come yet.
4. Have you {plural) ever read the History of Civilization by Guizot?
No, but we shall read it next spring.
5. Are you not ashamed of not having read the History of the
United States? I am not ashamed, because I am too young to read his-
tory.
0. When shall you commence to read it? I shall commence next
year.
7. Very well ; it is a useful study (cstudio).
8. Does your aunt enjoy good health ? Yes, sir, thank you, she en-
joys very good health.
9. Are you cold, madam ? No, thank you, I wish to go out a minute,
because I am very warm in this room.
10. Is it ten o'clock yet ? No, it is but a quarter past eight.
11. "Who is that gentleman to whom your cousin spoke last night at
the concert ? V.I do not knoAV him.
12. And that gentleman who came this morning to your house, who
is he? lie is a Spanish writer who enjoys a high (great) reputation.
13. Has he written many works? He has already written many
books, and he is going to write a history of Spain.
14. Do you know Sir Walter Scott's works ? Yes, I have read them all.
15. Arc they not much esteemed in Europe (have they not much esti-
mation) ? Yes, very much.
110 LESSON XXV.
16. When did your brother become acquainted witli his (el) Spanish
friend ? Last year, in London.
17. Are you sleepy, young ladies? Yes, we are very tired, thirsty
and sleepy (tetter sed y sueno).
18. "Will you take a little wine ? No, thank you, we never take wine.
19. Does your mother know Em anuel's address (direction) ? Yes, here
it is in this letter.
20. Will you read it ? With much pleasure. Emanucl Martinez, Esq.
(don), 113 Broadway. A thousand thanks.
21. Did your cousin's (fern.) friends commence their lessons the
other day ? Yes, they commenced, and are much pleased (content) with
them.
22. Why does the lawyer speak so low ? I do not know.
23. Does he not speak as low as his brother loud ? He speaks low
from (by) affectation.
24. Which of your servants (fern.) sews the best? None of them
sews.
25. How many conjugations has the Spanish language ? Three regu-
lar (regular) conjugations, and several irregular (irregular) ones.
26. Have you ever been in Philadelphia ? I have never been there
yet ; but I shall go next year.
27. Did your father write the letter for Peter yesterday ? No, but he
promised to write it the day after to-morrow.
28. Has your shoemaker enough to do ? Yes, sir, he has too much
to do.
29. Will you always love your brothers and sisters? Yes, I shall
love them forever.
30. Do you not pity that man ? I do pity him, for he has nothing to
do.
31. Have you money enough to buy a house? Yes, sir, I have
enough.
LESSON XXVI.
Dar. | To give, r
PEESEXT DTDICATITE.
Doy, das, da,
Damos, dais, dan.
I give, thou givest, he gives.
We give, you give, they give.
LESSON XXVI.
Ill
Di, diste, di6.
Dimos, disteis, dieron.
Dar6, daras, dara.
Daremos, dareis, daran.
PRETERIT DEFINITE.
I gave, tliou gavest, he gave.
We gave, you gave, they gave.
FUTURE SIMPLE.
I shall give, thou wilt give, he will
give.
"We shall give, you shall give, they
shall give.
PRETERIT INDEFINIE.
He dado, has dado, etc. | I have given, thou hast given, &c.
COMPOUND FUTURE.
Habre dado,
Ganar
etc.
I shall have given, <!
To gain, earn, win.
Sing. Nom.
1st Olj.
Yo.
Me.
A mi.
1
I.
Me, or to me.
Plur. Nom.
1st Olj.
2d Olj.
Kosotros.
Nos.
A nosotros.
I
We.
Us, or to us.
Sing. Nom.
1st Olj.
2d Olj.
Tu.
Te.
Ati.
\
Thou.
Thee, or to thee.
Plur. Nom.
1st Olj.
2d Olj.
Vosotros.
Os.
A vosotros.
\
Ye, you.
Ye, you, or to you.
Sing. Nom.
1st Olj.
2d Olj.
El.
Le.
A el.
\
He.
Him, or to him.
Plur. Nom.
1st Olj.
2d Olj.
Ellos.
Los, les.
A ellos.
\
They.
Them, to them.
Sing. Nom.
1st Olj.
2d Olj.
Ella.
La, le.
A ella.
\
She.
Her, to her.
112
LESSON XX V I .
Plur. Norn. Ellas.
1st Olj. Las, les.
2d Olj. Aellas.
Sing, and Plur.
1st Olj. Se.
2d Olj. A si.
Neuter Form.
Norn. Ello.
1st Olj. Lo.
2d Olj. Aello.
They.
Them, to them.
C Himself, herself, itself, them-
4 selves; or to himself, to her-
(_ self, to itself, to.therasclves.
It.
It.
To it.
COMPOSITION.
jConoce V. aquellas senoras? Deseo
conocerlas.
Conociendolas las amara V.
6 Me promete V. llevarme a su casa ?
Doy a Y. mi palabra.
i Que le dio a V. mi primo ?
Quiso darme unas flores ; pero yo no
quise recibirlas.
6 Quieres venir conmigo al tcatro ?
No ire contigo, porque mi padre quiere
llevarme consigo.
f, Son estas flores para ti ?
No son para mi ; son para V.
Yo te necesito.
Ella nos hablo en el teatro.
El me amara eon el tiempo.
Nosotros le hablamos en el concierto.
Yo le escribi una carta.
Ella les dio un libro.
Do you know those ladies ? I desire to
know them.
On knowing them you will love them.
Do you promise me to take me to their
house ?
I will give you my word.
What did my cousin give you ?
He wanted to give me some flowers ; but
I would not receive them.
Wilt thou come with me to the theatre ?
I will not go with thee, because my
father wants to take me with him.
Are these flowers for thee ?
They are not for me, they are for you.
I want thee.
She spoke to us hi the theatre.
He will love me in time.
We spoke to him at the concert.
I wrote him a letter.
She gave them a book.
EXPLANATION.
115. SUBJECT or NOMDCATIYE. To what has already been
said, in Lesson X., relative to pronouns as subjects or nominative
cases to verbs, we shall here simply add, that they may at all
times precede their verbs, unless the latter be in the imperative
mood, or be used interrogatively ; examples :
Yo estudio.
Tu escribes.
Vengan ellos..
,; Lee eUa ?
I study.
Thou writest.
Let them come.
Does she read.
LESSOR XXVI. 113
116. PERSOXAL PRONOUNS. In Spanish there is a pecu-
liarity to be observed amongst the personal pronouns : that is,
that they have two objective cases ; one of which can never
be used with prepositions, and the other never without one.
117. THE OBJECTIVE CASE, when not preceded by a prepo-
sition, is affixed to infinitives, imperatives and gerunds ; as,
Amar/a.
Ainernosfe.
Amandolos.
Habiendo&z amado.
Comprafcs algo.
Habicndofos hallado.
To love her.
Let us love him.
Loving them.
Having loved her.
Buy them something.
Having found them.
118. In some tenses the verb drops the final letter in the
first and second persons plural, when they are followed by nos
or os ; as.
Aiiiumonos instead of amdmosnos.
Amaos instead of amados.
We loved each other.
Love each other.
In the first case, the reason of this is perhaps to soften the
pronunciation of the first word ; and in the second the d is
dropped, in order that the imperative be not confounded with
the past participle. Nevertheless, we say idos, go, and not
ios ; but this is the only exception to the rule.
119. The objective case may sometimes elegantly follow
the verb, but rarely when the sentence does not begin by the
verb ; as,
Llevome al teatro. | He took me to the theatre.
120. When one verb governs another in the infinitive
mood, the objective case referring to the second verb may be
placed either before the governing verb, or after the governed
one; as,
Quiero llevarle, or le quiero llevar. | I wish to take him.
121. PREPOSITIONS, when expressed, always govern the
second objective case ; as,
Para mi.
Sin tl.
Hacia cllos.
For me.
Without thee.
Towards them.
114 LESSON XXVI.
122. Mi, TI, si, when preceded by con, take go after them,
and are joined to the preposition ; as,
Con/H?'go.
Conft'go.
Cons/go.
With me.
With thee.
With him, her, them, it.
123. ENTRE is used with the nominative case of the first
person singular, in this expression,
Enlre tu y yo. | Between thee and me ;
but in every other instance it governs the second objective
case ; as,
Entre si Between themselves.
Entre nosotros. Between us.
124. The second objective case is always used after com-
paratives ; as,
Te quiero mas que d il. I love thee better than him.
125. When in English the objective case of the first or
second person is the object of the verb, or of the preposition
to, expressed or understood, we use the first case ; as,
To te necesito.
Ella nos hablo.
El me amara.
I want thee.
She spoke to us.
He will love me.
126. In Lesson X. we explained the objective case of the
third person when/ it is the object of the English verb ; but
if the third person in English be governed by the preposition
to, expressed or understood, we render it by le, les, for both
genders ; as,
Nosotros le hablamos.
To le escribi.
Ella les dio.
We spoke to him.
I wrote to her.
She gave them.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Qae me dara V. ? Le dare a\ T . las gracias.
2. $Qu6 les dio V. a sus niDos? Les di veinte centavos.
3. $Me daras algo por mi trabajo? Algo te dar6 si lo haces bien y
sino, nada.
LESSON XXVI. 115
4. gQu6 os dieron en casa dc tu priino ? Nos dieron chocolate.
5. g Quo le has proinetido a tu prima? Bailar hoy con ella.
6. $C6mo seremos mas felices? Amandonos los unos ii los otros.
7. i Ciuiudo vendra el con nosotros ? Vendra mafiana teniprano.
8. i Cuiindo saldra V. conmigo a paseo ? Tendre ese gusto pasado
maflana.
9. i Quien ira conmigo al teatro esta iioche ? Yo ir< contigo.
10. ^Dunde hablastc a mis amigos ? Les liable en el Parque Central.
11. i Les ley 6 V. mi carta ? No, les lei la de su hermana de V.
12. ^ Me envio V. los libros? No, seflor, los envie" a su herrnano
deV.
13. 0C6mo supo V. de sus amigos? Escribiendoles.
14. i Como couocio V. a su amiga ? Bailando con ella en casa de su
hermano.
15. Quo le prometio V. a su prima? Le prometi llevarla a la
opera.
16. ^Nos hablaron ellos alguna vcz? Nos hablaron una 6 dos veces
en el paseo.
IT. i Porque no les hablo V. ? Porque no los conozco bien.
18. ^Que le han escrito a V. sus amigos? Que vendnin a hablarnos.
19. gQuieres salir conmigo a paseo ? Si, saldre contigo.
20. ^Cuando iremos a casa de tus amigos? Ir6mos hoy, porque ellos
tendran mucho gusto en conocerte.
21. ^Quiere V. pasarme el pan ? Con mucho gusto. Gracias.
22. ^Qu61e prometiste a tu prima? Le prometi ir a su casa maiiana
y llevarle un pafluelo de seda.
23. i Cuiindo le hablo V. ? Le hab!6 anoche en oasa de su madre.
24. ^Quiere V. vcnir a pasear? Mejor sera estarnos aqui.
25. i A qu6 vienea Vds. ?- Venimos a hablarle a V.
26. i Cuaudo iremos al campo con nuestros amigos ? Iremos mafiana.
2T. gComo les gano a Vds. la lavandera tanto dinero? Lavandonos
los vestidos y trabajando mucho.
28. i Cuantas veces a la semana habla V. con sus amigos ? N"os ha-
blamos todos los dias.
29. g Vendra hoy su primo dc V. a comer con nosotras? Si, porque
quierc conocerlas a Vds.
30. i Le dio V. los buenos dias a su prima ? Le di los buenos dias ayer
en la plaza y le hablo de V.
31. Le doy a V. las gracias. ^Tiea3 buena salud ahora? Si, sefiora,
esta muy bueua,
32. ^Le d56 a V. los periodicos? No, senora, pero prometio mandar-
los mafiana.
110 LESSOR XX VI.
EXERCISE.
1. "What was* that you gave to your friend last night at the theatre?
I gave him the second volume of Mr. Eomanos' new work.
2. Why do you not give him the first volume ? I have already given
it to my cousin.
3. Did you not promise last week to give me those -two volumes ?
Yes ; aud you shall have them the day after to-morrow.
4. Will you come with me to the country in the summer? I will go
if you set out on the first of July.
5. Will you and your uncle come with us to walk this afternoon ?
This evening we have to go to the concert.
6. When will you go out with us ? I do not know ; but I think (that)
to-morrow (creo que manana).
7. Have you heard (sabido) from your father this week ? No ; but
we heard from our brother John last week.
8. How often has he written to you from Boston ? We have received
seven or eight letters from him.
9. How much did that singer make (gain) in New York? Which
one? I do not know any singers.
10. Do you not know the singer who spent last week at your uncle's
in the country? Yes; but it was in Philadelphia that he sang, not in
New York.
11. Are you cold? No, sir; but I am hungry and thirsty.
12. When will you take Emanuel to see your children ? I shall take him
to-morrow. They will have much pleasure in making his acquaintance.
13. How many languages does that gentleman speak? He only speaks
his own ; but his cousin speaks five.
14. Which are they' He speaks French, German, Spanish, English,
and Italian.
15. How did he learn so many languages? By studying the grammar
of each one of them (coda una de ellas), reading the works of the best
writers, and practising with the natives (natural).
16. Does he write ah 1 those languages as well as he speaks them ? He
writes them better than he speaks them.
17. Did I not see you (plural) speaking to the notary yesterday in the
park? No, it was the day before yesterday.
18. What has he done in that affair (negocio) of your brother's? He
has done nothing yet ; and as he has to leave town (la ciudad) this after-
noon, he will do nothing all this week.
19. Who is the young lady who danced so well last night at your
house? Do you not know her? she is my cousin.
* See the conjugation of the verb SEK, at the end of the book.
LESSON XXVII. 117
20. When did you see our friend Mr. Perez ? I saw him the other day
in Twenty-sixth street, and we talked for more than two hours about
(de) theatres and concerts.
21. I saw him the night before last; but we did not talk about thea-
tres and concerts. In whose house did you see him ? At Mr. de la Rosa's.
22. At what o'clock did you go there ? I went at a quarter to eight,
and left at half-past ten.
23. Did you see many Mexicans there ? I only saw one : that Mexi-
can lawyer who has just written a history of his country.
24. Does he leave soon for Europe ? He wishes to set out next week.
25. Did John write to his father the day before yesterday ? Yes, and
he has heard (saber) since that he set out last week for France.
20. Has your sister read the books yet which she received from Louisa
last week ? Yes ; and she wishes to read them again (otra vez).
27. I shall see her this evening ; and if you wish (it) I shall take them
to her (se los).
28. Thank you. Have you much to do now ? No, I never have much
to do in summer.
29. Is Peter tired ? No ; but he is the most tiresome boy I know.
LESSON XXVII.
Decir. j To say, to tell.
PRESENT OF INDICATIVE.
Digo, dices, dice, decimos, de-
I say, or tell, &c.
cis, dicen.
PRETERIT DEFIOTTE.
Dije, dijiste, dijo, dijimos, di- I I said, or told, &c.
jisteis, dijerou.
FUTURE SIMPLE.
Dire, diras, dira, diremos, di-
I shall or will say, or tell, &c.
reis, diran.
PRETERIT INDEFINITE.
He dicho, has dicho, etc. | I have said, or told, &c.
COMPOUND FUTURE.
Habre dicho, etc. | * I shall or will have said, or
told, &c.
118
LESSON XXVII.
Excusar.
Perdonar.
Creer.
Ofender.
Llamar.
Ensettar.
To excuse.
To pardon.
To believe, to think.
To offend.
To call, to knock.
To teacb, to snow.
Ahora.
Mismo (adverb).
Now.
Just, very.
Mismo.
Necesario.
Precise.
Regular.
Same, self.
Necessary.
Precise, needful.
Regular, middling.
Parte. Despatch.
Estudio. Study.
Humor. Humor, disposition.
Sugeto. A person, subject, topic.
Asunto. Subject, business, matter.
Parte. 'Part.
Falta. Fault, mistake.
Esperanza. Hope.
Puerta. Door.
Noticia. News.
Ramillete. Bouquet.
COMPOSITION.
Le compro un ramillete, y se lo mando.
Le3 escribirc tres cartas, y sc las man-
dare.
Ella se lo ha prometido.
i Que esta V. haciendo con ese libro ?
Estoy enseuandosffo a Manuel,
j Le leiste la carta ?
Ya se la lei.
Ella me lo dijo.
Yo sc lo di.
Mi madre me ama d mi.
Tu amigo te busca d ti.
Yo hs di las noticias d ellos.
Yo se lax dare d V. ? .
A ti te amo, or te amo a tf.
,; Que le ha dicho d V. su hermano ?
Xo me ha dicho nada.
I Le dije yo eso d V. ?
V. no me lo dijo.
He bought her a bouquet, and sent it to
her.
I shall write them three letters, and
send them to them.
She has promised it to her.
What are you doing with that book ?
I am showing it to Emanuel.
Did you read the letter to him ?
I did. (I read it to him already.)
She told it to me.
I gave it to him.
My mother loves me.
Thy friend looks for thee.
I told them the news.
I will tell tlicm to you.
I love thce.
What has your brother told you ?
He has told me nothing.
Did I tell you that ?
You did not tell it to me.
LESSON XXVII.
119
VJ
Me lo ha dicho.
(, Quiere V. decir cso a sus amigos ?
Quiero decirsefo d ellos.
t Quien llama a la puerta ?
Soy yo mismo.
i Tiene bucn humor su amigo dc V. ?
Si, scfior, ticnc buen humor cuando le
van bien los negocios.
f, Gana esc sugeto mucho en ese asunto ?
El no gana para si mismo ; pero gana
para otros.
Tcngo esperanza dc quc me perdonara.
Has he told it to you ?
He has told it to me.
Will you tell your friends that ?
I will tell it to them.
Who knocks at the door ?
It is I (myself).
Has your friend a good disposition ?
Yes, sir, he is good humored when busi-
ness goes well with him.
Does that man make (or earn) much in
that business ?
He does not make for himself ; but he
makes for others.
I have hopes he will pardon me.
EXPLANATION.
127. OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS, continued. The third person
being governed by to in English, either expressed or under-
stood, is in Spanish rendered by se, if the object of the verb
be a pronoun in the third person ; as,
Le compro un ramillete, y se lo mando.
Les escribire trcs cartas, y sc las
mandare.
Mi criado se lo dara.
He bought her a bouquet, and sent it to
her.
I shall write them three letters, and
send them to them.
My servant will give it to him.
This is done for the sake of euphony, changing the first of
the two pronouns, whatever its full form may be (le, la or les),
into se. This rule applies to all pronouns, after as well as be-
fore the verb ; as,
Ella se lo ha prometido (instead of
eUa le lo).
Promcliindoselo (instead of prorne-
tiindoldo).
i Le leiste la carta ?
Fa se la lei, instead of ya le la lei.
She has promised it to her.
Promising it to him.
Did you read the letter to him ?
I read it to him (already).
128. When two first objective cases occur in the sentence,
one of which is the object of the verb, and the other is gov-
erned, in English, by the preposition to, either expressed or
understood, the object of the verb is to be placed last ; as,
Ella me lo dijo.
Yo se to di.
She told it to me.
I gave it to him.
120 LESSON XXVII.
129. But if the object of the verb be the reflective pro-
noun, it must be placed first ; as,
Luego se me excuso. | He excused himself immediately to me.
130. Both the objective cases belonging to the same per-
son are sometimes used together in Spanish, in order to give
more energy to the expressjpn, and then the second must al-
ways be preceded by d ; as,
Mi madre me ama a mi.
Tu amigo te busca d li.
El sc lo dijo d cllas.
Yo Ics di las noticias d ellos.
Yo se las dare d Vdt. ?
My mother loves me.
Thy friend seeks thee.
He told it to them.
I told them the ne^vs.
I will tell them to you.
131. The second objective case of any of the persons
should never be used in the sentence, preceded by d, as the
object of the verb, without being accompanied by the first
(except after comparatives) ; therefore, such expressions as
these : d el quicro, d ti amo, are incorrect, and should be thus :
d 'die quiero, d ti te amo. The place of the second objective
case in sentences of this kind is restricted to the following rules :
1st. If the first objective case precede the verb, the second
may be placed either before the first, or after the verb ; as,
A ti te amo, or te amo d li. \ I love thee.
2d. If the first objective case follows the verb, the second
must be placed after the first ; as,
Amandofc d il. \ Loving iiim.
132. It may appear that the personal pronouns el, la, lo,
los and las might be confounded with the articles el, la, lo, los,
las, having the same form ; but they are easily distinguished,
since the articles must always be occompanied by and precede
nouns ; as, el tiempo, la salud, los soldados, las obras, lo bucno ;
while, on the other hand, the personal pronouns are Only em-
ployed with verbs, and placed before or after them ; as,
La llcvaron, or Ucvaronla.
Lo buscaron, or buscuronlo.
They carried it.
They looked for it.
133. Whenever emphasis is required to be laid on any
LESS OH XXVII. 121
noun or pronoun, the adjective mismo is used in Spanish for
that purpose ; as,
El ;;o aiaa a nadie mas quo & si
mismo.
Esto mismo hombre lo hara.
Yo mismo lo hare.
He loves no one but himself.
This very man will do it.
I will do it myself.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. $Lo dijo V. eso al ingles? Se lo dije.
2. i Se lo dijo V. en ingles 6 en espanol? Sc lo dije en ingles.
3. ^Le comprendio a, V.? Si, seuor, muy bien.
4. i Y que le enseilo a, V. ? Me enseno el retrato do su hermana.
5. i Lo tiene V. ? No ; se lo envi6 ya.
G. i Me lo enseilara V. ? Se lo ensefiare ii V. la semana pr6xima.
7. I Ha llamado V. d la criada ? La lie llamado y no ba vcnido.
8. No le perdonara V. esa falta ? No quiero perdouursela.
9. ^A quien llama mi padre? Te llama a ti.
10. i Quieres ensenarme tu vestido nuevo? Te lo ensefiai-e con mucbo.
gusto. *
11. i Vendran. tus amigos a darnos los buenos dias ? Creo que vendrun
a durnoslos.
12. i Xos ban enviado los periodicos ? Os los enviaran raafiajia.
13. ^Cuanto le gano V. a ese sugeto? Le gane dos mil trescientos
cincuenta y cuatro pesos.
14. i Que les dieron a sus amigas do V. ? Prometieronlcs llevarlas a
paseo ; pero no les dieron nada.
15. i Quien dijo eso ? Yo mismo lo dije.
10. i Para quien son estos libros ? Para ti mismo.
17. ^Hau mandado mis cartas al correo? Si, sefior, yo mismo las he
mandado.
18. i Quien me ha enviado este ramillete? Su amiga misma se lo ha
enviado.
19. i Le leiste a tu padre las noticias de Francia ? El mismo las ha leido.
20. i Quieres enseflarme tu reloj ? Quiero ensefiartelo.
21. i Quien llamo a la puerta ? Yo mismo llame.
22. i Tiene Y. esperanza de vcr su pais ? Si, sefior, tengo esperanza de
verlo muy pronto.
20. i Cantaron bien anoche en cl concierto ? Cantaron bien la primera
parte ; pero la segunda muy mal.
24. i Como estd sn tio de V. ? Esta bucno ; pero de muy mal humor.
25. jEs bombre de mal humor? No, seuor, es bombre muy amable;
pero boy esta de mal buinor por asuntos de faniilia.
6
122 LESSON XX VIIo
26. i Green ellos ganar diuero a e*e hombre ? Green gamirselo.
27. I Necesita V. enviar este periodico a su hermano ? Necesito en-
vidrselo.
28. i Cuando quiere V. mandar su piano al pianista ? Se lo quiero
mandar ahora.
29. Cuando necesita Y. hablar al abogado? Necesito hablarle aliora
misrno.
30. $Es esta la carta que Y. recibio ayer? Es la misma.
31. i A quien ama el Mejicano ? ISTo ama a nadie mas que a si mismo.
32. i Para quien trabaj a esa mujer? Trabaja para si misma.
33. i Que le ha dicho Y. lioy a su padre ? Lo mismo que le dije ayer.
EXERCISE.
1. Good morning, sir; how are you? Yery well, thank you.
2. How is your family ? Yery well, thank you.
3. "When did you hear from your cousin Jane ? I received a letter
.from her yesterday. But will you excuse me an instant? some one is
knocking at the door.
4. Have you sent your sister the bouquet I bought for her the other
day ? Not yet ; but I shall send it to her to-morrow morning.
5. Will you write to her at the same time and (to) tell her what
Charles said ? I am going to write to her just now, and I shall tell it
to her.
6. Do you think my father will pardon us ? I do (I think so), because
Emanuel showed me a letter he received from him, in which he says he
will pardon both of us.
7. And what does Henry think of the matter ? He thinks the
same.
8. Have the pupils shown their new books to their teacher yet?
Yes, they showed them to him yesterday.
9. Does he think they are good ? He says they are very good.
10. "What else (more) did he say ? He said that if they study them
with attention they will very soon speak Spanish.
11. Is that all * he said ? That is all.
12. Who is knocking at the door? is it you, Peter? Yes, it is I.
13. Why did you not come earlier? I was (have been) reading the
news from Italy.
14. What is the news (what news have we) ? The papers say that the
Italians have gained another victory (victoria).
15. What did that man promise yon last night ? He promised to bring
me some volumes of the History of the United States.
* Lo que.
LESSON XXVII. 123
16. lias he brought (traido) them to you yet? Not yet.
17. "When do you think he will hring* them? He has to come to our
house this evening, and I think he will bring them with him.
18. What do you wish to see? I wish to see your new dress, if you
will have the goodness (bondad) to show it to me.
19. "Will you tell the Englishman what I have told you? I shall not
tell it to the Englishman; but I shall tell it to the Frenchman this very
day.
20. Will he believe it ? Yes, he will (believe it) ; he believes every-
thing I tell him.
21. Have they taken my letters to the post-office ? I took them my
self, sir.
22. Who is my father calling? lie is calling you to send you to the
bookstore for a book.
23. Do you know why Louis does not send us the papers any more
(ya) ? He promised to send them ; but you know that no steamer (va-
por') has arrived t this week yet.
24. When does the merchant want to see the notary ? He wants to
see him just now.
25. There he is talking to a gentleman ; will you go and (to) tell him
that my father wishes to speak to him a moment (momento) ?
26. Good morning, sir; father wishes to tell you something; will you
come now ? Yes, I shall go just now.
27. How is your son, Mr. Alexander ? He is much better, thank you ;
but ho would not come out this morning, because he has to study his
lesson.
28. W T hat language is he learning ? He is not learning any now ; he
commenced to learn Spanish in the winter.
29. What is he studying, then ? He takes lessons in (of) writing, his-
tory and music.
30. What part of the grammar are you in now, Peter ? I have just
got to (arrived at) J the twenty-seventh lesson.
31. Do you require to send this paper to your brother? I require to
send it to him this very day.
* Traera. t Llegar. $ Acabo de.
124
LESSON XXVIII
LESSON XXVIII.
IMFERFEHT AXD PLUPERFECT TENSES.
IMPERFECT.
First Conjugation.
Habl-aba, habl-abas, habl-aba.
Habl-abamos, babl-abais, babl-aban.
I spoke, was speaking, or used to
speak, &c., &c.
We spoke, &c.
Second Conjugation.
Aprend-ia, aprend-ias, aprcnd-ia.
Aprend-iamos, aprend-iais, aprend-
ian.
I learned, was learning, or used to
learn, &c., &c.
Third Conjugation.
Escrib-ia, escrib-ias, escrib-ia.
Escrib-iamos, escrib-ials, escrib-ian.
I -wrote, was writing, or used to
write, &c., &c.
PLUPERFECT.
liablado.
aprendido.
escrito.
liablado.
aprendido.
escrito.
Habia
Habiais
Ilabia
Habiarnos
Ilabiais
Habian
Acabar.
Entrar.
Deber.
Deber.
Dudar.
Temcr.
Abrir, abierto (irregular in this
past participle only).
Ambos.
We bad
You bad
They had
spoken,
learned,
written.
spoken,
learned,
written.
To finish.
To enter, conic in, go in.
To owe.
Should, ought, must, to be to, to be
ojae's duty to.
To doubt.
To fear, be afraid of.
To open, opened.
| Both.
Cuidado.
Deber.
Projimo.
Care.
Duty.
Neighbor.
Cabeza.
Mano.
Ropa.
Head.
Hand.
Clothes.
LESSON XXVIII.
125
Vecino.
Eeloj.
Neighbor.
Clock, watch.
Marido, osposo. Husband.
Yentana.
Visita.
Cuenta.
Esposa.
COMPOSITION.
"Window.
Visit.
Bill, account.
Wife.
Yo cscribia cuando V. vino.
El eatudiaba sus Icccioaes todos los
dias.
Margarita bailaba mucbo cuando era
joven.
Yo acababa de salir cuando V. entro.
I, Abria V. la puerta 6 la vcntana en el
invierno ?
En cl invierno no abria ni la una ni la
otra ; pero en el verano abria ambas.
(, Habia V. escrito los ejercicios antes
de dar su leccion ?
No los habia escrito ; pcro habia estu-
diado la leccion.
Debe V. tener cuidado no solo de estu-
diar la leccion, sino de escribir los
ejercicios, porque si no V. no apren-
dera nada.
^ En dondc esta su vecino de V. ?
Acaba dc entrar.
I Quo bora tiene su rcloj de V. ?
Son las doce y cuarto.
I Tenia su vecino de V. cuidado de su
ropa?
Debia hacerlo, pero no lo hacia.
Debemos amar al projimo tanto como
a nosotros mismos ; pero mi vecino
no me ama a mi ni yo le arno a el.
No dudo lo quo V. dice.
I wag writing when you came.
He used to study bis lessons every day.
Margaret used to dance much when she
was young.
I had just gone out when you came in.
Used you to open the door or the win-
dow in winter ?
In winter I used to open neither ; but
in summer I used to open both.
Had you written your exercises before
taking your lesson ?
I had not written them ; but I had
studied my lesson.
You must take care, not only to study
your lesson, but (also) to write your
exercises ; for if not, you will learn
nothing.
Where is your neighbor ?
He has just come in (entered).
What o'clock is it by your watch
(what hour has your watch) ?
It is a quarter past twelve.
Used your neighbor to take care of his
clothes ?
He should have done so, but did not.
We should love our neighbor as our-
selves ; but my neighbor does not
love me, nor do I love him.
I do not doubt what you say.
EXPLANATION.
134, THE IMPERFECT is used to express what is past, and,
at the same time present, with regard to something else which
is past ; that is, it is a past tense which was still present at the
time spoken of. It may always be employed in Spanish when
in English the word was can be used with the present parti-
126 LESSON XXVIII.
ciple, or used to with the infinitive, or when we speak of ha-
bitual actions; as,
To escribia cuando Y. rmo.
El estadiaba sus lecciones todos los
dias.
I was writing when you came.
He used to study his lessons every
day.
135. The PLUPEKFECT is used to express what is past, and
took place before some other past action or event, expressed or
understood; as,
Yo habia leido ya los periodicos cuando
Y. me los dio.
I had already read the newspapers when
you gave them to me.
136. ACABAE DE. The English expressions, to have just,
and to be just, before a past participle, are translated into
Spanish by acabar de, preceding an infinitive ; as,
Acabo de entrar. I I have just come in.
El acaba de abrir la ventana. | He has just opened the window.
COXYERSATIOX AXD VERSION'.
1. 3 Ha hablado V. con la sefiorita? No, ella acababa de salir cuaiido
yo toque a la puerta.
2. $Dudaba V. entrar? Si, porque teraia ofender u V.
3. No seflor; $que bora es? Mi reloj tiene las once y cuarto.
4. i Y qu6 bora tiene V. ? Yo tengo las once y media.
5. i Sabe V. que bora es en el reloj de la iglesia ? Cuando yo pasaba
estaban dando las once.
C. ^Entonces abora deberan ser no mas que las once y veintc 6 veinte
y cinco minutos ? Creo que seran un poco menos.
V. I Ha bablado V. con mi vecino ? He ido a bacerle una visita, pcro
babia salido.
8. i No bablo V. con la sefiora ? Si, estaba en la ventana cuando yo
pas6.
9. i Tiene una mano muybermosa? Si, pcro los ojos son mas ber-
mosos.
10. eQue tenia en la cabeza? Dos flores.
11. ^Quien llama ii la puerta? La lavandera, que viene u buscar la
ropa.
12. ^Cudnto le debo u V. ? Me debc V. veinte y cinco centavos de la
ropa de la semana pasada.
13. $ No se los ba pagado a V. mi marido? No, sefiora. no tenia di-
nero.
14. jDuda V. lo que le digo? No, sefiora, lo creo.
LESSON XX VIII. 127
15. jEstd bien lavada la ropa? Muybien; yo inisraa la lave.
1C. ^Hizo V. la visita a su vccino ? Fui a su oasa ; pel'o habia saliclo.
17. gVa V. muclias veces al teatro? Cuando vivia en Paris iba a,
jnenudo 5 pcro aqui voy muy pocas veccs.
18. i Como debemos amar al projimo ? Tanto como a nosotros mismos.
19. jQuien es el projimo ? Todos los Lombres son nuestros projimos.
20. $Esta mala su hermana de V. ? Si, sefiora, y de cuidado (seriously).
21. ^Cudutas visitas le ha hecho el medico? Huchisimas.
22. i Debcn Vds. tener muclio cuidado do ella ? Si, seilora, ya lo te-
ncmos.
23. i Cuantas visitas le dcbo yo d V. ? Con esta son tres.
24. i No vendrd V. a comer maQana con nosotras ? Mafiana ire al
campo con mis vccinos.
25. i Habia V. recibido la carta del Frances cuando recibio la mia ?
La recibi despues.
26. ^Porque trabaja V. tanto? Porquc es mi deber.
27. ^Vendran V. y su hermana a pasar una semana con nosotros?
Si, sefiora, la semana proxima vendremos dmbos.
28. i Quien abrio mi ventana, Juan ? Sefior, yo mismo la abri.
29. j Hablo V. con el sastre ? Fui alia, pero habia salido.
30. i Cuando vino V. ? Ahora mismo acabo de entrar.
31. i Donde esta mi padre ? Acaba de salir a la calle.
32. i Sabes a d6nde fue ? Fu6 a comprar ropa.
33. jllabra ido d la Cuarta avenida? No, seilor, creo quo fue a
Broadway.
34. i Qu6 hora es ? El reloj de su cuarto de V. acaba de clar las doce.
EXERCISE.
1. What were you doing when Alexander went into your room? I
was talking to my father.
2. I thought you were writing your exercises. No, I had written
them already.
3. Does the servant take care to sweep your room every day ? Yes,
he knows very well it is his duty.
4. "Why did you not come before ? you were to come at nine o'clock.
I know I have done wrong in not coming earlier; but I have been
writing all the morning.
5. Does your sister Margaret dance now as much as she used?
When (she was) in the city she used to dance very much, but now she
has no time.
6. When you lived in the country did you open both the doors and
the windows? I opened neither.
128 LESSON XXVIII.
7. Had you finished your work before going to the concert? I had
(finished it).
8. Do you doubt what I tell you ? No. sir, I never doubted anything
you told me.
9. Is your neighbor afraid to open his windows in winter ? He is
not afraid to open them.
10. Who was it that went out last night after ten o'clock ? No one
went out; my brother came in at that hour.
11. Did Alexander go out when your cousin came in? lie had already
gone out when my cousin came in.
12. Where is he now ? He has just gone out to walk.
13. Will he be very long (much time) ? He will not be long ; he is to
take his Spanish lesson this evening.
14. Did you pay (make) a visit to my neighbor last week ? I went to
his house, but he was not at home.
15. When did you see the pianist? He came to see me the other day,
but I had gone out.
16. Do you think we shall have studied our lessons before going to the
teacher's? I think we shall.
17. What o'clock is it by (in) your watch ? It is seventeen minutes
past three by mine ; what time have you ?
18. It must be (deben ser) half-past three ; has the music teacher
come ? Not yet.
19. Will you have the kindness to go to his house and tell him I shall
not take my lesson this afternoon ? With much pleasure.
20. So soon ! Well, did you see the teacher ? No, madam, he had
just gone out.
21. IIo\v much do you owe the tailor now ? I owe him very little ;
you know I sent him some money last month.
22. I know (it) ; but did he not send (pasar) in another bill on Mon-
day ? If he has sent in another I have not seen (yisto) it.
23. I thought you were in the country, Mr. Emanuel ? I was there
last week.
2-1. Why did you not come yesterday? I saw you were. writing and
I feared to offend you.
25. But you know it was your duty to come in ; you knew I wanted
you. Well, if you pardon me this time (vez), I shall come in again (another
time).
26. How often do you go to the theatre? Not very often now; I
used to go every night in the week.
27. How are we to love our neighbor? As ourselves.
28. Who is our neighbor ? All mankind (men) are our neighbors.
LESSON XXIX.
129
29. How many visits has tlio physician made to your uncle ? He be-
gan his visits on the 30th of December, and visited him twice a week
until April 4th.
30. llow many visits do I owe you for now? You owed me for
twelve, but you paid me for nine, and so you only owe for three now.
31. "Whose letter did you receive first, mine or Jane's? When yours
came to hand (my hands), I had already received Jane's.
32. Will you take your lesson to-day? I am to go to the Central Park
this afternoon with my mother, arid so I shall not take my lesson until
to-morrow.
LESSON XXIX.
PRETERIT
Ilubo ] hablado.
Hubiste i aprcndido.
Ilubo J escrito.
Hubmios "I hablado.
Ilubisteis }. aprendido.
Hubieron J escrito.
ANTERIOR.
I had "I spoken.
Thou hadst v learned.
He had J written.
We had ~] spoken.
You had L learned.
They had j written.
Vcr.
Mirar.
Esperar.
To see. (See the end oftlie loofy
To look.
To hope, to wait for.
Asi quo.
Apenas.
No bien.
Tampoco (conj.).
Tambien (adverb).
Tambien (conj.\
Ademas.
Primcramente, or en primer lu-
As soon as.
Scarcely.
No sooner.
Neither, not either.
Also, likewise.
As well, moreover.
Moreover, besides.
Firstly.
Segimdamente, or en
lugar.
Frccuente.
Frecuentemente.
*C6inodo.
Comodamente.
G*
segundo Secondly, &c.
Frequent.
Frequently.
Convenient, comfortable.
Conveniently, comfortably.
130
LESSON XXIX.
Incomodo.
Inc6inodamente.
Probable.
Probableinente.
Perfecto.
Perfectamente.
Correcto.
Correctamente.
Inconvenient, uncomfortable.
Inconveniently, uncomfortably.
Probable, likely.
Probably, likely.
Perfect.
Perfectly.
Correct.
Correctly.
Ojo.
Correo.
Lugar.
Eye.
Post, post-office,
courier'.
Place.
Vista.
Comodidad.
Milla.
Sight, view.
Convenience,
comfort.
Mile.
COMPOSITION.
Cuando le hube conocido le am6.
Apenas hubo salido el cuando yo entre.
No bicn le hube visto cuando le conoci.
Asi que hube cscrito la carta la llevc
al correo.
Cuando le conoci le ame.
g Iba Y. frecuentcmente al teatro el aiio
pasado ?
Iba frecuentisimamente, or muy frecuen-
tcmente.
El vive en csa casa comodamente, or
con comodidud.
El escribe correcta y perfectamente ;
pero Y. escribe ruas facilmcnte.
When I had known him I loved him.
Scarcely had he gone out when I
came in.
No sooner had I seen him than I knew
him.
As soon as I had written the letter I
took it to the post-office.
When I knew him I loved him.
Did you go often to the theatre last
year ?
I went very often.
He lives comfortably, or with comfort,
in that house.
He writes correctly and perfectly ; but
you write more easily.
EXPLAXATIOX.
137. The PRETERIT ANTERIOR is used to express a past
action or event that took place immediately before another
action or event also past. It is never used except after some
of the adverbs of time ; cuando, when ; as'i que, as soon as ; no
bien, no sooner ; apenas, scarcely ; luego que, immediately after ;
despues que, soon after ; as,
Cuando le hube conocido.
Apenas hubo salido cuando yo vine.
No bien le hube visto cuando le conoci.
When I had made his acquaintance.
Scarcely had he gone out when I came.
Xo sooner had I seen him than I knew
him.
LESSOR XXIX. 131
This tense is very little used, not only for the reason already
mentioned, of its being preceded by an adverb of time, but also
because its p\ace may be elegantly supplied by the PKETEEIT
DEFINITE ; as,
Cuando le conocl.
Apcnas solid cuando yo vine.
No bien le vi cuando le conoci.
When I had known him.
Scarcely had he gone out when I came.
Xo sooner had I seen him than I knew
him.
138. The adverbs of manner and quality, in Spanish as
well as in English, are generally derived from adjectives.
139. To form an adverb from an adjective, it is sufficient
to add mente to the adjective, if the latter has the same ter-
mination in both genders ; as,
Frecuente, frecuentemmfe.
Gramatical, gramaticalmewfc.
If the adjective has a different termination for each gender,
then mente is added to the feminine ; as,
Incomoda, incomodamenfc.
Perfecta, perfectawienfe.
When two or more of these adverbs follow each other, only
the last one takes mente, the others taking the feminine termi-
nation a ; as,
Ciceron hablo sabia y elocuente7?ie?i&. | Cicero spoke learnedly and eloquently.
140. These adverbs terminating in mente, being derived
from adjectives, admit like these the degrees of comparison ; as,
Facilmente.
Mas facilmente.
Menos facilmente.
Tan facilmente.
Muy fucilmente, or facilisimamentc.
Easily.
More easily.
Less easily.
As, or so easily.
Very easily, or most easily.
141, Those adverbs may, without any change in the
sense, be substituted by a substantive governed by the prepo-
sition con ; as,
El vive comodamente, or con comodi-
dad.
He lives comfortably.
132 LESSON XXIX.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Ve V. aquella flor tan bermosa? Miro, pcro no la vco.
2. i Ve V. qu6 bora cs en el reloj de la iglesia ? No,' pero mil-are" en
mi reloj.
3. i Ha visto Y. a su liormano ? Si, senor, le vi apenas bubo salido
del teatro.
4. $Le conoci6 a Y. mi vecino? No bien le bube bablado, me co-
noci6.
5. i Han venido mis amigos ? Yinieron asi qne bubo Y. salido.
6. gLe dieron a V. mis libros? Me los dieron, no bien les bube
bablado de ello.
7. $Yse marcbaron muy pronto? Se marcbaron asi quo bubieron
escrito sus cartas.
8. i Que bizo Y. despucs ? Primeramente (or primero) fui al correo
y despues al mercado.
9. Que quierc Y. bacer? Primeramente escribir los ejercicios y
despues estudiar la leccion.
10. Porque no lo bizo Y. antes? En primer lugar porquo no tenia
bumor y en segundo porque apenas tuve tiempo.
11. ^Habla V. francos frecuentemente ? Si, senor, lo bablo con frc-
cuencia.
12. gLo escribe Y. correctamente ? Caando lo estudiaba lo escribia
con mas correccion que abora.
13. i Apreude Y. ingles 6 espaiiol ? Aprendo ambos.
14. i Y su bermano de V. ? Mi bermano los apremle tambien.
15. i Los bablan Yds. con perfeccion ? Si, seiior, el ingles lo babL
perfectamente ; pero el espaiiol ni yo, ni el tumpoco.
16. ^Ha euviado V. su carta al correo? Xo, 'xfior, la enviare ma-
fiana.
IV. ^La ba escrito V. ? Tampoco la lie escrito, porque quiero hacerlo
con comodidad.
18. ^Ila aprendido Y. la leccion de boy? lie aprcndido la de boy y
la de maflana tambien.
19. ^Cuando piensa Y. salir para Paris? ProbablemcRte saldru la
semana proxima.
20. ^!N"o vi\*e A r . comodamente aqui \ Si, sefior, pero vivo mas como-
do en Francia.
21. ^Yivia Y. comodamente cuando estaba en Loudres? No, seiior,
vivia incomodamente porque no bablaba ingles.
22. i Tiene Y. otro libro ademas de ese ? Si, senor, 'tengo otros dos.
23. $Esta Y. malo de la vista? Si, sefior, tengo rnalo un ojo.
LESSON XXIX. 133
24. I Porque no ha venido auu su primo de V. ? Porque quiere venir
con comodidad.
25. ^Tiene V. buoua vista? Si, seftor, poro aliora tengo los ojos
malos.
26. flCuando cstudia V. sus lecciones? Las estudio de dia porque'cl
estudio de noche es malo para la vista.
27. D6nde estan sus liermanos de V. ? Salieron a paseo no bien hu-
bieron escrito sus ejercicios.
28. i Cuando eseribieron las cartas ? Asi quo hubieron aprendido sus
lecciones.
29. i Llevo V. rnis cartas al correo ? Si, sefior, asi que V. hubo salido.
30. i Va V. con frecueucia al correo ? Si, sefior, voy frecuentemente :
voy todos los dias.
EXERCISE.
1. Did you goto the lawyer's as I told you? I went as soon as
you told me.
2. Was he at home ? did you see him ? He was not in when I went ;
but I waited until he came.
3. Did you show him the letter ? I opened it and showed it to him ;
but he would * not read it.
4. What did your children do after taking their lesson ? They had
scarcely finished their lesson when they went to bed.
5. Did you look at the horses your brother bought on Monday. I did
(look at them), and I think they are very fine.
G. Have you ever taken your family to Italy ? Yes, several times ;
last year we travelled in Italy.
7. Did you spend some time in the principal cities ? Yes ; but prin-
cipally in Eome (Roma\ Florence (Florencia) and Milan (Milan),
8. Where were you on the loth of December, 1865 ? On the 15th
we were in Florence in the morning, and in Eome at night.
9. Did you all enjoy good health in Europe? Yes, all, except (menos)
Alexander, who had a sore (malo) eye the greater part of the time.
10. Did you go often to the theatre? We generally went every
evening.
11. Had you any difficulty (dificultad) in understandfcg t the lan-
guage? None; you know Einanuel speaks Italian very correctly : he
had learned it before setting out for Europe.
12. Did you see^ many Americans when you were travelling? Very
many; some of them we knew very well, and others were friends of
ours.
* Quiso. t Compronder.
134 LESSON XXIX.
13. Where is the letter you were "writing this morning? As soon as I
had finished it John took it to the post-oflBce.
14. Do you ever write to your uncle ? Very little since we left New
York ; but there I used to write to him very frequently.
15. Which of you three writes French the most correctly*? I know it
is not I ;- and as to {en cuanto a) Peter and Louis, I think Peter writes
best, but Louis writes with more ease (more easily).
16. Do you see that beautiful flower ? lam looking; but I do not
see it.
17. Will you tell me what o'clock it is by the church clock? I am
looking at the church ; but I see no clock.
18. Have you not good sight ? Yes, very good ; but I have a very
sore eye.
19. Did my cousins not come ? They came as soon as you went out.
20. Did you show them my portrait ? I did ; but they scarcely had
time to look at it.
21. Did they say where they were going? They said they were going
to the country.
22. How long are they to be there ? They did not tell me that.
23. Are they not coming for me to-morrow ? Yes, sir, they are com-
ing for you to go and pay a visit to Mrs. Pefiaverde.
24. Have you ever seen a more comfortable little room than this one ?
Besides being comfortable it is very handsome.
25. Why do you not speak Spanish with Mr. Riberas ? Jn the first
place, because I do not speak it well enough ; and in the second, because
he speaks English very correctly.
26. I thought you were studying Spanish ? I am studying it ; but
studying and speaking are two distinct (distinto) things.
27. Did you tell the music teacher that Louisa wishes to take lessons ?
Not yet ; but I shall see him to-morrow and tell him so.
28. Why did you not take your lesson yesterday ? I was sick.
29. ifave you studied yesterday's lesson, and to-day's ? I have studied
both.
30. Will you come to-morrow at the same hour? Probably I shall.
* Mejor.
LESSON XXX.
135
LESSON XXX.
IMPERSONAL VEKBS.
Llover.
Lloviendo.
Llovido.
Present.
Imperfect.
Preterit definite.
Future simple.
Preterit definite.
Pluperfect.
Anterior.
Llucve.
Llovia.
Llovi6.
Llovera.
To rain.
Earning.
Rained.
Indicative.
It rains.
It was raining.
It rained.
It will rain.
Compound Tenses.
Ha llovido.
Habia llovido.
Hubo llovido.
Future compound. Habra llovido.
It has rained.
It had rained.
It had rained.
It will have rained.
Amanecer.
Anochecer.
Diluviar.
Granizar.
Helar.
Lloviznar.
Nevar.
Eclampaguear.
Tronar.
To grow light.
To grow dark.
To rain like a deluge, to rain in
torrents.
To hail.
To freeze.
To drizzle.
To snow.
To lighten.
To thunder.
Bastar.
Haber.
Hacer.
Ser.
Convenir.
Parecer.
Brasil.
Men ester.
ffielo.
PERSONAL VEBBS USED IMPERSONALLY.
To be sufficient.
(Signifying) there to be.
(Signifying) to be.
To be.
To suit, to be proper.
To seem, to appear.
Brazil.
Necessity.
Ice.
Ilabana.
Nieve.
Lluvia.
Havana.
Snow.
Rain.
13G
LESSOR XXX.
Helado.
Trueno.
Medio dia.
Viento.
Ice cream.
Thunder.
Noon.
Wind.
Tardc. Afternoon.
La mafiana. Mornin:.-.
iledia uoclie. Midnight.
Especie. Kind.
COMPOSITION.
,;Es necesario cstudiar mucho para
aprender el espanol ?
Es menester estudiar mucho, pero no
tanto como para aprender el ingles.
En Xueva York llueve y llovizna mucho,
pcro no diluvia como en la Habana.
En Madrid amanece muy temprano y
anochece muy tarde en el verano.
En la Habana amanece y anochece siem-
pre a la misma hora, en todos los
dias del auo.
En el Brasil no niera; pero truena y
relampaguea mucho siempre que
llueve.
En la Habana no hay hielo, porque no
hace bastante \frio para helar ; y por
cso lo llevan de Xueva York.
Eu Xueva York ha helado y nevado
mucho este afio ; pero en el pasado
nevo y helo muy poco.
i Hace mucho calor en este pais ?
En los mescs de Xoviembre, Diciembre
y Euero hace mucho frio ; pero en
Junio, Julio y Agosto hace mucho
calor.
(, Que tienipo hace ?
Parece que va 4 Hover, porque hay
mucho viento y hace calor.
Cuatro aSos ha, or hay cuatro anos, que
no veo a mi padre.
Pero V. tiene csperanza de verle pron-
to, porque llegara hoy & Xueva Yo*k
en el vapor "Etna" que viene de
Earopa.
En verano voy a pasear todos los dias
al amanecer.
Is it necessary to study much to learn
Spanish ?
It is necessary to study a great deal,
but not so much as to learn English.
In Xcw York it rains and drizzles a
great deal, but it does not rain in
torrents as in Havana.
In Madrid day breaks very early and
night falls very late in summer.
In Havana day breaks and night falls
at the same hours every day in the
year.
In Brazil it does not snow ; but it thun-
ders and lightens much whenever it
rains.
In Havana there is no ice, because it is
not cold enough to freeze; and for
that reason they take it from Xew
York.
In Xew York it has frozen and snowed
much this year; but last year it
snowed and froze very little.
Is it very warm in this country.?
In the months of Xovember, December
and January it is very cold ; but in
June, July and August it is very
warm.
What kind of weather is it ?
It appears it is going to rain, because
it is very windy and hot.
I have not seen my father for four
years.
But you (have) hope to see him soon ;
for he will arrive to-day in Xcw York
by the steamer " Etna " (that is)
coming from Europe.
In summer I go to walk every morning
at davbrcak.
LESSON XXX.
137
I Va V. a la cama temprano ?
No, seuor, tarde ; a la media noche.
(, Come V. al medio dia ?
No, senor, como al anochecer.
j Ya V. a la Habana ?
No, seuor, voy a Francia.
La Francia es mas alcgre que la Ingla-
tcrra.
El inuchacho cstudia muclio.
El cstudio de la grarnatica es necesario.
El horabre necesita trabajar.
La conversacion es rnuy util para apren-
der una lenjrua.
Do you go to bed early ?
No, sir, late ; at midnight.
Do you dine at noon ?
No, sir, I dine at nightfall.
Are you going to Havana ?
No, sir, I am going to France.
France is more pleasant than England.
The boy studies much.
The study of grammar is necessary.
Man requires to work.
Conversation is very useful for learning
a language.
EXPLANATION.
142. IMPERSONAL VERBS are those -which are used only in
the infinitive mood and in the third person singular of all the
tenses, and have no definite subject ; as,
Llueve.
Tronara.
Nevaba.
It rains.
It will thunder.
It was snowinsr.
143. The verbs amanecer and anochecer are sometimes
used in the three persons, both numbers ; but then they arc
not impersonal, but neuter ; as,
Yo amanec en Nueva York, y ano- |
checz en Filadelfia.
I was in New York at daybreak, and
in Philadelphia at nightfall.
144. HABER and HACER are often used impersonally, and
are in such cases to be rendered into English by the corre-
sponding tenses of the verb to be.
The verb haber, when conjugated impersonally, has the
peculiarity of taking a y in the third person ef the present in-
dicative ; as,
There is much fruit.
There will be many men.
Hay rnucha fruta.
Habra muchos hombres.
Hizo frio.
Hace muchos aflos.
It was cold.
Many years ago.
N. B. Hd is sometimes elegantly used for hay ; as,
Doce aiios ha, or hay doce afios. | Twelve years ago ;
138
LESSOX XXX.
but it is to be observed that hd always follows the time, while
hay precedes it.
There are many other verbs which, although not impersonal,
are sometimes used as such ; as,
Es muy tarde. It is very late.
Es precise. It is necessary.
Es menester. There is necessity.
Parece. It seems, it appears.
Conviene. It suits, it is proper.
Basta. It is sufficient, it will do.
145. As it may have been observed, the pronoun ?Y, which
accompanies impersonal verbs in English, is not translated into
Spanish.
Nouns taken in a definite sense require the article ; as,
El muchacho estudia.
El estudio de la gramatica es util.
The boy studies.
The study of grammar is useful.
Xouns used in their most general sense are preceded by the
article; as,
El hombre necesita trabajar.
La conversacion es muy util para
aprender una lengua.
Man requires to work.
Conversation is very useful for learn-
ing a language.
146. Xames of nations, countries, provinces, mountains,
rivers and seasons, generally take the article ; as,
La Espafia.
La Inglaterra.
El invierno.
bpain.
England.
Winter.
147. Nations, countries and provinces, when preceded by
a preposition, do not take the article unless they are personi-
fied; as,
Las provincias de Espana.
El valor de la Espafia.
The provinces of Spain.
The courage of Spain.
Nevertheless v the article is employed under all circumstances
with the names of some places; as,
El Brasil.
La Habana.
El Ferrol.
La China.
El Japon.
El Peru.
Brazil.
Havana.
Ferrol.
China.
Japan.
Peru.
LESSON XXX. 139
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. gQue tiempo hace? Ahoru hace calor; antes liacia frio.
2. i Lloverii mafiana ? Creo quo nevara.
3. $ Llueve mucho en Nueva York ? Llueve y llovizna bastantc ; pero
raramente diluvia.
4. i Hace muclio frio en la Habana en el mes do Enero ? Hace algu-
no, pero nunca niova ni Mela.
5. i Relampaguea ? Eelampaguea y llovizna.
G. Porque escribe V. tantos ejercicios ? Porque para aprender una
lengua no basta bablarla, esnecesario tambien saber escribirla.
7. i Nieva mucho en el Brasil ? En el Brasil no nieva, mas quo en las
inontaiias, donde bay nieve todo el afio.
8. i Quiere V. tomar un belado ? No, sefior, los bclados no soq
buenos en este tiempo.
9. i Cuanto tiempo bace que no ve V. a su familia? El dos do Setiem-
bre proximo hard once afios.
10. i Porque no vino V. anocbe ? Porque llovia y bacia mucho viento.
11. gTiene V. miedo do los truenos? Cuando relampaguea mucho, si
seiior.
12. Porque no fue V. anocho al concierto? Porque lloviznaba y
estaba nevando.
13. i A que boras come V. ? Al amaneccr tomo chocolate; al medio
dia como, y al anochecer tomo el te.
14. i So levauta V. al amaueccr todos los dias ? Cuando es menester,
si sefior.
15. i A que hora salio V. del teatro el sabado? A media nocbe.
1C. g Cuando salieron sus hermanas para el campo? Ayer al medio
dia.
IT. i Cuando volveran ? Pasado manana por la noche.
18. $ A quo hora amanece en el verano? En verano amanece a las
cinco y anochece a las siete y media.
19. $Porqu6 se marcha V. tan pronto? Porque es menester.
20. i Es menester salir al amanecer ? No, basta salir al medio dia.
21. illay muchos Alcmanes en Nueva York? Si, sefior, hay muchi-
simos.
22. i Cuantos dias hace que no le ve V. ? No hace mas que uno.
23. i Hay algun Frances en su casa de V. ? Hay cuatro Franceses y una
Francesa.
24. i Cuando vinieron Vds. ? Ayer al medio dia.
25. i Cree V. que llovera hoy ? Parece que si, pcrquo hace mucho
viento y mucho calor.
140 LESSON XXX.
26. ^Llovio mucho aqui cl afiopasado? Aqui llovio mucho, pero en
la Habaua llovio mas.
27. gXieva mucho en cste pais? En el invierno nieva mucho.
28. i Se hiela el agua ? Muchas veces.
29. i Habra rnucho hielo cl ano pr6ximo ? En el invierno habru mu-
cho Melo.
30. gHace mucho frio ? Si, sefior, y al amanecer llovia y granizaba.
31. gPorque liace tanto Mo hoy? Porque nevo ayer.
EXERCISE.
1. Is it raining ? I do not know.
2. You do not know ? How, are you still in bed ? Yes, and I shall
be until 1 o'clock.
3. At what o'clock did you go to bed? At midnight.
4. What is it necessary to do in order to learn Spanish ? It is neces-
sary to study a good grammar, talk a great deal with Spaniards, and read
the works of good authors.
5. What were you doing in the garden this morning at daybreak ?
I was walking.
6. Have you read the Spanish newspaper yet that I lent* you? Yes,
sir, here it is. Thank you.
7. "What language do they speak in Brazil ? Portuguese (portugues).
8. Do you see that lightning t ? Yes, it is lightening and thundering
very much.
9. Is it proper to have the windows open when it thunders? No, it
is better to have them shut (cerradas).
10. I think (it appears to me) it will soon rain. Yes, I think so too ;
it is already drizzling.
11. John ! Sir. Is there any water in my room ? No, sir, but if you
wish, I shall take some there now.
12. In what months of the year does it freeze most in New York?
During (durante) the months of January and February.
13. I believe there is a great deal of ice used (se ma) in New York
during the summer. A great deal, and it is very cheap.
14. It appears that there will be little ice next summer. Very little,
the winter has not been cold enough to have much.
15. "What watch is that you have there? It is the one I always had.
16. I thought you had given your watch to Charles, and bought your
(the) neighbor's ? No, Charles has a very pretty little watch.
IV. What o'clock is it by your watch ? It is just four o'clock (son la
cuatro en punto).
* Prestar. t Eelampago.
LESSON XXXI. 141
18. Who knocked at the door just now? It was Mrs. Martinez ; it is
thundering, and you know she is afraid of the lightning.
1 9. Why did she not come in ? She did not like to (Avould not) disturb
you (molcstarla d V.) madam.
20. Do you know whether Alexander has sent the papers to his
brother yet ? I think he has (me parece que si).
21. Did you take him the two volumes I showed him yesterday? I
took them to him this morning.
22. Was he in the house when you went ? No, madam, he had just
gone out.
23. Will you open that window, if you please ? With pleasure.
24. And this one also ? No, thank you ; it is better to have that one
shut.
25. What kind of weather is it to-day ? Very bad ; it has been raining
and hailing ever since (desde) daybreak.
26. Madam, here are two beautiful bouquets that Mrs. Garcia has sent
you from her garden. She is very kind (buena).
27. Who brought them ? Her servant (fern.').
28. When did she bring them ? You had no sooner gone out than
she came.
29. How windy it was last night! Yes, and it rained in torrents the
whole night, from nightfall until daybreak this morning.
80. What news is there from Europe? I do not know; I have not
yet seen the newspapers.
LESSON XXXI.
Gustar. | To like, to please.
PRESENT.
(A mi) me gusta or gustan.
(A ti) te gusta "
(A 61) le gusta "
(A nosotros) nos gusta, or gustan.
(A vosotros) 09 gusta, "
(A ellos) les gusta. "
I like it or them.
Thou likest it or them.
He likes it "
We like it "
You like it "
They like it "
IMPERFECT.
(A mi) me gustaba or gustaban.
(A ti) te gustaba, etc.
I liketl it or them.
Thou likedst it, &c.
142
LESSON XXXI.
Gustar de.
Gusto de.
(hi.-tas de.
Gusta de.
Gustamos de.
Gustais de.
Gustan de.
Gustaba de.
Gustabas de, etc.
Gustar.
Placer.
Pesar (impersonal).
Pesar (in all its persons).
Faltar or hacer falta.
Faltar.
Acorn odar.
Convenir.
Iniportar.
To be fond of.
PRESENT.
I am fond of.
Thou art fond of.
He is fond of. f
AYe arc fond of.
You are fond of.
They are fond of.
IMPERFECT.
I was or used to be fond of.
Thou wast or used to be fond
of, &c.
To taste.
To please.
To regret.
To weigh-
To want.
To fail, to be wanting or missing.
To suit, to accommodate.
To suit, to be convenient.
To be important.
Cerca.
Near.
Lejos.
Dentro.
Far.
Within.
Fuera.
Bello.
Posible.
Without.
Beautiful, fine.
Possible.
Imposiblc.
Poeta.
Pin tor.
Escultor.
Placer.
Impossible.
Poetry, poem.
Painting.
Sculpture.
Prose.
Poet.
Painter.
Sculptor.
Pleasure.
Poesia.
Pintura.
Escultura.
Prosa.
Dios.
God.
Fruta.
Fruit.
Pesar.
Melon.
Melocoton.
Arte.
Eegret, sorrow.
Melon.
Peach.
Art. skill.
Manzana.
Naranja.
Artes (plu.).
Arroba.
Apple.
Orange.
Arts.
Arroba.
LESSON XXXI.
143
COMPOSITION.
,; Le gusta a V. la fruta ?
Si, seuor, me gustan las naranjas y los
nielones.
A mi me gustan los melocotones y las
manzanas.
j dial de las bellas artes le gusta a Y.
inas ?
MCJ gustan todas, la musica, la poesia,
la pintura y la escultura.
f, Ya V. a la opera muy a meuudo ?
Voy dos 6 tres vcces por semana.
Me pareee quc llovera pronto, y me
gusta porque tengo un gran placer en
ver Hover.
i Es posible ! A mi no me gusta ver
llover ; pcro me gusta muchisimo
ver nevar.
(, Le acomoda a V. esc caballo ?
No me couviene, porque es muy viejo
asi que no lo comprare.
j Tive V. ceix'a 6 k'jos de aqui ?
Vivo muy cerca.
f, Vive V. dentro 6 fuera de la ciudad ?
Ahora en la ciudad ; pero en el verano
vivo en el campo.
6 Que le falta a V. para ser feliz ?
No me falta nada, gracias a Dios.
Deseo conocer al pintor cuya pintura
tiene V. en su cuarto.
<: Le pcsa a V. de no liaber estado en el
concicrto ?
Me pcsa mucho de no haber estado,
porque no tuve el placer de ver a su
amigo de V.
A mi me pesa de ello tambien.
Do you like fruit ?
Yes, sir, I like oranges and melons.
I like peaches and apples.
Which of the fine arts do you like
best?
I like them all, music, poetry, painting
and sculpture.
Do you go to the opera very often ?
I go.two or three times a week.
It appears to me that it will soon rain,
and I am glad of it (I like it), because
I find (have a) great pleasure in see-
ing it rain.
Is it possible ! I do not like to see it
ram ; but I like to see it snow.
Does that horse suit you ?
It does not suit (or answer) me, because
it is very old, so that I shall not
buy it.
Do you live near here, or far away ?
I live very near.
Do you live hi or out of town ?
In town now, but in the country in
summer.
"What do you want (is wanting to you)
to be happy ?
I want nothing, thank God.
I desire (or wish) to know the painter
whose painting you have in your room.
Do you regret not having been at the
concert ?
I deeply (very much) regret not having
been there, for I had not the pleasure
of seeing your friend.
I regret it too (also).
EXPLANATION.
148. GUSTAR, derived from the noun gusto, pleasure, and
gnifyiiig- literally to (jive pleasure to, is the verb by which we
144 LESSON XXXI.
translate to like', but in passing from English to Spanish, the
nominative case or subject becomes the objective, and the
latter is preceded by the preposition d ; as,
6 Le gusta a V. la poesia ?
Me gusta (or a mi me gusta) mucho.
Do you like poetry ?
I like it very much.
149. GUSTAK, followed by the preposition de, means to be
fond of, and sentences in Avhich it is used are constructed as
in English ; as,
Yo gusto de la musica.
El gusta de la poesia.
I am fond of music,
lie is fond of poetry.
150. GUSTAR, used as an active verb, means to taste, and
governs the objective, without the aid of any preposition what-
ever; as,
^ Gusta V. la sopa ?
No, seuor, gusto la carne.
Do you taste the soup ?
No, sir, I taste the meat
151. The verbs pesar, to regret; f altar, in the sense of to
want, or hacerfalta, to have need of; acomodar, to suit ; con-
venir, to suit ; importer, to be important ; placer, to please,
and some others, require the same idiomatic construction of the
sentence as that explained in the case of gustar as,
Nos falta (or nos hace falta) dinero.
A V. le importa ese negocio.
Mucho me place.
We want (or are in want of) money.
That business is important to you.
It pleases me much.
This last verb is defective, and is very little used, except in
the present and imperfect of the subjunctive mood, as will bo
seen in the proper place.
152. The verb pesar, when meaning to regret, generally
takes the preposition de after it ; as,
Me pesa do ello. | I am sorry for it.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. $Le gusta a Y. la 6pera? Cuando era j6ven me gustaba mas quo
nhora.
2. gYendra Y. matiana a comer con nosotros? Si, seilor, no faltare.
3. i Necesita Y. hoy su reloj? Hoy no me hace falta, mafiana me
convcndra tenerlo.
4. i Quiere V. saber lo quo lie lieclio boy ? N~o me importa saberlo.
LESSON XXXI. 145
5. i Comprn V. el caballo del ingles ? No, sefior, no me convicne :
Co muy euro.
6. Dicen quo es muy bueno. No importa.
7. ^Pol-quo vise V. tan lejos de la ciudad? Porquc no me gustan
vccinos. '
8. Antes vivia V. cdmodamente cerca de la poblacion. Si; pero
ahora no me gusta.
9. i Cuantas arrobas pesa V. ? Peso ocho arrobas y cinco libras.
10. glla visto V. a su prima? No, sefior, y me pesa mucho dc ello.
11. gCuanto pesa su nifi de V.? No s6, porque no lo hemos pesado
aun.
12. jQuiere V. ir a pnseo con D. Carlos, nuestro vecino? No quiero
ir con el porque habla mucho, y no me gustan los habladores.
13. No obstante, el aflo pasado cstaba V. en buena arnistad con el.
Si ; pero ahora mo pesa y me pesara siempre.
14. ^Nunca seran Vds. amigos otra vez & Jamas: es imposiblo.
15. j Porque? No puedo decirselo a V.
1C. $Eso no lo gustara a el ? Nada me importa.
17. ^Estan Vds. comiendo pan? No, sefior, estarnos comiendo fruta.
18. i Gusta V.?* Si, comere una manzana.
1 9. No le gustan a V. los melones ? Si, sefior ; pero me gustan mas
los melocotones y las naranjas.
20. i Quien es aquella sefiorita tan bella quo paseaba ayer con V. en
el parque? Es una amiga mia.
21. i Qu6 son los hombrcs que vinieron antes de ayer con V. ? El uno es
poeta, el otro pintor y escultor el otro.
22. gCual de las bellas artes le gusta a V. mas? Todas me gustau;
pero la poesia mas que las otras.
23. i Lc gusta a V. leer una bella poesia ? Si, sefior, me gusta
mucho.
24. $ Hace mucho frio hoy? Fuera hace bastante; pero dentro de
casa hace muy poco.
25. i Porque no fu6 V. al baile anoche ? Porque no me gustan los
bailos.
2G. ^Es posible que siendo tan joven no le gustan a V.? Ami me
importa estudiar ; no bailar.
27. i Porque no quiere V. bailar? Porque estoy cansado.
28. i Que es lo que le hace falta a V. para ser feliz ? Nada me hace
fait a por ahora, gracias a Dios.
29. ^Que le falta a V. ? Me falta el sombrero.
30. Aqui osta. l Se murcha V. ? Si, seuor, si V. no manda otra
COS9
* Do yon wisli ?
7
146 LESS OX XXXI.
EXEUCi
1. Are your brothers and sisters fond of study? They are not so
fond of it as some children I have known.
2. Do they ever read poetry? Sometimes, but not very often.
3. Do you understand Spanish poetry ? Not yet ; but I understand
prose perfectly well.
4. Do you ever eat fruit ? Yes, I am very fond of apples, oranges,
peaches and melons.
5. Is that gentleman a sculptor? No, madam, he is a painter, and
enjoys a high reputation.
6. Do you know that it is raining ? Raining! no, I did not (know it).
7. Do you think it is going to thunder ? I think it is (I think so).
8. Then it is imposible to go out? By no means (de ninyun modo) ;
we are not afraid of lightning.
9. Does it always lighten when it rains ? Not always.
10. Good morning, Mr. Retortillo, how do you do ? Very well, thank
you ; and how are you (and you) ?
11. What do you wish ? I have come to see if this letter is correctly
written. It is perfectly correct.
12. Who wrote that letter? A friend of mine, who writes Spanish
very well..
13. Why do you not learn Spanish yourself? I have no tune, and I
regret it very much.
14. What profession (profcsion) do you like best? Of all professions I
h'ke that of a physician best.
15. When did you see Miss Melundez ? I had the pleasure of seeing
her the other day.
16. How do you like (que tal) your new piano? Very much.
IT. Who is your music teacher? I have none just now; but I used
to have a German teacher.
18. How much do you weigh? I weigh a hundred and sixty-live
pounds (lilras).
19. Does Charles weigh as much as Alexander? No, sir, Alexander
weighs twenty pounds more.
20. Is Mr. Martinez at home? No, sir, he is out.
21. When will he be in ? I do not know ; he did not say (it) when he
was going out (al salir).
22. Does your uncle live in or out of town ? In summer he lives out
of town.
23. When he is in town where does he live ? In Twenty-second street,
near Fifth Avenue.
LESSOK XXXII.
147
24. How dill you spend your time when you were in the country ? I
walked morning and evening, and during the day I read the beautiful
poems of Zorrilla and Espronceda.
25. Have you ever read any of Martinez do la Kosa's poems? Yes,
but I do not like them so well as those of Melendez.
26. Which is the greatest Spanish painter ? Spam has had a great
number of excellent painters, but the most celebrated of all are Murillo
and Velazquez.
27. Are your cousins pleased with their new house ? I believe so ;
but they say they liked the old one better.
28. Where did they live before taking the house in which they reside
now ? In Fourteenth street, near Seventh avenue.
29. Are they not comfortable in the new one ? It is not for that ;
but they are very fond of flowers, and they have no garden now.
30. Will you come out and take a walk with me ? Yes, if Emanuel
comes with us ; if not, I shall go and practise on the piano.
LESSON XXXII.
Poder. (See this verb at the
end of the boolc.')
Esperar.
Castigar.
Engaflar.
Quemar.
Tratar.
Tratar de.
Tratar en.
Seguir. (See this verb at the
end of the
To be able ; may, &c.
To expect, to wait for, to hope.
To punish.
To deceive, to cheat.
To bum.
To treat ; to have intercourse with.
To endeavor, to try, to treat of.
To deal in.
To follow.
ADVERBS AXD ADVERBIAL PHRASES.
Casi.
I Ciuinto tiempo ?
Cuanto antes.
De Moda.
De
Gratis.
De cuanclo en cuando.
e balde. )
ratis. j
Almost, nearly.
How long?
As soon as possible.
Fashionable.
Gratis ; for nothing.
From time to time ; now and then.
148
LESSON XXXII.
De improvise.
De veras.
Verdaderamente
En lo sucesivo.
Hasta no mas.
Poco a poco.
Por supuesto.
Tal vez
Acaso
,\
ez. )
o. j
Picaro.
Bribon.
Ejemplo.
Rogue (roguish).
Rascal.
Example; instance.
Suddenly, unexpectedly, un-
awares.
Indeed, truly.
In future.
To the utmost, to the extreme.
Little by little, by degrees, gently.
Of course.
Perhaps.
Coqueta. Coquette.
Sociedad. Society.
Politic-a. Politics.
COMPOSITION.
Mi hermano cs castigado algunas veces
por no saber sus lecciones.
Y su amigo dc V. Alejandro, j lo cs al-
guna vez ?
Lo cs de cuando en cuando ; pcro mi
hermana no ha sido castigada jamas,
porque sabe siempre sus lecciones.
6 Ha sido V. enganado alguna vez ?
Hasta no mas, pbrquc hay muchos p-
caros en la sociedad.
Esta casa esta bien situada.
La carta cstaba nial escrita.
Manuel es amado de (or por) Margarita.
El libro ha sido escrito por un Frances.
Se quemo (or fue quemada) la casa.
Esta casa sc hizo en scis mcscs.
j En cuanto ticmpo se liizo la dc V. ?
En cosa de tres mescs.
j Cuanto tiempo necosita Y. para cscri-
bir esa carta ?
Esta ca?i aeabada ; cstoy con V. en un
minuto.
Poco a poco ; va V. muy aprisa.
Tal vez ; pcro tengo prisa y quiero aca-
bar pronto.
My brother is sometimes punished for
not kr.owing his lessons.
And your friend Alexander, i< he ever
punished (ever so) ?
He is, now and then ; but my sister has
never been punished, because she
always knows her lessons.
Have you ever been deceived ?
To the utmost, for there arc a great
many rogues in society.
This house is well situated.
The letter was badly written.
Ernanuel is loved by Margaret.
The book was written by a Frenchman.
The house was burnt.
This house was built (made) in six
months.
How long was yours in building (mak-
ing)?
About three months.
How long shall you be in writing that
letter ?
It is almost finished ; I shall be (am)
with you in a moment (minute).
Gently : you go very quick.
Perhaps so ; but I am in haste, and I
want to get done (finish) soon.
LESSON XXXII.
149
<j De veras ?
Por supuesto : tcngo quc ir al correo.
Dios csta en todas partes, lo sabe y lo
puede todo, y nos perdonara si trata-
mos de haccr nuestro deber.
6 Es su reloj de V. de moda ?
Si, seflor ; pero no me gusta, porquc es
muy pequeflo.
Indeed ?
Of course : I have to go to the post-
office.
God is everywhere ; He knows all
things, and nothing is impossible
for Him (can do all); and He will
pardon us, if we endeavor to do our
duty.
Is your watch fashionable ?
Yes, sir ; but I do not like it, because
it is too small.
EXPLANATION.
153. PASSIVE VOICE. This voice is formed by the different
tenses of the auxiliary ser added to the past participle of the
verb, care being taken that the participle agree with the sub-
ject, in gender and number, like an adjective ; as,
Soy amado. I am loved.
Hemos sido amados. We have been loved.
Habeis sido amadas. You have been loved.
Seras amada. Thou wilt be loved.
(a). The passive voice is, however, formed in Spanish, by
estar, instead of ser, when the past participle is used adjective-
ly, that is to say, when the state or condition of the subject is
described without any reference to an action ; as,
This house is well located.
The letter was badly written.
154. The passive verb formed by ser is used in Spanish in
the present and imperfect of the indicative mood, only when it
is designed to express a mental act ; as,
Manuel es amado de Margarita. | Emanuel is loved by Margaret.
When a mental act is not expressed, the passive verb being
in the present or imperfect of the indicative mood, estar is the
auxiliary to be used, and not ser ; as,
El h'bro lia sido escrito por un Fran-
ces, or el libro estd escrito por un
Frances (instead of es escrito).
155. When the action of the verb refers to the mind, the
Esta casa estd bien situada.
La carta cslaba mal cscrita.
The book was written by a French-
man.
150 LESSON XXXII.
preposition de or por may be used after the passive verb, before
the agent, and por only, when otherwise ; as,
Manuel es amado de (or por) Marga-
rita.
Emanuel is loved by Margaret.
156. The passive voice in English is very frequently
turned into Spanish by putting the verb which is in the parti-
ciple past in English, in the same person and number as the
auxiliary to be in the English sentence, and placing the pronoun
se before it.
157. The latter form is preferred when the object, or re-
ceiver, of the action is an inanimate thing, or when the sub-
ject, or agent, remains undetermined ; as,
Se quemo la casa.
Esta casa se hizo en seis mc?cs.
The house was burnt.
This house was built (made) in six
months.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i No pnedc Y. esperar ? Esperarc un poco.
2. i No me engafiara Y. ? Por supuesto que no ; yo no soy ningun
picaro.
3. Buenos dias. $De que estan Yds. tratando ? Estabamos hablando
de moda?.
4. i Puede Y. decirme si mi sombrero cs de moda ? Xo es de la ulti-
ma (nioda).
5. ^ Cuiinto tiempo liace que paso esta moda ? Habni ya un mes, poco
mas 6 men os.
6. ^Quiere Y. qtiemar las cartas de esa scflorita? Si, sefior, porque
es una coqueta.
7. ^De vera>? Yo creia que era una senorita de mucha circuns-
peccion. Hace algun tiernpo lo era ; pero poco a poco ha ido siguiendo
el ejemplo de otras.
8. i Tal vez el sor coqueta es de moda en la sociedad del dia ? Asi lo
creo.
9. Y. debe excusar a las nifias ; ellas son inocentes y no creen hacer
mal en eso.
10. $ Ha sido Y. enganado algnna vez? ITasta no mas; porque liay
niuchos picaros.
11. 2 Han sido casrigados sus niQos de Y.? Si, sefior, ban sido casti-
gados por no saber sus leccioncs.
LESSON XXXII. 151
12. ^Y aqucl criado tan bueno que V. tenia? Es un bribon; no lo
quiero ni de balde.
13. ^ Do vcras ? V. lo trataba muy bien. Acaso por lo mismo que
jo lo trataba bieii, me ba tratado el tan uial.
14. j Le gusta a V. la sociedad ? Si, seilor, de cuando en cuando.
15. i Porque no vivo V., eiitouccs, ea la ciudad? Porque se me quemo
la casa.
1C. i Ctianto tiempo hace ? Casi un mes.
17. Y ahora, $110 va V. nunca alia ? Voy de cuando en cuando.
18. -Eso es verdaderamente un gran mal ; pero en lo sucesivo tendrd
V. mas cuidado. Por supuesto que si.
19. 3X0 pudo V. saber quien le quemo la casa? No; pero creo que
fue un bribon, que me queria mal.
20. i Quiere V. acabar ya ? Si, cnanto antes ; no puedo esperar mas.
21. i Que pieusa V. hacer ahora ? Trato de castigar al que me quemo la
casa.
22. i Y despues ? Dcspues vere si puedo hacer otra.
" 23. i Y no tiene V. aliora ninguna alia ? Tengo una hecha de impro-
viso.
24. Poco a poco ira V. haciendo otra. Asi lo espero.
25. i Por supuesto que su senora vivira en la ciudad? Si; pero va
alia de cuando en cuando ; el otro dia Ilego de improvise, cuaudo menos
la esperaba.
26. i Xo puede V. volver mafiana por aqui ? Jfafiana tal vez no, pero
pa-sado si.
27. Entonces lo espero a V. sin falta. Puede V. esperarme ; no faltard.
28. i Ira V. hoy a la comedia 6 d la 6pera ? Tal vez ire a la 6pera,
porque es mas de moda.
29. i Nunca va V. a la comedia ? Si ; voy de cuando en cuando.
30. i Sabe V. que se ha queniado la Academia (academy) de Musica ?
Si ; anoche lo lei en los periodicos.
EXERCISE.
1. Papa, may I go out ? Yes, you may go out for half an hour.
2. How long is it since your house was burnt ? Only three weeks.
3. Why does that woman punish her children so much? She al-
ways punishes them when they do wrong (obrar mal).
4. Does she reward (recompensar) them when they do right ? I be-
lieve she does.
5. Why do you burn all that young lady's letters ? Because she is
only a coquette.
152 LESSOR XXXII.
6. I think you are not right ; I have known her a long time, and I
believe she is very circumspect (circumspecta).
7. "Why do your family always live in the country ? Because we do
not like society.
8. And is it not possible to live in town without going into society ?
It is impossible.
9. We always live in town, and yet (sin embargo) we never go into
society.
10. Peter, can you -write that letter for me now? I can.
11. When do you want it? As soon as possible.
12. Have you ever been deceived by that man? Yes, very often ; he
is a rascal.
13. How long have you known him ? Not long ; but each time I have
had business with him, he has deceived me.
14. Indeed! "What business is he in ? I cannot tell you.
15. Do you often go to the theatre ? Never to the theatre ; I go to
the opera now and then.
16. Can you tell me whether my hat is fashionable ? Yes, it is in the
latest fashion.
17. Is Peter's the fashion too? No, those hats went out of fashion
last year.
18. "Where is your old servant? He lives with us no longer.
19. Did you give Charles the fruit you were to buy for him I No, ho
came for it the other day, but I had not had time to buy it.
20. "Why did you come so late to-day to your lesson ? ily exercise
was very difficult, and I could not finish it in time.
21. "Well, I hope you will come in time in future ? Yes, in future I
shall come at four o'clock precisely.
22. I hope you will not deceive me ? Of course I shall not ; I never
deceive anybody.
23. Will that young gentleman * be at the concert with you to-morrow
night ? Perhaps he will come with us.
24. Does he not go every night ? Indeed I do not know.
25. How long is it since you began to take lessons ? About (cerca de)
four months.
26. And do your brother and sister take their lessons at the same hour
as you ? No, my brother takes his at ten o'clock, and my >istor ;;t
twelve. .
27. Where did you become acquainted with the gentleman who danced
last with your cousin (fern.) yesterday evening ? I made his acquaint-
ance in Madrid the year before last (hace dos afios).
28. Has this young man deceived you as often as his father? He has:
* Caballerito.
LESSON XXXIII.
153
you know children almost always follow the example of their parents
(padres).
I'D. Do you think Charles is loved by Louisa? I think she loves him
as much as it is possible to love.
30. What did you tell the tailor ? I told him you wanted your coat
and vest for the day after to-morrow.
Ilaberse lavado.
lavar.
LESSON XXXIII.
REFLECTIVE VERBS.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
To wash one's self.
To have washed one's self.
To have to wash one's self.
Habiendose lavado.
Ilabiendose dc lavar.
GERUND.
Washing one's self.
Having washed one's self.
Having to wash one's self.
INDICATIVE PRESENT.
(Yo) me lavo.
(Tu) to lavas.
(El) se lava.
(Nosotros) nos lavamos.
(Vosotros) os lavais.
(Ellos) se la van.
I wash myself.
Thou washest thyself.
He washes himself.
"We wash ourselves.
You wash yourselves.
They wash themselves.
(The other single tenses are conjugated in like manner.)
PRETERIT INDEFINITE.
(Yo) me he lavado.
(Tu) te has lavado.
(El) se ha lavado.
(Xosotros) nos hetnos lavado.
(Vosotros) os habeis lavado.
(Ellos) se han lavado.
(The otlicr compound tenses
Cortar.
Cortarse.
Afeitar.
I have washed myself.
Thou hast washed thyself.
He has washed himself.
We have washed ourselves.
You have washed yourselves.
They have washed themselves.
arc conjugated in like manner.)
To cut.
To cut one's self; to be ashamed.
To shave.
154
LESSON XXXIII.
Afeitars<?.
To shave one's self.
Levantar.
To raise, to lift.
Levantarse.
To get up, to rise.
Cansar.
To weary, to fatigue, to tire.
Cansarstf.
To tire one's self, to get tired.
Descansar.
To rest.
Contentar.
To content, to please.
Contentarse.
To content one's self.
Burlar.
To mock, to jest.
Burlaps.
Tojest, to make jestof, to laugh at.
Preguntar.
To question, to ask, to enquire.
Responder.
To answer.
Engattarse.
To deceive one's self.
Temer. Reir.
To fear. To laugh.
Arriba.
Up.
Abajo.
Down.
Detras.
Behind.
Encima.
Upon, above.
Debajo.
Under.
Luego.
Presently.
Qu6 tal ?
How ; how do you do ?
Descansadamente.
Easily.
De burlas.
In jest.
Descansado.
Rested.
Contento.
Content.
Barbero. Barber.
Pregunta. Question, query.
Cansancio. "Weariness, fatigue.
Respuesta. Answer.
Descanso. Rest.
Bnrla. Jest.
Contento. Contentment.
Declinacion. Declination.
Respondon. Ever ready to reply.
Derivacion. Derivation.
Cuchillo. Knife.
Disposicion. Disposition.
Pelo 6 cabello. Hair.
Una. Nail (finger).
COMPOSITION.
i A quo hora se levanto V. ayer ?
Me levante temprano; me levanto al
amanccer todos los dias.
6 Quo hizo V. entonces ?
Me afeito y sali.
At -what o'clock did you get up yester-
day?
I rose early ; I rise at daybreak every
morning.
What did you do next (then) ?
I shaved nrvself and went out.
LESSOR XXXIII.
155
,5 Sc lava V. antes de afeitarse ?
Me afeito antes de lavarme.
,: Son faciles de aprender las palabras
declinacion, derivacion, y disposition ?
Son facilisimas, porque casi todas las pa-
labras que acaban en don son lo
mismo en ingles, cambiando la c en t.
Tengo un barbero que afeita muy bien^
pero es carisimo ; j, que tal afeita el
deV.?
El mio no afeita muy bien; pero es
baratisimo, porque me afeito yo
mismo.
Ahora me afeita el barbero, porque me
he cortado la mano y no puedo afei-
tarme yo mismo.
,; Porque se burla V. dc su amigo ?
Me burlo de el porque se levanta muy
tarde.
,; Se ha cansado V. de estudiar ?
Xo, seuor, porque cuando me canso de
estudiar, descanso escribiendo.
i Ama Y. a su hermano ?
Nos iimamos el uno al otro.
(, Le gusta a V. mas preguntar que res-
ponder ?
No, sefior, yo no soy pregunton, y me
gusta hacer ambas cosas.
Yo no trabajo mucho, lo bago descan-
sadamcnte.
Se engafia V. & si mismo alguna vez ?
V. habla de burlas ; <; puede uno enga-
Carse a si mismo jamas ?
For supuesto que si.
6 Esta. su amigo de V. abajo 6 arriba ?
(, Est& mi libro debajo 6 encima de la
mesa ?
6 Quo tal le gusta a V. Nueva York ?
Do you wash yourself before shaving
(yourself) ?
I shave before washing myself.
Are the words declination, derivation
and disposition easy to learn ?
They are very easy, because all words
ending in don are the same in Eng-
lish, changing the c into t.
I have a barber that shaves very well,
but he is exceedingly high (dear) ;
how does your's shave ?
Mine does not shave very well ; but he
is very cheap, for I shave myself.
The barber shaves me at present (now),
because I (have) cut my hand, and I
cannot shave myself.
Why do you make fun of your friend ?
I make fun of him because he gets up
very late.
Have you got tired of studying ?
No, sir; because when I get tired at
study, I rest myself writing.
Do you love your brother ?
We love each other.
Do you like better to ask questions
than to answer ?
No, sir, I am not inquisitive ; I like to
do both.
I do not work much ; I do it at my ease.
Do you ever deceive yourself?
You speak in jest ; can one ever de-
ceive one's self?
Certainly (so).
Is your friend up-stairs or down-stairs ?
Is my book upon or under the table ?
How do vou like New York ?
EXPLANATION.
158. REFLECTIVE VEKBS. Almost all active verbs may
become reflective in Spanish, and be used as pronominal. The
156 i. i: s.sox xxxiii.
pronoun object must be of the same person as that of the sub-
ject, and each person is conjugated with a double personal
pronoun. However, the .pronoun subject is almost always un-
derstood in Spanish, while in English it is expressed ; as,
Infinitive. Amarse.
Part. Pres. Amandose.
To love one's self.
Loving one's self.
INDICATIVE PRESENT.
Me amo.
Te amas.
Se ama.
Xos araamos.
Os amais.
Se aman.
I love myself.
Thou lovest thyself.
He loves himself.
We love ourselves.
You love yourselves.
They love themselves.
And in the same manner in all the other tenses.
159. When an agent performs an action upon a part of
himself, the verb is made reflective ; and the possessive pro-
nouns, my, his, etc., are translated into Spanish by the article
el, la, los, las ; as,
Me corto el cabello. I I cut my hair.
Se corta las unas. He cuts his nails.
160. When the verb denotes a reciprocity of action be-
tween two or more individuals, it is formed, in Spanish, in the
same manner as the plural of reflective verbs ; as,
Nos amamos.
Os engaiiastcis.
Se temerdn.
We love one another.
You deceived each other.
They will fear each other.
CONVERSATION AXD YERSIOX.
1. i Se lia afeitado V. ? Ni me he lavado ni afeitado.
2. Cuuntas veces lava la criada a los nifios ? Los lava por la raafiana,
al medio dia y a la noche.
3. i Cuando les corta las unas ? Se las corta los miercoles y los sabados.
4. i Se lavantan temprano ? A las seis en verano, y ii las siete en in-
vierno.
5. ^Porque no se Ievant6 V. hoy mas temprano ? Porque el criado
no me despert6.
6. i Xo despierta Y. teraprano ? Cuando estoy cansado, no.
7. g Estaba V. muy cansado ayer ? Si, seftor, el paseo me cans6 mucho.
LESSON xxxii r. 157
8. Entonces, querra V. descansar hoy toclo el dia ? No, he descan-
sado ya bastaiite durante la noche.
9. i Con cuanto diuero so contcnta V. ? Yo me contento con poco.
10. gSe coutentara V. con diez pesos? Se burla V. de mi.
11. No, yo solam ente pregunto. V. me pregunta y yo respondo quo no.
12. ^Habla V. de burlas 6 de veras? Hablo de veras; yo no me con-
tento con menos de cien pesos.
13. flSe burla V. de mi? No, sefior, yo nunca hablo de burlas; y V.
tendra que contentarse con lo quo se le ha dado ya.
14. V. cs quien se engafia. El engailado sera V., yo no.
15. $ Para que llama V. al barbero ? Para afeitarme.
1C. i Porqu6 no se afeita V. mismo ? Porque tengo miedo de cortarme.
17. i Donde esta el cuchillo ? Esta sobre la mesa.
18. g Adonde va V. ? Yoy a cortarme el pelo.
19. i Donde vive su barbero ? Vive detriis de la iglesia.
20. i Pregunto V. al criado por mis botas ? Si, sefior, me dijo que es-
taban bajo de la cama.
21. Sale Y. ahoratipaseo? No, seiior, saldre despues.
22. i Que tal esta su amigo de V. ? Ahora esta mas contento.
23. i Que tal es el criado que tiene V. ahora ? Es muy respondon.
24. i Donde esta su padre de V., arriba 6 abajo? Antes estaba abajo,
ahora me parece que esta arriba.
25. j Que tal ha pasado V. la noche ? Muy descansadamente ; he dor-
mido muy bien.
20. ^Como estaii escritos los ejercicios de su gramatica de Y. ? Estan
por prcguntas y respuestas.
27. i Hizo V. la pregunta que le dije ? Si; pero no me dieron respuesta.
28. $De que trata la leccion de hoy? De la decliuacion y derivacion
de los nombres, y de la disposicion de las palabras en la composicion.
29. i Quo esta Y. leyendo ? Las disposiciones del rey Carlos III.
30. i Aprende bien el espafiol su amigo de Y. ? No, seiior, tiene muy
poca disposicion para las lenguas.
31. i Que hizo V. ay or despues que se levanto ? Me lave y me afeite.
32. gSe cans6 V. mucho ayer? Si, sefior, me canso mucho el paseo al
parque.
33. i Necesita Y. descanso ? Descanso bastante de noche.
EXERCISE.
1. Where do you sleep? In the small room on the third floor (piso).
2. At what o'clock do you get up every morning ? I generally rise
at six o'clock.
158 WESSON XXXIII.
3. At what hour do your children rise in summer ? They rise at day-
break.
4. At what time do they go to bed? At nightfall.
5. Where do you wash yourself? I wash myself in my own room.
6. Do you wash yourself in hot (caliente) or cold water ? I wash
myself always with cold water.
7. Why do you not wash sometimes with warm water ? Because
cold water is much better for the skin (cutis).
8. Where do you go to get shaved ? I go to the barber's.
9. Where does your barber live ? In Broadway, near Broome
street.
10. Are you tired ? No, sir, I never tire myself writing.
11. Are you speaking in earnest or in jest? In earnest; I am not in
a humor to jest.
12. It seemed to me you were in a humor to jest a while ago? Not
at all ; on the contrary,* it was my brother that was making fun of me
because I had cut my hand.
13. Well, no matter ; I know you are fond of jesting and laughing at
everybody. You deceive yourself, my dear sir (seflor mid).
14. Charles, can you go to the tailor's to tell him I wish to see him ?
It is impossible for me to go out now, I am expecting Mr. Valero.
15. No matter, I shall send John. John cannot go either; he has to
be here at the same time as I.
16. Will you go to the post-office and ask if there are any letters for
me ? I asked this morning when I took father's letters, and they told
me there were none.
17. Did you see the newspaper I was reading when your cousin came
in ? There it is on the table, behind the dictionary.
18. Why did you get yoxir hair cut (liacerse cortar) ? Because it was
too long (largo).
19. Indeed! I thought you liked long hair? On ladies, yes; but it
is not very suitable for a man.
20. Where is Peter ? I think he is up-stairs.
21. Will you do me the pleasure to call him ? Certainly (ciertamente).,
22. Was the musician contented with what you gave him ? He did
not appear to be contented.
23. How do you like the vest that my tailor made for you ? Pretty
(bastante) well ; but I like the work of my own tailor better.
24. How is your uncle to-day? The physician came to see him this
afternoon, and he said he was much better.
25. What are those gentlemen doing over there ? Do you not see that
they are resting?
* De ningun modo, al contrario.
LESSOR XXXIV.
159
. 26. How do you know they are tired ? They have been walking all
the morning.
27. Then they are very right (hacer muy lien) to rest. Of course ;
rest is sweet (grata) when one is tired (se cstd cansado).
LESSON XXXIV.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
Acertar.
Acierto.
Aciertas.
Acierta.
Acertamos.
Acertais.
Aciertan.
Acierta tti.
Acierte 61.
Acertemos nosotros.
Acertad vosotros.
Acierten ellos.
To guess, to make out, to hit
the mark.
USTDICATTVE. Presen t.
I guess.
Thou guessest.
He guesses.
We guess.
You guess.
They guess.
IMPERATIVE.
Guess thou.
Let him guess.
Let us guess,
Guess.
Let them guess.
SUBJUNCTIVE. Present.
Acierte. I may or can guess.
Aciertes. Thou mayest or canst guess.
Acierte, He may or can guess.
Acertemos. We may or can guess.
Acerteis. You may or can guess.
Acierten. They may or can guess.
Verbs conjugated like ACERTAR.
Calentar. To warm, to heat.
Cerrar. To shut, to close.
Confesar. To confess.
Despertar. To awake, to wake.
Gobernar. Acercar. To govern. To approach.
100
LESSON XXXIV.
Merendar.
Negar.
Pensar.
Quebrar.
Sentarse.
To lunch.
To deny.
To think, to intend.
To break.
To sit down.
Verbs that are regular, although small changes are made to preserve the
pronunciation of the infinitive.
Veneer. To vanquish, to overcome.
Kesarcir. To indemnify.
Pagar. To pay.
' Delinquir. To commit a fault, to transgress.
Escoger. To choose.
Poseer. To possess.
Pro veer. To provide.
Huir. To flee, to fly.
Argiiir. To argue.
A ver.
Quiza.
Dcliiicuentc.
Inocente.
Franco.
Cualquiera.
Oualquiera partc.
Fuego. Fire.
Jardinero. Gardener.
Motivo. Motive.
Sofa. Sofa.
Let us see.
Perhaps.
Delinquent, offender, transgres-
sor.
Innocent.
Frank, open.
Any, any one, some one, -what-
ever, whatsoever.
Any place.
Consccuencia.
Consequence,
conclusion.
Prudencia.
Prudence.
Verduras.
Vegetables.
Deuda.
Debt,
COMPOSITION.
Le gusta a V. calentarsc al fuego ?
Si, senor, me gusta calcntarmc al fuego
en el invierno cuando hace mucho
frio.
6 Que calienta el criado ?
Esta calentando cl caf6.
j A quo kora dosperto Y. ayer ?
Do you like to warm yourself at the fire ?
Yes, sir, I like to warm myself at the
fire in winter when it is very cold.
What is the servant warming ?
He is warming the coffee.
At what hour did you awake yesterday.
LESSON XXXIV.
161
,5 A ver si acierta V. ?
No se, quiza desperto V. a las cinco.
Despierto todas las maiianas u las cua-
tro y media.
(, Cierra V. la puerta 6 la abre ?
He cerrado la puerta y abierto la vcn-
tanu.
I Es delincuente aquel hombre ?
Lo creo, porque huye.
Xiego la conseeucncia ; V. no arguye
bien, 61 puede ser inocente y huir
por prudencia.
(, Se proveyo V. do flores ?
Me provei do fruta y mi herraana de
verduras.
<: Pago Y. por ellas al jardinero ?
Yo le pague la fruta y mi hermana le
pago las verduras.
,: Piensa Y. ir u Europa oste verano ?
Dcseo irme a alguna parte, porque con-
fieso que tcngo mucho miedo del colera.
Hay muchos que niegan tener miedo ;
pero yo tengo el valor de confesarlo
francamente.
(, A que bora se desayuna V. ?
Me desayuno a las oeho, meriendo a las
dos y como a las seis.
i Me promete Y. venir a comer conmi-
go hoy ?
Entre comer 6 mcrendar con V. escojo
cl merendar, porque Y. come dema-
siado temprano.
* V\"ords printed in italics do not
Let us see if you can* guess ?
I do not know ; perhaps you awoke at
five o'clock.
I awake every morning at half-past
four.
Are you shutting the door or opening it?
I have shut the door and opened the
window.
Is that man a transgressor ?
I think so, for he flees.
I deny the conclusion ; you do not
argue correctly (well) ; he may be
innocent and flee (or fly) from pru-
dence.
Did you provide yourself with flowers ?
I provided myself with fruit, and my
sister with vegetables.
Did you pay the gardener for them ?
I paid him for the fruit, and my sister
paid him for the vegetables.
Do you intend to go to Europe this
summer ?
I wish to go somewhere, for I confess
I am very much afraid of the cholera.
There are many who deny being afraid ;
but I have the courage to confess it
freely.
At what hour do you breakfast ?
I breakfast at eight, lunch at two, and
dine at six.
Will you (do you) promise to come and
dine with me to-day ?
Between lunching and dining with you,
I choose lunching, for you dine too
early,
require to be translated into Spanish.
EXPLANATION.
161. IRREGULAR VERBS. All verbs that are not conju-
gated throughout according to the model verbs already given
(hablar, aprender, escribir), are called irregular.
162. It is, however, to be observed, that although some
verbs undergo slight changes in their radical letters, they are
162 LESSON XXXIV.
not to be considered as irregular on that account, inasmuch as
those mutations take place in order to preserve throughout the
whole conjugation the pronunciation of the root as sounded in
the infinitive. This observation should be carefully borne in
mind, so as not to take for irregular verbs those which are
really not so.
Many verbs ending in car, cer, cir, gar, for instance, undergo
respectively such mutations as above alluded to : those in car
change the c into qu before e ; as,
Tocar.
Toywe (instead of tocc).
To touch.
I touched
in those in cer and cir, the c is changed into z before a and o ;
as.
Veneer.
VeDso (instead of venco).
Eesarcir.
Resarco (instead of resarco).
To vanquish.
I vanquish.
To indemnify.
I indemnify ;
and lastly, those in gar take a u after the g and before e ; as,
Pagar.
Pagwe (instead of page).
To pay.
I paid.
For the same reason delinquir changes qu into c, before a
and o ; as, delinco, delinca, delincamos ; and cscoger, to choose,
changes the g into,/ before a and o ; as, escojo, escoja.
163. The verbs which terminate in eer, as creer, to believe ;
leer, to read ; poseer, to possess ; proveer, to provide, in those
terminations which contain an i, change it into y whenever it
is to be joined with another vowel ; as, crei, creyo ; le\, leyeron ;
posei, poseyere ; prove!, proveyercmos, &c.
164. The same change is made in the verbs ending in uir,
when the u and the i make a part of two different syllables.
Thus huir, to fly, makes, in the third person of the preterit defi-
nite, huyo ; argttir, to argue, makes arguyo, &c.
165. The irregular verbs, about Jive hundred and fifty in
number, may be divided into seven classes, presenting each a
certain regularity in their irregularity; that is to say, whose
irregularities occur in the same persons and tenses, so that
when the pupil has learned seven verbs, or one of each of those
LESSON XXXIV. 163
groups, ho will be able to conjugate almost all the Spanish
irregular verbs, save a few that confine their irregularities to
themselves and their compounds, and of which the majority
have been already introduced in previous lessons, such as haber,
tener, &c. ; but the learner can find them all conjugated at the
end of the book.
Acertar may serve as a model for the conjugation of the
first of these seven classes of irregular verbs, just as hablar does
for the first conjugation of the regular verbs. The irregularity
of acertar, and of all those conjugated like it, consists in taking
an i before the last e of the root, in the first , second and third
pel-sons singular, and the third person plural of the present of the
indicative mood, in the present of the subjunctive, and in the
imperative. (See list of the irregular verbs at the end of the
book.} In all the other tenses and moods those verbs are regu-
lar, and the learner can easily form them according to their
respective conjugations.
166. PAGAE may take for its direct object either the value
paid or the thing paid for, while the person paid is the indi-
rect object. Por may be used before the thing paid for ; as,
Pago los caballos, or pago por loa
caballos.
Pago mil pesos por los caballos.
Pago al comerciante mil pesos por
los caballos.
I pay for the horses.
I pay a thousand dollars for the
horses.
I pay the merchant a thousand dol-
lars for the horses.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Accrtara V. la casa de su prima ? Si, sefior, yo la acertare.
2. gPodra V. acertar quien estuvo aqui ayer? No acierto.
3. $ No entiende su hermano de V. lo que le digo ? Si, sefior; pero
no acierta a responder.
4. i Se calienta V. al fuego ? Si, sefior, porque hace mucho frio.
5. $ Torque 1 no cierra V. ent6nces la puerta? Confleso quo no habia
pciisado en ello.
6. i A que hora desperto V. esta mafiana? Desperte 1 a las diez.
I J. i~E\ que gobierna una casa y una familia, no debe levantarse teui-
prano ? No lo niego.
8. % Piensa V. merendar hoy ? Si, sefior, nosotros rnerendamos todos
los dias.
164 LESSON XXXIV.
9. ^Porqne no se sienta V. en aquclla silla, que es mejor? Porque
tengo miedo de rornperla.
10. ^Le pag6 V. d su criado ? Si, sefior, le pagu6 ayer y hoy se ha huido.
11. No le perdonara V. ? No, sefior, porque quicn delinquio uiui vez
delinquira dos.
12. $Y DO se resarcio de su trabajo? Si, sefior, antes se proveyo de
ropa en mi casa.
13. i Que lenguas posee el ? El ingles, el frances y el italiano.
14. i Quin posee ahora la casa de campo de V. ? El americano la posee.
15. i Se la ha pagado a V. ? No, sefior, no me pago nada.
16. jComprd V. flores al jardinero? Le compre verduras y mi her-
mana le compr6 flores.
17. $Le pagaron Vds. al jardinero por ellas? To le pague las verdu-
ras y mi hermana pago por las flores.
18. i A quien le gustan mas las flores, 6 V. 6 a su hermana? Creo que
a clla le gustan mas las flores; pero a mi me gusta mas la fruta.
19. i Que fruta le gusta a V. mas ? Me gustan las naranjas y las man-
zanas.
20. i Paga V. siempre sus deudas ? Las pago cnando tengo dinero.
21. ^Piensa V. ir al campo este verano ? Deseo ir & cualquiera parte,
porque confieso que tengo mucho rniedo del colera.
22. i No tiene V. verguenza de confesarlo ? Hay muchos que nicgaa
tener miedo ; pero yo tengo el valor de confesarlo francamente.
23. g A que hora desperto V. ayer? Ayer, creo que desperte a las
cinco. Despierto todos los dias a las cuatro y media.
24. i Y a qu6 hora se desayuna V. ? Me desayuno a las siete, meriendo
a las dos y como a las seis.
25. $ Me prom etc V. venir hoy a comer conmigo ? No puedo prorne-
t6rselo, porque no se si tendre tiempo.
EXCERCISE.
1. How cold it is this morning! Yes, it is very cold.
2. "Will you not come and warm yourself at the fire ? No, thank
you ; I do not like to warm myself at the fire.
3. In that case it is better to shut the doors and the windows.
Perhaps it is.*
4. Do you intend remaining (estarse) here during the winter? If my
uncle remains, I will too.
o. Will you not choose other rooms if you remain ? Yes, I intend
to do so.
* English words printed in italics do not require to be translated into Spanish.
LESSON XXXIV. 165
6. Good evening, Charles ; will you not sit down for a few minutes ?
With pleasure.
7. Did you find out (make out) the musician's house yesterday ? I
made out the house without much difficulty, but I did not see him.
8. How was that ? He must have been out, for I knocked at his
door.
9. At what hour do you dine ? I generally dine at six o'clock.
10. Then you lunch at noon ? Yes, sir, I generally lunch about that
hour.
11. Do you eat fruit every day at dinner? Not every day.
12. Did your brother pay for the fruit he bought last week ? No ; but
he has to go out to-morrow, and perhaps he will go and pay for it.
13. Let us go and take a walk. Where do you wish to go ?
14. We can go to the Central Park. Very well, let us go there ; I
think it is the finest promenade in the city.
15. At what time do they open the park in the morning? I believe
it is open in summer at five o'clock.
16. And at what time is it shut? At eleven o'clock, I believe, or per-
haps a little later.
17. In that case it will be better not to go there until to-morrow ; it
is now rather too late (algo tarde).
18. How too late? It is only half-past seven, so that wo have three
hours and a half for walking.
19. Where are they taking that man to? They are taking him to
prison (la cared).
20. What are they taking him to prison for ? Ho. must be guilty of
some misdemeanor (delinquir).
21. Has the servant taken the letter to the pianist yet ? He took it to
him yesterday afternoon.
22. Have you seen the news this morning ? No ; what news is there ?
23. There was a great fire last night in Fourth street, and twelve
houses were burned.
24. Where is Alexander ? lie is up stairs.
25. Have any of you seen my Spanish dictionary ? Yes, I had it this
morning in my room.
20. What were you doing with it? I was looking fora new word
which I met with* while reading the history you lent me.
27. How did you manage (fleer tar) to wake so early this morning?
My brother awoke me singing in my room, at five o'clock.
28. At what time do you generally wake ? If no one conies to inter-
rupt (interruntpir) my sleep, I never wake before nine.
* English words in italics do not require to be translated.
\
166
LESSON XXXV.
29. Is it not better for the health to rise early ? Certainly; but then
it is necessary to go to bed early also.
30. Why do you not go to bed early ? I am fond of reading and study,
and so I rarely go to bed before two o'clock in the morning (de la nia-
drugada).
Acostar.
LESSON XXXV.
IRREGULAR VERBS Continued.
| To put in bed.
INDICATIVE. Present.
Acuesto, acueslas, acuesta.
Acostamos, acostais, acuestan.
IMPERATIVE.
Acuesta tu, acueste 1, acoste-
mos nosotros, acostad voso-
tros, acuesten ellos.
I put in bed, &c.
We put in bed, (fee-
Put in bed, &c.
SUBJUNCTIVE. Present.
Acueste, acuestes, acueste, acos-
temos, acosteis, acuesten.
I may, or can, put in bed, &c-
VERBS CONJUGATED LIKE ACOSTAE.
Acostarse.
Aprobar.
Almorzar.
Contar.
Oonsolar.
Encontrar.
Mostrar.
Probar.
Recordar.
Reprobar.
Rogar.
Sonar.
Deh'cioso.
Espacioso.
Industrioso.
Religioso.
To go to bed, to lie down.
To approve.
To breakfast.
To count ; to relate, or tell.
To console.
To meet.
To show.
To prove ; to try ; to taste.
To remind ; to remember.
To reprove.
To entreat.
To dream.
Delicious.
Spacious.
Industrious.
Religious.
LESSON XXXV.
167
Aristocratico.
Aristocratic.
Clasico.
Classic.
Fanatico.
Fanatic.
Monarquico.
Monarchical.
Tiranico.
Tyrannical.
Tragico.
Tragic.
Portico.
Poetical.
Analitico.
Analytical.
Satirico.
Satirical.
Filos6fico.
Philosophical.
C6mico.
Comic, comical.
Economico.
Economical.
Laconico.
'Laconic.
Metodico.
Methodical.
Cr6nico.
Chronic.
Vaso. Tumbler, glass.
Taza. Cup.
Sermon. Sermon.
Moral. Moral.
Muudo. World.
Eepublica. Eepublic. .
Capitulo. Chapter.
Independencia. Independence.
Perro. Dog.
Eeligion. Religion.
COMPOSITION.
Manuel, acucstate temprano y Icvantatc
temprano tambien.
Alejandro, cuentamcloquetedijoLuisa.
Ayudate y Dios te ayudarii.
Ama a tu projimo como a ti mismo.
Se religiose, pero no seas fanatico.
Se industrioso y economico y no scras
pobre.
Sentemonos, que estoy cansado.
Amaos como hermanos y no hableis
mal uno del otro.
Entre V., Dn. Pedro, y tome V. asiento,
or sientese V.
No puedo, estoy de prisa.
Juan, cierra la puerta, pero no cierres
la ventana.
Caballeros, cntren Vds., y les mostrare
mis libros.
Alejandro, coufiesa tu falta y te la per-
donave.
Emanuel, go to bed early aud rise early
too.
Alexander, tell me what Louisa told thee.
Help thyself, and God will help thee.
Love thy neighbor as thyself.
Be religious, but not a fanatic.
Be industrious and economical and thou
shalt not be poor.
Let us sit down, for I am tired.
Love each other as brothers, and speak
no evil one of another.
Come in, Mr. Peter, take a seat, or be
seated.
I cannot, I am in a hurry.
John, shut the door, but do uot shut
the window.
Come in, gentlemen, and I shall show
you my books.
Alexander, confess your fault, and I
will pardon you.
168 LESSON XXXV.
No los ofendamos.
Amigos, cantemos y bailemos y seamos
felices.
No tomaras en vano el Nonibre del Se-
fior tu Dios
Let us not offend them.
ily fiiends, let us sing, dance and be
merry.
Thou shalt not take the Xame of the
Lord thy God in vain.
EXPLANATION.
167. The verb acostar changes the radical o into ue in the
same tenses and persons as those in which the verb acertar is
irregular; i. e., in the present indicative, the imperative and the
present subjunctive. (See this verb and those conjugated like
it at the end of the book}.
168. THE IMPERATIVE MOOD is not used in the first person
singular ; nor is it used in Spanish for forbidding ; that is, it is
not employed in the negative form ; but the persons of the
present subjunctive are used when a negative command or a
prohibition is expressed ; as,
No lo hagas. )
x- , , - > Do not do so.
rs o lo nagais. j
169. As has already been said, the s of the first person
plural, and the d of the second, are suppressed before nos and
os; as,
Amemonos.
Amaos.
Let us love each other.
Love one another.
170. "When the imperative is negative in English, as the
subjunctive is employed in Spanish, the objective pronouns arc
placed before it ; as,
No lo digas. I Do not tell it.
No los ofendamos. Let us not offend them.
171. The future of the indicative is often used for the im-
perative; as,
Xo tomaras en vano el Nombre
del Seflor tu Dios.
Thou shalt not take the Xame of
the Lord thy Goil in vain.
172. Many adjectives ending in ous are rendered into
Spanish by changing this termination into oso ; as,
Delicioso. I Delicious.
Espacioso. Spacious, &c.
LESSOR XXXV. 169
173. Many nouns and adjectives ending in English in ic
or iced have in Spanish the termination too ; as,
Fanatzco. Fanatic, fanatical.
PoetzVo. Poetic, poetical.
COXYERSATION AND VERSIOX.
1. Lnisa, estndia bien tu leccion do espafiol y escribe los ejercicios.
2. i Que me dani V., papa, si la estudio biea j no hago faltas ea los
ejercicios ? Te llevare conmigo al Barque Central.
3. Papa, i no llevara V. a Alejandro y a Manuel con nosotros ? Si
son buenos muchachos y estndiosos los Ilevar6 tambien.
4. Alejandro, ven aca y cuentame que hiciste ayer en el campo. Con
niucho gusto. For la mafiana me levante temprano, me lave y almorce y
despucs me fui a pasear. Yolvi muy cansado y me acoste a las nueve.
5. jJuan! gSeflor? MaQana me despertarus a las cinco, me limpia-
rus las botas y me traeras el caballo temprano, porque quiero ii- a dar un
paseo y tomar un vaso de leche en el hotel del Parque Central.
6. Amigo mio, no seas fanatico, pero se religioso. No seas satirico
ui liablador, pero s6 prudente, economico 6 industrioso y seras feliz.
7. Por Dios, Don Pedro, no hable V. mas, le prometo a V. estudiar y
ser buen mucbacho.
8. No seas rcspondon, haz tu deber, ayiidatc y Dios to ayudara.
9. Don Pedro, a mi no me gustan los serinones largos, sientese V. y
hablemos de otra cosa.
10. Mire Y., Dn. Juan, a aquella sefiorita que esta en la ventana del
vecino ; ^la conoce V. ? Si, seilor, la conoci en Filadelfia.
11. jQue tal le gusta a Y. ? Muchisimo; es una seuorita perfecta, y
babla el espanol tan bien como el ingles.
12. i Quiere V. llevarme a su casa? Tengo deseo de conocerla. Con
niucho gusto, pero antes necesito su aprobacion.
13. Le amaii a V. mucho sus ninos? Me aman y yo los amo; y toda
la iamilia nos amamos los linos ti los otros, asi es que somos feh'cisimos.
14. $Se aman Yds. los unos a los otros tanto como se aman Yds. inis-
mos ? Creo que si.
15. liable V. alto y despacio si Y. gusta y entonces entendere todo lo
que V. dice. A?i lo liare; pero Y. no pensan'i en otra cosa quo en lo
que yo digo, porque si no, no hablare mas.
1C. jLe conviene a V. comprar aquella casa? No me couvioiU
que es muy cara y esta muy lejos de la ciudad.
17. |Qu6 lo parecc a Y. del ticinpo? Hoy es el cuutro dc Julio de
8
1 70 LESSON XXXV.
1866, y por supuesto Lace calor; pero hace muy buen tiempo para la
celebraciou de la independencia de esta gran Republica.
18. gCuantos aiios bace boy que los Estados Unidos celeb ran su inde-
pendencia ? Noventa y un anos.
19. j Parece imposible ! En menos de cien aflos ha llegado esta nacion
a ser una de las potencias (powers) nias grandes del mundo.
20. Eso debia ser asi, y no dude Y. que llegara tin dia en que la liber-
tad y la religion reinaran en el mundo baciendo felices u todas las na-
ciones couio a otras tantas familias que tienen un mismo padre.
EXERCISE.
1. Did you get up late to-day ? No ; I got up at daybreak to go and
walk in the country.
2. Where did you walk? I went first to the Central Park, and then
to Harlem.
3. What is the first thing we read in Telemachus ? We read that
Calypso could not console herself for the departure (partida) of.
Ulysses.
4. Where have you been all this tune, sir ? it is more than a Aveek
since you last came to see us ; that is not right (e&tar Men}. I confess I
am rather negligent (negligente) sometimes.
5. You have doubtless already gone to see your old friend? Yes,
and he wanted to make me spend a month with him at his country bouse.
6. What part of the country does he live in ? On Long Island, about
ten miles from the city.
Y. Was he not glad to see you ? We looked at each other for about
ten minutes without being able to say a word ; at last (en Jin) he broke
the silence (rompio el silencio), and said to me : " What ! is it you, my
dear friend ? After seven years' absence (ausencia) ! How glad I am !
8. Did he know you as soon as he saw you ? Yes, and I knew him,
though I met him at some distance from his father's house.
9. Doubtless he asked you about your travels (voyages) ? Of course.
"Where have you been ? " said he. " What have you done ? what have
you seen? are you rich? are you happy? Tell me all you have done
since you went away (irse); all your adventures. I wish it; I desire it;
I beg of you; it will give (you will do) me the greatest pleasure."
10. All that proves his joy at seeing you. Yes, I know that ; but how
many questions!
11. Did he want an answer to each one of them? Of course; and I
answered them as well as I could.
12. What did you tell him? I told him that after having left France,
LESSON XXXVI. 171
I went to Spain, and from there into Portugal (Portugal), and that after
a few months passed in Lisbon (Lisboa) I went on to Italy, where I re-
mained four years.
13. "What are the hours for breakfast and dinner amongst the Italians?
The Italians, like the French, usually (generally) breakfast at eleven
o'clock, and dine from five to seven in the evening.
14. And do they never eat anything before the breakfast hour ? Al-
most everybody takes a cup of coffee or chocolate in the morning soon
after rising.
15. What kind of governments are there in Europe? In Europe we
find almost every form (forma) of government, repubh'can and monar-
chical.
16. "What is that book you have in your hand? An analytical treatise
(tratado) of Spanish poetry that I was going to show to your cousin.
17. Have you seen Boileau's satirical poems? My uncle has promised
to bring me that work from Paris.
18. Are you fond of reading? Yes, I take (find) great pleasure in
reading books of all kinds, classical, poetical, religious, analytical, satiri-
cal, philosophical, &c.
19. Do you remember the peaches our friend sent us from the country
last year? Of course I remember them, and that they were delicious.
20. Charles, go and take your breakfast ; I want to take you to see
the fine horse your uncle has bought for Alexander.
21. Will you not buy one for me, too, papa? If you are a good boy
I probably will.
22. Do you ever dream? Very often; last night I dreamed I was
travelling.
23. Indeed! Where were you going to ? I do not remember now.
24. What was your father saying to Peter when I came in ? He was
reproving him for not having written his exercise yesterday.
25. Can you tell me what day this is? To-day is Wednesday, July
4th, of the year 1866, and the ninety-first of the Independence of the
United States.
Respetar.
Parar.
Mover.
LESSON XXXVI.
To respet.
To stop.
To move.
172
LESSON XXXVI.
IXDIC ATIVE Presen t.
Muero, mueves, muevc, move- I I move, &c.
mos, moveis, muecen.
IMPERATIVE.
Mueve tu, mueva el, movamos
nosotros, moved vosotros,
mucvan ellos.
Move, &c.
SUBJUNCTIVE Present.
Mueva*, muevas, mueva, mova-
mos, movais, muevan.
I may or can move, &c.
Verts conjugal
Llovcr.
M order.
Doler.
Volver.
:d like MOVER.
To rain.
To bite.
To grieve, to pain, to ache.
To turn, to return.
Antes que.
Aunque.
Como.
Para que. )
A fin de. f
Before.
Although.
Since, provided.
In order that, in order to.
Todo el mundo.
Principalmento.
Everybody.
Principally, chiefly.
Antagonists. Antagonist.
Artista. Artist.
!Materialista. Materialist.
Isaturalista. Naturalist.
Organista. Organist.
Violinista. Violinist.
Purista. Purist.
Escritorio. Office.
Clima. Climate.
Dolor. Grief, pain, ache.
Atrocidad. Atrocity.
Capacidad. Capacity.
Claridad. Clearness,
light.
Crueldad. Cruelty.
Dificultad. Difficulty.
Eternidad. Eternity.
Facilidad. Facility.
Xoticias. News.
Guerra. "War.
COMPOSITION.
Se dice que Maximiliano ha partido de
Jlejico.
It is said that Maximilian has left Mex-
ico.
LESSON XXXVI.
173
g Se crcc cso ?
Aqui lo crce todo cl mundo ; pero en
Francia no so crce.
i Crce Y. que se podra pagar pronto la
deuda de los Estados Uuidos ?
Xo se Lara muy pronto ; pero se hara.
Aqui se habla espaiiol.
Aqui se vende buen vino.
Se pcrdona algunas veoes a los delin-
cuentes, pero no sicmpre.
El hombre se engaiia a si mismo.
f, Envio Y. el violin al violinista ?
Sc le envie.
<: Tocan bicn el piano en Espana ?
En Espana se toca bicn la guitarra.
i, Se habla bieu el espafiol en la Ameri-
ca del Sur ?
Lo hablan y pronuncian bien.
<j Le duele a Y. la cabeza ?
Si, sefior, mucho.
(, Como se llama Y. ?
ile llamo Juan.
(, Como se llama eso en espaiiol ?
<j C6rao se dice eso eu espaiiol ?
Lo mismo que en ingles.
Do they believe that ?
Here everybody believes it ; but in
France it is not believed.
Is it thought that the United States
debt can soon be paid ?
It will not be accomplished (done) very
soon ; but it will be done.
Spanish is spoken here.
Good wine is sold here.
Transgressors are pardoned sometimes,
but not always.
Men deceive themselves.
Did you send the violin to the violin-
ist?
I sent it to him, or did send it to him.
Do they play well on the piano in
Spain ?
They play the guitar well in Spain.
Is Spanish well spoken (or, do they speak
good Spanish) in South America ?
They speak it and pronounce it welL
Does your head ache ?
Yes, sir, very much.
What is your name ?
My name is John.
What is that called in Spanish ?
How do you (or, do they) say that in
Spanish ?
The same as in English.
EXPLANATION.
174. MOVER, to move, changes the radical o into tie, in the
same tenses and persons as the verb acostar; L e., in the
first, second and third persons singular, and the third plural
of the present indicative, and present subjunctive, and in the
imperative. (See this vei'b, and those conjugated like it, at the
end of the book}.
175. SE is the indefinite personal pronoun of the Spanish,
referring to a personal agency in such a manner as to leave un-
determined both the sex and the number of the persons repre-
sented^ It corresponds, in this respect, with the English ice,
they r , people or one; in fact, with all expressions which mention
174 LESSON XXXVI.
persons thus vaguely and indefinitely. It is used with the
third person singular of the verb ; as,
Se dice.
Se cree.
No se hard.
Aqui se vende vino bucno.
Aqui se habla espaiiol.
It is said, or they say.
It is believed, or they believe.
They (people) will not do it, or it
will not be done.
Good wine is sold here.
Spanish is spoken here.
1 76. The pronoun se has now been seen used in the four func-
tions in which it can be found ; it may be well to mention them
all again, in order that these different offices of the pronoun sc
may be well distinguished, and to avoid all confusion. They
are the following :
1st. As an indefinite subject, as has been seen in the pres-
ent lesson ; as,
Se dice. | They say.
2d. To form the passive voice of verbs (see Lesson
XXXII.); as,
Se perdona algunas voces a los delin-
cucntes.
Transgressors are sometimes par-
doned.
Ed. As a reflective pronoun ; as,
Manuel se engana. | Emanuel deceives himself.
4th, and lastly, the objective pronoun se, for the sake of
euphony, takes the place of the objectives Ze, la, lo, les (see
Lesson XXVII.) ; as,
Se lo pagare ii V. maflana. | I will pay it to you to-morrow.
177. Many nouns ending in English in ty, are rendered in
Spanish by changing these letters into dad', as,
ActivWac?.
CapacicfaJ.
Activity.
Capacity.
N. B. All nouns of this termination are feminine. Many
nouns ending in English in ist, are rendered into Spanish by
adding to these letters an a ; as,
Artista.
Orjranista.
Artist.
Organist, &c.
LESSOST xxxvi. 176
178. DOLER. This verb is used in the same manner as the
verb ffustar, to like (see Lesson XXXI.) ; as,
(, Lc duele a. V. la cabcza ? | Does your head ache ?
The same may be expressed in the following manner :
,; Tiene V. dolor de c-ibeza ? | Have you a headache ? '
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. $Se vemle bucn vino en Nueva York ? Se vende bueno y malo ;
pcro mny caro.
2. i Que noticias bay ? Se dice quo la Alcmania y la Italia estan en
guerra.
3. So cree eso ? No solamente se crec, sino quo se sabe que la guer-
ra ha principiado ya.
4. i Se habla espaiiol en Nueva York ? En Nueva York se bablan
todas las lenguas, pero principalinente el ingles, el aleman, el francos y
cl espaiiol.
o. ^Se aman los Franceses y los Ingleses? Creo que no se aman
como hcrmanos; pero se respetan.
6. i A quien se ama mas en este pais, a los Franceses 6 a los Ingleses ?
Es cosa que no sabre decir.
*?. i En los Estados Unidos se respetan las iglesias de todas las religio-
nes? Si, sefior, porque bay libertad de religion; es una cosa muy bue-
iia para el pais, y yo la desco para todas las naciones del rnundo.
8. Ilablemos de otra cosa, porque todos no son tan liberalcs como V. ;
y no se bard V. amigos si babla tan francainente,
9. Convengo con V. en eso, ademas no se debe decir todo lo que se
piensa; pero para aprender una lengua se debe practicar mucbo y so
debe bablar de todo un poco.
10. V. tiene razon en eso, y una conversacion en que no se babla, sino
de "si liace calor 6 frio, si ha estado V. en el teatro, en el concierto, 6 en
]a iglesia, y de si tiene V. el sombrero y el fusil, y el vino, y el dinero de
V. 6 del vecino " es muy cansada.
11. For supuesto; pero Y. debe saber que lo quo se llama en ingles
small talk* es muy de moda. Lo se, es muy de moda, y basta necesario
algunas veces.
12. jLe dijo V. eso a su aniigo? No so lo dije, porque mi hermana se
lo babia dicbo ya.
13. i Porque no me lo dijo V. a mi ? Porque mi hennano me ba dicbo
quo se lo dira a V. mafiana.
14. i Toca Dn. Pedro bien el piano ? No, sefior, pero se engafia a si
misrao y cree tocarlo muy bien.
* Charla.
176 LESSON XXXVI.
15. Yengase V. esta tarde por aqui, 6 iremos a dar un paseo. Bicn,
si Y. me espera hasta las seis, vendre, pero no antes, porque no puedo
salir del escritorio hasta esa hora.
1C. Que tal tiempo ha heclio hoy en la ciudad ? Hoy ha hecho huen
tiempo y ayer hizo bucn tiempo tambien ; pero mafiana hara mal
tiempo.
17. gC6mo sabe V. quo hara mal tiempo mafiana? Porque en Nueva
York no hace nunca buen tiempo por tres dias.
18. i V. cree que no hace buen tiempo mas que (sino) en la Habana?
Perdone V. no me gusta el clima de la Habana ni el de Nueva York.
19. Ent6nces, gque clima le gusta a V. ? El de Espafia, porque alii
tencmos vcrdaderamente las cuatro estaciones.
20. g Que quierc V. decir ? Quiero decir que en Espafia hace calor en
verano aunque no niuchisimo ; en invicrno hace frio, pero no nos hela-
mos ; en otofio hace un excelente tiempo dc otofio, y en la primavcra
tenemos primavera.
21. ^Bien, y no es lo mismo en Nueva York? Escuserae V.; en
Nueva York no ho conocido la primavera ; hay muy pocos dias de otofio,
un invierno larguisimo y un verano calurosisimo.
22. i Y en la Habana ? En la Habana hay todo el ano el verano de
Nueva York.
23. i Yo pensaba que d V. no le gustaba hablar del tiempo ? V,. no
me ha entendido ; creo que debe hablarse de todo, pero no siempre del
tiempo.
EXERCISE.
1. "Why do you not come quicker when I call you 2 I cannot come
any quicker, my head aches.
2. "Where do you think Spanish is spoken best ? In Madrid, and in
all parts of Old and New Castile (Castillo).
3. And is it not well spoken in South America? There is some
difference in the pronunciation; but, in general, persons of education
speak correctly, whether they bet South Americans or Spaniards.
4. "William, will you be good enough to take this letter to the post-
office when you are going to take your lesson? I shall take it in the
afternoon, I have not time now.
5. Are there many organists in the United States ? Yes ; and in New
York, principally, there are a great many excellent organists and pianists.
6. Do you like that man's manner of speaking? No, I do not; he is
too much of a* purist.
7. Is your brother studying natural history ? I cannot tell you
* English words in italics not to be translated into Spanish. t Ya sraa.
LESS OH XXXVI. 177
whether (si) ho is studying it or not; but I know he has just bought the
complete works of Buffon.
8. Who is Buffon ? A celebrated French naturalist.
9. What did that man do that was taken to prison this morning?
They say he was arrested (arrestar) for cruelty to animals.
10. Will he be punished for it? Of course; transgressors of that
kind are rarely let off unpunished (pardoned).
11. What is the matter with Alexander ? A dog bit him in the hand.
12. Come here, Alexander; show me your hand. Is this the one?
No. it is the other.
13. Does it pain you much ? It was very sore (pained) when I got
bitten, but now it is less painful.
14. I have always told you how necessary it is to take care with dogs.
I -know that; and I shall do so in future.
15. Does your new watch go well ? Not very well ; it stops (itself)
three or four times a day.
1C. Is your son getting on well in his studies? Pretty well"; he has a
great deal of capacity, and is fond of study.
17. Look here, Charles. What do you wish?
18. Count from one to a thousand in Spanish. Oh! I can do that
with the greatest ease.
19. Well, let us see? One, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight,
nine, ten, eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, sixteen, seventeen,
eighteen, nineteen, twenty, twenty-one, thirty, forty, fifty, sixty, seventy,
eighty, ninety, a hundred, a hundred and one, two hundred, three hun-
dred, four hundred, five hundred, six hundred, seven hundred, eight
hundred, nine hundred, a thousand.
20. IIow do they write that last word in Spanish ? I do not remember.
21. What is that? you do not remember! Did you not learn in the
lesson on pronunciation, at the beginning of the grammar, that in Spanish
every word is written just as it is pronounced? Oh, yes, now I remember.
22. Tell me, if you please, Mr. R., is French as easy to pronounce as
Spanish ? They say it is much more difficult, on the contrary.
23. But it is not impossible to learn French pronunciation ? I did not
say that ; I only said that they say it is more difficult than Spanish pro-
nunciation.
24. IIow do I pronounce ? Very well ; but, when reading or speaking,
take a little more care with the z,
25. Please to pronounce the name of that letter again (to return to
pronounce)? With the greatest pleasure; it is called z.
26. What other letter (letrd) is pronounced like (the) z? C, when it
comes (finds itself) before an e or an *.
8*
178
LESSON XXXVII.
LESSON XXXVII.
Subir.
Atender.
To go, or come up, to ascend.
To attend.
INDICATIVE Presen t.
Atiendo, atiendes, atiende, aten- I attend, &c.
demos, atendeis, atienden.
IMPERATIVE.
Atiende tii, atienda el, atenda- Attend, &c.
mos nosotros, atcnded voso-
tros, atiendan ellos.
SUBJUNCTIVE Present.
Atienda, atiendas, atienda, aten- I may, or can, attend, &c.
damos, atendais, atiendan.
Verbs conjugated like ATENDER.
To ascend, to mount.
Ascender.
Descender.
Defender.
Entender.
Encender.
Perder.
Alegrarse.
Charlar.
Hallar.
Llegar.
Enviar.
Preparar.
Con tal quo.
Puesto que.
Dado caso que
Ilasta,
Ann cuan^or*
Por tanto.
Por cuanto.
A menos do.
A menos que.
To descend.
To defend.
To understand.
To light, to kindle.
To lose.
To be glad, to rejoice.
To prattle, to chat.
To find.
To arrive.
To send.
I To prepare.
CONJUNCTIONS.
On condition that ;
(that).
Since, inasmuch as ;
that,
In case.
Until, till.
Even, although.
Therefore.
Seeing that, for.
Unless.
provided
supposing
LESSON XXXVII.
179
Tambien.
Aderaas.
Ya.
Tampoco.
Ojalti.
Vapor.
Steamer.
Globo.
Balloon.
Kesfriado.
Cold.
Also, too.
Moreover, besides.
Whether, either.
Neither.
Would to God, God grant.
Altura. Height.
Friolera. Trifle.
Estada, pcrma- Stay, pcrina-
nencia. . . nence.
COMPOSITION.
Desco quo csto cstudiando su leccion.
Oreo quo la csti o&udiando.
f ; Pieusa V. quc tiene razon ?
No pienso que la tcnga.
No lo creere aunque me lo digau mil.
Lo creo aunque el lo niega.
Dudo que venga hoy.
Dudo que baya venido.
Dado cuso que V. no me encucnlre en
casa, cspereme V. hasta que venga.
Asi lo hare con tal que V. me prometa
volver pronto.
Volverc tan pronto como pueda.
Temo que no haya rccibido mi carta.
; Ojah'i no la reciba ! pero yo tcmo que
la recibira.
A menos que V. venga prirncro ver-
me, yo no ire a verlo a V.
Puesto que cl haya vcnido, f, le hablara
'V.?
Aunque haya vcnido no Is hablaro an-
tes que 61 me liable.
I wish that he may bo studying his
lesson.
I think he is studying it.
Do you think he is right ?
I do not think he is.
I will not believe it though a thousand
tell it to me.
I believe it, although he denies it.
I doubt whether he will come to-day.
I doubt his having come.
In case you should not find me at home,
wait for me till I come.
I will do so, on condition that you
promise me to come back soon (or
quickly).
I shall return as soon as I can.
I tear he has not received my letter.
God grant that he may not receive it !
but I fear he will (receive it).
Unless you come first to see me, I will
not go to see you.
Supposing that he has come, will you
speak to him ?
Although he may have come I will not
speak to him before he speaks to me.
EXPLANATION.
179. ATENDEE, to attend, and all the verbs conjugated like
it, take an i before the last e of the radical letters, in the same
tenses and persons as the verb acertar, and the same tense in
which acostar and mover change the o into tie ; i. e., in the first,
1 80 LESSON XXX VII.
second and third persons singular, and third plural of the
present indicative, the present subjunctive, and the imperative.
(See, at page 394, this verb and those conjugated like it.)
180. SUBJUNCTIVE 3iooD. Unlike the indicative, this mood
cannot of itself express an action or mode of being in such a
manner as to form complete sense ; but its signification is de-
termined by another verb, to which it is subordinate, as its
name indicates,* and by -which it is governed, usually with the
help of a conjunction, such as que, aunque, or a conjunctive ex-
pression, such as d fin de que, con tal que, &c.
As none of the moods of the English verb correspond ex-
actly to the Spanish subjunctive; and as the tenses of the
latter are often employed to express, in the Castilian language,
ideas which, in English, are conveyed by those of the indica-
tive or the potential, and, not ^infrequently, by the infinitive,
learners experience much difficulty in determining when the
subjunctive is to be used. Were we to give all the rules neces-
sary for the correct application of this mood, a whole volume
might be filled ; we shall, however, give here those most likely
to guide the student in all ordinary cases.
181. The subordinate verb is put in the subjunctive when
the leading verb means admiration, icish, will, desire, consent,
prohibition, hinderance, necessity, command, doubt, regret, joy,
usefulness, contentment, Jiope, fear, surmise, ignorance, jjr
ence, negation, permission, sorroio, &c.
The subjunctive mood is here required because we are not
positive that what we wish, command, etc., will be accom-
plished ; but the same verb which governs the subordinate one
in any of the tenses of the subjunctive, when the accomplish-
ment of the action is doubtful, governs it in any of those of
the indicative when the action is regarded as certain to tuk-j
place ; as,
Doselo T. a los que | Give it to those who (may) have
hayan venido.
Deselo V. a los cuatro )
^Doubtful.
7 j r Certain.
que nan venido. j
come.
Give it to the four who have (or arc)
come.
In the first example, the verb is put in the subjunctive, hc-
1 Subjunctive, something joined, i;i a subordinate '.namicr, to what has already been snid.
LESSON XXXVII. 181
cause the speaker is not positive how many have come, or
whether any have as yet come. In the second, the indicative
is employed, because the speaker is certain of the arrival of the
persons alluded to, and also of their number.
182. There are in Spanish certain conjunctions which re-
quire the subjunctive mood after them, on account of the in-
definite and uncertain meaning which they commonly have.
Some of them, however, it will be seen, occasionally occur with
a positive signification, and may, in that case, be used with the
indicative after them ; as,
No lo creere aunquc me ) I will not believe it though a thou-
lodiganmil. \ Contingent.
Lo creo aunque 61 me ,
lo nie<ra. i
Certain.
sand tell it to me. f
I believe it, although he denies it (to
me).
183. Finally, there are other parts of speech, and even
whole phrases, which, on account of their indeterminate and
doubtful, or contingent, meaning, require the subjunctive after
them.
184. Tl-IE PRESENT TENSE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE marks a
contingent action as going on at the present moment, or to take
place at some future time ; as,
Dudo quo venga. | I doubt whether he will come.
N". B. Another use of this tense has been already noticed
when treating of the imperative. (See Lesson XXXV.)
185. TIIE PERFECT TENSE expresses a doubtful or contin-
gent action or event, as having been completed some time past,
or that will have taken place before the completion of another
future action or event ; as,
Dudo quo hnya vcrido.
Yo le dare su libro cuando 61 me
haya dado el mio.
I doubt whether he has come.
I shall give him his book when he
will have given me mine.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. g Espera V. que llegue hoy el vapor de Europa? Creo quo ha lle-
gado csta mail an a.
2. Yo dudo qne haya llegado todavia. i Quiere V. enviar su criado
a preguntar si ha llegado el vapor ? Con muclio gusto, porque yo tam-
bien dcseo tener noticias de Europa.
3. i Cree V. quo llcgara un dia en quo podamos ir a Europa eu globos
182 LESSON XXX VII.
aereostiiticos ? Macho me alegraro que llegue ese dia, pero crco quc no
lo veremos nosotros, porque es muy dificil, y quiza imposiblc, el hallar la
direccion de los globos.
4. i Suben muy alto los globos ? Xo crco quc suban a mas de dos 6
tres mil pies, pero si se quiere pueden subir hasta la altura de quince 6
diez y seis mil pies.
5. Dado caso que llegue hoy el vapor; jespera V. a su arnigo? Por
supuesto que si, puesto que me escribe que llegara en este mismo vapor.
6. Ojala llegue, pero temo mucho que haya tornado otro vapor y que
no llegue hasta la semana proxima.
7. gDuda V. que haya estudiado su Icccion ? Dudo que la haya cstu-
diado, porque es muy holgazan.
8. A menos que V. estudie bien las Iccciones y haga con mucho cai-
dado los ejercicios de la gramatica, no aprendcra Y. el espafiol.
9. Si, pero yo creia que se podia aprender una lengua con la practica
solamente. Asi es ; pero cntonces se necesita practicar todos los dias
con quien la hable muy bien.
10. ^ En cuanto tiempo picnsa V. que hablar6 yo el espafiol? V. lo
hablara cuando sepa bien todas las lecciones de la gramatica, y haya
practicado y escrito los ejercicios.
11. Y despues que haya aprendido toda la gramatica, practicado, y
escrito los ejercicios, ^hablare perfectamente el espafiol? Xo, sefior;
pero hablard V. bastante correctamente para llevar una conversacioa, es-
cribir una correspondencia, y poder hacer negocios en csta lengua.
12. Yo pensaba que el espafiol era una lengua rnuy facil. Yerdadera-
mente lo es para aprender lo que acabo de decirle a Y. ; pero para ha-
blarlo perfectamente como Y. quiere, todas las lenguas son dificiles.
13. Y si Y. no lo cree, hagame el favor de decirme si habla Y. su pro-
pia lengua y la escribe perfectamente. Yo conlieso que todavia tengo
algo quc aprender en el ingles.
14. Creame V., amigo mio, el estudio de una lengua no es una frioTera.
Creo quo tiene Y. mucha razon ; pero hay muchos que quieren aprenderlo
todo y muy pocos que quieran cstudiar.
15. i Me promote Y. venir a verme cuando venga a la ciudad ? Aun-
que venga a la ciudad no podr6 venu- a ver a Y. a menos que acabe tem-
prano mis negocios.
16. ^Sabe V. hacer frases (sentences) en espafiol con todos los tiempos
del modo indicative? Si, sefior, y tambien con el imperative, el presente
y el perfecto de subjuntivo.
17. Muy bien, entonces hagame Y. ocho frases con los ocho tiempos
de indicative, una con el imperative y dos con el presente y perfecto de
subjuntivo de cunlquiera verbo.
LESSON XXXVII. 183
18. gEsta V. malo ? g Ha estado V. hoy en el escritorio ? i Estaba V.
en su casa cuando su ainigo fue a vcrle ? j Habia V. estado en el teatro
antes de ir al baile ? $ Estuvo V. ayer en la ciudad ? g Qu6 hizo V. asi
que hubo estado algun tieinpo en el hotel ? g Estara V. en casa mafiana
todo el dia ? i Habra escrito V. su ejercicio antes de las cuatro ? Estu-
dia tus lecciones y escribe los ejercicios. No pierdas el tiempo. g Duda
V. que yo scpa mi leccion ? g Duda V. que yo la haya estudiado ?
EXERCISE.
1. John, there is some one at the door ; go and see who it is. Yes, sir.
2. Is Mr. Eetortillo in ? Yes, sir ; who shall I say wishes to see him?
Tell him that Mr. Perez wishes to speak to him a moment.
3. Mr. Perez wishes to see you a moment, sir. Let (que) him come up.
4. Oh! 1 am so glad to see you! How are you? how have you
been ? when did you return ? I arrived by the steamer Napoleon III.,
on "Wednesday last.
5. Did you receive all the letters I wrote you during (durante) my
absence ? I received one in March, dated from Eome.
6. How did you spend the time ? did you pass through Spain, as you
had intended ? No ; while I was still in Paris, and preparing to set out
for Madrid, I learned that my brother was very ill in Florence.
7. Indeed! I am very sorry to hear that. What was the matter
with him (what had he) ? A heavy (strong) cold,. that he had caught on
his way from Turin to Florence.
8. lie had not, I believe, enjoyed very good health for a long time be-
fore leaving home ? No, he has always been sickly ; but principally for
about a year before his voyage to Europe, he had colds almost every
month, and I may say that he was never without headaches, day or
night.
9. Had ho an Italian physician to attend him? . No, Dr. Perez, his
family physician, who was travelling through Italy that same winter, just
arrived at Florence the same day as my brother, and, hearing of his ill-
ness, went at once (inmediatamente) to see him.
10. How long was he ill? Nearly three weeks.
11. How ? Are you going away so soon ? Sit down and let us chat
for half an hour about your family. Thank you ; I cannot stay any
longer now, but I shall have the pleasure of seeing you again to-morrow.
12. Where are your brothers? They are gone to see the balloon that
is to go up this afternoon.
13. Indeed? I thought the balloon was not to go up until Saturday.
It was not to have gone up before Saturday; but, on account of tho fine
weather, it is to go up this afternoon.
184 LESSON XXXVIII.
14. Will many persons go up in it? Very few, I think; people in
general do not like to go to such a height.
15. Do you understand all that is said in Spanish? I understand more
and more every day ; but there are still many words and constructions
that I do not know.
16. How long do you think it will be before I can understand all, and
speak like a native? That is a hard question to answer; provided you
study with attention, read a great deal, and practice with Spaniards, you
will soon understand and speak with ease ; but it is difficult for a foreigner
to speak any language exactly like a native.
17. But do you believe it to be impossible ? No, I do not say it is im-
possible, but it is very difficult ; and, besides, I do not think it is neces-
sary. All that is required (wanted) is correctness, and to be able to con-
verse with ease.
18. Has John's servant lighted the fire ? Not yet ; John does not wish
it to be lighted until he returns.
19. Well, Charles, have you found out* the meaning of the word you
asked me for yesterday? No, sir; I have searched for it in all the dic-
tionaries, and it is not to be found in any of them.
20. Why do yon not ask your teacher ? he can tell you at once. Yes,
I know that very well ; but I do not like to ask him so many questions :
every day he comes I have a new one to ask him.
21. Do not stop at trifles of that kind ; your teacher is very glad to be
able to answer all questions, knowing that by that means (media) you
will learn better and more quickly.
22. I am very glad to see you defend him, for Alexander said he was
not fond of answering questions, and did not like inquisitive persons.
Neither he does ; but an inquisitive person is one thing, and a person
who asks questions in order to gain knowledge is another.
LESSON. XXXVIII.
Sentir. (LooTc for the conjugation
To feel, to be sorry for.
of tliis verb at p. 395).
Verbs conjugated like, SEXTLR.
Arrepentirsc.
Consentir.
Preferir.
To repent.
To consent.
To prefer.
* English words italicised not to be translated.
LESSON XXXVIII.
185
Asegurar.
To secure, to insure, to assure.
Animar.
To animate, to encourage, to in-
duce.
Desanimar.
To dishearten, to discourage.
Ayudar.
To aid, to help.
Enferinar.
To fall (or get) sick, to make
sick.
Exigir.
To exact, to require.
Quedar.
To remain.
Perfeccioiiar.
To perfect, to finish.
Usar.
To use, to wear.
Generalmente.
Generally.
De memoria.
By heart.
Ambos.
Both.
De continue.
Continually.
Perezoso.
Lazy.
Exarnen. Examination.
Helena. Ellen.
Oficio. Trade, office.
Persona. Person.
Alberto. Albert.
Lectura. Reading, lecture.
Norte. North.
Profesion. Profession.
Sur, or sud. South.
Escuela. School.
Este, oriente. East.
Muerte. Death.
Oeste, ) Wegt
Yida. Life.
Occidente. f
Promesa. Promise.
List of the present participles or verbal nouns and adjectives formed from
the verls already introduced.
Viviente. Living being.
Paseante. Walker, passer-
Estudiante. Student.
by, promeuader.
Escribiente. A lawyer's clerk,
Creyente. Believer.
a writer in a
Convenientc. Convenient, suita-
commercial
ble.
house.
Importante. Important.
Residente. Resident.
Tratante. Dealer.
Tocante (en or- Concerning.
Cortante. Sharp, edged.
den a).
Gobernante. Governing.
Reinante. Reigning.
Contante. Ready.
Saliente. Salient.
Dolientc. Sad, afflicted,
Aniante. Lover.
mournful.
Practicante. Practitioner.
Principiante. Beginner.
186
LESSON XXXVIII.
COMPOSITION.
Tocante a lo que V. me dijo el otro dia,
deseo que no se hable mas de ello.
Entraron cantando.
Le encontraron leyendo.
6 Que esta V. haciendo ?
Estoy leyendo.
Vengo de comer.
Trabaja sin descansar.
El trabajar es bueno para muchas
cosa's.
El descansar despues de trabajar es
necesario.
La vimos bailar.
Emanuel es un estudiante industrioso.
^ Es V. residente de los Estados Unidos ?
El es buen creyente.
Concerning what you told me the other
day, I wish no more to be said
about it.
They came in singing.
They found him reading.
What are you doing ?
I am reading.
I am coming from dinner.
He labors without resting.
"Work is good for many things.
Rest after labor is necessary.
We saw her dancing.
Emanuel is an industrious student.
Are you a resident of the United States ?
He is a good believer.
EXPLANATION.
186. PRESENT PARTICIPLES. Many Spanish verbs have,
besides the past or passive participle, another called the present
or active participle. Those formed from verbs of the first con-
jugation end in ante\ as, amante, loving, lover; and those
formed from the second and third end in iente or ente ; as, asis-
tente, assistant, obediente, obedient.
Participles of this kind cannot be formed from all verbs,
and indeed those already in existence can only be regarded as
mere verbal nouns or adjectives, inasmuch as, with the excep-
tion of a very limited number to be found in use, such as to-
cante, they do not follow the regimen of the verbs from which
they are derived.
187. GERUNDS. Instead of the present participle, as a part
of the verb, the gerund is now employed, and it corresponds,
therefore, exactly to the English progressive form in ing; as,
Entraron cantando.
Le encontraron leyendo.
They canau in singing.
They found him rca; n ;:n:.
188. The verb estar, as has already been mentioned, run
LESSON XXXVIII.
be used with the gerund in Spanish, .is in English the verb to
be, with the present participle ; as,
Yo estoy Ifyendo.
Ellos estan escribiendo.
I am reading.
They are writing.
189. The INFENITIVE is used in Spanish when in English
the present participle, preceded by a preposition, is used ; as,
Se fuc sin verle. I He went away without seeing him.
Trabaja sin descansar. \ He labors without resting.
190. The IXFIXITIVE is also used as a verbal noun or pres-
ent participle, in which case it takes the masculine definite
article before it ; as,
El trabajar es bueno para la salud.
El descansar despues de trabajar
Work is good for the health.
Rest is necessary after much work.
mucho es necesario.
191. The INFINITIVE is often rendered in English by the
present participle, when in Spanish it is governed by another
verb; as,
La vimos bailar. \ We saw her dancing.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. jLe gust a a Y. mas leer que escribir ? Me gustan ambas cosas,
pero creo que leyendo se aprende mas quo escribiendo.
2. i Es estudioso ese muchacho ? No, sefior, pero hoy estudia mucho
porque maOana tienen examenes en su escuela.
3. i Piensa V. que sea conveniente ese negocio ? Yo pienso que lo es,
pero quiza" no lo sea.
4. i Qu6 estii V. haciendo ? Estoy estudiando mi leccion de espailol.
5. i Sintio Helena mucho la muerte de su amiga ? La sintio tanto que
cnfcrrn6.
G. C6mo se siento ahora? Esta un poco mejor. Me alegro que este
laejor, porque es muy buena muchacha.
7. i Puede V. prestarme trescientos pesos ? Puedo prestarselos a, V.,
pero no me gusta el prestar dinero (to lend).
8. g Como se aprende a hablar el espaiiol ? Hablando se aprende a
hablar ; del mismo modo que bailando se aprende a bailar y haciendo
zapatos se aprende a zapatero.
9. gSe arrepintio aqucl hombre de su mala accion? No lo creo por-
quo es un picaro que vivo de enganar.
10. ^Que profcsion u oficio tieue? No tiene ni oficio, ni profesion
ninguna, es un paseantc.
188 LESSON XXXVIII.
11. 2 De domic viene V. ? Vengo do coiner.
12. ^ De donde viene el vicnto ? Viene del Sur, pero esta mafiana
venia del Este.
13. ^.Llueve en Nueva York cuando esta el viento al Este ? No, seiior,
generalmente llueve cuando el viento esta al Oeste.
14. Alberto, animate, se estudioso y aprende de memoria la leccion
para mafiaua. Papa, hace mucho calor y estoy cansado.
15. Bien, no te desanimes, descansa un poco y vuelve a trabajar des-
pues. V. quiere que yo este trabajando continuamente.
1C. No, querido, no quiero que trabajes demasiado; pero acuerdate que
en este mundo no se logra nada sin trabajar. Bien, papa, yo se que V.
tiene siempre razon, descansare un poco ahora y despues acabare de estu-
diar mi leccion.
17. i Se qued6 mucho tiempo su amigo de V. en el concierto ? Ambos
nos quedamos hasta que se acab6.
18. gTuvieron Vds. ayer examenes en la escuela? Ayer tuvimos exa-
men de gramatica, antes de ayer de historia, hoy de espafiol y maOana
lo tendremos de aritmetica.
19. Manuel, levantate y vete a la escuela. gNo sabes que hora cs?
'No, seflor, yo pensaba que era teinprano.
20. i C6mo, teinprano ? Ya son las siete y media y todavia tienes que
lavarte y almorzar ; j vamos, vamos, perezoso, arriba ! Alia voy papa,
alia voy ; y exciiseme V., no sabia que era tan tarde.
EXERCISE.
1. Have you heard any more concerning the matter we were speak-
ing of the other day? Nothing further ; but I expect by to-morrow to
be able to tell you something more.
2. When does your friend intend setting out* on his travel to the
South ? Probably by the latter end (ultimas) of November, or beginning
of December.
3. Is he to be-long absent ? He knows nothing as yet of how long
ho may be absent (ausente).
4. Concerning books to be read in order to perfect one's self in a
language, what kind do you think the best? There is little difference
between books to be used for that purpose (propositd).
y. Are there not some better than all the others? Not that I k-
of: each student will prefer those that treat of the subject he is
fondest of.
G. But beginners cannot do so, for there are many books too difficult
for them ; is it not so ? Certainly ; I thought it needless to say that
beginners must search for books easy to be read.
* Emprender.
LESSON XXX VIII. 189
V. It seems to me that newspaper reading is very useful ; what do
you think ? Yes, and especially for those who take pleasure in studying
the politics of the day.
8. Do you think I shall be able to understand Cervantes' great work
after I have gone through (recorrcr) the whole of the grammar ? No,
sir, you will not ; you will have to read and study a great deal before
you will be able to understand thoroughly the writings of any of the
Spanish classic authors.
9. Who is that young man we met when walking, and to whom you
spoke ? He is a lawyer's clerk.
10. Does he make much money at that occupation? I cannot tell you;
but he is undoubtedly a man of talent (talento).
11. Are the children gone to school yet, Louisa? All but Henry,
who wishes not to go to-day, if you will consent to it.
12. I am afraid he is a very lazy boy; he is continually asking not to
be sent to school.
13. How can he expect to learn if he neither goes to school nor studies
at home ? He wants to study at home ; he says that if you consent to
his staying at home, he will study anything you please.
14. Well, I shall give him something to learn by heart, and we shall
see what he does. Very well ; but do not give him too much to do at
the beginning, for he is easily disheartened.
15. I never require of any one more than he is able to do. That is
perfectly right.
16. Tell Charles and Albert that I want to see them, and that I have
two books for them. I need not go to tell them ; here they are coming.
17. Come here, boys. Well, papa, what do you want us for?
18. To give you these two books: one for each. How beautiful!
Yes, that is true; but they are something more than beautiful: they
are good.
19. What do they treat of? This one treats of man in life and of all
living beings ; and that one of man's state after death*.
20. Xow, I wish you to read a chapter each one in his book every
day, after your lessons ; and then yon niny go out and walk for an hour.
Thank yon, sir ; and we can assure you that we shall do so with the
greatest pleasure.
21. Tell me, Albert, where did you buy that hat ? That is one of those
hats that Avere worn three summers ago. I know that very well, for I
bought it at the time they were being worn, and I have worn it ever
since.
22. This author seems to have travelled a great deal ; have you rend
any of his travels ? Yes, and I like them exceedingly (mucfimmo).
190
LESSON XXXIX.
23. I ani going to read them, too, as soon as I have time. In what
countries did he travel principally? He has been in nearly every coun-
try in the world, East, West, North and South.
2i. What is the trade or profession of that person, just gone out ? He
is a physician ; he has been in this city for now nearly five years. He is
an excellent practitioner.
LESSON XXXIX.
Pedir. (Look for the conjugation
To petition, to ask for.
of this verb at p. 396.)
Verbs conjugated like PEDIR.
Competir.
Elcjir.
Medir.
Refiir.
Seguir.
Rendir.
Repetir.
Servir.
Tefiir.
Vestir.
Divertirse.
Casarsc.
Besar.
Enamorarse.
Celehrar.
Ceuar.
Presentar.
Reconocer.
Estimar.
Agradecer.
En hora buena.
A si usi.
To contend, to compete.
To elect, to choose.
To measure.
To quarrel, to scold.
To follow.
To render ; to exhaust, to do out,
to wear out.
To repeat.
To serve.
To dye.
To dress.
To amuse one's self.
To marry ; to get (or be) married.
To kiss.
To fall in love.
To celebrate, to praise, to be glad.
To sup.
To present, to introduce one per-
son to the acquaintance of
another.
To recognize, to examine closely.
To estimate, to value, to esteem.
To thank, to be thankful, to be
obliged.
It is well, well and good.
So so.
LESSON XXXIX.
191
Tal cual.
Hasta la vista.
Hasta luego.
Sin novedad.
Medianamcnte.
I Ah I (int.)
;0h! (int.)
Respetable.
Delicado.
Infinite.
Junto.
Discrete. Encantador.
Favor.
Beso.
Scrvidor.
Pie".
Honor.
Vestido.
Esposo.
Asiento.
Capitulo.
Sobrino.
Middling, so so.
Till I see you again.
Good-bye for a while.
Well, in a good state of health.
Middling.
Ah!
Oh!
Eespectable.
Delicate, weak.
Infinite.
Near, close to, together.
Discreet. Charming.
Favor.
Tertulia.
Party, soiree.
Kiss.
Novedad.
Novelty.
Servant.
Celebracion.
Celebration.
Foot.
Servidora.
Servant.
Honor.
Ocasion.
Occasion.
Dress.
Complacencia.
Complaisance.
Husband.
Bondad.
Goodness, kind-
Seat.
ness.
Chapter.
Esposa.
Wife.
Nephew.
Orden.
Order, command.
Memorias.
Regards.
Enhorabuena.
Congratulation.
COMPOSITION.
<5 Quo Ic pidc a V. cse hombre ?
No me pide nada ; me preguuta quo
hora cs.
Bcso a V. la mano, caballera.
Beso a V. la suya.
f, C6mo esta su familia de V. ?
Todos estan bien, gracias ; & j la de V. ?
Asi nsi ; los nifios estan muy buenos,
pero mi esposa no se siente bien.
A los pies de V., spfiora.
Beso a V. In, mano, caballcro.
A la orden de V., Hon Pedro.
What is that man asking for ?
I{p is asking me for nothing ; he is ask-
ing me what o'clock it is.
( A Spanish expression of courtesy, used
at meeting or parting. No equivalent
in English.)
(Reply to the above.)
How is your family ?
All are well, thank you ; and yours ?
So so ; the children are very well, but
my wife does not feel well.
(Spanish expression of courtesy, used to
'ladies. No English equivalent.)
(Tlic lady's reply to the above.)
At your service, Mr. Peter.
192
LESSON XXXIX.
Vaya V. con Dios, Don Juan.
Buenos dias, Doiia Luisa, j como lo pasa
V. hoy ?
Bien, para servir a V. ; ,5 y V. ?
Sin novedad ii la disposicion de V.
Senor D. M., tengo el honor de pre-
sentarle al Sr. D. P.
Caballero, celebro la ocaskm de conoccr
a V.
Tenga V. la bondad de darme el cu-
chillo.
Con mucho gusto.
Mil gracias.
Hagame V. el favor de decirme, como
se llama esto en espauol.
Sirvase Y. tomar asiento.
Lo siento rnucho, pero no puedo, tengo
que marcharme.
Tenga Y. la complacencia de ponernie
a los pies de su esposa de V.
God be with you, Mr. John.
Good morning, Miss Louisa, how do
you do to-day V
AYell, thank you ; and you ?
I am very well too, thank you.
Mr. M., I have the honor to introduce
(or present) you to Mr. P.
I am happy to make your acquaintance,
sir.
Have the goodness to give me the knife.
With much pleasure.
Thank you.
Be kind enough to tell me what you call
this in Spanish.
Please to take a seat.
I am very sorry, but I cannot, I must
be off.
Have the goodness to present my re-
gards to your lady (or wife).
EXPLANATION.
192. PEDIR. A paradigm will be found at the end of the
grammar, showing the tenses and persons in which this verb
and all those conjugated like it change the e of their root into /.
193. THE USUAL FORMS OF SALUTATIONS, among gentlemen
in greeting each other, are the following :
Beso a Y. la mano.
Servidor de Y., caballero.
A la orden de V.
Yaya Y. con Dios.
Teuga Y. niuy bueuos dias.
I kiss your hand.
Your servant, sir.
Your most obedient.
Adieu, or God be with you.
Good day to you.
This last expression is used from the earliest part of the
morning till two or three hours after meridian ; from which
time till dark is used,
Buenas tardes. | Good afternoon ;
and from dark until the following morning, both on meeting
and taking leave,
Buenas noches. | Good night.
All these expressions are always used in Spanish i:i
plural number.
LESSON XXXIX.
193
In saluting a lady, the first expression most frequently made
use of is :
A los pics do V., seuora. | Madam, at your feet.
The lady's reply is :
Beso a V. la mano, caballero. | I kiss your hand, sir.
To inquire after another's health :
C6mo lo pasa V. ? or como esta V. ? | How do you do ?
To answer :
Medianamente bien. Middling well.
Perfectamentc bien. Perfectly well
" Para servir a V. At your service.
Muy bien, gracias.
Asi asi, or tal cual ; y V., <j como lo
pasa?
Sin novedad,
A la disposicion de V.
For introducing one person to another:
Very well, thank you.
So so ; and how do you do ?
Always well.
At your service.
Senor Don M., tengo el honor de pre-
scntarle al Seuor Don P.
And the reply is :
Caballero, celcbro la ocasion dc cono-
ccr a V., or
Reconozcame V. por un servidor
suyo.
For asking or requesting :
Tenga V. la bondad de darme. .
Haganie V. el favor de dccirme.
Sirvase V., or tenga V. la compla-
cencia de.
And for returning thanks :
Mil gracias, or
Muchisimas gracias.
Se lo agradczco a V. inflnito.
Mr. M., I have the honor of intro-
ducing Mr. P. to you.
Sir, I am happy to make your ac-
quaintance.
I am entirely at your service.
Have the goodness to give me.
Do me the favor to tell me.
Have the kindness to.
A thousand thanks.
Many thanks.
I am very much obliged to you.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Senor D. Juan, gque le pide a V. mi muchacho? No .me piclo
nada ; me pregunta qu6 hora es. ,
. Yo creia qne le pedia a V. dinero, porqne 61 esta siempre pidiendo
9
194 LESSON XXXIX.
centavos a todo el mumlo. Yaya! no Ic riiia V. ; ii todos los nifios les
gtista quo les den centavos. Verdad es, pero a mi no me gusta que los
njios los pidan.
3. Digaine V., D. Pedro, quien es aquella sefiorita que esta sentada
en el sofa junto a su esposa de V. ? Esa es una seQorita muy amable,
hija del Seflor D. Luis Martinez, familia muy rcspetable a quien conoci
liace intichos aflos.
4. i Quiere V. hacerme el favor de presentarme a ella ? Con mucho
gusto; pero le advierto que no se enamore de la Senorita Martinez, por-
que csta para casarse.
5. Pierda V. cuidado ; yo solo deseo conoccrla para gozar de su dis-
creta conversacion. En hora buena venga V. y lo presentare.
6. Sefiorita Martinez, tengo el honor de presentar a V. el Scfior Don
Juan McLeren. Caballero, celebro la ocasion de conocer a A". Sefiorita,
reconozcaine Y. por su servidor.
7. ; Ah ! aqui viene Don Alberto y su esposa. Sirvanse Yds. pasar
adelante.
8. ; Oil ! Seflor Don Pedro, me alegro inucho de encontrar a Y. por
aca. Mil gracias, sefiora, soy muy feliz en volver ii ver a Yds.
9. A los pies de Y., Sefiorita Martinez. Beso a V. la ruano, caballero.
10. iVfia Margarita, ^como esta su familia de Y. ? Todos estan bicn,
gracias, i y la de Y. ? Asi asi ; los ninos estan muy buenos, pero mi L
esta delicada.
11. Sirvasc Y. tornar asiento, D. Alberto. Lo siento mucao, pero no
pnedo ; he promctido a mi madre volver pronto para cenar con ella.
12. Senoras, a los pies de Yds. Beso a A r ds. la mano caballeros.
13. A la 6rden de Y., D. Pedro. Vaya Y. con Dios, D. Juan.
14. Tenga V. muy bucnas noches, Donaiuisa, i como Jo pasa Y. hoy ?
Bien, para servir a Y.. ; y Y. ? Sin novedad, ii la disposicion de Y,
15. Buenas noches, D. Pedro ; hasta manana. Ilasta manana, pon-
game Y. a los pies de su sefiora.
16. De Y. memorias de mi parte a toda la familia. De su parte de V.
lo estimaran mucho.
17. Adios, Manuel, ^a donde vas tan de prisa? Yoy a acompauar ii
mi hermana al teatro, y desde alii iremos d la tcrtulia del, Sefior Marraci.
18. Celebrare que to diviertas mucho. Yo tambien pienso ir a la ter-
tulia del Senor Marraci ; con que, asi no to digo adios, ya nos veremos.
Ilasta la vista. Ilasta luego.
EXERCISE.
1. Good morning, Charles ! Are you never going to get up ? Why,
how late is it?
LESSON XXXIX. 195
2. It is near nine o'clock ; but it is nothing new to see you in bed at
that hour. Ah ! you are always making fun of me for lying so long in
the morning, and I think I rise very early.
3. Up, then, and dress yourself as quickly as possible, I want you to
come and breakfast with me.
4. Indeed ! What good things are you going to give me ? You will
have a first-rate breakfast, with excellent wine, followed by delicious
chocolate.
5. Tell me, my dear fellow : I can never remember the name of that
young lady that I met at your sister's party ; what is her name ? Oh,
no matter ; my sister has invited * her to dine this evening, and if you
wait for dinner with us I will introduce you to her.
6. Papa, here is my friend Mr. ., whom I have the pleasure to pre-
sent to you. I am very happy to know you, sir.
7. Be kind enough to take a seat, and excuse me an instant ; I shall be
back immediately. Certainly, sir.
8. How are your old friends the Retortillos ? They are very well,
thank you ; they are to be here this evening, so you can have a chat
with them.
9. Why did you not introduce me long ago to your father ? I am
very sorry for not having done so, and my father has often scolded me
for my neglect (negligencia).
10. Do you expect your uncle to-day? I do not; but if he conies,
well and good, we shall be glad to see him.
11. Will you be good enough to give me that newspaper that is on the
chair next the window ? With the greatest pleasure.
12. What news is there this morning? I see that a new president
(prcsidcnte) has been elected in one of the provinces of South America.
13. They might have chosea another occasion for electing him, I think.
Ah, of course ; they are at war with Spain.
1-!-. How much do they ask for the house that is for sale in Fifteenth
street ? Father was saying yesterday that they are asking a very high
price.
15. What do you understand by a high price ? More than the houso
is worth Dealer).
16. You seem very much dissatisfied at the price; have you any in-
tention of buying the hou?e ? Yes, unless it has already been. sold.
17. What news have you from Boston? is Miss Guevara married yet?
I have not heard from the family for a month ; but I suppose she must
be married by this time; she was to be married in July.
18. Will you come and take a walk before dinner ? Ah, you mu^t ex-
cuse me ; believe me, I am worn out with fatigue.
* Tnritar.
196
LESSON XL.
19. What 13 that you said, Emanuel? I have told you once, and I
shall not repeat it.
20. Do you know that young lady who is sitting on the sofa beside
your niece ? Yes ; I will introduce you to her, if you wish.
21. When will you introduce me ? Just novr, on condition that you
will not fall in love with her.
22. Well, will you promise ? I will ; you know I am going to get
married, and I only wish to enjoy her charming* conversation.
23. Miss Veleta, allow me to have the honor of introducing to you
Mr. Romelio. How do you do, sir ? I am very happy to know you, miss.
24. "Well, John, what do you think of her ? That she is charming ;
and I ana exceedingly obliged to you Tor introducing me.
25. Oh, Louisa! come and look at this beautiful dress. Oh, how
beautiful! How much did it cost? Only a trifle of $120.
26. How much did you pay for that last coat of yours, Alexander?
Only eighty dollars. Xot very much at all (no ss me hace euro).
LESSON XL.
Conducirr (See conjugation of this
verb in at p. 398.)
To conduct, to lead, to drive.
Producir.
Traducir.
Introducir.
Obrar.
Envidiar.
Olvidar.
Ex.istir.
Segun (prep.).
Siquiera (conj.).
Colectivo.
Particular.
Ejercito.
Gentio.
Rebano.
Verbs conjugated iilcc COXDUCIE.
To produce.
To translate.
To introduce.
To act.
To envy.
To forget.
To exist.
According to.
At least, even.
Collective.
Private, particular.
COLLECTIVE NO:
Army.
Crowd,
riock, herd.
Tropa.
Gente.
Multitud.
Troop.
People.
Multitude.
* Encantadora.
LESSON XL.
197
Par.
Pair, couple.
Docena.
Dozen.
Centcnares.
Hundreds.
Centena.
A hundred.
MiJIares.
Thousands.
Mitad.
Half.
El tercio.
The third.
La tercera.
The third.
El cuarto.
The fourth.
La cuarta parte.
The fourth, &c
El dozavo.
The twelfth.
Una infinidad.
An infinity.
El cloblc.
The double.
Iligo.
Fig.
Conciencia.
Conscience.
Caracter.
Character.
Circunstancia.
Circumstance.
Habitante.
Inhabitant.
Uva.
Grape.
Gobierno.
Government.
Especie.
Species, kind.
Eecurso.
Recourse, resour-
Naranja.
Orange.
ses.
Castana.
Chestnut.
Monte.
Mountain.
Nuez.
Nut.
Bosque,
Wood (forest).
Cuestion.
Question.
Eio.
River.
Produccion.
Production.
Lago.
Lake.
Libertad.
Liberty.
Nombrc.
Noun, name.
Causa.
Cause.
Carnero merino.
Merino sheep.
Irlanda.
Ireland.
Kincon, esquina.
Corner.
Xaturaleza.
Nature.
COMPOSITION.
Obro segun su conciencia.
Habla segun las circunstancias.
Lo cuento segun me lo ban contado.
Entro (or entraron) en la ciudad una
tropa de soldados.
Ea el ejcrcito de los Estados Unidos
habia soldados de todas las naciones_
El tercio (or la tercera parte) de esos
hombres no saben escribir.
El gentio era tan grande que no pudi-
mos pasar.
Un par de caballos americanos vale por
dos pares de caballos mejicanos.
lie acted according to his conscience.
He speaks according to circumstances.
I tell it as it was told to ma.
A troop of soldiers came into the city.
In tbe United States army there were
soldiers of all nations.
The third of those men do not know-
how to write.
The crowd was so great that we could
not pass.
A pair of American horses are worth
two pairs of Mexican horses.
EXPLANATION.
194. COXDUCIR, to conduct, and the verbs conjugated like
it, take a z before the radical c in the terminations beginning
with o or a. They also take the terminations je,jiste, jo, jimos,
198 LESSON XL.
, &c., as may be seen in the conjugation 01 condu-
c// - , at the end of the grammar.
195. SEGUN. We class this word among the prepositions,
in conformity to the general practice among Spanish gram-
marians, and because it sometimes has the character of such ; as,
Obro segun su conciencia.
Habla segun las circunstaucias.
He acted according to his conscience,
lie speaks according to circumstances.
Nevertheless, in other cases it is employed as an adverb ; as,
Lo cuento segun me lo ban contado. | I tell it as it was told to ree.
196. Collective nouns, in the singular, generally agree with
verbs in the singular number ; but when the collective noun
is taken in its most extended sense, custom allows the verb to
be in the plural, for in such case the numbers concurring to
form the whole, rather than the whole itself, are considered ; as,
Entro (or entraron) en la ciudad una
tropa de soldados.
A troop of soldiers came into the city.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Produce EspaGa buena fruta? Espafui produce excclcnte fruta
de todas espccies.
2. gCual es la mejor fruta de Espaua? ISTo sabre decir li V., porque
toda os buena y hay centenares de especies, por ejemplo : las uvas son de
las mejores del mundo ; los melocotoncs y los melones son tambien muy
buenos, sin contar con las naranjas, los higos, las castanas, las iHiece.s y
otra infinidad de frutas.
3. gEs Espafia un pals caro 6 barato? Es dcmasiado barato. Con
un peso se puede vivir mcjor en Espafia quo en Xneva York con cuatro.
4. i Bien, ent6nces porque se vino Y. a vivir en los Estados Unidos ?
Esa es ya otra cuestiou. Espaua no tiene quo envidiar ii ningun pais del
raundo en cuanto :i sn clima ui a sus producciones, ni meuos en cuanto al
caraetcr de sus babitantes ; pero bajo su gobicrno no se goza dc la misma
libertad quo sc goza bajo el de la Repviblica de los Estados Unidos.
5. jEs esta la causa por la cual V. se vino a residir en este pais?
Hay mucbas otras. Por ejemplo, cs verdad que en Espaua no se conocen
las bambrcs que hay en Irlauda, Alemania y otros paises, y que, como
be dicbo, se vive mejor alii con un peso que aqui con cuatro ; pcro tam-
bien es verdad, que en cualquiera profesion li oficio es mas facil ganar
cuatro pesos en los Estados Unidos, qne uno en Espana.
G. i Por tanto V. crce quo los recursos de los Estados Unidos son
LESSOR XL. 199
mas grandes que los de otros paises ? Por snpjicsto qno si. Aqui la
nation es grands ; In libcrtad es grande ; los monies, los rios, los lagos,
los bosques son grandes; la naturalcza es grande ; todo es grande ; iS'ue-
va York es grande y los hombres mismos son tambien grandes ; pero no
mas grandes que los Espafioles.
7. Ilablando de csto, V. se olvida que en este ejercicio tiene V. que
practicar con los nombres colectivos. V. tiene razon, se me babian olvi-
dado los nombres colectivos bablan-do de las dos naciones que mas amo
en el mundo.
8. En cuanto a los nombres colectivos, su practica cs mny fiicil y todo
so reduce a decir : que en Xueva York hay multitud de gentes de dife-
iviitos naciones, im'llares do mujeres y cosas buenas y centenares de
hombres y cosas malas.
9. i Pero y que dice V. con respecto a los rebafios, ejercitos, etc. ?
Que en Espafia hay rebanos de carneros merinos que, asi corno su ejSr-
cito, no tienen superiores en el mundo.
10. g Segun cso V. cree que todo lo mejor existe en Espafia? Todo
no, puesto que mis niuos son Americanos.
11. Vamos, V. sc burla. No, scfior, yo hablo de veras para practicar
el espafiol.
12. y. habla segun las circunstancias. No, sefior, yo hablo segun mi
conciencia.
13. Acuerdeso V. que segun V. obre con los demas asi obraran ellos
con V. Muy bien y asi como yo liable de ellos, asi hablaran ellos de mi ;
pero yo no debo hablar de ellos mejor que de mi mismo.
14. i Quiere V. pagarme la mitad, el tercio 6 el cuarto de lo que V.
me debe ? Ni lo uno ni lo otro, porque no tengo dinero ahora.
15. Deme V. a lo menos un par de pesos. Mafiana le dare a V. una
docena de pesos, pero hoy ni tan siquiera un centavo.
16. A Dios, Carlos, me canso de charlar y mo voy a acostar. Buenas
nochcs, Luis, njo olvido V. do pagar sus deudas.
EXCERCISE.
1. What is the name given to a large number of sheep together?
It is called a flock.
2. What were you doing so long in the street? I went to see the
reason of the great crowd at the corner of the next street.
3. Well, what was it? I could not see any thing; but it seems there
was a fire in some of the streets near here.
4. You seem to be very much of a Spaniard ; why did you ever come
to the United States? I will not deny that I like the government; yet
that is not the onlv reason I had for coming here.
200 LESSOR XL.
5. Can you tell me some of the others ? Undoubtedly ; although
living is higher here than there, business of all kinds is better, and it is
easier to make money here, not only than in Spain, but than any other
country in Europe.
G. I am very glad you think so ; how long have you been here ? It
will be four years next September.
V. "Will you be good enough to tell me something of your con;:
That will give me much pleasure.
8. You talk so much about Europe in general, and about Spain in
particular, that I cannot help (no pucdo menos de) thinking you intend to
go there. You are very right ; it is very possible that my brother and
I shah 1 take a trip (viaje) to Spain next fall.
9. "Well, in order to be able to enjoy yourselves as much as pos
it will' be necessary for you to know how to speak the language pe;
before starting. That -we intend to do.
10. Do you think all the soldiers in the army arc Americans ? Xc>,
nor even the half, and perhaps not even the third.
11. How many inhabitants are there in this city? I am not able to
tell you exactly ; bat there cannot be much less than a million.
12. "Which city in the world has the most inhabitants ? London ; it
has about three millions of inhabitant
13. Ah! you are jesting; or else you are an Englishman. I am not
jesting, neither am I an. Englishman, but a Frenchman ; after London
comes Paris.
14. Who is that book by? This is the celebrated Don Quixote (Qui-
jote), by Cervantes.
15. In how many parts is it ? Two, the first containing (contcncr)
some fifty-two chapters, and the second about eighty-four.
16. "What effect (efccto) does the reading of Don Quixote produce upon
you ? It makes me admire, and even leads me to envy the genius (rjcnio)
of its author.
17. Ah ! I see ; yon say that to please me, because you know that I
too admire the grand work of Cervantes. Pardon me, sir ; I never speak
according to circumstances, but always according to my conscience.
18. But, have you forgotten your promise already? "What promise is
that ? I do not remember any.
19. No matter; I see you have completely forgotten it. lam very
sorry.
20. "What are the best fruits that Spain produces? Spain produces
so many kinds of fruit, and so delicious, that it is almost impossible for
me to tell them all : You have excellent grapes, melons, peaches, apples,
oranges, and an infinity of others.
LESSON XLI.
201
'21. Have the soldiers that came into the city last night gone away
yet ? They marched this morning at daybreak.
22. How was our old friend Ilarnero when you last heard from him ?
lie was in Boston, entirely without means, having been deceived by a
bad man who took the whole of his money from him, and from whom
he was unable to recover (recobrar) even the fourth part.
LESION XLI.
Soler.
Bcndecir.
Caer.
Dormir.
Morir.
Errar.
Jugar.
Oir.
Oler.
Contradccir.
Poner.
Podrir.
Keir.
Valer.
Yaccr.
To be accustomed to, to do, or
be, usually.
To bless.
To fall, to sec (understand).
To sleep.
To die.
To err.
To play.
To hear.
To smell.
To contradict.
To put.
To rot,
To laugh.
To be worth.
To lie.
(Sec the conjugation of these verbs at the end of the book.)
Eeposar.
Premiar.
Examinar.
Desde.
Contra.
Sobre.
Tras.
Pucs.
Helo aqui.
Desde ahora.
To rest, to repose.
To reward.
To examine.
Since, from.
Against, towards.
Above, over, about.
After, behind, besides.
Well, then ; therefore, &c.
Here ho (or it) is.
Henceforward, from now, just
now.
202
LESSON XLI.
Desde aqui.
From here.
En efecto.
Indeed, in effect, in fact, really.
Eterno. Eternal.
Afortunado. Fortunate.
Convicto. Convicted.
Desgraciado. Unfortunate.
Inibrtunio. Misfortune.
Carlota. Charlotte.
Rfeo. Criminal.
Creacion. Creation.
Grito. Cry, scream.
Caridad. Charity.
Coclie. Carriage.
Prenda. Pledge, quality,
Vicio. Vice.
accomplishment.
Fraile. Fray, friar.
Tirtud. Virtue.
Diego. James.
Tristeza. Grief, sorrow.
Verbo. Verb.
Experiencia. Experience.
Principio. Beginning, prin T
Pugina. Page.
ciple.
COMPOSITION".
f, Suclo V. levantarsc temprano ?
Suelo levantarme tardc.
(jSolia V. ir a pascar a caballo cl afio
pasado ?
No, senor, solia pasear en cochc.
ricguc a Dios que tengaiaos pronto lo
que deseamos.
Dcsde ahora promcto servirle a V. en lo
que pueda.
El hombre ha obrado mal para con Dios
y consigo mismo desde la creacion del
mundo.
Desde Nueva York a Filadclfia hay
ochenta y ocho millas.
Yo juego contra ti.
Esta casa esta contra el Estc.
La ciudad esta sobre un monte.
La caridad es sobre todas las virtudes.
Toy tras ti.
Sufre la pena pucs lo quicres.
Tras la primavcra viene el verano.
Tras scr culpado, el es el que levanta el
grito.
L^'cre cste libro pues Y. me dice que es
btieno.
Do you usually rise early ?
I usually rise late.
Used you to ride on horseback last
year ?
No, sir, I used to riJe in a carriage.
God grant we may soon have what we
desire.
From this moment I promise to serve
you as far as I can.
Man has acted wrong before God and
to himself since the creation of the
world.
It is eighty-eight miles from New York
to Philadelphia.
I play against you (thee).
This house faces the East.
The city is built upon a mountain (or hill).
Charity is before all virtues.
I go after you (thee).
Suffer the consequences (pain), since
such is your (thy) will.
After spring comes summer.
Notwithstanding he is guilty, it is he
that raises the cry.
I will read this book since you tell me
it is good.
LESSOR XLI. 203
EXPLANATION.
197. DEFECTIVE VERBS are those which are not employed in
all their tenses and persons. JPodrir, to rot, placer, to plc:i>c,
and yacer, to lie, belong to this class, and are found used in the
following tenses and persons :
PODRlR.
Impcr. 2d person plural. Podrid. Rot.
Subjunc. Imp. Sd person sing. Podriria. He would rflt.
Injinit. Present. Podrir. To rot.
Parlicip. Podrido. Rotten.
Indicat. Pres. Zd person sing. Place.
It pleases.
Imperfect,
Placia.
It did please.
Perfect ind.
Plugo.
It pleased.
Subjunc. Present.
Plcgue.
It may please.
Imperfect.
j Pluguicra. )
( Pluguiesc. f
It might please
Fuhirc imp.
Phjguiere.
It may please.
These persons of the subjunctive mood in this verb are only
vised in the following expressions : pleyue, or pluguiera, or plu-
</>/!< (te a Dios, Avould to God ; and si me pluguiere, if it should
please me.
198. YAGER. No part of this verb is used except the
third persons of the present indicative, yace aad yacen, chiefly
at the beginning of epitaphs.
199. SOLER is used only in the present and imperfect of
the indicative mood. This verb has the peculiarity of never
being employed except as a determining verb, governing the
determined verb without the aid of any preposition, and al-
ways in the present infinitive ; as,
Suelo pascar temprano. | I usually go early to walk.
200. DESDE, from, points out the beginning of time or
place ; as,
Dcsde la creacion del mundo.
Desde Nueva York a Filadelfia.
From the creation of the world.
From Xew York to Philadelphia.
For this reason it forms a part of several adverbial expres-
sions which signify time or place ; as,
Dcsde ahora. | From this time.
D(sde aqui. | From hence.
204 LESSON XLI.
201. CONTKA is used in all cases as the English against.
202. SOBKE, upon, above, &c., serves to denote the superi-
ority of things with respect to others, either by their material
situation or by their excellence or power; as,
La ciudad esta sobre un monte.
La caridad es sobre todas las virtudes.
The city is on a mountain.
Charity is above all virtues.
It has also the signification of ademds, moreover, or ademds
de, besides ; as,
Sobre ser reo convicto quicre que le
premien.
Besides being a convicted criminal,
he wishes to be rewarded.
It also signifies time ; as,
Hablar sobre mesa. | To talk during dinner.
Security ; as,
Prestar sobre prendas. | To lend upon pledge.
203. TEAS, behind, after, &c., signifies the, order in which
some things follow others ; as,
Voy tras ti.
Tras la primavera viene el verano.
It also signifies besides ; as,
Tras ser culpado, el es el que levan-
I follow you.
After spring comes summer.
Besides being guilty, he remonstrates.
ta el grito.
204. The conjunction PUES, since, is used to account for a
proposition brought forward ; as,
Leere este libro pucs V. me dice que
es bueno.
I will read this book since you tell
me it is good.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Sobre que quiere V. que hablemos hoy? No se ; de cualquiera
cosa, con tal que practiqueraos con los verbos defectives y las preposi-
ciones contra, de$de, sobre y tras.
2. Que me place ; pero digame V., g cree V. que tenemos mucho que
practicar con el verbo yacer ? N~o, sefior, puesto qne es un verbo que
solo sirve para ponerse en los epitafios.
3. Pues si V. gusta le liaremos un epitafio y pasar6mos a practicar
con otro verbo que no sea tan triste. Soy de su opinion de Y., porque
no me gustan las cosas tristes.
LESSON XLI. 205
4. Helo aqui :
" Aqui yace el verbo yacer,
Otra cosa no sabiendo haccr."
5. Ese epitafio me liace recordar a mi otro, oigalo Y. :
" Aqui Fray Diego reposa,
T jamas hizo otra cosa."
G. Hombre, tcnga Y. caridad de mi y no me haga Y. reir hablando de
epitafios, quo cs cosa mas bien para hacer llorar que para hacer reir.
2 Suele V. tener siempre tan buen humor ? No siempre ; pero no se gana
uada con estar tristc.
7. En efecto, mas vale estar alegre que triste, pero no siempro se
puede estar alegre, j y entonces que hace Y. ? Entonces mando a pasear
al mal humor.
8. Eso es mas fdcil de decir que de hacer ; i quiere Y. decirme como
lo hace Y. ? Conrengo con Y. ; pero cuando el hombre quiere verda-
dcramente una cosa la logra casi siempre.
9. Plegue ti Dios que yo logre estar siempre contento puesto que estar
contento es ser feliz. i Que es lo que Y. hace para estar siempre con-
tento ? Yo no le he dicho u Y. que estoy siempre contento, pero pro-
euro cstavlo y asi logro no estar triste.
10." i Como lo hace Y. ? Obro segun las circunstancias. Examino la
causa de mi tristeza 6 mal humor; si es mi falta me consuelo porque crco
que Dios me castiga para que yo me corrija, y me haga mejor con la ex-
periencia.
11. Bien, i y cuando Y. es inocente y le sucede un infortunio? Enton-
ces me consuelo tambien, porque creo que todo lo que Dios nos envia es
para nuestro bien.
12. Entonces es V. filosofo. No, senor, mejor que eso; soy religioso.
13. i Tiene Y. miedo de la muerte ? No, sefior, porque se que todos
hemos de morir, y que tras la muerte viene la vida eterna.
14. i Cuantos nifios tiene Y. ? Cinco ; dos nifios y tres ninas.
15. i Como se Hainan ? El mayor de los ninos se llama Alejandro y e^
menor Manuel.
16. i Y las niflas ? Las nifias son Luisa, Carlota y Margarita.
17. i Cuanto tiempo hace que no ha estado Y. en Espafia ? Hace veinte
afios que sali de Espana.
18. i Y no ha vuelto Y. ? No, sefiora, y creo que nunca volvere.
19. ^Porque ? No porque no lo haya deseado, sino porque las circun-
stancias no me lo han permitido.
20. Porquu habla Y. tanto de si mismo en sus conversaciones, jno
piensa Y. que eso puede cansar a sus creates ? Asi es la verdad, sefiora ;
pero para mi cs la materia de conversacion mas interesante que puedo
cnontmr.
200 LESSOR XLI.
EXERCISE.
1. James, do you know where Charlotte has gone to? I saw jier
going out, but I do not know where she has gone.
2. Can yon not help your brother in his misfortune ? you know he re-
lies (contar) upon your aid. I shall do all in my power to serve him ;
but you know that is not much.
3. Margaret, go and call Charles ; tell him he has played enough, and
that I want him to attend to his music lessons. Why, he has been at his
lessons for the last half hour!
4. Ah ! that is another thing. Where is he then ? Here he is, here.
5. Well, Charles, how are yoii getting on with your music ? Very
well, papa ; but I think Jane will have to help me with my Spanish ex-
ercise.
6. My dear boy, always do your own exercises, then you will be sure
they are well done. Oh, jtes, I know ; as they say: "Help yourself and
Heaven will help you."
T. How beautiful that lady is ! Yes ; but, my dear sir, her accom-
plishments are much superior to her beauty.
8. I do not doubt it at all ; but how do you know that ? have you
known her long? Long enough to find out her good qualities, which, in
my opinion, are of more value than all the beauty in the world.
9. Have you found time yet to examine the books I put on your table
the other day ? I have, and the examination caused (produced) me a
great deal of sadness.
10. How so? From the commencement, page after page, I found that
the author has not the least experience of the world ; and, besides, he
contradicts toward the end what he has given as a general rule at the
beginning of his work.
11. I am very much grieved (sorry) that such is your opinion. So am
I ; but you know it is better (worth more) to tell the truth, even though
it should offend the author himself.
12. Can you read that epitaph ? I believe it is in English. Yes ; it
says: "Here lies Pedro Gutierrez."
13. Is that all it says ? Xo, there is a great deal more ; but I cannot
road it.
14. Ah, indeed ! I see ; you do not read English as well as you thought.
I do not ; and I promise you that from this moment I will study it at-
tentively until I know it thoroughly.
]u. What is that yon are smelling? The book that Charles has just
bought.
10. What smell has it? It smells like new paper.
LESSON XLII.
207
17. "What was that man rewarded for ? For having returned (devoher)
five hundred dollars, which he found in the park, to the person that had
lost them.
18. I am very glad that he has heen rewarded ; but virtue is always
rewarded, sooner or later (tarde que temprano).
LESSON XLII.
Adquirir.
Asir.
Caber.
Cocer.
Erguir.
Satisfacer.
Traer.
To acquire.
To seize.
To contain, to hold.
To cook.
To erect.
To satisfy.
To bring, to carry.
(See conjugation of these verbs at the end of the book,)
Conseguir.
Callar.
lleprender.
Divisar.
Fumar.
Establecer.
Saber (imp. verb).
Sorprcnder.
Entrambos.
Solo.
Ir a caballo.
Ir en coche.
De todos modos.
De ningun modo.
Manos ;i la obra.
Por mi partc.
Asi sea.
jCiispita! (int.).
\ Vaya ! (int.).
To succeed, to get.
To be silent, to hold one's tongue.
To reprehend, to chide.
To perceive, to descry, to espy.
To smoke.
To establish.
(In. the signification of) to taste,
or to savor.
To surprise.
Both.
Alone.
To ride on horseback.
To ride in a carriage.
At all events, by all means.
By no means, not at all.
To work !
For my part.
So be it, let it be so.
Wonderful ! too bad !
Come, now ! indeed ! go away
208
LESSON X I, I I .
CONJUNCTIONS.
They are classified as follows :
Copulative.
Que.
Tambien.
O, u, ya.
Sea que.
Tampoco.
Adversative.
Mas, pero. But.
Aun cuando. Even.
Aunque. Although,
though.
Causal.
Porque, que. Because.
^Porque? Why?
Pues, pues que. Since.
Por. For.
Por tanto. Therefore.
Antes de.
Lejos de.
En lugar de.
Por falta de.
De miedo de.
Por temor de.
9
Como quiera que.
Fuera de que.
Al instante que, or luego que,
tan pronto como.
De manera que.
Desde que.
That.
Ademas.
Moreover.
Also.
Y or 6.
And.
Ni.
Neither, nor.
Disjunctive.
Or, either.
Por cuauto.
Whereas.
Avhether.
Para que.
So that, in order
Whether.
that.
Neither.
A fin de.
In order that.
or
Unless.
Conditional.
Si. If.
Sino. But.
Con tal que. Provided.
A menos de. j
A menos que. J
Continuaticc.
Pues, puesto que. Since, inasmuch
as.
Comparative.
Como, asi como. As.
Asi. So.
Before.
Far from.
Instead of, in place of.
For want of.
For fear of.
However.
Besides.
As soon as,
So that.
Since.
Acuerdo.
Advice, or opin-
ion.
Marca.
Fortuna.
Brand, mark.
Fortune.
LESSON SLII.
209
Dafio.
Harm, damage.
Partida.
Party, game, de
Ajedrez.
Chess.
parture.
Cigarro.
Cigar.
Opinion.
Opinion.
Cigarrillo.
Cigarette.
Pipa.
Tobacco-pipe,
Tabaco.
Tobacco.
pipe.
Jaque.
Check.
Compafiia.
Company.
Caso.
Case.
COMPOSITION.
Conjunctions goxcrning the subjunctive.
Dado quo me escriba no le respondere.
Con tal quo cl trabaje.
A menos que me pague.
Sea que se vaya 6 que se quede.
Calle Y. no sea quo nos oiga.
Granted that he should write me, I
not answer him.
Provided he works.
Unless he pays me.
Whether he sets out or remains.
Be silent lest he should hear us.
Conjunctions governing the indicative.
Al instaute quo recibi la carta le res-
pond!.
De suerte que (or de modo que) no
pudo conseguirlo.
De manera que no esta nada satisf echo.
6 Que ha hecho V. desde que le he vis-
to a Y. ?
Llegue tan pronto como pude.
Mientras que V. juega 61 estudia su lec-
cion.
Yo reprendo a V. sus faltas porque le
quiero.
As soon as I received the letter I an-
swered him.
So that he could not bring it about.
So that he is not pleased at all.
What have you been doing since I saw
you ?
I got here (or there) as soon as I could.
While you play, he studies his lesson.
I reprove you for your faults because I
love you.
Conjunctions governing the infinitive.
Yo frabajo si, fin do ganar ditiero.
No le visitare antes de conocerle.
Lejos de amarle le aborrcce.
I work in order to earn money.
I shall not visit him before makin_
acquaintance.
Far from loving him, he abhors him.
his
EXPLANATION.
205. CoxJUJfcrioxs. The learner is already acquainted
with the greater part of the conjunctions ; but in this lesson
they are again given, so that he may see how they are classified.
Besides the conjunctions introduced in this lesson, there may
210 LESSOR XLII.
be formed a variety of expressions which answer the same end
as conjunctions ; as.
Corno quicra quo,
Fucra dc que,
However ;
Besides ;
and a large number of others.
206. It would require too much space to specify all the
conjunctions that govern verbs in a given mood ; more is to be
learned from the teacher, and by constant practice in reading
and conversation, than from all the rules that could be given.
207. The subjunctive should be used after the following
conjunctive expressions : Dado que, granted that ; con tal que,
provided that ; d m'enos que, unless ; no sea que, lest, for fear ;
dntes que, sin que, sea que, &c. as,
Dado que me escriba no le respon-
dere.
Con tal que el trabaje.
A menos que me pague.
Granted that he should write to me,
I shall not answer him.
Provided that he works.
Unless he pays me.
208. Other expressions having de, instead of que, require
the verb in the infinitive mood ; such as, dfin de, in order to ;
d m'enos de, unless, &c.
209. Finally, other compound conjunctions govern the
indicative ; as, al instante que, as soon as ; de manera que, so
that, &c.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Buenos dias, Don Carlos. Tengalos Y. muy felices, Don Enrique ;
al instante que lo divise desde la ventana lo recouoci.
2. jCorao esta toda la familia? Todos buenos ; acaban de salir.
3. gDe manera que estd Y. solo? Si, sefior, en lugar de salir quiso
quedarme a esperar a V. pues sabia que habia V. de venir.
4. gQuie'n se lo dijo a V. ? A que no acierta V. Verdadcramente
no se quien puede haberselo dicbo a Y.
5. Fu6 Helena, su hija de Y., que acaba de salir a pasear con mi csposa
y Margarita, mi hija.
G. Y nosotros, $que haremos? Lo que Y. gnste.
T. Mi opinion es que juguemos una partida de ajedrcz, que fumemos
xin cigarro, bcbamos \m vaso de \"ino de Carinena, y vayamos despucs a
sorprender alas seuoras al parque. jEsta Y. de acuerdo ? Perfectisi-
momente.
LESSON XI. II. 211
8. Pues bien, manos a laobra; gjuega V. mucho? Medianameute ;
pero como no lo practice tcino que me gane V.
9. ;Que hombre! si hace lo menos dos afios que no lie jugado, fuera
de que jamas he sido limy fuerte.
10. i Cuales quiere V., las uegras 6 las blancas ? Cualesquiera, de todos
modos he de perder.
11. Jaque a la reiua Don Enrique. Pues creo que esta perdida. Si,
sefior, no puede huir vaya pues le doy a V. la partida, puesto que sin
rcina es casi imposible ganar.
12. ^Quiere V* que en lugar de jngar mas vayamos a ver las seuoras?
Si, sefior, luego que bebamos del vino de Cariflena.
13. ; Hombre, si, lo habia olvidado! aqui esta, y aqui tiene V. tambien
pipas, cigarros de la Habana, cigarrillos de la marca de la Ilonradez y
tabaco de Virginia para la pipa ; i que prefiere V. ? Yo prefiero los
cigarrillos.
14. A su salud de V., Don Carlos. A la de V., Don Enrique. ; Gas-
pita ! ; qud bien sube el de Carinena !
15. gLe gusta a V. ? jQue si me gusta! desdc quo vivo en ISTueva
York no be probado vino mejor.
16. Puesto que le gusta ^porque no repite Y. ? For temor de que me
haga dafio, no suclo beber mucho, y temo que me ponga un poco alegre.
17. Aqui tieiie V. fuego; gque tal le gustan a V. csos cigarrillos?
Excelentes.
18. Sefior; g Que quieres Juan ? Los caballos cstan listos.
19. ; Que ! i Yamos a caballo ? Si, sefior, las sefioras lian ido en coche.
20. eQue camino tomaremos? Iremos por la Quinta avenida, que e^
la calle mas hermosa de Xueva York.
21. Tenemos buen tiempo, D. Enrique. Hermosisimo, y con esto, buena
salud, amigos fieles, una larga familia y una buena fortuna, i que mas
podemos desear ?
22. Tiene V. razon, Don Carlos, por mi parte soy feliz y solo dcseo que
Dios me de uua larga vida para ver a todos mis liijos bien establecidos.
A>i sea, Don Enrique, lo deseo para cntrambos.
EXERCISE.
1. Does your brother never go out on horseback? Sometimes; but
not very often.
2. What can be the reason of that ? I thought he \vas very fond of
horses and riding on horseback. So he is ; but he does not often take
exercise of that kind for fear of falling.
3. How does he go to the Central Park, in that case ? Why, in a
carriage of course.
212 LESSON XLIII.
4. Go away ! What carriage does he go in ? In his cousin's, of course,
for want of one of his own.
5. Who will give me a cigarette ? No one here ; there is nobody
here that smokes any thing but cigars or pipes.
6. Too bad ! May I ask why none of you use the cigarette ? Cer-
tainly; and we shall tell you with the greatest pleasure: atone time
we all smoked what you call "cigarette," but what we call a ''poor
man's cigar," until one day Henry came (you know Henry is something
of a doctor), and, with his head erect, said with a voice of thunder :
" What's this ? smoking cigarettes ? "
7. Well ! what more did he say ? " Don't yon know that what you
are smoking there is nothing more than paper? You will all be sick! "
8. What did you do then ? We were at first surprised ; but very
soon we promised never to smoke such a thing again, for it was good for
nothing, and only tasted of paper.
9. Be that as you please ; for my part I shall always prefer the ciga-
rette to the cigar (tabaco). Perhaps you are right ; each one has his
taste, and so we shah 1 say no more about it.
10. What news do you bring from Boston? Some good, and some
bad : my cousin has been very fortunate in that affair I spoke of to you ;
but he met last week with an unfortunate accident.
11. Ah! how was that? He was out riding in company with some
friends, and in returning home he fell off his horse.
12. I am very sorry indeed ; and I hope he may soon be able to attend
to his business.
13. What do you think of playing a game of chess ? I am ready to
play one, if you wish ; but you will not find my game very good.
14. Why do you not practise more than you do ? I have practised
very much, with a desire to become perfect in the game, but have not
been able to succeed.
LESSON XLIII.
Advcrtir. To take notice, to observe, to
warn.
Conjugar.
Desconfiar.
Cometer.
Distiuguir.
To conjugate.
To distrust, to mistrust.
To commit.
To distinguish.
LESSON XLIII.
213
Formar.
Devolver.
Descuidar.
Perteneccr.
Molestar.
Resultar.
To form, to shape.
To return, to give back. [mind.
To neglect, to be at ease in one's
To belong.
To molest, to trouble.
To result, to turn out.
(The learner ought by this time to know almost all the conjugations, both of
the regular and the irregular verbs ; should he at any time be at a loss for some
part of a verb, he may refer to the conjugations at the end of the grammar.)
Cada.
Every, each.
Sin duda.
Certainly, without doubt.
j Adelante !
Go on ! go ahead ! come in 1
En adelante.
Henceforth.
Compuesto.
Compound.
Irregular.
Irregular.
Completo.
Complete.
Varies.
Various, divers, several.
Simple.
Simple.
Seguro.
Secure, sure.
Obvio.
Obvious.
Lo demls.
The rest.
( Bill of lading.
Condicion. Condition.
Conocimicnto. j Knowledgo>
Navidad, or ) Nativity, Christ
Jose. Joseph.
Natividad. f mas.
Articulo. Article, section.
Eelacion. Relation.
Pronombre. Pronoun.
Duda. Doubt.
Participio. Participle.
Ventaja. Advantage.
Gerundio. Gerund.
Frase. Phrase.
Advcrbio. Adverb.
Prontitud. Promptitude.
Pnesente. Present.
Sentencia. Sentence.
Imperfecto. Imperfect.
Conjugacion. Conjugation.
Perfecto. Perfect.
Verdad. Truth.
Future. Future.
Imprudcncia. Imprudence.
Plnscuamperfecto. Pluperfect.
Preposicion. Preposition.
Infinitive. Infinitive.
Conjuncion. Conjunction.
Indicative. Indicative.
Interjeccion. Interjection.
Imperative. Imperative.
Paz. Peace.
Sabjuntivo. Subjunctive.
Molestia. Trouble.
214
LESSON XLIII.
COMPOSITION.
Descuide Y.
j Cuantos tiempos tiene cl modo indica-
tivo ?
Ocbo : cuatro simples y cuatro com-
puestos.
Bueno fuera (or seria) no descuidarsc.
Conviniera (or couvcndria) que se hicie-
sc la paz.
Airaque dijeras (or dijeses) la verdad,
no te creeria.
; Ojalu cesara (or cesase) la guerra ! asi
seriamos mas felices.
Pense quc estudiaras.
Xo crci quc estudiase V.
Juzgue que estudiaria V.
Dije que leyeras.
Dijo que leerias.
Dijimos que leyese.
Deseaba quo ganaras (or ganases).
Quiso que te casaras (or casases).
Xo se si iria 6 no.
Si tuvbra (or si tuvicse) buenos libros
leeria.
Seria iruprudencia ir con esta tienipo.
Xo quiso ir.
Debemos perdonar a nucstros enemigos.
Y. pueJe hablar, pcro yo no lo puedo.
t, Si hubiara (or hubiese) Y..recibido los
libros me los habria Y. prestado ?
Si los Imbiera (or hubiese) recibido se.
los habria prestado ; pero no los he
recibido aun.
En lugar de venir a verme me escribio.
El no jugara por temor de perder EU ;
dinero.
j Quiera Dios que se corrija !
Make yourself easy (or bo at case in
your mind).
How many tenses has the indicative
mood ?
Eight : four simple and four compound.
It would be well not to be off one's
guard.
It would be well if peace were made.
Though thou wert to tell the truth, he
would not believe thee.
Would to God the war would come to
an end ! we should then be happier.
I thought thou wouldst study.
I did not think you would study (or
were studying).
I judged you would study.
I said thou wert to read (or wu
read).
He said thou wouldst read.
We said he was to read,
lie wished thee to win.
He wished thee to get married.
I do not laow whether he would go or
not.
Had I (or if I had) good books I would
read.
It were imprudent to go hi this weather.
He would not go.
We should forgive our enemies.
Tou can _speak, but I cannot.
Had you received (or if you had fc-
ceived) the books would you have
lent them to me ?
If I had received them I would have
lent them to you ; but I have not re-
ceived them yet.
Instead of coming to see me, he wrote
to me.
He will not play, for fear of losing his
money.
God grant that he may change !
LESSON X L II I .
215
i Asi sea ! Lo desco para enlrambos.
Bcbo a la salmi de V., Don Enrique.
A la dc V., Don Carlos.
Sefiores, inanos a Li obra, no sea quo
no podamos acabar a tiempo.
DC todos modos crco que no lo con2e-
guiremos.
So be it ! That is.ray desire for both.
I drink to your health, Mr. Henry.
Your health, Mr. Charles.
To work, gentlemen, for fear v,-c should
not be able to finish in time.
At all events, I do not think we shall
succeed.
EXPLAXATIOX.
210. IMPERFECT AXD PLUPERFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
Although it has been deemed expedient, in the example of the
conjugation of verbs in the subjunctive mood, to give but one
English equivalent for each of the three terminations rid, ra,
se, it is not to be inferred therefrom that they may be used in-
discriminately. Indeed, the correct application of each of
these terminations presents as much difficulty to the student of
Spanish as does that of the English signs might, could, should,
would to the foreigner learning English. The following rules
will, however, serve as a guide in all ordinary cases, and enable
the pupil to surmount not a few of the mos.t serious obstacles
to the right use of the terminations in question.
1st. "When the sentence begins without a conditional con-
junction, the verb may take either the first or the second ter-
mination (ria or ra) ; as,
Bueno scria (or fucra) no descuidarse.
It would be well not to be off one's
guard.
It would be well if peace were made.
Oonvendj'ia (or conviniero) que se hi-
ciese la paz.
2d. In sentences beginning with si, sino, aunque, bien que,
dado que, &c., or with an interjection expressive of desire,
either the second or third termination may be employed (ra or
se) ; and were it necessary to repeat the same tense in the
second clause of the sentence (in order to show what would
take place as the result of the condition expressed in the first
clause), the first termination (ria) may then be used ; as,
Though thou toldest (or wert to tell)
the truth, he would not believe the c.
Aunque dijeras (or dijeses) la vcrdad,
no te creeria.
3d. "When the imperfect of the subjunctive is preceded by
a verb in tho preterit definite of the indicative, signifying pen-
216 LESSON XLIII.
sar, to think, dgcir, to say, or such like, any of the terminations
may be used ; bat it must be observed that the idea conveyed
will be different, according to the termination employed ; as,
Pense que estudiara V., or quo cstu-
diarz'a V.
Xo erei quo cstudiase V.(or estudiara)
V.
Juzgue quo estudiar/a (or estudiara)
V.
Dije que leyera (or leer/a) V.
Dijo que leyese (or leyera) V.
Dijimos que leyera (or leyese).
I thought you would study.
I did not think you were studying, or
I did not think you would study,
I judged you would study.
I said you would read.
He said you were to read.
We said he was to read.
4th. But if this tense be preceded or governed by a verb in
any of the past tenses of the indicative, signifying desear, to
desire, querer, to wish, or by any verb of such nature, then the
second termination (ra) or the third (se) must be used, and
never the first (rid) ; as,
Deseaba que ganara (or ganase) Y.
Quiso que V. se casara (
He was desirous that you might win.
He wished you to get married.
A glance at the foregoing rules and examples will suffice in
order to observe that the first and second terminations (ria and
ra) may be used one for the other, without any change in the
sense of the phrase ; that the second may also be used for the
third (that is'to say, ra for se), but that the first and third are
of an entirely different meaning, and, in consequence, can never
be substituted one for the other. Another peculiarity of the
first (ria) is, that it can never be preceded by a conditional con-
junction, while the second and third may.
5th. When, in translating into Spanish, whether is to be
translated by si, would or should must be rendered by the ter-
mination ria ; as,
Xo se si iria. | I do not know whether he would go.
Cth. The inverted forms had I, had he, &c., meaning if I
had, if he had, &c., are always to be turned into Spanish by
cither of the terminations ra or se, preceded by the conjunc-
tion si ; as,
Si tuviera (or tuviese) buenos libros,
leer/a.
Had I (or if I had) good books, I
would read.
LESSON XLIII. 217
7th. Were, used in the place of would be, may be translated
by either ria or ra, never by se ; as,
Serz'a (or fuera) iniprudencia ir con
este tiempo.
It were imprudent to go in this
weather.
211. The English auxiliaries, may, might, can, could, will,
would and should are sometimes to be translated into Spanish
by principal verbs of the same meaning, and not merely ren-
dered by corresponding terminations ; as,
No quiso ir.
V. pucdc hablar, pero yo no lo puedo.
He would not go.
You may (or can) speak, but I cannot.
In the first example we see, that by would not is conveyed
the idea of the want of will or desire on the part of the person
alluded to, and not the idea of that person's going or not going,
as dependent on a condition. Had the latter been the sense
intended, we should then have rendered icoidd by the termi-
nation ria of the verb ir, to go ; thus,
El no iria. \ He would not go ;
for, in that case, the object would have been simply to predict
that he would not go, as dependent on some such condition as,
if I did not go too, si yo nofuese tambien. Hence, the closest
attention is required, in order to find the real meaning of the
auxiliaries above mentioned, before attempting to translate them.
212. The imperfect of the subjunctive denotes a contingent
action that took place some time ago, or that is taking place at
the present time, or that will take place after the completion
of the action expressed by the determining verb.
213. The pluperfect represents a contingent action as com-
pleted before some period of time already past, or before some
other action which is now also completed, or which would be
now completed had it taken place.
The closest attention to the foregoing remarks is essential,
in order to avoid the improper substitution of the tenses of the
indicative for those of the subjunctive, which all foreigners, and
especially the English, are most liable to commit.
10
218 LKSSON XL 1 1 1.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Duda V. quo so liaga la paz este verano ? Convemlria (<?r convi-
' nicra) quo se hiciese la paz ; pcro temo que no se baga.
2. i Iria V. ti Europa si tuviera (or taviese) tiempo ? Xo iria aunque
tuviera tiempo, si no tuviese dinero.
3. ;Ojalu! tuviera V. (or tuviese; mucho dinero, porque cntonces
me prestaria V. alguno ; jno es asi? Si tuviera mucho le prestaria u V.
alguno ; pero con la condicion de que me lo devolvicse pronto.
4. i Tenie V. acaso qne no se lo devolviera ? Todo pudiera suceder,
amigo mio.
5. Si V. me hubiera (or bubiese) prcstado algo, y yo no se lo bubiese
(or bubiera) devuelto, Y. tendria razon en desconfiar. Todo eso estu muy
bien ; pero si, en lugar de ser V., fuera yo el que necesitara dinero, y V.
el que lo tuviera, i me lo prestaria ? Por supuesto que si.
6. Pues con todo eso yo no se si Y. lo baria. ; Torque piensa V. tan
mal de mi ?
7. i Ha olvidado V. ya que el aiio pasado, por Xavidad, fui a pedirle a
V. cien pesos y me los nego V. ? Mal pudiera yo prcstarsclos :'i V.
cuando yo no los tenia ; pero este Y. seguro, Don Jose, que yo bubiera
tenido un gran placer en baberselos prestado a Y. si los bubiera (or bu-
biese) tenido.
8. i Si V. supiera usar correctamento los tiempos y modos del verbo.
sabria Y. bablar cspafiol ? Si, seiior, con los conocimientos que ya tengo
de las demas partes dc la oracion, creo que bablaria bien el espafiol si su-
piera usar bien los tiempos y modos del verbo.
0. i Que es lo mas importante al aprender una lengua ? El conoci-
miento de todo lo quo bace relacion al verbo.
10. ^Porque" crce Y. que el verbo es lo mas importante? Porquc sin
los verbos no se pucdc formar una sola sentencia.
11. ^Luego, scgun eso, bastara aprender la conjugation de los verbos
regulares e irrcgularcs para hablar una lengna ? Xo, seiior, si uno sabe
conjugar los verbos como regularmente se conjugan en las graiaticas;
pero si sabiendolos conji^gar como se debe.
12. ^Pues qu^, bay algun otro modo de conjugar los verbos? Los
verbos deben conjugarse formando sentencias completas en todos sus
modos y tiempos.
13. i Que ventajas resultan de csto? Las ventajas son obvias, pues
formando sentencias completas con cada tiempo y modo se aprende a dis-
tinguir estos tiempos y modos, acabando por ugarlos correctamente.
1-i. ^ Y crec- V. quo bablaria bion el espauol si pudiese bacer sentencias
en todos los tiempos y modos del verbo? Sin duda alguna, uua vez que
LESSON XLIII. 219
V. forme cstas sentcncias con prontitud y sin cometer faltas, hablara V.
espaflol.
15. Pucs manos a la obra, ^quiere V. que haga algunas en el raodo in-
dicative ? No, seflor, cu las lecciones pasadas ha practicado V. bastante
con ese modo, haga V. algunas ahora con el modo subjuntivo.
16. Preseute: ^DeseaV. que yo aprenda elespafiol? ^Escorrecta?
Perfectamente ; adelante.
17. Perfecto do subjuntivo : Temo qne la guerra no haya acabado en
Europa. jEsta bien? Si, seflor, esta muy bien; pero no necesita V.
preguntarme a cada sentencia que haga, si esta correcta, porqne yo ten-
drc buen cuidado de advertirselo a V. cuando no sea asi.
18. Plu3cuamperfecto : Si yo hubiera creido que esto le molestaba a V.
no se lo habria preguntado. Esto no me rnolesta de ningun rnodo y espero
que V. no se moleste tampoco por lo que yo acabo de dccir.
1 9. Imperfecto : g Seria suficiente hacer una frase en cada tiempo ?
Seria suficiente si cada tiempo se usase en un solo caso ; pero como hay
muchos y mny vurios, convendria practical 1 en todos tanto como fucse
posible.
EXERCISE.
1. Before going out, Henry, I wish to give you a piece of advice.
Well, go on !
2. What is that advice* you have to give me? Hold your tougiu,
and hear what I have to tell you.
3. Did you warn your cousin not to lend his carriage to that young
man who asked him for it ? Yes, but he said he would do so, and that
ho did not distrust that young man at all.
4. Do you know how to conjugate all the verbs in the Spanish lan-
guage now ? I am not sure ; my memory is not very good ; and so I al-
ways like to look at my grammar, for fear of making (committing) mistakes.
5. Can you tell mo how many conjugations of regular verbs there
are in Spanish ? Yes, sir, there are three.
6. When you see a new verb, how do you know to what conjugation
it belongs ? By the termination of the infinitive mood.
7. Can you tell me to what conjugation the verb comprar belongs?
Certainly ; it belongs to the first.
8. How do you know that ? I see the characteristic termination of
the first conjugation, which is ar.
9. And of which conjugation is entender ? The second ; its termina-
tion being er.
10. Very well. Now, if I say existio. can you tell me all about that
verb ? Yes, sir, it is a regular verb, third person singular, of the preterit
* Consejo.
220
LESSON XLI V.
definite tense of the indicative mood ; it belongs to the third conjugation,
its infinitive being existir.
11. Are there in Spanish no other conjugations than those which you
have just told me ? Yes, very many. Those I have mentioned (mencio-
nar) already are the three regular ones.
12. What do you understand by " regular verbs" ? Kegular verbs are
those which are conjugated in all their moods and tenses exactly like the
models (modelos) given hi different parts of the grammar.
13. And " irregular verbs," what are they ? Those whose conjugation
is different from the models.
14. If you could speak Spanish as well as English, do you think you
would prefer it to your own language ? I would like to be able to speak
it as well ; but there is no language in the world that I would prefer to
my own.
15. If I were to lend you this phrase book would you return it to me
next week ? I would it' you wanted it, and that I promised to return it
to you at that time.
LESSON XLIV.
Aproximar.
Apurar.
Aullar.
Ladrar.
Cuidar.
Dejar.
Emplear.
Matar.
Perrnitir.
Eobar.
Imponer.
Tantico.
Vaya de cuento.
Corno iba diciendo de mi
cuento.
A mi costa.
Ya le veo a V. venir.
Venir ii pelo.
To approach, to draw near.
To perplex, to press.
To howl.
To bark.
To take care of.
To leave, to let.
To employ.
To kiU.
To permit.
To rob, to steal.
To impose.
Somewhat ; a little.
To begin my story.
As I was saying (in my story).
At my expense, to my cost.
I see what you are at.
To suit exactly, to be apropos.
LESSON XLIV.
221
De sopeton.
Unexpectedly.
Cuanto mas.
The more.
; Por Dios !
For Heaven's sake !
jHe!
Ho! hoa! What?
iOiga!
Indeed ! Just listen !
CMco.
Little, small.
Revoltoso.
Noisy.
Caliente.
Hot, warm.
Apurado.
Embarrassed.
Burlon.
Jester, scoffer.
Natural.
Natural.
Aumentativo.
Augmentative.
Diminutive.
Diminutive.
Picaro.
Rogue, rascal.
Satisfecho.
Satisfied, contented.
Cuento. Tale, story.
Anecdota. Anecdote.
Corro. Group of persons.
Casuca. Miserable house.
Cojo. Lame.
Mosca. Fly ; tiresome
Brazo. Arm.
person.
A dei nan. Attitude.
Necesidad. Necessity, need.
Francisco, Paco Francis, Frank.
Pierna. Leg.
(dim.}.
Boca. Mouth.
Jose, Pepe(eZ?z.). Joseph, Joe.
Maria, Mariqui- Mary.
Caldo. Broth.
ta (dim.).
Calducho. Poor broth.
Concepcion, (JVb English cqui
Pistoletazo. Pistol shot.
Concha (dim.}, alcnt.}
Poetastro. Poetaster.
Pistola. Pistol.
Lugar. Place. '
Estratagema. Stratagem.
Garrote. Bludgeon.
Josefa, Pepa Josephine.
Garrotazo. Blow of a blud-
(dim.}.
geon.
Francisca, Paca Frances, Fanny.
Cailon. Cannon.
(dim.}.
Cafionazo. Cannon-shot.
Costumbre. Custom.
Ladron. Thief, robber.
Clase. Class.
COMPOSITION.
Lo aprcndi a mi costa.
Antes no Ic habia comprendido a Y.,
ahora ya le veo venir.
El me dio la noticia de sopeton.
I learned it to my cost.
I did not understand you before, but
now I see what you are at.
lie gave me the news unexpectedly.
222
LESSON XLIV.
i For Dios ! D. Francisco, no liable V.
de eso.
6 Conoce V. a aquel hombron ?
Si, senor, es el marido de mi vednita
Mariquita.
Y. me sorprende. \ Es posible que sea
aquel hombronazo el marido de esa
mujercita !
6 Es ese hombre cojo ?
Si, sefior ; en la ultima guerra recibio
un pistoletazo en una pierna.
f, Ila matado Y. alguna vcz a alguno ?
Si, sefior, el ano pasado mate de un
garrotazo al perro de mi vecino, por-
que no me dejaba dormir, aullando
todita la noche.
Ese hombre es un picaronazo, quc no
hace sino beber y no atiende a las
nccesidades do su familia.
Este perro es chiquito, pero yo tengo
uno chiquirritito.
Carlotita, ve a cuidar de tu hermanita.
Ese nino es un picarillo.
Esta niSa cs una coquetilla.
Mi pobrecico bijo esta muy malo.
Pepe, (, has visto mi caballito ?
b'i ; pcro yo en tu lugar, Paco, le llama-
ria caballejo, porque creo que no
merece el nombre de caballito.
Pepe vino callandito.
Mi amigo csta apuradillo.
Esa nifia esta muertccita de frio.
Tu casa csta Icjitos.
El no es poeta, sino poetastro.
For Heaven's sake ! Mr. Francis, do
not speak of that.
Do you know that big man ?
Yes, si;-, he i.< the husband of my little
neighbor Mary.
You surprise me. Is it possible that
that enormous man is that little
woman's husband !
Is that man lame ?
Yes, sir ; in the last war he received a
pistol shot in one of his legs.
Did you ever kill any one ?
Yes, sir ; lust year I killed my neigh-
bor's dog with a bludgeon, for he
would not let me sleep, howling the
whole night over.
That man is a great rascal who does
nothing but drink, and does not at-
tend to the wants of his family.
This dog is pretty small, but I have a
very little one.
Charlotte, go and take care of your lit-
tle sister.
This child is a little rogue.
This little girl is a little coquette.
My poor little son is very sick.
Joe, have you seen my little horse ?
I did ; but if I were you, Frank, I
would call it a nag, for I think it is
not worthy the name of (little) horse.
Joe came in softly.
My friend is a little embarrassed.
That little girl is almost dead with cold.
Your house is pretty far away.
He is no poet, but a poetaster.
EXPLANATION*.
214. AUGMENTATIVE AND DIMINUTIVE NOUNS arc those
derivatives which serve to augment or diminish the significa-
tion of their primitives ; not only in regard to size, but also to
esteem, character, dignity, importance, &c.
They are formed by adding various terminations to the
primitive nouns, dropping generally the vowel, if it end in one.
LESSON XLIV. 223
The terminations which are used are very numerous ; but those
most frequently adopted are azo, on, ots for the augmentive
masculine, and aza, ona, ota for the augmentive feminine nouns.
These terminations are equivalent in their meaning to the Eng-
lish words big, large, stout, tall, and such like ; as,
PKIMITIVES. DERIVATIVES.
Hombrc. A man. Ilombro.i, horn- A tall, or large,
Mujer. A woman. brazo, hombrofc. man.
Mujeiwia, mu- A tall, or large,
jeraza, mujerofcf. woman.
But the nouns which have those terminations are not al-
ways augmentativcs, since the nouns pistoletazo, pistol shot;
canonazo, cannon shot ; garrotazo, blow of a bludgeon, do not
augment the signification of their primitives, pistola, canon
and garrote, andconsequently are not augmentatives.
Familiar use has introduced many other augmentative and
diminutive terminations; as,
Ilonibronazo. I A very large man.
Picaronazo. A very great rascal.
The terminations most used as diminutives are in, illo, ito,
ico, etc, uelo or ejo, for the masculine ; the feminine are formed
by adding a to the termination in, and by changing the final
vowel of the others into a.
Many of the diminutive terminations may acquire a still
further diminutive signification, by adding other terminations
to them ; thus,
Chico.
Chiqu/fo.
Chiquirritito.
Small.
Very small.
Very, very small.
The manner of applying these terminations, as much for
their different meanings as for their various orthographical ac-
cidents, admits of so much variety that practice seems the only
means of acquiring the proper use of them ; as,
Mi hcrmamfo.
Un hombreci.'o.
Un viejccfto.
El cs un picari#o.
CarlotzVa.
My clear little brother.
A dear little man.
A dear little old man.
lie is a dear little rogue.
Dear little Charlotte.
224
LESSOX XLIV.
Una pobre viejecita.
Ella es una coquctilla.
Mi probrecieo hijo (or mi pobre
hijilo).
Un caballr/o.
Un pobrefe.
Un ladronzuefo.
Un reyezMe/o.
A poor dear little old woman.
She is a dear little coquette.
My poor little son.
A miserable little horse, a nag.
A poor useless creature.
A petty young thief.
A petty king.
215. Besides the terminations mentioned, there are many
others which may be called irregular, inasmuch as they can be
affixed to certain nouns only, among them the most irregular
are those of persons ; as,
Francisco, Paco, etc.
Concepcion, Concha, etc.
Jose, Pepe, etc.
Maria, Mariquita, etc.
Francis, Frank.
(No equivalent in English.)
Joseph, Joe.
Mary.
216. Although the diminutives proceed in general from
substantive nouns, as we see by the preceding examples, they
are also formed, in familiar style, from adjectives, participles,
gerunds, and even from adverbs ; thus we not unfrequently
say :
The boy is rather turbulent.
Half dead with cold.
The whole day over.
Warm bread (slightly warm).
Revoltosz7?o es el muchacho.
MuertectYo de frio.
Todito el dia.
Pan calentftu.
Apuradifto estuvo.
Vino callandzVo.
LejeVos cstii tu casa.
He was somewhat embarrassed.
He came softly.
Your house is pretty far away.
217. Primitive words, ending of themselves in any diminu-
tive termination (such as cepillo. brush ; abam'eo, fan ; cspejo,
looking-glass, etc.), cannot take an additional termination simi-
lar to their own, without producing a disagreeable sound, which
ought always to be avoided. Words ending in ito or ita are
except ed.
The same termination may often serve to express affection,
pity, contempt, <fcc., being in this respect like the interjec-
tions, and it is consequently very difficult to classify them.
Very often their real meaning can be distinguished only
by the nature of the conversation and the intonation of the
.LESSON XLIV. 225
voice. They are, nevertheless, not to be used too profusely,
because when they come too close together they render the
discourse monotonous, in consequence of the similarity existing
between them.
218. There are in Spanish other derivatives, formed more
or less at fancy, and which are not augmentatives or diminu-
tives, although they may appear to be such; these might be
called depreciatives (despreciativos), because there is always in
them something of censure, maliciousness, or mockery ; as,
Casa, casuca.
Poeta, poctastro.
Caldo, calducho.
House, miserable-looking house.
Poet, poetaster.
Broth, poor broth.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION".
1. i Tiene V. lastima de aquel pobreto ? No tengo lastima de el, por-
que es un ladronzuelo.
2. i Le ha robado a V. algo ? No, sefior, 61 sabe muy bien que si se
atreviese a robarme yo lo mataria de un pistoletazo.
3. Y $ porque no de un garrotazo, 6 un cafionazo ?, g Porque? No s6
porque, probablemente he crnpicado la palabra pistoletazo porque tengo
una pistola y no tengo ni garrote, ni cafion.
4. No, sefior, esa no es la razon ; g quiere V. que yo se la diga ? Bien,
vcamos.
5. Y. no tiene valor para matar una mosca cuanto mas a un hombre ;
pero V. queria practical' con las palabras matar y pistoletazo y esta es la
sola razon por Ja cual V. iba a coraetcr un homicidio.
6. Vaya, Don Francisco, V. es poeta, hombre de ingenio y de buen
humor y quiere .divertirse a costa raia, no es verdad ? Ya lo veo a V.
venir, V. quiere hacerme decir que no soy poeta sino poetastro introdu-
ciendo esta palabrita mas de la leccion.
V. Solo le faltaba a V. llamarse Quevedo para serle parecido en todo,
hasta en el nombre. Mil gracias por el honor de la comparacion, pero
volvicndo a lo del pistoletazo.
8. jPor Dios! D. Francisco, no sea V. tan burlon y dejeme V. estar
en paz. Lo dcjard a V., Don Pepe, si me permite contarle un cuentecito;
y para que le parezca a V. mas interesante, se lo contare a V. introducien-
do tantos aumentativos y diminutives como me sea posible.
9. Con esa eondicion le escucho a V. Pues bien ; vaya de cuento :
Habia un hombrecillo en cierto lugarcillo. Y observe V., D. Pepito,
que para el cuentecito lo mismo hubiera dado que el hombre hubiera sido
10*
220 LESSON XLIV. .
hombroa y el lugar lugaron. Adelante con el cuentccillo quo me va gus-
tando uu tantico. Pues cs cl caso quo estc hombron, hombrecito, lioin-
brecillo, hombrotc, bombrecico, homorazo, hombronazo, bombracho, 6
como V. quicra llamarle. . . .
10. Yo no quiero llaraarle nada, V. lo ba llamado ya suficicntc ; pcro
al cncnto, al cucnto 6 se acabara el cjercicio sin que llegucmos al fin.
Pues este hombrezuelo no sabia mas que un cuentecillo ; pero lo contaba
a todo cl inundo que cncontraba.
11. Pero yo no comprendo coino podia bacer qne su cnento vinicsc u
pelo y V. sabc que no se cnenta un cuento asi de sopeton, como se dan
los buenos dias. Al principle, cl viejote se encontraba apuradillo para
conseguirlo ; pero el picaruelo invento despues una estratagema por me-
dio de la cual bizo que su anecdotilla viniera a pelo siempre.
12. jOiga! u que estratagema fue esa? Oigala V. ; pero antes debo
advertir a V. que en su anecdota babia algo que baci'a rclacion a, cauona-
zos y pistoletazos.
13. ; He ! j Ya vuelve V. a los pistolctazos ! Pues bien, como iba di-
ciendo de mi cuento, se aproximaba el buen viejecito callandito a cual-
quier corrillo que eucontrase y poniendose el dedo indice sobre la boca
en ademan de imponer silencio, les preguntaba. " i Han oido Vds. un
canonazo ? " No, sefior, era naturalmcnte la respuesta ; pues bien, res-
pondia mi bombre muy satisfecbo. Abora que bablamos de cafionazos
les contar6 a Vds. una anecdota . . . . y aqui contaba su cucnto.
14. Yo no veo la aplicacion de su cuento de V. todavia, Sr. D. Fran-
cisco. ; Como ! D. Pepe, i no ba oido V. un pistoletazo ?
EXERCISE.
1. How did you like tbat story by Fernan Caballero which I lent
you? Very much indeed; it gives a very good idea of the manners,
customs and language of the low classes in Andalusia (Ajidalucid).
2. What did that man want ? He is a poor lame man asking for a
piece of bread, or a few cents to buy some.
3. He is lame, you say ; how did that happen to him ? He says he
was at the war and received a pistol shot in the leg.
4. What does the physician give to your cousin since he has been
sick ? He has given him some medicine (medicina), and says he must
take broth three times a day.
5. Do you like broth ? Yes, very well ; but not such poor broth as
they make for my consul.
6. How does that poor man make his living since he lost both his
arms? He can do nothing in the world, nnd lives on what little money
he gets from his brother, who is rather embarrassed himself just now.
LESSON XLV. 227
7. Come nearer to the fire, Louisa ; it is a little cold this morning.
Thank you, I do not feel the cold much ; but I would be obliged to you
if you would call Fanny in to warm herself; she is half dead with cold.
8. Is Henry going to be employed by that merchant to whom you
spoke for him some time ago ? Yes, I think it is probable, and I shall be
very glad, for the poor felloio* is a little embarrassed, and has been so
for a long time.
0. If I were in your place I would not allow that dog to howl so the
whole night over. My father will not let me speak about it to our neigh-
bor, who lives in that miserable old house next to ours ; it is his dog, and
lie ought not to let it howl in such a manner.
10. Just listen to him! as if I could not go and kill it with a blud-
geon. Kill it! There would be no necessity for killing it; just give
him one good blow with the bludgeon you talk of and he would let you
sleep in future.
11. Have you ever read Don Quixote? No; why? If you take the
trouble to read it you will find a very good anecdote of a madman (loco)
and a dog, in the first chapter of the second part of that justly celebra-
ted work.
12. Have you paid attention to what is said in to-day's lesson on aug-
mentatives and diminutives ? Yes, madam ; and it seems to me that the
proper use of them must make a language expressive and elegant in a
high degree (grado).
13. Is Concepcion a very common name for ladies in Spain? There
are a great many called by that name ; the diminutive is Concha.
14. Is your mother satisfied with her new servant? Very much so.
15. Why did she let the other one go away? She was very glad to
see her go away, because she used to steal everything that came to her
hand.
10. Is that coffee warm? Xo, sir; but I could warm it in a few
minutes, if you wished.
LESSON XLY.
[know.
Avisar. To advise, to notify, to let one
Admirar.
Aconsejar.
Apremiar.
To admire.
To counsel, to advise.
To urge, to compel one to do any
thing by order of court.
* Eemember that English words italicized are not to be translated.
228
LESSON XLV.
Afectar.
Oompadeoer.
Convertir.
Desertar.
Empeflar.
Explicar.
Fusilar.
Guardar.
Librar.
Mentir.
Mencionar.
Permanecer.
Eelatar.
Santificar.
Suceder.
Sonar.
Volar,
I Ah bah!
jToma!
Ancho.
Falso.
Calvo.
Famoso.
Notorio.
Ci-edulo,
Critico.
Formal,
Supersticioso.
Esceptico.
De todo corazon.
En su interior.
Ya caigo.
Bien venido.
A cual mas.
De buena fe.
Esto es.
Ya lo ve Y.
To feign, to affect.
To pity.
To convert.
To desert.
To pledge, to engage.
To explain.
To shoot.
To guard, to observe, to keep.
To free, to liberate, to deliver.
To lie.
To mention.
To remain.
To relate.
To sanctify.
To happen, to succeed.
To sound.
To fly.
Oh, pshaw 1
Indeed!
Wide, broad.
False.
Bald.
Famous.
Notorious, well known.
Credulous.
Critical.
Formal, straightforward.
Superstitious.
Skeptic, skeptical.
With all my heart.
In his mind.
I see (or understand).
Welcome.
Vieing" with each other.
In good faith.
That is.
So you see.
Sol.
Amor.
Sun.
Love.
Oracion.
Ticrra.
Prayer.
Earth, land.
LESSON X L V .
229
Cielo. Sky, heaven.
Calva.
Baldness, the bald
Reino. Kingdom.
part.
Fin. End, purpose.
Ana.
Ann.
Deudor. Debtor.
Voluntad.
Will, choice.
General. General.
Profecia.
Prophecy.
Cuervo. Raven, crow.
Fisonomia.
Physiognomy,
Agilero. Omen.
countenance.
Interior. Interior.
Tentacion.
Temptation.
Espiritu. Spirit.
Sinceridad.
Sincerity.
Lodo. Mud.
Injusticia.
Injustice.
El padre nuestro. The Lord's Prayer.
Ridiculez.
Ridicule.
Tren. Train.
Compasion.
Compassion.
Parroquiauo. Parishioner, customer.
Materia.
Matter.
Lector. Reader.
Fe.
Faith.
Bolsa.
Purse.
Excepcion.
Exception.
Frente.
Forehead.
Formalidad.
Formality.
COMPOSITION.
Dios te lo premie.
Si para fines de ano no hubiere pagado,
le apremias (or apremiale, or le apre-
miaras).
Si viene (or como venga) sera bien re-
cibido.
Quien tal diga miente.
Si asi lo haces, Dios te lo premie.
Si al salir de tu casa vicres volar cuer-
vos, dejalos volar y mira tu donde
pones los pies.
Todo hombre calvo no tendra pelo ; y
si tuviere alguno no sera en la calva.
I
Le perdonaran todo lo que hiciere.
Le escribire a V. lo que me dijere.
Si permaneciere aqui algun tiempo so lo
avisare.
Le escribire a V. lo que diga.
May God reward you for it.
If at the end of the year he has not
paid you, compel him to do so.
If he comes, he shall be well received.
Whoever says such a thing lies.
If you do so, may God reward you.
If on going out of your house you should
see crows fly, let them fly, and look
where you put your own feet.
Every bald man will be without hair ;
or if he should have anr, it will not
be on the bald part.
They will forgive him every thing he
may do.
I will write to you what he may (hap-
pen to) say to me.
If I should (or should I) remain here
any time, I will let you know.
I will write to you what he may say to
me.
230
LESSON X L V .
Le perdonarin lo quc haga.
Pi hubicre salido cuando Y. llegue.
Aunquc hubiere llcgado antes que rc-
ciba la carta.
Aunque haya llegado antes quc reciba
la carta.
El general mando que todos los que
desertaran fuesen fusilados.
El general mando que todos los que
hubieran desertado fuesen fusilados.
El general ha mandado que todos los
que desertaren scan fusilados.
El general ha mandado quc todos los
que hubieren desertado sean fusila-
dos.
Quien lo dijere miente.
Si viniere, sera bien recibido.
Si asi lo hicieres.
They will forgive him every tiling he
may do.
If he should have left v, r hen you arrive.
Although he may have arrived before
he receives the letter.
Although he may have arrived before
he receives the letter.
The general ordered that all those who
might (happen to) desert should be
shot.
The general ordered that all those who
might have deserted should be shot.
The general has ordered that all those
who may desert (i. e. may happen to
desert) should be shot.
The general has ordered that all those
who may have deserted be shot.
Whoever should say so will lie.
If he should come, he will be well re-
ceived.
If you should do so.
Le escribire a V. lo que me dijere.
Le perdonaran todo lo que hiciere.
Si permanecierc aqui algun tiempo se
lo avisare.
EXPLANATION.
219. THE FUTURE SIMPLE of the subjunctive mood repre-
sents a contingent action as to take place some time hence ; as,
I will write to you what he may
(happen to) say to me.
They will forgive him everything he
may do in future.
If I should (or should I) remain here
any tune I shall let you know.
220. THE PRESENT of the subjunctive may be substituted
for the foregoing tense, except when the verb is preceded by
the conditional si ; as, Le escribire a, V.lo que diga ; Le perdo-
naran lo que haga.
221. THE FUTURE COMPOUND, which is not so much used
as the simple, denotes a contingent action subordinate to a
future event ; as,
Si hubicre salido cuando V. llegue. If he should have left when you
LESSON X L V .
231
Aunquc hubicre llcgado antes quc
rcciba la carta.
Although he may have arrived before
he receives the letter.
222. THE COMPOUND PRESENT of the subjunctive may be
substituted for the above tense, except when the verb is pre-
ceded by the conditional si ; as, aunque haya llegado dntes que
reciba la carta.
223. In order that the imperfect and pluperfect of the sub-
junctive, which also express a future contingent action or
event, be not misapplied, as too frequently they are, and con-
founded with the future simple and compound future of the
same, mood, the following distinction must be attentively
observed :
1st. That the imperfect and pluperfect may be employed
when the actions or events expressed in the sentence are future
only in reference to some other time expressed, or merely im-
plied, in the sentence.
* 2d. That the future simple and compound future must be
used when the contingent action or event implied in the sen-
tence is future with regard to the action expressed by the
determining verbs ; as,
El general mando que todos los que
descrtaran fuesen fusilados.
El general mando que todos los que
hubieran dcsertado fuesen fusilados.
El general ha mandado que todos los
que dcsertaren scan fusilados.
El general ha mandado que todos los
que hubieren desertado sean fusi-
lados.
The general ordered that all those
who should (might happen to) de-
sert should be shot.
The general ordered that all those
who had (might have) deserted
should be shot.
The general has ordered that all those
who desert (i. e. may happen to
desert) shall be shot.
The general has ordered that all those
who have deserted shall be shot.
224. The future simple and the compound future of the
subjunctive also act as determining verbs ; but they govern the
subordinate verb only in the present or the future simple of the
indicative, and in the imperative ; as,
Quien lo dijere, mientc.
Si vinierc sera bien recibido.
Whoever should say so will lie.
If he should come, he shall be well
received.
232 LESSOR XLV.
If you do so, may God reward you
for it.
If at the end of the year he has not
paid you, compel him to do so.
Si asi lo Jiicicrcs. Dios te lo premie.
Si para fines dc aiio no hubicrcpaga-
do, le apremias, or apremiale, or
le apremiards.
These determining sentences of the future simple of the
subjunctive may be turned to the present indicative in certain
cases, and to the present subjunctive in others ; as,
Si viene, or como venga, sera bien re-
cibido.
Quien tal diga miente.
Si asi lo haccs, Dios te lo premie, etc.
If he comes, he shall be well re-
ceived.
Whoever says so lies.
If you do so, may God reward you
for it.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Don Jose, me han cliche que es mal agiiero al salir uno de su casa
vor volar cuervos ; j que piensa Y. sobre ello ? Yo pienso como Don
Francisco de Qucvedo.
2. i Y que es lo que pensaba ese famoso escritor sobre esta materia ?
Oiga Y. lo que 61 decia.
3. Si al salir de tu casa vieres volar cuervos, dejalos volar, y mira tu
donde pones los pies.
4. ; Ah ! ; bah j Quevedo era un criticon que no perdonaba nada,
pero alia en su interior quiza creia uu poquito como todo el mundo en
los agueros ; i no cree V. asi ? g Que si creia ? For supuesto que si. Vea
Y. aqui otro de los agueros en que creia.
5. Si vas a comprar algo, y al ir a pagar no hallares la holsa adonde
llevabas el dinero, es aguero malisimo, y no te sucedera bien la compra.
6. j Toma ! Esa es una verdad de Perogrullo, y ya veo que V. no
cree en los agueros pero al menos Y. creera en las profecias ; i no es ver-
dad, Don Jose? ;0! si, sefiora, mucho, sobre todo en las de Pero-
grnflo.
T. l Qu6 profecias son esas, que nunca las he oido ? Sefiora no podr6
relatarselas a Y. todas, pero le dire & V. algunas si Y. lo dosea.
8. Con mucho gusto, hagame Y. el favor. Pues bien, oiga Y. : " Si
lloviere habra lodos." "El que tuviere tendra."
9. j Ah ! ya caigo ; es por esto que se llama cnalquiera verdad qne es
muy notoria, verdad de Perogrullo. jVamos! aqui viene Don Enrique,
puede ser que el crea en algo, porque Y. no cree en nada.
10. A los pi^s de Y., Dona Anita. Beso a Y. la mano Don Enrique.
LESSON XLV. 233
11. A las ordenes de V., Don Jose. Bien vcnido, Don Enrique. Aqui
tienc V. a Doua Anita empefiada en liacerme supersticioeo.
12. Y V. es tambien cscdptico, no crce V. en sueflos, en espiritus, en
fisonomias, g eu que cree V., Don Enrique ? Yo, sefiorita, soy un Lombro
muy credulo, creo* en todo, creo hasta las mujeres.
13. Mil gracias, Don Enrique ; yo creia que la sinceridad estaba siempre
de parte de la mujer y no del hombre, pues son Yds. todos a cual mas
falso. Sefiorita, 6 V. nos hace una injusticia, 6 yo soy una excepcion ;
pero volviendo a lo de las creencias, confieso de buena fe que soy un poco
supersticioso. Me alegro mucho, de ese modo me ayudara V. a convertir
a Don Jos/5 que no cree en nada.
14. Perdone V., sefiorita, yo creo en una de las cosas quo V. ha men-
cionado, esto es, en las fisonomias. ; Bien, bien ! expliqueuos Y.,.ent6nces,
su significado.
15. El que tuviere la frente ancha teudra los ojos debajo de la frente,
y vivira todos los dias de su vida. ; Por Dios ! Don Jose, hable V. for-
malmente.
16. Pues bien, con toda formalidad. Todo hombre calvo no tendra
pelo, y si tuviere alguno no sera en la calva.
17. i Ya lo ve, V. ! se burla de todo, y no cree en nada, es un esceptico
complete. Defiendase Y., amigo Don Josd, 6 quiza es verdad que no
cree Y. en nada. Ent6nces le compadezco a Y. de todo corazon.
18. ; Hombre! dejeme Y. en paz, y guarde Y. su compasion para
todas esas pobres gentes que creen, 6 afectan creer, todas esa's ridiculeces ;
yo creo lo que veo ; creo lo que siento, y creo lo que mi razon me acon-
seja creer; por eso creo en el sol, en el amor, en Dios. ; Yamos! ahora
va a hacernos creer que es hombre muy religioso.
19. Sefior Don Jose, esta sefiorita y yo tenemos grandes descos de
aprender el Padre nuestro en espafiol ; g lo sabe Y. ? No solamente lo se,
- siuo que es una oracion que me gusta mucho.
20. i Quiere V. hacernos el favor de decirnosla ? Con mucho gusto,
hclo aqui.
21. "Padre nuestro, que estas en los cielos, santificado sea tu nombre,
venga a nos el tu reino. Hagase tu voluntad, asi en la tierra como en el
cielo. El pan nuestro de cada dia danosle hoy. Perdonanos nuestras
deudas, como nosotros perdonamos a nuestros deudorcs. Y no nos dejes
caer en tentacion. Y libranos de mal." Amen.
22. Mil gracias, Don Jose ; voy a aprenderlo de memoria porque me
suena muy bien en espafiol.
234 LESSON XLV.
EXERCISE.
1. At what o'clock does the sun rise at New York in the month of
September ? The sun rose here this morning at twenty-seven minutes
past five o'clock.
2. What did your teacher say to you to-day when your lessons were
finished? Nothing to me in particular; he spoke to all of us about
reading good hooks, as very necessary in order to acquire the love of
truth and sincerity in all our actions.
3. Here are the works of Francis de Quevedo ; have you ever read
them? Yes, very often; and I admire very much his profound knowl-
edge of the human heart.
4. He is also somewhat of a jester ; is he not? Yes, but for a very
wise end ; he shows all the ridicule of the belief in auguries, omens for
instance, the flight (vuelo) of crows, &c.
5. "What do you think of his prophecies ? The only end of his
prophecies seem to be to divert his readers, telling them that all bald
persons will have no hair, or if they should have any, it will not be on
the bald place.
G. Do you know what the general has ordered ? lie has given orders
that all the soldiers that desert shall be shot.
7. Do you pity that poor soldier who is to be shot ? I did not know
there was one to be shot ; what crime did he commit ? He deserted.
8. What will they do to that robber if they find him ? He will be shot.
9. Do you not think he deserves to be shot? There can be no doubt
of it : he who kills a man must die by the hand of man.
10. Arc there still superstitious people in the world ? Yes, a very
great many ; and I must say, that, even amongst the learned, we find a
great number whose education should lead* us to have a higher opinion
of them.
11. Has that gentleman paid you yet the money he owed you such a
long time ? Not yet ; indeed I begin to fear he will never pay me.
12. If he should not pay you before he leaves the country, compel him
to do so. So I intend to do.
13. How long does your father intend to remain in Germany ? Perhaps
two or three months ; but should he remain longer, he will write for me
to go to him.
14. Welcome, Mr. Martinez ! how long have you been in town ? Only
a few days ; and I shall return home as soon as I hear from my brother.
15. What a fine forehead that young lady has ! I have never seen
such a beautiful countenance, with the exception of that of a lady whom
I met in Spain a few years ago.
* Deberia hacernos.
LESSON XLVI.
235
LESSON XLVI.
Adivinar.
Acordar.
Acordarse.
Colocar.
Meter.
Peinar.
Picar.
Persist! r.
Romper.
Coger.
Esconder.
To guess.
To agree, to tune.
To recollect, to remember.
To lay, to place.
To put, to make (noise).
To comb.
To prick, to chop, to hash.
To persist.
To break.
To take, to catch.
To hide, to conceal.
INTERJECTIONS.
jAy! Ay!
I Zape ! Heaven preserve
; Ea ! Cheer up ! come,
us !
come !
; Victoria ! Victory !
I Eh I Oh! ah!
i Como ! How !
jHuy! Whew!
; Anda ! Go ! go away !
;Ox! Get you gone !
; Calle ! Strange !
jSus! Come! come!
j Chito (or chi- Hush !
i Uf (or huf ) ! Ugh !
ton)!
jllola! Halloa!
; Diantre ! The deuce !
jTatc! Take care!
( Look out !
jCa! Pshaw!
i Cmdado i T i t r t
(Take care! [us!
; Viva ! Hurrah !
; Dios nos libre ! Heaven preserve
I Dale ! Go 1
; Vamos ! Come !
; Que horror ! O horror !
jVuelta! Turn about (or
round) !
Finalmente.
Finally.
Llevar a cabo.
To accomplish.
Llevarse chasco.
To be disappointed.
Cabal.
Just, exact.
Fresco.
Cool, fresh.
Listo.
Ready, quick.
Restante.
Remaining, remainder.
Telegrafico.
Telegraphic.
Extraordinario.
Extraordinary.
Dichoso.
Happy.
236
LESSON XLVI.
Aire.
Air.
Camisa.
Shirt, chemise.
Cambio.
Change.
Cuenta.
Account.
Alliler.
Pin.
Empresa.
Enterprise.
Atlantico.
Atlantic.
Cualidad.
Quality.
Exito.
Issue.
Austria.
Austria.
Buen exito.
Success.
Palangana.
Wash-basin, wash-
Cable.
Cable.
bowl.
Peine.
Comb.
Prusia.
Prussia.
Presidente.
President.
Procesion.
Procession.
Euido.
Noise.
Constancia.
Constancy.
Chasco.
Disappointment.
Prueba.
Proof, trial.
Patio.
Yard, pit (theatre).
Tranquilidad.
Tranquillity.
Tratado.
Treaty, treatise.
Victoria.
Victory.
Dolor.
Pain, grief.
Gaceta.
Gazette, news-
Asombro.
Amazement.
paper.
Maullido.
Mewing.
Gato.
Cat.
COMPOSITION.
i Ala ! que desgracia !
; Ay de mi !
i Oh ! dolor !
jAh! bribon!
; Ah ! que alegrla I
\ Oh ! asombro !
; Ay, si le cojo !
j Oh ! ya nos veremos !
i Bah ! no hables de esa inancra !
; Huy ! me queme con el cigarrillo !
i T7f ! que calorazo !
; Ea, a trabajar !
j Tate ! tate ! no pase V. por ahi, que
veo un hombre escondido !
; Zape ! ese gatazo no me deja dormir
con sus maullidos !
; Toma ! toma ! eso ya lo sabia yo.
; Yiva la libertad !
; Diantre de muchachos ! y que ruido
meten !
; Hola ! D. Francisco ! dichosos los
ojos que lo ven a V !
Ah ! how unfortunate !
Woe is me !
Ah ! how sad !
Ha ! rascal !
Ah ! what joy !
Oh ! wonder !
Let me get hold of him !
Oh ! I shall see you again !
Phsaw ! don't talk that way !
Whew ! I hare burned myself with the
cigarette !
Oh ! how warm it is !
Come to work !
Take care ! don't go that way ; I see a
man hiding !
Heaven preserve us ! that confounded cat
will not let me sleep with its mewing !
That's all, eh ! I knew that much myself.
Hurrah for liberty !
Did you ever hear such children ? what
a noise they make !
Halloa ! Mr. Francis ! it is good for
sore eyes to sec you !
LESSON XLVI.
237
,5 Quo me se yo ?
La cucnta esta cabal.
Espcro no llevanno chasco, y quo lle-
vare a cabo mi empresa.
How can I tell ?
The account is exact (correct).
I hope not to be disappointed, and that
I shall carry out my undertaking.
EXPLANATION.
225. INTERJECTIONS are words which serve to express the
different emotions and affections of the soul. There should be a
separate interjection to express each passion or emotion ; but this
not being the case, we often use the same ones to express joy,
grief, affright, astonishment, mockery, anger, &c., the significa-
tion of each interjection changing according to the voice, ges-
ture and manner of the speaker.
The exclamations that are properly called interjections in
Spanish, inasmuch as they have no other use, and because they
consist of only one word, are the following : Ah, ay, bah, ca,
eh, huy, oh, ox, sus, itf, ca, hola, ojald, tate, zape, and a few others.
Ah, ay and 6 are used indifferently to express pain, joy,
mockery, surprise, scorn, anger, or admiration ; as,
/ Ah ! que desgracia ! Ah ! what misfortune !
/ Ay de mi !
/ Oh ! dolor !
/ Ah ! bribon !
/ Ah ! que alegria !
/ Oh t asombro !
/ Ah ! que necio !
/ Ay si le cojo !
/ Oh ! ya nos veremos ! etc., etc.
Woe is me !
Ah ! how sad !
Ha ! rascal !
Oh ! what joy !
Oh ! wonder !
Ah ! what a fool !
Let me get hold of him !
Oh ! I shall see you again !
226. / J3ah ! expresses displeasure, and sometimes wonder
and admiration. / He ! besides being used to attract the atten-
tion, is often employed in the sense of alas ! / Sus f serves
only to encourage. / Huy ! is an exclamation expressive of
pain. / Ea! serves to encourage, and sometimes to call the at-
tention. We use j hola ! to call our inferiors, and intimate
friends, and to manifest joy and surprise. / Tate ! expresses
surprise, and serves to warn any one of some danger. / Ojald!
serves to manifest ardent desire for something.
238 LESSON XLVI.
CONVERSATION AND VERSIONS
1. ;Ea! ca! muchachos, arriba! que ya es bora cle levantarse.
$Pues que bora es, papa ? Ya son las seis y quiero que os vistais, luvc-is
y tomeis el cafe prontito, para ir a tomar el aire fresco de la mafiana en
la plaza de Madison.
2. ; Sus ! arriba ! y el que se me presente primero listo ira a comprar-
me el Heraldo y tcndra el centavo del cambio. Helena, ponme agua
para lavarme. Xo, Helena, no ayudes a Alejandro que ese ya puede ves-
tirse solo, ayuda a Carlotita y a Manolito.
3. Luisa, dame mis zapatos y mis medias. Biiscalos tii mismo, yo no
voy a ayudarte para que te vistas antes que yo.
4. ; Cuidado ! no veis que vais a romper esa palangana ? Es este
Manuel que todavia no se ba puesto mas que una media y un zapato y se
quiere lavar antes que yo, que me he puesto ya la camisa, los zapatos y
el pantalon.
5. j Ay ! ay ! ^Que es eso, Luisa? Me be picado con el alfiler que
estaba ponieudo en mi vestido.
6. i En donde esta el jabon ? Que me s6 yo.
V. i Carlota, me quieres dar el peine, 6 te vas a estar peinando todo el
dia ? Dejame en paz, abora acabo de principiar.
8. Mama, mire V. que Alejandro no me deja ayudar a vestir a Manuel.
I Mama, en donde esta mi sombrero ?
9. Papa, ya estoy listo, deme V. el dinero para comprar el Heraldo.
No, no, papa ; mire V. que se ha puesto el sombrero sin peinarse.
10. j Corno ! eso no, Alejandro, no se sale a la calle sin peinarse. Pap:i,
ya estoy listo. Y yo. Y yo.
11. jChiton! ; Diantre de muchachos y que rraido meten ! Aqui to-
neis diez centavos, cuatro para el Heraldo y de los seis restantes uno para
cada uno, cuenta cabal, metrneis el Heraldo y despues os vais a la plaza y
no volvais, a lo mcnos en un par de boras.
12. Margarita, abora que tenemos tranquilidad traeme la pipa, antes de
ponerme a escribir, fumare un poco y leere las noticias en el patio al fresco.
13. Hola ! grandes noticias ! ^ Que hay de nuevo ? El Great Eastern
ha llegado, y se dice que el gran cable telegrafico ha sido finalmente colo-
cado, uuiendo asi la Europa y la America.
14. j Es posible! entonces pronto tendremos noticias todos los dias de
Europa. Asi lo espero, pero no debemos estar muy seguros de ello, por-
que ya te acordariis del chasco que llevamos afios pasados.
15. j Ah! si, ya me acuerdo; en 1858, cuando se celebro el esito del
cable telegrafico con aquella grande procesion, y se vendia por la calle la
gaceta extraordinaria con el parte telegrafico de la Eeina Victoria al
LESSON XLVI. 239
Prcsidento dc los Estados Unidos. Espero que no nos llevemos alrora el
mismo cliasco.
1C. j ; La extraordinaria ! ! ; j La gaceta cxtraordinaria ! ! ; Eh ! mucha-
cho, aqui, aqui.
17. $ Cuanto vale ? Dicz centavos.
18. i Victoria! Viva! Viva! ^Que dice de nuevo? El cable del
Atlantico ha tenido bucn exito, el primer parte recibido por el es el trata-
do de paz entre el Austria y la Prusia.
19. Esta es ima prueba mas de lo que puede llevar a cabo el hombre,
si tiene constancia y persiste en una empresa. ^Cree V. que yo tambien
tendre buen exito en mi empresa ?
20. i Que empresa es esa ? j Como ! no la adivina V. ? La empresa
de aprcnder el espafiol.
21. jAh! N"o dudo que V. hablara espatlol si persiste y tiene cons-
tancia ; puesto que con estas cualidades se ha logrado que liable el cable
del Atlantico.
EXERCISE.
1. Can you tell me "what kind of weather we will have to-morrow?
Oh, what a question ! Do you suppose that I can guess the weather we
will have before it comes ?
2. Did the pianist say he would come to tune the piano ? lie said he
would come to-morrow, but that he could not come to-day.
3. Have you seen that the Atlantic telegraph cable is laid at last?
Yes; I am glad to see that the undertaking has been so successful.
4. Do you know who sent the first dispatch by the cable ? I am not
sure ; but I remember that the first, at the time of the former cable, in
1858, was that sent by the President of the United States to the Queen
of England.
5. What was the reason of laying a second cable ? Ah, come now !
do you not know that the first one, having broken shortly after it had
been laid, became entirely useless (inutil) ?
6. Have you seen the news to-day by Atlantic telegraph ? N"o ; what
is the news ? That a treaty of peace has been signed (celebrar) between
Prussia and Austria.
7. Charles, go and find the comb, wherever you put it when you had
done with it. I have not seen it since Henry was using it; and even if
I had, I would not tell you where it was.
8. Ah, you little rogue ! there, you have broken the wash-basin. It
is not my fault, Henry wanted it first, and I had already commenced to
wash myself; but he persisted and would take it from me.*
9. horror ! just look at the state his hair (pclo) is in ! Go this
" Pcrsistio en qnitarmela.
240 LESSON XL VI.
instant and get the comb and comb your bair before you dare to appear
before me.
10. Have you a pin to give me? Yes, here is a paper of pins; take
all you want and give me back the rest.
11. Did you know your lessons well this morning? Yes, very well,
and the proof is that papa allowed me to go to see the procession.
12. What did you kill that poor little fly for ? Have I not told you
many times that I don't wish you to catch or kill flies ?
13. Is that bread fresh ? Yes, sir, the baker has just brought it a few
minutes ago.
14. We were to have gone to the yard to play at twelve o'clock. You
may go now ; but do not make much noise.
15. Where were you going when I met you ? We were coming home
to dine.
16. Has the shoemaker sent you his bill ? Yes, but it is not correct.
17. Has not your uncle written to you since he went away? He has
sent several telegraphic dispatches to my father on business; but he has
not written to us once (una sola vez).
18. Is there not to be a new opera to-night? Xo; but I understand
there is to be a new play (comedia) at the theatre.
19. That is nothing extraordinary ; there are new pieces very often now.
20. If Louisa were a little taller would she not be handsomer than
Jane ? She would at least be quite as handsome.
21. Would you wish to have the window opened? I think it would
be much cooler if it were open.
22. Would you not like me to repeat to you that story I told you the
other day ? If you had time I should be much obliged to you to tell it
to me once more.
23. Would not quietness be much better for that gentleman than so
much noise ? He could not live without noise.
24. Might you not have broken your arm or your leg when you fell
out of your carriage ? Yes, if I had not taken care.
25. If I had wanted money when I was in the country would you not
have brought me some ? If I could have got (conseguir) itJE would.
26. Would your aunt not have been disappointed if she had not been
in time to take the three o'clock train ? She would have been terribly
disappointed, for she was going to spend the day at a friend's, about ten
miles out of town.
LESSON XL VII.
241
LESSON XLVII.
Acompafiar.
To accompany.
Cargar.
To load, to charge.
Curar.
To cure, to attend (as a physician).
Danar.
To injure, to damage.
Delcitar.
To delight.
Incomodar.
To incommode.
Incomodarse.
To get out of temper.
Equivocar.
To mistake.
Evitar.
To avoid, to shun.
Instruir.
To instruct.
Ocupar.
To occupy.
Padecer.
To suffer.
Solicitar.
To solicit, to apply for, to urge.
Dimes y diretes.
Ifs and ands.
El no se qu6.
An inexplicable something.
Dolor de cabeza.
Headache.
Masculino.
Masculine.
Amable.
Amiable.
Agradable.
Agreeable.
Extrangero.
Foreign, foreigner.
Interesante.
Interesting.
Moribundo.
Dying.
Valicnte.
Valiant, arrant.
Femenino.
Feminine.
Acento. Accent.
Alma. Soul.
Bolsillo. Purse.
Comedia. Comedy.
Autor. Author.
Vara. Rod, yard (meas-
Esfuerzo. Effort, bravery.
ure).
Efecto. Effect. [ness.
Libra. Pound.
Fastidio. Unease, uneasi-
Manteca, or Butter.
Ciudadano. Citizen.
Mantequilla.
Hospital. Hospital.
Calidad. Quality.
M6todo. Method.
Cantidad. Quantity.
Trabajo. Labor, work.
Napoles. Naples.
Real. Real.
Sonido. Sound.
Chelin. Shilling,
11
242
LESSOR XL VII.
COMPOSITION.
El porqu6 de todas las cosas.
Los ayes del moribundo.
Los dimes y diretes.
El cuando.
El no se que.
El tener amigos no dafia.
Hay hombres de un saber extraordi-
nario.
Un nada le incomoda.
La constancia y el trabajo son necesa-
rios al hombre en todas sus empresas.
La Amdrica es mayor que la Europa.
La Francia es una nacion muy poblada.
El clima de Espafia.
Los esfuerzos de la Espafia.
Cuatro pesos la vara.
Dos reales la libra.
Treinta centavos la docena.
Dos reces al dia.
Cuatro pesos por vara.
La fe, la esperanza y la caridad.
El Sefior De Targas tiene tres niuos.
La Sefiora Martinez es muy prudente.
Ella me dio la mano.
Puso la mano ea el bolsillo.
Muchos caballeros solicitaron mi mano.
El caballero a quien vio V. aver en mi
casa.
The why and the wherefore of all
things.
The groans of the dying.
The ifs and ands.
The time.
I know not what.
It is hurtful to no one to have friends.
There are men of extraordinary knowl-
edge.
A mere nothing incommodes him.
Constancy and labor are necessary to
mankind in all their enterprises (or
undertakings).
America is larger than Europe.
France is a very populous nation.
The climate of Spain.
The bravery of Spain.
Four dollars a yard.
Two reals a pound.
Thirty cents a dozen.
Twice a day.
Four dollars a yard.
Faith, hope and charity.
Mr. Targas has three children.
Mrs. Martinez is very prudent.
She shook hands with me.
He put his hand hi his pocket.
Many gentlemen have solicited my
hand.
The gentleman whom you saw yesterday
in my house.
EXPLANATION.
227. USE OF THE AETICLE. All or any of the parts of
speech, and sometimes even whole sentences, may be used as
nouns, ^id as such admit the article, as has just been observed
in the COMPOSITION of the present lesson, in which we see exam-
ples of verbs, adverbs and interjections preceded by the article,
and treated in every respect as nouns substantive.
228. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE is to be used before all com-
LESSON XLVII.
243
mon nouns, taken in a general sense and in the full extent of
their signification ; as,
Constancy and labor are necessary to
mankind in all undertakings.
La. constancia y el trabajo son necesa-
rios al hombre en todas sus empresas.
229. The article is expressed before the names of the four
parts of the globe : before the names of empires, kingdoms,
provinces and countries ; and before the four seasons of the
year; as,
La America es mayor que la Europa.
La Francia es una riacion muy po-
blada.
El invierno en d Sur es mas agradable The winter in the South is more agree-
que el verano. able than the summer.
But it is omitted before the names of kingdoms, provinces,
&c., when they are preceded by a preposition ; unless they bo
personified, as has been observed in Lesson XXX. ; as.
America is larger than Europe.'
France is a very populous nation.
El clima de Espana.
Los esfuerzos de la Espana.
The climate of Spain.
The bravery of Spain.
Cuatro pesos la vara.
Dos reales la libra.
Trcinta ccntavos la doccna.
Dos veccs al dia.
Kingdoms bearing the same name as their capitals do not
admit the article ; as, Napoles, Naples.
230. Nouns of measure, weight, &c., when preceded by
the indefinite article in English, as an equivalent to each, re-
quire the article ; as,
Four dollars a yard.
Two reals a pound.
Thirty cents a dozen.
Twice a day.
If the preposition por be used, we omit the article ; as,
cuatro pesos por vara, &c.
231. The article is generally repeated before every noun
enumerated, especially if they differ in gender ; as,
La fe, la esperanza y la caridad.
Los dias y las noches.
232. The definite article is used before nouns indicating
rank, office, profession or titles of persons, when these are spoken
of, but not when spoken to ; as,
Faith, hope and charity.
The davs and nights.
El General Sheridan cs valicutc.
El Sciior De Vargas tiene tres ninos.
La Scnora, Martinez, ft muy prudente.
General Sheridan is brave.
Mr. De Vargas has three children.
Mrs. Martinez is very prudent.
244 LESSON XL VII.
233. The definite article is used instead of the possessive ad-
jective when the possessives refer to parts of our own body ; as,
Me be cortado la majio.
Me duele la cabcza.
I have cut my hand.
My head aches.
This applies even to parts of the body of other persons ; as,
Ella me dio la mano.
Puso la mano en el bolsillo.
She gave me her hand (or shook handa
with me).
He put his hand in his pocket.
But the pronoun must be used when the personal article would
occasion ambiguity ; as,
Muchos caballeros solid taron mi mano. | Many gentlemen solicited my hand.
234. The definite article is also employed, as in English,
before nouns taken in & particular or definite sense ; as,
El caballero a quien vio V. ayer en mi The gentleman whom you saw yester-
casa. day in my house.
We forbear from adding many more rules which we might
give, if they were not subject to numerous exceptions, and,
especially, if we were not of opinion that practice and reading
will teach better than any rules when to employ and when
to omit the article.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Ctial de las partes del mundo es la mayor ? El Asia es la mayor.
2. $ Es Asia nombre masculine ? No, sefior, es femenino.
3. Entonces, i porque le pone V. el articulo masculine ? For evitar
cl mal sonido que resuharia de poner dos aes juntas.
4. i Lucgo, Y. pone siempre el articulo inasculino delante de todo
nombre femenino que empieza pora? No, sefior; esto solo sucede en
singular, y ctiando sobrc dicha vocal carga el acento de la palabra.
5. ills, leido V. el "Si de las nifias" de Moratin? Si, sefior, lo lei
hace muchos afios; pero d mi me gusta mas la "Comedia nneva"del
niismo antor.
6. $Qu6 tal le gusta a V. su nueva veoinita? Dicen que es muy
bonita. En efecto lo es ; pero d mi no me gusta, porque anda siempre en
dimes y diretes, y un nada la incomoda.
V. ^Cuules son las virtudes del alma? La fe, la esperanza y la ca-
ridad.
8. ^Tiene V. alguna cosa interesante que decirme hoy? Muchisimas
LESSON XLVII. 245
interesantisrmas <!> importantisimas para practicar y aprendor cl
espanol.
9. j Uf ! ya va V. ti principiar con sus adverbios, prcposiciones j arti-
culos ; va V. a dccirmc, por supuesto, que estas partes de la oracion unas
voces so ponen antes las unas que las otras, y vice versa ; que las unas
gobiernan a las otras y las gobernadas gobiernan a su vez a otras, que
se acuerden 6 no entre si. I Cree V. que todo eso sera interesante para
mi con el fastidio que tengo, y el dolor de cabeza que padezco ? j Calle !
entonccs, caballerito, V. ha equivocado la casa.
10. i Que quiere V. decir con eso de equivocar la casa ? Quiero decir
que, en lugar de venir a la clase, debio V. ir boy al hospital y de alii al
teatro.
11. g Para que ? Para que le curasen en una parte de sus dolores y en
la otra del fastidio.
12. Si; pero, Sefior Profesor, yo siempre creia que el mejor metodo de
cnsefianza es aquel que "instruye deleitando." V. tiene mil razoncs,
pero ha olvidado una pequefla circunstancia que requiere su metodo.
13. i Y cual es esa circunstancia ? Que no puede aplicarse sino con
aquellos discipulos que se deleitan aprendiendo.
14. Y ahora volviendo al articulo. Sefior Profesor, V. me escusara,
pero no volvarnos al articulo porque no puedo quedarme mas aqui hoy.
15. ^Coiuo es eso? el tiempo de la leccion no ha acabado todavia.
V. tiene razon ; pero hoy es necesario que me vaya temprano, porque he
prometido acompafiar a unas sefioritas a la opera.
16. ;Oh! entonces es necesario no faltar a su palabra. Seflor Pro-
fesor, buenas noches (este buen sefior me fastidia con sus explicaciones).
Diviertase V. mucho, Sefior Don Pepito (este amable joven aprendera
espanol, para el tiempo que yo compre una casa en la Quinta Avenida,
ensefiandolo).
EXERCISE.
1. If I should come for you this evening, would you come with me
to see the Martinez ? I would, with great pleasure, if Charlotte would
accompany us.
2. How does that lady speak French ? They say she speaks very
correctly, though with a slightly foreign accent.
3. Might he not be cured if he called in a good physician ? He is of
opinion that physicians do more injury than good to mankind.
4. Do you know any thing of the author of that play ? Yes, I have
read (or heard) all his plays ; they are very interesting, and delighted
me exceedingly.
5. What is death ? The separation of soul and body.
246 LESSON XLVII.
G. Can one be a citizen of tbc United States without having been
born (naccr) in the country ? Yes, after baving resided in the United
States a certain number of years any one may become a citizen.
7. Where is that poor man going? To the hospital; he has broken
his leg.
8. Pardon me, I think you are mistaken ; it is rather his arm that is
broken, for if his leg were broken he could not walk.
9. Do you remember the name of the principal city of Naples? Yes.
the name of the principal city is that of the kingdom also.
10. Did you shake hands with that young lady ? Yes, as soon as she
saw me she came towards me and gave me her hand.
11. Is that cloth (pafld) sold very high? Xot very; it costs only
three dollars a yard.
12. How often do you take your Spanish lessons ? Twice a week.
13. Would you not learn faster if you took a lesson every other day
(im dia si y otro no) ? My teacher says I would ; but I have not time to
take lessons so often.
14. Would you like summer to return again ? Xo, thank you, I am
glad it is past, for I assure you I have suffered enough with the L
15. How sad it is on the field of battle (campo de latalla) to hear the
groans of the dying! Yes; and, notwithstanding, men will persist in
killing each other for a foot * of ground (terrcno).
16. How is butter sold a pound? Thirty cents for one kind, and forty
cents a pound for the best.
IT. Do you think it can injure any one to have friends? Xo, it can
injure nobody to have friends.
18. Is not that person very amiable and agreeable? Very rarely, for
a mere nothing incommodes him.
19. Are there many learned men in that country? There have been
and there are at present men of extraordinary learning.
20. Which are the three principal virtues? Faith, hope and charily.
21. Is Miss Cabargas married yet? Xot yet, although a large number
of gentleman have solicited her hand.
22. I suppose you have all read some Spanish comedies? Several
Spanish and some French comedies, by the best dramatists.
23. Which of all the French comedies that you have read do you like
best ? Those of MoliC-re.
* Palmo (literally a span).
LESSON XL.VIII.
247
LESSON XLVIII.
Aflrmar.
Afligir.
Admitir.
Atrcverse.
Criticar.
Condescended
Convencer.
Declarar.
Depender.
Disponer.
Diferenciar.
Edificar.
Entretenerse.
Fabricar.
Suponer.
Nombrar.
Influir.
Ocultar.
Observar.
Obedecer.
Proporcionar.
Pretender.
Publicar.
Quejarse.
Kegularizar.
Keflexionar.
Eidiculizar.
Reformar.
Lo que s6 decir.
Sin que V. me lo diga.
Volver a las andadas.
Para mi ten go.
A trucque.
Sin embargo.
Candidamente.
De modo.
To affirm.
To afflict.
To admit, to accept.
To dare.
To criticise.
To condescend, to consent.
To convince.
To declare.
To depend.
To dispose, to arrange.
To differ.
To edify, to build.
To amuse.
To construct, to make, to build.
To suppose.
To name, to appoint.
To influence, to affect.
To conceal, to bide.
To observe.
To obey.
To proportion, to procure, to
offer, to afford.
To pretend, to lay claim to, to
aspire to, to sue for.
To publish.
To complain, to moan.
To regulate.
To reflect.
To ridicule.
To reform.
"What I know.
Without you telling me.
To do so again, to return to
(one's) old habits.
It is my opinion.
On condition.
Nevertheless, notwithstandin g.
Candidly.
In such a manner, that, so that.
48 LESSON XLVIII.
I Bravo !
Very good !
Bravo !
Bruto. Brutish.
Cierto.
Certain.
Aereo.
Airy, aerial.
Angelical.
Angelical.
Ideal.
Ideal.
Interior.
Interior.
Incomplete,
Incomplete.
Imperfecto.
Imperfect.
Exterior.
Exterior.
Extrafio.
Strange.
Igual.
Equal, the same.
Humano.
Humane.
Positive.
Positive.
Eeal.
Real, royal.
Arquitecto. Architect.
Carrcra.
Career.
Anciauo. Old man.
Desgracia.
Misfortune.
Ciego. Blind.
Diferencia.
Difference.
Cal y canto. Stone.
Curiosidad.
Curiosity.
Bruto. . Brute.
Exageracion.
Exaggeration.
Idiota. Idiot.
Franqueza.
Frankness.
Espacio. Space.
Juventud.
Youth.
Complemento. Complement.
Ilusion.
Illusion.
Goce. Enjoyment.
Felicidad.
Happiness.
Mai. Evil.
Risa.
Laugh, laughter.
Material. Material.
Realidad.
Reality.
Objeto. Object.
Ruindad.
Meanness.
Palacio. Palace.
Riquezas.
Riches.
Pajaro. Bird.
Enfermo. Sick.
Prisionero. Prisoner.
Pensamiento. Thought.
Castillos en el Castles in the air.
aire.
COMPOSITION.
Adivino el motive por el cual nos ha-
bian adulado los mismos que dcs-
pues nos critican, criticaban, critiea-
ron, ban criticado, criticaran.
Leiamos una noticia que acababa (or
acaba) do publicarse.
I guess the motive for which those same
persons 'who had flattered us before,
criticise, did criticise, criticised, have
criticised, will criticise us afterward.
We were reading some news just pub-
lished (that hail just been published,
or has just beon published).
LESSON XL VIII.
249
Contaba la dcsgracia quc los afligio.
No sere yo el primero que so atreva.
Aprended vosotros, los que os quejai*,
quejabais, qucjasteis, habeis quejado,
quejareis.
l5l quiere jugar.
Nosotros queremos cstudiar.
El bubo de condesccnder.
Tengo que callar.
Ello3 deben cstar muy ocupados.
Quiero (or pienso) salir.
Afirmo (or declare) que saldre.
Digo que saldre.
Es util estudiar las lenguas.
Conviene a los hombres instruirse.
El estudio de las lenguas es util.
La instruccion conviene a los hombres.
Conviene que yo estudie.
Es util que los hombres se instruyan.
Les mando callar. )
Les mando que callasen. J
Impedir que se cometaa injusticias es el
objeto de las leyes.
Deseo que me comprendas.
No lograras que le castiguen.
Se le ayudara si fuere necesario.
He scntido que no se convenza (con-
venciera or convenciese).
Habra llamado para que le abran (abrie-
ran or abriesen) la puerta.
Creo que le convencere facilmente.
Reflexionare lo que he de hacer.
Pense que iba a matarla.
Pense que enviara (or enviaria) la carta.
He was telling the misfortune that afflict-
ed them.
I shall not be the first to dare.
Know, you who complain, were com-
plaining, complained, had complained,
will complain.
He will (is determined to) play.
We will study.
He had to consent.
I have to be silent.
They must be very busy.
I wish (or intend to) go out.
I affirm (or declare) that I shall go out.
I say that I shall go out.
It is useful to study languages.
It is man's interest to acquire knowl-
edge.
The study of languages is useful.
Knowledge is useful to man.
It is my interest to study.
It is useful to mankind to possess
knowledge.
He ordered them to be silent.
To prevent the commission of injustice,
such is the object of laws.
I wish you to understand me.
You will not succeed in having him
punished.
He shall have help if it be necessary.
I was sorry he would not be convinced
(or was not convinced.)
He knocked, of course, in order that
the door may (or might) be opened.
I think I shall convince him easily.
I shall reflect on what I shall do.
I thought he was going to kill her.
I thought he would send the letter.
EXPLANATION.
235. CORKESPOXDEXCE OF THE TEXSES TFITH EACH OTHER.
When one verb is connected with another by a relative, there
are many combinations in which the determining and the de-
ll*
250
LESSON XLVIII.
termined verbs may be found; both may be in the indicative
or in the subjunctive mood, or one in the indicative and tho
other in the subjunctive ; but both cannot be in the infinitive
or in the imperative ; as,
Adivino el motive por cl cual DOS ha-
bian adulado los mismos quc nos
crilican, crilicaban, critlcaron, Jian
crilicado, criticardn.
Lciamos una noticia qus acababa (or
acabd) de publicarse.
Contaba la desgracia que lost afligid.
No sere yo el priinero que se atreva.
Aprended vosotros los que os qwyais,
quejabais, qucjaslcis, habeis qurjado,
qucjarcis.
I guess the motive for which those same
persons who have flattered us before,
criticise, did criticise, criticised, have
criticised, will criticise us afterward.
Vi'e were reading some news that l;u 1
(or has) just been published.
He was telling the misfortune that
afflicted them.
I shall not be the first to dare.
Learn, you who complain, were com-
plaining, complained, had complained,
wiil complain.
236. The determined verb is put in the infinitive whenever
it has the same subject as the determining verb ; as,
El quiere jugar.
Nosotros queremos csiudiar.
lie wishes to play.
"We wish to study.
This is the reason why the auxiliaries hdber de, tener que,
deber, always require the governed verb in the infinitive, be-
cause the subject, or nominative, is the same for both verbs ; as,
El hubo de condcsccnder.
Tengo que collar.
Ellos deben cstar may ocupado3.
He had to consent.
I have to be silent.
They must be very
An exception to this rule occurs when the determining verb
expresses a firm and decided affirmation ; and so we say:
Quiero (or pienso) sa'ir.
Afirmo (declaro) que saldre.
I wish (or intend) to go out.
I affirm (or declare) that I shall go out.
We must also except the verb decir, which cannot govern
another verb in the infinitive, because whenever we employ it
to announce our own actions it is not with the purpose of re-
lating them, but to manifest our resolution to execute them ; as,
Digo que saldre. \ I say I shall go out.
237. When the determining verb is scr, or any imperson-
LESSON XLVIII.
251
al verb, and the governed verb has no subject, the latter is
placed iu the infinitive ; as,
Es util estudiar las lenguas. It is useful to study languages.
Conviene a los hombres instruirse. It is the interest of mankind to acquire
knowledge.
And such is the natural construction, because the true sub-
ject of this proposition is the very infinitive itself, which stands
there as a noun, an office that cannot be performed by the
other moods. The above sentences are equivalent to these :
El csludlo de las lenguas es util.
La instruction conviene a, los hombres.
The study of languages is useful.
It is the interest of mankind to acquire
knowledge.
238. But if the determined verb also has a nominative, then
it must be placed in the subjunctive ; as,
Convienc quo yo estudie. It is my interest to study.
Es util que los hombres se inslruyan. It is useful to mankind to possess
knowledge.
Those verbs that express command, govern either of the
two forms, since we say equally well :
Les mando collar.
Lcs mando que callascn.
239. When the determining verb is in the infinitive, in
the present or future of the indicative, or in the imperative,
connected with the governed verb by a conjunction, this latter
verb is put in the subjunctive mood, ordinarily in the present
or in the future ; as,
,1
He ordered them to be silent.
Impedir quo so cometan injusticias es el
objeto dc las leyes.
Deseo que me comprendas.
Xo logrards que le casliyucn.
Se le ayudard si fuere nccesario.
To prevent the commission of injustice,
such is the object of the laws.
I wish you to understand me.
You will not succeed in having him
punished.
He will have help if it be necessary.
240. The preterit indefinite and compound future of the
indicative govern the determined verb in the present or imper-
fect of the subjunctive ; as,
He sentido que no se convenza (conven- I was sorry he should not be (or was
ciera or convenciese). not) convinced.
Habra llamado para que le abran He knocked, of course, in order that
(abrieraa or abriescn) la puerta. &e door may (or might) be opened.
252 LESSON XLVIII.
241. "When the determining verb is in the indicative, it gen-
erally governs the determined one in the same mood, if the
nominative is the same for both verbs ; as,
Oreo que le convencere facilmente, I I think I shall convince bini easily.
Eeflexionare lo que he de hacer. | I shall reflect on what I have to do.
But if each verb has a different nominative, the second
verb may be placed in the indicative or in the subjunctive ; as,
I thought he was going to kill her.
I thought he would send me the letter.
Pense que iba a matarla.
Pens'e que me enviara (or enviaria) la
carta.
Much more might be said upon this subject, did we not fear
to exceed the limits prescribed by the nature of the present
work.
CONVERSATION AND VEPxSION.
1. Dofia Luisita, $Le gnsta a V. formar castillos en cl aire ? Muclio ;
pero creo que forino demasiados.
2. Me alegro mucho que, como a mi, le guste d V. el mundo de las ilu-
siones, y tambiea apruebo su franqueza de V. en confo*arlo. Y jporque
lo habia de ocnltar ? i Que rnal hay en eso ?
3. No s6 si hay mal 6 no, lo que s6 decir es, que todo el mundo afecta
no formarlos y con cierta risita burlona pretenden ridiculizar a los que,
como V. y yo, confesamos candidamcnte que los hacemos.
4. $Y cree V., D. Jose, que esas gentes vivan sin ilusiones deninguna
especie ? No, seflorita, no lo creo. Dios ha dado a todo hombre, a
diferencia del bruto, un mundo ideal interior ademas del mundo positive
exterior, a excepcion de los idiotas.
5. ; Cuanto me alegro de oirlo ! [porque yo tenia tanta verguenza de
mis pobres castUlos en el aire ! i De modo es que V. cree que yo no soy
sola ? De ningun modo, todo el mundo los forma, la diferencia solo cxiste
en la manera.
6. ; Ah ! Don Jos6, V. me va pareciendo un bnen arqnitecto de casti-
llos en el aire y uno de estos dias voy a pedirle que me muestre uno de los
nmchos que habra edificado. Con mucho gusto, sefiorita, u trueque, sin
embargo, de que V. me admita en uno de sus palacios aereos.
7. No, eso no, jamas podria yo poner en evidencia mis castillos : pero
V. dice que la diferencia solo existe en la manera de formarlos ; explique-
me V. esto, quiza asi lograi-6 reformar los mios, porque he observado que
son incompletos ; siempre les falta algo. Pues es extrano, sefiorita. por-
LESSON XLVIII. 253
que yo creia que solo las cosas humanas eran imperfectas y sus ilusiones
do V. siendo
8. For supuesto, jangelicales! jVamos! dejeseV. de cumplimientos,
ya sabe V. que no me gustan, y respondame V. a- mi pregunta si V.
gusta, porque tengo curiosidad de saber c6nio forman otros sus castillos.
Obedezco, seiiorita, y para principiar debo decir que yo me equivoque"
cuando dije que solo se diferenciaban en la manera, porque tambien in-
fluye mucho el material.
9. i C6mo el material ? ; si se fabrican en el aire I jEspero que no los
fabrique V. de cal y canto 1 No, seflorita, no de cal y canto; pero se fa-
brican ; y si se fabrican, de algo se fabrican.
10. i Pero do que, seQor, de qu6 ? Yo formo castillos, pero no necesito
n;;da para hacerlos; vuelo mas que los pajaros, mando hasta en las vo-
luntades de los otros, bago volver al tiempo en su carrera, dispongo del
espacio, de la fortuna, y hago que me obedezca hasta el amor. Eso lo
creo sin que V. me lo diga, seuorita.
11. [Dale! no vuelva V. a las andadas, y cue'nteme V. que~ materiales
son esos de que V. me hablaba. V. misrna acaba de norabrar algunos.
12. i Cuules? ; Como ! ^qu6 mas materiales quiere V. para formar un
Castillo en el aire, que poder disponer, como V. dice que puede, de las
voluntades de los otros, del tiempo, del espacio, la fortuna y hasta del
amor?
13. jTorna! Pero yo no poseo ninguna de esas cosas en realidad, y
sin embargo mis castillos me entretienen y divierten mucho. Perdone
V., sefiorita, V. las posee y con ellas forma V. ese bonito mundo interior,
que le proporciona a V. los goces que no le da el exterior.
14. Y en eso tiene Y. razon, que mis ilusiones, 6 sea como V. las llama,
mi mundo interior, me consnelan muchas veces de la ruindad del mundo
exterior. Eso sucede a todo el mundo, de ese modo, el ciego ve, el e.n-
fermo goza de salud, el prisionero de libertad, el pobre de las riquezas y
el anciano do la juventud, las ilusiones hacen los males menorcs. En este
mundo ideal es en donde los hombres son verdaderamente igualcs, y para
mi tengo que no es ilusorio, sino real, puesto que de el depende nuestra
felicidad.
15. i No crce V. que hay alguna exageracion en lo que V. dice ? No,
sefiora, pero si, creo, que debemos tener buen cuidado de regularizar
nuestros pensamientos y de basar siempre nuestros castillos en el aire en
la virtue! y la religion.
16. j Bravo ! bravo ! muy bieu, asi me gustan a mi los castillos en el aire.
254 LESSON XLVIII.
EXERCISE.
1. "WTio built the house you are living in at present? An excellent
architect, a friend of my father.
2. Are you certain it was an old man that was suing for her hand?
I cannot affirm that it was an old man.
3. What a misfortune that he will not study ! It would be a real
misfortune if it were true ; I think it is not true.
4. Do you ever build castles in the air ? Seldom ; for, in my opinion,
real castles built of stone are to be preferred to the aerial ones you speak of.
5. What a pretty bird you have there ! does it sing ? It sings the
whole day long.
6. Do you think our young friend is really as happy as he appears to
be? No, there must be some exaggeration in what he says.
V. In what respect do these two authors differ from each other ? Read
the works of both, and you will observe for yourself.
8. Do they both write equally well ? No, one of them arranges his
thoughts in a very strange manner, so that it is sometimes impossible to
understand his meaning,* and at all times disagreeable to read him.
9. Is Peter punished now in school as often as formerly ? As often
as ever ; but it is useless to punish him, for though he is good for a few
days, yet he always gets back to his old habits.
10. Docs that man always say what he thinks? lam sure I cannot
say ; but it seems to me that there is in his manner of speaking a some-
thing I cannot explain that hides his real thoughts.
11. Is he liked in general by those who know him ? On the contrary,
everybody hates him and ridicules him for his meanness.
12. Have you any curiosity to see the Interior of a royal palace ? If
the occasion offered (presented itself), I would like to see it ; otherwise I
am perfectly content with the interior of my own house.
13. You are wise for that; happiness is not at all times to be found in
palaces. Ah ! I see you aref something of a philosopher.
. 14. How is this, sir ? your exercise is incomplete. I confess that had
I wished I might have finished it ; but you will find that, as far as it goes,
it is not imperfect.
15. That is to say that the quality does not depend on the quantity.
Precisely so ; you may complain of my not having done the whole of the
exercise, but I do not think you can criticise the part I have brought to you.
16. What sizei is the book your friend has just published ? The same
size as the one he published before.
* Lo que qttiere fecir. t Tiene V. $ Tamaiio.
LESSON XLIX.
255
LESSON XLIX.
Acudir.
Agregar.
Anadir.
Componcr.
Contencr.
Incluir.
Facilitar.
Ofrecer.
Por instruido quo sea.
Antcriormente.
Comparativamentc.
Corrienteinente.
Fluidamente.
Suficiente.
En general.
Generalmente.
Considerablemente.
Particularmente.
En cuanto a.
Artificial.
Anterior.
Aborreciblc.
Celeste, azul celeste.
Celestial.
Celico.
Chinesco.
Creible.
Desprcciable.
Familiar.
Gigantesco.
Terrestre.
Territorial.
Terroso.
Terrado, terrero.
Terrenal.
Terr on.
To hasten (to a place), to refer.
To add.
To add.
To compose, to inend, to fix.
To contain.
To include.
To facilitate.
To offer.
| However learned he may be.
Formerly, previously.
Comparatively.
Currently, fluently.
Fluently.
Sufficient.
In general.
Generally.
Considerably.
Particularly, privately.
| As to, as for.
Artificial.
Anterior, previous.
Hateful.
Celestial, sky-blue.
Celestial, heavenly.
Celestial, heavenly.
Chinese.
Credible.
Despicable.
Familiar.
Gigantic.
Terrestrial, earthly.
Territorial.
Tcrreous, earthy.
Terrace.
Terrestrial, earthly.
Lump (or clod) of earth.
256
LESSON XLIX.
Ricacho.
Very rich.
Picaresco.
Roguish.
Patrom'mico.
Patronymic.
Propio.
Proper, own.
Mudable.
Changeable.
Verbal.
Verbal.
Arena!.
Sandy (ground).
Arboleda.
Grovo.
Ascenso.
Promotion.
Ascension.
Ascension.
Alvarez.
Alvarez.
Carnuza.
Bad meat.
Calvinista.
Calvinist.
Creencia.
Belief, credence.
Catolicismo.
Catbolicism.
Ciencia.
Science.
Diccionario.
Dictionary.
Gentualla.
Rabble.
Escobajo.
A bad broom.
Madrastra.
Step-mother.
Boticario.
Druggist, apothe-
Terminacion.
Termination.
cary.
Dicha.
Happiness.
Dommguez.
Dominguez.
Isla.
Island.
Fernandez.
Fernandez.
Educacion.
Education.
Idiotismo.
Idiom,
Escoba.
Broom.
Filosofastro.
Philosophastcr.
Excnsa.
Excuse.
Hij astro.
Step-son.
Explicacion.
Explanation.
Herman astro.
Step-brother.
Espada.
Sword.
Hombracho.
Corpulent.
Exclamacion.
Exclamation.
Libraco.
A contemptible
Firma.
Signature.
book.
Gota.
Drop.
Pajarraco.
An ugly bird.
Figura.
Figure, appear-
Latinajo.
Dog Latin.
ance.
Manzanar.
Apple orchard.
Faccion.
Feature.
Pinar.
Pine grove.
Factura.
Invoice.
Protestante.
Protestant.
Facultad.
Faculty, power.
Padrastro.
Step-father.
Adquisicion.
Acquirement.
Significado.
Signification,
Astronomia.
Astronomy.
meaning.
Afluencia, fluidez. Fluency.
Vinacho.
Bad wine.
Protestantisino.
Protestantism.
Ilabanero.
Ilavaiiese.
Madrileilo.
Madrilenian.
Rodriguez.
Rodriguez.
Sanchez.
Sanchez, [heart.
Amante.
Lover, sweet-
Arbol.
Tree.
Amador.
Lover.
LESSON XLIX.
257
COMPOSITION.
Porqud lee V. ese libraco ?
Porque no tengo otro ; pero V. se equi-
voca, es un libro clasico excelente.
6 Conoco V. a aquel ricacho ?
Le conozco ; pero no le trato, porque cs
un hombracho que solo le gusta tra-
tarse con gentualla.
Juan, no barras con ese escobajo, que
ensucia mas que limpia.
La came buena se vende a treinta cen-
tavos la libra ; la carnuza a veinte.
Ese estudiante suele decir latinajos,
pero no sabe Latin.
En la America del Norte hay mas pro-
testantes que catolicos.
Los boticarios en los Estados TJnidos
no solo venden medicinas, sino per-
fumeria, cigarros y otras muchas
cosas.
6 Vive cl Seflor Fernandez con su pa-
dre?
No, seSor, porque no quiere vivir con
su madrastra y hermanastros.
<j Es V. madrileno ?
No, seflor, soy Ilabanero.
Aquel filosofastro es despreciable.
Esa seuorita es muy amable ; pero muy
mudable.
Why do you read that contemptible old
book ?
Because I have no other ; but you are
mistaken, it is an excellent classic
(book).
Do you know that glch man ?
I know him ; but I have no intercourse
with him, because he is a low man,
whose taste is to associate only with
the rabble.
John, do not sweep with that old stump
of a broom ; it dirties more than it
cleans.
Good meat sells at thirty cents a pound,
poor (bad) meat at twenty.
That student is in the habit of reciting
dog Latin, but he does not know
Latin.
There are more Protestants than Catho-
lics in North America.
In the United States the druggists sell
not only medicines, but perfumery,
cigars, and many other things.
Does Mr. Fernandez live with his
father ?
No, sir ; because he does not wish to
live with Ids step-mother and step-
brothers.
Are you a Madrilenian ?
No, sir, I am a Havanese.
That philosophaster is a despicable
(man).
That young lady is very amiable, but
very changeable.
EXPLANATION.
242. DEKIVATITE NOUNS. These nouns constitute one of
the chief sources of the richness of the Spanish language ; we
have already introduced some of them in previous lessons,
when treating of augmentative and diminutive terminations.
258
LESSON XLIX.
These terminations are very numerous, both for the sub-
stantives and adjectives, and each one of them, determines the
general signification of the derivative noun. As it would be
impossible to give in this place a complete list of all these
terminations, we shall endeavor to lay before the student such
of them as are to be found in most common use.
243. The terminations aco, acho, alia and uza, denote in-
feriority; as
Libraeo.
Pajarraeo.
Vinac7io.
Gentualla.
Canmza.
A contemptible old book.
An ugly bird.
Bad wine.
Rabble.
Bad meat.
The termination acho is sometimes augmentative ; as,
RicacAo. Very rich.
Hombrac/to. A big (or corpulent) man.
244. Ajo implies meanness, and the consequent contempt
inspired by it ; as,
Escobo/o.
Latina/o.
An old stump of a broom.
Dog Latin.
245. The terminations al, err, ego, ico, il, isco, in adjectives,
commonly denote the quality of the thing ; as,
Artificial.
Familiar.
Gigantic.
Roguish.
Classic.
Artificial
Familiar.
Gigantesco.
Picaresco.
Clastco.
Chinesco.
Chinese.
246. In substantives the same terminations, a?, ar, and
also eda and edo, serve to form collective nouns ; as,
Arboleo'a.
Arena/.
Manzanar.
Pinar.
Grove.
Sandy ground.
Apple orchard.
Pine grove.
247. The terminations ante, ario, ente, cro, ista and or are
LESSON XLIX.
259
for the most part expressive of use, sect, profession, trade, or
occupation ; as,
Student.
Botican'o.
Zapatero.
Org.mtsfa.
Protcstcmfc.
Calviiusta.
Pintor.
Druggist.
Shoemaker.
Organist.
Protestant.
Calvinist.
Painter.
248. The termination astro signifies inferiority in a super-
lative degree ; as, Jilosof astro, a despicable philosopher ; poetas-
tro, poetaster ; and it is curious to observe that it also serves
to express the degrees of relationship existing between those
persons who more generally hate than love each other; as,
Step-brother.
Step-son.
Step-father.
Step-mother.
249. Ble corresponds to the same termination in English;
P&drastro.
Hadras/ra.
as,
AborreciWe.
CreiW<?.
Muda6/e.
AmaWe.
Hateful.
Credible.
Changeable.
Amiable.
250. Ismo corresponds to the English termination ism; as,
Catolicwmo.
Protestant ismo.
Catholicism.
Protestantism.
251. The names of nationalities are also derivatives, and
have their terminations in ero, es, eilo ; as,
Habanero. Havanesc.
Frances. French, Frenchman.
Madrileo. Madrilenian.
252. Many patronymic, or family, names are also deriva-
tives ; for instance, Alvarez, Dommguez, Fernandez, Rodriguez,
Sanchez, &c., were the names that were given to the sons of
the Alvaros, Domingos, Fernandos, Rodrigos, Sanchos, &c.,
changing the final o into ez.
260 LESSON XLIX.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. jEs neccsario para hablar una lengua aprender todas las palabras
que contiene dicha lengua? De ningun inodo, adeiims, yo no creo que
exista un hombre, por instrnido que sea, que las sepa todas.
2. i Cuantas palabras piensa V. que sean suficientes para podcr hablar
el espafiol corrientemeute ? De tres a cuatro mil palabras primitivas con
sus derivados es todo lo que se requiere, para liablar una lengua fluida-
mente.
3. Si, pero probablemente los derivados scran en tanto 6 mayor
numero que los primitives. Asi cs, pero una vez que se conocen las
terminaciones, cs muy facil el formmi 5, aur.que nunca se hay an visto an-
teriormente.
4. ; Es posible ! entonces esto debe facilitar mucho el cstudio de la
lengua. Muchisimo, porque, como ya hemos dicho, sabiendo los prhni-
tivos no tiene mas que aiiadirseles las terminaciones, segun el signincado
que quiera darseles.
5. i Quiere Y. hacerme el favor de formar algunos derivados ? Si,
sefior, con mucho gusto ; deme V. los primitives.
C. i Cuales son los derivados de cielo ? Celeste y celestial.
7. i De tierra ? Terrestre, terreual, y otros.
8. i Porque no rne los da V. todos ? Porque me parece mejor que
aprenda V. primeramente los de mas uso, pues sobre haber muchos, los
hay de poco uso comparativamente.
9. Cuales otros se pudieran formar de cielo y tierra ? Celico ; terroso,
terron, y otros muchos.
10. i Se pueden formar derivados de los verbos ? Si, scfior, y a estos
seles da el nombre de verbales.
11. i Cuales se derivan del verbo amar? Amador, arnante, ainado,
amable.
12. ^De ascender? Ascenso, ascension.
13. $De creer? Creyente, creencia, creible, credulo, credito.
14. i De estudiar ? Estudiante, estudio ; pudiendo agregar ademos los
aumentativos y diminutivos que tambien son derivado?, como estudian-
tillo, estudianton, etc.
15. i De que se derivan los nombres de familia Gonzalez, Douainguez,
etc. ? Se derivan de los nombres propios Gonzalo, Domingo, etc.
1 G. ^ Cuantas palabras cree V. que contendra esta grarnatica ? j!as de
tres mil palabras primitivas y un gran numero de derivadas.
17. i En acabando la gramatica podre traducir y hablar sobre cual-
quiera materia que se ofrezca? Podra V. hablar de todo y seguir una
conversacion en general como V. ve que ya lo hacemos ; pero para tra-
LESSON XLIX. 261
ducir 7 hablar cle cualquicra cicncia, artc u oficio en particular, tendra V.
quo acudir al diccionario, porque es iinposible introducir en una gramatica
todas las palabras necesarias para poder hacer esto.
18. Y ea cuanto a los idiotismos de la lengua, $se hallaran todos en
esta gramutica? Tampoco, puesto que se podrian componer tres 6 cuatro
voliiraenes coino este y quizo, no incluirian todos los de la lengua.
19. ^Corno los aprendere entonces? En la conversacion de personas
instruidas y en la lectura de bueuos libros.
EXERCISE.
1. Did Charles go to another regiment at the time of his promotion?
Yes, he left the 71st and went to the 7th.
2. "\Vhat do you know about the names Sanchez, Dominguez, and all
those ending in ez ? That they mean son of Sancho, son of Domingo,
and are formed from those names by adding the termination you have
just mentioned.
3. To whom does that magnificent pine grove belong ? To the step-
son of the gentle-man who owns that pretty little house you see over
there in the distance (d lo lejos).
4. What contemptible old book is that you are reading so attentively ?
It is no contemptible old book at all (ninguno), it is the dictionary; I
always go to the dictionary for a word of which I do not know the
meaning.
o. Do you know the names of all the heavenly bodies ? No, nor you
cither ; the science of astronomy is still imperfect, and there are besides
many of the heavenly bodies hidden from human sight.
G. Is not that young gentleman a great lover of the sciences ? Yes,
but most particularly of the exact sciences.
7. Why do you sweep with that old stump of a broom? It is the
best I have.
8. Did you say he "was a philosopher ? Xo, on the contrary, I said
ho -was but a miserable philosophaster.
9. How does that rich fellow amuse himself? Eeading history in
general, and that of his own country in particular.
10. I observe that you speak German very fluently now; have you
changed your book? No, I have still the same one, but I myself study
more than I did formerly.
11. Do you know whether your cousin speaks as fluently as your
sister? Mrs. Alvarez says that in familiar conversation they speak
equally fluently.
12. Do you do any compositions ? Yes, our 'father requires us to do
two compositions a week on the idioms of the language.
262
LESSOR L.
13. Is it not a despicable habit to offer to do things -we never intend
to perform (llemr d cabo) ? I should say it is more than despicable, it is
even hateful.
14. Does not the study of grammar considerably facilitate the acquisi-
tion of a language ? Yes, but that alone is not sufficient : something
more is required.
15. Have you much fruit at your house in the country ? We have a
very fine orchard of apples.
16. What language was that your young friend spoke in a moment
ago ? What he takes for Latin ; but what is not in reality any thing but
dog Latin.
17. Would not that letter have been better if you had not added that
last word? It appeared to me to be necessary to add that to what I had
already said, so that the meaning might be more easily understood.
LESSON L.
Amenazar.
Apoyar.
Disgustar.
Recurrir.
Sacar.
A pesar de.
Y diciendo y haciendo,
j Todo sea por Dios !
Tomar las de villadiego.
Sobre todo.
Desproporcionadisimamente.
Adverbial.
Antisocial.
Antepenultima.
Iniitil.
Componente.
Izquierdo.
Derecho.
Penultima.
Superlative.
To threaten, to menace.
To lean upon, to support.
To displease, to disgust, to grieve.
To recur, to have recourse.
To take out.
In spite of.
And suiting the action to the
word.
I hope all will be for the host !
To take to one's heels, to make off.
Above all.
Without any proportion.
Adverbial.
Antisocial.
Antepenultimate.
Useless.
Component.
Left.
Right.
Penultimate.
Superlative.
LESSON L.
263
Anteqjos. Spectacles.
Equivocacion. Mistake.
Aguardiente. Brandy.
Ganapierde. A game in check-
Barbilampifio. Beardless.
ers.
Correveidile. Tell-tale.
Barberia. Barber-shop.
Bienhechor. Benefactor.
La derecha. The right hand.
Director. Director.
La izquicrda. The left hand.
Dolor de nraelas. Toothache.
Sinrazon. Injustice.
Dentista. Dentist.
Particula. Particle.
Disgusto. Disgust, grief.
Quijada. Jaw.
Ilazmereir. Laughing-stock.
Las damas. Draughts, check-
Condiscipulo. Schoolmate.
ers.
Pisaverde. FP) coxcomb.
Pormenor. Detail.
Puntapie. Kick.
Parasol. Parasol.
Paraguas. Umbrella.
Quitasol. Parasol.
Socialismo. Socialism.
Sacamuelas. Tooth-drawer.
Pueblo. People, town.
Vicerector. Vice-rector.
COMPOSITION.
No le esta bien a un anciano cl ser pisa-
It is not becoming to an old man to be
verde, eso es propio de barbilampiuos.
a fop ; that belongs to beardless boys.
i, Quien ha dado un puntapie a. aquel
Who gave that boy a kick ?
muchacho ?
Yo se lo he dado, porque cs un corre-
I did, for he is a tell-tale.
vei.dile.
Este hombre juega muy bicn a las da-
This man plays very well at draughts, and
nias, sobre todo a la ganapierde.
especially at ganapierde (give away).
6 Tiene V. un quitasol 6 un paraguas ?
Ilave you a parasol or an umbrella ?
Tengo ambos.
I have both.
Ese joven bebe mucho aguardiente y no
That young man drinks a great deal of
hace caso de los consejos de su bien-
brandy, and pays no heed to the ad-
hechor.
vice of his benefactor.
Esa cs la razon porque cs el hazmereir
That is the reason why he is the laugh-
de todo el mundo.
ing-stock of every one.
6 Tiene V. bucna vista ?
Have you good sight ?
No, seSor, y esta cs la razon porque
No, sir, and that is the reason why I
uso anteojos.
use spectacles.
Mi condiscipulo Manuel me ha ayuda-
My school-fellow Emanuel has helped
do a hacer la cornposicion.
me to do my composition.
264
LESSON L.
Es inutil que me cuente V. los porrae-
nores.
El director y el vicercctor dc la cscuela
son hombres excelentes.
Me disgustan las sinrazones.
El socialismo, a pesar de la opinion de
los que lo apoyan, es antisocial 6 im-
posible.
It is useless for you to tell me the de-
tails.
The director and sub-director of the
school are excellent men.
Unreasonableness disgusts me.
Socialism, in spite of the opinion of
those who support it, is antisocial
and impossible.
EXPLANATION.
253. COMPOUND NOUNS. These are very numerous in the
Spanish language ; some are formed of two nouns, as barbilam-
pino, beardless ; puntapi'e, a kick ; aguardiente, brandy ; others
are formed of a noun and a verb, as quitasol, parasol ; saoa-
muelas, tooth-drawer; others of an adjective and a verb, as
pisaverde, coxcomb ; others of a noun and an adverb, as bien-
hechor, benefactor ; others of a noun and a preposition, as an-
teojos, spectacles ; others of two verbs, as ganapierde, a mode
of playing draughts ; others of two verbs and a pronoun, as
liazmerelr, laughing-stock ; three verbs, a pronoun and a con-
junction enter into the formation of correveidile, tale-bearer ;
and, finally, others are composed of a noun and some one of
the following component particles : a, ab, abs, ad, ante, anti,
circum or circun, cis, citra, co, com, con, contra, de, des, di, dis,
e, em, en, entre, equi, es or ex, extra, im, in, infra, inter, intro, o,
ob, per, por, pos, pre, prefer, pro, re, retro, sa or za, se, semi,
sesqui, sin, so, sobre, son, sos, sit, sub, super, sus, tra, trans or
tras, ultra, and vice or vi; as,
Antisocial.
Composition,
Cowdiscipulo.
Director.
.Disgusto.
/wposible.
Jnutil.
Pormenor.
Pospuesto.
Fzcerector.
Antisocial.
Composition.
School-fellow.
Director.
Displeasure.
Impossible.
Useless.
Detail.
Post-fixed.
Unreasonableness.
Sub-director.
LESSON L. 265
We call them component particles, because the majority of
them although they are true Latin and Greek prepositions
have no signification in Spanish, except as prefixes, in which
case they serve to augment, diminish, or modify the significa-
tion of the simple word in proportion to the strength or value
they have in the languages from which we have taken them.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Don Jose, j sabe V. el significado de las palabras pen ultima y ante-
peniiltima? Si, sefior, porque corresponden alas palabras inglesas penul-
timate y antepenultimate.
2. Pues bien, ahora, quo hablamos de " caflonazos," quiero decir, abora
que hablamoa de estas palabras, le contar6 a V. un cuentecito. Muy bien,
a mi me gustan mucho los cuentos, sobre todo cuando no son largos 7
vienen a pelo.
3. Pues este viene a pelo y no es largo. Entonces cuentemelo V.,
Don Pedro, escucho con la mayor atencion.
4. Pues vaya de cuento : Un caballero tenia un fuerte dolor de muelas,
y fue a un sacamuelas para que le sacase una.
5. jHombre! u porque no fue a casa de un dentista? Porque en
aquel pueblecito no habia deutistas y tuvo que ir a una barberia, cuyo
barbero unia a su oficio el de sacamuelas.
6. ; Pobre hombre ! adelante. Este barbero, 6 sea sacamuelas, pero
que de ningun modo era dentista, le pregunto :
7. " ^Que niuela le duele a V. ? " " La penultima del lado izquierdo de
la quijada inferior."
8. " Muy bien," y diciendo y bacieudo le sac6, no la penultima, sino la
ultima.
9. *' jHuy! 2 que ha hecho V., hombre? yo le dije a Y. que me sacase
la penultima, y V. me ha sacado la ultima." " ; Calle! pues yo creia que
penultima y ultima era todo una misma cosa."
10. " N"o, hombre, no ; la penultima es la que esta antes de la ultima."
" ;Diantre ! Mil perdones, y sientese V. que esta vez no me equivocare."
11. "jYamos, y todo sea por Dios!" ";Ay! ay! hombre dado a
Barrabas ! "
12. "jToma! ^y abora porque se queja? j no vengo de sacarle la que
estaba antes de la ultima?" "Si; pero V. olvido contar la que me snco
antcriormentc, de rnodo que abora me ha sacado la antepenult ima" La
ante .... ^que? Pero no importa, dejemos estos malditos nom-
bres, que ban sido causa de mi equivocacion, y sientese V. que yo le ase-
guro a V. que." ....
12
266 LESSON L.
13. Pero el parroquiano, dandolo a todos los diablos, tomo las de villa-
dicgo, y se cree que nunca inas recurrio a un sacamuelas para que le sa-
case la peniiltima muela.
14. i Cual es la palabra coinpuesta mas larga en espaflol ? Despro-
porcionadmmamente.
15. i De que palabras se compone ? De la particula componente des,
el nombre proportion, la termination superlativa sima y la terrnininacion
adverbial mente.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you use spectacles because it is fashionable with some people to
wear (gastdr) them, or because you cannot see without them ? Because
I cannot see without them.
2. My toothache is not any better yet. Then you had better go to
the dentist's and get him to extract (sacar) the tooth.
3. Do you often see the beardless youth who came to walk with us
without being asked * last evening ? Not often, nor do I care to see him
very often, he is too much of a fop for my taste.
4. Which way do I turn here to go to the new hotel ? Turn to the
right ; it is not more than two streets to the hotel.
5. "What did he do when you said that ? He took to his heels, and I
have neither heard of nor seen him since.
6. "What were your two school-fellows doing at the door a few
minutes ago ? One of them had told the director of a mistake in the
other's exercise, and this one threatened to punish him for his trouble
(molestia) ; so, suiting the action to the word, he gave him a kick, and
called him a despicable tell-tale.
7. Has your brother bought the house yet that he intended to buy ?
No ; when he came to examine the details he found the price of the house
entirely out of proportion to the value.
8. Do you always take an umbrella when it rains ? I seldom use an
umbrella ; when it rains I never go out, if I can avoid it.
9. What a strange man that is ! Yes, he is the laughing-stock of
every one who knows him.
10. What kind of wine do they give you in your hotel ? They give us
very poor wine, and so I drink very little of it; I prefer water.
11. Do you often play at draughts (or checkers) ? Very often ; but I
prefer the losing game.
12. What is that man's business ? He keeps a barber's shop in Sixth
or Seventh Avenue,
13. I want you to be good enough to translate this letter for me. Oh !
* Invitasen. '
LESSON LI.
207
it is useless to talk to me of translating any thing just now (por ahora),
for I have a headache.
14. Where is that family living now ? In a small town in the western
part of the State.
LESSON LI.
Atravesar.
Atropellar.
Causar.
Correr.
Calcular.
Dividir.
Exponer.
Extrailar.
Hospedar.
Incendiar.
Llorar.
Manifestar.
Ordenar.
Oponer.
Proponcr.
Parar.
Procurar.
Resistir.
Rivalizar.
Simpatizar.
Ni con mucho.
A decir verclad.
En lo qne respecta.
En marcha.
A lo largo.
A esta parte.
A pie.
En frente.
Continuamcnte.
Perpendicularmente.
Alrededor.
To traverse, to cross.
To run over, to hurry one's self
too much.
To cause.
To run.
To calculate.
To divide.
To expose.
To wonder at.
To lodge and entertain.
To set fire to.
To cry, to weep.
To manifest, to show, to inform.
To order, to arrange.
To oppose.
To propose.
To stop.
To procure, to try.
To resist.
To rival.
To sympathize.
Far from, far from it.
To say the truth.
With respect to.
Let us go, let us start.
Lengthwise.
Within the last.
On foot.
In front, opposite.
Continually.
Perpendicularly.
Around.
268
LESSON LI.
Admirable.
Admirable.
Apto.
Apt.
Curioso.
Curious.
Desocupado.
Disengaged, unoccupied.
Directo.
Direct.
Indirecto.
Indirect.
Figurado.
Figurative.
Inepto.
Unsuitable.
Gramatical.
Gramatical.
Complemento. Complement.
Academia, Academy.
Cosmopolita. Cosmopolite.
Admiracion. Admiration, won-
Carruaje. Carriage.
der.
Delito. Crime.
Arquitectura. Architecture.
Dibujo. Drawing.
Construccion. Construction.
Individuo. Individual, mem-
Belleza. Beauty.
ber.
Frase. Phrase.
Literate. Man of letters.
Distancia. Distance.
Gozo. Enjoyment.
Esquina. Corner.
Museo. Museum.
Lagrima. Tear.
Paseo. Promenade.
Laboriosidad. Industry.
Punto. Point, place.
Marcha. March.
Edificio. Edifice.
Metr6poli. Metropolis.
Peligro. Danger.
Madurez. Ripeness, maturi-
Omnibus. Omnibus.
ty, prudence.
Soltero. Bachelor.
Permanencia. Permanence, stay.
Publico. Public.
Sorpresa. Surprise.
Trascurso. Course (of time).
Vista. Sight, view.
Rincon. Corner.
Orilla. Bank, border.
Tablero de da- Checker-board.
Batalla. Battle.
mas. -
Remuneration. Remuneration.
COMPOSITION.
Oriente y Occidente.
Cielo y tierra.
El h ombre discrete ordena siempre las
cosas con madurez.
La casa de Juan se ha incendiado.
Un individuo incpto para escribir puede
ser apto para otras cosas.
El reo, a quien se castiga, ha cometido
grandes delitos.
East and West.
Heaven and earth.
The sensible man always arranges his
affairs with prudence.
They have set fire to John's house.
An individual that is unsuited for wri-
ting may be apt at other things.
The culprit that is being punished has
committed great crimes.
LESSON LI.
269
Un hombrc pobre es muy difcrente de
un pobre hombre.
Hemos dado un gran pasco.
Hemos dado un paseo grande.
Lo que V. dice es una cosa cierta.
Yo he observado cierta cosa.
Madrid, a 23 de Agosto de 1866 (or
Madrid, Agosto 23 de 1866, or Ma-
drid y Agosto 23 de 1866)'
Yo soy quien probare que tu te equi-
vocas.
Dios es admirable en todas sus obras,
pues todas ellas manifiestan su poder
y su bondad (or admirable se muestra
Dios en todas sus obras ; su poder y
su bondad manifiestan todas ellas).
Solo Dios es grande, bermanos mios.
Adios, Juan ; ^ que tal ?
Hasta manana. Buenos dias.
Nueva York, ciudad de los Estados
Unidos.
Yo mismo le vi llorar lagrimas de
gozo.
Pronto se calmaran las borrascas que
agitan la nave del Estado.
f, Ha estado V. alguna vez en el Museo
de Nueva York ?
A poor man (a man in poverty) is very
different from a poor follow.
We have had an excellent walk.
We have taken a long walk.
What you say is certain.
I have observed a certain thing.
Madrid, August 23d, 1866.
It is I who shall prove that you are
mistaken.
God is wonderful in all His works, for
they all set forth his power and His
goodness.
God only is great, my brethren.
Good morning, John ; how do you do ?
I shall see you to-morrow.
New York, a city of the United States.
I myself saw him shed tears of joy.
The tempests by which the ship of
State is tossed shall soon be calmed.
Have you ever been in the New York
Museum ?
EXPLANATION.
Not withstanding* we have already made some general ob-
servations relative to the place each part of speech occupies in
sentences, we deem it expedient to add here a few rules which
the learner will find of considerable utility in composition.
254. THE NATURAL CONSTRUCTION demands that the sub-
stantive be placed before the adjective, because the thing is
before its quality ; that the governing word precede the one
governed, for it is natural that the former should present itself
to the mind before the latter; that the subject precede the
verb ; that the verb precede the adverb by which it is modi-
fied ; that the complement come after the verb and the adverb,
if there be one ; and that when two or more things are to be
270 LESSON LI.
expressed, of which one, from its nature, comes before the
other, this order be preserved ; as,
Oriente y Occidente.
Cielo y tierra.
Norte y Sur.
Este y Oeste.
East and West.
Heaven and earth.
North and South.
East and West.
255. FiGrjEATTVE CONSTKUCTTOX. The genius of the Span-
ish language, and, above all, use, allow us to depart in some
cases from the above rules; thus avoiding the monotonous uni-
formity which would otherwise take place, and leaving the
writer more latitude for the construction and arrangement of
his periods. So long as sense and perspicuity do not suffer,
there is ordinarily no fixed position for any of the parts of
speech. Therefore :
1st. Personal pronouns subjects of verbs may, with a few
exceptions, be expressed or suppressed at will.
2d. When the pronoun subject is expressed, it may be
placed either before or after the verb.
3d. The same liberty exists with respect to the verb, adverb
and complement.
4th. Nevertheless, for the sake of clearness in our sentences,
it is essential that certain words which together form a whole
(such as adjectives with the substantives they qualify, or parts of
sentences, acting the part of subject or complement) should be
arranged in the same order as that in which the ideas they ex-
press are naturally presented to the mind.
5th. There are also certain words which, when placed be-
fore certain others, have a signification very different from that
which they have when placed after them.
Of all the modern languages the Spanish is certainly the
most flexible ; indeed, in no other can the same idea be ex-
pressed with the same words in so endless a variety of con-
structions.
Let the following sentence serve as a proof of the truth of
this assertion :
Esta senorita era liija de Don Manuel I This young lady was the daughter of
Sanchez. Mr. Emanuel Sanchez.
LESSON LI. 271
256. Words which, from their nature, cannot be separa-
ted : Esta senorita. Ue Don Manuel Sanchez.
Natural Construction. Esta senorita era hija de Don Manuel Sanchez.
1st inversion. Era esta scuorita hija de Don Manuel Sanchez.
Id " Era hija esta senorita de Don Manuel Sanchez.
3d " Era de Don Manuel Sanchez hija esta senorita.
Wi " De Don Manuel Sanchez era hija esta sefiorita.
5th " Hija era esta scuorita de Don Manuel Sanchez.
C/7t " Hija de Don Manuel Sanchez era esta senorita.
1th " Hija de Don Manuel Sanchez esta seuorita era.
8th " De Don Manuel Sanchez hija era esta seuorita.
257. The natural construction is, of course, the most gram-
matical, but the best writers generally give preference to the
figurative, as being more easy and elegant, and as giving at
the same time more freedom to imagination and genius, and
finally, as being better suited to express the grand emotions of
the soul.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. jOh! amigo mio, V. por Nueva York! ; Cuanto lo celebro ! Si,
seilor, aqtii me tiene V., Don Fernando, no he podido resistir la tentacion
de venir a ver la America.
2. ; ile alegro infinite ! i Pero porque no se vino V. a liospedar li mi
casa ? En primer Ingar, porque Ilegu6 anoche muy tarde ; y en segundo,
porque a los solteros nos gusta la libertad y la vida del hotel.
3. Bien, no me opongo, a condicion de que vendra V. a pasar con
nosotros algunos dias. Lo hard asi con mucho gusto, ademas, Don
Fernando, que, como no se hablar ingles y esta ciudad es tan grande,
tengo miedo de perderme si salgo solo, y quisiera que, durante mi per-
manencia en ella, tuviese V. la bondad de ser mi cicerone, de modo es que
me propongo, pasar la mayor parte del tiempo en su compafiia.
4. En eso me hara V. mucho placer, ademas de que yo gozare tanto
como V. con la sorpresa y admiracion que le causaran a V. las vistas de
esta metropoli. ^Ha estado V. jamas en Londres 6 en Paris? No, se-
iior, jamas he salido de Espafia liasta ahora.
5. i Ciuindo quiere V. que principiemos nuestros paseos ? Cuando V.
gaste ; ahora misino si esta V. desocupado, porque, a decir vcrdad, tengo
una gran curiosidnd.
G. i Quiere V. que vayamos a, pie 6 en coche ? A pie, si V. gusta ;
me parece que podremos ver mas c6modamente ; pero tomaremos un
coche cuando haya que salir de la ciudad.
272 LESSON LI.
7. Pues en tnarcha, venga el brazo. To temo que voy a molestar a V.,
Don Fernando, porque soy niuy curioso, como dicen los franceses, soy un
flaneur, y me Hainan la atencion hasta las cosas mas pequefias.
8. Ent6nces simpatizaremos, porque a mi me gusta observarlo y criti-
carlo todo. i Qu6 calle es esta en que estamos ahora ? Esta es la Cuarta
Avenida, y esa que la atraviesa es la calle Veinte y tres.
9. i Como es eso ? Las calles en Nueva York estan divididas en
avcnidas, que son las que atraviesan la ciudad a lo largo, y en calles, que
la atraviesan de occidente a oriente, cortando las avenidas en angulos
rectos y formando toda la ciudad como un tablero de damas, de modo
que sabiendo el numero de la calle 6 avenida y el de la casa a donde se
va, puede calcularse facilmcnte la distancia.
10. Y este edificio de arquitectura tan curiosa de la esquina, iq\i& es?
Esta es la nueva academia de dibujo, donde se exponen al publico muy
buenas pinturas.
11. i Hay aqui tan buenas pinturas como en el mnseo de ifadrid ? No,
ni con mucho ; este pais es aun nuevo, y aunque puedan hacerlo en otras
cosas, todavia no pueden rivalizar en lo que respecta a las bellas artes
con Europa.
12. j Hombre, que hermosa plaza ! Esta es la plaza de Madison y todos
estos bellos editicios que V. ve a su alrededor, y la plaza misma, ban sido
hechos de veinte aiios a esta parte.
13. i Qu6 edificio es aquel de enfrente que es tan grande como un pala-
cio ? Ese es el hotel de la Qninta Avenida, y en efecto V. tiene razon en
compararlo a un palacio, porque los hoteles son en realidad los palacios de
los Estados Unidos, y se dice que son los mejores del mundo.
14. ; Cuidado ! hombre, por poco se deja V. atropellar por el omnibus.
i Caspita ! j que mujer tan hermosa !
15. Si ; pero no debe Y. pararse a admirar las belleza?, en medio de
Broadway en su punto de reunion con la Quinta Avenida, porque corre V.
peligro de ser atropellado por los carruajes de todas especies que conti-
nuamente lo atraviesan.
16. Don Fernando, $ son todas las seiioras en Nueva York tan hermo-
sas como esa que acaba de pasar? No se, porque yo solo mire donde
ponia los pies, procurando escapar al misino tiempo de los carruajes;
pero si podre decirle a V. que mujeres mas hermosas que las que he visto
yo en Nueva York no creo qne se encuentren en ninguna parte del
mundo.
17. jOiga V. ! 110 hablan cspafiol csos que van delante de nosotros?
Eso no debe Y. extrafiarlo; esta cs una ciudad cosmopolita; en ella hay
gentes de todas las naciones y Y. oini en el trascurso de poco tiempo
hablar aleman, espafiol, frances y otras nmchas lenguas.
LESSON LI.
EXERCISE.
1. What do you understand by the complement of a verb? It is a
phrase or a part of a phrase that serves to complete the idea expressed
by the verb.
2. Can you tell me what a cosmopolitan is ? A cosmopolitan is one
who is not a stranger in any country, a citizen of the world.
3. Where does that gentleman live ? In Fifth Avenue, on the corner
of Twenty -second Street.
4. How long has your uncle been a member of the Eoyal Academy
of Madrid ? He is not a member of the Royal Academy of Madrid ; but
he has been a member of the Academy of Sciences for the last ten year*.
5. Take that book from Charles and give it to Peter. I will give him
some other book, because if I took that one from Charles he would cry.
6. Is your friend a married man ? No, sir, he is a bachelor.
7. Have you ever seen Da Vinci's celebrated painting of "The Last
Supper"?* No; but I have seen the engraving of that painting, made by
Morghen, and it is a truth admitted by every one, that, notwithstanding
the absence of coloring, that engraving is a happy expression of the
original.
8. How long does it take to go from here to the Central Park ? But
a short time; the distance is not very great.
9. Could you run there in as short a time as one could go in a car-
riage ? I do not doubt that I could, if I started from the same place and
at the same time as the carriage.
10. How are the several States of the Union divided ? Into Northern,
Southern, Eastern, and Western.
11. Is that not the tallest man you have ever seen? Far from it; I
have seen several much taller.
12. Have they been able to fill that office (or position) yet? I believe
not; I understand that one of our friends was about to apply for it (pre-
tenderlo), but his father was opposed to his doing so, and so he would not
persist.
13. How far did you go before you found him? I walked about half
an hour by the river side, inquiring of every one I met whether he had
seen a young man on horseback ; and at last an old man told me he had
seen him cross the river, nearly opposite the new building they are put-
ting up (erecting), at a short distance from the entrance to the public
promenade.
14. Are there any fine public walks in the metropolis ? About seven
or eight beautiful ones, the most of which have been made within the
last five years.
* * La cena.
12*
27-i
LESSOX LII.
LESSON LII.
Aconsejar.
Aprovechar.
Consistir.
Colorir.
Citar. .
Costar.
Comuuicar.
Deraostrar.
Deteriorar.
Expresar.
Freir.
Grabar.
Tomarse (cl trabajo).
Prender.
Perfeccionar.
Mereccr.
Reunir.
Remunerar.
Visitar.
Por ejcinplo.
Que yo sepa.
To counsel, to advise.
To profit, to embrace (profit by).
To consist.
To color (paintings).
To quote, to cite.
To cost.
To communicate.
To demonstrate, to point out.
To deteriorate.
To express.
To fry. (ory.
To engrave, to fix (in the mem-
To take the trouble.
To take up, to arrest.
To perfect.
To merit, to deserve.
To gather, to assemble, to re-
unite.
To remunerate.
To visit, to search.
For instance.
For all I kno\v.
List of the Irregular Past Participles of all tlie Verbs already introduced.
Abierto.
Opened.
Frito.
Fried.
Bendito.
Blessed.
Heche.
Done.
Contradicho.
Contradicted.
Impuesto.
Imposed.
Convicto.
Convicted.
Muerto.
Died.
Compuesto.
Composed.
Manifiesto.
Manifested.
Dicho.
Said, told.
Oculto.
Hidden, con-
Devuelto.
Given back, re-
cealed.
turned.
Opuesto.
Opposed.
Dispuesto.
Disposed.
Preso.
Taken, arrested.
Escrito.
Written.
Puesto.
Placed, put.
Electo.
Elected.
Provisto.
Provided.
Expreso.
Expressed.
Roto.
Broken.
Expuesto.
Exposed.
Satisfecho.
Satisfied.
Yisto.
Seen.
Vuelto.
Returned.
LESSON LII.
275
Amplio.
Ample.
Actual.
Present.
Antiguo.
Ancient, old.
Contemporaneo.
Contemporary.
Enemistado.
At variance, on bad terms.
Dramatico.
Dramatic.
Moderno.
Modern.
Ilonroso.
Honorahle.
Politico.
Political.
Cocincro.
Cook.
Amenidad.
Agreeableness,
Capitan.
Captain.
amenity.
Acicrto.
Succcs-.
Bibliotcca.
Library.
Oolorido.
Coloring.
Cena.
Supper.
Grabado.
Engraving.
Comedia.
Comedy, play.
Fresco.
Cool, refreshing
Costumbre.
Custom, habit.
air.
Erudicion.
Erudition.
Empleo.
Employment.
Fuente.
Fountain, source.
Drama.
Drama.
Existencia.
Existence.
Estilo.
Style.
Elegancia.
Elegance.
Joven.
Youth.
Instruccion.
Instruction, learn-
Mercader.
Dealer.
ing.
Paisano.
Countryman.
Ignorancia.
Ignorance.
Hedio.
Action, fact.
Mention.
Mention.
SigJo.
Century.
Literatura.
Literature.
Yerso.
Verse.
Modiania.
Moderation, me-
Soldado.
Soldier.
diocrity.
Prosa.
Prose.
Novels.
Novel.
Politica.
Politics.
Tragedia.
Tragedy.
Vasija.
Vase, vessel.
COMPOSITION.
Esta enemistado con su primo.
Colocado en vasijas.
Ha cantado una cancion espauola.
Los caballos que ban comprado los
mercadercs no son buenos.
Los caballos quc fueron comprados por
los mercaderes son buenos.
Estan (or quedan) dcmostradas cstas
verdades.
He is on bad terms with his cousin.
Placed in vases (or vessels).
He has sung a Spanish song.
The horses the dealers have bought are
not good.
The horses that were bought by the
dealers are good.
These truths are (or remain) demon-
strated.
276
LESSON LII.
La cocinera habia frito (or freido) el
pescado.
Han prendido (or preso) al culpable.
No s6 si habran ya proveido (or pro
visto) el einpleo.
Has roto el vaso.
6 Ha visto V. un caballo muerto ?
No, pero he visto un caballo matado.
,; Quie"n ha muerto a ese caballo ?
Un paisano le ha muerto.
El capitan fue muerto por sus soldados.
El se ha matado.
El se ha muerto.
Ese es un joven muy leido, muy apro-
vechado y muy callado.
Es un hecho que la Cena de da Vinci esta
felizmente expresada en el grabado
de Morghen, no obstante que le falta
el colorido de la pintura.
Aunque el fresco de la Cena, hecho por
da Vinci, esta mal colorido y deterio-
rado, ha sido grabado con acierto por
Morghen.
The cook had fried the fish.
They have arrested the offender.
I do not know whether they have al-
ready provided (a person to fill) the
office.
You have broken the glass.
Have you seen a dead horse ?
No, but I have seen a horse with a sore
back.
Who killed that horse ?
A countryman killed it.
The captain was killed by his soldiers.
He killed himself.
He died.
That young man is well read, makes
the most of his opportunities, and
talks little.
It is a fact that Da Vinci's "Last Sup-
per " is happily expressed in Morg-
hen's engraving, notwithstanding the
latter lacks the coloring of the paint-
ing.
Although the fresco of the " Last Sup-
per," made by Da Vinci, is badly
colored, and deteriorated, it has been
engraved with success by Morghen.
EXPLANATION.
258. PAST PARTICIPLES. Some past participles retain the
regimen of their verbs ; as,
Enemistado con su primo. | On bad terms with his cousin.
259. The past participle must agree in gender and number
with the subject or determining verb, except when that de-
termining verb is haber ; in which case the past participle is
indeclinable, whatever be the gender and number of the sub-
ject; as,
Ha cantado una cancion.
Los caballos que han comprado los
mercadercs.
He has sung a song.
The horses that the dealers
bought.
have
But the past participle, if it comes after the auxiliaries ser,
LESSON LIT.
277
estar, quedar, or any other, except haber, agrees with the subject
ill gender and number ; as,
The horses that were bought by the
dealers.
Los caballos quo fucron comprados
por los mercaderes.
Estaii (or quedan) demostradas estas
verdades.
These truths are (or remain) demon-
strated.
260. Some verbs have two past participles, one regular and
the other irregular. These are used very differently, since the
irregular one, being a .true noun, is employed in an absolute
sense only, and never signifies motion, whether in the active
or in the passive form. For this reason the latter may be
accompanied by the verbs ser, estar y quedar, and others, but
never by the auxiliary haber ; inasmuch as it would be im-
proper to say : hubo convicto, he contracto, instead of, hubo
convencido, he contraido.
261. The irregular participles frito, fried; preso, taken
prisoner; provisto, provided, and roto, broken, are the only
ones that can be used with the verb haber, to form the com-
pound tenses; as,
La cocinera habia frilo (or freido)
el pescado.
Han prendido (or prcso) al culpable.
No se si habran ya proveido (or pro-
visto) el cmpleo.
The cook had fried the fish.
They have taken (or arrested) the
offender.
I do not know whether they have
already provided (a person to fill)
the office.
You have broken the glass.
Has roto el vaso (sounds better than
has rompido el vaso).
262. The verb matar, in the sense of to take away life, has
the extraordinary irregularity of appropriating for its past par-
ticiple that of the verb morir ; the participle matado being
used to express wounds or sores in animals, resulting from the
rubbing of the harness, or from cruel treatment ; as,
Un caballo matado.
Un caballo muerto.
Un paisano le ha muerto.
El capitan fue muerto por sus soldados.
A horse with a sore back.
A dead horse.
A countryman killed him.
The captain was killed by his soldiers.
But iii speaking of a person that has committed suicide, we
must say :
Se ba matado (and not Se ha muerto'). \ He has killed himself.
278 LESSON LII.
263. Some past or passive participles take an active signifi-
cation, but only referring to persons ; as,
Un joven leido, aprovcchado, callado. \ A well read, thrifty and silent youth.
264. Past participles may sometimes take the place of
substantives, and the difference can be known only by the ante-
cedents and subsequents, as in this sentence :
Es un hecho que la Cena de da Vinci
csta felizmente expresada en el
grdbado de Morghen, no obstante
que le falta el colorido de la pin-
tura.
It is a fact, that " The Last Supper "
by Da Vinci is happily expressed
in the" engraving of Morghen, not-
withstanding the latter lacks the
coloring of the painting.
Where the words 7iecho, grabado and colorido, are substan-
tives. The same words appear as participles in the following
phrases :
Aunque el fresco de la Cena, hccho
por da Tinci, esta mal colorido y
deteriorado, ha sido grabado con
acierto por Morghen.
Although the fresco^of "The Last
Supper," made by Da Vinci, is
badly colored and deteriorated, it
has been engraved with success by
Morghen.
265. Other grammarians add one more tense in the infini-
tive mood ; as,
Haber de arnar.
Habiendo de amar.
To have to love.
Having to love.
But such a classification is no longer essential, nor even correct.
In early Spanish literature that form frequently occurs, per-
forming the office now almost exclusively filled by the regular
terminations of the tenses, and chiefly those of the future indic-
ative and the imperfect of the subjunctive.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. $ Que lo giista a Y. inns, la conversation 6 la lectura ? Ambas cosas
me gustan muclio.
2. i Que genero dc lectura le gnsta a Y. mas ? La Li.-toria, la come-
dia, y la novela.
3. i Prefiere Y. la prosa al verso ? X o, sefior, la pocsia me gnsta
mas ; pero ha de ser muy bacna, porque en poesia no me gnsta la me-
diania.
4. Que autores,. en la literatura moderna, me aconseja Y. que lea
LESSON LI I. 279
para pei-feccionanne en el espafiol. En historia y politica lea V. a La-
fuente, y a Mifiano.
5. i Y para la comedia ? A Moratin, Breton de los Hcrreros y Don
Ventura De la Vega.
6. i No tienen Vds. otros ? Si, sefior ; pero yo le cito a V. solamente
los mejores y solamente a los contemporaneos.
7. ^Y poetas? Zorrilla, Espronceda, Hartzenbusch, y otros mu-
chos.
8. i Tienen Vds. algun buen critico contemporaneo por el estilo del
antiguo Quevedo ? Yo creo que no pueden encontrarse dos Quevedos ;
pero, sin embargo, tenemos criticos de costumbres muy buenos, tales corao
Larra (Figaro), Don Ramon de Mesonero Romanes, Pelegrin, y otros.
9. Tienen Vds. buenos autores para la tragedia y el drama ? Si,
seflor, muy buenos, por ejemplo, Martinez de la Rosa, Garcia Gutierrez,
Gil y Zarate, etc., etc.
10. Yo no sabia que tuviesen Vds. tantos autores buenos en la litera-
tura actual. Yo pudiera citarle a V. otros muchos ; pero si V. reune
las obras de los catorce mencionados lograra V. tener una pequefiita
libreria de literatura moderna, que le ensefiara a V. mas espaflol que
todas las gramuticas y metodos que se ban compuesto para enseflar esta
lengua basta el dia, y que lo remuneraran a V. ampliamente por el tra-
bajo que le ha costado el aprenderla, con el placer y la instruccion que
le comunicaran.
11. ;Es posible! Yo habia oido decir, y asi lo habia llegado a creer
yo mismo, que Espafia no poseia nada que mereciese mcncion en su litera-
tuva moderna, y a decir verdad, los unices libros buenos que creia que
Vds. poseian eran el Don Quijote de Cervantes y las obras dramaticas de
Calderon de la Barca. Asi lo be oido yo decir tambien, y en verdad
que es una cosa que no puedo coraprender, esa general ignorancia de la
existencia de una literatura espafiola contemporanea, que ha proclucido
mas y mejores obras que las que se ban producido en algunos siglos no
solamente en Espafia sino en otras nacioncs.
12. ^Se conocen en Espafia nuestros autores ingleses contemporaneos?
Se conocen mucbo mas de lo que aqui son conocidos los espanoles ; la
prueba cs que la mayor parte estan traducidos al castellano, y Vds. no
tienen ninguna traduccion, que yo scpa, de todos esos autores que acabo
de citarle a V.
13. Probablemente consiste en que los Americanos 6 Ingleses no apren-
den mncho el espafiol. Entre los Americanos debo hacer tres boarosas
excepciones, que son : "Washington Irving, Prestcott, y Ticknor. Estos
distinguidos escritores no solo aprendieron el espafiol, sino que viajaron
en Espafia, visitaron nuestras mejores bibliotecas y quiza adquirieron en
280 LESSON LI I.
aqnellas fuentes mucho del saber, la erudition, el gusto y la elcgancia en
el decir quo comunican a sus obras tanto interes y amenidad.
EXERCISE.
1. Ought we not to make the most of (profit by) every occasion that
offers for acquiring knowledge ? That is the only way to arrive at the
possession of knowledge.
2. Tell the cook I do not wish that fish to be fried. It is too late to
tell her so ; she has already fried it.
3. Has that work been translated into Spanish? Not that I know;
but it was translated with success into French, by M. de 1'Onne, a few
years ago.
4. Is not that gentleman to whom you introduced me a short time
since a dramatist ? He is, and his plays might serve as a model of ele-
gance for many dramatists of higher pretensions (pretemiones) than he.
5. Have they found out yet who set fire to your uncle's house ? Yes ;
and the offender has been arrested and convicted of the crime.
6. Would you be good enough to lend me that novel of which you
read a chapter to me the day before yesterday? I would with great
pleasure if it were mine ; but it belongs to Alexander ; and, as we are on
bad terms at present, I should not like to ask him for any favors.
7. "Would that painting be deteriorated* by being exposed to the heat
of the sun (sol) ? Certainly; and the heat of a strong fire would produce
the same effect upon it.
8. Did your Mend, the captain, return with his regiment from the
war ? No ; he was killed in the first battle that took place after his
arrival at the seat (teatro) of war.
9. I saw no mention made of his death in the newspapers. No; I
believe his name did not appear in the list (lista) of the killed ; but the
sad news was communicated to his brother by an officer of the same
regiment.
10. Do you like to walk in the garden in the morning before breakfast ?
I generally go to the garden every morning and evening to read and
smoke in the cool air.
11. I wish yon had bought that work on English literature. So do I ;
it would have been very useful to Louisa, who is so desirous of becoming
perfect in that language.
12. Did your father think Peter merited the remuneration he received ?
I do not know whether he did or not ; but, at all events, Peter must have
merited some remuneration, or else he would have got none.
* Deterioro ::
LESSON LIU.
281
13. Are you going to have your name engraved on your watch? I
shall only have my initials (inicial) engraved on it.
14. What kind of literature does your aunt like hest? Ha! you ask
me more than I can tell you ; I really cannot say whether she has any
taste in the matter ; for the fact is, never having taken her for a woman
of much erudition, I have not taken the trouble to ask her.
LESSON LIII.
Agradar.
Aguantar.
Alcanzar.
Alimentar.
Armar.
Bajar.
Corretear.
Conceder.
Distar.
Descomponer.
Determinar.
Echar.
Exceder.
Hinchar.
Nadar.
Prohibir.
Quitar.
Contrario.
Descompuesto.
Dotado.
Excelcntc.
Indigno.
Improvise.
Terrible.
Antojo.
Alcance.
Desire, longing,
whim.
Beach.
To please.
To bear with, to put up with, to
suffer.
To reach, to overtake,to catch.
To feed.
To arm.
To go (or come) down.
To run about.
To concede, to grant.
To be distant.
To decompose, to put out of
order.
To determine, to induce.
To throw, to put (in).
To exceed.
To swell.
To swim.
To prohibit.
To take off, to take away.
Contrary.
Decomposed, out of order.
Endowed, gifted.
Excellent.
Unworthy.
Improvised, unexpected.
Terrible.
Alabanza. Praise.
Apariencia. Appearance.
Estocada. Thrust.
282
LESSON LIII.
Consejo.
Counsel.
Busca,
Search.
Discurso.
Speech, discourse.
Comida.
Dinner.
Gatillo.
Pincers (dentist's).
Custodia.
Keeping.
Juicio.
Judgment, trial.
Edad.
Age.
Juramento.
Oath, affidavit.
Hermosura.
Beauty.
Mar.
Sea.
Obligacion.
Duty.
Navio.
Ship.
Vela.
Sail, candle.
Piso.
Floor, story.
Travesura.
Trick, pertness.
Tiro.
Shot.
Corrida de toros.
Bull-fight.
Preccpto.
Precept.
Oposicion.
Opposition.
Torero.
Bull-fighter.
Toro.
Bull.
Tribunal.
Tribunal, court.
COMPOSITION.
Correr por las calles.
Hablo de (or sobre) ese negocio.
f, Que esta V. haciendo ?
Estaba para decirselo a V.
Xo alcanzo a comprenderlo.
Hace las cosas a su antojo.
Iba en busca de un amigo.
Me opuse a ello.
A lo largo del rio.
Venga V. conmigo.
Xo se que detenninar.
De ningun modo.
Esta comiendo.
Entro por la ventana.
Delante de mi ventana.
Ante el juez.
Antes de ahora.
Tales acciones son indignas de
ballero.
Parecia fuera de sf.
Excede a toda alabanza.
Sin duda alguna.
De dia.
Uno a uno.
6 Por donde le vino a V. ?
Luego.
Por mar.
A la mano.
To run about the streets.
He spoke about that affair.
What are you about ?
I was about to tell it to you.
It is above my comprehension.
He does things after his own fancy.
I was in search of a friend.
I set my face against it.
By the river side.
Come along with me.
I am at a loss how to act.
Xot at all.
He is at dinner.
He came in by the window.
Before my window.
Before the judge.
Before now.
Such actions are beneath a gentleman.
He appeared to be beside himself.
It is beyond all praise.
Beyond all doubt.
By day.
One by one.
How did you come by it ?
By and by.
By sea.
At hand.
LESSON LIII.
283
Ediclo V. en ticrra.
En cuunto a mi.
Digaselo V. do mi partc.
A consequcncia de cso.
De acuerdo con.
Tenia csperanza de que scrviria.
Bajar al jardin.
Todos nosotros.
Le pido a V.
i Cuanto dista ?
De improvise.
Quitese V. el sombreo.
Se la llevo.
Le deje ir.
For esc motive.
Adelante.
Sobre mi palabra.
Al contrario.
No se tratan.
Lcs mipuso esa obligacion.
Alimcntarse do esperanzas.
Venga V. cl doce de Mayo.
Al (or del) otro lado.
Sc acabo.
Vuelva V. a Icerlo.
De miedo.
Fuera de peligro.
Fuera de casa.
Esta sin dinero.
Descompuesto.
Perdio el juieio.
For curiosidad.
Estar de mal humor.
Pasare a su casa de V.
Pasamos por Francia.
Le atraveso de parte ii parte.
For cl.
Por medio de el.
De dia en dia.
Segun las apariencias.
Eso esta aun por venir.
Diez contra uno.
Hasta hoy.
El navio cstii a la vela.
Throw it down.
As for me.
Tell him that from me.
In consequence of that.
In accordance with.
I was in hopes that it would do.
To go down to the garden.
All of us.
I beg of you.
How far is it ?
Off-hand.
Take off your hat.
He carried her off.
I let him off.
On that account.
Go on.
On my word.
On the contrary,
They are not on good terms.
He imposed that duty upon them.
To live on hope.
Come on the 12th of May.
Over the way, on the other side.
It is all over.
Read it over again.
From fear, for fear.
Out of danger.
Out of doors.
He is out of money.
Out of order.
She is out of her mind.
Out of curiosity.
To be in bad humor.
I will go round to your house.
We passed through France.
He ran him through.
Through (?'. c., on account of) him.
Through (i. e., by means of) him.
From day to day.
By all appearances.
That is yet to come.
Ten to one.
To this day.
The ship is under sail.
284
LESSON LIII.
Es mehor de edad.
Bajo de juramcnto.
Hacia alia.
<, Estan levantados ?
Al segundo piso.
Que suban la comida.
Le pusieron en custodia.
Hincharse de soberbia.
No la puedo aguantar.
Armese V. de paciencia.
Su hermosura me sorprendi6.
No la conozco.
Dotado de virtudes.
Me agrado su discurso.
A tiro de pistola.
A mi alcance.
No hay nadie en casa.
Asomado a una vcntana.
He is under age,
Under oath.
Up that way.
Are they up ?
Up two nights of stairs.
Let them bring up the dinner.
He was taken into custody.
To be puffed up with pride.
I cannot put up with her.
Arm yourself with patience.
I was struck with her beauty.
I am not acquainted with her.
Endowed with virtues.
I was pleased with his discourse.
Within pistol-shot.
"With my reach.
There is nobody within.
At a window.
EXPLANATION.
266. IDIOMS are certain peculiar modes of expression which
cannot be translated literally into another language. "We have
already introduced some Spanish as well as English idioms ;
but they are very numerous in all languages, and it would be
as unnecessary to give within the compass of a grammar all
those peculiar to the Spanish language, as it would be to intro-
duce all its words. The learner will find them in the several
dictionaries, and principally in the works of good writers.
However, we have introduced in the "Composition" of this
lesson as many as the limits of this book would allow ; giving
examples of phrases in which the English preposition differs in
meaning from that which most generally constitutes its proper
signification, and consequently must be translated by words
corresponding to those in whose place it stands ; as,
No s6 quo determinar.
De ninjnin modo.
I am at a loss how to act.
Not at all.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i En donde esta Alejandro ? Esta corriendo por las calles.
2. ^Porqu6 no me lo dijiste dates? Estaba para decirselo a V.
LESSON LIU. 285
3. Yo no quiero que ande correteando calles. Creo que iba en busca
de su amigo.
4. Se lo tengo prohibido ; pero el no me obedece, y hace las cosas a
su antojo. Yo me opuse a ello, y le dije qu6 V. queria ir a paseo con
todos nosotros.
5. Don Carlos, si V. quiere, ire a buscarlo. De ningun modo, Y. no
lo encontraria ; lo que tenio es que haga alguna travesura que le cueste
cara.
6. Yo creo que subiendo a lo largo del rio lo encontrare", porque si no
me engafio le oi decir que queria ir a nadar. No s6 qu6 determinar, pero
no, mejor sera dejarlo, vamonos nosotros a paseo (or vamos).
7. Su hermano Manuel es muy diferente, excede d toda alabanza ^
siempre obedece los preceptos de su papa. Sin duda alguna Manuel ea
un excelente muchacho.
8. ; Hola ! aqui viene Juanito. g Yiene Y. al carnpo con nosotros ?
Con mucbo gusto ; pero antes tengo que pedir a V. un favor.
9. Delo V. por concedido. $ Palabra de honor ? Sobre mi palabra.
^Que es?
10. Que perdone Y. a Alejandro. j Yaya! sea asi, puesto que di mi
palabra; gpero donde esta? Se escondi6 y no se atreve a presentarse de
iniedo, pero abora lo veo asomado a una ventana en el segundo piso do
su casa de Y.
11. Yo creo que ha perdido el juicio ese muchacho ; venga Y. aca,
sefior mio, y cu6ntenos que ha hecho en todo este tiempo que ha estado
fucra de casa. Papa, perdoneine Y., que no lo volvere a hacer otra
vez.
12. Bien, bien, dejemoslo asi por esta vez.
13. i Don Jose, corno esta su hermana de Y. ? Esta mejor y esperamos
que ya esta fnera de peligro.
14. $Mat6 el torero al toro a la primera estocada? Si, sefior, d la
priinera estocada lo atraveso de parte a parte.
15. i No se trata Y. con su vecino ? No, sefior, es un hombrc lleno
de soberbia, a quien no puedo aguantar.
16. $Se dio el navio a la vela para la Habana? Si, sefior, el navio
esta a la vela.
IT. $Pusieron al culpable en custodia? No, sefior, le dejaron bajo
juramento de que se presentaria en el tribunal.
18. ^Conoce Y. % ala Sefiorita Sanchez? Hace poco tiempo que hice
su conocimiento, su hermosura me sorprendio y es una sefiorita dotada
de grandes virtudes.
19. g Yiaj6 V. el verano pasado por mar 6 por tierra? Por supuesto
por mar, puesto que fui a Europa.
286 LESSON LI 1 1.
20. i Pasaron Yds. por Francia ? Si, setter, pasamos por Francia, y el
doce de Mayo entramos en Paris.
21. $Esta V. de mal humor? Si, seflor, malisimo, porque tengo un
terrible dolor de njuelas.
22. Le aconsejo a V. que se arme de paciencia. Mil gracias, por su
buen consejo, pero creo que sera roejor armarse de un buen gatillo.
EXERCISE.
1. How does that man spend his time ? He seems to do nothing but
run about the streets.
2. Is your uncle's sight not good ? No, sir ; and that is the reason
.why he wears spectacles.
3. Is that the way you spell (escribir) that word ? Oh, no, of course
not ; I must take out one of the e>s.
4. Does your watch keep good time (andar lien) ? Yes, when it
goes, which occurs very rarely* ; it gets out of order about twice a month.
5. Did you see the Spanish man-of-war (ship of war) that came into
port (puerto) last month ? Yes, I saw it the day it set sail (darse a la
veld) to return to Spain.
6. Did you go to see a bull-fight during your stay at Madrid ? I did ;
and although I do not like it myself, yet I could not help (no podcr menos
de) admiring the amazing dexterity of the men (bull-fighters) who dared
to expose their lives attacking the furious animal.
V. How many stories are there in the house you live in ? Three ; I
generally sleep on the third floor.
8. Can you not induce him to stay at home ? No, he wants to go ;
it is a whim of his, and he will not bear with any opposition.
9. "Were you hi court at the time of the trial? No, I could not go
down town that day.
10. How far had he gone before you overtook him ? I caught up with
him at the corner of the street.
11. How is your cousin getting on ? Pretty well ; but his arm is still
swollen, and to all appearance it pains him very much.
12. I wonder how he can bear up under so much suffering. He lives
in the hope of getting better one day or other.
13. Did that man swear he had not been there? He made (prestar)
affidavit that he had never set (put) his foot in the house.
14. What a beautiful young lady that is ! That is true ; but her learn-
ing by far exceeds her beauty.
* Kara res.
LESSON LIV.
287
LESSON LIV.
Apegarse.
Criar.
Concebir.
Continual*.
Encerrar.
Guardar.
Pintar.
Presidir.
Ponderar.
Corabatir,
Tteducir.
Rodar.
Sacudir.
Tirar.
Llenar.
Entusiasmar.
Al cabo.
De repente.
No obstante.
Si acaso.
Si bien.
Amarillo.
Azul.
Anaranjado.
Atento.
Confuso.
Feroz.
Bondadoso.
Favorito.
Griego.
Anil.
Ligero.
Lleno.
Hontaraz.
Vistoso.
Colorado, rojo.
To adhere to, to be attached.
To raise (breed), to bring up.
To conceive.
To continue.
To shut up.
To guard, to take care, to keep. ,
To paint.
To preside.
To make much of, to praiae.
To combat.
To reduce.
To roll.
To shake, to shake off.
To pull, to draw, to throw, to
throw out (or away).
To fill.
To render enthusiastic.
After all, finally, at the end.
Suddenly, on a sudden.
Notwithstanding.
If at all, in case.
Although.
Yellow.
Blue.
Orange.
Attentive.
Confused.
Fierce.
Kind.
Favorite.
Greek.
Indigo.
Light, slight, speed/.
Full.
Mountaineer, wild.
Conspicuous, showy.
Red.
288
LESSON LIV.
Romano.
Roman.
Particular.
Particular, private, rare.
Picante.
Pungent.
Temerario.
Dariug, rash.
Violado.
Violet (color).
Verde.
Green.
Prismatico.
Prismatic.
Cabo. End.
Algazara. Shouts (of joy).
"Circo. Siege, circus.
Autoridad. Authority.
Color. Color.
Confusion. Confusion.
Bullicio. Rumpus, noise,
Carcajada. Burst of laughter.
bustle.
Corrida. Fight (bull), race.
Ceremonial. Ceremony.
Violeta. Violet (flower).
Espectro solar. Solar spectrum.
Diversion. Diversion.
Goce. Delight, joy.
Clase. Class.
Dicho. Saying.
Infancia, Infancy.
Desierto. Desert.
Idea. Idea.
Interes. Interest.
Fiesta. Feast, festival.
Guante. Glove.
Guinada. "Wink.
Leon. Lion.
Ocupacion. Occupation.
Local. Situation.
Corrida de toros. Bull-fight.
Entusiasmo. Enthusiasm.
Pelota. Ball.
Enemigo. Enemy.
Plaza de toros. Arena.
Lloros. Tears, cry.
Proeza. Prowess, exploits.
Paso. Step, pace.
Sonrisa. Smile.
Prisma, Prism.
Valentia. Bravery.
Rumor. Rumor.
Jaula. Cage.
Ser. Being.
Traje, Dress, costume.
Recibimiento. Reception.
Suelo. Ground.
Grito. Shout, cry.
COMPOSITION.
Los vimos cuando entrabamos.
Si no hubiera sido por mi, le habrian
matado.
Yo iria si no creyera que fuese inutil.
Diga V. si vendra 6 no.
Que venga 6 que no venga.
Dudo que lo sepa.
We saw them as we were going in.
But for me, they would have killed him.
I would go, but that I think it us.
Say whether you will come or not
Whether he come or not.
I doubt whether she knows it.
LESSON LIV.
289
Por atentos y bondadosos quc scan (or
no obstante lo atentos que son) y por
bondadosos que sean.
Es menester que se cuide V., porque si
no se enfermara.
Es menester que obedezca Y. las orde-
nes ; de lo contrario sufrira las con-
secuencias.
yo tengo razon 6 el la tiene.
Ni prometas ni obres sin pensar.
No lo haria si me important la vida ( i. c.,
aunque, or por mas que me importa-
ra la vida).
Yaliente si los hay.
Tuvo el valor, si tal nombre merece una
accion temeraria de coiubatir solo
contra tantos enemigos.
Quiero saber si emplea bieu el tiempo.
<: Si habra llegado el correo ?
Mira si viene.
No se si lo haga.
Si (es que) acabo de entrar.
Si (cuando) el al cabo ha de venir.
Si (es que) no es eso.
Si (ya) lo dije.
Si (porque) no hay cosa que yo haga.
Apenas si se oia el confuso rumor de
los pasos.
However attentive they are, and how-
ever kind they may be.
You must take care of yourself, for if
you do not you will be ill.
You must obey the orders ; for if you
transgress them, you will suffer the
consequences.
Either I am right or he is.
Neither promise nor act without think-
ing.
I would not do it, though my life were
at stake.
A valiant man, if there are any in the
world.
He had the courage, if the rash action
of fighting alone against so many
enemies is worthy of such a name.
I wish to know whether he employs his
time profitably.
If the mail should have arrived ?
See if he is coming.
I do not know whether to do it or not.
I have but just come in.
For, after all, he must come.
But that is not it.
But I said so.
For I do nothing at all.
The confused tramping of feet could
scarcely be heard.
EXPLANATION.
267. There are several conjunctions in English that are
frequently used, as substitutes for other words ; these conjunc-
tions are generally rendered in Spanish by the words which
they stand in the place of; as,
Los vimos cuando entrabamos.
Diga Y. si quiere venir 6 no.
We saw them as we were going in.
Say whether you will come or not.
268. The Spanish conjunctions are also often used as sub-
stitutes for other words of very different meanings. Let si and.
que serve as examples :
13
290 LESSON LIV.
Si, as an adverb, is, as we have already observed, affirmative,
except when employed ironically.
Si, as a conjunction, may be employed in a variety of signi-
fications. The following are some of its principal uses;
1st. To denote the condition on which depends the accom-
plishment of an action ; as,
Si quicrcs acompauarme, voy a salir.
If j'ou will accompany me, I am go-
ing out.
2d. To express indispensable conditions ; as,
Tendras cl caballo si lo pagas.
You will have the horse if you pay
for it.
3d. In the sense of although, or even though ; as,
No lo haria si me importara la vida
(*'. ., aunque or por mas quo, me
I would not do it, . even though my
life were at stake.
importara la vida).
4th. In familiar conversation this conjunction is often em-
ployed in meanings very different from those we have just ex-
plained. For instance, it is often used instead of es que, it is
because ; cuando, when ; porque, because ; and not unfrequent-
ly instead of ?/a, already, as we read in one of Moratin's come-
dies :
Si (cs quo) acabo de entrar.
Si (cuando) el al cabo ha de venir.
Si (es que) no es eso.
Si (ya) lo dije.
Si (porque) no hay cosa que yo haga.
I have but just come in.
For, after all, he must come.
But that is not it.
But I said so (or did say so).
For I do nothing at all.
5th. It is often used redundantly ; as,
Apenas si so oia cl confuso rumor dc
los pasos.
The confused tramping of feet could
scarcely be heard.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Iria V. a ver a su hermano. si tuvicra tiempo ? Yo iria si no cre-
yera que fuese inutil.
2. Diga V. si vendra 6 no. Amigo mio teino salir, porque hacc mal
tiempo, y es menester que me cuide porque si no enfermare.
3. ^Estuvo V. aver u ver el recibimiento del Presidcnte? No, seilor,
mis ocupaciones no me lo permitieron,
LESSON LTV. 291
4. i Cuales son. log colores en quo se descomponc el cspectro solar ?
Yiolado, anil, azul, verde, amarillo, anaranjado y rojo.
5. i De que color tine V. sus guantes ? Los tiflo de amarillo.
G. i Quo tal le gusta u V. este ejercicio ? No me gusta de ningun
modo, y si contiuua tan intercsante como hasta aqoi, creo que me hard
dormir.
V. i Que costumbres le gustan d V. mas, las de Espafia 6 las de los
Estados Unidos? Xaturalrnente, como espaQolj me gustan mas las de
Espafia.
8. Pero i cuales son las mejorcs ? No sabr6 dccirselo a V., cada nation
tiene las suyas y cada individuo se apega desde su infancia u las dc su
propio pais.
1). i Cual es la diversion favorita del pueblo espafiol ? Las corridas de
toros ; esto se entiende hablando del pueblo en general y aun de muclios
caballeros de la pnmera clase de la socicdad; pero no de todos, porqiie
hay muclios, principalmente, sefioras, que jamas han visto una corrida de
Toros.
10. Debe ser una diversion muy cruel y muy peligrosa. Xo deja de
scr peligrosa, pues los toros de Espaila son mas feroces y ligeros que los
de ninguna parte del mundo, criados con este objeto niontaraces, cle modo
que cuando de improviso se encuentran en la plaza muestran una feroci-
dad y una valentia en nada inferior a la de un Icon de los desiertos del Afri-
ca, que se encontrase de repente en estos circos llenos de seres hurnanos.
11. gQuiere V. hacerme el favor de relatarme una corrida de toros?
Lo haria con mucho gusto ; pero se que no podria hacerlo como mcrcce
csta antigua diversion, en algo scmejantc a los circos de los Griegos y
Ilomanos.
12. jVamos! pruebe V. Pero si cs imposible, y aunque llegara a pin-
tarle a Y. cl local, los vistosos trajes, tanto del pueblo como de los tore-
ros, los curiosos ceremoniales de la fiesta, las autoridades que la presiden,
las tropas que la guardan ; la rnusica, el bullicio, los dicbos picantes, las
sonrisas, las guinadas, los lloros y carcajadas, todo esto no serviria do
uada para hacerle a V. concebir una pcqueua idea del gozo y entasiasmo
que anima al pueblo espanol eu una corrida de tovo?.
13. jEs posible! jCon que todo eso hay! pues yo creia que se rodu-
cia a una carniceria de vacas y caballos. Pues si V. estuviera en Madrid
le sucederia como a todos los extrangeros, que a pesar de criticarnos esta
diversion, jamas pierden una corrida de toros.
14. Pero i en que puede consistir cse goce que Y. me pondera ? ; Goce !
hombre, lie vi4o yo tirar a la plaza el baston, el bolsillo y hastal reloj,
entusiasmado de la proeza de algun toreador. Eso era lo que yo le decia
a Y. que no era focil de pintar, porque no consiste en la cosa misma por
292 LESSON LIV.
mas interns que tenga sino en la disposition particular y el entusiasmo de
cada uno. Y si no digame V. en el juego del fragata* americano en
quo no se ve otra cosa que una pelota quo rueda por el suelo, 6 se eleva
por el aire, despedida por un garrote ; j ;Que cs lo que mueve
toda aquella algazara y ruido y confusion y grftos de, Hola ! ! ! "Willie ! ! !
Charley ! ! ! Here ! ! ! Here ! ! ! Run ! ! ! James ! ! ! Hurra ! ! ! Hurra ! ! !
15. Ha, lia, ha ; V. roe bace reir con su corrida de toros. j Vaya ! me
alegro, algo se ha ganado, porque al principle yo creia que V. se iba a
dormir.
EXERCISE.
1. Had you not better leave a line for him in case he should come?
I think it would be better ; notwithstanding that it seems impossible for
him to get here to-night.
2. Do tbe boys still continue to take lessons ? One of them still con-
tinues, although the least studious of the three ; the other two gave up
all of a sudden last month.
3. What shouts are those I hear up-stairs ? Charles has some friends
with him, and they are getting enthusiastic on the occasion of tbe Presi-
dent's visit to the city.
4. Do you know how to keep a secret? I want to know that before I
tell you this one. I do. Veil, so do I.
5. I supposet they gave the General a grand reception when he re-
turned from the war? A magnificent J one, fit for a king; it was Peter's
uncle that presided at it.
6. Can you tell me how many prismatic colors there are, and their
names ? I shall try ; let us see : Green, blue, violet, red, orange, yellow,
indigo.
7. What is the best time for learning a language with the least
trouble ? During infancy; in that age the study of languages is reduced
to its simplest expression.
8. What would the earth be without the light and heat which we re-
ceive from the sun ? A perfect desert ; man nor no living being could
exist, and there would be no vegetation, for all animated nature is sus-
tained by the vivifying (civificador) effects of the sun.
9. What is the nse of the prism ? It possesses the power of decom-
posing the sunbeam (rayo del sol), thus enabling (podcr} us to see separate-
ly the rays of different colors which unite to form what is called light.
10. Where are you going now ? it is not yet time for the theatre. Why,
it is half-past seven, and the play begins at eight precisely.
11. If my friend should have come while I was out? Oh, I imagine
that if he had come he would have left some word (dejar dicho) for you.
* Base ball. t Sitponer. $ Mngnifico.
LESSON LV.
293
12. "What is that confused tramping of feet* that I hear in the street?
A crowd of people running to see a fire in the next street.
13. Do you hear how that lady praisesf the courage of the man who has
just got into the lion's cage (jaula) ? I do, and I was just thinking she
might find an occupation of more interest ; besides, I do not see any
proof of courage in such a rash action as to shut one's self up with a fe-
rocious animal like the lion.
14. What sort of a dress did Miss II. wear at the hall ? A blue silk
(seda) dress, with violet and orange trimmings (guarnicioncs). Can you
conceive of any thing more detestable ?
LESSON LV.
Afianzar.
Conquistar.
Construir.
Fundar.
Medir.
To secure, to fasten, to prop.
To conquer.
To construct, to build.
To found, to go upon (a principle).
To measure.
Portarse.
Tirar.
To conduct one's self, to behave.
To throw.
Desigual.
Extremado.
Unequal.
Extreme.
Horrendo.
Horrific.
Distinto.
Distinct.
Ridicnlo.
Ridiculous.
Inmemorial.
Immemorial.
Recto.
Right, straight.
k
Auxilio. Help.
Castellano. Castilian.
Andalucia. Andalusia.
Castilla. Castile.
Arabe. Arab.
Catalufia. Catalonia.
Crimen. Crime.
Corona. Crown.
Catalan. Catalonian.
Avila. Avila. .
Cimiento. Foundation.
Galicia. Galicia.
Dialecto. Dialect.
Fulano. Such a one, so
and so.
Gallego. Galician.
Modelo. Model.
Isabel. Elizabeth, Isa-
bella.
Imperfeccion. Imperfection.
Irregularidad. Irregularity.
Guipuzcoa. Guipuzcoa.
* Rumor de pasos.
t Aplaudir.
294
LESSON LV.
Defecto.
Defect.
Igualdad.
Equality.
Me>ito.
Merit.
Medida.
Measure.
Eeino
Kingdom.
PesjL
Weight (for
Terreno.
Ground.
weighing).
Titulo.
Title.
Noblcza.
Nobility.
Vascuence.
Basque.
Persona.
Person.
Zutano.
Such a one.
Moneda.
Coin.
Escritorio.
Office.
Regularidad.
Regularity.
Valencia.
Valencia.
Vizcaya.
Biscay.
Universidad.
University.
COMPOSITION.
Tratemos ahora de descansar que sera
lo mejor.
Si no hay virtudcs, que son el cimiento
de la libertad, no se afiauzara esta en
los pueblos.
j Quo* hermosa que estas !
Ese si que es un modo de portarse con
honor.
Que Hainan.
Que me dejc en paz.
j Que me matan !
En muchas obras no se encucntra otro
(or mas) merito que el estilo.
Es que estoy ocupado.
Es que se encuentra sin ningun auxilio.
Con la perdida de su madre esta todo
el dia llora que llora.
j Que no lo hubiera yo sabido !
,; Quo siempre has de ser un holgazan ?
i Quo hermoso cielo !
j Quo horrenda noche !
i Qu6 cielo tan hermoso !
A que si.
A que no.
A_que lo digo.
A que lo hago.
i Que de crimenes se vieron !
i Que de injusticias no se cometen !
i Que ! j no vienes ?
Let us try to rest now ; that will be
best.
If there are no virtues, which are the
foundation of liberty, the latter will
have no firm foothold among nations.
How beautiful you are !
That, now, is an honorable mode of
acting.
Some one is calling (knocking).
Let him let me alone.
Murder !
Many works are void of all merit save
the style.
Well, but I am busy.
Well, but he is entirely forsaken.
She does nothing the whole day over
but lament the loss of her mother.
Ah ! could I but have known it !
Arc you always to be a sluggard ! ^
What a beautiful sky !
What a horrific night !
What a beautiful sky !
I will bet you it is.
I will bet you it is not.
I will bet you I can say it.
I will bet you I can do it.
How much crime there was !
How much injustice is there not com-
mitted !
What ! are you not coming ?
LESSON LV.
205
i Fulano ! i Quo ?
Ire a pasco, quc no estare sicinpre mc-
tido en casa.
Quo quicra que no quiera.
Xo cs hijo mio, quo si lo fucra ....
Such a one ! What ?
I shall go and take a walk, for I will
not be always stuck in the house.
Whether lie will or not.
lie is no sou of mine, for if he were . . .
EXPLANATION.
269. QUE, as :i conjunction, is employed in so many differ-
cMit ways and meanings, tending to perplex the learner, that
we deem it essential to mention here some of its principal uses :
It is employed as a copulative ; as,
Tratemos ahora de descansar, quc sera
lo mejor.
It sometimes serves to introduce an incidental proposition
dependent on the principal one ; as,
Let us go to rest now ; that will be
best.
Si no hay virtudes, que son el cimiento
de la libertad, no so afianzara esta
en los pueblos.
If there are no virtues, which are the
foundation of liberty, the latter will
have no firm foothold among nations.
It is employed instead of sino, but after either of the ad-
jectives otro or mas ; as,
Many works are void of all merit ex-
cept the style.
En muchas obras no se encuentra otro
(or mas) merito que el estilo.
It is -employed instead of pero, but in the phrase es qu&,
with which we convey the reason why something is or is
not done ; as,
Es que estoy ocupado. I But I am busy.
Us que se encuentra sin ningun auxilio. | But he is entirely forsaken.
The conjunction que, placed between two words of the
same meaning, besides uniting them as a conjunction, gives
more energy to the expression ; as,
Con la perdida de su madre esta todo
el dia llora quc llora.
She is the whole day over lamenting
the loss of her mother.
At other times it serves to confirm more and more the ex-
pression ; as,
/ Que hermosa que estas ! (instead of,
/ Que hermosa estas !)
i Ese si que es un modo de portarsc con
honor ! (histcad of ; Ese si es un mo-
do dc portarsc con honor !)
How beautiful you arc !
That, now, is an honorable mode of
acting !
296 LESSON LV.
The conjunction que, at the beginning of a sentence, implies
a proposition going before it ; as,
Que Hainan.
Que me deje en paz.
/ Que me matan !
tk>me one is calling.
Let him let me alone,
ilurder !
In all these examples a proposition is understood before the
que ; as, mirad, in the first ; deseo or quiero, in the second ; and
reparad or sabed, in the third.
When the sentence is interrogative or exclamatory, que
denotes desire and expostulation ; as,
/ Que no lo hubiera yo sabido !
/ Que siempre has de ser un holgazan !
Ah ! could I but have known it !
Are you always to be a sluggard !
In an exclamatory sentence, and when it precedes a noun
adjective, it is equivalent to cudn ; as,
/ Que hermoso cielo ! I What a beautiful sky !
/ Que horrenda noche ! | What an horrific night !
But if in these sentences the substantive comes first, the particle
tan must be put between, because we cannot say: / Que cielo
hermoso ! but, / Que cielo tan hermoso !
In some sentences a determining verb is understood ; as,
A que si.
A que no.
A que lo digo.
A que lo hago.
I will bet you it is.
I will bet you it is not
I will bet you I can say it.
I will bet you I can do it,
in which is understood the 'present indicative apuesto, I bet.
In other sentences it is equivalent to a collective noun or a
plural adjective, and requires to be followed by the preposition
de; as,
/ Que de crimenes sc vieron !
/ Que de injusticias no se cometen !
How much crime there was !
How much injustice is there not com-
mitted !
instead of saying: / Cudntos cnmenes ! / Cudntas injusticias!
or, / Que multitud de cnmenes e injusticias!
It also denotes surprise, and is used as an interrogative, and
for answering ; as,
/ Que ! i no vienes ? | What ! are you not coming ?
LESSON LV. 297
and is equivalent to an entire proposition answering ; as,
; Fulano ! / Quit? (i. c. j Quo quieres ?)
Such a one ! What ? (/. e. What do you
want ?)
At other times it is employed instead of the adversative
sino, and the copulative y, in periods where the second member
denotes opposition to what is expressed in the first ; as,
No !o conseguira ; que se quedarii con
cl desco (instead of sino que se que-
dara, etc.).
Ire a pasco, que no estare siempre mc-
tido en casa (instead of y no estare,
He will not get it, but will remain with
the desire.
I shall go out to walk, for I will not be
always stuck in the house.
etc.).
It is not unfrequently used in the place of a disjunctive con-
junction ; as,
Que quiera que no quicra (i. e., quiera Whether he will or not.
6 no quiera).
It is sometimes substituted for one or other of the causals,
pues, porque, pues que ; as,
No es hijo mio, que si lo fucra . . . (i. e.,
He is no son of mine, for if he were . . .
porque or pues, si lo fuera).
In this meaning it is more used in poetry than in prose ; as,
" Que quien se opone al cielo,
Cuanto mas alto sube, viene al suelo."
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. jSe habla el castellano en todas las provincias de Espafla ? En los
tribnnales, universicladcs, y oficinas publicas, si sefior ; pero el pueblo ha-
bla diferentes dialectos.
2. jQu6 dialectos son estos? El Catalan, que se habla en Cataluua;
el valenciano, en Valencia ; el gallego, en Galicia ; y el vascuence que se
habla en las provincias vascongadas, que son Alava, Guiptizcoa y Vizca-
ya ; se cree quo este ultimo es lengua madre y una de las mas antiguas
de Eoropa.
3. iEn donde se habla cl castellano ? En las demas provincias, Cas-
tilla, Aragon y Andalucia.
4. Porque no se habla el espafiol en toda Espafia ? Porque Espafia
estuvo anteriormentc dividida en varies reinos ; de estos algunos fueron
conquistados por los Arabes, otros pertcnecieron a Francia, y otros final-
inente permanecieron imlcpendientes por muchos siglos, hasta que Fernan-
13*
298 LESSON LV.
do 6 Isabel, echando a los Arabes de EspaQa, reunieron las coronas de
Aragon y Castilla.
5. i Son diferentes las costumbres de las provincias de Espafta ? Mu-
cho; no solamente no se habla la misma lengua en todas, sino que hasta
poco tiempo hace cada provincia tenia leyes diferentes, y aim hoy dia
tienen pesas, medidas, traje y hasta caracteres niuy distintos.
G. Pues eso debc ser rauy incomodo ; en los Estados Unidos tenetuos
la ventaja de hablar nna misma lengua y tenemos las mismas pesas, me-
didas y monedas. Verdad es, pero tainbien es cierto que Yds. lian becho
todo esto con la experiencia adquirida en el antiguo mundo.
7. I Y porque no lo bacen Vds. asi en Espana ? Porque nosotros
tenemos ya establecidas estas cosas de tiempo inmemorial, y no es facil
cambiar costumbres arraigadas por tantos siglos.
8. Cuando Yds. fundan una ciudad en cste nucvo mundo, eligen el
terreno necesario, tiran Vds. lineas rectas y trazan calles y plazas ; para
esto no siguen el modelo de una antigua ciudad de Europa, pero las an-
tiguas ciudades de Europa con sns imperfecciones 6 irregularidades les ban
mostrado a Yds. el modo de construir ciudades, cuyo solo defecto con-
siste en su extremada regularidad.
9. g Y no cree V. que de csta igualdad resultan grandes ventajas ?
Sin duda alguna, y seria de desear que en todo el mundo se bablase la
misma lengua, bubiese la misma moneda, pesas y medidas, y, tanto como
el cliina, las costumbres y otras circunstancias lo permitiesen, las mismas
leyes.
10. Tambien me ban dicbo que bay en Espana varias clases de socie-
dad; ^no es asi? Si, senor; pero cso sucedc en todas las naciones del
mundo.
11. Xo en los Estados Unidos. Y. ve que aqui no se dan titulos de
nobleza, no bay diferencia en el traje, y decimos Mr. Johnson, hablando del
presidente, and Mr. Johnson, hablando de un carnicero, y el mismo Presi-
dente Johnson era antes sastre, de modo que la igualdad existe en las
personas como en las cosas.
12. No olvide Y., sin embargo, quo Dios no ha hecho dos cosas iguales
en el mundo, y que los hombres son quiza mas desigualcs entre si que
las mismas cosas. Concedido, y no hay cosa que mas ridicula me parezca
que las lavanderas vestidas de sefioras, y los roicdies del Bowery afectan-
^do ser caballeros.
EXERCISE.
1. Did you meet them as you were going in, or as you were coming
out? As we were going in.
LESSON LVI. 299
2. What is the name of that province in Spain in which they speak
the Catalonian language or dialect ? Catalonia.
3. In which province do they speak the Basque ? In the three Bas-
que provinces.
4. And do these dialects differ very materially* from the Castilian
language? Yes, very materially; in general they are more like the
French than the Spanish.
5. Have you ever heard the Spanish name for the natives of Galicia?
Yes, sir, for I am well acquainted with several Galicians living in New
York.
6. Can you tell me the weights and measures principally used in the
Peninsula (Peninsula) ? The principal weight, entirely different from all
those of the United States, is the arroba.
7. How many Isabellas have there been on the throne of Spain?
Two ; the first was Isabella the Catholic, and the present queen is Isa-
bella II.
8. By what event is the reign of Isabella the Catholic distinguished
from all other reigns? By the discovery of America by Christopher
Columbus (Cristobal Colon), in the year 1492.
9. Was there not some other very important event that occurred about
the same time? Ah! yes; at the commencement of that queen's reign;
you mean, I suppose, the conquest of the Arabs, and union of the crown
of Castile and Aragon.
10. Are railroads very common in the Peninsula ? Not so common as
in other European countries ; but of late years the spirit of enterprise
seems to be revived in Spain, and to the few which now exist we shall
soon see a large number of others added.
11. Let us sit down and rest for half an hour, for I am very tired, and
you must be so too.
12. How beautiful the sky looks (is) to night ! That is true ; but how
it rained all day !
13. How long has that newspaper been published? Ten years, for it
was established (founded) in 1856.
LESSON LYI.
Apreciar.
Apresurar.
Favorecer.
Invitar.
To appreciate.
To haste.
To favor.
To invite.
* J/c7(O.
300
LESSON LV1.
Apreciable.
Corriente.
Estimado.
Excelentisimo.
Favorecida.
Invariable.
Intimo.
Fino.
Servidor.
Mercantil.
Appreciable.
Current, fluent.
Esteemed.
Very (or most) excellent.
Favored.
Invariable.
Intimate.
Fine.
Servant.
Mercantile.
Comercio.
Commerce, trade.
Atencion.
Attention.
Corazon.
Heart.
Correspondencia.
Correspondence.
Convite.
Invitation, feast,
Esquela.
Note.
banquet, party.
Formula.
Form, formula.
Formulario.
List of formulas.
Expresion.
Expression.
Respeto.
Eespect.
Estructura.
Structure.
Sobrescrito.
Address.
Intimidad.
Intimacy.
Corresponsal.
Correspondent.
Inicial.
Initial.
Giros.
Manner (of style).
Residencia.
Residence.
COMPOSITION.
Sefior D. Jos6 Romero.
Muy Sr. mio.
Muy Sr. nuestro.
Muy Sres. mios.
Muy Sres. nuestros.
Senora Da. Isabel Jimenez.
Muy Sra. mia.
Muy Sra. nuestra.
Hemos recibido su ap ble , apreciable
(or su est da , estimada, or su favor 3 ",
favorecida).
Las de V. del 2 del corriente (or cor te ).
4 del pp do (proximo pasado).
Se repite a las ordenes de V.
S. S. S.
(Su seguro servidor).
Q. S. M. B.
(Que su mano besa).
M. De. T.
Q. S. P. B.
( To ladies, que sus pies besa). __
Mr. Joseph Romero.
Dear Sir, My Dear Sir.
Dear Sir.
Gentlemen.
Gentlemen.
Mrs. Isabella Jimenez.
Madam.
Madam.
We have received your favor (or your
esteemed favor).
Your favors of the 2d instant.
4th ult.
Yours very truly.
LESSON LVI.
301
Muy Sr. mio y amigo.
Mi querido amigo.
Mande V. con toda franqueza a su in-
variable amigo y S. S.
El Sr. A. De L. presenta (or ofrece) sus
respetos al Sr. D. I. DC H., y le hace
saber que.
Sr. D. Jose Martinez,
Del Comereio de Madrid.
Srcs. D. Francisco Sanchez,
Ilerrnanos y Ca., Cadiz.
Senora Da. Teodora Jimenez y
Arteta, Calle Mayor N. 10,
Zaragoza.
Al Ex mo . (Excelentisimo),
Sr. D. Juan Yalero y Arteta.
B. L. M.,
Al Sr. De V.
S. S. S.,
A. De T.
My Dear Sir and Friend.
My Dear Friend.
Command with freedom your true
friend and faithful servant
Mr. A. De L. presents his compliments
to Mr. I. De H., and begs to inform
him that.
Mr. Joseph Martinez,
Merchant, Madrid.
Messrs. Francis Sanchez Bros. & Co.,
Cadiz.
Mrs. Theodora Jimdnez y Arteta,
10 Mayor Street,
Saragossa.
To His Excellency, John Valero y
Arteta.
(Form of addressing letters, notes, &c.,
to persons living in the same place as
the writer.)
EXPLANATION.
270. EPISTOLARY CORRESPOXDEXCE, We could not, with-
out overstepping the limits of a grammar, give here all the
terms peculiar to mercantile correspondence ; those desirous to
become perfect in that branch may consult the several works
written on the subject, among which we particularly recommend
Mr. De Yeitelle's "Mercantile Dictionary," published by D.
Appleton & Co. We merely give here the general forms for
beginning and ending letters.
In addressing persons of different classes of society, except
those having titles, letters begin as follows :
Muy Senor mio. My Dear Sir.
Muy SeSor nuestro. Sir ; Dear Sir.
Muy Senores mios.
Muy Senores nuestros.
And to ladies :
Muy Sefiora mia. [ Madam.
These expressions are most generally abbreviated thus :
Muy Sr. mio; Muy Sr. n ro \ Muy Sres. mios ; Muy Sres. n r *;
Muy Sra. mia; Muy Sra. n ra ; Muy Sras. n ras .
,\
Gentlemen.
302
LESSON L V I .
In the body of the letter, su ap lle (su apreciable), or su
est da (su estimada), or su favor* 10 - (su favorecida) ca?'ta, letter,
being understood are equivalent to your favor or your es-
teemed letter.
Such expressions as these are translated thus :
Las de Y. del 2 del cor* 9 (corriente) ; Yours, of the 2d inst. ; 4th uk. ; 8th
4 del pp do (proximo pasado) ; 8 de of May, &c.
Mayo, etc.
The following forms are employed at the end of letters :
Se repUe a las ordenes de Y.,
s. s. s.
(Su seguro servidor).
Q. S. M. B.
(Que su mano besa).
Manden Yms. cuanto gusten a
S. S. S.,
Q. S. M. B.
I am, Dear Sir,
Yours respectfully.
Command at pleasure your faithful
servant.
To a lady, the form is the same, only changing the letter
M. into P., thus :
S. S. S.,
Q. S. P. B.
(Que sus pies besa).
In a more familiar style :
Muy Sr. mio y amigo.
Mi querido amigo.
Mande Y. con toda franqueza a su
invariable amigo y S. S.
My Dear Sir and Friend.
My Dear Friend.
Command with freedom your true
friend and faithful servant.
Esqudas, notes, are also written in Spanish, as in English,
in the third person ; as,
El Sr.A. De L. presenta (or oftece) sus
respetos al Sr. Dn. I. De H., y le
hace saber que, etc.
Mr. A. De L. presents his respects to
Mr. I. De H., and begs to acquaint
him that, &e.
The most usual manner of addressing letters is :
Sr. Dn. Jose Martinez, del Comcrcio de Madrid.
Sres. Dn. Fran 00 Sanchez, Hermanos y Ca., Cadiz.
Sra. Dfia. Teodora Jimenez y Arteta, Calle Mayor X. 10.
M Ex mo Sr. D. Juan Yalero y Arteta, Madrid.
LESSON LVI. 303
In the city :
TO A GENTLEMAN. TO A LADY.
B. L. M.,
Al Sr. D. P.,
s. s. s.,
A. T.
B. L. P.,
A la Sra. Da. F. V.,
S. S. S.,
A. T.
COXVERSATIO:N T AXD VERSION.
1. gLe gusta a V. escribir cartas? Mo gusta escribir a mis amigo3
intimos ; pero me gusta mas recibir cartas que escribirlas.
2. Yo no s6 bien el ceremonial 6 formulario de cartas, ^quiere V.
bacerme el favor de decirme como se principia una carta '{ Con mucbo
gusto, pregiinteme V. aquello que no sepa.
3. ^ Como se principia una carta dirigida a una persona cualquiera
con quien no tenemos intimidad? Si es un caballero, principiamos con
la formula de Muy Sr. mio, y si es una seilora con la de Muy Seftora mia.
4. i Y para acabar ? Escribiendo a un caballero solemos decir entre
otras mucbas expresiones, " Queda de V.,
S. S. S.,
Q. S. M. B.,
Fulano de tal."
5. i Y si es una sefiora a quien escribimos ? Lo mismo, solo cambia-
mos la inicial de mano, !M., en la inicial de pies, P., asi,
" Queda de V.,
S. S. S.,
Q. S. P. B.,
Fulano de tal."
6. i Y cuando es a un intimo amigo ? Entonces es mas parecido al ingles
y principiamos diciendo : " Querido amigo," y para acabar, cualquiera de
las muchag expresiones que se usan, como :
" Tu amigo que te ama de corazon,
Fulano de tal."
7. i Como se escriben las esquelas de invitacion, etc., a- las personas
que viven en la ciudad ? Se escriben, como en ingles, en la tercera persona.
8. i Quiere V. escribirme una esquela invitandome a comer ? Si, se-
fior, vea V. asi : " LQS Sres. De V. presentan sus respetos a los Sres. De
T., y les suplican que les hagan el honor de venir d comer con ellos el
martes a las cinco. Lunes, Abril 8 de 1866."
9. Veamos si V. puede responderme en espafiol. Yea V., "Los Sres.
De T. se apresuraran a acudir al amable convite de los Sres. De V., y les
presentan sus mas finas atenciones."
304 LESSON L V I .
10. Muy bien, muy bien, ahora solo falta poner la direccion (el sobre).
Estando las personas a quien me dirijo en la ciudad, creo que el sobres-
crito debe ponersc asi :
B. L. M.
Al Sr. Do V.
s. s. s.,
A. De T.
11. gCree V. que podre ahora traducir una carta mercautil en ingles?
Si, sefior, y escribirla tambien, puesto que V. sabe ya la estructura de la
lengua, ademas de poseer un gran niimero de sus giros, idiotismos y pala-
bras mas necesarias ; pero todavia tendra V. necesidad de acudir al dic-
cionario, porque no es posible introducir en una gramtitica todas las pala-
bras y frases que requiere una correspondencia inercantil.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you ever do any of the correspondence in your office (escri-
torio) ? Not often, for I do not know how to write letters in Spanish,
and the greater part of our correspondence is carried on (lletar) in that
language.
2. You ought, in that case, to make that branch the object of par-
ticular study for a time. That is what I desire to do ; and I would be
obliged to you to give me some instructions (i-nstruir) in the forms most
observed in Spanish houses.
3. I shall have much pleasure in showing you all I know myself; but
as I have never been in business, there are many points of which I am
ignorant (ignorar).
4. What is the first thing to write in a letter? In Spanish, as in
English, the date is generally the first thing ; it is written thus :
CADIZ, October 1st, 1866.
5. What comes next ? The name and residence of the person we are
writing to, thus :
Messrs. LAFUEXTE, SONS & Co., Malaga :
6. So far there is little difference between the two language-. Very
little ; we next go on to say (luego se pone) :
Gentlemen (or Sir, or My Dear Sir, or Dear Sirs, or, if we write to a
lady, Madam) :
7. Ah ! there I observe a decided difference : is that the form always
followed for commencing letters ? For business letters, yes ; but for fa-
miliar correspondence, we have many others ; indeed,* they are mostly
always suited to the taste of the writer.
8. Be good enough to show me one or two. With the greatest
* El keclio es.
LESSON LVII.
305
pleasure : My Dear Friend : My Yery Dear Alexander : Esteemed Friend :
My Ever Dear Mother, &c., &c., &c.
9. How do you acknowledge (acusar) the receipt of a favor ? In this
manner : I have duly received your esteemed favor (or letter) of the 17th
instant.
10. As for the body of the letter, the form depends entirely on the
nature of the business ; and, in general, all that is required is to say just
Avhat is necessary and nothing more, and to avoid obscurity (oscuridad),
in order that our ideas may be completely understood by our corre-
spondent (corresponsal).
11. The usual manners of closing a letter are :
I am, dear sir,
Your most obd't ser't ; or,
I am, sir,
Yours very truly.
12. And for familiar letters :
I am, dear Charles,
Your true friend and loving cousin ; or,
With kindest expressions to your brother,
Believe me to remain your ever faithful and loving friend.
LESSON LVII.
Abalanzarse.
Concordar.
Cumplir.
Conversar.
Entregar.
Escapar.
Honrar.
Participar.
Eegir.
Auxiliar.
Ilonrado.
Plural.
Singular.
To rush, to spring.
To agree.
To fulfil, to keep, to do (duty;.
To converse.
To give, to hand, to deliver.
To escape.
To honor.
To participate, to partake.
To govern.
To help.
Honest, honored.
Plural.
Singular.
30G
LESSON LVII.
Baron.
Baron.
Alhaja.
Jewel.
CrSdito.
Credit.
Agudeza.
"Wit, witty say-
Encargo.
Commission,
iug.
charge, order.
Cocina.
Kitchen.
Genero.
Kind, cloth.
Confianza.
Confidence.
Empleo.
Employment,
Espada.
Sword.
office.
Fuga.
Flight.
Plato.
Plate, dish.
Gracia.
Favor, good
graces.
Xumero.
Number.
Mania.
Mania.
Begimen.
Eegimen.
Promesa.
Promise.
Tema.
Theme, exercise.
Pretension.
Pretension, claim.
Diptongo.
Diphthong.
Concordancia.
Concord, agree-
Triptongo.
Triphthong.
ment.
Varon.
Man.
Version.
Version.
Error.
Error, mistake.
Tema.
Whim.
COMPOSITION.
Acordarse con alguno.
Acordarse de alguno.
Caer a la plaza.
Caer en la plaza.
Caer de la gratia dc alguno.
Caer en gratia 4 alguno.
Contar una cosa.
Contar con una cosa.
Convenir a uno.
Convenir con uno.
Cumplir con uno.
Cumplir por uno.
Dar algo.
Dar con algo.
Dar en una cosa.
Dar por algo.
Dar credito.
Dar a credito.
Dar la mano.
Dar de mano.
Dar en manos de.
Dar con el pie.
Dar por el pie.
To agree with any one.
To remember any one.
To front on the square (said of a house).
To fall in the square.
To fall from any one's favor (or good
graces).
To get into any one's favor (or good
graces).
To relate, to tell a thing.
To count upon a thing.
To suit (to be convenient for) any one.
To agree with any one.
To do one's duty toward any one.
To act in the place of any one.
To give any thing.
To find any thing.
To be obstinate.
To give for any thing.
To give credit, to believe.
To give on credit.
To give the hand (or to shake hands).
To lay aside, to abandon.
To fall into the hands of.
To despise, to scorn, to make light of.
To overthrow.
LESSON L V 1 1 .
307
D [or c:ibo) u una cosa.
Dar I'm Jo ima cosa.
Doclararse a alguno.
Do-jlararsc por alguno.
Dojar bacer algo.
Dojar Je hacer algo.
Deshacerse alguna cosa.
Deshacerse Jc alguna cosa.
Disponer sus alhajas.
Disponcr dc sus alhajas.
Echar ticrra ii una cosa.
Echar un gencro en ticrra.
Entender una cosa.
Entender en una cosa.
Entrcgarse al dinero.
Eutregarse del dinero.
Escapar a buenas.
Escapar de buenas.
Estar en alguna cosa.
Estar sobre alguna cosa.
Estar a todo.
Estar en todo.
Estar con cuidado.
Estar de cuidado.
Estar en si.
Estar sobre si.
Estar con alguno.
Estar por alguno.
Estar en hacer alguna cosa.
Estar para hacer alguna cosa.
Estar por hacer alguna cosa.
Estar alguna cosa por hacer.
Gustar un plato.
Gustar de un plato.
Hacer confianza a una persona.
Hacer confianza de una persona.
Hacer una cosa con tiempo.
To bring, to an end, to finish.
To destroy.
To confide one's secrets to any one.
To side with any one, to declare one's
self in favor of any one.
To let any thing be done.
To leave any thirg undone.
(Speaking of things) to be destroyed.
To dispose of (or part with) any thing.
To arrange one's jewelry.
To dispose of one's jewelry.
To forget any thing, to cast it into ob-
livion.
To throw any thing on the ground (or
down).
To understand a. thing.
To be a judge of a thing.
To make a god of one's money.
To receive, to take charge of money.
To make the best of one's escape.
To make a happy escape.
To be aware of any thing.
To push an affair.
To be ready for whatever may come.
To pay attention to every matter.
To be anxious, solicitous.
To be dangerously ill.
To have complete consciousness.
To be proud.
To be with any one, to be of any one's
opinion.
To favor any one.
To be resolved (or disposed) to do any
thing.
To be about to do any thing.
To be inclined to do something.
To remain to be done.
To taste a dish (of any kind of food).
To be fond of a dish.
To tell a secret to any one.
To make a confident of any one, to
trust to any one.
To do a thing at one's leisure (so as not
to be pressed for time).
308
LESSON L V 1 1 .
Hacer una cosa en ticmpo.
Hacerse a una cosa.
Hacerse con una cosa.
Hacerse de una cosa.
Ilallarsc algo.
Hall arse con algo.
Ir con alguno.
Ir sobrc alguno.
Mayor de edad.
Mayor en edad.
Participar una cosa.
Participar de una cosa.
Poner una cosa en tierra.
Poner una cosa por tierra.
Poner con cuidado.
Poner en cuidado.
Preguntar a uno.
Preguntar por uno.
Quedar en hacer una cosa.
Quedar una cosa por hacer.
Responder una cosa.
Responder de una cosa.
Saber a cocina.
Saber de cocina.
Salir con una empresa.
Salir de una empresa.
Salir a su padre.
Salir con su padre.
Salir de su padre.
Salir por su padre.
Ser con alguno.
Ser de alguno.
Ser para alguno.
Tener consigo.
Tener para si.
Tener de hacer algo.
Tener que hacer algo.
Tirar la espada.
To do a thing in time, at a suitable tune.
To get used to a thing.
To get (or procure) a thing.
To provide one's self with a thing.
To find any thing.
To be in possession of (or have) any
thing.
To go with anybody, to be of any one's
opinion, to be on any one's side, to
listen to any one.
To fall upon (or attack) any one.
To be of age.
To be older.
To communicate any thing (to another).
To participate in any thing.
To lay any thing on the ground.
To make h'ttle of a thing.
To put (or place, or lay) with care.
To alarm, to give anxiety.
To ask any one (interrogate).
To ask (or inquire) for any thing.
To agree to do any thing.
To remain to be done (speaking of
things).
To answer something (giving an answer).
To answer for any thing.
To smell (or taste) of the kitchen.
To be skilful in (or to understand)
cooking.
To carry out an enterprise.
To give up an enterprise.
To resemble one's father.
To go out with one's father.
To be released from the wardship of
one's father.
To go bail for one's father.
To be of any one's opinion.
To belong to any one's party.
To be for any one (of things).
To have with (or about) one.
To be persuaded.
To be going to do any thing.
To have to do any thing.
To throw down (or away) one's sword.
Tirar dc la cspada.
Tratar de vinos.
Tratar eu vinos.
Vender al contado.
Tender de contado.
Yolver a la razon.
Volver por la razon.
Yolver en razon de tal cosa.
LESSON LVII. 309
To draw one's sword.
To talk about wines.
To deal in wines.
To sell for cash.
To sell on the instant.
To recover one's reason.
To stand up for reason (or what is
right).
To return for such a reason (or motive).
EXPLANATION.
271. It is a general custom, amongst authors of Spanish
grammars and Spanish methods, to copy entire the forty pages
devoted by the Spanish Academy in its Grammar to a list of
verbs requiring certain prepositions after them. But we, not-
withstanding our most profound respect for the body just
mentioned, refrain from following in the footsteps*of our pre-
decessors, and that not merely on account of the useless-
ness of the list, but for the more potent reason that we believe
it to be calculated to misguide the student at every step. An
example : Any one not thoroughly acquainted with Spanish
syntax would, on reading the very first article in the list above
referred to, Abalanzarse a los peliffros, naturally conclude there-
from that the verb abalanzar governs at all times and under
all circumstances the preposition d. Now that would be
absurd, for nothing is more usual than to see, and hear the ex-
pressions : Abalanzarse contra (or sobre) su cncmiyo, dbalan-
zarse con (or sin) juicio, abalanzarse para sacudir, de repente,
&c. And so of all the other verbs, each of which may, accord-
ing to the idea to be conveyed, govern almost any preposition
in the lano-ua^e.
o o
It would be vain to attempt to give, in a work of the
nature of the present one, a complete set of rules for determin-
ing the various significations of every verb as decided or
modified by the attendant preposition ; but, as much can be
done, even here, toward helping the student through the most
difficult parts, we could not resist giving in this day's Composi-
tion a list composed of those verbs which are at the same time
of most frequent occurrence in general every-day conversation,
310 LESSON LVI1.
and susceptible of the greatest diversity of meaning, according
to the preposition by which they are followed.
Before dismissing this subject Ave deem it convenient to re-
mark that a large number of English verbs, to determine the
meaifing of Avhich a preposition is indispensable, are rendered
in Spanish by a verb alone. For example :
Bajar.
Entrar.
Salir.
Subir.
Sacar.
Partir.
Caer.
To go down.
To come in.
To go out.
To go up.
To draw out.
To set out.
To full down.
This may be the reason Avhy many Spanish grammarians
have thought that in Spanish the same thing does not exist.
We regret that the dimensions of our book do not allow of our
O
giving a more complete list in corroboration of the fact that
Spanish verbs too enjoy that transition of signification Avhich
is so frequent in English A'erbs.
E AND VERSION.
1. A que lado caen las ventanas de su cuarto dc V. ? Tres caen a
la plaza de Mad4son y las otras tres caen a la calle Veinte y cinco.
2. ^Le cae a V. en gracia ese muchachito ? Si, senor, porque res-
ponde con mucha agudeza.
3. i Puedo contar con su promesa de Y. ? V. pnede contar con clla,
porque yo cumplo siempre lo que prometo.
4. i Da V. credito a todo lo que oye ? No, senor, a raenos que
conozca las personas.
5. ^Da V. la raano a aquel pobre? Si, sefior, porque aunque pobre
es lionrado.
6. i Ha dado V. fin a su tarea? Todavia no ; pero pronto dare de mano.
T. Si V. deja esos libros en manos de ese muchacho, pronto dara fin
de ellos. Asi lo creo ; pero es necesario que los ninos tengan algo para
eatretenerse.
8. ^Como ha dispuesto V. de sus alhajas? Las he guardado, porque
pude encontrar dinero sin venderlas.
9. i Que se hizo de aquel mal negocio en que se metio sa primo de
V. ? Se le ha echado tierra, y nadie se acuerda mas de el.
10. ^En que se ocupa su amigo de V. ? Entiende en vinos ; pero es
cosa qne no entiencle.
LESSON LVII. 311
11. i C6rno cstii su csposa de V. ? Ella csta de cuidado, y yo con cuidado.
12. ^Esta V. en haccr aqucl ncgocio? Estoy para hacerlo.
13. gQueda V. en hacer ese encargo por mi? Quedo en hacerlo 7
pierda V. cuidado, que no se quedara por haccr.
14. i Es V. mayor de edad ? No, sen or, todavia no ; pero soy mayor
en edad con rcspccto a mis hermanos.
15. No ponga V. eso por ticrra. No lo pongo por tierra, sino en tierra.
16. ^PiensaV. salir con su empresa? No,, senor, ^ pero pienso salir
pronto de ella.
17. ^Tii-6 ese hombre de la espada ? Tir6 de la espada, porque la sac6 ;
pero el miedo le bizo emprender la fuga y la tiro.
18. Don Juan, $le gusta a V. vender al fiado ? No, seiior, me gusta
vender al contado y de contado.
19. ^Volvio D. Francisco por la razon? No, sent>r, D. Francisco no
ba vuelto a la razon, y por consiguientc no volvio por la razon.
20. i Se acuerda ese hombre con su esposa? No, senor, no se acuerdan.
21. $Se acuerda V. de lo que le dijo a V. ayer? No, seiior, lo be
olvidado.
22. i Conviene V. abora conmigo en que el espafiol es mas facil que el
ingles ? Convengo con V. en ello.
23. $Le convicne a V. hacer eso ? No, seuor, no me convienc.
24. gDio V. por fin con lo que buscaba? No, senor, todavia^no lo he
encontrado.
25. Este hombre ha dado en la tcma de querer aprender sin estudiar ;
I no le parece a V. que es una pretension rauy ridicula ? Ridiculisima.
EXERCISE.
1. Has the Baron given up bis project ? lie told me be would like to
give it up, if be could do so honorably.
2. I understand ho is an honorable man ? Yes, and be is therefore
respected by all who know him.
3. lias your brother come to an agreement with that dealer for the
purchase of the horse be was speaking of? It appears not, and that, on
the contrary, he desires to get rid of the one he has.
4. Did you inform the merchant of the order you received from the
"West ? Not yet ; but I intend to let him know of it this very day.
5. Does that woman understand cooking ? She says she docs ; and
she handed me a letter from a lady with whom she lived two years.
G. Did the captain draw his sword as soon as be beard bis antagonist's
reply? lie bad already drawn it; but when be beard the reply be
threw down his sword, and ran find gave his band to the man whom, a
few moments before, be was resolvSfl. to kill.
312
LESSON LVIII.
7. Has your brother sent YOU the books he promised you ? Xo. and
that need not surprise you, for I can never rely (count) on him for any
tiling.
8. That is to say, he never keeps his promise ? That is precisely
what I mean to say.
9. Do past participles always agree in gender and number with the
subject of the verb ? Yes, always, except when governed by the auxili-
ary to have.
10. Are there not some participles, past and present, that do not re-
tain the regimen of the verbs to which they belong ? There are very
many ; and, if you like, I will mention some of them. Be good enough
to do so.
11. I hope you have provided yourself with every thing necessary for
your journey? Everything, except one or two articles which I have
been unable to find.
12. How do you advise me to arrange (dispose) all these books ? I
have only one advice to give you in the matter, and that is, to dispose
of them as quickly as you can.
13. Would you like to taste this dish ? Xo, thank you, I am not fond
of it.
14. Is he not of your opinion ? Xot at all ; he always goes (sides)
with his father.
LESSON LVIII.
Notar.
Cazar.
Chancear.
Combinar.
Concertar.
Concluir.
Enfriarse.
Eiicargar.
Flotar.
Improvisar.
Inspirar.
Repartir.
Saltar.
Trinchar.
Cobrar. Brindar.
To note, to observe, to perceive.
To hunt, to chase.
To jest.
To combine.
To concert, to agree.
To conclude, to finish.
To cool, to get (or grow) cold.
To charge, to commission, to
order.
To float.
To improvise.
To inspire.
To divide.
To leap, to jump.
To carve, to cut.
To collect, To torst.
LESSON LVIII.
313
A lo lejos.
At a distance, in the distance.
A cuestas.
On one's back, on one's shoulder.
A la espafiola.
In the Spanish fashion.
Atras.
Backward, ago, behind.
Blanco.
"White.
Bonito.
Pretty.
Durable, duraclcro. t .
Durable.
Elocuente.
Eloquent.
Galante.
Gallant
Bello sexo.
Fair sex.
Magnifico.
Magnificent.
Negro.
Black.
Rodeado.
Surrounded.
Vacio.
Empty. -
Abanico. Fan.
Ala, Wing.
Apetito. ' Appetite.
Botella. Bottle.
Aficionado. Amateur, ono
Caza. Hunt.
fond of.
Chanza, Jest.
Baul. Trunk.
Cima. Top, summit
Buey. Ox.
Colina, Hill.
Brindis. Toast.
Dama. Lady.
Carro. Car, cart.
Iinaginacion. Imagination.
Canasto. Basket.
Llave, clave. Key.
Conductor. Conductor.
Milla. Mile.
Prctexto. Pretext.
Pechuga. Breast (of fowl).
Pefiasco. Rock.
Fuerza. Force, strength.
Embarcadero. Ferry.
Suerte. Luck, sort.
Piropos (pi.). Sweet things.
Tarea, Task.
Pasaje. Fare,
Vocal. Vowel.
Sitio. Place, spot.
Voz. Voice, word.
Salon. Saloon.
Sombra. Shade, shadow.
Vooabulario. Vocabulary.
Elocuencia. Eloquence.
COMPOSITION.
Quedi'imos en que saldriamos a las
ciuco.
Este canasto cs superior a mis fuerzas,
A In salud dc las scuoras.
14
We agrceJ (or appointed) to set out (or
start) at five o'clock.
This basket is more than I am able to
manage.
To the health of the ladies.
314
LESSON LVIII.
Decir piropos a las sefioritas.
Sirvase V. pagar al conductor.
j Mire V. que gracia !
^ Quo tal le gusta a V. ?
Pougamos los canastos a la sombra.
La subida dc la colina con un gran
cunasto a cuestas, me ha abierto cl
apctito.
Me alcgro dc ver a V.
Se alegro de la noticia.
Lo sicnto mucho.
Me pesa mucho saberlo.
i Cuantas personas cabcn en esta igle-
sia?
No cabiamos todos en el salon.
(, Puede caber en tu imaginacion tal
cosa?
Cabe mucho en este baul.
No caber de pies.
A mi me cupo en suerte venir a la
America.
No caber de gozo.
To say sweet things to the young ladies.
Please pay the conductor.
Only think !
How do you like ?
Let us set the baskets in the shade.
Coming up the hill with a large basket
on my back has sharpened my appe-
tite.
I am glad to see you.
He was rejoiced at the news.
I am very sorry for it (i. ., I feel it
much).
I am very sorry to know it (i. e., it
grieves me much to know it).
Dow many persons does this church
hold?
The saloon could not hold us all.
Can such a thing enter your imagina-
tion ?
This trunk holds a great deal.
To have no room to stand.
It was my lot to come to America.
To be overjoyed.
EXPLANATION.
IDIOMATIC USE OF CERTAIN VERBS.
272. ALEGEAKSE. The verbs to be glad and to be rejoiced
at are translated by the reflective verb alegrarse ; as,
Me alegro de ver a V.
Se alegro de la noticia.
I am glad to see you.
He was rejoiced at the news.
273. SEXTIR and PESAK. To be sorry and to grieve, are
translated by these verbs ; as,
Lo siento mucho.
Me pesa mucho saberlo.
I am very sorry for it (i. e., I feel it
much).
I am very sorry to know it (i. <?., it
grieves me much to know it).
274. CABER, to be capable of containing, &c. This verb
is employed in different manners in Spanish ; as,
j Cuantas porsonas caben en esta
iprlesia ?
How many persons does this church
hold (or is it capable of contain-
ing)?
LESSON LVIII.
315
No cabiamos todos en el salon.
jPuede caber eu tu imaginacion tal
cosa ?
Cube inucho en estc baul.
No caber dc pics.
A mi me cupo en suerte venir a la
America.
No caber en si.
No caber de gozo.
The saloon could not hold us all.
Can such a thing enter your imagina-
tion?
This trunk holds a great deal.
To have no room to stand.
It was my lot to come to America.
To be well satisfied with one's self.
To be overjoyed.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Buenos dias, sefiores, gconque ya todos estan listos? Pucs no
habiamos de estar, si son ya las seis y quedumos en que saldriamos a las
cinco.
2. Ilabriamos estado aqui de los primeros, si no hubiera sido que, des-
pues de baber andado dos 6 tres manzanas, echo de ver mi csposa que
babia olvidado la Have del cuarto, el paraguas, el abanico, y yo no sd
cuantas otras cosas mas ; pero en 1m ya cstamos aqui, g cuando partimos ?
Estamos esperando el carro que va al cmbarcadero de la calle Treinta
y tres.
3. Sefioras, esten Vds. prontas, porqne veo venir el carro. Don Mar-
tin, ayudeme V. u llcvar este canasto, porque es superior a mis fucrzas.
Llamo V. a Don Pepito, que no hace mas que decir piropos a las sefio-
ritas, porque yo tengo ya dos paraguas y tres nifios de que cuidar.
4. Don Pepe, V. que no tiene nifios, ni canastos, etc., sirvase V. pagar
al conductor. (; El diantre del bombre ! abora me pesa no baber tornado
un canasto.)
5. ;E1 pasaje caballeros! gCuantos somos? uno, dos, tres, cuatro,
caballeros ; una, dos, tres, cuatro, siete seuoras, esto es : once personas
mayores y catorce niuos.
6. Papa, i esta muy lejos el sitio u dondc vamos a pasar el dia? No,
Luisita, solamente unas diez millas.
7. i De cste lado 6 del otro del rio ? Del otro, desde aqui lo puedes ver.
8. g No ves alia a lo lejos, en la cima de aquella colina, una casa blanca
en donde flota la bandera americana ? Si, sefior, es muy bonito sitio y
debe tener muy buenas vistas.
9. Cuidado con los nifios al saltar en tierra, no se caiga alguno al agua.
I Estan todos fuera ? g No se ha olvidado nada? No, sefior. Pucs en
marcbn.
10. Don Pepito, tome V. ese canasto, y cuidado no lo deje caer y
rompa las botellas que contiene. \ Hombre, por Dios ! con el pretexto de
que venia con las manos vacias., me ha hecbo Y. pagar los carros y el va-
316 LESSON LVIII.
porcito por veinte y tres personas, y ahora rue quiere V. hacer cargar
con el canasto del vino.
11. Yam os, Don Pepito, llovelo Y. ahora basta la cima de aquclla co-
lina, quo ii la vuelta a casa yo me encargo de llevarlo. ;Mirc V. que
gracia ! a la vuelta ! que es lo que quedara de una doccna de botellas,
despues de beber veinte y trcs personas.
12. Xada; el que no ayude ii llcvar los canastos no participant de su
contenido. Srcs., repartamos la tarea ; que los borubres lleven los ca-
nastos, las mamas a los niuos, los uifios los paraguas, y las senoritas a
Don Pepito.
13. Da. DelSna i qu6 tal le gusta a Y. este sitio ? \ Ob ! es dclicioso ;
; que vistas tan bonitas !
14. Pongamos los canastos a la sombra de ese hermoso arbol. Si. y
pougamonos nosotros tambien a la sombra, que al sol bace calorcito.
15. i No le parece a Y., Don Enrique, que es tiempo de poner la mesa ?
Asi me parece, porque la subida de la colina con un gran canasto a
cuestas me ha abierto el apetito.
16. Sres., la comida esta en la mesa. Sefioras, jque es lo que Yds. di-
cen ? ; en la mesa ! ; Ah ! si, ya vemos, sobre un gran peftasco a la sombra
de aquel arbol ;magnifica idea!
17. Don Pepito, traiga A T . un par dc sillas mas, que faltan para dos
seiloras. Alia voy, jcdspita con las sillitas ! cada una pesa cienlibras;
pcro, eso si, son durables, no haya micdo de quo se rotnpan. Tomen
Yds. asiento, seiioras.
18. Pase V., Don Martin, primero. No, sefior, despues de Y. SeQo-
res sin cumplimientos que se enfria la comida.
19. ^Quien quiere sopa? jllombre, sopa! yo, yo, sirvame Y. un
plato, Don Enrique.
20. Poco a poco, Don Pepito, en el campo, no tenemos sopa. Pues yo
crei que Y. me la ofrecia. Yo pregunte por saber quien era aficionado
a la sopa.
21. Sefior Don Pedro quiere Y. bacerme el" favor de triachar eso
polio ? Con mucbo gusto.
22. Da. Margarita voy a mandaiie u Y. un pedazo de pechuga? Xo,
seuor, gracias, iniindenie Y. el ala 6 la pierna, que me gusta mas.
23. Don Pepito, un brindis, vamos un brindis. Excuseume Yds.,
senorcs, yo no s6 hacer, y m6uos improvisar brindis.
24. Pcro hornbre, \ eso dice Y. que cs tan galante y clocuente con las
ilarnas ! \ Xo le inspira a V. algo el bello sexo de que se balla A*, ro-
deado ? Pues Men, a la salud de las sefioras. Y i porqu6 no ?
LESSON L VIII. 317
EXERCISE.
1. Has the Laker not come yet? You arc in a jesting mood (humor)
this morning ; lie came long before you were up.
2. Never mind ; 1 have got change enough to pay for all. You are
too late, I have already paid ; the conductor has no time to wait half an
hour collecting the fare of each passenger.
3. Your appetite seems to be a little better to-day than usual ; how
do you account for that ? Keally you natter my appetite beyond what it
deserves ; I am happy to say that it is at all times in excellent order.
4. Do you not find it good exercise to climb to the top of the hill
with that heavy basket on your arm ? The fact is I shall have to give it
to some one else for a while, for my strength is not equal to the task.
5. I wonder whom you can give it to ; you see that we have each of
us something to carry. "Well, in that case, I must change with some one
that has a lighter burden (cargo) than my own.
G. Docs not John intend to become a soldier ? He does, though en-
tirely contrary to the will of his father, who set his face against it in the
most determined manner.
7. How many trunks is each passenger (pasajero) allowed to keep
with him in his berth (camarote)'} Only one, supposed to contain the
articles he will require to have at hand during the passage.
8. Did you ever go to a lion-hunt while you were in South Africa ?
Several times, and I can assure you it is a most interesting and exciting
scene.
9. Did you go there entirely for pleasure ? No, I managed to com-
bine business and pleasure, otherwise I should probably never have seen
that country, for yon know that such a voyage as that costs a great deal
of money.
10. Did they drink many toasts during the dinner? A good many,
and the first one I proposed was to the fair sex.
11. Nothing surprising in that ; I know it would scarcely be possible to
surpass you in gallantry. You are flattering me now, for the ladies agree
on all hands in calling you the most gallant young gentleman in the
country.
12. Jnst try if your eloquence will not succeed in persuading your
young friend to come with us to-morrow. "With all my heart; but un-
fortunately he does not speak French, and you know how much my elo-
quence loses in English.
13. Does the art of pleasing depend on what we do and what we say?
It does not, in my opinion, depend so much on what AVC do and say as on
how we do things and how we say them.
318
LESSOX LIX,
14. Is it not surprisiug that jour sister has not yet come? I believe
she has gone round to see her young Spanish friend (fem.\ although she
left me but half an hour ago, under pretext of having to write a letter.
15. Do you generally dine in the Spanish fashion at home ? We gen-
erally eat in the French fashiou, notwithstanding we are all very fond
of the Spanish manner of cooking.
LESSON LIX.
Amenazar.
Cojear.
Colgar.
Corregir.
Cubrir.
Cubrirse.
Descubrir.
Descubrirse.
Despedir.
Definir.
iHirar.
Rodar.
Prestar.
Veneer.
Cosa de.
Capaz.
Condicional.
Cariredondo.
Casero.
Compauero.
Claro.
Copulative.
Generoso.
Defective.
Libre.
Vulgar.
Vistoso.
To menace.
To be lame, to limp.
To hang.
To correct.
To cover.
To put on one's hat.
To discover, to uncover.
To take off one's hat.
To send away, to put away, to
give up.
To define.
To last.
To roll, to run on wheels.
To lend.
To conquer.
About.
Capable, able.
Conditional.
Roundfaced.
Household, family, domestic.
Companion.
Clear.
Copulative.
Generous.
Defective.
Free, unembarrassed.
Vulgar, common, usual.
Showy.
LESSON LIX.
319
Asesino. Assassin.
Barba. Beard, chin.
Aumento. Increase, augmen-
Carcajada. Burst of laughter.
tation.
Decena. About ten.
Cerrojo. Bolt.
Detiuicion. Definition.
Campo. Field, country.
Evidencia. Evidence.
Corredor. Broker.
Espalda. Back.
Dedo. Finger.
Gana, Desire, mind.
Dialogo. Dialogue.
Hoja. Leaf.
Dolor do costado. Pain in the side.
Loteria. Lottery.
Deseo. Desire, wish.
Llave. Key.
Descnido. Carelessness.
Pena. Difficulty, pain.
Grito. Shout.
Pera. Pear.
Gemido. Groan, moan.
Pobreza, Poverty.
Pagare. Promissory note.
Pascua. Easter.
Presidio. State-prison.
Rodilla. Knee.
Peral. Pear-tree.
Vuelta. Turn, change.
Pesame. Condolence.
Posicion. Position.
Premio. Prize, premium,
Excusa. Excuse, apology.
reward.
Salto. Jump, spring.
Semblante. Look.
Trago. Draught, drink.
COMPOSITION.
Su pagare de V. cae el mcs quc viene.
Your note falls due next month.
Lc ha caido la lotcria.
lie has won a prize in the lottery.
Este cdificio cae al (or hacia el) Nortc.
This building looks toward the North.
Mis ventanas caen a la mano derecha.
My windows are on the right hand.
Este vestido te cae bien.
This dress fits her well.
No cay 6 en la cuenta.
He did not see the drift (of what was
said).
Ya caigo en ello.
Ah, now I see !
Estar al caer.
To be about to take place.
Caer de pies, de rodillas.
To fall on one's feet, on one's knees.
Lo doy por hecho.
I take for granted it is done.
Lo dieron por libre.
They let him free.
Me doy por vencido.
I give it up.
Le dio un dolor de costado.
He took a pain in his side.
La lectura de ese libro te dara gaiuis
Reading this book will put you asleep
de dormir.
(or make you sleep).
Al fin dio en la dificultad.
Finally he fell upon the difficulty.
Dar los buenos dias.
To wish one good day.
Dar las pascuas.
To wish a happy Easter.
320
LESSON LIX.
Dar cl pesame.
Car la enhorabuena.
Dar gritos.
Dar gemidos.
Dio una carcajada.
Dar ;'i comprender.
Darsc ;'i conocer.
Dar una vuclta.
Dar pena.
Dar gusto.
Dar gana.
Dar saltos.
Dio que decir.
Esto no dice bien con aqueflo.
El bianco dice bien eon el azul.
Su vestido dice su pobreza.
El semblante de Juaji dice bien sn mal
genio.
Este peral echa muchas peras.
Esta planta no ha echado hojas.
He echado un trago,
Eche V. la Have a la puerta.
Echar pie a tierra.
Echar el cerrojo.
Echarlo a juego (or chanza).
Hoy echan la comedia nucva.
Ha echado cochc.
Echar a presidio.
Echar por los campos.
Echaron a correr.
Lo echo todo a pcrdcr.
Echar a rodar.
No echo de ver este defecto.
6 Echa V. de menos algo ?
No, sefior ; echo de menos a alguien.
Me echo a donnir.
Se echo a reir.
Se echo a corredor.
Lo puso de patitas en la calle.
To express condolence.
To congratulate.
To give shouts.
To utter groans.
He burst out laughing.
To give to understand.
To make one's self known.
To take a turn, to go round.
To cause displeasure.
To give pleasure.
To have a mind ; to take the notion.
To jump about.
He left room for talk.
This is not in strict accordance with
that.
White goes very well with blue.
Her dress tells of her poverty.
J6hn's bad temper is pictured on his
countenance.
This pear-tree bears a great many pears.
This plant has not had any leaves.
I have taken a drink.
Lock the door.
To dismount.
To draw the bolt.
To take it in play (or in jest).
The new play comes out to-night.
He has bought a carriage.
To send to State-prison.
To set out across the fields.
They set out running.
He spoiled all.
To send rolling.
I do not perceive the defect.
Do you miss any thing ?
No, sir ; I miss some one.
I went asleep.
He began to langh.
He became a broker.
He threw him into the street.
EXPLANATION.
275. The verbs caer, to fall; dar,to give; decir, to tell,
or to say ; echar, to throw ; differ from the English in meaning
LESSON LI X. .121
as conveyed by the sentences which are given in the Composi-
tion, and to which we refer without putting them here, in order
to avoid repetition.
There they are to be found, with their English translations,
which is the only explanation they admit of.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Don Gonzalo, ^le ha caido a, V. la loteria? No, sefior; pero mi
pagare ha caido.
2. Luisita, gquien La liecho esc vcstido que to cae tan Men? Mi mama
lo corto y 70 lo cosi..
3. No sabc Y. porque me hace aliora tantos cumplimientos Don En-
rique ? ISTo, sefior, no s6 qu6 motivo tenga para ser ahora mas politico
con Y. que lo ha sido hasta aqui.
4. i No sabe V. que me ha caido cl premio de los cien mil pesos on la
loteria de la Habana ? Si, sefior ; ya me lo ha dicho V. ante*.
5. Pues bien, i no cae V. aliora en la cuenta ? ; Ha ! ya caigo en ello,
Don Enrique quiere pedirle a V. dinero prestado.
6. i Han dado las doce ? Estan al caer.
7. i Dieron garrote a los asesinos ? No, sefior, al fin los dieron por
libres, porque no habia evidencia suficiente para sentenciarlos.
8. Que ha teuido su hermano de V. que no lo he visto por tanto
tiempo ? Le dio tin dolor de costado y ha tenido que guardar cama por
iina scmana.
9. i A que no adivina V. lo que acabo de liacer ? Seguramente quo
no lo adivinare, porqne V. es capaz de hacer mnchas cosasbuenas y malas.
10. i Se da V. por rencido ? Me doy. Pues vengo de echar un trago.
11. eQue comedia echan hoy? Hoy dan la tragedia de "Medea," en
dondc representa la Sefiora Eistori ; i ira V. ?
12. Siendo en italiano no ire, porquo no comprendo el italiano y mo
daria ganas de dormir.
13. Sr. D. Alejandro, vengo a darle a V. los buenos dias. T6ngalos V.
nuiy buenos.
14. jNo me quiere Y. dar alguna otra cosa? Si, sefior, le doy a Y. la
cnhorabuena por el aumcnto que ha tenido Y. en su fauiilia. Yiva Y.
mil afios.
15. Todo eso es muy bueno, D. Pepito ; pero sea Y. generoso y deme
Y. alguna cosita mas. Hombre, si Y. no se da a comprender yo no s6
que mas darle a V. ; Ha ! si, ya caigo ! que cstamos en tiempo de. . . .
Doy a Y. felices pascuas.
16. Dale, Dale, &i no es cso, yo liable del dinero que presto a Y. hace
14*
322 LESSON LIX.
mas de un afio. ;Ha! Seiior D. Alejandro, no crea V. qne yo lo liaya
echado en saco roto.
IT. Pues bien; ^porque no me lo da Y. ? jPorque! hombrc, aliora
ha dado V. en la dificultad, y esta es que yo no tengo dinero, y por consi-
guiente no puedo darlo.
18. Entonces, > c que es lo quc V. puede dar ? j ! en cuanto a cso yo
puedo dar muchas cosas.
19. ; Ha! me alegro mucho, veamos lo que Y. puede dar. En primer
lugar puedo dar gemidos.
20. jPuf! (pshaw). Tambien puedo dar gritos.
21. [Dale! Puedo dar, .... que decir.
22. No lo dudo. Puedo dar un pesatne.
23. jDios me libre ! Puedo dar saltos.
24. Yaya acabe Y., hombre, acab6 Y. Puedo dar a comprender.
25. Si, eso si, demasiado comprendo. Puedo darme a conocer.
26. Ya, ya, conozco de que pie cojea Y. Puedo dar una vuelta.
27. Pues vuelvase Y., por donde lia venido y nunca de V. mas vueltas
por esta casa. Y todavia mas, puedo dar una carcajada.
28. | Juan ! Juan ! echa a ese hombre de casa, y despues ccha la Have
y el cerrojo a la puerta. ; Ilaya picaro ! lo he de ecbar a un presidio !
29. i Has echado a ese hombre a la calle ? Si, sefior, ya lo puse de pa-
titas en la calle.
30. Y i que dijo ? Primero se echo a reir, yo le amenacd quc lo echaria
a rodar y entonces echo a correr.
31. El diantre del hombre siemprc esta pidiendo dinero prestado y
sobre no pagarlo se viene a reir de uno en sus barbas. Sefior, Amanda
Y. algima otra cosa ? No, te puedes ir, yo voy a ccharme a dormir, ese
bribon me ha dado un gran dolor de cabeza.
EXERCISE.
1. Is there any thing in the papers this morning relative to the trial
of the murderer of Smith ? I understand his trial is not to take place
before a month from this time.
2. Why did you not bring your friend with you ? He is not able to
walk very far to-day, owing to a pain in his side, which has troubled him
for the last three days.
3. Did you tell the servant to draw the bolt of the door ? No, but I
told him to lock the door.
4. Who is that I hear groaning? You hear no one groaning; it is
some one shouting in the distance.
5. IIo\v did your cousin lose his situation? He owes that misfortune
entirely to his own carelessness.
LESSON LX. 323
6. Charles, arc you not going to say good morning to that gentleman ?
I need not say good morning to him now, for I have already wished him
a happy Easter.
V. Did that merchant pay his correspondent at Malaga after all? He
did not pay him ; but ho gave him a note at three months.
8. What do you understand by parlor phiys (household comedies) in
Spain ? They are plays represented by private individuals* sometimes in
private houses, from which circumstance they take their name.
9. Do you know that round-faced little man who is sitting next to
your uncle ? That is one of the principal actors (actor) in the parlor
plays given at Mr. Gutierrez'.
10. What became of the offender? The evidence not being sufficient
to prove the crime of which he was accusedfhe was let off; otherwise
he would have been sent to State-prison.
11. Did they refuse to give him the things he wanted on credit? Of
course they did, because no one can rely on him nor give credit to any
thing he says.
12. Will that young man probably obtain the employment he has ap-
plied for ? Most probably lie will, because he has had the good fortune
to get into the president's favor.
13. How! do you not attend your classes this week? No, I am not
very well ; and so a friend of mine was good enough to offer to act in
my place.
14. Was the error corrected before the letter was dispatched? No, it
was not discovered in tune to be corrected.
Decidir.
Ejecutar.
Ejercer.
Ensuciar.
Enemistar.
Escuchar.
Exagerar.
Exhibir.
Extranar.
Enfriarse.
LESSON LX.
To decide.
To execute.
To exercise.
To dirty, to soil.
To put at enmity.
To listen to, to hearken to.
To exaggerate.
To exhibit.
To wonder at, to find strange.
To grow cold, to get (become)
cold.
* Aficionados. t Actisar.
324
LESSON LX.
Encargar,
To commission, to order, to give
charge.
Exclarnar.
To exclaim.
Exceptuar.
To except.
Esforzar.
To endeavor, to make effort.
Estrccliar.
To press.
Sospecbar.
To suspect.
Tardar.
To delay.
Extra.
Extra.
Empero.
But.
Eliptico.
Elliptical.
Agrio.
Sour.
Estrecho.
Close, narrow.
Precise.
Essential, indispensable, precise.
Elocuente,
Eloquent.
Tonto.
Foolish, stupid.
Travieso.
Mischievous.
Entrambos.
Both.
Entretanto.
In the mean time.
Excepto.
Except.
Atolladero. Difficulty.
Casaca. Coat, dress-coat.
Camino. Eoad, way.
Colocacion. Situation.
Astr6nomo. Astronomer.
Civilizacion. Civilization.
Colera. Cholera.
Colera. Anger.
Com eta. Comet.
Corte. Court.
Cofre. Chest.
Cometa. Kite.
Cajon. Drawer, box.
Cita. Appointment.
Capricho. Caprice.
Charla. Chat.
Cuello. Neck.
Claridad. Clearness.
Cargo. Cargo, charge.
Compaiiia. Company.
Exterior. Exterior, outside.
Caja. Box, case, cash
Extranjero. Foreigner.
(commercial).
Embarcadero. Landing.
Cartilla. Primer.
Espejo. Mirror, looking-
Calentura. Fever.
glass.
Casualidad. Chance.
Estrecho. Strait.
Cantidad. Quantity.
Elemento. Element.
Capa. Cloak.
Gobernador. Governor.
Cara. Face.
Grade. Grade, degree.
LESSON LX.
325
Homo.
Oven.
Carga.
Charge (of a gun,
Luto.
Mourning.
&c.).
Litro.
Litre.*
Cuchara.
Spoon.
ilatemiitico.
Mathematician.
Cnlpo.
Fault, blame.
Tonel.
Cask.
Criatura.
Creature, infant.
Tcrm6mctro.
Thermometer.
Costa.
Cost, coast.
Ferro-carril.
Railroad.
Disculpa.
Apology.
Fruto.
Fruit (result).
Estacion.
Season.
Fonclo.
Bottom.
Existencia.
Existence.
Fluido.
Fluid.
Fragata.
Frigate.
Mascara.
Mask.
Tontera.
Foolish action.
Pretension.
Pretension,
claim.
Yerba.
Grass.
COMPOSITION.
Hoy cntra la primavera.
Manana entra el mes do Octubrc.
Entra en el numero de los sabios.
Entro a reinar a los quince anos.
Este tonel bace cien litros.
No Ic hago tan tonto.
Yo le hacia mas rico.
Ilaz por vcnir.
Ilace dc goberaador.
Esa pobre rnuchacha estii haciendo de
madre a sus hermanos.
A eso voy.
Voy de pasco.
Van do mascara.
Ya dc luto.
Lc va en olio la vida.
Vcngo on olio.
;, Cuanto mo llcva V. por csto ?
Estos dos aniigos se llevan muy bien.
No nos llevamos bicn.
Este camino lleva a Madrid.
Le llcvo dos anos y rnedio.
Me lleve chasco.
Spring commences to-day.
The month of October commences to-
morrow.
He is of the number of the learned.
He began to reign at fifteen years of age.
This cask holds 100 litres.
I do not take him for such a fool.
I took him to be richer.
Try to come.
He is acting as governor.
That poor girl is acting the part of a
mother to her brothers and sisters.
That is the point I am coming to.
I am going for pleasure.
They are going in masks.
He is in mourning.
His life is at stake.
I agree to that.
How much will you charge me for this ?
These two friends agree very well to-
gether.
We do not agree well together.
This road leads to Madrid.
I am two years and a half older than he.
I was disappointed.
to 2.113 American pints.
326
LESSON LX.
Lleva una casaca a la franccsa.
Se liizo a la vela.
Manda que nos traigan el almuerzo.
Hare que nos lo traigan.
i, Hace V. tenir su vestido de azul ?
No, senor, lo he mandado tenir de vcrde.
Saldra bucn matematico.
Salio muy travieso.
Ta he salido de todos mis granos.
Me salio una buena colocacion.
Este negocio me ha salido bien.
Le salio mal su empresa.
Este nino ha salido a su padre.
Salio de la regla.
Pronto saldre de hijo de familia.
Esta capa me sale en cincucnta pesos.
Se salio con su pretension.
Sirve al rey.
No sirve para nada.
Sirvase Y. admitir mis disculpas.
El tarda mucho en decidir.
; Cuanto tar da en responder !
j Adios ! Volvere a ver a V., y le vol-
vere a hablar de eso.
Este vino se vuelve agrio.
Se volvera bueno con el tiempo.
Este melon sabe a melocoton.
Este vino huele a vinagre.
D. Juan hace un gran papel en la corte.
Napoleon III hace un gran papel en la
politica del mundo.
He wears a coat made in the French
fashion.
He set sail.
Order the breakfast to be served up.
I shall have it brought to us.
Are you getting your dress dyed blue ?
No, sir, I have ordered it to be dyed
green.
He shall turn out (to be) a good mathe-
matician.
He (or she the child) turned out very,
naughty.
I have got rid of all my grain.
A good situation turned up for me.
This business has turned out well for me.
His undertaking turned out badly.
This child resembles his father.
He departed from the rule.
I shall soon be of age.
This cloak cost me fifty dollars.
He obtained what he desired.
He serves the king.
It is good for nothing.
Be good enough to accept my apology.
He is slow in deciding.
How long he is in answering !
Good-by ! I shall see you again, and
talk more to you on the subject.
This wine is turning sour.
It will become good again in time.
This melon has the taste of a peach.
This wine smells of vinegar.
John makes a great noise at court.
Napoleon III. plays a great part in the
politics of the world.
EXPLANATION.
276. In the Composition of this lesson we give the princi-
pal idioms with the verbs cntrar, to go (or come) in ; haccr. t<>
do, to make; i>, to go; llevar, to take, to charge; mandar,
Jiacer, in the sense of to order, to cause to be done ; oler a, to
to smell of; and saber a, to taste of; salir, servir, tardar and
volver.
LESSON LX. 327
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. g Cuando cntra la primavera? Debo confesar francamente que no
se el dia precise en que entra y sale cada estacion.
2. Entonces V. no entra en el niimero do los sabios, puesto qne no
sabe cuaudo estamos en invierno y cuando en verano. Poco a poco,
sefior Don Pedro, eso seria hacerme eatrar en el nurnero de los idiotas.
3. i Pues no acaba V. de decirlo ? Yo acabo de decir que no s6 el
dia precise en que entra cada estacion ; pero cuando veo crecer la yerba
y las hojas de los arboles, y abrirse las flores, sospecho que estamos en la
primavera.
4. ; Ha ! V. sospecha ! Yamos, ya es algo. Si, seflor, y del mismo
modo, cuando veo el termometro en la sombra, que marca 98, creo
adivinar que estoy, una de dos, 6 en un homo 6 en Nueva York en la
estacion del verano.
5. Varnos, yo le bacia a V. mas ignorante de lo que en efecto es;
$y como adivina V., 6 sospecha, que se encuentra V. en el otoflo?
Cuando los melocotones se acaban y las hojas caen.
G. j Bien ! bien ! j y el invierno ? Cuando por la mafiana no puedo
lavarme por hallar que se ha helado el agua en la palangana.
Y. Ya veo que es V. un sabio perfecto. Veamos en historia i a que
edad entro a reinar el Key Pepino ? jCaspita! Sefior Don Pedro! es
mas fdcil criticar que ejecutar, y mas facil hacer preguntas que respon-
derlas, y sino resp6ndamo V. que la echa de sabio.
8. i Cuantos litros hace ese toncl ? j Ilombre ! yo $ qu6 he de entender
de medir toneles ?
9. Pucs cambiare de materia, gquien hace de gobcrnador en Manila?
j Y a mi qu6 me importa !
10. j Vaya ! ese es un buen modo de salir del atolladcro. No, sefior, sir-
vase V. recibir mis disculpas, tengo qne irme ahora, pero volvere a ver a
V., y volvcremos a tratar de esa materia. Adios, sefiores.
11. eQue le parece a Y., Don Enrique, dc ese caballero? Me pareco
que este joven saldra buen matematico, porque ha salido en todo a su
padre.
12. ^Sabc Y. si salio bien 6 mal de su emprcsa? Es un negocio que
le ha salido muy bien.
13. i Se llcva bien Luisa con sns hermanos ? Si, scnor, y aunque no Ics
lleva mas de tres 6 cuatro afios, les sirve de madre.
14. ^Cuanto le cuesta a Y. esa capa? Me sale en unos cincuenta
pesos.
15. jCuanto tardard la fragata en hacerso a la vela ? Xo se, creo que
el capitan es hoinbre que tarda en decidirse.
328 LESSOK LX.
10. i Do qu6 color Laco V. tefiir su vestido? Lo mandu tefiir de
amarillo.
17. Don Mauuel, raande V. que nos suban el almuerzo. Hare que nos
lo traigan.
EXERCISE.
1. "When does Spring commence? It commences in March and ends
in May.
2. Has your young friend passed his examination yet? The exami-
nations have not taken place ; but when they do, he will prove to be the
best Spanish scholar in the country.
3. In what month does the cold weather generally commence in the
North of Spain ? Winter usually sets in about the middle of November.
4. How much does this cask hold ? It holds from 100 to 120 litres.
5. How soon do you set out for Europe? As soon as the fiue weather
sets in.
6. Are you going on business, or for pleasure ? For pleasure only.
7. How are they going to the ball ? They are going in masks.
8. How much did your tailor charge you for that coat ? It cost me
forty-five dollars.
9. What age do you take my cousin to be ? I would take him to bo
about the same ago as his friend.
10. You had better guess again. I give it up.
11. How old is he, then ? He is two years and four months older than
his friend.
12. Do you know whether the pianist's brother succeeded in obtaining
the position he applied for? He did not; but an excellent situation
turned up for him a short time after.
13. How long will you take to dye this dress for me ? About a week.
14. What color do you wish it to be dyed ? I wish to have it dyed
blue.
15. Do you think this boy will turn out to be as good a musician as
his father ? I have not the least doubt about it, for he resembles him in
every respect (en todo).
16. Be good enough to accept my apology for not having come yester-
day as I had promised. Certainly, sir; I know very well that you have
a great deal of business to attend to.
17. Who is Mr. Terrero in mourning for? For his uncle, who died
about a year ago in Manila.
LESSON LXI.
329
LESSON LXI.
Felicitar.
Fiar.
Ignorar.
Lastimar.
Improvisar.
Inquietar.
Intcntar.
Interrogar.
Invertir.
Interesar.
Invitar.
Imprimir.
Obligar.
Kehusar.
Lisonjear.
Llevar.
Descuidado.
Final.
Ignorante.
Impersonal.
Incrcible.
Indefinido.
Inexplicable.
Ingenioso.
Inrnediato.
Inquieto.
Justo.
Ultimo.
Lisonjero.
Especiero.
Loco.
Lento.
Solemne.
De Zeca en Meca.
A ciegas.
A gatas.
En el intcrin.
To felicitate, to congratulate.
To trust.
To be ignorant of, unaware of.
To hurt, to wound.
To improvise, to do (any thing)'
off-hand.
To make uneasy, to cause anxiety.
To attempt, to intend.
To interrogate, to question.
To invert, to invest.
To interest, to bo of interest.
To invite.
To print.
To force, to oblige.
To refuse.
To flatter.
To carry, to take, to charge.
Careless.
Final.
Ignorant.
Impersonal.
Incredible.
Indefinite.
Inexplicable.
Ingenious.
Immediate, close by, next.
Uneasy, restless.
Just, right.
Last.
Flattering.
Grocer.
Mad.
Slow.
Solemn, cruel.
To and fro.
With one's eyes shut.
On all fours.
In the mean time.
330
LESSON LXI.
Arnpo dc la nic- Whiteness of
Anchuras (f.pl.). Ease.
ve. sngw.
Cuba. Cask, toper,
Asno. Ass.
drunkard.
Descuido. Carelessness.
Cara. Face.
Ilueso. Bone.
Cartilla. Primer.
Golpe. Blow, stroke.
Calabaza. Pumpkin, refusal.
Dares y toinares. Dispute.
Imaginacion. Imagination.
Indice. Index.
Intencion. Intention.'
Ingenio. Genius.
Interrogacion. Interrogation.
Insecto. Insect.
Inversion. Inversion.
Instinto. Instinct.
Justicia. Justice.
Instrumento. Instrument.
Llave. Key.
Interrogante. Question, note of
Lluvia. Rain.
interrogation.
Lista. List.
Italiano. Italian.
Lisonja. Flattery.
Arco iris. Bainbow.
Luna. Moon.
Galicismo. Gallicism.
Luz. Light
Hierro. Iron.
Latitud. Latitude.
Juego. ' Play.
Longitud. Longitude.
Loco. Madman.
Legua. League.
Lugar. Palace.
Letra. Letter.
Latin. Latin.
Limosna. - Alms.
Sonido, )
Son. f Souud -
Limpieza. Cleanness.
Liuea. Line.
Pico. Beak.
Levita. Frock-coat.
Levita. Levite.
Earn a. Branch.
Uso. Use, custom.
Teja. Tile.
Objeto. Object.
Ocasion. Occasion.
Oido. Ear, hearing.
Verguenza. Shame.
Olfato. Smell.
COMPOSITION.
A mas tardar.
At latest.
A media palabra.
At the slightest hint.
A medida de sus descos.
According to one's wishes.
A sus anchuras.
At one's ease.
Al descuido y con cuidado.
Studiously careless.
Abrir el ojo.
To be upon the alert
Alia se las haya.
Let him look to that.
Andar a. ciegas.
To grope in the dark.
Andar a gatas.
To creep on all fours.
A todo correr,
With all speed.
LESSON LXI.
331
Vaya V. con Dios.
El va de capa caida.
El va de Zcca en Meca.
Ir de puntillas.
Andar en dares y tomares.
Andarse por las ramas.
De tejas ubajo.
Asir la ocasion por los cabellos.
Bailar al son quo so toca.
Bebcr los aires or los vientos.
Beber como una cuba.
Blanco como el arnpo de la nicve.
Bocado sin hueso.
Burla burlando.
Buscar cineo pics al gato.
No caber de gozo.
No caber en si.
No cabe en el.
Caer de su asno.
Caersele a uno la cara de vcrgiienza.
Callar el pico.
Chanzas aparte.
Con mil amores.
bon su -pan sc lo coma.
Conque, hasta la vista.
Cosa quo no esta en la cartilla.
Dar a alguno con las puertas en la cara.
Dar u luz.
Dar por supuesto, or por sentado.
Dar chasco.
Dar el si.
Dar golpe una cosa.
Dar calabazas.
No sc le da nada.
Go in peace.
He is crest-fallen.
He goes roving about, to and fro.
To go on tiptoe.
To quarrel.
Not to come to the point.
Humanly speaking.
To take time by the forelock.
To go with the stream.
To desire anxiously.
To drink like a fish.
White as the driven snow.
An employment without labor ; a sine-
cure.
Between joke and earnest.
To pick a quarrel.
To be overjoyed.
To be bursting with pride.
He is not capable of such a thing.
To acknowledge one's fault.
To blush with shame.
To hold one's tongue.
Jesting aside.
Most willingly.
That is his own business.
I hope we may soon meet again.
Something out of the common way.
To shut the door in one's face.
To publish ; to give birth to.
To take for granted.
To disappoint.
To consent.
To strike one with admiration, or as-
tonishment (said of things).
To give the mitten.
He cares nothing about it.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. eLe salen a V. las cosas ;i medida de sus deseos? Chanzas aparte,
Don Juan, V. sabe bien que de tejas abajo eso nunca sucede.
2. Si, pero como V. baila al son que se toca y sabe asir la ocasion por
los cabellos, sicmpre esta a sns anchuras y tiene siempre algun bocado
sin hueso. Amigo, caiga V. de su asno y conficse de buena fe que si
332 LESSON LXI.
anda dc capa caida, es porque va siempre de Zeca en Meca, y porque
bcbe mas que una cuba.
3. Adios, Don Pedro, me voy, porque no quiero buscar cinco pies al
gato. Vaya V. con Dios, Don Juan.
4. Don Pedro, me parece que V. ha dado con la puerta en la cara ii
Don Juan. Xo, sefior, Don Enrique, a otro se le caeria la cara de vor-
guenza, pero a el no se le da nada, y pronto lo volveni Y. 4 ver por aca.
5. Eut6nces el no entiende a media palabra. A mas tardar lo vera
Y. aqui otra vez dentro de media bora.
6. El pobre bombre anda a ciegas, y si no abrc el ojo, ira a parar a
un bospital. Con su pan se lo coma, y alia se las baya; yo lo siento so-
lamente por su nifia, que es una sefiorita perfecta.
7. Me ban dicbo que Y. queria casarse con ella, es verdad, Don En-
rique ? Si, sefior, y lo bubiera becbo con mil amores, porque ademas de
ser muy amable 6 instruida, es muy bonita, tienc ojos negros muy ber-
mosos y es tan blanca como el ampo de la nieve.
8. Pues |porqu6 no se caso Y. con ella? Por una pequefia difi-
cnltad.
9. Quiza Y. se andaria por las ramas y no sabria asir la ocasion por
los cabcllos. Xo, sefior, nada de eso, antes al contrario yo lo daba todo
por supuesto, porque Y. sabe que soy rico, y crei que la nifia me daria
el si sin bacerse de rogar.
10. Pues que, no se lo di6 ? No, sefior, no me dio cl si, pero rae dio
calabazas.
11. jMiren la rapazuela! y Y. que bizo? Yo que bebia los vientos
por ella, y creia que sus calabazas eran cosa que no estaban en la cartilla,
recurri a su padre, creyendo que 61 no me negaria la mano de su bija.
12. i Y bien y que? Que me lleve un solemne chasco, el padre mo
rebuso la mano de su bija ni mas ni menos que ella lo babia becbo.
13. $Pero qu6 razon le dio a Y. para ello? Me dijo que su bija, aun-
que pobre, era bija de un caballero y que ni ella querria ni 61 la obligaria
jamas a casar?e con un especiero comun 6 ignorante ; que cl dinero era
una gran cosa, pero que no lo compraba todo.
14. i Y Y. que dijo ? Yo, por no andar en dares y tomares y dimes
y diretes, me calle el pico y sali de su casa a todo correr.
EXERCISE.
1. Would you not be more likely to obtain what you -wisb, if you
came to tbe point at once? Perhaps I would ; but the matter is an im-
portant one, and I considered it necessary to enter into some explanation
relative to it.
LESSON LXI. 333
2. Do you think ho would understand me? Of course he would, at
the slightest hint.
3. How did your cousin Charles succeed in that affair ? Every thing
turned out according to his wishes.
4. How soon do you suppose this hook will bo published ? I hope it
will he published in a very short time ; I know they are working at it
with all possible speed.
5. Have you ever seen a more active man than that merchant?
Never ; and I have never seen a less active man than his brother, ho
always goes with the stream, and troubles himself about nothing.
C. Ought you not to have shown that letter to your brother? I
would have done so, of course, but I took for granted that he had already
heard the news.
7. You had better tell your friend to bo upon the alert, and not get
into a quarrel with that man. That is his own business, let him look to
it himself.
8. Is it possible that ho could be capable of such an action? Yes,
but the worst of all is, that ho is not ashamed to acknowledge it to every
one he meets.
9. When is Peter to bo married ? I cannot say certainly ; but I
suppose in about a month at latest.
10. I don't know any one who has a better position than your uncle :
plenty of money and scarcely any thing to do. That is a fact, his situ-
ation is a real sinecure.
11. "What has occurred to that gentleman ? he looks quite crest-fallen.
Do not be astonished at that ; he has been unfortunate in business, and
has lost almost all he possessed in the world.
12. Are you trying to pick a quarrel with me? No, I assure you,
jesting aside, that the matter stands exactly as I say.
13. How was he received by the lady's father? lie was not received
at all, they shut the door in his face.
14. If you desire so anxiously to see him, why do you not go to his
house? I cannot make up my mind (decidirme) to do that; you know
he is bursting with pride, and he would very probably refuse to receive me.
15. "Well, I hope we may soon meet again; present my respects to
your family. With the greatest pleasure.; Please not to forget the letter.
10. That I care nothing about ; all I desire to know is whether he will
be here in time or not. I think you may rely on his being punctual.
17. I have been told that your brother was about to be married to
Miss Ramirez ; is it true ? I really cannot say how the matter will turn
out ; so far every thing seems to go on according to the desire of both
parties.
334
LESSON LXII.
LESSON LXII.
Aplicar.
To apply.
Ccbarso.
To feed, to gloat.
Echar a perder.
To spoil.
Error.
To err, to miss.
Ocurrir.
To occur.
Murmurar.
To murmur, to grumble.
Madrugar.
To rise early.
Medir.
To measure.
Montar.
To mount, to amount.
Mudar.
To change, to move.
Nacer.
To be born, to spring up, to pro-
ceed.
Sazonar.
To season, to ripen.
Reunirse.
To unite, to collect together, to
assemble.
Modificar.
To modify.
Desprevenido.
Unawares, unprepared.
Intachable.
Unimpeachable, unquestionable.
Maldito.
Perverse, confounded.
Mayuscula.
Capital (letter).
Mimiscula.
Small Getter).
Numeral.
Numeral.
Noble.
Noble.
Nominativo.
Nominative.
Neutro.
Neuter.
^ Masculine.
Masculine.
Objetivo.
Objective.
Quieto.
Quiet, at rest.
Cumpleafios. Birthday.
Apariencia. Appearance.
Menoscabo. Detriment, less-
Bravata. Bravado.
ening.
Botica. Drug store.
Pique. Point, verge.
Fiesta. Feast, holiday.
Rayo. Thunderbolt.
Centella. Spark, flash.
Socio. Associate, partner.
Siesta. Siesta (afternoon
Sabor. Taste, savor.
nap).
Menudo. Change, small
Suerte. Luck, fortune,
change.
chance.
LESSON LXII.
335
Meridiano.
Meridian. Murmuracion.
Murmurings.
Metal.
Metal.
Malicia.
Malice.
Mierubro.
Member.
Menta
Mind.
Mineral.
Mineral.
Muestra.
Sample, sign.
Momento.
Moment.
Manera.
Manner.
Mozo.
Youth, waiter.
Mantcca, 0rman-
Butter.
Macho.
Male.
tequilla.
Maestro.
Master, teacher.
Medida.
Measure.
Mauuscrito.
Manuscript.
Olla podrida.
Sort of mixed
Mar.
Sea.
dish.
Olor.
Smell, odor.
Ostra.
Oyster.
Olivar.
Olive ground.
Negacion.
Negation.
Ostion. (See
Oyster.
Mar.
Sea.
Ostra.)
Negativa.
Negative.
Palo.
Wood, stick.
Note.
Note.
Polvo.
Dust, powder.
Zaga.
Rear-guard.
Pailo.
Cloth.
Parabion .
Felicitation, con-
gratulation.
COMPOSITION.
De bucnas ii primcras.
De buena fe.
De mala fe.
De intento.
De oidas.
Dccir por decir.
Dcjar a uno colgado.
Dejar a uno en la calle.
Dejar atras los vientos.
Dejar correr.
Dejar cl campo librc.
Dejar eii bianco.
Dejarse alguna cosa en cl tintero.
Dia de cumpleanos.
Saber algo de buena tinta.
DC dia en dia.
De un dia para otro.
DC hoy en ocho dias.
Uu dia si y otro no.
Hoy dia.
Dicho y hecho.
Without ceremony.
With sincerity.
Deceitfully.
On purpose.
By hearsay.
To talk for the sake of talking.
To frustrate one's hopes.
To strip one of his all.
To go quicker than the wind.
To go with the world.
To yield to one's competitors.
To leave blank.
To forget to say something.
Birthday.
To know any thing on good authority.
From day to day.
From one day to another.
This day week.
Every other day.
Now-a-days.
Xo sooner said than done.
300
LESSON LXII.
Dormir a pierna suelta.
Dormir la siesta.
Echar a perder algo.
Echar bravatas.
Echar rayos y centellas,
Echar la culpa a alguno.
Echar sucrtcs.
EmpeSarsc en haccr algo.
Empenarse por alguno.
En un abrir y cerrar de ojos.
Enceaderse en colera.
Errar el tiro.
Eire que erre.
Escarmentar en cabeza agena.
Estar a pique de perderse,
Estar de casa.
Estar de fiesta,
Estar en ascuas,
Estar en lo que se dice.
Estar a sus anchuras.
Eitar sobre si.
Estar desprevenido.
Estar mano sobre mano.
;, Estas en tus cinco seatidos ?
To sleep at one's ease.
To take an afternoon nap.
To spoil any thing.
To brag, to boast.
To be furious, enraged.
To throw the blame on any one.
To cast lots.
To insist upon doing any thing.
To interest one's self for any one.
In the twinkling of an eye, in a trice.
To fly into a passion.
To miss one's aim.
Obstinately.
To take warning by others' misfortunes.
To be within an ace of being lost.
To be in dishabille.
To be merry.
To be upon thorns.
To comprehend what is said.
To be at one's ease.
To be on one's guard.
To be off one's guard.
To be idle.
Are you in your senses ?
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Sefiores, dejen Vds. el campo libre, que aqui viene Don Pepito
cchando bravatas 7 rayos y centellas. Bien venido, Don Pepito, i qu6
trae V. de nuevo, qne parece estar fuera de si?
2. Xo, sefior, yo estoy en mis cinco sentidos, pero Lay gentes dc mala
fc que hablan por hablar y se ocupan de criticar al projimo. i Y eso a
que viene?
3. Yo no lo digo por Y., Don Enrique, pero V. sabe qnc hay muclios
desocupados que se vienen a su botica de V. y critican ii todo el mundo.
; Tamos, vamos ! Don Pepito, que a V. tambien le gusta un poquito la
murmuracion.
4. Ciertamente, porque sino i que scria de la conversacion sin un po-
quito de critica que la sazone y le de interes ? Mtiy bien, pero entonces
no eche Y. la culpa a nadie de hacer lo mismo que Y. hace.
o. Si, pero yo Lablo sin malicia, de buena fe y digo lo que me ocr.rre
por decirlo, nada mas. Asi pueden decir los demas.
6. Si, pero yo no soy como Don Carlos, que viene aqui de dia on din,
LESSON LXII. 337
y do la maQana a la tardc hablando mas quo un sacamuelas y sin dejar a
nadio liueso sano. Si, pues apliquese V. el cucnto.
7. No, seflor, yo no soy ni tan hablador ui tan murmurador como
ninguno do los que so reunen aqui, y si no, observe V. un poquito a cacla
uno do ellos, D. Gonzalo, por ejernplo, jha venido hoy? No^ sofior, no
ha venido, ni vendra, porque cs cl dia do su cmnpleafios y lo celebra con su
familia en el campo, por consiguiente puedo V. cebarse en el a su sabor.
8. D. Gonzalo es hombre de buenos sentiraientos y hombre honrado,
no haya miedo quo yo diga nada on menoscabo suyo, pero ticiie un
maldito genio quo le-haco echar a perder toda conversacion.
9. Pues yo no habia observado eso. ; Como hombre ! pues si vieue
aqni un dia si y otro no, a criticar a los quo so reunen en la botica do la
esquina, y los dias quo no vieno aqui va a la botica de la csquina a criti-
car nos a nosotros.
10. i Y que cs lo quo le hace echar u perder las conversaciones como
decia V. pocos minutos ha ? Que en un abrir y cerrar do ojos so cn-
ciende en c61cra.
11. Bien, por D. Gonzalo, $y nuostro vecino, D. Alberto, eso si quo 93
intachable, no le parece a V. ? \ Ho ! en cfecto es un excelente hombre,
lastima que errase el tiro.
12. gQue quierc V. decir con eso do crrar cl tiro? ITablo con respecto
a sus negocios.
13. Y bien, i qu6 le sucedio ? Que escogio malos socios, y le han de-
jado en la calle.
14. Pero eso no puede ser, Don Alberto goza de muy buena repnta-
cion, V. habia de oidas. No, sefior, que lo s6 de buena tinta, y hoy dia
esta a pique do perderse.
lo. Pues 61 parece dormir a picrna suolta. Esta obligado a hacerlo asi
por guardar las apariencias.
16. i No so ha dejado V. algo en el tintcro? Sin duda quo me he de-
jado, pero es tarde y voy a dormir la siesta.
EXERCISE.
1. Is the custom of taking an afternoon nap as common in Spain
now-a-days as in former times ? It is quite as common now-a-days as it
ever was, not only in Spain, but in almost every country of Europe.
2. Are you perfectly certain that he acted with sincerity in that mat-
ter ? I am quite sure, as I know it on good authority.
3. "Who told your that young man had acted deceitfully toward your
cousin ? I do not care to say much in the matter, especially as all I
know respecting it I only know by hearsay.
15
338 LESSOR LXIII.
4. Can you tell me how that merchant's enterprise turned out ? Very
badly ; for shortly after he had engaged in it, he heard of his brother's
misfortune, which frustrated all his hopes.
5. Did Alexander manage to pay his debts after all ? No, he did not ;
and although his intentions were strictly honorable, his creditors (acree-
dores) would wait no longer, and they stripped him of all he possessed in
the world.
6. What date do you wish me to put here ? Just leave a blank, and
Charles will put in the date before he sends the letter off.
7. When do you think they will be able to give me some of the
papers ? Probably by this day week.
8. "What did he say when he saw how the tailor had spoiled his coat ?
Fortunately for the latter he was in a merry mood, and did not fly into a
passion as he usually does when any thing occurs to displease him.
9. Are you in your senses, my dear friend ? are you not aware that
such a thing is impossible ?
10. Did he shut the door on purpose ? Yes, but he sent his servant to
take us into another room, for he was in dishabille, and did not wish to
be seen until he had dressed.
11. How often do you go to dine at your uncle's? I generally go
every other day.
12. Have your friends returned yet from the country ? Xo, they have
been putting it off* from day to day for some time, and I shall not be in
the least astonished if they do not return before November.
13. Why did you not bring your sister with you ? I did all I possibly
could to persuade her to come, but she insisted upon staying at home.
14. How did they decide on who should go first? They cast lots for it.
LESSON LXIII.
Retirar.
Pegar.
Pescar.
Posponer.
Preceder.
Prometer.
Eazonar.
Resfriarse.
Kegalar.
To retire, to withdraw.
To stick, to adhere, to beat.
To fish.
To place after.
To precede.
To promise.
To reason.
To take cold.
To regale, to present.
* Posponer.
LESSON LXIII.
339
.1
En frente.
Frente por frente
De hito en Into.
De grado.
Por fas 6 por nefas.
In front, opposite.
Fixedly, with open eyes.
By fair means.
Justly or unjustly.
i Cascaras !
Dear me ! Oh !
Afortunado.
Fortunate.
Ageno.
Foreign, belonging to others.
Formal.
Formal, steady, respectable.
Pasivo.
Passive.
Perezoso.
Lazy.
Personal.
Personal.
Posesivo.
Possessive.
Potencial.
Potential.
Precise.
Precise, necessary, obligatory.
Preliminar.
Preliminary.
Preterite.
Preterit.
Puntual.
Punctual.
Partitivo.
Partitive.
Eadical.
Eadical.
Earo.
%
Eare, curious.
Eeciproco.
Eeciprocal.
Eeflexivo.
Eeflective.
Eubio.
Fair (of the hair and complexion).
Euin.
Mean.
Alarclo.
Boast.
Bulla. Noise, xiproar.
Bulto.
Bulk, bundle.
Baza. Trick (card-play-
Ganso.
Goose.
ing)-
Bledo.
Straw.
ITuc-spcda. Hostess.
Diente.
Tooth.
Puntuacion. Punctuation.
Desafio.
Challenge, duel.
Puntualidad. Punctuality.
Espadachin.
Bully.
Paciencia. Patience.
Estribo.
Stirrup.
Paja. Straw.
Mequetrefe.
Trifling fellow,
Polvora. Gunpowder.
meddler.
Perseverancia. Perseverance.
Pasaje.
Passage.
Porcion. Portion, number.
Pedazo.
Piece.
Prenda. Good quality,
Perro.
Dog.
jewel.
Pluzo.
Term.
Pronunciacion. Pronunciation.
Plomo
Lead.
340
LESSON LXIII.
Porque.
Reason why.
Propiedad.
Propriety, prop-
Publico.
Public.
erty.
Principle.
Principle, begin-
Pulgada.
Inch.
ning.
Eaiz.
Root.
Rasgo.
Trait.
Eebanada.
Slice.
Recado.
Message, errand.
Reform a.
Reform, reforma-
Recibo.
Eeceipt.
tion.
Rector.
Eector, director.
Eegla.
Rule.
Eefran.
Proverb.
Eeina.
Queen.
Eelampago.
Flash of light-
Eepeticion.
Eepetition, re-
ning.
hearsal.
Eelojero.
"Watchmaker.
Eesolucion.
Eesolution.
Eegalo.
Present.
Rosa.
Eose.
Eeposo.
Eest, repose.
Eutina.
Eoutine.
Eesfriado.
Cold.
Suma.
Sum.
Eeumatismo.
Eheumatis:ri.
Sutileza.
Subtilty, fineness.
Eeves.
Wrong side, back.
Salida.
Departure.
Eincou.
Corner.
Silaba.
Syllable.
Euisefior.
Nightingale.
Soledad.
Solitude.
Sustancia.
Substance.
Subida.
Rising ground,
going up.
Sucgra.
Mother-in-law.
COMPOSITION.
Faltar a su palabra.
Guardarse dc alguna cosa.
Hablar a bulto.
Hablar a tontas y a locas.
Hablar al aire.
Hablar al oido.
Hablar al alma.
Hablar entre dientes.
Hablar por boca de ganso.
Hacer a uno perder los estribos.
Hacer de las suyas.
Hacer alarde de.
Hacer la cuenta sin la hudspeda.
Hacer caso de.
Haberla (or haberselas) con alguno.
Irse de la memoria.
a uno la cabcza.
To break one's word.
To take care not to do a thing (not to
attempt to do a thing).
To speak at random.
To speak without rhyme or reason.
To talk vaguely.
To whisper into one's ear.
To speak one's mind.
To mutter.
To echo what another has said.
To make one lose his temper.
To show off one's tricks.
To boast of.
To reckon without the host.
To pay attention (or respect) to.
To dispute (or contend) with any one.
To escape one's memory.
To lose one's reason.
LESSON LXIII.
341
Van cien duros a quc cs cierto.
Llevar a mal.
Mai de su grado.
Mal que le peso.
Manos a la obra.
Meter bulla.
Metersc a caballero.
Meterse I'l sabio.
Mcterse con alguno.
Mcterse en camisa de once varas.
Meterse en todo.
Meterse en vidas agenas.
Mirar de hito en hito.
Mostrar las suelas de los zapatos.
Naccr de pies.
Nada se me da de ello.
No dejar meter baza.
No cabe mas.
No estar para fiestas.
No le pesa de haber nacido.
No se me da un bledo.
No tener arte ni parte en alguna cosa.
Perder cuidado.
For ce 6 por be.
Por fas 6 ncfas.
No llesrara la sangre al rio.
I wager a hundred dollars that it is true.
To take any thing amiss.
Unwillingly.
In spite of him.
To set about a work.
To make a noise, a bustle.
To assume the gentleman.
To affect learning and knowledge.
To pick a quarrel with any one.
To interfere in other people's business.
To meddle in every thing.
To dive into other people's affairs.
To look steadfastly at.
To take to one's heels.
To be born to good luck.
I care nothing about it.
Not to allow one to slip in a word.
Nothing more can be desired.
To be out of temper.
He has no mean opinion of himself.
I do not care a straw.
To have no hand in any thing.
Not to fear, to make one's self easy.
Some way or other.
Eight or wrong.
There is nothing to be feared.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1 . D. Pepito ha faltado a su palabra, 6 i cree V. qu6 vcndra todavia ?
j Que ha de venir ! Si el habla siempre a tontas y ii locas.
2. Pues yo crei que prometio formalmente venir hoy. Don Pepito
no liabla nuuca formalmente.
3. gDe quo manera habla entonces? De muchas, el habla nl aire,
a bulto, al oido, entre dientes, por boca de ganso; pero mines habla
al alma.
4. Esto hard perder a cualquicra los estribos. A esto lo llama el, ha-
ciendo alarde, hacer de las suyas.
5. Si; pero el se las habra conmigo, porque ha hecho la cucnta sin
la huespcda, D. Lui^, no haga V. caso, es un mequetrefe, si A'ds. quieren
yo ire a su casa y le hare venir mal de su grado, 6 mejor dicho, mal que
le pese.
6. !N"o, senor, no vaya V., es un hombre que se mete en todo. Y en
eso tiene Y. razon, porque el so mete con todo el mundo.
342 LESSON LX1II.
7. Y hasta se mete a sabio y a caballero. Lo peor es que mete
mucha bulla.
8. ^Vamos, sefiores, en que mas se mete el pobre D. Pepito? Se
mete en camisa do once varas, en vidas agenas, etc., etc.
9. Pero, sefiores, no olviden Yds. que si por ce 6 por be, lo llegase a
saber, D. Pepito, y por fas 6 por nefas hubiese un desaf io, no lo olviden
Vds., vuelvo a repetir qne Don Pepito es un gran espadachin. ; Vaya !
pierda V. cuidado, que no llegara la sangre al rio.
10. j Don Pepito espadachin! Cascaras! Van cien pesos a que si le
miro de hito en hito, muestra las suelas de los zapatos.
11. V. no debe llevarlo a mal, aunque Don Pepito sea tan su amigo;
pero es muy hablador y no deja a nadie meter baza. Yo no tengo arte
ni parte en ello y no se me da un bledo.
12. $Se acordo V. de decir aquello a su vecino el Sr. Foster? Xo, se-
fior, se me fue de la memoria.
13. i Es un joven muy afortunado ? Si, -sefior, ha nacido dc pies ; pero
se que no le pesa de haber nacido.
14. Y. no debe criticarlo, porque aliora no estii para fiestas. A mi r.o
se me da un bledo de que este 6 no de mal humor.
15. liable Y. bajo 6 hableme Y. al oido, porque veo al Sefior roster
alii en frente y V. debe guardarse de que le oiga hablar de use modo,
porque lo llevaria a mal. Pierda Y. cuidado que uo llegara la sangre al
rio.
EXERCISE.
1. Does that man always keep his word ? I have never known him
to break his word on a single occasion.
2. Peter is very sorry that Alexander -went away without him, and
I do not know what he would have done if John had left him.
3. John took good care not to start at the same time as his elder
brother, for he well knew that he would have been obliged to show him
every thing Avorth seeing in the city.
4. He very often talks for hours together without rhyme or reason,
to the very great annoyance of those who have to listen to him.
5. Believe me, it is no proof of talent to talk away at random for an
hour at a time, without saying any thing that could be called either new
or agreeable.
6. I cannot support a man who is so ignorant as to come and whisper
something in my ear while I am engaged in conversation with another.
V. iSTot one of those ideas is his own, he only echoes what he has
heard said by others.
8. I would advise you to pay no attention to any thing ho tells you.
LESSON LXIV.
343
9. Judging by bis manner of speaking, one would say be bad lost his
reason.
10. I will wager fifty dollars that not one word of all you have read
and beard on that score (sobre esa materia) is true.
11. I suppose you have already heard of my good fortune? I have;
and I need not tell you how glad I was to know you had succeeded.
12. Did you hear all the president said ? Every thing ; he spoke very
loud, so that all those that were present might not lose a word.
13. Although he affects great learning and knowledge, I have had oc-
casion to find out (discover) that he is a very ignorant man.
14. I know very well that he has no mean opinion of himself; hut,
after all, his greatest fault is to dive a little too much into other people's
affairs.
LESSON LXIV.
Alumbrar.
Soltar.
Suponer.
Situar.
Significar.
Saludar.
Sobrar.
Sonreirse.
Soplar.
Sonrojarse.
Sufrir.
Suplicar.
Suspirar.
Rasgar.
Kebajar.
Rebanar.
Recitar.
Recomendar.
Referir.
Regular.
Remendar.
Remediar.
To light.
To loose, to let go.
To suppose.
To situate.
To signify.
To salute, to bow to.
To remain over, to be too much,
too many.
To smile.
To blow, to prompt.
To blush.
To suffer, to bear.
To supplicate, to beseech.
To sigh, to long after.
To tear.
To lower.
To cut in slices.
To recite.
To recommend.
To refer, to tell, to relate.
To regulate.
To mend.
To remedy, to help.
344
LESSON LXIY.
Repasar.
To look over (a lesson, &c.).
Representar.
To represent, to lay before.
Kesolver.
To resolve.
Zafar.
To disembarrass.
De gorra.
Sponging, at the expense of others.
DC perilla.
To tlie pin-pose, at the proper
time.
Cascos a la gincta.
On one's Ligli horse.
A raya.
"Within bounds, at bay.
A solas.
All alone.
Siquicra.
Even, only.
Eii suina.
In a word, in fine.
Santo.
Holy, saintly.
Sutil.
Subtil, fine.
Silencioso.
Silent.
Bordo.
Deaf.
Sustantivo.
Substantive.
Sucio.
Dirty, filthy.
Atrevimiento. Assurance, dar-
Blanca. Mite.
ing.
Bula. Bull (of the Pope).
Caerpo. Body.
Flaqueza. "Weakness.
Inconveniente. Objection.
Gorra. Cap, lady's bon-
Esfuerzo. . Effort, endeavor.
net.
Descaro. Barefacedness.
Calzas (fcm.2rt-)- Breeches.
Fondos (pL). Funds.
Pieza. Piece.
Matrirnonio. Matrimony.
Trastienda. Back shop.
Modismo. Idiom.
Tienda. Store, shop.
Provecho. Profit, benefit.
Tigeras. Scissors.
Yugo. Yoke.
Tarjeta. Card (visiting or
Trapo. Rag.
business).
Saber. Learning, knowl-
Traza. Mien, appearance.
edge.
Trampa. Trap, cheat.
Sacacorclios. Corkscrew.
Traduccion. Translation.
Saldo. Balance.
Salto. Leap, jump.
COMPOSITION.
Quedarsc en bianco.
Quedarse hecho una pieza (or helado).
To be left in the lurch.
To be thunderstruck, to remain as-
tonished.
LESSON LXIV.
345
Querer dccir.
Sacar fuerzas dc flaqueza. *
Sacar provecho.
Sacudir el yugo.
Salir a luz.
Salir con algo.
Salir los colorcs a la cara.
Saiga lo quc saliere.
Salirsc con la suya.
Santo y bueno.
Sin mas aca ni mas alia.
Sin quc ni para que.
En nombrando al ruin de Roma lucgo
asoma.
Sobre la marclia.
Tan claro como el sol (cr como el agua).
Tener me'nos hablar a nno.
Tener a uno a ray a.
Tener algo en la punta dc la lengua.
Tener buen diente.
Tener bula para todo.
Tener el pie en dos zapatos.
Tener los cascos u la gineta.
Tener su alma en su cuerpo.
Tomar cl cielo con las manos.
Tomar la ocasion por los cabelloy.
Tomar las (calzas) de Villadiego.
Vamos claros.
Tenir a menos.
Yenir al caso.
Yenir con las manos lavadas.
Ycnir de perilla.
Yenir una cosa pintada.
Yersc negro.
Yestirse con veinte y cinco alfilercs.
Dicho y liecho.
To mean.
To make a virtue of a necessity.
To turn to account.
To shake off the yoke.
To be produced, to be published.
To gain one's end.
To blush.
Come what may.
To have one's own way, to accomplish
an object.
Well and good.
Without ifs and ands.
Without rhyme or reason.
Speak of the devil, and his imps ap-
pear.
Off-hand (instantly).
As clear as daylight.
Not to deign to speak to one.
To keep one at bay.
To have any thing on the tip of one's
tongue.
To have a good appetite.
To have permission to do what one
likes.
To have two strings to one's bow.
To be hare-brained, to have little judg-
ment.
To do what one thinks proper.
To be transported with rapture, to be
enraged.
To profit by the occasion.
To take to one's heels.
Let us understand one another.
To decline in any way.
To come to the point.
To wish to enjoy the fruit of another's
labor.
To come at the nick of time, or to fit
exactly.
A thing to suit (or fit) exactly.
To be afflicted, embarrassed.
To be dressed in style, to be decked
out.
No sooner sr.i,l tliun rone.
* //(?.. i>7't:7
346 LESSON LXIV.
Vivir de gorra.
Vivir a sus anchas (anchuras).
Zafarse de alguna cosa.
To live at aiiother's expense.
To live at one's ease.
To get clear (or rid of) any thing.
CONVERSATION AXD YERSIOX.
1. 4 Quo quiere decir quedarse en bianco? Quiere decir lo mismo
que quedarse a la luna de Valencia, esto es, quedarse sin nada.
2. i Y quedarse hecho una pieza 6 lielado, que quiere decir ? Son
inodismos que indicau adrairacion 6 sorpresa.
3. i Quiere V. explicarme algunos modismos espafioles ? No tengo
inconveniente, pregunteme V. el significado de los que no coruprenda A'.
Muy bien.
4. Sacar fuerzas de flaqueza, g que quiere decir ? To creo que es hacer
esfuerzos ; pero tambien significa, hacer de la necesidad virtud.
5. Sacar provecho, creo que no necesita explicacion y si la ocasion se
presenta, creo que sabre sacarlo. i Y que me dice V. acerca de sacudir cl
yugo? Que aquellos que tengan algun rual yugo que sacudir deben ha-
cerlo sobre la rnarcha.
6. Santo y bueno, pero V., $ no tiene ningun yugo que sacudir? No,
seflor, es verdad que estoy bajo el yugo del matrimonio ; pero no deseo
zafarme dc el, porque para mi aunque es yugo, es un yugo santo que me
ha hecho muy feliz y bajo el cual deseo vivir todavia muchos anos.
7. i No le parece a V. que aquel hombre vive de gorra ? Si, seflor,
aqui se venia todos los dias con sus manos lavadas y se nos comia un codo.
8. i Y porque no lo ecb.6 V. de su casa ? ; Asi lo hice ay or, y si Y. lo
hubiera visto ! parecia querer tomar el cielo con las manos !
9. ; Yaya un atreviiniento ! Al fin me vi obligado a ameuazarle con
una silla, y entonces tomo las de Yilladiego.
10. Creo que antes era rico, pero ahora ha venido a menos. No, lo que
es tener, todavia tiene.
11. No hombre, si no tiene sobre que caerse muerto. Perdone Y., si
V. quiere que, para practicar en los modismos del verbo tener, le diga a,
Y. lo que ese buen seilor tiene, se lo dir6 a V.
12. Santo y bueno. Pnes entonces alia va sin que ni para quo.
13. Pero hombre, gpara que sacar a la colada los trapos de cse buen
hombre ? Si eso es tan claro como el sol que nos al umbra.
14. Yamos claros, j quiere Y. 6 no que le diga lo que ese sefior, quo
se viste con veinte y cinco alfileres, tiene ? Pero si no viene al caso.
15. Entonces se acabara el ejercicio sin poder introduc'ir en la pructioa
la mitad de los modismos que tenemos en la leccion. ; Ah ! si, >!. l:cne
Y. mil razones, cscucho, i qu6 os lo que ese bucn seficr tioiie ?
LESSON LX1V. 347
16. En primer lugar tiene buen apetito y bucn diente. ; Caspita ! qu6
si lo tiene ! g y a quien se lo cuenta Y. ?
17. Tiene siempre algo en la punta de la lengua y nunca tiene nada en
el bolsillo.
18. Y segun el descaro con quo obra, pareco tener bula para todo;
tambien tiene los cascos a la gineta y con tanto tener creo que es mas lo
que le fulta que lo que tiene.
19. Yo no s6 c6mo tenerlo a raya, no me hard V. el favor de aconse-
jarle que no venga inas por aqui ? Amigo mio, digaselo Y. mismo, por-
que yo tengo a. mnos hablar a una persona de su cspecie.
20. Y sin embargo, vea Y., el tiene el pi6 en dos zapatos, i y que mas
tiene ?
21. Dejeme Y. pensar, ; all ! si, el pobre seilor tiene todavia otra cosa
mas. Bicn, pues, digala Y., que so acaba el ejercicio.
22. Tiene su alma en su cuerpo. Hombre, calle Y., que aqni vicno
el en persona. Si, en nombrando al ruin de Eoma, luego asoma.
23. Buenos dias, D. Juan. Tengalos V. muy buenos, D. Periquito,
I que se ofrece ? Yengo a pedirle a V. diez pesos prestados, que me ven-
drian de perilla, ; porque me veo negro !
24. Hombre pidaselos Y. al Sr. De Y. quo csta en fondos, en cuanto a
mi me encuentro sin blanca.
EXERCISE.
1. I understand your brother was left entirely in the lurch ? Xot at
all ; on the contrary, he came off (turned out) much better than I did.
2. How did he feel when he learned that I had heard of the whole
matter ? He was thunderstruck, and could not give me any reply.
3. How are you going to manage in such a case as that ? I have only
to make a virtue of necessity.
4. I think there is little danger of his not succeeding ; what do you
think (what appears to you) ? Not the least ; he is very prudent, and
knows how to turn every thing to account.
5. Do you remember when that article was published? I do not re-
member exactly ; but it appears to me it must have been some time in
last November.
G. You see that is what I told you the other day would take place.
Yes, that is true ; but you seem to have forgotten the condition I men-
tioned to your friend as he was going out.
7. Is Mr. Martinez not going to be here, as he promised ? I am ex-
pecting him. We shall wait until seven o'clock ; if he comes before that
time, well and good ; if not, we shall go on with the business of the
evening without him.
348
LESSOR LXV.
8. Well, let us understand each other before going any farther. It
seems to me we understand each other perfectly ; the thing is as clear as
daylight.
9. Oh, Charles ! I am so glad to see you ! you have just come at the
nick of time ; we shall have the pleasure of your company at dinner.
You are very kind ; hut really you must excuse me ; I have a friend
waiting for me.
10. You lost your coat? how did you come home in the cold without
it ? Alexander lent me one of his that fitted me exactly.
11. No sooner said than done ; he took his hat and went out in search
of him, notwithstanding it rained in torrents.
12. You may be at ease in your mind on that score ; I shall manage to
get rid of him very soon.
13. I wish you would come to the point, for up to the present I have
l>een unable to find out what you mean.
14. One would have said, from the manner in which he was (viendolo)
decked out, that he was going to the theatre or to a hall instead of to
the office.
LESSON LXV.
Aventurarse.
Apretar.
Cobrar.
Desafiar.
Escaldar.
Enhebrar.
Enzarzar.
Enfadarse.
Hilar.
Juntar.
Madrugar.
Prevenir.
Eelucir.
Sustentar.
Trasquilar.
Tapar.
Trampear.
Tragar,
To venture.
To tighten, to urge,
To collect.
To challenge.
To scald.
To thread (a needle), to link.
To sow discord.
To get angry.
To spin.
To join.
To rise early.
To warn, to inform.
To shine.
To sustain.
To shear.
To cover up, to close up.
To impose upon, to deceive.
To swallow.
LESSON LX V.
.349
TrasnocLar.
Terminar.
Tolerar.
Tornar.
Tranquilizar.
Tutear.
Expresivo.
Justo.
Duro.
Necio.
Practice.
Ciego.
Tuerto.
Trigueno.
Tin to.
Tonto.
Tramposo.
Tcrminante.
Tranquilo.
A liorbotones.
Palabras mayores.
.N'o sor rana.
Caramba !
To sit up all night.
To terminate.
To tolerate.
To return, to do over again.
To tranquillize, to make any one's
mind easy.
To address any one in the second
person singular, to speak fa-
miliarly to.
Expressive.
Just.
Hard.
Silly, foolish.
Practised, experienced.
Blind.
Blind of one eye.
Dark (of the complexion).
Colored, red.
Foolish.
Deceitful, swindling.
Decided.
Tranquil, quiet.
Bubbling, hurriedly, confusedly.
Offensive words or expressions.
To be able and expert.
Dear me j Hah !
Asador.
Spit (for roasting).
Cola.
Tail.
Copo.
Flake (of snow).
Danza.
Dance.
Entendedor.
One who under-
Divisa.
Motto.
stands.
Familiaridad.
Familiarity.
Herrero.
Blacksmith.
Miel.
Honey.
Menosprecio.
Scorn, contempt.
Mona.
Monkey.
Ilortclano.
Gardener.
Fama.
Fame, notoriety.
Dado.
Dye.
Moderacion.
Moderation.
Proverbio.
Proverb.
Oveja.
Sheep.
Sayo.
Sort of loose coat
Xc-cosidad.
Necessity.
or jacket.
Pareja.
Pair.
Peoho.
Breast.
Rana.
Frog.
350
LESSON L X V .
Raton.
Tio.
Bebedor.
Mouse.
Uncle.
Toper, tippler.
Viga.
Tenacidad.
Tos.
Beam.
Tenacity.
Cough.
Soliloquio.
Suegro.
Sugeto.
(All these ar
Soliloquy.
Father-iu-lau-.
Person, indi-
vidual.
e masculine.)
Tirabuzon.
Trineo.
Tacto.
Talento.
Corkscrew.
Sleigh.
Touch.
Talent.
Sobrino.
Sinonimo.
Silencio.
Nephew.
Synonyme.
Silence.
Telegrafo.
Tenedor.
Terraino.
Telegraph.
Fork.
Term.
Sentido.
Semblante.
Sense.
Countenance,
looks.
Trigo.
Termomctro.
Torno.
Wheat.
Thermometer.
Lathe.
Secreto.
Trato.
Secret.
Intercourse,
treatment.
Toque.
Titulo.
Touch, ringing
(of bells).
Title.
TTST^S.
Breadth (of a
thing).
Trago.
Draught, drink.
COMPOSITION.
A buena gana no hay pan duro.
A lo hecho pecho.
A quien se hace de miel las moscas sc
lo comen.
A quien madruga Dios le ayuda.
Al buen entendedor con media palabra
basta.
Al fin se canta la gloria.
Antes que tc cases mira lo que haces.
Antes cabeza de raton que cola de Icon.
Aunque la mona se vista de seda mona
se queda.
Bien vengas mal si vienes solo.
Cada oveja con su pareja (or Dios los
cria y ellos se juntan).
Cada uno juzga por su corazon el
ageno.
Cada uno hace de su capa un sayo.
Hunger is the be?t sau.-c.
What is done cannot be liL-l
Smear yourself with honey, an 1 you
will be devoured by flies.
The early bird catches the worm.
A word to the wise is sufficient.
Boast not till the victory is won.
Look before you leap.
Better be the head of a mouse than
the tail of a lion.
A hog in armor is still but a hog.
Misfortune never comes alone.
Birds of a feather flock together.
Every man measures other people's
corn in his own bushel.
Every one may do as he likes with his
own.
L 1C S S O N L X V .
551
Cada uno sube dondc le aprieta cl za-
pato.
Cobra buena fama y echate a dormir.
Como el perro del hortelano, que ni
come ni dcja comer.
Cuenta y razon sustentan amistad.
Del mal el menos.
Debajo de una mala capa se encuentra
un buen bebedor.
Dime con quien andas, y tc dire quien
eres.
Donde fueres baz como vieres.
Lo mejor de los dados es no jugarlos.
En boca cerrada no entran moscas.
En casa del herrero asador de palo.
En tierra de ciegos el tuerto es rey.
Gato escaldado del agua fria huye.
Ir por lana y volver trasquilado.
Hombre prevenido nunca fue vencido.
La caridad bien ordenada empieza por
uno mismo.
La mucha familiaridad es causa de mc-
nosprecio.
La necesidad carece de ley.
La tenacidad es divisa del necio.
Lo que no se pucdc remediar se ba de
aguantar.
Mas vale tarde que nunca.
Mar vale pajaro en mano que ciento
volando.
Micntras en mi casa estoy rcy soy.
Nadie puede decir de esta agua no be-
bere.
No es oro todo lo que reluce.
No hay mal que por bien no venga.
No la hagas no la temas.
Poquito a poco hilaba la vieja el copo.
Quien bien te quiere te hara llorar.
Quien mucho habla mucho ycrra.
Every one knows where the shoe pinch-
es him.
Get the name of early rising, and you
may lie a-bed all day.
Like the dog in the manger.
Short reckoning and long friends.
Of two evils, the lesser.
We should not judge the book by the
cover.
Tell me your company and I will tell
you what you are.
When at Rome, do as Rome does.
The best throw at dice is to throw them
away.
A close mouth catches no flies.
No one goes worse shod than the shoe-
maker's wife.
In the land of the blind, the one-eyed
man is king.
A burnt child dreads the fire.
The biter bit.
Forewarned, forearmed.
Charity begins at home.
Too much familiarity breeds contempt.
Necessity has no law.
A wise man will change his mind ; a
fool never.
What can't be cured must be endured.
Better late than never.
A bird in the hand is worth two in the
bush.
A man's house is his castle.
No one can tell what is to happen to
him.
All is not gold that glitters.
It's an ill wind that blows nobody good.
Do no evil, and fear no harm.
Rome was not built in a day.
Spare the rod, and you will spoil the
child.
Who speaks much often blunders.
LESSOK L X V .
Quien no so avcntura no pasa la mar.
Ya quo la casa sc quema calentemonos.
Ycmos la pnja en cl ojo agcno y no la
viga en cl nucstro.
Tu cnemioro cs dc tu oficio.
Never venture, never win.
Let us make the best of a bad job.
We see the mote in our neighbor's eye,
and not the beam in our ovrn.
Two of a trade never acrcc.
CONVERSATION AND YERSIOX.
1. $ Hay machos proverbios en espafiol? Hay muchisimos ; en todas
las lenguas los hay, pero en la espanola creo quo hay tantos que si se reu-
niesen todos forraarian varies voliimencs.
2. gLe gustan a V. los proverbios? Si, scftor, son muy cxprcsivos,
pero debemos usarlos, como decia S. Quijote, con moderation y no a
borbotones como Sancho Panza.
o. En eso tiene Y. razon, porque quien mucho habla muclio yerra.
Y. acaba de aplicar esc muy bien ; pero es imposible que practiquemos con
todos los que trae esta leccion, en estc cjercicio.
4. Sin embargo, al que madruga Dios le ayuda. Y. dice bien, y quien
no sc aventura no pasa la mar.
o. Espero que quien nos oiga conversar introduciendo tanto refran,
no diga de ellos lo que se dice de los males. i Que diccn dc los males ?
Bien vengas mal si viencs solo.
6. ; Oh ! no, seilor, en primer lugar los proverbios no son males, y en
segundo lugar ii nosotros nos gustan, y queremos practicar con olios, para
aprenderlos. Y. esta en lo justo, y ademas, cada uno hace de su capa tin
.sayo.
7. i Ola, amiguito ! Y. me parece practice en la materia, pero no picnso
V. que yo soy rana, porque debajo de una mala capa se encuentra tin
bticn bebedor. Caramba ; que no me deja Y. meter baza ! no se dira de
V. aqucllo de, en boca cerrada no entran moscas.
8. Yamos amigo, esc refran vino por los cabcllos. Pucs si viuo por
los cabellos, a pclo vino, ademas, que V. me parece ser de aquellos quo
ven la paja en el ojo ageno y no la viga en el suyo.
9. Xo se cnfade Y., amigo, que quien bien lo quiere le hard llorar.
Ko, sofior, no me enfado, pero ya veo que no es oro todo lo que relucc.
10. ; Bravo ! bravo ! ya va Y. aprendiendo a enzarzar refranes, lo
hace V. cual otro Sancho Panza, y yo, con toda mi pnictica, he ido por
lana y he vnelto trasquilado. Su ejemplo de Y. me ini enseilando; p:>-
quito a poco hilaba la vieja el copo, y dime con quien andas y te dire
quien eres.
11. ;Que honibre! si Y. va a ganar a su maestro! pero no hoy mal
que por bien no venga; Y. me hace reir con sus refranes. Bien, del inal
el nieaos, pero D. Manuel, es posiblc que le haya dc ganar sn d
LESSON LXV. 353
12. No so, no pucdo decir de esta agua no bebcre, y lo que no se puedo
remediar se ha de aguantar, y al fin se caiita la gloria. jZape, como los
enliebra! pcro yo no me doy por vencido, seiior maestro, porque yo ya
se aqucllo de cobra buena fatua y echatc a dorrnir.
13. La tenacidad es divisa del nccio, y al buen entendedor con media
palabra basta. Si, pero esas ya son palabras mayores, y a quien se hace
de miel las moscas se lo comen, y mieutras en mi casa estoy, rey soy.
14. Espero, D. Carlos, que no me quiera V. poner fuera de su casa.
No liorubre, pero estos refrancs son tan exprcsivos que le Lacen decir a
uno mas de lo que quicre ; pero a lo hecho peclio y ya que Y. me desa-
fio, siga la danza.
15. Bueuo, si Y. lo quiere, ya que la casa se qnema calentemonos ; pe-
ro bien haria V. antes quo se case en mirar lo que bace, porquo cada uno
sabe doude le aprieta el zapato. Amigo mio, V. no sabe de la misa la
media ; yo nunca doy mi brazo a torcer, y antes quiero scr cabeza de
raton que cola de Icon.
1G. Si, seuor, pero aunque la mona so vista de seda, mona se queda. no
sea V. como el perro del hortelano, que ni come ni deja comer, y acuer-
deso Y. qne cuenta y razon sustentan amistad y lo mejor de los dados es
no jugarlos. Basta, basta, hornbre me doy por vencido.
17. No la bagas no la teinas ; tu cnemigo es de tu oficio. Pero, D.
Carlos, le repito. . . .
18. La caridad bien ordenada entra por si misma. Pero si repito
que. . . .
19. Donde quiera que fucrcs haz como vieres. Sefior, me rindo. Mas
vale tarde que nunca.
EXERCISE.
1. Well, Charles, so you have come at last. Yes, better late than
never, you know ; but if it had continued raining I would not have
come at all.
2. Are you going out? I thought we were going together to the
theatre this evening. I must go out now ; but should I get back as soon
as I expect, we shall still have time to go to the theatre.
3. If you undertake that journey, I should like to be your companion.
It is rather donbtful at present whether I shall; but if I do, I would be
delighted to have your company.
4. If the directors establish that as a general rule, very many persons
will suffer great loss.
5. The conditions were, that if ho did not discover the error, or if,
after having discovered it, he could not rectify it, he should lose his place.
354 LESSON LXV.
C. He said ho would have no rest until he should hear some news of
that poor young man.
7. He promised that I should have the place, if it were in his power
to procure it for me.
8. In case his efforts should not be attended with success, you may
rely upon me to do all in my power to advance (promoter) your interests.
9. Their embarrassments will not cease so long as they do not intro-
duce some system of reasonable economy.
10. Peter tells his stories so well, and with such an appearance of
truth, that one is actually tempted to believe them.
11. They made so many conditions, that it was clear they had no wish
to help us.
12. Why did you not take that book? I would not take it because
some leaves were wanting.
13. If there is any thing within (in) my reach with which I can servo
you, just* let me know.
14. "Whatever he may have been in his youth, he is now a respectable
man, and beloved (loved) by everybody that knows him.
* English words la italics, not to be translated.
GENERAL OBSERVATIONS
GRAMMATICAL AND IDIOMATICAL PECULIARITIES OF THE SPANISH LAN-
GUAGE, NOT HITHERTO TREATED OF IN TILE GRAMMAR.
IN order to acquire a thorough knowledge of a language, it
is necessary to compare carefully the different uses of the
several parts of speech in the native language and in the one
proposed to be learned.
The sense of a whole passage is very often changed by the
undue suppression or omission of an article, a preposition, or a
conjunction; by using one tense of a verb for another; placing
an adjective before its noun when, in order to convey the idea
intended, it should go after it ; and not unfrequently by trans-
lating a certain part of speech by a word which, although its
appearance would lead us to take it for the equivalent of the
word to be interpreted, bears in reality no relation to the sense
designed to be expressed.
We have deemed it convenient, therefore, to devote a
few pages of our COMBINED METHOD to suqh general remarks
as are necessary to guide the learner, and which, if attentively
observed, will, after the study of the Spanish exercises con-
tained in the preceding lessons, enable him to compose purely
and idiomatically in the Castilian language.
The Definite Article.
1. It has already been observed in previous lessons, which
are the most usual cases where the definite article is ex-
pressed in the Spanish language ; but there are many others
in which it would be altogether incorrect to express or omit it
356
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.
in Spanish, as in English, as may be seen from the following
example.-, which may serve as a general rule for all those of
the same kind :
<; Esta cl rev en palacio ?
Es costumbre en Espaua.
Su tio firm 6 por cl, en ausencia dc
su padre.
Dccia vcrdad.
A tres de junio.
Tuvo valor para respouder.
A mediados de ajrosto.
Is the king in the palace ?
It is the custom in Spain.
His uncle signed for him, in the absence
of his father.
He told t/te truth.
On the 3d of June.
He had the courage to answer.
In the middle of August.
2. In Spanish the article is at times accompanied by a
preposition not required in English; as,
Hacc del caballcro. | He plays the gentleman.
Indefinite Article.
3. The so-called indefinite article (more properly adjective)
is, as has been observed in one of the early lessons, frequently
employed in English; and when translating from the latter
language into Spanish, we either suppress it entirely or render
it by some other part of speech ; as,
He has a right to (or a claim upon)
this capital.
At a distance of ...
Cadiz is a seaport (town).
He is another Alexander.
In half a ccaturv.
Tiene derecho sobre este caudal.
A distancia de . . .
Cadiz es puerto de mar.
Es otro Alejandro.
En medio siglo (or dentro de medio
siglo).
Volveremos dentro de media hora.
Las obras de otro (or obras agenas).
Hubo tiempo en que . . .
"We saall return in half an hour.
The works of another (or another's
works).
There was a time in which .
Persona.! and Possessive Pronouns.
4. The use and repetition of the personal and possessive
pronouns are more frequent in English than in Spanish ; and
that seeming redundance is essential to the clearness and pre-
cision of the English language ; but Spanish syntax docs not
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES. 357
submit to such encumbrances, and they are, therefore, generally
suppressed, as will be seen from the following examples :
Es verdad.
Llueve.
Hace frio.
6 Porque es raeacster ?
El mismo principe.
Su misma madre.
El mismo lo vio.
It is true.
Il \A raining (or it rains).
It is cold.
Why is it necessary ?
The prince himself.
His mother herself.
He saw it himself.
5. Before leaving the pronouns, it is proper to remark that
one and ones, so often used in English composition, to avoid
the unpleasant repetition of nouns, have no equivalent what-
ever in Spanish, and are hence to be left out in translating from
the former language to the latter ; as,
(, Tiene V. caballos ?
Tengo dos buenos.
Have you horses (or any horses) ?
I have two good ones.
6. Personal pronouns, when used redundantly in English,
as in the following example, are never expressed in Spanish :
Ambos perecieron. | Both of them perished (or were lost).
7. Even whole members of sentences are, not unfrequently,
suppressed in translating from English into Spanish ; as,
Todo no podia cntrar en un elogio,
mas si en una satira.
All could not find place in a eulogy,
but all could find place in a satire.
Observe that the repetition of the words italicized in the
English sentence is avoided by means of the adverb si in Span-
ish, which serves to correct the negation expressed in the first
member of the phrase, thus rendering the latter at once shorter
and more elegant.
Ellipsis.
8. There- are certain short modes of expression, certain
grammatical laconicisms, peculiar to the English language,
which are not admissible in Spanish ; the ellipses must in such
cases often be filled up; as,
Jamas hubo orador que hablase
mejor.
De ahi dimanan estos errores.
Never did orator speak better.
Hence these errors.
358
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.
No puede pensar en hactr mal.
La ciudad reducida a cenizas.
No va mal para ser nifio.
Su madre banada en lagtimas.
Aunque todos estuviesen juntos.
Esto es por lo que toca d su persona.
En pro y en contra.
Con la espada en la mano.
He cannot think of evil.
The city in ashes.
Not bad for a child.
Her mother in tears.
They were all together.
So much for his person (or personal
appearance).
For and against.
Sword in hand.
N. B. It is also correct to say, Espada en mano.
Inversion.
Although we have spoken at some length, in Lesson LI., on
the subject of inversion, we imagine the learner will not be
displeased to meet here a few well-chosen examples which will
give him a still clearer idea of the order observed in Spanish
for the expression of ideas, and the consequent difference of
construction between that language and the English.
9. The substantive often precedes its adjective; as,
Es el hombre mas perfecto del
mundo.
Llave falsa.
Testigo falso.
Su hijo mas joven.
He is the most perfect man in the
world.
False key.
False witness.
Her youngest son.
10. Instances occur, however, of the inversion taking place
in English, while the natural construction is followed in Span-
ish ; especially in the case of past participles acting as verbal
adjectives ; as,
Una vez destruido este fundamento,
todo se viene abajo.
Admitida csta libertad, el hombre
puede . . .
This foundation being once destroyed,
the whole (edifice) comes to the
ground.
This liberty (being) once admitted, man
. may . . .
11. In all cases similar to that of the following example,
the possessives mio, tuyo, suyo are placed after the substantive,
and then, of course, they retain their final syllable ; as,
El otro hijo suyo. \ His other son.
12. The same ideas are in not a few instances presented in
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.
359
Spanish in an order very different from that followed in Eng-
lish; as,
No lia veiiido para destruir, sino para
It is not to destroy that he has come,
edificar.
Bien veo que . .
Si tuviese V. que hacer una contrata.
(If you had to make an agreement would, of course, also be an allowable construction
in English.)
but to build up.
I see (very) well that . . .
If you had an agreement to make.
No tenia razon aquel filosofo que
decia que . . .
Toca remunerar los servicios al que
los recibi&.
Entre los Griegos, los que . . .
El que mas hablaba.
Cien veces mas quisiera yo que . . .
Solo Dios es inmutable.
That philosopher who said that . . .
was wrong.
It is for him who received the services
to reward them.
Those amongst the Greeks, who . . .
He who spoke the most.
I would prefer a thousand times that . .
! God alone is unchanging.
Nouns.
13. There is a striking difference to be observed in the use
of nouns in the two languages: we sometimes meet nouns in
O O *
the singular in English, while in Spanish they are used in the
plural only, and vice-versd :
Plural.
Mirar con malos ojcs.
Puso los ojos en mi.
Dar oidos a ...
Prestar oidos.
De pies a cabeza.
Por todas paries.
Juego de manos.
Se presento con los ojos en el suelo.
Singular.
A pie descalzo.
Estar en pie.
A remo y vela.
En toda sue rte de negocios.
No son ducuos de si.
Singular.
To look with evil eye.
He set his eye on me.
To give ear to ...
To lend an ear.
From head to foot.
In every direction.
Sleight of hand.
He came forward with downcast eye.
Plural.
With bwefeet (or in (his) bare
To stand on (one's) feet.
"With oars and sails.
In all sorts (or kinds) of business.
They are not masters of themselves
One Part of Speech for Another.
14. It is not uncommon, in comparing English and Spanish
composition, to see adjectives translated by substantive?, ad-
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.
verbs by substantives, substantives by verbs, and vice-versa.
Sometimes, in translating, difficulties, appearing at first sight
almost insurmountable, are overcome by the simple substitu-
tion of one part of speech for another.
Adjectives for Substantives.
Pica de guapo (or presumido de
guapo).
Es acusado de impio.
Se pone/wrzoso.
lie piques himself on his bravery.
He is accused of impiety.
He gets into a fury.
Substantives for Adverbs, and vice-versa.
Aunque idolatras dc ortgen.
Come excesivamcnle.
Tuvo la dicJia de salvarse.
Por desgracia nada oyeron.
Although originally idolaters.
He eats to excess.
Happily for him he escaped.
Unfortunately they heard nothing.
Substantives for Verbs, and vice-versa.
Habl6 lo mejor que pudo.
Debe probar su dicho.
Como acoslumbra.
Despues de almorzar.
Antes de coiner.
He spoke to the best of his ability.
He must prove what he says.
According to his custom.
After breakfast.
Before dinner.
Verbs for Pronouns.
Hay historiadorcs que
que . . .
aseguran
Some historians assure us that
Of Verbs in General.
15. We very often find verbs active with the indefinite se,
and sometimes the passive verb with the particle se, used in
Spanish to express the same idea conveyed in English by
passive, and sometimes also by active verbs ; one tense trans-
lated by another different tense, one number substituted in the
place of another, one person for other persons, and at times
even the same person translated by any or all the others, ac-
cording to the sense desired to be conveyed.
Passive in English.
El concilio se cclcbraba en Pisa.
El libro que se le alribuye.
Esto se encierra en la proposition.
Esto debe contarse por nada.
Cuando se les ruega que respondun.
The council was Jidd at Pisa.
The book which is a'ti-ili'!;:J to him.
That is contained in the ;
This is to be counted for nothing.
When they arc requested to a:
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.
361
Active in English.
Yiene a junlarse con su familia.
Se caso con la duquesa.
Se hicieron a la vela.
He comes to join his family.
He married the duchess.
They set sail.
The Indicative or Subjunctive for the Infinitive.
Le mando que callase.
Es reputado por hombre que nada
posee.
Espero me rcspcnda Y.
Ho ordered him to hold his tongue (or
to be silent).
He is supposed to possess nothing.
I expect you to answer me.
One Tense for Another.
(j.Te habre yo dado un derecho que j Have I then given thee a right which I
notengo? do not possess myself ?
,5 Porque solo los hombres habrdn de Why must mankind alone degenerate ?
degenerar ?
Cuanto mas hayan, meuos ganaran. The more they do, the less they will
gain.
Que un muerto rcsuscile, no es cosa ! It is no common thing fora dead (man)
comun. to resuscitate.
Son las seis.
One Humber for Another in Verbs.
It is six o'clock.
No le c/uedan rnas que tres hijos.
He has only three children left.
One Person for Another.
Nosotros somoa los barbaros.
Si hubiescn sido ellos los vituperados.
It is we that are barbarians.
If it had been they that they had blamed.
Mode of Asking: Questions and forming Negations with Verbs.
16. The auxiliary do, used in English in asking questions,
whether negatively or positively, is to be lost sight of in trans-
lating into Spanish, inasmuch as the simple form of the verb
contains all that is required for that purpose, as may be seen in
the following examples :
l Van Yds. algunas reces a la opera ?
I Sabia V. que debiamos venir tan
temprano?
No crcia que debiesen Yds. venir
hasta las tres.
Do you sometimes go to the opera ?
Did you know >hat we were to come so
early ?
I did not think you -were to come until
three o'clock.
17. Nor is it to be translated into Spanish when it stands
1C
362 GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.
in the English sentence merely for the purpose of giving more
emphasis to the expression ; as,
Yo creia que no iban nunca al teatro.
Si, senor, van a menudo.
I thought they never ttent to the theatre.
Yes, sir, they do go often.
18. It sometimes takes the place of a verb, to avoid the
repetition of the latter ; in all sucli cases it is to be rendered
into Spanish by a simple particle (positive or negative, as re-
quired by the sense), or else the verb expressing the action
must itself be repeated ; as,
6 Escribe V. todos los meses a su tio ? Do you write to your uncle every month ?
Si, senor (or le escribo todos los Yes, sir, I do.
meses).
19. To what has already been remarked relative to conju-
gations, we have but a few Avords to add, respecting a limited
number of verbs of the third conjugation. Those which have
either of the letters ch, II, or n, immediately preceding the ter-
mination, make their past participle in endo, instead of iendo ;
as, cincndo, mullendo, rinendo, hinchendo, bruncndo, gmfiendo,
tanendo, instead of ciiliendo, mulliendo, riniendo, hinch'iendo,
brun'iendo, yrumendo, tamendo.
For the same reason the i is also suppressed in the third
persons singular and plural of the preterit definite of the indica-
tive, and in all the persons of the second and third terminations
of the imperfect subjunctive, and of the future of the same
mood ; as, cino, midlo, rineron, hinchera, brunese, grunere, in-
stead of cinio, mullw, rimeron, hinchiera, bruniese, grumere.
There is but one exception allowable to this rule, and that
occurs in the verb henchir, which generally retains the i in the
third person singular preterit definite of the indicative, making
it hinchio, in order to avoid confounding it with hincho, same
person and tense of hinchar, a regular verb of the first conju-
gation.
The reason of the suppression of the i in the cases pointed
out above is obvious, inasmuch as the letters ch, II, or n, when
forming a syllable with e, cannot be sounded without the con-
currence of the i element to a certain extent. If, therefore, the i
were retained in those combinations, a forced and disagreeable
sound would be the result.
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES. 363
20. There are in English certain verbs of very frequent
occurrence, and whose signification, if not determined by some
other part of speech, it would often be difficult to explain.
Amongst this class, the verb to get plays a very important, if
not the most important part, and English persons are some-
times at as great a loss to know how exactly to translate it into
a foreign language, as foreigners are to know how and when
to use it idiomatically in English. This verb (to get] has no
exact equivalent in Spanish, but there are in that language
many verbs of something of a like nature, and by which it may
at times be correctly rendered, according to the signification in
which it is used. We venture to say that, in the most knotty
cases, a little thought, a moment's reflection would go far in
removing all difficulty.
Before making some uncouth makeshift of a translation,
pause a moment, and look what is the real meaning of to get in
the case before you ; then see what other verb would serve in
its place, or what other form of expression you can substitute
for the one proposed to be translated. This you will soon dis-
cover, for perhaps in no language can an instance be found of
the impossibility to express the same idea in more than one
way. For instance, let it be required to translate into Spanish,
To GET IN by the window ; here is a difficulty just as great as
any other case where the verb to get can be used.
Let us now see how else we can express that idea : To GO
ix, or to come in by the window ; that is to say, we have to
convey the idea of motion into. This same idea is to be ex-
pressed thus : To ENTER by the window =ENTRAE por la ven-
tana ; EXTRAR then is the standard and usual verb expressive
of motion into. Let us now change the preposition and reverse
the sense, for the preposition in determines the signification of
get in the case under consideration.
Required to translate : To GET OFT by the window ; the
same process as above gives us motion out; hence, &\IXR por
la ventana, SALIR being the standard and usual Spanish verb
expressive of motion out.
This mode of reasoning will in all cases lead to the desired
end. Let your object be to find some verb in English which
364 GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.
alone will mean the same thing as get and its determining prepo-
sition together.
GET, used in connection with adjectives, is no more dii
to be dipSed of than when accompanied by prepositions, and
it may in general be turned into Spanish by one of the three
verbs ponerse, hacerse, or volverse (according to the nature of
the case), and an adjective corresponding to the English one
determining get ; as,
JIacerse rico.
Volverse or ponerse rojo.
Poncrsc furioso.
To get rich.
To get red.
To gd furious.
These ideas in Spanish may be expressed by single verbs
derived from each of the adjectives respectively; as,
Enriquecerse.
Enrojeeerso.
Enfurecerse.
To gd rich.
To get red (I. c., to redden).
To gd furious.
21. To GET, as an active verb, is usually translated into
Spanish by any of these : coriseguir, obtencr, procurar, hacerse
de, hacerse con, according to the sense ; as,
Con&iguw lo que deseaba.
Obtendrun el privilegio.
Puede V. conseguirme or procurar-
mc un cjemplar de ese libro ?
Se hho de un caballo para cl vi;:je.
He got what he wanted.
They will gel the patent.
Can you get me a copy of that book ?
He got (i. c., bought) a horse for his
journey.
22. As for to get, used redundantly (and incorrectly) with
the verb to have, it disappears in the Spanish translation ; a*,
Tenemos uno. | We have got one.
23. The above remarks are equally applicable to all verbs
of the class alluded to, as for instance to become ; which latter,
as well as to get, is often elegantly translated by llegar a ser ; as,
Se hho ciudadano de Ics Estadcs
Unido.5.
L r eyo a ser hombre muy distinguido.
He became a citizen of the United
States.
He became a very distinguished maa
RECAPITULACION
DE LAS REGLAS DE LA GRAMATICA.
LECCION I.
1. i Eu que letras acaban los infinitives de todos los verbos en espaftol ?
gCuantas conjugaciones hay?
2. i Como se Hainan las letras que anteceden (precede) a las termina-
ciones ar, er, ir ?
3. i C6mo so forraan las conjugaciones de todos los vcrbos regulares
de la lengua ?
I Se puede suprimir el pronombre nominativo ?
gPorque?
I Puede supriinirse el pronombre Usted ?
4. i En que persona so pone el verbo cuando se emplea el pronombro
Ustcdf
^En quo casos se emplea la segunda persona del verbo? esto es,
I cuando so tutea en espaflol ?
LECCION II.
5. i Que significa la palabra seHor cuando se nsa en vocative ?
I Que palabra se debe emplear en lugar de scftor en el caso vocativo ?
I Cuando se emplea la palabra seHor ?
I Cuando se emplean las palabras seJlora, sefiorita y scflorito?
6. jDe que rnodo se usan los vocablos (words) Don j Dona?
7. i En dondo so coloca la negacion no, con respecto al verbo ?
LECCIOU III.
8. i Cuando se cambia la conjuncion y por la vocal ef
0. i Cuando se escribe cl acento sobre el que ?
366 EECAPITULACION.
10. jEn qu6 casos se traduce ~but por sinof
11. gEn que caso se traduce 5wi por ^>cr0 f
12. flPuedeu las palabras espailol, f ranees, lien, y otras muchas,
pertenecer d diferentes partes de la oracion (speech) 1
LECCIO^ IV.
13. i Cuando rigen los verbos activos a su objeto con ayuda de la pre-
posicion d ?
14. Que preposicion sirve para deiiotar la posesion 6 la materia de
quo una cosa esta heclia ?
15. i Que noinbrcs detennina cl articulo cl?
I Que variacion sufre el articulo el cuando viene d.espues de la pre-
posicion d 6 de?
16. ^Delante de que parte de la oracion se coloca el articulo indefini-
do un ?
I Cual es el uso de la palabra uno ?
LECCION V.
17. gCnantos generos hay en espanol?
I Cuando se emplea el articulo femenino una ?
18. ^Corao se traduce your?
LECCIOX VI.
19. ^En que letra acaban todos los verbos en la primera persona de
indicative ?
gEn qu6 se diferencia la scgunda conjugacion de la primera, en
el presente de indicative ?
20 j Como se traduce muy f
21. ^Como se forma la terminacion fcrnenina de los n ombres acaba-
dos en o ?
LECCION VII.
22. $C6mo forrnan su tenninacion femenina los adjetivos que acaban
en o, an ti on ?
KECAPITULACION. 367
2 Y los gentilicios ?
- En donde so colocan gencralmcntc los adjetivos con respected
los sustantivos ?
g En dondo so colocan los adjetivos usados metaforicamcnto (meta-
phorically) ?
- i Pierden algunos adjetivos su liltima letra 6 silaba cuando se colo-
can delantc do los sustantivos?
LEOOION VIII.
23. En qu6 se diferencian las tenninaciones de la segunda y tercera
conjugacion en el presente do indicative ?
24. i Cudndo se cambia la conjuncion 6 por la letra u f
25. i Como se traduce neither y nor ?
26. i Como se forma el plural de los nombres ?
27. ^Concuerda el adjetivo con el sustantivo?
28. i Concuerda el articulo con el nombrc a que se refiere ?
I Quo nombres femeninos toman cl articulo masculine ?
29. i Cuiindo se usa cl articulo neutro lo f
LECCION IX.
30. ^Como forman el plural los n ombres papa, mama, y pie?
31. jComo forman el plural los nombres de mas de una silaba que
acaban en s, tales como lunes, mdrtes ?
I Cuul es el plural de juez, Idpiz, y demds nombres que acaban en z ?
32. i Como se forma el plural de los nombres compnestos ?
33. i Cuando toman articulo los dias de la semana ?
34. i Quo lugar ocupan en la oracion los adverbios donde, adonde y
cuando ?
35. $ Cuando requieren el acento los adverbios dondc, adonde y
cuando ?
LECCION X.
36. i Que son verbos irregulares?
I Que se advierte acerca de tener y los deinas verbos auxiliares ?
368 EECAPITULACIO2f .
$C6mo so traduce los pronombres, regimen directo de un verbo
ingles ?
37. i C6rao se usara del le y el lo en el caso acusativo, esto es, como
regimen directo ?
I Como se traduccn en algunos casos it y so?
38. ^Kequieren el articulo los pronombres intcrrogativos quien, cudl,
que, de quien ?
39. Cuando en tma pregnnta esta regido un pronombre interrogativo
por una preposicion g qu6 debe hacerse en la respuesta ?
LECCION XI.
40. i Cuando se eraplea dlguien, y cuando alguno ?
^En que caso se traducira any one, 6 anybody por cualquicra?
41. i C6mo se usa de nadie y ningunof
42. i Cuando pierden alguno y ninguno la o fiual ?
43. g En qu6 caso se usara de algo y alguna cosa ?
44. g Cuando se usara de nada y ninguna cosa ?
45. $ Que negaciones se colocan delante del verbo ?
I Que efecto producen en espafiol, dos negativas en la misma sen-
tencia ?
46. En que casos no se traduce el articulo indefinido a 6 an?
LECCIOX XII.
47. i Cuando se usa del verbo Tiaber y cuando del verbo tenc r ?
I Como se traduccn los anxiliares to hare y to le seguidos de un
infinitive ?
48. $En que casos se emplea el preterito indefinido?
LECCION XIII.
49. i De que modo forman su terminacion femenina los prcnombres
mio, tuyo, suyo, nuestro, vuestro ?
50. i Que concordancia tienen los pronombres posesivos ?
51. i En donde se colocan y que letras pierden cuando se usan como
ndjctivos pronominales?
KECAPITULACION. 369
52. ^ En donde so coloca cl pronombre mio, cuando se usa en el caso
vocative ?
53. - t Quo concordancia ticneu los adjetivos posesivos cuando so usan
como pron ombres ?
- i Requieren el articulo en esta caso ?
54. i Qu6 articulo requieren cuando so usan do un modo indefinido ?
55. i Cuando se oraito el articulo con los pronombrcs posesivos ?
56. i Cuando se einplean los pronombres vuestro j vucstra ?
LECCION XIV.
57. i Qu6 orden sc sigue en la formacion do los niimeros compuestos ?
58. i Cuales son los niimeros declinables ?
59. i Cuando pierdo uno la letra o ?
60. Quo concordancia tiene ciento y cuando pierde la ultima silaba?
LECCION XV.
61. Que concordancia tienen los numeros ordinales y donde se colo-
can?
I Quo numeros ordinales pierden su liltima letra ?
62. i Quo numeros ordinales so usan y cuando ?
LECCION XVI.
63. i Cuando se usa el prcterito definido, y en quo se diferencia del
pretcrito indefinido ?
64. i Quo significa la preposicion ante ?
65. i C6rno se usan los adverbios mas y menos, y en donde se colocan
en la oracion ?
LECCION XVII.
66. gDe que modo se emplea el pronombre relativo quienf
67. i Cuando se traduce w 7io por que y cuando por quicn ?
68. i dial y que puedcn referirse a personas y cosas ?
16*
370 EECAPITULACION.
69. gCon quo palabra concuerda cuyo?
I Que especie de pronombre es ?
70. $ Se usa del pronombre relative en espaflol del inismo modo qne
en ingles ; esto es, precedido 6 no de una preposicion ?
71. ^Puede suprimirse el pronombre relative ?
LECCIOX XVIII.
72. gComo se declinan los pronombres demostrativos este, ese, aquel?
73. $ En que caso se eruplea este?
74. Qne sucedia en lo antiguo cuando este y ese precedian al adjctivo
otro ?
75. g Como sc emplean los pronombres demostrativos en su calidad de
adjetivos ?
76. i Como se traducen las palabras the former y the latter?
77. i Como se traduce el pronombre demostrativo ingles that, seguido
de la preposicion of, 6 de cualquiera de los relatives who 6 which ?
78. > 6 Come se traducen generalmente los pronombres personales in-
gleses, cuando van seguidos de un relative ?
79. i Que diferencia bay entre el significado de los adverbios aqul y
aUi, y oca j alia?
LECCIOX XIX.
80. ^Cuando debe usarse de la preposicion para, y cuando de par?
81. gCual es el significado de la preposicion entre?
82. i Cual es el significado de la preposicion hasta ?
LECCION XX.
83. gCnando pierden los adverbios tanto y cuanto su ultima silaba ?
84. C6mo se forma el comparative de igualdad?
85. jEn que caso puede emplearse cuan ?
86. i C6mo se forma el comparative de supcrioridad ?
EEC APITULACION. 371
87. i Como so forma el comparative de inforioridad ?
88. g~Porqu6 los adjetivos mayor, menor, mejor y peor, no necesitan
de las palabras mas 6 menos, para formar sus grades de comparacion ?
89. $En que caso se traduce than por de y en cual otro por que?
90. i Pueden tambien formar grades de comparacion los nombres, ver-
bos y adverbios ?
LECCION XXI.
91. i C6mo se traducen los superlatives inglescs que acaban per cst,
6 se forman con la palabra most ?
92. i En que caso se traduce most, 6 most of, por la mayor par te ?
93. j Que preposicion corresponde en espafiol al in ingles despucs de
un superlative?
94. Los superlatives que se forman en ingles por medio de most, very,
&c., g come se forman en espafiol ?
95. Cuando pierden los adjetivos la ultima vocal ?
96. ^Digame V. lo que se advierte acerca do los superlatives en
errimo ?
97. i Qu6 adjetivos cambian sus letras finales antes dc recibir la ter-
minacion isimo ?
98. $ Cuales son los superlatives en isimo formados irregularmente ?
99. ^Cuales son los comparatives y superlatives irregulares?
100. i Cuando admiten grades de comparacion los sustantivos ?
LECCION XXII.
101. i Qu6 se advierte acerca de los verbos scr y estar ?
102. g Cuando se traduce el verbo to fie, por scr, y cuando por estar f
I Cuales son los verbos cuyos gerundios no admiten el verbo estar
como auxiliar ?
LECCION XXIII.
103. i Cuando se emplea elfuturo simple f
104. i C6mo se usan los numerales que indican las horas del dia ?
372 BECAPITUL ACIOy.
105. g Porque palabra se traduce evening 6 night ?
106. i En que caso no rige al subjuntivd la conjuncion si f
LECCIOK XXIV.
107. I Cuando se cmplca clfuturo compuesto ?
108. i Como se traduce en ingles acabar de ?
109. gEn qu6 letra acaban en espauol la. mayor partc dc las palabras
quo en ingles terminan en tion ?
110. i Con quo muneros se cuentan los dias del me* ?
LECCION XXV.
111. i Qne difercncia se encucntra en el significado dc los verbos
saber y conocer ?
112. i Que diferencia cxiste cntre los advcrbios aim, ya y todavia ?
Como se traduce once, twice, etc. ?
I Que se observa en el uso de la palabras micdo, talor, vcrgftcn-
za, Idstima, j tiempo f
113. Cuando el verbo to ~be precede a los adjetivos hungry, thirsty,
afraid, a-shamed, right, wrong, cold, sleepy, i qu6 verbo se cmplca en
espafiol ?
114:. i Cotuo se cmplcanjarnds j nunca f
LECCIOX XXVI.
115. ^En d6nde se colocan los pronombres nominativos con respecto
al verbo ?
116. i Que peculiaridad se nota en los pronombres pcrsoiiales?
117. En donde se coloca el complemcnto directo (objective case)
cuando no le precede tma preposicion, y el verbo estd en infinitivo 6
imperative ?
118. i En que tiempos pierde el verbo la letra final cuando se le afi.idc
nno de los pronombres no* u os ?
I Con que objeto se bace csto ?
119. i Cuando podra colocarse el pronombre complemento directo
despues del verbo en el modo indicative 6 subjuntivo ?
KECAPITULACION. 373
120. Cuando un verbo rija a otro en infinitive, g en donde so colocara
el pronombre objeto ?
121. i Que caso rigen las preposiciones expresas ?
122. i Que se nota cuando la preposition con antecede a los pronom-
bres mi, t'l, si ?
123. 4 Cuando se usa do la preposition entre con el caso nominative ?
124. i Qu6 pronombre complemento (i. e., 1st objective or 2d objec-
tive case) se usa despues de los comparatives ?
125. Cuando en ingles el caso objetivo de la primera 6 segunda per-
sona cs el regimen del verbo 6 de la preposition to, tacita (understood)
6 expresa, $ como se traduce ?
126. i Como se traduce el complemento indirect ingles de la tercera
persona ?
LECCION XXVII.
127. Cuando la tercera persona va regida de la preposition to en
ingles, tacita 6 expresa, siendo el regimen del verbo un pronombre dc la
tercera persona, g por quo palabra se traduce ?
I Cual cs la razon de esto ?
128. En caso do encontrarse en una sentencia dos pronombres, uno
complemento dirccto y el otro indirecto, g cual se coloca primero ?
129. i Y cuando el regimen del verbo es un pronombre reflexive ?
130. i Qu6 se observa cuando, para dar mas energia a la frase, se ponen
dos pronombres de la misma persona ?
131. i Que debc observarse con respecto a las frases, d el quiero, d ti,
amof
132. i Que se debc tencr presente para no confundir los pronombres
personales eZ, la. lo, los j las, con los articulos el, la, lo, los y
133. gPara qu6 sii've el adjetivo mismo?
LECCION XXVIII.
134. i Cuando se usa el imperfccto ?
135. i Cuando so usa el plvscuamj^erfecto f
374 BECAPITULACION.
136. i C6mo se traducen las expresiones to 7iave just y to be just de-
lante de un participle pasado ?
LECCION XXIX.
137. i Cuando se usa el preterite anterior ?
138. jDe d6nde se derivan los adverbios de modo y calidad ?
139. $C6mo se fonnan los adverbios que se derivan de adjetivos?
140. i Que adverbios admiten grados de ccmparacion ?
141. i Qu6 adverbios pueden sustituirse sin cambiar de significado ?
LECCIOF XXX.
142. i Qu6 son verbos impersonales ?
143. En qu6 caso se usan los verbos amanecer y anocliecer en las tres
personas ?
144. g C6mo se traducen en ingles los verbos Tiaber y Jiacer cuando se
usan corno impersonales ?
I Que se observa con respecto a la primera persona del presente de
indicative del verbo habcr, usado impersonalmente ?
I Hay otros verbos que pueden usarse como impersonales ?
145. g En que caso no se traduce el pronombre ingle's itf
I Eequieren articulo los nombres tornados en sentido indelinido ?
I Toman el articulo los nombres usados en toda la extension de su
significado?
146. jLJevan articulo los nombres de naciones, paises, provincias,
monies, rios y estaciones ?
147. i Cuando no admiten articulo los nombrej de naciones, paises y
provincias, etc.
I Cuales requieren siempre el articulo ?
LECCION XXXI.
148. i C6mo se conjuga el verbo gustar cuando significa to please?
149. i Qu6 significa el verbo gustar seguido de la preposicion de f
150. i Qu6 significa y como se conjuga el verbo gustar corno verbo
activo?
RECAPITULACION". 375
151. i Qu6 otros verbos requieren la misma construccion idiomatica
del verbo gustar ?
152. i Qud se observa en la conjugation del verbo pesar cuando signi-
fica to regret ?
LECCIOtf XXXII.
153. i C6mo se forma la voz pasiva ?
I Cuando se forma con el verbo cslar f
154. i En que caso no podra usarse la voz pasiva con el verbo ser en
cl presento y el imperfecto de indicative ?
155. g Cuando se usara de la preposicion de y cuando de por en la voz
pasiva ?
156-157. i En que casos se forma la voz pasiva con el pronombre se ?
LECCION XXXIII.
158. i C6mo se conjugan los verbos reflesivos ?
159. i Cuando se usa la forma reflexiva ?
160. }, Como se conjugan los verbos reciprocos ?
LECCION XXXIV.
161. i Que constituye la irregulavidad de los verbos ?
162. gQue debe tenerse presente para no- confundir con los verbos
irregulares algnnos que aunque sufren un cambio ortografico no dejan por
eso de ser regulares ?
163. i Que cambio sufren los verbos que acaban en eer ?
164. i Que cambio se nota en los que acaban en uir ?
165. i En cuantas clases 6 grupos se dividen los verbos irregulares?
166. i Qu6 se observa en la construccion del verbo pagar ?
LECCION XXXV.
167. eCual es la irregularidad del verbo acostar?
168. i Cuaudo se usa el modo imperative ?
376 EEC APITULACI O^.
169. i Qu6 letras pierde, y en que personas, el modo imperative cuando
se le afiade el pronombres nos y os f
170. gEn d6nde se colocan los pronombres en espafiol cuando cl 5m-
perativo se usa en la forma negativa ?
171. i Puede usarse el future de indicativo por el imperative ?
172. ^ Come se traduceu en espafiol los adjetivos ingleses acabados
en ous ?
173. i Y los nombres j adjetivos ingleses que acaban en ic 6 ical f
LECCIOX XXXVI.
174. i Caal es la irregularidad del verbo mover ?
175. Cuando se usa del se come pronombre indefinido, i a que palabras
corresponde en ingles ?
176. i Cuales son las cuatro funcioncs que desempefia el pronorabre se ?
177. jC6mo se traducen en espafiol los nombres ingleses que acaban
en ty ?
I A que genero pertenecen cstos nombres ?
178. i Qu6 peculiaridad se nota en el verbo dolcr ?
LECCIOK XXXVII.
179. i Cual es la irregularidad del verbo atender?
180-181-182-183. i Cuando se emplea el modo subjuntivo ?
184. i Cuando se usa eFpresente de subjuntivo ?
185. i Cuando se usa el perfecto de subjuntivo ?
LECCIOX XXXVIII.
186. i Tienen los verbos espauoles otro participio ademas del pasado ?
I Qu6 terminacion tienen los participios preseutes, y como se usan ?
187. l Cuando se usan los gerundios ?
188. $Cual es el auxiliar de los gerundios?
189. i Como se traduce en espailol el participio presente ingles, prc-
cedido de una preposicion ?
190. i Puede usarse el infinitive como nombre verbal?
EECAPITULA.C10N. 377
191. i C6mo se traduce en ingles el infinitive espafiol, regido por otro
verbo ?
LECCION XXXIX.
192. i Cual cs la irregulavidad del verbo pedir ?
193. $ Cuales son las formas mas usuales para saludar?
LECCION XL.
194. g Cnal es la irregularidad del verbo conducir?
195. i Quo se nota sobre la palabra segun ?
196. j C6rno conoucrdan los nombres colectivos ?
LECCION XLI.
197. i Qu6 son verbos defectives ?
198. En quo personas y cuando se usa el verbo yacerf
199. 2 En qu6 tierapos se usa el verbo solcr y quo peculiaridad se nota
en el?
200. i Qu6 significacion tiene la preposicion desd e ?
201. 2 Como se usa la preposicion contra ?
202. j Cual es la significacion do la preposicion sobre?
203. i Cual es la significacion de la preposicion tras f
204. i Cuando se usa de la conjuncion pues ?
LECCION XLII
205. i En que se dividen las conjunciones?
206. i Quo debe observarso acerca del regimen de las conjunciones ?
207. i Quo conjunciones rigen el verbo al modo subjuntivo ?
208. i Cuales le rigen al modo infinitive ?
209. i Cuales le rigen al modo indicative ?
378 BECAPITULACION.
LECCION XLIII.
210. $ Cuando SQ emplea el imperfecto de subjuntivo, y cuando el
pluscuamperfecto ?
211. gC6mo so traducen en espafiol los auxiliares may, might, can,
could, will, would y should ?
212. g Deque manera expresa la accion del verbo el imperfecto de
subjuntivo?
213. i De que inanera la representa el pluscuamperfecto ?
LECCION XLIV.
214. $Que son nombres aumentativos y diminutivos, y como se
fonnan?
215. i Hay algunos nombres que forman sus diminutivos con otras
tenninaciones distintas de las designadas por este objeto ?
216. i Pueden formarse diminutivos con otras partes de la oracion ?
217. % Que nombres primitives no admiten algunas de las termiuaciones
designadas ?
218. i A que nombres se designa con el de despreciathos?
LECCION XLV.
219. i Como representa la accion del verbo el future simple de sub-
juntivo?
220. i Cuando puede sustituirse el presente do subjuntivo al futuro
simple ?
221. $C6mo representa la accion del verbo el futuro compuesto de
subjuntivo?
222. i Cuando puede sustituirsele el perfecto de subjuntivo ?
223. i Qu6 debe tenerse presente para no confundir el imperfecto y
pluscuamperfecto del modo subjuntivo, con el futuro simple y compuesto
del mismo modo ?
224. Cuando el verbo que esta en futuro simple 6 compuesto funciona
como verbo determinante I a que modo y tiempos puede regir al verbo
determinado ?
EECAPITULACION. 379
LECCION XLVI.
225-226. i Qud son conjunciones, y cual es el signiticado do las prin-
cipales ?
LECCION XLVII.
227. i Que partes dc la oration pucden llevar articulo ?
228. jLlevan articulo los nombres comunes que se usan en toda la
extension do su signification ?
229. $Se pone articulo delante de los nombres do imperios, reinos,
provincias y paises ?
I Cuando se omite ?
230. i Cuando reqnieren articulo los nombres de medidas, pesos, &c.
231. i Cuando se repite el articulo ?
232. i En que oaso se pone el articulo delante de los nombres quo
expresan ran go, oficio, profesion 6 titulo de personas ?
233. En qu6 caso se usa el articulo en lugar del adjetivo posesivo?
234. i En que caso se usa el articulo, como en ingles ?
LECCION XLVIII.
235. i Como se corresponden los verbos cuando estan unidos por un
relative ?
236. i Cuando se pone en infinitive el verbo detenninado ?
237. Si el verbo determinante fuere ser, 6 cualquiera de los imperso-
nalcs, i en que modo se pondra el verbo determinado, en el caso de carc-
cer este de sugeto ?
I Porque sucede esto asi ?
238. Y cuando dicbo verbo tuviere sugeto, j en que modo se pondra ?
- Los verbos que expresan mandato, j a que modo rigen el verbo
detenninado ?
239. Cnando el verbo determinante esta en infinitive, en presente 6
futuro de indicativo, 6 en imperative unido al verbo detenninado por
una conjuncion j en que modo se pone este ultimo ?
240. l A qu6 modo y en que tiempos rige al verbo determinado cl
380 EECAPITTTLACIOK.
determinante, cuando este liltimo se encuentra en el preterito indefinido
6 eu el future compuesto de indicative ?
241. Cuando el nominative es el mismo para ambos verbos y el de-
terminante se encuentra en indicative, i a que mode rige este al deter-
minado ?
LECCION XLIX.
242. i Que son nombres derivados ?
243, 244, 245, 246, 24T, 248, 249, 250, 251, 252. j Que denotan, y
cuales son las principales terminaciones ?
LECCION L.
253. i Como se forman los nombres compuestos ?
LECCION LI.
254. i Cual es la construction natural ?
255. i Cual es la figurada ?
256. i De cuantos modos puede construirsc una fraise ?
257. i Que construction es la preferible ?
LECCIO^ LII.
258. i Conservan algunos participles el rdgimen de sns verbos ?
259. i Cual es la concordancia del participio pasado ?
260. Cuando un verbo tiene dos participles pasados, nno regular y
otro irregular, ^ como se etnplean ?
261. i Cuales son los participios pasados irregularcs que sc pueden
usnr con el verbo haber ?
2 62. i Que irregularidad peculiar tiene el verbo morir ?
2G3. i liny algunos participios pasados 6 pasivos que toman una signi-
fication activa ?
BECAPITULACION. 381
264. $ Pueden algunos participios pasados hacer las veccs de sustan-
tivo?
265. i Que so debe obsorvar acerca de otros tiempos que algunos gra-
imiticos agrcgan al modo infinitivo ?
LECCION LIII.
266. i Que son modismos 6 idiotismos ?
I Como sc traducen en espaflol las frases en que la preposicion
inglesa torna un significado diferente de aquel que generalmente so le
atribuye ?
LECCIOX LIV.
267. i Como so traducen en espaflol las conjuncioncs inglesas que so
usan frecuentemente en lugar de otras palabras ?
268. i Hay tambien en espafiol conjunciones que se usan en lugar de
otras palabras?
^ Cnales son los principales usos de la conjuncion si?
LECCION LV.
269. i Cuales son los principales usos de la conjuncion que ?
LECCIOK LVI.
270. i Cuales son las formas mas usuales para principiar y acabar
cartas ?
LECCION LVII.
271. i Que se advierte acerca de las preposiciones que cambian su
significado de los verbos a que se juntan ?
LECCION LYIII.
272. i Como se traducen los verbos to le glad y to le rejoiced at ?
382 EECAPITTJLACION.
273. i Como se traducen los verbos to ~be sorry y to grieve ?
274. i C6mo se emplea el verbo caber ?
LECCION LIX.
275. $ A que modimos se prestan los verbos caer, ddr, decir y ecJiar ?
LECCION LX.
276. j Cuales son los principales idiotismos a que se prestan los verbos
entrar, hacer, ir, llevar, mandar, oler a, saber a, salir, servir, tardar y
wlver ?
COMPLETE LIST
OF THE
CONJUGATIONS OP ALL THE SPANISH VERBS, AUXHJARY, REGULAR, IR-
REGULAR, REFLECTIVE, IMPERSONAL AND .DEFECTIVE, WITH
AN EXAMPLE OF THE PASSIVE VOICE.
AUXILIARY VERBS.
INFINITIVE.
PRESENT.
To have.
Ilaber. Tener.
Haling.
Ilabiendo. Teniendo.
Tole.
I Ser.
GEEUXD.
Being.
Siendo.
Had.
Habido. Tenido.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
I Sido.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
Been.
I am.
1. He.
2. Has.
3. Ha.
Ten go.
Tienes.
Tiene.
1. Hemos.
2. Habeis.
3. Han.
Tenemos.
Teneis.
Tienen.
IMPERFECT.
J had.
1. Habia. Tenia.
2. Habias. Tenias.
3. Hubia. Tenia.
Era.
Eras.
Era.
Estar.
Estando.
Estado.
Soy.
Estoy.
Eres.
Estas.
Es.
Esta
Somos.
Estamos.
Sois.
Estais.
Son.
Estan.
Estaba.
Estabas.
Estaba.
CONJUGATIONS.
1. Habiarnos. Teniamos.
2. Habiais. Teniais.
3. Habian. Tenian.
Eramos.
Erais.
Eran.
Estabamos.
Estabais.
Estabari.
PEETER-IT
I had.
1. Hube. Tuve.
2. Hubiste. .Tuviste.
3. Hubo. Tuvo.
DEFINITE.
I was.
Fui.
Fuiste.
Fue.
Estuve.
Estuviste.
Estuvo.
1. Hubimos. Tuvimos.
2. Hubisteis. Tuvisteis.
3. Hubieron. Tuvieron.
Ftumos.
Fuisteis.
Fueron.
Estuvimos.
Estuvisteis.
Estuvieron.
FUTURE
/ shall hate.
1. Habre. Tendr6.
2. Habras. Tendras.
3. Habra. Teudra.
smriE.
I shall ~be.
Sere. Estare.
Seras. Estaras.
Sera. Estarii.
1. Habremes. Tendremos.
2. HabrSis. Tendreis.
3. Ilabran. Tendran.
Seremos.
Sereis.
Seran.
Estaremos.
Estareis.
Estarun.
IMPERATIVE.
Let me hate. Let me
le.
2. Have thon. Ten tu. Se.
3. Let Min have. Tonga el. Sea.
Esta.
Este.
1. Let us have. Tengamos.
2. Have ye. Tened.
3. Let them have. Tengan.
Seamos.
Sed.
Sean.
Estemos.
Estad.
Esten.
I may have.
1. Ilaya. Tenga.
2. Hayaa Tengas.
3. Hava. Tenga.
1. Hayamos. Tengamos.
2. Hayais. Tengais.
3. Hayan. Tengan.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PEESEXT.
I may le.
Sea. Este.
Seas. Estes.
Sea. Este.
Seamos.
Seals.
Sean.
Estemos.
Esteis.
Esten.
CONJUGATIONS.
385
IMPERFECT. First Termination.*
I would have. I would le.
1. Habria. Tendria. Seria. Estaria.
2. Habrias.
3. Habria.
Tendrias.
Tendiia.
1. Habriamos. Tendriamos.
2. ITabriais. Tendriais.
3. Ilabrian. Tendrian.
Serias.
Seria.
Estarias.
Estaria.
Seriamos, Estariamos.
Scriais. Estariais.
Serian. Estarian.
I would have.
Second Termination.
I would le.
1. Hubiera. ,
2. Ilubierais.
3. Ilubiera.
Tuviera.
Tuvieras.
Tnviera.
Fuera.
Fueras.
Fuera.
Estuvicra.
Estuvieras.
Estuviera.
1. Ilubicramos. Tuvieramos.
2. Ilubierais. Tuvierais.
3. Hubieran. Tuvieran.
Fuerainos. Estuvicramos.
Fuerais. Estuvierais.
Fueran. Estuvicran.
I should have.
Third Termination.
- 1 should le.
1. Hubiese.
2. Hubiescs.
3. Hubiese.
Tuviese.
Tuvieses.
Tuviese.
1. Hubiesemos. Tuviesemos.
2. Ilubieseis. Tuvieseis.
3. Hubiesen. Tuviesen.
Fuese.
Fueses.
Fuese.
Estuviese.
Estuvieses.
Estuviese.
Fuescmos. Estuviesemcs.
Fueseis. Estuvicseis.
Fuesen. Estuviesen.
FUTUEE.
I might or should have.
1. Ilubiere. Tuviere.
2. Hubieres. Tuvieres.
8. Ilubiere. Tuviere.
1. Ilubieremos. Tuvieremos.
2. Ilubiereis. Tuviereis.
3. Hubieren. Tuvicren.
I might or should lie.
Fuere. Estuviere.
Fueres. Estuvicres.
Fuere. Estuviere.
Fuereracs. Estuvieremos.
Fuereis. Esttiviereis.
Fueren. Estuvicren.
* It will be observed that, differing from almost all other grammars, we give ria r.s the
first termination, this order appearing: to us more logical and, above all, more grammatical,
and more in accordance with the signification and uses of the three terminations.
17
386
CONJUGATIONS.
MODELS OF THE THREE REGULAR CONJUGATIONS.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
INFINITIVE.
Hablar.
Hablando.
Hablado.
GERUND.
To speak.
Speaking.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
I Spoken.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Hablo.
2. Hablas.
3. Habla.
Singular.
Plural.
1. Hablamos.
2. Hablais.
3. Hablan.
IMPERFECT.
1. Hablaba.
2. Hablabas.
3. Hablaba.
I spoke, was
speaking, &c.
1. Hablabamc
2. Hablabais.
3. Hablaban.
1. HablS.
2. Hablaste.
3. Hablo.
PRETERIT
I spoke.
DEFINITE.
1. Hablamos.
2. Hablasteis.
3. Hablaron.
FUTURE SIMPLE.
1. HablarS.
2. Hablaras.
3. Hablara.
2. Ilabla.
3. liable.
I shall or will
speak.
1. Hablaremos.
2. Hablar&s.
3. Hablaran.
IMPEEATIVE.
1. Hablemos.
Speak (thou).
2. Hablad.
3. Hablen.
1. Hable.
2. Hables.
3. Hable.
1. Ilablaria.
2. Hablarias.
3. Hablaria.
1. Hablase.
2. Ilablases.
3. Hablase.
1. Ilablare.
2. Ilablares.
3. Hablare.
CONJUGATIONS.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
387
PRESET.
I may speak.
1. Hablemos.
2. Hableis.
3. Hablen.
IMPERFECT. First Termination.
I should or would
speak.
1. Hablariamos.
2. Hablariais.
3. Hablarian.
Second Termination.
1. Ilablara.
2. Hablaras.
3. Hablara.
I migbt, could,
would, orsbould
speak.
1. IlablaranK
2. Hablarais.
3. Hablaran.
Third Termination.
I might, &c.,
speak.
I might, &c.,
speak.
FUTURE.
1. Ilablasemos.
2. Hablaseis.
3. Hablasen.
1. Hablarernos.
2. Hablareis.
3. Ilablaren.
Aprender.
Aprendiendo.
Aprendido.
SECOJfD COXJCG1TION.
INFINITIVE.
| To learn.
GERUND.
| Learning.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
I Learned.
388
1. Aprendo.
2. Aprendes.
3. Aprende.
1. Aprendia.
2. Aprendias.
3. Aprendia.
1. Aprendi.
2. Aprendiste.
3. Aprendi6.
CONJUGATIONS-
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
I learn.
1. Aprendemos.
2. Aprendeis.
3. Aprenden.
IMPERFECT.
I learned, was 1. Aprendiarnos.
learning, &c.
2. Aprendiais.
3. Aprendian.
PRETERIT DEFINITE.
I learned.
1. Aprendimos.
2. Aprendisteis.
3. Aprendieron.
FrTTEE SIMPLE.
1. Aprender6.
2. Aprenderds.
3. Aprendera.
2. Aprende.
3. Aprenda.
I shall or
learn.
1. Aprenderemos.
2. Aprendereis.
3. Aprenderan.
IMPERATIVE.
Learn (thou).
1. Aprendamos.
2. Aprended.
3. Aprendan.
1. Aprenda.
2. Aprendas.
3. Aprenda.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PKESEXT.
I may learn.
1. Aprendamos.
2. Aprendais.
3. Aprendau.
IMPERFECT. First Termination.
1. Aprcndcria. I would or should
learn.
2. Aprenderias.
3. Aprenderia.
1. Aprenderiamos.
2. Aprenderiais.
3. Aprenderian.
CONJUGATIONS.
389
1. Aprendiera.
2. Aprendieras.
3. Aprendiera.
1. Aprendiese.
2. Aprendieses.
3. Aprendiese.
1. Apreadiero.
2. Aprendiercs.
3. Aprendiere.
Second Termination.
I might, could, 1. Aprendieramos.
would, or should
learn.
2. Aprendierais.
3. Aprendicran.
Third Termination.
I might, &c.,
learn.
I might, &c.,
learn.
FUTTUE.
1. Aprendiesemos.
2. Aprendicseis.
3. Aprendiesen.
1. Aprendieremos.
2. Aprendiereis.
3. Aprendieren.
Escribir.
Escribiendo,
Escrito.*
THIRD ONJUGATIOX.
IXFIXITIVE.
I To write.
GEECXD.
"Writinsc.
PAST PAKTICIPLE.
| Written.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Escribo.
2. Escribes.
3. Escribe.
1. Escribia.
I write.
1. Escribimos.
2. Escribis.
3. Escriben.
IMPERFECT.
I wrote, was
writing.
2. Escribias.
3. Escribia.
1. Escribiamos.
2. Escribiais.
3. Escribian.
* This is tho only instance of irregularity in the verb Exribir.
390
CONJUGATIONS.
1. Escribi.
2. Escribiste.
3. Escribio.
1. Escribire.
2. Escribiras.
3. Escribira.
2. Escribe.
3. Escriba.
1. Escriba.
2. Escribas.
3. Escriba.
1. Escribiria.
2. Escribirias.
3. Escribiria.
1. Escribiera.
2. Escribieras.
3. Escribiera.
1. Escribiese.
2. Escribieses.
3. Escribiese.
PEETERIT DEFINITE.
I -wrote. 1. Escribimos.
2. Escribisteis.
3. Escribieron.
FUTtJEE SIMPLE.
I shall (or will)
\mte.
1. Escribireraos.
2. Escribireis.
3. Escribiran.
IMPERATIVE.
I 1. Escribamos.
Write (thou). 2. Escribid.
Let him, &c.,
write.
3. Escriban.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PEESEXT.
I may write. 1. Escribamos.
2. Escribais.
3. Escriban.
IMPERFECT. First Term ination.
I would (or
should) write.
1. Escribiriamos.
2. Escribiriais.
3. Escribirian.
Second Termination.
I might, could,
would, or should
write.
1. Escribieramos.
2. Escribierais.
3. Escribieran.
Third Termination.
I might, could,
would, or should
write.
1. Escribiesemos.
2. Escribieseis.
3. Escribiesen.
CONJUGATIONS.
391
FUTURE.
1. Escribiere.
2. Escribieres.
3. Escribiere.
I might,
write.
1. Escribiere mos.
2. Escribiereis.
3. Escribieren.
COMPOUND TENSES.
These are formed by joining the several tenses of the auxiliary habcr
to the past participle of the verb expressing the action.
I have spoken.
I hate learned.
I have written.
1. Ho 1 hablado.
2. Has I aprendido.
3. Ha escrito.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRETERIT INDEFINITE.
To he hablado.
Yo Tie aprendido.
Yo he escrito.
Hemos ~\ hablado.
Habeis L aprendido.
Han escrito.
PLUPERFECT.
/ had spoken.
I had learned.
I had written.
1. Habia
2. Habias
3. Habia
hablado.
aprendido.
escrito.
Yo habia hal)lado.
Yo habia aprendido.
Yo habia escrito.
Habiamos ~\ hablado.
Ilabiais J- aprendido.
Habian j escrito.
PRETERIT ANTERIOR.
I had spoken.
I had learned.
I had icritten.
1. Ilube
2. Hubiste
3. Hubo
hablado.
aprendido.
escrito.
Yo liube hablado.
Yo hube aprendido.
Yo hiibe escrito.
Hubimos ~\ hablado.
Hubisteis I aprendido.
Hubieron escrito.
COMPOUXD FTITrRE.
I shall have spoken.
I shall have learned.
I shall have written.
1. Habre
2. Habras
3. Habrii
hablado.
aprendido.
escrito. *
Yo habre hablado.
Yo habre aprendido.
Yo Jiabre escrito.
Habremos "j hablado.
Habreis I aprendido.
Habran escrito.
r The other compound tenses are conjugated in like manner.
392
C O X J U G A T I O X S .
THE SEVEN PRINCIPAL CLASSES OF IRREGULAR
VERES.
FIRST CLi^S.
ACERTAR.
1. Acicrto.
2. Aciertas.
0. Acierta.
2. Acierta.
3. Acierte.
1. Acicrtc.
2. Aciertes.
3. Acierte.
To 7ii 7*0 marl:
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
I hit the mark. 1. Acertamos.
2. Acertais.
3. Aciertan.
IMPERATIVE.
1. Acertemos.
2. Acertad.
3. Acierten.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Acertemos
2. Acerteis.
3. Acierten.
The following verbs, and their compounds, are conjugated like ACERTAR ;
Acrecentar.
To increase.
Derrengar.
To break the back.
Adestrar.
To render skilful.
Despernar.
To cut off the legs.
Alentar.
To breathe.
Despertar.
To awake.
Apacentar.
To feed.
Desterrar.
To banish.
Apretar.
To squeeze.
Empedrar.
To pave.
Arrendar.
To hire.
Empezar.
To begin.
Asentar.
To place.
Encerrar.
To lock up.
Aserrar.
To saw.
Encomendar.
To recommend.
Aterrar.
To throw down.
Enterrar.
To bury.
Atcstar.
To stuff.
Escarmentar.
To take warning.
Atravesar.
To cross.
Fregar.
To rub.
Aventar.
To winnow.
Gobercar.
To govern.
Calentar.
To \varm.
Helar.
To freeze.
Cegar.
To blind.
Herrar.
To shoe.
Ccrrar.
To shut.
Invernar.
To winter.
Comenzar.
To commence.
Mentar.
To mention.
Concertar.
To agree.
Merendar.
To take a collation.
Confesar.
To confess.
Negar.
To deny.
Dccentar.
To taste for the
Nevar.
To snow.
first time.
Pcnsar.
To r
CONJUGATIONS
393
Quebrur.
To break.
Sosegar.
Recomcndar.
To recommend.
Soterrar.
Regar.
To water.
Temblar.
Eevcntar.
To burst.
Tcntar.
Segar.
To cut down.
Trasegar.
Scmbrar.
To sow.
Tropezar.
Sentar.
To set.
To, quiet.
To bury.
To tremble.
To tempt.
To rake.
To stumble.
SECOND CLASS.
ACOSTAR.
1. Acucsto.
2. Acuestas.
3. Acuesta.
2. Acuesta.
3. Acucste.
1. Acueste.
2. Acuestcs.
3. Acueste.
To put in bed.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
I put in Led.
1. Acostaraos.
2. Acostais.
3. Acuestan.
IMPERATIVE.
1. Acostemos.
2. Acostad.
3. Acuesten.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Acostemos.
2. Acosteis.
3.^ Acuesten.
The following verbs, and their compounds, are conjugated like ACOSTAR:
Acordar.
To agree.
Agorar.
To divine.
Almorzar.
To breakfast.
Amolar.
To grind.
Aporcar.
To hoe.
Apostar.
To bet.
Aprobar.
To approve.
Asolar.
To waste.
Atronar.
To thunder.
Avergonzar.
To giiame.
Colar.
tf^^fo strain.
Colgar.-
To hang.
Comprobar.
To verify.
Consolar.
Contar.
Costar.
Degollar.
Demostrar.
Descollar.
Desconsolar.
Desolar.
Desollar.
Desvergonzarse.
Emporcar.
Encordar.
Encontrar.
To console.
To count.
To cost.
To behead.
To demonstrate.
To surpass.
To discourage.
To desolate.
To skin.
To be impudent.
To dirty.
To string.
To meet.
17
394
CONJUGATIONS.
Engrosar.
To engross.
Resollar. To breathe.
Forzar.
To force.
Rodar. To roll.
Holgar.
To rest.
Rogar. To entreat.
Hollar.
To tread.
Soldar. To solder.
Mostrar.
To show.
Soltar. To lessen.
Poblar.
To people.
Sonar. To sound.
Probar.
To prove.
Sonar. To dream.
Recordar.
To remind.
Tostar. To toast.
Recostar.
To lie down.
Trocar. To barter.
Regoldar.
To belch.
Tronar. To thunder.
RenoTar.
To renew.
Volar. To fly.
Reprobar.
To reprove.
Volcar. To overturn.
Rescontar.
To compensate.
THIBD CLASS.
MOVES.
To move.
INDICATIVE.
PEESEXT.
1. Muevo.
1. Movemos.
2. Mueves.
2. Moveis.
3. Mueve.
3. Mueven.
IMPERATIVE.
1. Movarnos.
2. Mueve.
2. Moved.
3. Mueva.
3. Muevan.
SUBJUXCTIVE.
PBK8BRT.
1.- Mueva.
1. Movamos.
2. Muevas.
2. Movais.
3. Mueva.
3. Muevan.
The following verbs, and their compounds, are conjugated life MOVER
Absolver.
To absolve.
Morder. To bite.
Disolver.
To dissolve.
Retorcer. To twist again.
Doler.
To grieve.
Solver. To solve.
Llover.
To ram.
Torcer. To twist.
Moler.
To grind.
Volver. To turn.
ATENDEB.
CONJUGATIONS.
395
1. Atiendo.
2. Atiendes.
3. Atiende.
2. Atiende.
3. Atienda.
1. Atienda.
2. Atiendas.
3. Atienda.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Atendemos.
2. Atendeis.
3. Atienden.
IMPERATIVE.
1. Atendamos.
2. Atended.
3. Atiendan.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Atendamos.
2. Atendais.
3. Atiendan.
The following verbs, and, their compounds, have the same irregularities
as ATENDER:
Ascender.
To ascend.
Entender.
To understand.
Cerner.
To sift.
Extender.
To extend.
Condescender.
To condescend.
Heder.
To stink.
Contender.
Defender.
To contend.
To defend.
Hender.
Pcrder.
To split.
To lose.
Desatender.
To neglect.
Tender.
To stretch out.
Descender.
To descend.
Trascender.
To transcend.
Encendcr.
To kindle.
Verter.
To pour out.
SENTIB.
1. Siento.
2. Sientes.
3. Siente.
2. Siente.
3. Sienta.
1. Sienta.
2. Sientas.
3. Sienta.
FIFTH CLASS.
| To feel.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Sentimos.
2. Sentis.
3. Sienten.
IMPERATIVE.
1. Sintamos.
2. Sentid.
3. Sientan.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Sintamos.
2. Sintais.
3. Sientan.
396
CONJUGATIONS.
IMPERFECT.
First Termination,
1. Sentiria, &c.
Second Termination.
1. Sintiera. 1. Sintieramos.
2. Sintieras. 2. Sintierais.
3. Sintiera. 3. Sintieran.
Third Termination.
1. Sintiese. 1. Sinticsemos.
2. Sintieses. 2. Sintieseis.
3. Siutiese. 3. Sintiescn.
1. Sintiere.
2. Sintieres.
3. Sintiere.
1. Sintieremos.
2. Sintiereis.
3. Sintieren.
The following verfis, and ihcir compounds, Jia-ve tlie same irregularities
To digest.
To wound.
To boil.
To ingraft.
To invert.
To pervert.
To prefer.
To refer.
To require.
as SEXTIR:
Adhcrir.
Advertir.
To adhere.
To advert.
Digerir.
Herir.
Arrepentirse.
Asentir.
Conferir.
To repent.
To assent.
To confer.
Hervir.
Ingerir.
Invertir.
Consentir.
To consent.
Pervertir.
Controvertir.
To controvert.
Preferir.
Convertir.
To convert.
Referir.
Diferir.
Diferir.
To defer.
To differ.
Requerir.
PEDIE.
1. Pido.
2. Pides.
3. Pide.
1. Pedi.
2. Pediste.
3. Pidio.
SIXTH CLASS.
| To ask.
INDICATIVE.
PEESEXT.
1. Pedimos.
2. Pedis.
3. Piden.
PEETERIT.
1. Pedimos.
2. Pedisteis.
3. Pidieron.
CONJUGATIONS.
397
2. Pide.
3. Pida.
1. Pida.
2. Pidas.
3. Pida.
1. Pidiera.
2. Pidieras.
3. Pidiera.
IMPERATIVE.
1. Pidamos.
2. Pedid.
3. Pidan.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PEESEXT.
1. Pidamos.
2. Pidais.
3. Pidan.
IMPEEFECT. First Termination.
1. Pediria, &c.
Second Termination.
1. Pidieramos.
2. Pidierais.
3. Pidieran.
1. Pidiese.
2. Pidicses.
3. Pidiese.
Third Termination.
1. Pidiesemos.
2. Pidieseis.
3. Pidiesen.
FUTURE.
1. Pidicre.
2. Pidieres.
3. Pidiere.
1. Pidiereraos.
2. Pidiereis.
3. Pidieren.
The following verbs, and their compounds, have the same irregularities
as PEDIR :
Arrecir.
TPo benumb.
Cenir.
To belt.
dolejir.
To collect.
Competir.
To contend.
Conccbir.
To conceive.
Constrenir.
To constrain.
Derretir.
To melt.
Desleir.
To dissolve.
Elejir.
To elect.
Embestir.
To attack.
Gcmir.
Medir.
*Regir.
Rendir.
Reuir.
Repetir.
Seguir.
Servir.
Tefiir.
Vcstir.
To groan.
To measure.
To rule.
To render.
To quarrel.
To repeat.
To follow.
To serve.
To dye.
To dress.
398
CONJUGATIONS.
SEVENTH CLASS.
COIOXUCIR.
1. Conduzco.
2. Conduces, &c.
1. Conduje.
2. Condujiste.
3. Condujo.
2. Conduce.
3. Conduzca.
To conduct.
INDICATIVE.
PEESENT.
1. Conducimos.
2. Conducis, &c.
PRETERIT.
1. Condujimos.
2. Condujisteis.
3. Condujeron.
IMPERATIVE.
1. Conduzcamos.
2. Conducid.
3. Conduzcan.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Conduzca, &c. I 1. Conduzcamos, &c,
IMPERFECT. First Termination.
1. Conduciria, &c. | 1. Conduciriamos, &c.
Second Termination.
1. Coudujera, &c. | 1. Condujeramos, &c.
Third Termination.
1. Condtijese, &c. | 1. Condujesemos, &c.
FUTURE.
1. Condujere, &c.
1. Condujeremos, &c.
Aducir.
Deducir.
Introducir.
The following verbs arc conjugated like CONDUCIR .
To adduce.
To deduce.
To introduce.
Producir.
Reducir.
Traducir.
To produce.
To reduce.
To translate.
N. B. Conocer* and all verbs ending in cer, of more than two syllables, follow the
irregularity of Canducir in the present indicative and subjunctive, and in the imperative.
Elsewhere regular.
CONJUGATIONS.
399
M
r g
d
a
cron.
|
E
|
1
|
n
1
d
o
S
d
o
S3
V
a
'H
;5
S
V
'C
E
'E
:s
Er
cr
cr
3
cr
1
1
Er
cr
cr
1
r _
13
3
T3
a
-a
T3
a
o
^
C3
a
c3
3
1
1
3
ci
ri
C3
..
."~
.sf
rf
^aT
's
v.
aT
'
'
'o
tn
'3
oT
H
.2
S
il
'g
'C
8
'i.
.2
.2
'S
'
1
'3
o 4
1
cr
1
'3
cr
cr
cr
1
-
a
'O
3
t3
9
C3
3
rt
C3
3
i
cj
a
oT
to~
.
. a
-H -a
|
cf
S
1
O
I"
ririamof
ricramo
riesemo
b
1
p
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
cr
cr
cr
cr
cr
cr
cr
^
cr
-a
S
O
ri
S
a
2
T3
<r<
H
2
n
<rt
p
w
02
I I
H?
5[ 2
o " *
tT .o 3
|C ]*j ,EJ
5
i-I =
.2
j
vSS
_tj
d rf
~ u
v 5
1
ci
E
.2
d
.2
3
s
'3
cr
1
'g.
3 -3
cr Er
'3
'
cr
'I
-a
C3
CJ
"8
-3 -3
cs cj
C3
"S
13
es
"
oT
00
I
wT
g
.2
1
o
o
.2
*E
'C
'u
V V
*c
'S
'
'S
1
rt
1
rt
3
cr
B
cS
g- &
'rt 1 .
cr
rt
Er
3
cr
cS
1
r
-o"
b
g"
g"
g"
6
cT
tn
o
3
"M
V S
'S
c
"C
'S
'C
0*
'3
cr
'3
cr
cr
cr
cr
cr
Er
A O
5 S
400
CONJUGATIONS.
ens
a o o
C 00 M
d
3 * N 4
? > > *>
3 S S S
.2" A
a U
^ S
B 3 B
m MI *N
C3 O o
M m
-
s
iiv
diiv
a o
1 t
4
C N J U G A T I O X S .
401
'I 'a 'a
fen
O fl
.2
i !S
a
a s
-- S
.2 .2
&> -1 -sf
<tj <1 <!
m
?* .s d
ifi .ti .2
to o>
402
CONJUGATIONS.
H .5
s
B
ccian.
a
|
cciran.
i
M
8
g
ccirian.
8
2
V
5?
8
SB
9
,*?
IJercn.
"1
.0
T3
g
A
1
o
-2!
13
O
A
5
I
13
o
ft
o
o
o
m
aT
r
s
v
id
X
X
"3
.2"
'3
<a
~
a
IM
.2"
O
'3
c*
'S
'3
"a
41
i*
cciriais
n
'i
t
9
^ 1
13
0)
,0
o
|
"O
B
1
3
1
d
a/
o
'S
to
aT
X
&
/
d
s
s
S~
.
11 '3
1
i
1
circmos,
9
1
&
d
R
il
ciriamos
3
|
Jcrcm
V
13
a
o
'a
5
8
'S*
'
13
S
B
=
o
g
g
1
g
g
s
1
1
M
B
B
B
B
B
B
oJ
CO .
1
cndecia.
e
13
i
cndccira.
i
^
o
C3
3
|
cndcciria.
2*
5
-3
a
X
S
a 5
o
g
&
?
O
^2
.0
^2
?
^2
oT
oT
a
c
*i
X
oo"
E
rf
.1
p
i
V
X
i
o
.
'S
a
CJ
'i
13
a
o
.0
M
:?
o
1
bendcci
bcndicc
if
IM
T:
|
'
3
5
^2
i
1
"
-3
O
|
B
^
cf
1
T
.
'3
1
'3
v
2
tf
i
|
rH IS
r o
a
a
r^
-3
^^
g
C2
1
ca
a
0>
C2
1
C2
g
C2
a
a
C3
O
2
g
C2
I
B
CONJUGATIONS,
f
a
8
8
a
a*
o
(8
S
IS
CS
citpicroi
/
cabran.
<B cio pa ii,
qucpara
cabrian.
cupicru
ciapicso
cmpicrc
^
II
X*
W
X
X
M
t^*
M
^
s
.
X
of
X
>M
a
ft
aT
in
t s
I
noso
I
V
t3<
%
gf
-1
s
'5
13
C3
U
N
ft
a
V
-'S
1
V
o
.0
C3
O
f
a
*
0)
o
|
ft
m
M
U
ft
V
x*~
f*
'/?
1
X
x"
^
6
9
-
i
X
S
I
g
aT
.
rt 1
lamos,
1
/
rcmos,
icpaiai
i
&
>riam
I
S
ft
X
s
ft
&
t.
5
-
ft
. 1
_c
cS
O
s
i
o
s
*
rt
O
8
a
y
S
y
a
j
V
OJ
,2
w S
1
U
cnpo.
1
CS
ft
1
s
ft
1
cabria.
ciipicr
cupios
"ft
if
X
X
X
V
1
X
K
^
r
X*"
E
X
g
X
9
r:
v
4)
m
-2
" -
I
** CS
u
C3
O
nt
ft
a
y
i
-s
o
cT
i
1
^
"5
rt
ft
ft
a
V
ft
V
cf
r
?T
9
ft
cf
ft
1
cf
ft
8
1
E
ft
8
X
ft
ft
"rt
a
^CJ
v
O
O
w
*
^*
A o
404
CONJUGATIONS.
3.
c
2
.3 ^
C -2
^ O
5
rt"
.2 .2
I I
^ f^
CONJUGATIONS.
405
oT <n~
I '
O 4>'
*
4
d
OO
O O O
fl O
*-
R, ^
406
CONJUGATIONS.
Q
I
I -I
n f
3
C3 ._
:l t
ft
C5
<J
*1
CO O
IN
73
'3
o
9
.T?
73
-S a
h C
73 T3
, a
v. WN
Cl b
73 73
P
.S
^
r -
ss
^
a
2
f
O ^
sT
k
oT ri
i
f
f
t !'
N
C3
g
73
1
1 .
="
73 73
H}
73 73
EH
^
*S
_^
02
rt
o
jj"
S
A
^
i
3
W
ft
ft
ft
1
w
s
^6
'3
3
i
=f
4f li
fe
S
Q
IB
5 L S
o
ft
ft
A
ft ft
E
N
PS?,?
~ 73 73
fl W PH
CONJUGATIONS.
407
a a
.Zf "I
'C
1 1
S3 o
v tn
5 -2,
'a I
I J
H -2
2 5
o"
a <g -
II
408
CONJUGATIONS.
T
g
^
u
Pi
8
^'
h
*J
RREGUI
!
^
|
1
ft, "***
\
I
g
HH
s
"
a
3
cT
"8 i "
3 s
H
o
tT
.i
""CJ
2
a
tu
B,
E
E
s
w
M
H
w
H
5?
O
j
d
o
E
d
a
efi
1
:l
I
13
.
i
o
CO M
ti
^4
L
to
N
1
V
h
h
V
K
1
1
1
3
$
if
oT
'3
.22"
*
X
.2"
"3
|
oT
'3
.2f
S
V*
.'2
.2
ui
2"
J*
"fca
o
o
"i
o
V
1
3
s
O
1
1
1
tn"
O
rt S
oT
I
tn"
O
a
oT
o
1
1
1
ft
O
1
icramos,
escmos,
crcmos,
'1
|
"3
1
5
m
h
1
|
1
i*
1 H
W
K
W
H
H
M
H
w
O
.
ft
ft
ei
d
c3
P
i2
d
o
V C
M
"C
o
3
o
h
*J
')
')
E
'3
I 1
fcfl
f
*
o
*
o
K
>>
O
<5
* 5
x
at
^
^
2
i"
1
U)
1
r
.2
1
I
-jT
3
d
|o
t
1
E
E
1
|o
to
|o
^
V
h
h
3
'*
'*
5
S
".
M
ft
f
cT
o~
U
cT
_
^2
ti
s
o
I
3
i j *
1
W
1
1
1
i
H
M
1
o
o
o
*^
v^
H
H
H
-5>
"s
V
S
"s
5
(M
CO
{
1
1
|
s
1
1
>.
Y
tjjyd
i
"I
s
3
CONJUGATIONS,
409
J i
w w w
w
s
r
f JT
s,
WWW
W
A o
18
410
CONJUGATIONS.
. ( Cont
O
I
r/2
^3
1
B B
O PL,
. 1
.
S
a
a
*3
a
i
s
M 8 -3 3
ai ei *
43 43 43
43
|
43
$
'I
43
*s
3
s
3
N
3
aT
*S
t
nT
0?
wT
1"
T .2" |
' -1 'S
S 03 IN
43 rfj 3
hareis
o"
o>
43
oT
'3
ill
C3
oT
1
43
hicierai
hiciesei
hicierei
*l
- T a
S | |
"1 1 1
nun
Harcmos,
Hagamos,
Hagamos,
Hariamos,
Hicieramos,
Hiciesemos,
Hicieremos,
. J -2 S
j
1
43
rf
03
I
43
hiciera.
hiciese.
hiciere.
s
I
$
oT
1
- rf- %
8 S *
<N -g
rt rt IN
|k
-I
43
N*
cS
oT
|
43
1
hiciera
hicieses
hicieres
p" of T
rt W) '3 f
*
-j
of
SP
'
i
IN
1
*S
B B B
B
B
B
B
B
B
CONJUGATIONS,
411
s
c
h
B g
S a
V
<s
a*
T
I'
A
% -f
" a '3
^ .a
fulstcl
<"
h
at
m"
oT
d
3
o
ES es
f a
S
i i
o a
"~
P 5
*K CO g^ *.
s J 3 %
p S %4 .
.
~ 9
o
vayan.
vayan.
fl
1
a
fuercn,
,
A^
/
tf
t
a
oT
is
fucrai
facsci
fucrci
91
aT
X
*?
I
i S *
5
a
g
g
a I
|
o
a
i
2
&o
&
f
s
V
p
>
"S
HH
'^
&
a*
a*
fe
i
9
5
i
a
a
.2
s
ml
rt
*
.S
c
*
*
.
oT
\
X
a
a
2
^
p>
G
o
S
*
IS
a
a
u
T
^
s
u
a
rt"
a
8
8
k
s
w
412
CONJUGATIONS.
,i
d
03
.0
2
)
d
12
03
to
cgwen.
d
B
I
i
1
1
to
1
3
9
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
l\
^oT
1
r
1
"
*3
d
oT
is
.S2~
.2"
nT
1
<** to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
>
3
3
3
3
3
3
B
3
3
3
oT
00*
O
S
of
o
J
S"
a
T
o
a
oT
O
63
of
o
a
nT
to
%
to
1
to
03
to
i
to
'
to
03
to
|
c3
to
to
3
3
3
3
3
a
3
3
3
"-9
-9
1-9
>-5
^
. 03
. Sb -3
CO $ 60
O
1
1
i
c
.2
i
&
i
d
?o
. 3 . s
2,
3
a
_3
2,
_3
3
p 3
^
t
^ s 1
, J^
aT
m c3
. ^2
^ Jf fl,
9 to
3 3
af
1
aT
|
t
a
3
iugarias,
1
9
oT
oT
5
d"
o"
^ **~s
i
"^^
>
^
r-j
~9
fT"
a
3
3
oj
to
to
to
3
3
^
H
i-4 V to
I
I
cT
cf
'g
to
|
tf
i
to
03
to
3 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
E
g
Pi
-9
1-5
^
CONJUGATIONS,
413
pg
ri
.
d
d
CO Si
i
o
d
E
i
d
C3
iC
d
2
*n
I
a>
o
o
'3
o
'3
3
'3
"3
o
.2"
.2"
-
.2"
n
"55
H
.2~
o"
&
aT
|3
*C
|
"53
0}
<o
>>
1
o
O
O
o
o
'3
'3
o
O
o
oT
oT
oT
of
o
" a
I
o
a
<s
oT
O
1
O
oT
o
J
E
O
o
a
o
Oigamos,
s"
a
.s
o
Oyeramo
Oycsemo
I
1
o
^' ill eT
I o b o
it -c
vT
T
ill
o
- 2"
.2 o
0*
1
O
1
C
H H
S
EH
1'
"S '3
I-H <N
3
CO
t
1
pyfj.3dv.il
1
1
414
CONJUGATIONS.
i p5
i
O PH
a
d
d
o
"1
1
i
4
1
13
<y
ieran
n
CJ
c
o
"3
A
A
"3
"o
"3
"3
jati
T
of
.zf
s\
.2"
TO"
'S
tn
*3
m
1
1
*3
'S
*
"o
1
O
g
"o
"3
?
tS
o
*
o
"3
TO-
oT
of
8
z
8
a
of
1
o
J
&
oT
1
aT
s
leriamo
lieramo
lieremo
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
13
CO ft
.2*
0*
V*
"
13
1
.2
i
o
aJ
01
2?
A
"3
1
"3
fl
"3
"3
3
"o
1"
of
D
-1
.1
"3
"3
of
-2
"3
^o"
C3
1
A
'S
O)
"3
oT
2
.2
"3
aT
.-i
.2n
"3
.
9
13
cT
ef
aT
cT
,_; S
n"
*
3
'g
|
S
.2
. %
O
O
o
%
O
O
o
O
[
^
pi
o
o
8
*5J
H
H
EH
Present.
I
1
1
s
1
1
v
a
1
fjad\
T3
CO
/
/
1
1
i
H
6
s
g
3
d
b
I-H
1
03
CONJUGATIONS,
415
~4 rt
S
e --
a
-2 -
Pi
2 .
PH
" '
J
fn PH
.55
S i
B o
t
J 1
a 5 i
0^0
CH &, CH
-
1
ef - 2
a 3
^ >r 3
1
4
416
CONJUGATIONS.
a o PU
d
C
='
(
.=
cJ 'I
73 13
P
T>
d
E
43
o
n
2
a
1
;g
o
ndriera
8
S
|
43
f
p. p.
P.
P,
P,
a.
p.
P.
&
1
oT
.2~
oo"
IS
OQ
of
oT
*S
k
|.
oT
.2 '3
43 43
O O
P. o.
"3
.2
43
o
P.
to
.
43
o
-a
o
P.
cn
1
|3
!S
t
4s
B
M
1
1
1
i-
T3
S
p.
e whole o
J3
oT
M
"S
rrj
on"
o
o
J3
1.
Podrimos,
Podriamos,
o
S
Podrir6moi
Pudramos
Pudramos
Podririamo
Pudrierara
Pudricsem
Pudrierem
I for o throug
f
S
^
' . s ' 4
OS -j 73
P
43
P.
1
O
p.
g
I
g
o
p.
.2
p.
2
43
pudrieso.
pudricrc.
;rs, now Bubst
c
of
oT
oT
^
2
9i
CO 00
(N "T3 *5
O
0.
.2
*E
o
P.
1
1
a
I
oT
2
'O
p,
|
o
p.
g
.2
t
pudriesc
9
E
o
*u
p.
>est Spanish
if
cT
5
cT e"
.
. t3 4
^ S "o
PH PH
I
2"
I
"u
1
PH
t-
.2
'E
Pudrics
Pudricr
d many o)
a
a
&
|J
t^
.^
o
o
^
^>
EH
EH
H
i
^ *v*
^
<J
73
o
~
-3
<a
c
^j ^
*J
-H
<M
W
X
B
3 ft-
* -3
1
1
1
\
-v
^_/
'/
1
<
"
H
K
c
02 ~
H
R
g
K
1^
^ 0.
O
to
* ->->
CONJUGATIONS,
417
S
-s
a
o
P.
i
i
pusier
u
1
P.
"33
3
aT
. "3
i
, m
1
<M a
1
i
p.
P.
a
o
5
S"
-J
Poniamos,
Pnsimos,
Pondren
ng
1
it
I
g 2
"3 '*
o S
Pi PH
PH
c9
"2
. d
05 fl
O
Pi
*s
a
X
PH
1
P.
i"
*s
X
-1
J"
- 1
"3
T
M
'
1
1
1
1
r>
-4>
o"
. ill
r-i a
I
T
X
fa
o
P-I
PH
P-I
P-I
g
ra,
<e
22^
H o o
' *s
P
18*
418
CONJUGATIONS.
a
D d 8 ^9
i I I I
o* o^ cr CT*
I j ^
2 'C
S3 .S
H
O 1
I
t 1 -a
.2" 'S
1 & * J "
O> N M<
1 1
o 1
1
i I
1 1
C5
.1
queria.
1 1
1
3 3
2
|
querria.
E
o
IB
>'
O
irt
Hi
1
1
1
4
C?
=f
tf
8~
Kf
J
^> Q
of
orT
" '-s
vSS S
9
of
1
1
TO
9
2
^
cT
13
f .1-
|
5"
3
* 6 ^
M
3 3
c
o
1
1
g-
a
g
0"
a
1
rt
EH
^
o" SQ
CQ
T3
^
'i
'S
3
_
cy
<y
C^
^
f
2
g
* vO
<u
0>
4)
.
H
r-H C
.2
*~
J S
(4
iE
a
a
rt
i
d
M
P^
jj
. <
g
<y <y
S
I
g
<y
i
O 1
1
s
5
H
cfl
2
B
^q
o
S
~
<u
ti
y
**s>
EH
EH
H
s
^
R| *;
g'
00
T3
TJ
j
S
1
K
1-1
<M
03
C
s
1
1
1 1
1
V * ' "s
pyfoadiuf fc,
w
. P
g
CONJUGATIONS,
419
C9 8 .1
N fl?
.2
2 .2
1 i
a -a
.2"
g a
.3
-
* M
M *
_r 3 3 3
.2 -c - m
3 .!- o a>
. o - -
1
Ha
M
e n
^ 4
420
CONJUGATIONS.
g
PH
d
Q*
d
d
-1
CO
d
.2
CQ
supiero
sabran.
*
CO
d
ft
sabrian.
8
ft
I
supicse
supiere
2.
1
CM' '3
03
.zT
oT
'<&
to
ft
.2"
; 3
E
,0
03
1
a
ft
aT
g
'S
1
upierais,
npieseis,
upiereis,
CO
CQ
CO
CQ
CO
TO
CO
CO
CQ
CO
oT
TO
-
oT
2"
~
TD
O
s
1.
Sabemos,
O
1
i
o
S
ft
02
Sabr6mc
!
I
ft
Sabriam
93
1
O2
1
ft
02
2
o>
ft
1
r
2
ca
2
co 1
.2
e
&
e
E
I
ft
V
ft
i
83
'r
1
o
f
8
ft
ft
CQ
CO
CO
CO
CO
CO
CO
CO
CQ
^
tn"
B
aT
_
of
1
B
GO
93
i
. TO"
CM 93
f
IS
03
CO
'1
TO
,0
03
<o
1
03
ft
^3
C3
9
ft
O>
ft
ft
CO
CQ
CQ
CO
CQ
CO
CO
aT
cT
^
CQ
of
1
\
|
02
I
1
C3~
&
f
1
o
'ft
02
CO
ft
02
ft
02
jg
S
tl
s
Jj>
EH
E-i
E-i
1
<
I
1
1
1
[0
f )
>
*.
<M
v
CO
/
"
S
1
CONJUGATIONS,
421
02 02
. n
"3
"3
m
salieroc.
n
~ c3
"3 "3
CO OQ
i 1
3 1
salieran.
salicsen.
salieren.
.2~
.2"
^aT
wT *c3
rf
2-
.a"
S "
s
* "a
raT
;s
09
m
'3
"55
3
to
I 1
CO CO
II
ca aa
1
"3
OQ
*3
.2
"3
S
.2
"3
. S "
O
"
00
a
12 1
m~
o g
ramos,
oT
o
remos,
i-! 3
8
j3
c ui
si ^
.2
.-
.2
9
'S
"3
"3 "c3
"3 *3
"3
"o3
_C3
02
02 02
"2 ^
d
d
.
.
to
.2
o
oa
c if)
"3 "3
31 OB
ill "5
"3 Is
OQ ta
.2
"3
m
1
^
oa
ll
on"
"i <
-
T
*ti
~ .5
ej u
=f
E
s"
1
DO"
IN' .2
m
n
=3
OB
-3"
OQ oa
"3 "3
m aa
"rt
OQ
; 3
OQ
1
oa
cf
4
1
03 "H
2
tf
.2
"3
01
L 02
02
02
02
02 02
02
02
02
.
5
i-'
<u
^J
t^,"
H
H
EH
S
1
!
i
j
1 cL
a
<N
1
ifisd
T3
CO
'
WJ
jj
422
CONJUGATIONS.
a g
g
E
I
i
9
tt
i
E
K
g
O
S
s
i
I 1
S
o
g
*s
1
2
5
j.
'3
N g 'g
2*"
"3
B
m
S-,
o
s
-a"
o
g
.2"
a
4f
^
;rcriais, i
oT
1
I 9
.2"
"S
S
oT
1
g 8
wT
oT
o
g"
oT
s"
s"
f
, I I
o"
J
i
1
c
s
s
V
1
JS
. 1 1
E
o
1
"g
EH
o
I
EH
C)
T
g
a
<
. T
. oJ C3
w g 'g
*
i
o
g
4
1
ej
ii
a
g
;raeria.
g
o
d
00
o
o
^
P
O
i .!
H "Ss ?*
^
^ & jf ll *i-
& s ?. I >
te ^Q
oT
^ 1 1
QQ
f
o*
g
cT
g
?I
E
tracrias,
ci
01
o
o
E
1*1 "
<-* 2 fe*
g g g
EH H EH
s '
fe v 3
.1 .,-
i 1 C3 OS
1
E
g
a
i
if
1
g"
cf
m
o
?
g ^
EH PH
EH
EH
EH
H
E^
eJ
EH
R t> h
E CD
e w -^
2
J
O PH
v,
EH
H
9
EH
^ iO
^ S
2-
,s
1
s
|H
V
o
a
CO
I
1
1 1
1
1
1
pafuaduq ^
H
ri
^
i
>
g
1
I
CONJUGATIONS,
423
3 O Pn
a
d
-4
,t
a
a
.
co* S .i
cS "3
2
.2
^2
"3
9
fen
3
in
-3
g
"3
o
1
j.
.2" 2 "
.2"
-2
1
.sf
i
1
si
-3
to"
3
i
3
to"
1
*lf
CO
1
t*
on"
tf
o
O
J
1.
Valemos,
Valiamos
1
Valdrem
O
1
O
1
in
3
i
2
Valieram
Valiesem
Valierem
r
.
d
d
.3
2
d
d
<o .3
s
"3
* '
s
o
3
1
g >
>
>
^
>
^
t
x
-2
ro"
ca
CO
65
- 8 J
P ; P
m
1
|
^T
"3
5
"3
1
<x>
CO
p
1
eT
cT
^3 cd
^
E
'S
1
T
2
"3
>
2"
of
9
3
Valiere
i
is
i
^
EH
H
H
"^ tp
1 .
1
i
1
v
IM
y
>/jxl
CO
/
!/
1
K
d
EJ
>
H
B
424
CONJUGATIONS,
.1 J i
g I
(>>>.
s~ I"
-w t-
.2 fl
3 a
g 1
If 1
it
'3 'a 'd
M M
aT of
"3 'S 'S 'S
& * |
g rt a a
V M d
t t t
1
w" w"
I I i
> >
EGULAR VI
w g '3
.- g
r >
' e
>
vendra.
# <i 4
to u m
a a a
<o
> > >
viniera.
1
1
t>
a
&>
c
<A
> i
H
8
5
S
I
d"
fl
*5
rT
!-
fB
S" "
-I
t g
In
;s
>
1
1
F
'C
g g g
> > >.
o>
1
af
B
J
f
1
22
tT
.1
*s
j
1
is
>
t>
^
*
^
6fl ^
^
^2
rt 'C
o"
w
H
Q
'w
ill 'fl
.2
3
p
3
H g g
a
^
g
g
'3
'3
H
i
1
Hi
I t> t>
^>
> >
f>
t>
t>
CONJUGATIONS.
425
w a .3
B
J3
g
c
1
rerian.
d o o
rt v
. .2 .
jt.
.2*"
.2**
00
f
si oT
3 '3
1
IS
1
g
'3 'S '3
*
t-
>
'
of
cT S
of
o
of
o
S
1
amos,
s" s" s
Iff
"3
L k >
1
I
1
C3
^
c
4>
>
<y 3
l>
03 "^ o3
CO . .3 o
g g ? g g
d . 4f
1 1 f 1 ?T
rt ' o" .2" if
r:
g^
O fH
\
426
CONJUGATIONS.
CONJUGATION OF A VEEB IN THE REFLECTIVE FORM.
Lavarse.
Lavandose.
Lavadose.
1. Me lavo.
2. Te lavas.
3. Se lava.
1. Me lavaba.
2. Telavabas.
3. Se lavaba.
1. Me lave.
2. Telavaste.
3. Selav6.
1. Me Iavar6.
2. Te lavaras.
3. Se lavara.
2 Lavate.
3. Lavese.
GERUND.
| "Washing one's self.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
I Washed one's self.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
I -wash myself.
1. Nos lavamos.
2. Os lavais.
3. Se lavan.
IMPERFECT.
I was washing,
washed, or used
to wash myself.
1. Nos lavabamos.
2. Os lavabais.
3. Se lavaban.
PRETERIT DEFIXTTE.
I washed myself.
1. Nos lavamos.
2. Os lavasteis.
3. Se lavaron.
FUTURE SIMPLE.
I shall wash my-
self.
1. Nos lavaremos.
2. Os lavareis.
3. Se lavaran.
Wash thyself.
IMPERATIVE.
1. Lav6monos.
. 2. Lavaos.
3. Lavense.
CONJUGATIONS.
427
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Me lave.
2. Te laves.
3. Se lave.
I may wash my-
self.
1. Nos lavemos.
2. Os laveis.
3. Se laven.
1. Me lavaria. I would wash my-
self.
2. Te lavarias.
3. Se lavaria.
IMPERFECT. First Termination.
1. Nos lavariamos.
2. Os lavariais.
3. Se lavarian.
Second Termination.
1. Me lavara. I might, could,
would, or should
wash myself.
2. Te lavaras.
3. Se lavara.
1. Nos lavaramos.
2. Os lavarais.
3. Se lavaran.
Third, Termination.
1. Me lavase. I might, could,
would, or should
wash myself.
2. Te lavases.
3. Se lavase.
FUTURE.
1. Me lavare. I might or should
wash myself.
2. To lavares.
3. Se lavare.
1. Nos lavasemos.
2. Os lavaseis.
3. Se lavasen.
1. Nos lavaremos.
2. Os lavareis.
3. Se lavaren.
INFINITIVE.
Ayudarse.
Ayudandose.
Ayudadose.
To help each other.
| Helping each other.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
I Helped each other.
428
CONJUGATIONS.
PRESENT.
1. Nos ayuda- We help each
mos. other.
2. Os ayudais.
3. Se ayudan.
PRETEEIT DEFINITE.
1. Nos ayuda- We helped
mos. other.
2. Os ayudasteis.
3. Se ayudaron.
INDICATIVE.
IMPEEFECT.
1. Nos ayuda- We used to help
bamos. each other.
2. Os ayudabais.
3. Se ayudaban.
FUTTJEE SIMPLE.
1. Nos ayuda- We shall help
r6mos. each other.
2. Os ayudareis.
3. Se ayudaran.
1. Ayudemonos.
2. Ayudaos.
3. Ayudense.
IMPERATIVE.
Let us help each other.
Help each other.
Let them help each other.
PEESEXT.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
IMPEEFECT. First Termination.
1. Nos ayude-
mos.
2. Os ayudeis.
3. Se ayuden.
We may help each
other.
Second Termination.^
1. Nos ayuda- We might, could,
ramos. would, or should
help each other.
2. Os ayudarais.
3. Se ayudaran.
1. Nos ayudaria- We would help
mos. each other.
2. Os ayudariais.
3. Se ayudarian.
TJiird Termination.
1. Nos ayudase- We might, could,
mos. would, or should
help each other.
2. Os ayudaseis.
3. Se ayudasen.
FUTUKE.
1. Nos ayudaremos,
2. Os ayudareis.
3. Se nyudaren.
We might or should help each
other.
CONJUGATIONS.
429
IMPERSONAL VEEBS.
To grow light.
INDICATIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Present.
Amanece.
It
Imperfect.
Pret. Def.
Amanecia.
Amaneci6.
It
It
Fut. Simple. Amanecera.
It grows light.
It was growing light.
It grew light.
It will grow light.
COMPOUND TENSES.
Pret. Indef. Ha amanecido.
Pluperfect. Habia amanecido.
Anterior. Hubo amanecido.
Comp. Future. Habra amanecido.
It has grown light
It had grown light.
It had grown light.
It will have grown light.
Amanezca.
IMPERATIVE.
Let it grow light.
Present.
Imperfect.
Future.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Amanezca. It may grow light.
f Amaneceria. "I f might, ~\
\ Amaneciera. L It J should, or Lgrow light.
[Amaneciese. j ^ would J
Amaneciere. It should grow light.
COMPOUND TENSES.
Haya amanecido.
4 Habria 'I
amane-
Perfect.
Plllpcrf. < J_LUUIGIJ >
[Hubiese J cido -
Comp. Future. Hubiere amanecido.
It may have grown light.
f might have,
It J should have, or
[ would have
It should have grown light
N. B. Anochecer, to grow dark, is conjugated in the same manner,
and has the same irregularity.
430
CONJUGATIONS.
I To snow.
Present.
Imperfect.
Pret. Def.
Future.
Xieva.
Nevaba.
Nev6.
Nevara.
INDICATIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
It snows.
It was snowing.
It snowed.
It will snow.
COMPOUND TENSES.
Pret. Indef. Ha nevado.
Pluperfect. Habia nevado.
Anterior. Hubo nevado.
Comp. Future. Habra nevado.
It Las snowed.
It had snowed.
It had snowed.
It will have snowed.
Nieve.
IMPERATIVE.
I Let it snow.
Present.
Imperfect.
Future.
Nieve.
'Nevaria.'
Nevara.
Nevase,
Nevare.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Perfect. Hay a nevado.
fHabria ~|
Pluperfect. J Hubiera L nevado.
[HubieseJ
Comp. Future. Hubiere nevado.
It may snow.
f might, 1
It 1 should, or I snow.
I would j
It should snow.
TENSES.
It may have snowed.
f might have, "I
It J should have, or L snowed.
[ would have J
It should have snowed.
N". B. Helar, to freeze, is conjugated in the same manner, and has
the same tenses irregular.
TBONAE.
CONJUGATIONS.
To thunder.
431
Present.
Imperfect.
Pret. Def.
Future.
Truena.
Tronaba.
Trono.
Tronara.
INDICATIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
It thunders.
It was thundering.
It thundered.
It will thunder.
COMPOUND TENSES.
Pret. Indef. Ha tronado.
Pluperfect. Habia tronado.
Anterior. Hubo tronado.
Comp. Future. Habra tronado.
It has thundered.
It had thundered.
It had thundered.
It will have thundered.
Truene.
IMPERATIVE.
| Let it thunder.
Present.
Imperfect.
Future.
Truene.
fTronaria. ~\
J Tronara. L
[Tronase. J
Tronare.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
It may thunder.
C might, 1
It J should, or L thunder.
[ would J
It should thunder.
COMPOUND TENSES.
Perfect. Haya tronado.
fHabria 1
Pit/perfect. J Hubiera I tronado.
[Hubiese J
Comp. Future. Hubiere tronado.
It may have thundered.
f might have, "j
It -| should have, or L thundered.
[ would have J
It should have thundered.
N". B. Llover, to rain, is conjugated like this verb, and changes also
the o into ue in the same tenses. Escarchar. to freeze ; granizar, to
hail; llociznar, to drizzle; and relampaguear, to lighten, are all regular.
432
CONJUGATIONS.
HACER, to "be (when employed in reference to time and weather).
INDICATIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Present. Hace. It is.
Imperfect. Hacia. It was.
Pret. Def. Hizo. It was.
Future. Hard. It will be.
COMPOUND TENSES.
It has been.
It had been.
It had been.
It will have been.
Pret. Indef. Ha hecho.
Pluperfect. Habia hecho.
Anterior. Hubo hecho.
Comp. Future. Habra hecho.
Haga.
Present.
Imperfect.
Future.
Perfect.
Haga.
f Haria.
-| Hiciera.
[ Hiciese.
Hiciere.
IMPERATIVE.
| Let it be.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
It may be.
C might, I
It H| should, or Lbe.
[ would J
It should be.
COMPOUND TENSES.
Haya hecho.
fHabria ]
Pluperfect. -I Hubiera L hecho.
[Hubiese J
Comp. Future. Hubiere hecho.
It may have been.
C might have, 1
It J should have, or vbeen.
L would have J
It should have been.
HABEE, when signifying there to le.
Hay.
j There is,
( There are.
Hahabido. j There has been.
( There have been.
Habia.
( There was.
Habia habido. There had been.
Hubo.
( There were.
Hnbo habido. There had been.
Habra.
There will be.
Habra habido. There shall have
been.
CONJUGATIONS.
433
Ha} 7 a.
Ilaya.
Habria.
Hubiera.
Hubiese.
Hubiere.
Let there be.
There may be.
There might,
could, would, or
should be.
There might or
should be.
Ilaya habido There may have
been.
TT i i i i f There might,
Habria habido. i
TT , . 11-1 could, would, or
Hubiera habido. -j
TT i iv-T should have
Hubiese habido.
^ been.
Hubiere habido. There might or
should have
been.
DEFECTIVES.
Tlie following rcrls arc found used only in the tenses and persons given
in the annexed examples :
PLACE::.
To please.
INDICATIVE.
Present, 3d j>cn. sing.. Place.
Imperf. " " Placia.
Pret. Def. " " Plugo.
It pleases.
It was pleasing.
It pleased.
Present. 3d pers., sing., Plegue.
( Pluguiera.
Imperf. " -Jwt
{ Pluguiese.
Comp. Future.
SOLER.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
It may please.
It would please.
It might please.
Pluguiere. It should please.
To le wont.
Suelo.
Sueles.
Suele.
Solemos.
Soleis.
Suelen.
19
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
I am wont.
Thou art wont.
He is wont.
"We are wont.
You are wont.
They are wont.
434 CONJUGATIONS.
IMPEKFECT.
Solia. I was wont.
Solias.
Solia.
Soliaraos.
Soliais,
Solian.
Thou wast wont.
He was wont.
"We were wont.
You were wont.
They were wont.
YACER. | To lie dead,.
No part of this verb is made use of except the third persons of the
present indicative, yace and yacen, which are generally inscribed on
tombstones.
CONJUGATION OF A VERB IN THE PASSIVE VOICE.
INFINITIVE.
Ser perdonado. | To be pardoned.
GERtTXD.
Siendo perdonado. | Being pardoned.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
riabiendo sido perdonado. | Having been pardoned.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Soy perdona- I am pardoned.
do.
2. Eres perdo-
nado.
3. Es perdonado.
1. Somos pcrdonados.
2. Sois perdonados.
3. Son perdonados.
IMPERFECT.
1. Era perdona- I was or used to
do. be pardoned.
2. Eras perdonado.
3. Era perdonado.
1. Eramos perdonados.
2. Erais perdonados.
3. Eran perdonados.
CONJUGATIONS.
435
PEETERIT DEFINITE.
1. Fui pcrdona- I was pardoned.
do.
2. Fuistc perdonado.
3. Fue perdonado.
1. Fuimos perdonados.
2. Fuisteis perdonados.
3. Fueron perdonados.
rUTUKE SIMPLE.
1. Sere perdo- I shall be par-
nado. doned.
2. Seras perdonado.
3. Sen! perdonado.
1. Seremos perdonados.
2. Sere"is perdonados.
3. Serun perdonados.
IMPERATIVE.
2. S6 perdonado. Be pardoned.
3. Sea perdonado.
1. Seamos perdonados.
2. Sed perdouados.
3. Sean perdonados.
1. Sea perdonado. I may be par-
doned.
2. Seas perdonado.
3. Sea perdonado.
SUBJUXCTIVE.
PEESEXT.
1. Scaraos perdonados.
2. Seals perdonados.
3. Sean perdonados.
IMPEEFECT. First Termination.
1 . Seria perdona- I would be par-
do, doned.
2. Serias perdonado.
3. Seria perdonado.
1. Seriaraos perdonados.
2. Serials perdonados.
3. Serian perdonados.
Second Terminatwn.
1. Fuera perdona- I might, could,
do. would, or
should be par-
doned.
2. Fucras perdonado.
3. Fuera i-.erdonado.
1. Fueramos perdonados.
2. Fuerais perdonados.
3. Fueran perdonados.
436
CONJUGATIONS.
Third Termination.
1. Fuese perdona- I might, could,
do. would, or
should be par-
doned.
2. Fueses perdonado.
3. Fuese perdonado.
1. Fuesemos perdonados.
2. Fueseis perdonados.
3. Fuesen perdonados.
FUTURE.
1. Fu ere perdona- I might or
do. should be par-
doned.
2. Fueres perdonado.
3. Fuere perdouado.
1. Fuercmos perdonados.
2. Fuereis perdonados.
3. Fueren perdonados.
Compound Tenses.
INDICATIVE.
PRETERIT INDEFINITE.
1. He sido pcrdo- I have been par-
nado. doned.
2. Has sido per-
donado.
3. Ha sido perdo-
nado.
1. Hemos sido perdonado^.
2. Habeis sido perdonados.
3. Han sido perdonados.
PLUPERFECT.
1. Habia sido I had been par-
perdonado. doned.
2. Ilabias sido
perdonado.
3. Ilabia sido
perdonado.
1. Habiamos sido perdonados.
2. Habiais sido perdoandos.
3. Habian sido perdonados.
ANTERIOR.
1. Ilube sido I had been par-
perdonado. doned.
2. Ilubiste sido
perdonado.
3. Hubo sido
perdonado.
1. Hubimos sido perdonados.
2. Hubisteis sido perdonados.
3. Hubieron sido perdonados.
CONJUGATIONS.
437
COMPOUND FUTURE.
1. Ilabro sido
perdonado.
2. Habras siclo
perdonado.
3. Ilabn'i sido
perdonado.
1. Ilaya sido
perdonado.
2. Ilayas sido
perdonado.
3. Ilaya sido
perdoiiado.
1. Habria sido
perdonado.
2. Ilabrias sido
perdonado.
3. Ilabria sido
perdonado.
1. Hubiera sido
pcrdouado.
I shall have been
pardoned.
1. Habr6mos sido pcrdonados.
2. Ilabre'is sido perdonados.
3. Habran sido perdonados.
SUBJUXCTIYE.
PEEFECT.
I may have been
pardoned.
1. Ilayamos sido perdonados.
2. Hayais sido perdonados.
3. ITayan sido perdonados.
PLUPERFECT. First Termination.
I would have been
pardoned.
1. Ilabriamos sido perdonados.
2. Habriais sido perdonados.
3. Ilabrian sido perdonados.
Second Termination.
2. Hubieras sido
perdonado.
3. Ilubiera sido
perdonado.
1. Ilubiesesido
perdonado.
I might, could,
Avonld, or
should have
been pardoned.
1. Ilubieramos sido perdonados.
2. Hubierais sido perdonados.
3. Hubieran sido perdonados.
Tli inl Term ination .
2. Ilubieses sido
perdonado.
3. Hubiese sido
perdonado.
I mighty could,
would, or
should have
been pardoned.
1. Hubiesemos sido perdonados.
2. Hubieseis sido perdonados.
'3. Ilubiescn sido perdonados.
438
CONJUGATIONS.
FUTURE COMPOUND.
1. Hubiere sido I might or should
perdonado. have been par-
doned.
2. llubieres sido
perdonado.
8. Hubiere sido
perdonado.
1. Hubiereraos sido perdonados.
2. Ilubiercis sido perdonados.
3. Hubieren sido perdonados.
LIST
OF THE PRINCIPAL IRREGULAR VERBS IN THE SPANISH
LANGUAGE.
N. B. The figures placed after each verb refer to the page at which the model conjugation
for that verb is to be found. For instance, the number 398 shows that ADCCIB
is conjugated like CoNDucm,/owd at page 393.
Absolver, 39t.
Abstraer, 422.
Acertar, 392.
Acordar, 393.
Acostar, 303.
Acrccentar, 392.
Adestrar, 392.
Adhcrir, :;95.
Adquirir, 399.
Advertir, 395.
Aducir, 398.
Agorar, 393.
Alcntar, 392.
Almorzar, 393.
Amolar, 393.
Andar, 400.
Apacentar, 392.
Apostar, 393.
Aprobar, 393.
Apretar, 392.
Arrecirse, 396.
Arrendar, 392.
Arrepentirse, 395.
Ascender, 394.
Asentar, 392.
Asentir, 395.
Aserrar, 392.
Asc-ftar, 392.
Asir, 401.
Asolar, 393.
Asoldar, 393.
Atender, 394.
Atentar, 392.
Aterrar (echar por tier-
rat, 392.
Atestar (rellenar), 392.
Atraer, 422.
Atravrsar. 392.
Aventar, 392.
Aventarsc, 392.
Avergonzar, 393.
Bendecir, 402.
Caber, 403.
Caer, 422.
Caleutar, 392.
Cegar, 392.
Cenir, 390.
Cerner, 394.
Cerrar, 392.
Cimentar, 392.
Coccr, 404.
Colar, 393.
Colegir, 396.
Colgar, 393.
Comedirse, 396.
Comenzar, 392.
Compctir, 396.
Concebir, 396.
Concernir, 395.
Concert ar, 392.
Concordar. 393.
Condescender, 394.
Condolence. 394.
Conducir, 398.
Conferir. .805.
Confesar, 392.
Conocer. 398.
Conseguir, 396.
Consentir. 303.
Consolar, 303.
Constrefilr, 396.
Contar, 393.
Contener, like TENER.
(See auxiliary verbs.)
Contender. 394.
Contradecir. 406.
Controvertir. 395.
Contraer. 422.
Convertir, 395.
Corregir, 396.
Bar, 405.
Decaer, 422.
Decentar, 392.
Decir, 406.
Deducir, 398.
Defender, 394.
Deferir, 395.
Degollar, 393.
Demoler, 394.
Demostrar, 393.
Denegar, 392.
Denostar, 393.
Derrenirar, 392.
Derretir. 396.
Desavcnir, 424.
Descender, 394.
Descollar, 393.
Descordar. 393.
Descomedirse, 3%.
Dcsflocar, 393.
Deshacer, 410.
Deshclar. C02.
Desteir, 396.
Desembrar, 392.
Desolar, 393.
Desollar, 393.
Desovar. 393.
Despedir, 396.
Despernar. 392.
Despertar, 392.
Desterrar, 392.
Desplegar. 392.
Desvergonzarse, 393.
Dezmar. 392.
Discernir. 305.
Diferir. 305.
Diacrir. 305.
Di?cordar. :
Disolvor. r.0 1.
Divert;-
Doler. 391.
Dormir, -!C7.
Elegir, 396.
Emlx'^tir, 3%.
Empedrar, 392.
LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS.
Empczar, 392.
Llover, 304.
Resollar, 393.
Kniporear. .7.13.
Retentar, 392.
IjiKvmU'i". :} ( .' I.
Reventar, 392.
Enceus-ar, 392.
Maldecir, 402.
Revolcar. 393.
Encerrar, 392.
Manifestar, 392.
Rodar, 393.
Encomendar. 392.
Manteuer, like TENEK.
Roer.
Encontrar, 39:3.
Encordar, 39:!.
(See auxiliary verbs.)
Medir, 396.
Rogar, 393.
Engreirs-e, 396.
Mcntar, 392.
Engrosar, 39:j.
Enineudar, 392.
Meutir, 395.
Merendar, 392.
Saber, 420.
Salir, 421.
Enrodar, 393.
Woler, 301.
Satisfacer, 410
Ensaugrentar, 392.
Entender, 394.
Enterrar, 392.
Envestir, 396.
Morder, 394.
Morir, 407.
Mostrar, 392.
Mover, 396.
Segar, 392!
Seguir, 396.
Sembrar, 392.
Sentar 392.
Erguir, 403.
Setir, 395.
Errar, 409.
Eecarmentar, 392.
Escocer, 404.
Esforzar, 393.
ESTAB. (Sec auxiliary
Negar, 392.
Nevar, 392.
SEK. ' (See auxiliary
verbs.)
Servir, 396.
Serrar, 392.
Soldar, 393.
verbs.)
Oir, 413.
Soler, 433.
Estrenir, 096.
Oler, 414.
Soltar, 393.
Expedir, 396.
Solver, 394.
Extender, 394.
Sonar, 393.
Pedir, 396.
Sonar, 393.
Pensar, 392.
Soscgar, 302.
Forzar, 393.
Pcrder, 394.
Soterrar. 392.
Fregar, :392.
Pervertir, 395.
Sugerir, 395.
Placer, 433.
Pleirar, 392.
Gemir, 306.
Poblar, 393.
Temblar, 392.
Gobernar. 392.
Poder 415.
Tender, 394.
Podrir, 416.
TENER. (See auxiliary
Poner, 417.
verbs.)
HABEII. (See auxiliaries
Preferir. 395.
Tcfiir, 396.
and impersonate.)
Probar, 393.
Tentar, 392.
Hacer, 410.
Producir, 398.
Torcer, 404.
II eder, 394.
Proferir, 395.
Tostar. 393.
Ilclar, 392.
Traducir, 398.
Ilenchir, 396.
Traer, 422.
Render, 394.
Qucbrar, 392.
Trascendcr, 394.
Henir, 390.
Querer, 418.
Trascordarse. 393.
Ilerir, 395.
Trasegar, 392.
Herrar, 392.
Trocar, 393.
Ilervir, 395.
Racr, 422.
Tronar, 393.
Ilolgar, 393.
Recomendar, 392.
Tropezar, 392.
Hollar, 393.
Recordar, 393.
Recostar, 393.
Reducir, 398..
Valcr, 423.
Impedir, 396.
Refcrir. 395.
Venir, 424.
Incensar, 392.
Regar, 392.
Ver, 425.
Indncir. 398.
Reinr, 396.
Vertcr, 394.
Infcrir. :V.C>.
Resroldar, 392.
Vestir, 396.
Ingerir. 396.
Reir, 419.
Volar. 393.
Inquirir, 399.
Remcndar, 392.
Volcar, 393.
Introducir. 398.
Rendir, 396.
Volver, 394.
Invernar, 392.
Renovar, 393.
Invertir. 395.
Renir. 396.
Invcstir, 393.
Repctir, 396.
Yaccr, 43-1.
Ir, 411.
Requebrar, 392.
Requerir, 395.
Jugar, 412.
Rescontrar, 393.
Zaherir, 395.
VOOABULAKY,
C OXTAIXIXG ALL THE SPANISH WORDS USED IN THE GRAMMAR.
N. V.-The figures after each definition refer to the lessons in which the words-
have been explained in t/ie Grammar.
A.
A ah, prep., to, at, in. Voy A Francia, I.
H'H -Miu" to France; d lo mcnos, at
least; d la vcrdad, indeed ; d laespanola,
in the Spanish fashion. L. 4.
Abajo, ah-bah'-ho, adv., below, down,
down-stairs. L. 33.
Abalauzar, ah-bah-lan-thar' , to spring, to
rush. L. 57.
Abandonar, ah-ban-do-nar', to abandon, to
give up, to leave. L. 53.
Abanico, ah-bah-ne'-co, s. m., fan. L. 52.
Abierto, ah-bt-air'-to, p. p. irr. of ABBIB,
(which see). L. 52.
Abogado, ah-bo-gah'-do, 8. m., lawyer, ad-
ate. L. 49.
Aborrecible, ah-bor-rai-the'-blai, adj., bate-
fill. L. 24.
Abril, ah-bnel', s. m., April. L. 28.
Abrir aWri /'. to open. Aortrse, to be
opened, to blow (of flowers). L. 23.
/1,'i-i-ii', adv., here. Aca y alia, here
and there. L. IS.
'.to finish, to end.
b'ir i!o, to be just, to have just. Ac~,.
con to kill, to put an end to, to destroy.
L. 28.
Academia, ah-cah-dai'-me-a, s. f., academy.
L. 51.
', adv., perchance, by
rha'ice. Si a*-:! <-o, if at all. For si accmo,
in ca-e that. . L. 32.
\ceidente, ac-thc-dain'-tai, s. m., accident.
L.40.
Acciou, ac-thl-one' , s. f., action, share. L.
at.
Ac-tinf-o, ahrthain'-to, s. m., accent. L. 47.
'/?;'. to accept. L. 45.
ca, ah-tkair-ca, prep. AcercaAe, about.
!,. I 1 .).
Accrtar, ah-thair-lar' , to make out. to hit
;!io murk, to succeed, to be right (i. e., to
conjecture riu'ht). L. 8-1.
A'.'ii-rto. ah-the-air'-to, s. m., success. L. r>2.
aodar, ah-co-mo-dar' , to accommodate,
to suit. L. 31.
Aco;np:iii-ir, ah-com-pan-yar' , to accom
p:i;iy. L. 17.
Aconsejar, ah-con-stti-har', to counsel, to
L. !.">.
; ir, ,!',-c'r-rJnr'. to accord, to agree, to
, to remember. L. !(!.
Acostar, ah-cds-tar 1 , to lay down. Acos-
tarse, to lie clown, to go to bed. L. yo.
Actual, ae-twal', adj., present. L. 5-J.
Acudir, ali-coo-deer' , to haste, to run, to
turn (to), to refer (to). L. 49.
Acuerdo, ah-cwair'-do, s. in., agreement,
accord, decision (of a court). L. 4^.
Aculla, a/i-cool->/a', adv., there. Aqui y
aculld, to and fro ; here and there. L. la.
Adelantar, ak-dai-lan-tar 1 ', to advance, to
make progress. L. 3(5.
Adelante, ah-dai-lan'-tai, adv., forward.
En adelante, henceforward. ; Adelaide .'
go on ! go ahead ! L. 43.
Ademan, ali-dai-man' , s. m., posture, air.
L. 44.
Adcm-is, ah-dot-mas', prep., besides ; adv.,
mprjover, besides. L. 37.
Adentro, a/i-dain'-tro, adv., in, within, in-
side. L. 47.
Adivinar, ak-dee-vee-nar', to guess, to di-
vine. L. -10.
Adjetivo, ad-hai-tec'-vo, s. m., adjective.
L. 43.
Admirable, ad-mee-rah'-blai, adj., admira-
ble, wonderful. L. 51.
Admiracion, arl-mee-rah-(?i2-one', s. f., ad-
miration, wonder. L. 51.
Adrnirar, ad-mee-rar', to admire, to won-
der at. L. 61.
Adonde. "(See DOXDE.) L.-O.
Adquirir, ad-kt-rccr', to acquire.
Adverbial, ad-xair-lil-al\ adj..
L. 50.
Adverbio, s. m.. adverb. L. 43.
Advertir, ac?-rfttr-f >>''. to advisf, to men-
tion, to point out, to warn, to oV
L. 43.
A6reo, ah-ai'-rai-n. adj.. afrinl. L. i.
Afectacion aJi-faik-taJi-the-une', s. f., affec-
tation. L. 24.
Afectar, aft-ftiOk-tar', to nfTect. L. -1".
Afcitar, afi-ff.'i-e-tar\ to shave, to paint (the
face). L. &3.
Afirmaciou, aJi-fttr-mah-the-one', s. f., af-
firmation. L. 24.
Afirmar. ah-fi'-'-r-mnr', to afflrm, to make
firm, to strengthen. L. 48.
Afli.jir. ah-flce-lifn- 1 . to afflict. L. <.
Afortunado. ari-ftirc-too-nah'-do, adj., fortu-
nate. L. 03.
Ageno. ali-hai'-nr>. adj., foreign, belonging
to others L. (-3.
VOCABULARY.
:cion, ah-hee-tah-the-one 1 ', s. f., agita-
tion. L. 24.
Agradar, ah-yrah-dar', to please. L. 5:;.
Agradecer, ak-<jrah-dai-tlMir' , to thank, to
be obliged to. L. 3<J.
Agrcgar, a/i-r/rui-aar'. to add, to unite. L.
49.
Agrio, ah'-gri-o, adj., sour. L. 22.
-V-iui, aA'-fftca, e. 1., water. L. 7.
uitar, u/t-'ju-uii-tur\ to support, to put
up with, to Dear, to bear witu. L. 53.
fftoar-ctt-ain'-tai, e. m.,
oraudy. L. 50.
Agudeza, uh-goo-dai'-tha, s. f., wit, witty
.'-i_'. L. 57.
Agiiero, ah-yicai'-ro, s. m.. augury, ouieu.
L:. 45. ,
Ahora, ah-v-ra, adv., now. L. 27.
Aire, i'-mi, s. in., air. L. 46.
Ajedrez, ati-hai-draith' , s. m., chess. L. -12.
Ala, a/i'-lu, s. f.. wing. L. 5S.
Alabauza. ah-lah-ban'-tlia, s. f., praise L
53,
AJarde, s. m. nacer alarde, to boast. L
63.
Alberto, al-bair'-to, s. m., Albert. L.
Alcauce, a!-kan'-f/iai. s. m., reach. L. 53.
Alcauzar, al-can-t/tur', to reach, to over-
take, to take up with, to catch. L. 53.
A!e_rrar, ah-lai-rjrar' to j/ive jo\- to make
g&d.
: t'-rjrai, adj. Joyful, glad, merry.
L.. 21.
Alejandro, ah-lai-han'-dro, s. m., Alexan-
der. L. 3.
Aleli. ft.'t-la t-lct', s. m.. gilliflower. L. 0.
Aleman, ah-lai-man', s. m., German (!au-
ige). I.. .'.
A leman. s. m.. German : adj., German. L. 3.
Alemania, ak-lai-mah-nl-a, s. f., Germanv.
L. 9.-
Alfil : . >. m. and f.. pin. L. 4C.
AJeazara, af-ooA-lAo&'-ni, s. f., shouts of
joy. L. 54.
ion. a'.-tfi-clonf '. s. m., cotton. L. 5.
AlL'tiicn. al'-rntiri, pron., somcliody, ally-
body, sonic one. any one. L. 17.
Alcrtino. a. \\.. some. L. 17.
Alirino. a. prnn. iud.. and adj.. somebody.
some one. anybody, any one, some. L.
17.
Alhajr.. . f..j.'wcl. L. fJ7.
Alimentar. ; /;'. to feed. Ali-
de e^pcranzas, to live on hope.
Alimento. s. m.. food. L. 41.
Alia. a?-vi'. adv.. thero. yonder. L. 18.
Almn. nl'-mq. ?. f.. cmil. ' T,. 17.
jMmnccTi. n'- >.m.. store. L. 02.
-Mmo ''ir'. to breakfast, to take
breakfast. L. 35.
Almnorzo. al-inv-air'-tlto. s. m., breakfast.
T.. .">.
AJrededor, a!-rai-clal-dor' . adv., around. L.
. 5fi.
inn. rf-fa?>-rfit>-t?it-one', s. f, altera-
tion, rlian^n. L. 5*5.
Alro. n.r-tn. ndi.. hi?h. tall. L. 21.
AHiin. 3. f.. heitrht. L. "7.
. to li-j-bt. L. 64.
-jLinablc. ah -mah' -Wai. adj., amiable. L.
47.
Amador, '- m., lover. L. 40.
Amaneccr, afi-mah-nai-thatr', to get morn-
iu_ r , to be in a place at daybreak, or
morning. L. :JO.
Amaute, ali-inan'-lai, p. p. and s., loviii",
lover, sweetheart. L. M.
Aiuar, u/t-mar', to love. L. 21.
Amarillo, ak-malt-reel'-yd, adj. .yellow. L 51.
Ambicion, am-be-lkt-ont' , s. f., arubitiou
L. 00.
Ambos, am'-bos, pron., both. L. 23.
Amenazar, ah-mai-nuk-tlMr' , to menace, to
threaten. L. 5'J.
Amenidad, ak-mal-nl-dath' s. f., ameaitv.
L. 32.
Amigo, ah-me'-go, s. m., friend. L. 13.
Aniistad, ah-mew-tath' s. f., friendship.
L. 01.
Amor, ah-more\ 6. m., love. L. 4o.
Amplio, a/n'-pK-o, adj., ample. L. 52.
Aiupo. s. m.. whiteness (oi snow). L. Cl.
Analitico, ah-nah-K'-lc-co, adj., analytic;;!.
L. 35.
Aiiaraujado. ah-nah-ran-hah'-do, adj., or-
auuc (color). L. 54.
Audio. an'-chv. adj., wide, broad. L. 47.
Anchura, an-clwo'-ra. s. f., width, breadth,
L. 01.
Anciano, an-thl-ah'-no^ adj. and s., old, old
man. 1.. , -.
Andar, an-dar', to walk, to go. L. 44.
Auecdota, ah-naik'-i/6-ta, s. f., aneci
L. 44.
cdote.
Angel, an'-fiail, s. m.. angel. L. 60.
Angulo. an'yoo-lo, s. m.. angle. En dngulos
rectos, at right anirles. L. 00.
Animal. 'ah-, L. animal. L. 02.
Auiinar. ali-nt-mar' , to animate, to eucour-
L. :iS.
Auoche. ah-no'-chaf. adv.. last nicrht. L. 2S.
Anochecer. aJi-rw-chai-tl I'.L-ht,
to be (in such a place) at nightfall. L.*~30.
Anta.'onista. an-tah-ffo-nees^ta, s. m., an-
tagonist. L. 36.
Ante, an'-tai. prep., before, in presence of.
L. 10.
jjActeayer. ar>-t(tl-C;h-yatr', adv., the day be-
^Tbre ycstctxlay. L. 10.
Antecedcnte, "an-tt -. m.,
antecedent. L. 01.
Antenoche, an-tai-no'-chai, the ni;: 1 ,
fore last. 1
Anfcojo, an-tai-d'-fio, s. m., cyc-gi
, -;>ecracles. L. 53.
Antepenultimo, an-tai-pai~noot'-K-mo, adj..
and s. m.. antepenultimate. I
Anterior, an-tai-rc-or' '. adj.. preceding, fore-
going, .previous, fonner.
Antes." an.'-tai. prep. Ante-! do. before.
L. 42.
Antes, adv.. rather, first, sooner than. L. Ifi.
Autepuesto. an-tni-picais'-to, p.p.. pri
s.. prefix. L. 52.
Antiguo, an-t?'-gico, adj., ancient, eld. L.
(S3.
Antisocial, an-tt-so-the-cd' , adj., antisocial.
L. 50.
Antoio, an-tv'-ho, e. m., whim. lc-:
L. 03.
Afindir. an-imli-dftr'. to add. I
A fiil. an-yr-tl'. s. m.. indigo (?oi.
Aiio. ai'i-im. s. m.. year. L. 1(5.
Apariencia, ah-pdh-re-ai
pcarance. L. 53.
VOCABULARY.
443
Apcgar, ah-pai-yar, to adhere, to attach.
L. 54.
Apenas, afi-pai'-nas, adv., scarcely, hardly.
Aplicar, ah-plt-car 1 , to apply. L. 02.
A postar, ah-pdtt-tar\ to bet, to wager. L. C3.
Apoyar, ali-pO-yur' , to lean, to support, to
protect, ii. 50.
Apreeiable, a/i-prah-the-ak'-blai, apprecia-
ble, respectable. L. 56.
Apremiar, a/i-prai-ml-ar', to press, to urge.
L. 45.
Aprender, uh-prain-dair' . L. 6.
Apretar, a//-j/rai-tar', to tighten, to press,
to urge. L. 05.
Aprisa, (th-pra'-sa, adv., quickly. L. G.
Aprobacion, a/t-prO-ba/i-t/te-one', 8. f., ap-
probation. L. 2t.
Aprobar. ali-prti-bar' , to approve. L. 35.
Aproveuhar, ah-pro-cai-cltar', to progress,
to make the most of. L. 52.
Aproximar, aft-prd-faS-mar 1 , to approxi-
mate, to approach. L.'41.
Apto, ap'-lo, adj., apt, fit. L. 51.
Apurado, a/i-poo-ralt'-do, adj., embarrassed.
L. 4 1.
Aquel, alt-Rail', pron., that one, he; the
1'ormer. L. 18.
Aqui, a/i-ke', adv., here. L. 18.
Arbol, ar'-bul, s. m., tree. L. 49.
Arboleda, ar-bd-lai'-da, s. f., throve. L. 40.
Arcual, ah-nti-nal', 8. m., eandy ground.
L. -1'.).
Argiiir, ar-yoo-eer', to argue. L. 34.
Aristocracia, ofi-rees-td-foaA'-tKS-a, s. f.,
aristocracy. L. (50.
Aristocrdtico, adj., aristocrat. L. 35.
Aritmetica, ah-reet-mai'-te-ka, a. f'., arith-
metic. L. 21.
Armar, ar-mar', to arm. L. 59.
Arpa, a r'-/)'i, s. f.. harp. L. 15.
Arquiteeto, ar-kl-tuik'-lo. s. m., architect.
Arqtiitectura, ar-ku-taik-too'-ra, s. f., archi-
: :irc. L. 51.
Anv rlar, ttr-rai-rjlar', to regulate, to ar-
range, to settle. L. GO.
Arrepentir^c, ar-rai-pain-teer'-fai, to rc-
'. L. 33.
Arrestar. ur-rat*-(rir'. to arrest. - L. 37.
Arriba, ai'-re'-ba, adv., above, up-stairs. L.
.",!.
Arte. s. ar'-t>ii, m. and f., art. L. 31.
i!o. ar-f'-'-cno-lo, . m., article. L. 43.
-Artificial, ar-t~-fe-(hi-al', adj., artificial. L.
Arti;-ta. ar-fn^'-fft, s. m., artist. L. 36.
Asador, s. m., spit (for roasting). L. (S.
-.iiU.T, ax-tlialn-dair', to ascend, to
amount. L. 07.
Ascension, as-tliain-st-one' , B. f., ascension.
L. 19.
Asetrurar, afi-sfli-yoo-rar', to secure, to a3-
siin:. L. :>-!.
Asi-sino, ah-saz-se'-no, e. m., assassin. L.
69.
Asf. (?//-*', adv., so, thus. L. 20. ^Mtpie,
so that, as soon as. L. 29. Anl a-<'t, >o
so. L. 39.
A?k-nto. (ifi-ae-nin'-fo, 8. m., seat. L. 39.
A^ir, i:/i-^rr\ to seize, to make the most of.
L. !>.
Asno, as'-no, s. m., ass. L. 01.
[L. 46.
Asombro, ah-sotn'-bro, B. m., amazement.
Astronomia, ass-trd-no-me'-a, s. f.. astrono-
my. L. 49.
Atencion, ah-tain-the-one'. s. f.. attention
L. 5G.
Ateuder, ah-tain-dair' ', to attend. L. 37.
Atlantico, at-lan' te-ko, a. in. and adj., At-
lantic. L. 4G.
Atolladero, ah-tdl-lya-dai'-ro, s.m.. difficul-
ty. L. GO.
Atracciou, ah-trak-thc-one' s. f., attraction.
L. 24.
Atras, ah-tras\ adv., behind, ago. L. 58.
Atrevcrse, ah-trai-vair'-sai, to dare. L. 48.
Atrevimiento, ah-lrai-re-me-ain'-to, s. m.,
assurance, daring. L. G4.
Atrocidad, ah-t/d : t/ic-dat/i', s. f., atrocity.
L. 36.
Atropellar, a-tro-pail-yar' ', to trample upon,
to run over. L. 51.
Aullar, ali-ool-yar' ', to howl. L. 44.
Aumeuto, ah-oo-main' -to, 8. m., augmenta-
tion, increase. L. 59.
Ann, ak-oon', adv., still, yet. L. 25.
Aunque, ah-oon-ke', adv., although, though.
Ausencia, ah-oo-sain'-the-a, s. f., absence.
L. 35.
Ausente, ah-oo-sain'-tai, adj., absent. L.
59.
Autor. ah-oo-Kr', s. m., author. L. 47.
Autondad, ah-oo-to-re-dath' ', s. f., authority.
L. 59.
Auxiliar, afi-oo-kse-K-ar', s.m. and adj. ^aux-
iliary. L. 57.
Auxilfar, to help, to aid. L. 62.
Auxilio, a/t-oo-kse'-le-o, s. m., help, assist-
ance. L. 55.
Avenida, ah-tai-nc'-da, s. f., avenue. L.
15.
Aventurarse, ah-vain-too-rar'-mi, to ven-
ture. L. 65.
Avisar, ah-te-sar', to inform, to let know.
L. 45.
Ay ! ah-c', int., alas ! L. 46.
Ayer, ah-yair', adv., yesterday. L. 16.
Ayudar, ah-yoo-dar', to aid, to help. L.
88.
Azul, ah-t/iool', adj., blue. L. 54.
B.
Bailar, bah-2-lar', to dance. L. 23.
Baile, bah-2-lai, s. m., dance, ball. L. 30.
Bajar, bah-liar', to go or come down, to
lower. L. 53.
Bajo, bah'-ho, adj., low, base, mean. L. 21.
Banco, ban'-ko, s. m., bench, bank. L. :;i.
Bandera, ban-dai'-ra, s. f., Hag, standard.
L. 58.
Baiiar, ban-yar', to bathe. L. 49.
Barato, bah-rah'-to, adj., cheap. L. 13.
Barba, bar'-ba, e. f.. chin, beard. L. 59.
Barberia, bar-bai-re'-a, s. f., barber's shop.
L. 50.
Barbero, bar-bai'-ro, s. m., barber. L. 33.
Barbilampiiio, bar-be-lam-pecn'-yo, adj.,
having a thin beard. L. 50.
Barc.o, s. m., vessel, boat. L. 60.
Baron, bah-rone', s. m., barc'u. L. 51.
Barrer, bar-rair', to sweep. L. 2t.
Basta ! bas'-ta, int., enough ! L. 30.
Bastante, bos-tan' -tai, adv., enough. L. 25.
VOCABULARY.
r. bas-'ar', to be enough, sufficient.
L. 3).
Bastoi -- m.. cane, stick. L. 10.
>. f., trick (at cards). No
dojar mi-tor b izu, not to let any one put
in a sin_'lc word. L. 03.
Bobjdpr, bai-bai-ddre' , s. m., tippler, toper,
drinker. L. 05.
Bobjr, bai-fxtir', to drink. Bcber los vien-
tos por algo, to solicit with much cager-
'. to desire ardently. Better coniouna
cnba, to drink like a fish. L. 7.
',>i, s. f., beauty. L. 51.
IJjlio, iKiii'-ya. adj., beautiful, handsome.
L. 31.
Bandccir, bai:i-dai-theer\ to bless. L. 41.
Bjudi '<. adj., blessed. L. 5?.
Besar, b'jti-aar\ to kiss. L. 30.
Beso, bai'-so, 8. m., kiss. L. 39.
Bibiioteca, be-MS-o-lai'-ka, s. f., library. L.
Bien, be-ain' (pronounce in one syllable),
adv., wall. L. 3. Esta bien, very well,
all right. No bien. scarcely, no sooner.
L. 29.
vhor, b3-ain-ai-c7ior' , s. m., benefac-
tor. L. 5J.
Bieu vcuido ! b'>-am' vai-itZ'-do, int., wel-
come ! L. 45.
Billetc, bsd-'jal'-tai, s. m., note, ticket. L.
7.
Blanc:: f. Encontrari'C sin6.'a/>
: to have a cent. L. &t.
ij., white. L. ."-.
Bianco, s. m.. mark (to aim at). Qoedarse
en blartco, to be left in the lurch. L. .",:.
Bledo. ,!., straw. No se ma da
tin &'e;/0, 1 do not care a straw for it. L.
63.
Boca, bo'-ka, s. f., mouth. L. 44. Ilablar
gor 6oca de ganso, to repeat what another
id. LT 03.
Bocado, bo-liah'-do, s. m., mouthful, bite.
Bocado sin hueso. L. 01.
. 9. f., purse. L. 45.
Bolsillo, NH-8sel'-yo, s. m., pocket, par.-o.
L. i7.
Bondad, bone-daih', e. f., goodness, kind-
Li. 39.
Bondadoso, Wne-dah-do'-so, adj. .good, kind.
L*. -) 1.
Bonitf. '..pretty. L. 53.
Borboton, b~ -, bub-
bling, hurriedly, confasediv. L. (',}.
Bosque, Kjj'-kai, s. in., wood, woody place.
L. 40.
B.na, bo' -fa. . f , boot. L. 10.
f ? ''!i' J re. L. Cl
"io, bd-d-taft'-rf-o, s. m., dr .
Bravata, fov .:".. bravado. Echar
' braor, to boast. L. (>i.
adj., brave.
ravol int., bravo! L. 4S.
'-fl'O, s. m., arm. L. 44.
, s. ui . gcoundi\ '
'-', s. m., brute, ignorant pcr-
'.itish, i.gnorant. T.
Baeno, a. L. -._ ,-.-
<J day Do''
Hat once. L. iii.
Bney, bwai'-e, e. m., ox. L. C8.
Bula, boo'-la, s. f. Tener t./'a para todo, to
act according to one's limey. L. 01.
Bulla, lool'-ya, s. -I'., noise. ileier
to make a noise. L. (>J.
Bullicio, L-oul-yu' -tht-c, s. is., bustle, noise,
uproar. L. 54.
Bulto, bod'-to, e. m., bundle. Ilablar a
bulto, to talk at random. L. 03.
Burla, boor'-ta, s. f., jest, joke. Kab'.ar do
. to speak in jest. L. ''*,.
Burlar, boor-iar', to jest. j^niarse de al-
guno, to make fun of, to laugli at any one.
13'irla lurla/icto, half jest, half earnest.
L. 33.
Barlon. boor-lone', s. m., wag, jester. L. 44.
Busca, boos'-ka, s. f.. search. u buxa de,
in search of. L. 55.
Bnscar, bws-kar', to search, to look for.
L. 4. liiifcar cinco pies al gato, to pick
a quarrel. L. 4.
C.
Caballejo, KaJi-bal-yai'-ho. s.m. ('Jim. of CA-
BALLO), nag, contemptible old hor.-e. L.
49.
-,:ai'-ro, s. m.,peni!eman,
knight. Buenos tard^ . good
afternoon, sir. I
Caballo, kah-bal'-yo, s. m., horse. L. 4.
Cabello. /;-/.' m., hair. I..
Tomar la ocasion por \< -. ;iroflt
by the occasion. L. 01.
Caber, kah-bfiir', to hold, to contain. No
caber dcgozo, to be overjoyed. jl'uede
caber en tu imaginacion * can such a
thing enter into your imagination? N<>
cube inas, nothhag more can be de
L. 40.
C'aboza, kah-bai'-tha, s. f., head. I
m., cable. L. 4>.
Cabo, kati'-bo, s. m., end. Al cabo. a:
L. 54.
Cadn. kah'-da, pron., each, cv
vez, even- time. Cada uno, each, .
one. L. 43.
Caer, kah-air'. to fall, to see, to understand.
la plaza, the windows look on the square.
Caersele a uno la car. ::za. to
blush with shame. L. 5D.
Cafe, kah-fai', B. m., collee, con*ec-house.
it. 14.
Ca;.!. krfi'-lio, s. f., case, box, cash (com-
Tnercir.1). L. GO.
Cal, s. f., lime. 1' to, of stone.
'. S. f.. pniv:
j>ar ccJabazax. togivc the mitten. L. (it.
Calcolar, kal-koo-lar' ^,"to calculate. L. 51.
C'aklo. i.. broth. L. 44.
Calducho, kal-doo'-cho, s. m., poor 1
Calcntar, kah-lain-tar'. to heat, to \
L.S1.
:;ra. Jcah-laln-too'-ra. s. f., fjvcr. L.
Calicnte, X\. , adj., hot. v
L. 41.
V O C A B U L A 11 Y .
-115
Callado, kal-yah'-do. adj., silent, taciturn.
L. 20.
Callar, l;al-yar', to be siieiit, to keep si-
lence. Collar su pico, to hold one's
tongue, to say nothing. L. 42.
Calle, kal'-yai, s. f., street. Dcjar A uno ca
rip one of his ail. L. 15.
-.'', s. in., heat, wanath. L. 25.
Calva. kul'-nt, s. f., bald place, bald part of
the head. L. 4.3.
Calvo, k-.i>'-i-o, adj., bald. L. 45.
Calz; 1 ., kai'-Ut'j, s.i'., stockings. Tomar las
n.'go, to uiaiie oil', to make
a hurried escape. L. 50.
Cama. . f., bed. Guardar cama,
to be confined to one's bed. L. 11.
. kuiti-be-ar', to change. L. 69.
', a. in., change. L. 4(5.
Camino, t'.i/'t-it)i-'-iio, s. in., way, road. L. 60.
Camisa, kuh-tn^' -<((. s. l 1 ., shirt. Meterseen
cumiaa de once varas, to interfere in other
people's affairs. L. 40.
Campo, kain'-]x>, s. in., field, camp. Dcjar
el cantpo libre. to leave the field to one's
competitors. L. 59.
to, s. m., basket. L. 58.
Caudidamente, kan'-(K-dali-ina<:t.-t-:i.i, adv..
candidly. L. 48.
,i-sah'-(?o, adj., tired, tiresome.
L . io be tired. Ser
do, to be tiresome. 1..
to tire, to fetigae. L. 33.
Camay, Kan-tar', to sing. L. 15.
riz, kan-taJi-treet/t', B. L, singer. L.
16.
it ft', quantity, sum. L.
Canto, kan' -to, s. m., singing, stone. De
. of stone. L. 48.
.::., singer. L. 15.
Cafion. ,' .".i., cannon. L. 41.
'.<), s. m., caunon-
hOt. L. ': I.
'.. cloak. Ar.dar do capo.
lien. 1,. GO.
.
ility. L. SO.
'j., capable. L. 50.
'., captain. L. 5?.
Capiv 1 .:a., caprice, fancv,
Q. L. CO.
l, >. f.. face. T)ar a alguno con
la puerta on la tttr;>. to glint the door in
l
L";), S.
in.. '1:11. L. 40.
. a:;ge !
Is! L. 65.
' '-da, s. f., loud
!i, burst of laughter. L.
. f., prison. L)k>t.
. i'., load, burden, chanre.
-nar', to cliarge, to load, to
.'), P. m., load, employment,
Ice. I., (i '.
:'.. Cii::rity. L. 11.
Carircdondo. / . adj.,
ndlaced. L.
'-nai, s. f.. lle^h, meat. L. 7.
Can:' . ,", s. in., mutton.
Carniccria, kar-riK-tliai-re'-a, e. f., butcher's
;.', meat market. L. 11.
C'amieero, kar-iii-tlMi'-ro, s. m., butcher.
L. 11.
Carnuza, f:ar-noo'-(/ia, B. f., bad, di
ing, spoiled meat. L. 49.
C'aro, kah'-ro, adj., dear, at a liigli price.
L. 13.
Carpintcro, kar-peei^-tai '-ro, s. m., carpen-
ter. L. 33.
Carre ra, kar-rai'-ra, B. f, career, course,
race, profession. L. 48.
Carro, uar'-ro, s. m., car, wagon. L.
Carruage, kar-roo-ak'-hai, s, in., carriage.
L. 51.
Carta, kar'-ta, s. f., letter. L. 7.
Cartilla, kar-teel'-ya, s. f., primer. Cosa
quo no esta en la ca/-fi'!:i, eomcthiug
strange or uncommon. L. 01.
C'asa. kafi'-iia, e. f., house. L. <J.
Cascaras ! kas'-ka/i-ras, int., oh 1 dear me !
L. 0.3.
Casero, kah-sai'-ro, adj., domestic, house-
hold. Comedia camera, parlor play. L. 5'J.
Ca.-:i, knh'-yl-, adv., almost. L. :,'.
Caso, kali'-t>o, s. m., case, event. Xo
V. caso de cso, take no notice of that.
L. CO.
Castafia, kas-tan'-ija, s. f., chcstnnt. L. 40.
-<jah'-no, s. m., Castilian
laivruago. L. 55.
io, adj.. Castilian. L. ;".
Castillo, ka*-tt<rl' -yo, s. in., castle. Ilaccr
! el aire, to build castles in the
air. L. -18.
Casualidad, kah-soo-ah-tc-dath' , s. f., c .
ty, chance, hazard. L. (iO.
a. kii'i-voo'-chu, s. f., contemptible
old house. L. 41.
Catoliciemo, !:^-fO-!~-!'\>:^'-mo, s. m., Ca-
tholicism. L. -").
Catorcc, kah-tor'-thai, num. adj., fourteen.
Luis C'aiorce, Louis the Fourteenth.
L. 14.
Causa, kaJi'-oo-sa, s. f., cause. A cvaa do,
on account of. L. 40.
Causar, kah -co-far', to cause. L. 51.
Ca;:a. l:ah'-tha, s. f., chase, hnnt, hunting.
Ir ;' > hunting. L. 68,
Cazar, kfth-tluir', to chase, tommt. 1
;eion, thui-lai-lii s. f.,
celebration. L. 39.
Celebi .iir'.io celebrate.
que V. haya veuido, I am glad you
have come. L. 39.
Celeste, thai-lais'-lai, adj.. heavenly,
-Los cuerp. ':; heavenly
bodies. L. -!9.
. adj., cc!
lieavenly. (See CKI.ESTI:.) i .
Ceiico, thai'-K-ko, adj., heavenly (::-
poetry only). L.
Celo, thai'-l"). s.m.. -/.(-A. L. .".".
Cena, thai'-ria, s. f., supper, La.7t Sapper.
L. 5-J.
C.-nar, thai-nar', to sup, to take supper.
L. :?.).
Centavo, thuhi-tali'-rn. s.ni., co-it. F.
Ci-ntflla, ///(;
L. (i-.\
na, s.f.. about a hr.n-
446
VOCABULARY.
Ccntcnar, thain-tai-nar' , s. m., a hundred,
L. 40.
Ccrca, thair'-l;a, adv., near, close by. Cer-
ca do su casa, near his house. L. 31.
menial, thai- . adj. , ceremo-
nial, ceremonious. L. 54.
Cerrar, thair-mr' , to shut, to close. L. 34.
Cerrojo, thair-ru'-h-), s. m.,bolt. L. 51).
Cerveza. thair-rui'-thu, s. f., ale, beer. L. 7.
Chaleco, cAah-lae'-ko, s. in., vest. L. 10.
C'hancear, chan-thai-ar', to jest, to joke.
L. 58.
Chanza, chan'-tha, s. f., jest, joke. L.
Charla. char' -la, s. f., chit-chat, prattle.
L. 60.
Charlar, char-lar', to chat, to prattle. L. 37.
Chaseo, clia*'-k<>, s. m., disappointment.
Llcvarse 1111 cliwxo solenme, to bo greatly
disappointed. L. 46.
Chclin, chai-leen', a. m., shilling. L. 61.
Chico, che'-ko, adj., little, small. L. 41.
Chiquirritico, cM-Keer-r&42'-te>, aclj., very
small, very little. L. 4i.
Chito < che'-to, int., hush \ silence \ L. 40.
Chocolate, cho-kv-lah'-tai. e. m., chocolate.
L. 14.
Cicgo, thc-qi'-rjo. s. m. and adj.. blind. A
' -. blindly, in the dark, i
. in., heaven, sky. Tomar
'f> eon las maims, to lie transported
with joy. grief, or passion. L. 45.
I*, num. adj., a hundred. (See
CIZ.-XTO.) L. 14.
Cjencia. f?<~- -. f.. science. L. ID.
C'iento, tfte-aln'-fo, nuui. adj., a hundred.
I EX.) L. 11.
Cierto. tht-air'-'o, adj.. certain. L. 43.
Cimiento, the-mZ-ain'-to, s. m., foundation.
L. 51).
Cinco, theen'-Ko, num. adj., five, fifth. L. 14.
Cinr-ii . - -a, num. adj., lifty,
It. L. 11.
C'irctinspccciou. i '-one',
s. i'.. circumspection. L. it.
Circonstancia, theer-Jccxmss-tan'-tAS-a, B. f.,
circmristance. L. 40.
Ciia. (?i(-'-f:i, s. f.. appointment, quotation.
. t!i~-tar', to make an appointment
. i o quote. L. 50.
Ciadadano, -tk'-no, citizen. L.
Civilizacifui. a fi-f he-one', 8. f.,
civilization. L. CO.
' ilh', s. f., Clearness, per-
spicuity. I
'it. L. 59.
, ."> 1.
'.c, classical.
L. K.
. s. f.,
iiication. i
.. dimato. L. 40.
! 1) >il, to cook. L. 40.
1:1.. -coach, carria."' in
:\;i. Ir tn coche, to go in a ca
Coc!!!- ' ; '-ro, s. m., cook. L. 11.
.a., chest, trunk. L. ii >.
catch, to take, to pick
up. L. -l(i.
. to limp, to walk lame.
Cojo, ko'-ho, adj. and 8. m., lame. L. 44.
Colada. ko-luli'-ila. s.f.. stiilenhu of clothes
Todo saldra cu la aAuda, all will be
brought to light. L. Co.
Colectivo, ko-laik-K'-i-o, adj., collective. L.
40.
Colgar, kole-rjar', to hancr. L. 59.
Coliua, ko-K'-ita. s. f.. hiil. L. 58.
Colocacion, ku-lv-kah-t/ti-oitt', . f., em-
ployment, place, situation. L. CO.
Colocar, kd-U-kar', to put, to arrange, to
place, to employ. L. -Hi.
Colorado, ko-lo-rah'-do, adj., red. L. 54.
Colorido, ku-lo-rZ' -do, s. in., coloring (puiut-
inir). L. 55.
Color, ky-lur'. B. m., color,
Combatir, kijiitc-bah-tccr' , to combat, to
liirht. L. 5-1.
Combinaciou, kQme-t%-na}i-Ui&$ne', s. f.,
combination. L. 31.
Combinado, kuinc-bc-nah'-do, p.p. and adj.,
combined. L. 58.
Combinar, kuinc-lt-nar 1 , to combine. L.
58.
Comedia, ko-mai'-de-a. s. f.. comedy. L. 52.
Comer, lo-inair'. to eat, to dine. L. 7.
Ccmcrciantc, kd-mair-tAi-an'-tal, s. m.,
merchant. L. 5.
Comcta, kv->tiai'-(a, s. m., comet; s. f.,
kite (toy). L. CO.
Cometer, kij-mai-tair', to commit. L. 43.
Comico, ku'-iiit-ko, s. m., actor, con.edian.
L. (i3.
Comico, adj., comic, comical, i
Como, kr,'-tno, adv.. how, as./ Como csta
V . ': liow are you ':\o sere tan rice
el, I shall be as rich as he. L. 15.
C'omodidad. kij-inij-df-datti', e. f., commodi-
ty, convenience, comfort. L.
Comodo. kij '-tnij-do, adj., commodious., com-
fortable. L. x'D.
Companero, kvmc-jjan-yai'-ro, s. m., com-
panion, comrade. L. 60.
Compaflia, lcdm&pan-y$'-a, s. f., company.
L. 60.
Comparativo, kdme-pah-raA-li'-W, adj.,
comparative. L. 61.
Companion. / ~ (', s. f., compas-
sion. L. 15.
Complaccncia, k~,me-pla! - . P. f.,
complacency, plcasuiv. :
Complementi . -'o, s. m.,
complement. L. 51.
Componentr. part., com-
ponent. L. 40.
Componer, Wme-pu-nair' , to compose, to
mend, to arrange, to compound. 1..
Composicio:-. . s. I'., com-
Eosition, mending, arranging, componnd-
i-. L. >',.
Comprar, koinc-prar', to buy, to purchase.
L. 4.
Comprender, kdme-pratn-dair', to coi
bend, to understand, to comprise, j
Con, I-I'IIK-, prep., with, by. L. 10.
Concebir, Kfine-ihai-beer' , to conceive of.
L. 5i.
Conceder, tSne-thai-dair', to grant, to con-
cede. L. 3:5.
Concertar. kSne-thair-(ar', to concert, to
au'ree. 1.. G i.
Concicncia. kfine-tte-ain'-thZ-a, s. f, cen-
scieuce. L. 40.
VOCABUL AEY.
447
Coaeierto, k~jnc-tht-air'-to, e. m., concert,
agreement. L. 17.
i-tcr , to conclude, to 1m-
i-h, to be over. L. 5S.
ii-Jaueia, kOnc-kdrv-tla/t'-the-a, a. f.,
concordance, agreement. L. 50.
Coudeicender, kuiie-daia-thuin-dacr\ to con-
descend, to agree. L. -is.
Condicion, kone-dS-t/iS-diie', s. f., condition.
L. 43.
CondicioMl, kone-dc-the-vne-al' , adj., con-
ditional. L. 5.1.
Coiiducir, kdne-doo-theer\ to conduct, to
eo;i\w, to lc:ul. L. 40.
Confeaar, k~>n-- : r\ii-.tr', to confess, to ac-
knowlolgj, to avow. L. :;i.
Coufaso, K&ns-foo'-so, adj., confused, con-
fouuJo 1. L. 51.
<.' >:ij;igi/ion, fc'ifi',-/u>y-y(th-(/ie-one', 8. f.,
cojj!i,'.nio;i. L. 4:5.
Conj ig.ir, ttne-hoo-gar 1 , to conjugate. L.
43.
('.i.runeioa, kj>ie-fu)3ii-th?-one', s. f., con-
j:i .1 -tioa. L. 43.
(.' >n 11. gj. /.-y /.--//i3'-go, pron., with me, with
.('. L. -1 i.
Coaocar, k~>-tt~;-t'iair', to know, to be ac-
<| .ui:it; 1 -.vit.i. L. -J").
Cjaj3imieati>, kS-nd-tfii-mi-atn'-to, e. m.,
k.i >.vlj.t, r J, bill of lading (commerce;.
L. 45.
Cjaijc'.u'ioi i, kdne-sai-kuialn'-tKS-a, e. f.,
coajgaua > >. L. 31.
Coasegoir, kj i *<!''-;/'i- : :r', to obtain, to
i diicjjj.l. L. 4:i.
-/w, s. m., counsel, ad-
vicj. L. 53.
C.)a-ij:itir, /. ', to consent, to
L. :!>.
.to consist. L. 52.
(' 11- >! i.-. /.; - --'>-'(:'. t > console. L. :i5.
i i -i.i. k'>.-i t-t i i'-tftS-a, s. t'., cone
i !33. I>. 4'i.
i. Itflns-trook-tKS-dne', construc-
t.o.i. L. 51.
. s. ni. and adj.,
rji If in ).i.:, r . L. 3S.
, kj.ii-tjr', to count, to relate, to tell.
L. ;,.
. to contain, to re-
1.. 4:i.
O, 8. m., contents.
L. (I.
vi-to 1 ', to content, to
mi'xj gill. L. 35.
ii'.lj., coatent, cou-
L gl.il. satisfle 1. L. 03.
C>ii . proa., with tlioe. L. 2T>.
i.nr, kj.M-tS-uxt-ar' , to continue. L.
,t.
Ojntra, k~>'ii'-f/;i, prep., aj^ainst. L. 41.
Cjntr.iJjcir, kij/i^-' . , to contra-
L. 41.
Co irr.irio, / " ,. adj., contrary.
Al contrarto, on the contrary. L. 53.
Co r.vncer, ko/ie-val/i-fhair'. "to convince.
L. IS.
>'-neer', to suit, to be con-
venient, to agree. L. 30.
(')-i.- v--! 'io-i. k~<i---r't;r-sah-thZ-oiu', s. f.,
c-)nver~:ition. L. 2t.
Co:i-.\>rsai', kj:ie-i:air-sar', to converse. L.
Convcrtir, kune-vair-feer', to convert. L. -15.
Convicto, kfJ/tt-fKk'-to, irr. past part. (,of
CONVKXCEU.I, convicted. L. 5-J.
Convite, to. :i., invitation, feast
or banquet to which any one ia invited.
L. 50.
Copulative, kd-2JOO-lah-tt'-i:o, adj., copula-
tive. L. 5'J.
t'oqiieca, ku-kai'-ta, e. f., coquette. L
Corazon, kd-ta/i-t/KJ/ic', s. m., heart. L. M.
Corbata, kOn-bah'-ta, cravat. L. 10.
Corona, ku-rd'-na, s. f., crown. L. 50.
Correcto, kvr-ruik'-to, adj., correct. L. 29.
Corredor, kOr-rai-UO/'K', s. m., corridor,
broker. L. i!l.
Corregir, kur-rui-hci:r', to correct. Cbrre-
. to mend. L. 59.
Correo, kur-rai'-o, s. m., courier, post. Ca-
sa de corrn^, post-othce. L. -J'j.
Correr, k<Jr-ruir\ to run. C'wve/w, to be
ashamed or confused, to blush. L. 51.
Corretear, kur-rai-tai-ar' ', to run about. L.
53.
Correveidilc, kOr-rai-rai-Z-de'-lai, s.ru., tale-
' bearer, tattler. L. 50.
Corriente, kur-re-uin'-tui, adj., current ;
s. in., al corriente de, aware of; s. f., cur-
rent, stream. L. 5U.
Corrieutemente, kOr-re-ain-tai-main'-(ai,
adv., currently, fluently. L. -!',i.
Corro, kor'-ro, s. m., circle of people col-
lected together for talking. L. 4-1.
Cortantc, kon-tun'-lai. adj., cutting, sharp.
edged. L. B8.
;iiumas, kore-tah-ploo'-mase, penknife.
L. U.
Cortar, kur(-t<.ir' , to cut. L. .>3.
C'orto, ku/\.'-'<>, acij , short. J.. vl.
Cosa, /.</-*, s. f., tiling. -
about six o'clock. L. 11.
. to sew. L. 21.
.
mopoiitu. L. 51.
f., cost, coast. A
mia, at my expense. A cotfu de^at, the
li B of. L. 00.
-do, B. m.. side. L. ci.
i.. 01.
abre, ktjis-tooni'-brai, s. f., ci:
habit. L. 51. ^^
Creucion, krai-ah-U&-5ne'; s. ITf creation.
L. 41.
C'rcar. ki'tii-ar'. to create. L. 41.
C'redito, kt<;i'-t!t:-t<>, s. m.. civdit, credence.
L. 57.
Creencia, l-rai-aiii'-the-a, s. f., credence, be-
lief. L. 4'.).
Creer. krai-air', to believe, to think. L. -,'7.
Creycnte, ^, .: part, (of
CBBKB! s. m. and f., believing, believer.
' L. 33.
Criado, kie-ah'-clo, P. m.. servant. L. 1'i.
Criado. past part, of Ci:i.\n. L. 51.
Criar, kre-ar', to breed, to bring up. L. 51.
Criatura. kri-ah-totf-ra, s. f., creatur;-. in-
fant. L. CO.
Orimen. m.. crime.
Critical-.
Critico. in., critic.
CronoloL'ista, kri,-, r.o'o-
I.. ::ii.
Crneldad, kroo-att-dath' '. s. f., cruelty. L.
30.
448
V O (.' A li IT I, A i: Y .
Ciiaderno. a . B. m.. copy-book. ,
L. 4.
dial, cu-ti!, pron., which. L. 10.
. 1'., quality. L. 36.
acia, CIL\U-I.L-I.U-I\I, piou. uud adj.,
\er, some oue. L. ;ji.
. adv., how, a.i (used only be-
fore adjectives or other adverbs). L. II.
diaiiuo. i'ii':i/i'-iJo, adv., when. L. 9.
Cuun: . adj., how much? bow
many'' ' -. at once, immedi-
ately. For cuantu, inasmuch as. L. 11.
Cuarto, ctear'-lo, ord. adj. and s. in., fourth,
room, chamber. L. 40.
. num. adj., fonr. L. 15.
. tub. Cuba (.island
L. Cl.
Cubrir, ttto-fr&r', to cover. L. 59.
>ra, koD-chah'-ra, s. L, spoon. L. CO.
Cuchillo, koo-ched '-yo, s. m., knife. .1
:'-yo, s. m., neck, collar. L. CO.
Caen; ccouut. bill. L. 40.
Cueuto, c;'-a,'n'-to, s. m., story, talc. L. 44.
C'uerpo, ctcair'-po, e. m., body. L. 64.
Cuervo. L. 45.
Cue-' hill. A cuestas, on
one's back or shoulders. L. 63.
7 .-unt' s. f., question. L.
Caidado, ci:-t-dah'-do, e. m., care. Estar
de cui ' , : to be dangerously ill.-
con cuidado, to be very anxious. I.
Cuid;. . .to care, to take care. L.
14.
Culpa, Rod'-ixt. P. f., fault, blame. L. CO.
Culpar, kool-jjar', to biaiuc. L. GO.
Cuhivar, A'^./'-.c -<,;/'. to cultivate. L. GO.
ii'-yos. s.m., birth-
day. :
limicnto, koom-pfS-mS-am-to, s. m.,
.plimcut. ]..
iccorr.jilish, to fiil-
lil.- : or oi ro. to ;.ct lor or iu
name of another. L. 57.
;o, a. kaoii-'j B. m. and f.,
brotbor-m-Jaw, sister-in-Ia\v. L. 6-1.
so, adj., curious, worthy
of note. L. 51.
:.!., course. L. ('!.
L. 53.
1:1. and f., skin. "L. 01.
'ii., of whom, of \
v.-iio-e, vviiieh. L. 17.
D.
'. int.. have at it ! L. C-l.
draughts, or chec".
. !'., dance, i .
Dafiar, dan-i/ar', to damage, to hurt, to
harm. L. 47.
D.ino, dan'-yo, s. m., damajc, hurt, harm.
L. 4'2.
Dar, to give. Dare .y tomarcs. dispute?, ifs
and ands. l>ui . eail.
De, (I ni, prep., of. from. Df i"
]>(; intento, 011 purpose. L. -1.
Deber, m.. duty. 1
Deber, oclio,
it must bo eight o'clock.
L. 59.
Ueeidir, .to uecicle.
i>eciu! ', ord. atlj., ;. ; ;J .-. 1,1.,
tenth. L. 15.
Decir, "
Declarar, <lai-d>.ih--
Dedal, dai-dal', e. m., thimble. L. x:4.
Dedo, dai'-do, s. m., finger. 1..
Defective, dai-j'aik-te'-i<j, adj., defective.
L. 63.
Del'ecto, dai-faik'-to, s. m., defect, failing.
L. 55.
Defender, d' L. C7.
Dcliniciou, < -. f., defini-
tion.
Dcfinir. . to define, "i
Deiar, dai-ltar', to leave, to let, to allow.
L. 44.
Delante, dai-lan'-iai, -prep.Ddartte de, be-
fore, in the presence of. L. i:i.
Dclei; ^delight. L. 47.
Delicado, dai-le-kali' -do, adj., delicate. L.
Dc-licioso, dai-K-the-u'-fo, adj., delicious.
L. 35.
Dclincuente, dai-' '. s. in., de-
liiiquciU, transgrc
Delinquir, (,'
:J4.
Deiito, dai-fe'-to, s. m., crime, traasgrcs-
s;ou. L. 51.
. ;:dv., over and above, too
much; adj. (generally used with 1
others, otlu
-iado, ii.ui-i o, adj. and
adv., too much, too. L. ~i5.
Dentro, dain'-tro, prep., in, within, inside
. a followed by dt . L. 81.
Derccho, dai-nu'-clto, :
ht. L. 50.
Desafiar, dai-scUi-fZ-ar' ', to challenge. L.
65.
.'.'o, dai-sdi-fl'-o, s.ni., challenge, duel.
L. 00.
Desauimar, dai-sah-nc-jnar' ', to
to discourage. L. :iS.
Bescausadamento.
tai, adv., easily, at onc'r
quiet, refreshed. L. :>i.
.r.sar, dais-kan-tar' , tore
. '-;(-, s. in.. .
' -;o, E. EI., barcfact
L. 04.
Descender, dais-thaia-dair', to desccr.
S7.
Descompcr-
range, to ( . to put out of (
L. 5J.
Descompuesto, (
disarranged, discomposed, <
disorderfy. L. 53.
Descoufiar, dais-teiic-fZ-ar', to
."ist. L. 43.
Desgracia, dais-grali'-tlLe-a, s. f., i .
tune, ill-luck. L. 4S.
Deshacer, <
stroy, to take or put asm
. \vil-
denu
L. 55.
V O C A 1) U L A It Y .
449
Dcsocupar, dai-su-koo-par' , to quit, to
evacuate, to empty. L. 50.
Dcspucio, dais-pan,' -th-o, adv., slowly. L. 0.
Despedlr, dais^pai-deer', to dismiss, to scud
or put. away, to discharge. L. 5'J.
Despurtar, daif-patr-tar, to awake, to
awaken, to arouse, to rouse. L. Si.
Despierto, daix-]/e-atr'-(o, adj., awake,
brisk, sprightly, lively. L. 52.
Desproporcionadisimamente, dais-pro-p&re-
t/i'&-<JM-a/i-iK'->c-Ma/i-main-tai, adv., out
of all proportion. L. 50.
Dcspues, duia-pu-aiss', prep, a^d adv., after,
afterward. L. l(i.
Determinante, dai-tair-mZ-nan' -tai, adj., de-
termining. Verbo determiriante, deter-
mining verb. L. 53.
Determiuar, dai-tair-mZ-nar' , to determine.
L. 53.
Detras, dai-trass'. prep, and adv., behind.
L. 33.
Dcudor, dai-oo-dijrc' ', e. m., debtor. L. 43.
Devolver, dai-Kdlti-vuii-', to return, to give
back. L. 43.
Dia, d2'-a, B. m., day. DC dia, by day, in
the daytime. Dar los diu$, to say good
morning (to any one). L. 9.
Diablo, de-ak'-bto, s. ni., devil. X. 05.
Dialecto, de-ah-laik'-to, B. m., dialect. L.
55.
Diiilogo, dZ-an'-lo-go, s.m., dialogue. L. 59.
Diantre, dS-an'-trai, s. m., deuce. L. 40.
Dibuio, <i<i-boo' -ho, s. m., drawing, design.
L. 51.
Diccionario, dc(k-thl-u-nah'-re-o, s. m., dic-
tionary. L. 49.
Dicha, 08' -aha, H. f., happiness, good luck,
good fortune. L. 01.
' ', s. m., Haying. L. 5-1.
Dicicnibro, dZ-tlie-aim'-brdi, s. m., Decem-
ber. L. ;>4.
Dientc, d3-ai/i'-tai, s.m., tooth. Ilablar cn-
tre dknl<:*i to mumble, to mutter. L. (i:3.
. num. adj., ten. L. 14.
Difcrcucia, dS-fat-rtttn'-tne-a, s. f., difier-
cncc. L. 43.
Difcrcnciar, dZ-fai-rain-tht-ar', to difl'er.
Dificil, de-fe'-thcd, adj., difficult. L. 21.
Diflcultad, de-j'c-kool-tath' ', B. f., dilliculty.
L. 38.
Digno, dcey'-no, adj., worthy, deserving.-
L. 53.
Diluviar, dZ-loo-rZ-ar' ', to rain like a deluge,
to pour. L. :JO.
Dimes, de'-mul**. Andar en dimtx y dire-
tes, to use its and amis, to quibble. L. 47.
Diminutive). >'-to, s.m., diminu-
tive. L. 44.
Dinero, de-nai'^ro, B. m., money. L. 13.
. 111., <Jo<l. L. 31.
Diptongo, dcfii-tone'-f/o, B. in., diphthong.
L. 57.
Direccion, de-raik-the-dne' , s. f., direction,
address. L. it.
JMrecto, dl-mik'-tcr, adj., direct. L. 51.
Director. dS-raOb-tof', director. L. 50.
', to direct. Dirirjirse, to
apply. L. <;:5.
Discipulo, dees-tfiS'-pooJo, B. m., pupil, dis-
ciple. L. 18.
Dist i -i'-to, adj., discreet, cir-
caiiijpoct. L. SO.
Disculpa, deess-kool'-ixi, B. f., apology, ex-
cuse. L. 00.
Diseurso, deess-koor'-so, s. m., discourse,
speech, course. L. K.
Disgustar, di<-it<-r/Wii-tui'', to disgust, to
displease. L. 50.
Disgusto, iUx-<j<x)x'-to, s. m., disgust, dis-
pleasure, unpleasantness. L. 5U.
Disponcr, decan-iio-itair' , to dispose, to lay
put, to arrange, to prepare. L. 48.
Disposicion, qeess-po-sS-t&S-dne', s. f., dis-
position, arrangement, distribution. L.
m.
Distancia, deess-tan'-the-a, e. f., distance.
L. 51.
Distantc, deess-tan' -ta>, adj., distant. L. 88.
Distar, deess-tar', to be distant, far from.
L. 53.
Distinguir, deess-teen-ghecr' ', to distinguish.
L. 43.
Divertir, de-vair-teer' ', to divert, to amuse.
L. 39.
Dividir, dS-vV-deer' ', to divide. L. 61.
Divisar, de-vS-sar', to descry, to perceive,
to catch a glimpse of. L. 42.
Doble, do'-blai, adj., double. L. 40.
Doblc, s. m., double. L. 40.
Doce, do'-thai, num. adj. and B. m., twelve,
twelfth. L. 14.
Dcceua, dv-(liai'-na, s. f., dozen. L. 40.
Doler, do-lair'. Doitrld i\ lino la cabczn,
los dientes, to have a headache, teeth-
ache. L. 30.
Dolor, do-lore', s. m., pain. L. 50.
Domingo, du-Hniit'-ijo, s. m., Sunday. L. 0.
Donde, done'-dai, adv., where. L. if.
Dona, done'-ya, s. f., lady, madam, Mrs.
L. 2.
Dormir, dor+-meer', to sleep. L. 41.
Dos, ducc, num. adj. and s. m., two, scccnd.
L. 14.
Drama, drah'-ma, s. m., drama. L. 62.
Dramatico, drah-mah' -te-ko, adj., dramatic.
L. 52.
Duda, doo'-da, s. f., doubt. L. 43.
Dudar, doo-dar', to doubt. L. 28.
Durable, doo-rah'-Uai, adj.. durable. L. C8.
Durante, doo-ran' -tui. pres. part., during.
L. 59.
Durar, doo-rar', to last, to continue. L. CO.
Dnro, doo'-ro. adj. and s. m., hard ; dollar.
L. CO.
E. ,
Ea! ai'-a, int., say ! hollo ! L. -T-.
Echar, ai-char', to throw, to put, to cast.
Echar de ver, to notice, to observe.
Echar a correr, to run away. Lchar a
perder, to spoil. L. 53.
Economico, ai-ko-no'-int-'ko, adj., ecoucmi-
cal. L. 35.
Edad, F. f., asre. L. 53.
Edicion, ai-<(e-t]u-uiie' , e. f.. edition. L. CO.
Ediflcar, ai-de-fc-kar' , to edify. L. 48.
Efecto. ai-faiti' -tn, s. m., cfitct. L. 47.
Ejecutar, ai-7iai-T;oo-tar', to execute, to put
into execution, to put into practice. L.
00,
Ejcmplo, ai-haim'-plo, s. m., example. L.
Ejercer, ni-lnir-lhair', to exercise, to prac-
tise. L. GO.
450
VOCABULARY.
Ejercicio, ai-hair-the'-thZ-o, s. m., exercise.
L. 8.
El, la, lo, los, las, dcf. art., the. L. 1.
El, ella, ail, ail'-ya, pers. prou., he, she, it.
L. 1.
Eleccion, ai-laik- (he-one', e. f.. election,
choice. L. -Ji.
uicia, ui-lM-rjan'-the-a, s. f., elegance.
L7 52.
aite, ai-lai-yan'-tai, adj., elegant. L. 05.
Ele"'ir ai-lai-lieer' ', to elect, to ciioosc. L.
39.
Elemento, ai-lai-maln'-fo, s. m., element,
constituent part. L. (JO.
Elena. 9. f., Helena, Ellen. L. 1!).
Eliptico, ai-keu'-K-ko, adj., elliptic, ellipti-
cal. L. CO.
Embarcadero, aim-bar-kah-dai'-ro, 6. m.,
lauding, ferry. L. 53.
Embargo, aim-bar'- y-t, s. m.. embargo. Sin
embargo, notwithstanding, however. L.
48.
Empenar, aim-pain-yar', to engage, to
pledge, to bind. EmiKnarse, to bind
one's self, to persist, to desire eagerly.
L. 45.
Empero, aim-pai'-ro, conj., yet, however,
but. L. (JO.
Emp: '-nr\ to employ. L. 44.
Euipleo, aim-plai'-o. s. m., employ, em-
ployment, oiBce. L. at.
. prop., in, at. on. L. 8.
Euamorar, ai-na/i-md-rar 1 , to conrt, to
make love lo.fa/aworarge de, to be
loured of, to fall in love with. L. 39.
Enc:r . m., charge, com-
-ion. command. L. 57.
Encarga . a ; o charge, to corn-
mi -sion, to order. L. 58.
Enccu . . t-:luir'. to li 'lit, to kin-
dle. L. 37.
Encerrar, ain-lhair-rar' , to shut up, to con-
tain, to comprehend. L. <i5.
Encima, ain-the'-ma, prep, and adv. above
over. L. :;.;.
Encontrar, ain-Jwne-trar' to meet to find
L. 35.
Enemigo, ai-nai-m&'-go, s. m., enemy. L. 5 1.
Euemistar. ai-nai-meess-tar', to set at en-
mity. Eiiemistar a alguno con otro, to
put any one at enmity with, or against
another. L. 60.
Energia, ai-nair-lie'-a, s. f.. energy. L 61
.Enfennar, ain-f air-mar', to become or cet
sick. L. 88.
Enfermo, ain-fair'-mo, adj., sick. ill. L. 48
Enfrente, ain-frain'-taL adv., opposite, in
front. L. 51.
Enganar, ain-gan-yar' ', to deceive, to take
in. L. 32.
Euhebrar, ain-ai-brar', to thread, to link.
L. 65.
Enhorabnena, ai-no-rah-bicai'-na s f
congratulation, felicitation. L. ;).
Enrique, ain-n'-kai. s. m.. Henry i, 1 >
J-:n~efiar, ain-sain-yar', to show, 'to teach.
Eusuciar, ain-soo-tfi?-ar', to dirty, to soil
to daub. L. 60.
Entendedor. s m he
who undemands.-A buen
Entender, ain-laln-dair', to understand.
L. 37.
Eiitunces, ai/t-K/tc'-tftai-it, adv., then. L. 23.
Eutrambos, uiii-tram'-OOcc, prou. pi., botu.
L. 00.
Eutrar, ain-trar 1 , to enter, to begin, to
commence, to come or go in, to~get in.
L. as.
Eutre, ain'-trui, prep., between, iu the
course of. L. lit.
Eutretuiito, ain-i/ui-tan'-to, adv., in the
mean time. JL. 00.
EntreteuL-r, ajjt-tn.it tui-nair', to entertain,
to amuse, 10 uivert. knli-
spend one's time, to be engaged in. L. 4s.
Eimisiasiuo, aiti-too-ei-a&i -IH.U, s. in., t-u-
thusiasm. L. 54.
Enviar, ain-re-ar', to send. L. 14.
Envidiar, ai/i-i'e-ite-ar'. to envy. L. 40.
Eqiiivocacion, ai-KS-vo-kaJi-tliA-dne' , s. f.,
mistake, misconception. L. 50.
Equivocal-, ai-kt-i-u-kur', to mistake. Equi-
rocarse, to be mistaken. L. 47.
Ertruir, air-ghetr', to hold erect (as the
head, &c.). L. I-. 1 .
Errar. air-rar\ to err, to miss. L. 41.
Erudicion, ai-roo-de the-ont', s. f. erudi-
tion. L. 5i.
Escaldar, aiss-kal-dar' , to scald. L. C5.
Escena, ai^s-thai'-na. - L. I'M.
Esceptico, aiss-thaip'-K-ko, adj., skeptical.
L. 45.
Escoba, aiss-kv'-l-a, s. f., broom. L. 40.
Escobajo. >ifM-k~/-fi/ifi'-/to, s. m. (augmenta-
tive of ESCOBA), stump of a broom. L.
49.
Escoger, ai&o-ko-hair'. to choose. L. 65.
Escribano, aiss-krl-balt'-no, 6. m., notary.
L. 19.
Bscribiente, ai^-krZ-^-ain'-tai, s. m.,
amanuensis, clerk, writer (in an ofuce).
L. 33.
Eecribir, '. to write. L. 8.
Escritor, af- -. in., writer, au-
thor. L. 19.
Escritnfa, aiss-kre-too'-ra, s. f., writing,
document, conveyance. L. 19.
Escuchar, ates-koo-char 1 ', to hearken, to lis-
ten. L. 60.
Escuela, ai.v-krrai'-la. s. f.. school. L. 21.
Escultor, ai*\<-koo!-Kre', s. rn., sculptor. L.
31.
Esctiltnra, aiss-kool-too'-ra, s. f., sculpture.
L. 31.
Esforzar. r;Av : ?~/r-ffr', to strengthen, to
exert. Ey'orzarst, to make effort, to en-
deavor. L. 60.
Esfuerao, aixs-ficair'-thn. s. m., efTort. cn-
EapadacbJn, aiss-pah-dah-ehccn' , s. m.,
bully. L. 63.
E> ,P al . da i aUs-pal'-da, s. f. , shoulder, (pi.)
DacK.
Espafia. aiss-pan'-ya. e. f., Spain. L 0.
tfspanol, aiss-pan-yok', s. and adj.. Spanish
language: Spanish. A la ,
the Spanish fashion. L 2
Especie, akt-pai'-the-ai, s. f., species, kind,
sort. L. 40.
Espccicro, aiss-pai-thV-ai'-ro, s. m., grocer.
L. C5.
V O C A B U L A It Y .
451
EtiK'jo, ates-pat'-ho, s. in., looking-glass.
Ju. UJ.
'-/an'-t/ta, s. f., hope. L.
-IMi-rar', to hope, to await, to
^>L: ^. u ~.
E.-imuu, <.u-f- t ,K -it-tw, s. in., spirit. L. 45.
-. .i> -C-U, s. 1., spouse, uile. Jj. ;t.
-b.-i/o-o, iuoo-//y -^y, s. in., epousu, liusbauU.
i-l. 'J'J.
Esqueia, aiss-kai'-lOL, s. f., note. L. 50.
i-sqaiiia, a^-At -//, s. 1., corner. L. 51.
.h^uuccer, uti>s-t<Mi-utai-i/Mir', UJ establish.
L. -Li.
Esuicion, aiss-tah-(ht-vite', s. f., station,
til. L. (j\J.
to, s. ii!., state, State.
.LOJ juci.au.tj3 L'uiaos, tlio Luitcd fctutes.
L. i'J.
E.-.a.\ aitx-tar' , to bu, to understand.
/ para saiir, to be about to set out.
j&Uu- por alguuo, to be tor, or in lavor of,
one.jJtlsta V. ? do you understand?
i -. in., east. L. 22.
E.-te, esta, esto, dem. protf., this, this one.
L. IS.
Ksii'io. (//^-/r'-to, s. m., style. L. 52.
Estimable, aissJe-ma/t'-blai, adj., estimable.
L. ::;.
E.-timar, aiss-R-mar, to esteem, to csti-
ite. L. -'.).
-to. (See ESTE.) L. 18.
:ak'-da, s. f., stab, thrust.
L. 5:;.
Estrauo. aiss-tran'-yo, adj., strange, foreign.
L. 48.
;:iirema. at*s-trah-tah-hai'-ma, s. f.,
straia-'i'in. ruse. L. 44.
har. cuss-trcA-char 1 ^ to tighten, to
make narrow, to squeeze, to press. L. 60.
Estrecho. al^-trai'-c/io, adj., narrow, tight,
close, intimate. Ettncho, s. m., strait.
L. (i;i.
:>o, (ivs-lre'-to, . m., stirrup. L. 38.
Esttidiaute, aiss-too-de-an'-tai, e. m., stu-
dent. L. as.
Estucliar, ai**-too-'t?-ar', to study. L. 3.
Estudio, aiss-too'-dt-o, a. m., study. L.
25
Etcrnidad, ai-tciir-nc-dath' ', s. f., eternity.
L. :}C,.
Etcrno. ai-tair' -iw, adi.. eternal. L. 41.
Evidoncia, ai-vc-dain'-t/tc-a, s. f., evidence.
L. 59.
Evitar, ni-rT-fnr'. to avoid, to help (do
otherwise than has been done"). L.^47.
Exnzeracion, aiJc-fafi-hai-ra'i-tfiZ-one', s. f.,
exasperation. L. 48.
Exa^erar, aik-sah-hai-rar' , to exaggerate.
L. m. .
Examcn, aik-sak'-main, s. m., examination.
L 38.
Examinar, aik-sah-nie-nar' , to examine. !.
Exeerler. atl-s-fTiai-dair'. to exceed, to over-
Pton. to surpass. L. 53.
Excelente, n>ks-thai-lain'-tai, adj., excel-
lent. L. 53.
Excepcion, aiks-thaip-th3-dne\ s. f., excep-
tion. L. 45. T
Exceptuar, aiks-thaip-too-ar' ', to except. L.
CO.
Exclamacion, aiks-Uah-mah-thl-dne' ', s. f.,
exeiauuuioii. L. ^4.
Exciumur, (.unt-lMii-tiiur', to exclaim. L.
W.
Excusa, uiLs-koo'-na^ s. f., excuse, apology.
1^. ou.
Excutar, aiks-koo-sar' ', to excuse, to apolo-
gize. L. ^i.
EsJiibicion, atk-sl-te-t/iZ-Gne 1 , s. f., exhibi-
tion. L. 4S.
Exi.iiir. <iik-^-beer\ to exhibit. L. GO.
Exigir, uik.-fZ-ltter\ to exact, to require, to
ileiiiaiid. L. as.
v-tain'-(ht-a, s. f., exist-
ence, vpl.) stock. L. 02.
Existir, <.uk-t-ti^-tttr', to exist. L. 40.
Exito, (Uk'-tit-to, s. m., result, issue. Con
buen t^Yo, suceesst'ully. L. 40.
Experieucia, (likt-pai-ri-aiii'-t/ii-a, s. f.^ ex-
perience. L. 41.
Explication, aiks-j)K-kah-the-one' ', s. f., ex-
planation. L. 4s.
Explicar, aikg-ple-kar' , to explain. L. -15.
Exponer, aiks-p&malr'. to expose, to ex-
pound, to explain. L. 51.
Expresar, aik*-j>rui-.<ur', to express. L. 52.
Expresion, aiks-prai-sZ-vnt' , s. f., expres-
sion. L. 50.
Expresivo, aiks-prai-&'-ro, adj., expressive.
L. 05.
Exterior, atts-tai-rS-Sre', exterior. L. 48.
Extra, aiks'-tra, adv., extra. L. GO.
Extrangero, aiks-lran-hai'-ro, s. m., foreign-
er. L. GO.
Extraiiar, aiks-tran-yar', to wonder at, to
liud (a thiiiLr) strange. L. GO.
Extrafio, aik*-traii'-yo, adj., strange. L. 48.
Extraordinario, aikx-tmli-i'jiv-dl-iMh'-re-v,
adj., extraordinary. L. 46.
Extreniado, aiks-trai-mah'-do, adj., ex-
treme. L. 55.
F.
Fabricar,/a^-Jr?-A'ar', to make, to manu-
facture, to build. L. 48.
Faccion,/a-Me-5e', s. f., feature; faction.
L. 35.
Facil./ffA'-Wcrf, adj., easy. L. 21.
Facilidad fafi-tht-K-daih', s. f., facility,
ease. L. 30.
Facilitar, fali-ilv-K-tur' , to facilitate, to
make easy, to procure. L. 49.
Facilmente, fak'-tlitel-main-tai, adv., easi-
ly. L. 49.
Factura./fflt-foo'-ra, 9. f., invoice. L. 68.
Facultad, fah-kool-tath' , s. f., faculty, power
of doing any thing, liberty to do any
thing. L. 63.
Falso, fal'-to, adj., false. L. 4a.
Falta, "fal'-ta, s. f., fault, want L. 27.
Faltar, fal-tar', to want, to lack, to be lack-
Fa'nia'. fah'-ma, s. f., fame, reputation, re-
pute. L. 65. .
Familia./a/(-w!t'-re-cr. s. f.. family. L. 2o.
Familiar. faf/-Mt-K-ar'. adj., familiar. L. 40.
Familiaridad..///-7e-/c-aA-rt-(/aWi', s. t, la-
miliarity. L. 05.
Famoso,//(-7/w'-w. adj., famous. L. 4j.
Faiiatico,/a/t-a/i'--to, adj., fanatical. L.
35.
VOCABULARY.
Fa:=. fit?*. Par fas 6 por nefas, right or
wrouu' ; justly or unjustly. L. 03.
Faatidio,/a m., trouble, annoy-
ance, li. 47.
Favo. . s. m., favor, mercy, help.
A/atwde, in behalf of. 1
Favor'ecer, Juk-cO-rai-tiiair', to favor. L.
56.
Favorite. fah-vo-ri'-to, adj., favorite. L. 54.
s. f., faith. L. 45.
Febrero, fai-fji-ui'-ro, s. in., February. L. 24.
Fee!; . I'., date. L. ).
Fclicidud, fai-l'-t/iZ-dal/i', s. f., happiness,
felicity. L. 43.
Felicitar, fai-K-tli t-tar', to felicitate, to con-
gratulate. L. 01.
Fi-liz. fai-lctth\ adj., happy, fortunate,
lucky. L. 21.
~Fc\\zmaulc,f(!i-l<:(th-?nain'-ta/. adv., happi-
ly, fortunately, luckily. L. 49.
Femenlno, fai-mai-ne'-no. adj., feminine.
L. 47.
Feo,/z'-o, adj., ugly, unbecoming. L. 7.
Ferox. :j-, ferocious, tierce, rav-
enous. L. 54.
Ferrocarril. -I' s. m., railroad.
L. GO.
Fiado./-oA'-<fo, adj., confident, trusting.
i'o. ou credit, on trust. L. 01.
to tru?t. to bail. L. 01.
hful. L. L'l.
. stival. Dia
Figura,/e-^6o'-7'ff, s. f.. figure, form, shape.
. to make, to cut a figure.
L. 03.
Figurado, fe-goo-rah'-tlo, adj., figurative.
'-tro, s. m., philoso-
pha -
Filusofo, fl-lo'-so-fo, 8. m., philosopher. L.
Fin, fc*n. s. m., end, object, point.
de.' in order to. L. 45.
Finu;. i. and adj., end, termina-
.'.nal. L. 01.
Finalmentc, fZ-nal-main' -tai, adv., finally.
L. 49.
Fino,/7'-;,o. adj., fine. L. 56.
'.ure. L. 50.
-.1, e. f., physiogno-
my. L. 45.
Flaqueza, Jtaft-kai'-tha, s. f., leanness,
weakness, foible, frailty. L. 04.
Fondo. jvi .' bottom, ground
(of colored articles); pi., fund*,
money. L. CO.
Formal. /-.//'-//</', adj., formal, reliable,
respectable. L. 45.
Formalidad. fdre-mahJt-datk' , s. f.. formali-
ty, reliability, respectability. L. 45.
', to form, to shape. L. 43.
Fortuna. j~ . f., fortune, luck.
'-fa. s. f., frigate. L. GO.
-. f., friar. "L. 41.
rn. and adj., French
(language), French. I.
Francia.//: P.. Francs. L. 0.
Francisco: frun-thtesn'-Jw, B. m., Francis.
L. 41.
Franco, frcin'-I;n. adj.. frank, free, open-
hearted, intimate. L.
spring,
Franqueza. fran-kai'-tfia, s. f., frankness,
open-heartedDees. intimacy. L. 4ti.
Frae,/raA'-, s, f.. phrase, sentence. L.
51.
Fray. frah'-T, s. m.. friar. L. 41.
Frecueme. Jrai-kwain'-tai. adj., frequent.
L. 29.
rc\r,frai-((r', to fry. I
Frente, forehead, front.
Eofrente, opposite. L. 45.
Fre=cf. . adj.. fresh, cool. Piutu-
ra al j resect, fresco painting. L. 40.
Fresco, s. m.. cool breeze, cool, refreshing
air, fresco (painting). 1
Frio,./>-Z'-ci. adj. and s. m., cold.
Friolera,/r?-Waf'-m. s. f., trirte. L. ."T.
Fruta./;<x/-/f/. s. f.. fruit. L. 31.
Fruto, j'rco'-to, s. m., fruit (produce). L.
40.
Fuego./-a"-<70. s. m- fire. L. 0-!.
Fuente, fu'ciit/'-tai, e. f., fountain,
source. L. 52.
Fuera,/r-ra, adv., out.Fuera dc que,
besides. L. 81.
Fuera ! inter., out ! be gone ! away ! L. 31.
Fuerza, fwair'-tha. s. f.. force, strength.
.a de, by dint of. L. 58.
Fti'_ r a./M/-!7</. s. "f.. flight, escape. L. 57.
Fulano, - /b(WaA / -no. B. m.. such a one. L. 53.
Fumar./oo-WMir', to smoke. L.
V\aXL,joo-sed\ s. m.. gun. L. 40.
Fusilar,/>-^t-.'a/-', to^thoot (military). L.
48.
"FuiuTo.foo-too'-ro, s. m.. future (tent'
43.
Future, adj., future. L. 43.
G.
Galan, gah-lan', s. m. and adj., gallant, ac-
tor; gallant. L.
Galante, gah-lan'-tai, adj., gallant, courtly.
lj. Ov>.
Galicismo, gah-K-thcess'-nio, 8. m., ra!!i-
cism. L. 01.
L. 59.
Ganapicrde. gah-naJi-pe-air'-dai, s. m.,
game of draught?, or checkers, at which
the loser wins. L. 60.
Gauar, gah-nar', to gain, to win. L.
Ganso, yaii i o?e. Hablar por
booa de garn*o, to echo what has been
said by others. L. 03.
Garrotazo, gar-ro-tah'-Uio, 8. m., blow with
a cudircl. L. 44.
Garrotcl r/ar-ro'-tai. e. m., cudgel. L. 44.
Gr.star. gags-tar', to waste, to use, to -
to expend. L. 50.
Gatillo. gali-tecl '-yo, s. m. (dim.), little cat,
trigger of a gun. L. 53.
Gato, gah'-to. s. m.. cat. L. 40.
Gemido. ha.
tion. moan, howling. L. 59.
Genera ' . s. m. and adj..
oral. L. 45.
Gt'nero, hai'-nai-ro, s. m., gc:;
kind. sort, cloth. L. 57.
Gentilicio, / "-.'. adj., peculiar to
a nation. :
VOCABULARY*.
453
Gentio, haln-K'-o, s. m., great crowd, mul-
titude. L. 40.
Gentualla, ftain-loo-al'-ya, s. f., rabble,
. of the people. L. 49.
Gerundio, hai-roon '-(K-o, s. in., gerund. L.
48.
Gigantesco, /tZ-ffan-talss'-ko, adj., gigantic.
L. 49.
Gineta, hZ-nai'-fa. Toner los cascos a la
gineta, to be hare-brained. L. 01.
Globo, giy-bo, s. in., globe, balloon. L. "7.
Gobcrnador, yd-bair-nah-dore' , s. m., gov-
ernor. L. G'.).
Gobernante, go-bair-nan'-tai, pros, part.,
governing. L. 33.
Gobernar, gfcbqir-nar', to govern. L. "I.
Gobierno, ao-K-air '-no. s. m., government.
L. 40.
Goce, go 1 -that. s. m., enjoyment. L. 54.
Golpe, yola'-pai, *. r.i.. blow, stroke. L. 61.
Gonzalez, yune-tli((k'-laith, s. m. (dim).,
Spanish proper name signifying son of
Gonzalo. L. 49.
Gorra, yurc'-ra, s. f., bonnet. Yivir de
gorra. to live at others' expense, to
sponge. L. (il.
Gozar, yo-thar', to enjoy. L. 25.
Gozo, rjtf-tho, s. m., joy, satisfaction, pleas-
ure. L. 51.
Grabado, grah-bah'-do, s. m., engraving,
cut (picture). L. 52.
Grabar, graft-bar', to engrave. L. 5-2.
Gracia, graft'-t/ie-a, s. f.,' grace, favor, grace-
fulness, pardon. L. 51.
Gracia<, s. in. pi., thank yon. L. 23.
Graclo. c/mh'-tlo, s. m., grade, degree. DC
< I I'll l<>, willingly. L. CO.
Gramatica, gra!i-mah' -te-ka, s. f., grammar.
L. 5.
Qramatical, gra?i-mak-ta-kal' ', adj., gram-
matical. L. 51.
Grande, gran'-da?, adj., great, large. L. 7.
Granizar, r)rah-nc-thar\ to hail. L. 30.
Grato, grali' -to, adj., grateful, pleasing,
agreeable. L. 56.
Grito, qrl'-to, s. m., cry, shout, scream. L.
59.
Gucrra, gair'-ra, s. f., war. L. 56.
Guiiiada, qheen-ijah'-da, s. f., wink. L. 54.
Gaipuzcoa, oK&foofh'-laea. s. f., Guipuzcoa
(province in Spain). L. 53.
Guslar, ;/on.-(ar', to like, to please, to
ta>ne. 'L. 31.
Gusto, gooss'-(o, s. m., taste, pleasure. Con
macho gusto, with great pleasure. L. 23.
H.
Ilabruia (La), lah-aft-bah'-na. s. f., Havana.
L. 12.
Ilabanero, ah-bah-nai'-ro, adj. and s. m.,
Ilavanesc. L. 49.
Ilaber, afi-bair', to have (used only as an
auxiliary verb in this ei';miflcation ; for
exceptions see Lesson Cfi); impersonal
verb, there to be. II-v/ do-; i/K'sia- c'i
t callc, there are two churches in this
str"ut. L. 1-2.
II:V)il, '//'--;. ;u ij. 5 a i3i ei 8 kilf u i expert,
clever. L. 21.
Habilidad, <ih->i--ir-,1tttl>'. s. f., ability, ckil-
ftuncsa, cxpertness, cleverness. L. 30. '
Ilabitante, ah-K-tan'-tai, s. m., inhabitant.
L. 40.
Ilablador, db-lah-dore' ', adj. and s. m., talka-
tive ; talker. L. 20.
Ilablar, ab-lar', to talk, to speak. Ilablar
a bulto, to talk at random. L. 1.
Ilaccr, ali-thair', to do, to m&ke.Hacer
muy bien, to do well or right, to be right.
Hacer de, to act as. L. 19.
Ilacia, di'-tlte-a, adv., toward, towards. L.
19.
Hallar, cd-yar', to find. L. .37.
llambre, am'-brai, e. f., hunger. Tcner
hambre, to be hungry. L. 2o.
Ilasta, ass'-ta, adv., until, till, as far as,
even. L. 19.
Ilazmereir, atft-mai-rai-eer', a.m., laughing-
stock. L. 50.
He! at, inter., ho! what? what do you
say ? L. 44.
Hecho, ai'-cho, s. m., action, fact. L. 52.
Helar, ai-lar', to freeze. L 30.
Helena, ai-lai'-na, s. f., Kelt
Hermanastro, air-mah-nass
step-brother, half-brother
Hermano, air-rnah'-no, e. m
n, Ellen. L. 19.
-tro. e. in., aug.,
L. 49.
, brother. L. 6.
L. 49.
L. IE
Uermoso, air-mij'-x>, adj., beautiful, hand-
some. L. 7.
Hermosura, alr-mS-soo'-ra, s. f., beauty,
handsomeness. L. 53.
Ilerrero, air-rai'-ro, s. m., blacksmith. L. 65.
Hielo, yai'-lo, s. m., ice, frost. L. MO.
llicrro, yair'-ro, s. m., iron. L. 01.
Higo, e'-yo, s. m., fig. L. 40.
Hijastro, t-hass'-tro, s. m., step-son.
Ilijo, e'-ho, s. m., son. L. G.
Hilar, e-lar', to spin. L. 05.
Hilo, Z'-lo, s. m., thread. L. 24.
Hinchar, cen-cfiar', to swell. L. 63.
Ilistoria, cem-tu'-rJ-a, s. f., history.
lloja, o'-ha. s. f., leaf (of a tree or a book).
L. 59.
Hola ! o'-la, inter., hallo ! L.. 4P>.
Holgazan. Me-gah-ihan', adj. and s. m., idle,
lazy, loitering ; idler, loiterer. L. 6.
Hombre, ome'^brai, s. m., man. Es mas
hombre quo su hermano, he is more of a
man than his brother. L. 6.
Honor, o-nore\ s. m.. honor. L. m.
Honroso, one-ro'-xo. adj., honorable. L. 52.
Hora, o'-ra. s. f., hour. L. 23.
Homo, ore' -no. s. m., oven. Coccr en homo,
to bake. L. 60.
Horrcndo, ore-rain' -do, adj., horrific (poet.).
L. 55.
Hortelano, ore-tai-lah'-no, s. m., gardener.
L. 05.
Hospital, dce-pe-tar, s. m., hospital. L. 47.
llotel, o-tail', s. m., hotel. L. 17.
Hueso, wai'-so, s. m., bone. Bocado sin
ft* w, sinecure. L. 01.
Humped, wains'-pai'l, s. m.. guest. hot.
Echar la cuenta sin la // >eespeda. to rcckoa
without the host. L. 63.
Huir, ireer, to floe, to make off. L. 34.
Humano, oo-mah'-no, adi., human. L. 4S.
Humor, oo-more' s. m., "humor, wit. L. 27.
I.
Idea, c-fjrii'-a. s. f.. ideal. L. 54.
Ideal, t-dai-al', adj., ideal. L. -IS.
45-i
V O C A B U L A K Y
Idioma, l-d6-d'-ma, s. in., idiom, language.
L. 55.
Idiota, e-dt-o'-ta, s. m., idiot. L. 48.
Idiot i- '>. s. in-, idiom,
form of expression peculiar to a language.
L. 49.
Iglesia, t-cjlai'-sl-a, s. f., church. L. 16.
Iguoraucia, eeg-nv-ran'-the-a, s. f., igno-
rance. L. 52.
Iguorautc, eeg-no-ran'-tai, adj., ignorant.
L. (51.
Ignorar, eey-nd-rar', to be ignorant of, not
to know. L. 01.
Iirual, c-gwal', adj., equal, alike, like. L. 43.
Igualdad, e-qwcd-dalh,' , s.L, equality. L. 55.
llusion, e-loo-se-one' , s. f., illusion. L. 48.
Imuiriuacion, S-iah-/iS-iia/i-t/iS-oiie', e. f.,
imagination. L. 58.
ImpeUir, ecm-pai-deer' ', to impede, to hinder.
L. 43.
Imperative, eem-pai-rah-K '-ro, adj. and s.
in., imperative, imperative mood. L. 43.
Imperfeccion, eem-pair-faik-t/tS-one', s. f.,
imperfection. L. 55.
Imperfecto, eem-pair-faik'-to, adj., imper-
fect, L. 43.
Impersonal, eem-pair-so-nal' , adj., imper-
sonal. L. 61.
Imponer, eem-pQ-nair 1 , to impose, to in-
form, to acquaint. L. 44.
Importante, eem-pdre-tari'-tai, adj., impor-
tant. L. S3.
Importar. eem-pore-tar' , to import, to be of
importance, to amount to. L. 31.
Imposible, eem-po-sl '-blal, adj., impossible.
L. 31.
Impreso, eem-prai'-so, past part, of IMPIU-
:.nrt. L. 01.
Imprimir, eem-pr2-meer' ', to print. L. Ct.
Improvisar. e f m-pro-re-sar', to improvise,
to extemporise. L. 53.
Improviso. ffm-pro-rl'-xo. De improvise,
unexpectedly, on a sudden. L. 32.
Imprudencia, fem-proo-dain'-tM-a, s. f., im-
prudence. L. 43.
Imprndente, eem-proo-dain'-tai, adj., im-
prudent. L. 20.
Impnesto, fem-pwalss'-to, past part, of IM-
roxER. L. 52.
In, ten. Latin prop, nscl in Spanish n^ a
prefix only, and proncrally with a ne"a-
tive signification.' L. 50.
Incendiar, '-'.to kindle. L.51.
Inclnir, to includo. L. 10
Inc'iniodamente,
adv., incommodiously, inconveniently,
nfortablv. L. 2f).
Incomodar, ffrt-l-'-nio-'lar', to incommode,
to put out. L. 47.
Iiifuv '-iti-rlo. arli.. incommofli-
on*. inconvenient, uncomfortable. L. 20.
Inrompleto ' li'-to. adj., incom-
pl;-tf. L. t^s.
Inoonvonionte, ( '//. P.
m.. difflcnltv. obstacle, obioction. L. fit.
Increiblc, een-krai-e' -blai. adj., incredible.
L..
Indeflnido, ffn-dat-fi-ne'-'Jo, adj., indefi-
nite. L. 01.
Inrlepondencia. een-dni-pain-dain'-tKi-a^ e.
f.. independence. L. a>.
Inrlicativo, een-dS-JfaA-tP-vo, adj., indica-
tive. L. 43.
Indice, een'-cR-thai, s. m., index. L. 61.
Indigno, eeii-deeg' -no, adj., unworthy, un-
deserving. L. 53.
Indigo, eat' '-de-go, s. m. L. 54. (See ASn..)
Indirecto, ttn-ae-mik' -to, adj., indirect.
L. 51.
Individuo, ecn-dS-rt'-doo-d, 8. m., individu-
al, member (of academies, universities,
&c.). L. 51.
Industrioio, tn-doos-tre-v'-so, adj., indus-
trious. L. So.
Incpto, ten-uip'-to, adj., inept, unfit. L. 51.
Inexplicable, een-Giks-pU-kali'-blai, adj., in-
explicable. L. 01.
Infanciu, ec/i-fait'-the-a, s. f., infancy. L. 54.
Inferior, een-fai-rl-ore' , adj., inferior. L. 21.
lufimo, etn'-fl-nw, adj., Lowest L. 21.
Inttuidiid, een-fe-ne-datfi' ', s. f., infinity. L.
40.
Infinitivo, een-fl-ne-tt.'-i-o, adj., infinitive.
L. 43.
Infinito, een-ft-ne'-to, adj., infinite. 1
Inmiir, een-jloo-ttr', to iullueuce. L. 43.
Infortunio, etn-fore-foo'-nH-o, s. m., misfor-
tune. L. 41.
Ingenio, een-/tai'-ne-o, s. m., genius. L. 61.
Ingenioso, ecn-hai-nl-0' -so, adj., ingenious.
L. 61.
Inglaterra, een-ylah-tair'-ra, B. f., England.
1.9.
Ingles, een-glaiss' s. m. and adj., English.
L. 2.
Inicial, t-n'-th'-a!'. adj., initial. L. 56.
Injusticia, een-hoosa-K'-iht-a, s. f., injustice.
L. 45.
Inmcdiato. c<:n-mai-'Te-ah'-to, adj., immedi
ate, near. next. L. 61.
Inmcmorial, e(n-mai-mo-re-<d' ', adj., imme-
morial. L. 55.
Inocente, e-no-lhain'-tai. adj., innocent.
L. 31.
Inquietar, een-KS-ai-tar 1 , to make uneasv.
L. 61.
Inqnieto. cen-fo-ai'-fo, adj., uneasy, restless.
L. 01.
Insecto, f en-sail-' -to. g. m.. insect. L. 01.
Inpirar, ff>n-p?-rrtr'. to inspire.
Install! m., instant. Al
instrintf. immediately. L. 42.
Tnstinto. eens-teen'-to, =. m.. instinct. L. 01.
In s truccion. eens-trook-thf-ftne', s. f., in-
struction, learning. L. 52.
Insfriiido. ffnw-frno-e'-rfo. adj., instructed,
learned, educated. L. 4fl.
Instmir, eens-troo-eer 1 , to instruct, to teach.
L. 47.
Instrumento. eenf-troo^nain'-to, ?. m., in-
strument. L. 61.
Intachable, een-tofi-chaJi'-blai, adi., unim-
peachable, irreproachable. L. c.2 .
Intencion, cen-tain-the-one' ', s. f. , intention.
L. 61.
Intentar. een-iain-tar' , to attempt. L. 61.
Inteiv-. '. -;. m.. Interest. L. .">(.
Int^rncante. etn-tai-rai-san'-taL adj., inter-
estincr. L. 47.
Interesar, Cfn-tae-rai-sar', to interest. L.
01.
Intcrin. een'-tai-rc-cn. adv.. in the interim.
L. 01.
Interior, ft-n-tai-rt-i/-*'. adj., interior. L.
48.
Interior, s. m., interior. I
VOCABULARY.
455
Intcrjeccion, etri-tair-haik-thl-om' ', s. f., in-
terjection. L. 4:5.
Interrogacion ~-gah-tJiZ-one', s. f.,
interrogation. L. 01.
Interrogante, Ben-tatr-rd-gan'-tai, s.m., note
of interrogation. (.Pros. part. ot'lNTER-
KOGAR.) L. 01.
Interrogar, een-tatr-rS-ffar', to interrogate,
to question. L. 01.
Interrimipir, een-tair-room-peer', to inter-
rupt. L. 04.
Intimidad, een-tH-mZ-dath', s. f., intimacy.
L. 5ti.
lutimo, een'-K-mo, adj., intimate. L. 50.
lutro'lucir, een-tro-doo-tAfer 1 , to introduce.
L. 10.
Inutil, een-oo'-ted, adj., useless. L. 50.
Invariable, foi-cuh-re-ah'-blui, adj., invari-
able. L. 50.
Inversion, ctn-ralr-se-onc', s. f., inversion.
L. 01.
Invertir, C(n-rair-t((-r\ to invert. L. 61.
Invicrno, een-vi-air'-no, a. m., winter. L.
M.
Invitar, fen-re-tar', to invite. L. 56.
; o go. L. 18.
Iris, I'-rasn, s. f., rainbow. L. 61.
Irlancla. iir-lan'-da, s. f., Ireland. L. 40.
Irregular, uf-rai-yoo-lar', adj., irregular.
L. 40.
Irrcgularidad, ccr-rai-goo-lah-rZ-dath', B. f.,
irregularity. L. 55.
Isabel, e-sah-bail', s. f., Isabella, Elizabeth.
L. 55.
-'-?(/. s. f.. island. L. 61.
Italia. (-(n!i '-le-a. s. f.. Italy. L. 40.
Italiano. e-(ah-K-ah'-no, B. m. and adj., Ital-
ian. L. 61.
Izqnierdo, eftfi-K-air'-rlo. adj., left-handed.
Mano izquierda, left hand. L. 50.
J.
Jabon, hah-bone\ s. m., soap. L. 5.
JarmK hall-mass', adv., never. L. 2o.
Jnque-, Mlt'-kai, check (at chess). Jaque y
mate, checkmate. L. 4-2.
Jnrdin. liar-dfe.ii'. s.m.. garden. L. IS.
Jnrdinero, har-d?-nai'-ro, s. m., gardener.
L. .",1.
,To~ ( '. hd-xai', P. m.. Joseph. L. 40.
Joven. /i<~'-ffii!>. adj. and s. m. and f.. young;
youn<r man. youhsr woman. L. 13.
Joan, irtian. s.'m., John. L. 17.
Jnana. ir1>al>'-na. s. f., Jane. L. 17.
JUOGTO, u-hai'-yo, s. m., game, play, set. L.
SI.
Jiu'ves. ir7>(j>'-rni*x. s.m.. Tlmv-day. L. 9.
nitfi. P. m.. judge. L. 0.
7.AT-/w'. to play. L. 41.
JnVio. i'-l<l'-ilt~-<>. s. in., judgment, sense,
trial. L. M.
Julio. 7>no'J?-r>. s.m., July, (prop, name)
Julius. L. 24.
Jim tar, hoon-tar', to join, to place together.
I.. 66.
Junto. Jioon'-to, adv., near, close to. T.. no.
Juramonto, fioo-ro-main'-to, s.m., oath, affi-
davit. L. 53.
Jn-ticin. fioons-ty-tKS-a, B. f.. Justice. L.61.
Jn~to. innix'-fn. ndi.. inst. richt. L. 01.
Juventud, hoo-ven-footh', s. f.. voath. I.. -IS.
L.
La, def. art. f. sing., the. L. 5.
La, pron. f. sing., her, U. L. 8.
Laconico, lafi-ku'-nS-ko, adj., laconic. L. 38.
Laboriosidad, lah-bo-rv-u-iZ-dal/i' , s. 1., in-
dustry. L. 51.
Lacre, lah'-krai, s. m., sealing-wax. L. 5.
Lado, la/t'-do, s. m., eide. L. 18.
Ladron. lah-drunc' , s. m., thief. L. 44.
Lago. lafi'-yo, s. m., lake. L. 40.
Lagrima, lalt'-(jre-ma, s. f, tear.. L. 51.
Laplz, lah'-pceth, s. m., pencil. L. 51.
Largo, lar'-go, adj., long. Largo tiempo. a
long time. A lo larqo, alongside. L. 21.
Lastiina. la*.*'-lt-ma, s. f.. pity. L. 25.
Lastimar. lacf-tv-mar', to hurt, to wound,
to oflend. L. 61.
Latin, lah-tttn'. P.m.. Latin. L. 61.
Latinajo, lah-tl-nah'-ho, s. m. aug., Dog-
Latin. L. 49.
Latitud, lah-tl-tcoth' , s. f., width, latitude.
L.61.
Lavandcra, lafi-ran-dai'-ra, s. f., washer-
woman. L. 5.
Lavar, luh-rar'. to wash. L. 24.
Le, lai. pron., him, it ; to him, to it. L. 10.
Leccion, laik-ihl-Ci<<-'. s. f.. lesson. L. 8.
Leche, lai'-cfiat, s. f., milk. L. 7.
Lectura, laik-(co'-ra, s. f., reading. L. 28
Leer, lai-air', to read. L. 7.
I.eLMia. lai' -giro, s. f., lea-rue. L. 61.
Leido, lai-e'-do, adj. Hombre bien I
well-read man. (Past pt. of LEER.) L. 52.
Leios. lai'-fiCci', adv., far ofl'. A lo l(jog, in
the distance. L. 31.
LciiL'iia, laiii'-fjica, s. f., tongue, language.
L:-J:J.
Lenguage, latn-gira'-hai, s. ni.. language,
manner of speaking or writing. L.
Lento, lain'-to, adj., t-low, tardy. L. 61.
Leon, fai-one', s. m.. lion. L. 54.
Letra. /ai'-ti'd, s. f.. letter (character), hand-
writing, letter (of credit) : pi., letters, lite-
rature. Bellas le(?as, Belles-lettres. L.
61.
Lcvantar, lai-ran-tar' , to raise, to lift up.
Leranlarse, to rise, to get up. ;
Levita, lai-rt'-ta, s. m., Levite.-/
B. f., frock-coat. L. 61.
Ley, /:'/'-?. s.f.. law. L. 8.
Liberal. K-bai-ral', adj.. liberal. L. 00.
Libertad. B-bafr-laW, s. f.. liberty. L. 40.
Libra. K-'-ftnt, s. f.. pound. Lii .
pound sterling L. 47.
Librar. K-brar'. to free, to deliver: (com-
mercial) to draw. L. 45.
Libre. K'-f>rai. adj., free. L. 59.
Libren.i, lt-f.i-(ie->Z'-a, s. f., bookstore, book-
seller's shop, book-trade. L. 11.
Librcro. le-brai'-ro, s. m., bookseller. L. 11.
Llbro. K'-f>rr>. s. m.. book L. 4.
Li-ero. fe-fifii'-ro adj., light, swift. -A la
Jiqn-ft. lightly. L. 40. .
Limosna, n-nn.cr-' -r,n. s. f.. alms.
L ui.
, - -. . ..
Limpiar. . to clean L. M -
LJmpieza, l-cm-i$-ai'-tha, s.f., cleanlli
-v, adj., clean, cleanly. L.
pieza,
T ft
Limpio,
20.
Linea. fi-' nii-n. s. f.. line. L. 61.
Lisbon. / f.. Lisbon. L. 55.
Lisonja. ' f, flattery. L. 01.
456
,.V O C A B U L A B Y .
Lisonjear, K-s5ne-hai-ar\ to flatter. L. 61.
Lisoujero, R-sSM-hai'-ro, adj. aud B. m.,
nattering, tlatterer.j L. 01.
T/i-it.i, / -< ''-I'll s. f..list. L. 61.
Listo, leimit'-to, adj., "ready, sharp, quick. L.
46.
Literate, W-tai-roA' -to, 8. m., man of letters,
liter.Uus. L. 51.
Literatura, Ce-tai-rah-too' -ra, s. f., literature.
L. 63.
Litro, te'-tro, s. m., litre. L. 60.
L >, art. netit., the. (See explanations in
Lesson 8.)
Lo, pron., it, (and sometimes) him. L. 26.
Local, lo-kal\ adj., local. L. 54.
Loco, lo'-fco, adj., mad. A tontas y a locai,
inconsiderately, without reflection. L. 61.
Loco, s. m., madman. L. 61.
Lodo, K'-il), s. m., mud, mire. L. 45.
L )-frar, 15-grar', to succeed, to obtain. L.
38.
Ldndrea, lone' -drains, s. m., London. L. 12.
Longitud, V)ns-h3-tootA\ s. f., length, longi-
tude. L. 61.
Loteria, Id-lai-rV-a, s. f., lottery. L. 63.
l.ucir, loj-t/i?r\ to sliiuo, to glitter. L. 65.
Luej;o, los-ai'-yy, adv., by and by, imiuadi-
ately ; conj., thsn, therefore. L. 35.
Lu, r ir, lo>-'/ir'. s. in., placa, village. Ea
ir de, instead of. L. 2).
', s. m., Lsvvis, Loiis. L. 15.
I.uisa, loo-S'-aa, s. f., Louisa. L. 2.
r.tiiKi, los'-na, s. f. moon. L. 61.
T.uto, /oy'-/o, s. in., mourning. L. 63.
Liiz, foa'A, s. f., light. D.ir ;i /!, to pub-
lish, to give birth to. L. 61.
LL.
LU:n\r. lyi'i-mir', to call, to know. L. 27.
Llave, luah'-vai, s. f., kjy. L. 5.).
Lbgir. lyai-gar', to arrive. Llej:ir a scr, to
i:ilJ. L. 37.
Llenar. tyai-nar', to ftll, to fulfil. L. 5-1.
Lleuo, lyal'-no, adj., full. L. 51.
Llovar. lyni-oar', to take, to carry, to bear
to brin^ forth. L. 14.
Liorar. ly>-rar', to cry, to weep. L. 51.
Llpro, Iy3'-ro, s. m., tear, act of crying. L.
Llovar, l/ji)-vair', to rain. Llover a cantar-
ros. to po'ir. L. 3).
Lloviznar, luo-wetb-nar'. to drizzle. L. 30.
LUivia, lyn'-vS-a, s. f., raia. L 30
ale ( f animals >'
f "' wooc1 ' timber '
, s. f., stcp-moth-
Ml!i ; - P. f. mothcr.-Lengiia
.,/",'. '','" ;l11 "'-i-riml langun-d. L. 6.
"''. s. m., Madrid. L. T}.
' : 'i'-yo, s. m.. Madrilc-
iinn. mtivc of Madrid. L. 40.
I'irih. mah-droo-gah'-da, s. f.. that
part of the night from 32 r. M. until sun-
1-1 ' ' L. 65.
Madrugar, rnah-droo-cjar' ', to rise very early.
L. 62.
iladurcz, mah-doo-raith' ', s. f., maturity,
ripeness. L. 51.
Maestro, mah-aum' -tro, s. m., master, teach-
er. L. 62.
Maguiiico, inag-iiZ'-fl-ko, adj., magnificent.
L. 58.
Mai, B. m., evil, harm, disease. L. 48.
Mai, adv., badly. Mai cle su grado, in spite
of him. L. 3.
Maldito, mal-dv'-to. adj., accursed, perverse.
L. 62.
Malicia, mah-K' -Ihe-a, s. f., malice, wicked-
ness. L. 62.
Malo, mah'-lo, adj., bad, ill, M'icked. Estar
malOj to be sick. fcjer malo, to be bad, to
be wicked. L. 7.
Mama, mah-ma\ s. f., mamma. L. 5.
Mandar, man-dar\ to send, to command, to
order. L. 17.
Manera, mah-nat'-ra, e. f., manner. De
manera quo, so as, so that. L. 42.
Mania, maJi-ne'-a, s. f., mama, whim. L. 57.
Mauifestar, mah-nZ-faias-tar', to manifest,
to show. L. 51.
Mauiflesto, ma/t-ne-fS-aiss'-to, adj., mani-
fest, L. 52.
Mano, mah'-no, s. f., hand, quire (of paper).
Venir con sus mimus lavadas, to wish
to enjoy the fruit of another's labor. L.
28.
Mantcca, man-tai'-ka, e. f., butter, lard
(South America). L. 02.
Maiitequilla, man-t.ai-keci -ya, s. f., butter
(South America), lard. L. 62.
Manuel, mah-rwo-dil', &. m., Emanuel. L. 2.
Manuscrito, mafi-nooss-fcrS'-to, s. m., maniu
script. L. 62.
Manzana, man-lhah'-na, 8. f., apple, block
(of houses). L. 31.
Manzanar, man-t/tah-nar'. B. m., aiiple-or-
chard. L. !!).
Manana, man-yaJi'-na, s. f., morning. To-
morrow. Pasado Manana, the day after
to-morrow. L. 30.
Mar, s. m. and f., sea. Qnicn no sc arries-
ga no pasa la mar, faint heart never won
fair lady. L. 02.
Marca, mar'-l;n. *. f., mark, brand. L. 42.
Marcha, mar'-cha, s. f.. march. Sobre la
', off-band, on the spot. L. 51.
Marchar, mar-char', to march. L. 10.
Margarita, mar-gaA-rt'.ta, s. f., Margaret.
L. 3.
Maria, mnh-r'-'-rt. P. f.. Marv. L. 41.
Martes, . s. m.. Tuesday. L. 0.
Marzo, mar'-fho, B. m.. March. L. 24.
Mas, mri**, adv., more. J/a* quo (or de),
more than. I,. 16.
Mascara, mn^'-l-n'i-rf. p. f., mask. L. r,l.
Masculino, mass-kooJl'-no. adj., masculine.
L. 47.
Matar, mnh-tar'. to kill. L. 4 t.
Matematico, mah-tni-mah'-fi-Kn, P. m.,
mathematician ; adj., mathematical. I/.
60.
Matoria, nwh-1<ii'-re-a. s. f. nin'
aflTair. L. Hi.
Material, mah-tai-rZ-al', adj.. material. I.-.
Materialista, mnh-tai-re- . in.,
materialist. L. 36.
VOCABULARY.
457
Matrinionio, mah-tr2-mo'-rie-o, s. m., matri-
mony, wedlock, marriage. L. 04.
Mauilido, muli-oot-ye'-do, a. m., mew (of a
cut >. -L. 40.
Maximo, m<ik'-*t-rno, adj. (superlative of
GRANDE), chief, principal, very great.
Mayo, nuih'-yo, s. m., May. L. 24.
Mayor, maA-yOre 1 , adj., greater, larger.
i.1 mayor, tue greatest, the largest. L. 20.
Mayuscula, mak-yooss'-koo-la, auj., capital
^said of letters). L. 02.
Me, ;<', pron., me, to me. L. 26.
Meca, inat'-ka, s. f. Be zeca en meca, from
pillar to post, to and fro. L. 61.
Media, mat'-de-a, s. f., stocking. L. 10.
Mediauamente, mai-d%-ali-nah-mam'-tai,
adv., piddling. L. 39.
Mediauia. inai-af-ah-ni'-a, s. f., mediocrity,
moderation. L. 50.
Mediauo, mai-de-ah'-no, adj., medium, mid-
dling, moderate. L. 39.
Medico, mai'-de-ko, s. m., physician. L. 19.
Medida, >nat-de'-da. s. f., measure. L. 55.
Medio, mai'-de-a, adj., half. J/et/zodia, mid-
day, noon. J/< </moche. midnight. L. 30.
Medio, s. m., middle, means. For media
dc.-. by means of. L. 37.
Medlocoa, mai-de-o-dS'-a, s. m., noon, mid-
day. south. L. -30.
Medir, mai-da-r'. to measure. L. 39.
Mejicano, mai he-kali' -no, s. m. and adj..
Mexican. L. 47.
Mejico, mai'-liK-ko, a. m., Mexico. L. 20.
Mejor. . adj. and adv., better.
El niijui; the best. L. 20.
Melocotoa, mai-lo-kO-tvnc' , s. m., peach. L.
31.
Mi-Ion, mat-tune 1 , s. m., melon. L. 31.
Mi-moria, wai-mo'-ri-a. s. f., memory, re-
collection. Aprender dc memoria, to
leani by heart. L. 38.
Memorias, mai-mo-re-as, s. f. pi., my com-
pliments. L. 39.
Mencion, main-lhe-one' . B. f., mention. L.
5-3.
Mencionar, main-the-o-nar' ', to mention. L.
45.
Menester. mai-nates-tair' , s. m., need, want,
necessity. Scr ntciit-xttr. to be necessary :
must. Haber menesttr, to want, to re-
quire. L. :50.
Menor. mai-nure', adj.. less, smaller, minor,
younger: s. m., minor. L. 20.
Mt'nos. nidi'-nfce, adv., less. A lo mtnos,
at least. Xi mas mi menos, neither more
nor less. L. 10.
Menoscabo. mai-n8ce-kah'-bo, e. m.. deterl-
oration, detriment, prejudice, diminu-
tion. L. i;o.
Menoprecio. nud-nSce-prtd'-thl-Q, P. m.,
contempt, scorn. Mncha faniilinridad es
ransa d.- . much familiarity
breeds contempt. L. (V).
Mont.-. -. f.. mind. L. 02.
Montir. main-lffr'. to lie. L. !5.
Mcnudo, m \l. small, slender,
mean. A /,>/ m//7o. oft^n. L. "i".
Moqnetrefe. mai-km-trai'-fai, s. m., trifler,
iackanape". L. H3.
Mcrcarlor. rnair kii!i-ija;r'. s. m., dealer,
trader, shopkeeper. L. ."52.
Mercado, wio^r-JtoA'-dO, fl. m., market. L 17.
Mercantil, mair-kan-teel' ', adj., mercantile.
L. 50.
Merceer, tnai-rai-t/tair 1 , to merit, to de-
serve. L. 52.
MereuUar, inai-rain-rlar'. to lunch. L. 04.
Meridiauo, inai-rt-di-uk'-itjO, s. m., merid-
ian. L. (J->.
Merino, inui-re'-no, 8. m., merino (sort of
Spanish sheep). L. 40.
Mento, m<u'-re-to, s. m., merit. L. 55.
Mes, iiiaist, s. m., mouth. Al meg, by the
month. L. 10.
Mesa, i/iai'-^a, s. f., table. L. 14.
Metal, mai-tal', s. m., metal. L. 62.
Meter, mai-tair', to put, to place, dieter
niido, to make noise. L. 46.
Metodico, t/tai-tu'-dS-ko, adj., methodical.
L. 35.
Metodo, mai' -to-do. *. m., method. L. 47.
Metropoli, mai-trV pv-K, s. f., metropolis.
L. 51.
Mi, me. pron., me. L. 25.
Mi, poss. prou.. my. L. 5.
Miedo, rnc-ai'-do, s. f., fear. Tcner miedo,
to be afraid. L. 25.
Miel, mt-uil', s. f.. honey. L. C5.
Miembro, mt-aiin'-bro, s. m., member, limb.
L. 62.
Miercoles, me-air'-kO-lai-s.s. s. m., Thursday.
L. 9.
Mil, meel, num. adj. and s. m., a thousand,
one thousand. L. 14.
Milla, med'-ya, s. f., mile. L. C-3.
Millar, mttl-yar', s. m., the number of a
thousand, thousand. L. 40.
Milloi:. num. adj. and s. in., mil-
lion. Jlillo/iai de pesos, millions, of dol-
lars. L. 40.
Mineral, >nt-nai-ral\ f?. m., mineral. L. CO.
Miuuscula. -hi, adj., small
isaid of letters), as opposed to capital.
Miuuto, me-noo'-to. e. m., minute. L. 23.
Mio, mia. //;<"'-5. iht'-a, poss. [n-ou. and pos-;.
adj., mine. (As a poss. adj.. mio is al-
ways placed after the substantive.) L. 13.
Mirar. me-rar'. to look, to look at, to ob-
serve. L. 20.
Misrno, m^.^'-mo. adj., same, self, self-
same. El mmno, he himself. L. 27.
Mitad, me-tath', s. f.. half. L. 40.
Moda. mo' -dn. s. f., fashion. I.
Modelo. nw-dai'-lo, ?. m.. model. L. 55.
Modcracion, mo-dat-rah-thl-one 1 , s. f., mod-
eration. L. C%">.
Moderno, mri-dair'-rtri. adj.. modprn.
Modificar. >, I.. i;i.
Modismo, i. s. m., ' peculiar
manner of expressing the sair.e ideas
in the same langnacre. L. M.
Modo. m~j' -do. s! m.. mode, manner. T)a
ninsrun morlo. by no means. De modo
qne. so that. L/42.
Molestar, >~>-f f /fi.--fnr'. to molest, to dis-
turb, to trouble. L. 43.
Momento, mo-main'-to. s. m., moment L
no.
Mona. m'i'-rifi. s. f.. fpmalo monkey. Ann-
quo la mono, se vista de si ,
queda, a ho? in armor is still but a ho<r.
T,. tr.
Mon'irqnicn, mo-nar'-le-ko. adj., mceorchi-
cal. L. 35.
20
458
V O C A 13 U L A li Y
Moneda, md-nai'-da, s. f., money, coin.
Papel mo/tcita, paper money. L. 55.
3Ioutur, inOnt-tur ', 10 mount, to ascend, to
ride ion horseback). L. 02.
lloutaraz, itwuv-lak-ratlt' , adj., mountain,
wild. L. 51.
!Moii!< . s. m., mountain. Monte
de piedad, pawn-office. L. 40.
SIorcK . to bite, to nip. No se
idt los labios, he speaks out his mind.
ilori'oundo, mo-re-loon'-do, adj., dying. L.
47.
Morir, mo-reer', to die. L. 41.
Jlosca, mvce'-ka, s. f., fly. L. 44.
Mo^trar, >noce-trar\ to show. L. 35.
Jlotivo, mv-K'-xo, s. m., motive. L. 34.
Mover, mo-vair', to move. L. 3C.
ilozo, 'iiid'-thu, s. m., youth, young man,
waiter. L. 02.
jluchacha, moo-chah'-cha, s. f., girl. L. 6.
iluchacho, inoo-chuk'-clio, s. m.,"boy. L. 0.
Jlucho, moo'-cho, adj. aiid adv., iuuch, a
great deal, veiy. L. 8.
Mudable, inoodah' '-Uai, adj., mutable,
changeable, fickle. L. 49.
Mudar, moo-'./ar'. to change. Jfudarte, to
move (from one place to another). L. 02.
Muelii, nusj-ai'-la, s. f., back tooth. Dolor
toothache. L. 50.
JIuerte, moo-air' '-tai. s. f., death. L. 38.
Muerto, moo-air'-to, past part, (of MORIR),
(k:>cl, killed. L. 5\>.
]Miu'stra, moo-aiss' -tra. e,. f.. sample, sign.
L. 02.
Mujer, moo-l>air'. *. f, woman, wife. L. C.
JUultituu, mool-tt-lcoUi'. s. 1'., multitude. L.
40.
IMunclo, tnoon'-'lo, s. m., -world. Todo el
i-rybody. L. 35.
Murmuracion, moor-moo-rah-the-one' , s. f.,
murmuring, backbiting. L. C2.
Murmurar, inuor-inoo-rar', to murmur, to
backbite. L. <>3.
?>Iuseo. mno-sai'-i'i, s. m., museum. L. 51.
-. f.. music. L. 15.
. s. m., musician. L. 15.
Muy, n:oo'-e, very. L. 6.
IT.
. to be bom. ycnr clc
]?i''s. tn be bom to crood luck. L. 02.
;/ , s. f., nation. L. 24.
>ia)'-dfi. adv.. in no degree. 3ada
i<. nothing ICR?. L. 11.
>f.. nothinir. nonentitv. L. 11.
:) i=v,im. T..
. ind. pron., nobc:
L. 11. '
T .. 31.
in. and adj., natu-
ral : native. L. 4f.
Natnraleza, vn/t-foo-ral'-tiu'-ffia, s. f., na-
ture. T,. >iO.
Naturallsta, nah-too-rah-lee&s'-la, a.m., na-
Xavegacion, nah-iai-gah-thc-Zne', s. f., navi-
gation. L. 24.
Navidad, nali-ie-dath' , s. f., nativity, Christ-
mas. L. 4:j.
Navio, nuli-ce'-o. s. m., ship. L. 53. .
Neceaario, nai-thu-$ah'-ri-d, adj., ncccs-
tary. L. 27.
Kecetidad, nal-thai-it-dath\ B. f., nc< <
need, want. L. 44.
Neccsitar, tiui-t/icii-if-tai', to be necessary
to necessitate, to require, to want. L. 5.
Necio, nai'-tiie-o, adj. and s. m foolish
fool. L. Co.
_
re. L.
>*-ivarro. r>nJi-rar'-j-o. . TTI., Navarrcn (na-
tive of Navarre). i
nai'-faes.Tor fas 6 por nffaf, right
or wrong. L. 63.
Negacicn, nai-gali-the-one', s. f., negation.
L. 02.
Negar, nai-gar', to deny, to refuse. L. 34.
Negativa, nai-qah-te'-i a, s. t.. Ecuatkjii. neg-
ative, refusal. L. 02.
Negligcntc, i,ci-r,tZ-/tam'-(ai, cclj., negli-
gent. L. 50.
Neirccio, iiui-fjO'-the-C, s. m., bu
aii'air, matter. L. i7.
Negro, nai'-gro, s.-m. and adj., negro : blf.ck.
L. 02.
Neutro, nai'-co-tro, adj., neuter. L. C2.
Nevar, nai-rar'. to snow. L. 0.
Ni, ne, conj.. nerther, nor. JW mas
nos, neither more nor f
Nieve, i<e-ai'-rai, e. f., trow. 1
Ninguno, i,< QC. to-
br.dy. Xinguna ccea. nothing. L. 11.
Niila,"wn'-y, s. f., little girl, ycuiig girl,
maiden. L. 17.
Nifio, riftn'-yo, s. m.. child, infant. L. 17.
No. adv., no. not. L. 1.
Noble, no'-llai, adj., noble. L. 02.
Nobleza, no-llai' t/ta, s. f., nobleness, no-
bility. L 55.
Noche, no'-chvi. F. f.. evening, night. T-uc-
nas .lit.
A'oche bucna. Christmas eve. ;.
last night. I.. 23.
Ncmbrar, nCme-brar'. to rcrne, to appoint.
L. 48.
Nombrc, nc)r,c'-lrai, P. m.. n: :
Xcinbre propio, prij-tr Lf.ir.e, ;
noun. L. 40.
Nominative, nv-nie-nafi-te'-ro, B. m., :
native. L. 02.
Nono. (See NOVKNO.) L. 15.
No obstante, -<"-<"
theless, notwithsiarjdir.g. however. 1 . o-:.
None, twre'-tai, s. m., noith. !
No-otros nd-
L. 1.
. P. f., rcto. '
Nr.tar Kv/aV, to note, i<- observe.
I Noti. ', f ; . l., notice, ue\\ t- . pi^
i -Kotcl:
: Nove-, '
nino liuiMlrcd. L. 14.
-,-ai-(l(!(/i', P.f-, novel t}, i- <
I', no-rai'-la, e. f., novel, J
55
Nover erd. adj. and e. m -
ninth. L. 15.
Noventn. nd-ialii'-ta, num. cr
11.
V O C A B U L A E Y .
459
Noviembre, n5-v2-aim'-brai, s. m., Novem-
ber. L. -21.
IS" ue -tro, no>ais,'-tro, poss. pron., our, ours.
L. 13.
Nueva, noo-ai'-ra, . f., news (generally
used in the pi.). L. <i;>.
Nueva York, tioo-cu'-va, s. f., New York.
L. 9.
Nueve, noo-ai'-rai, num. adj., nine. L. 14.
Nucvo, iino-di'-co, adj., new. i)c nuxco<
anew. L. -21.
Nuez, noo-aith', s. f., walnut. L. 40.
Numeral, noo-maz-ral' , adj., numeral. L.
14.
Numero, noo'-mai-ro, s. m., number. ,; Quo
numero tienc su casa de V. ? what is the
number of your house ? L. 11.
Nunca, noo>t'-ka, adv., never. L. 25.
O.
O, conj., or, cither. L. 8.
O ! inter., oh ! L. 39.
Obedeccr, 0-bni-<lai-tha!r', to obey. L. !'%
Objetivo, Obi'-hai-le'-vo, adj. and s. in., ob-
jective. L. 03.
Objcto, i
, obe-hai' -to, s. m., object. L. R
Obligacion, o-bK-gah-t/te-o/ie' , s. f., obliga-
tion, duty. L. -21.
Obli','ar, d-MS-gar", to oblige, to force, to
compel. L. (il.
Obra, O'-bra, s. f., work (any thing made, as
a book, a house, &c.i. L. 13.
Obrar, <j-l/rar\ to work, to act, to operate.
L. -II).
Obsorvar, ~>!>e-sair-var', to observe, to re-
mark. L. 43.
Obstantc. Ob <t!an'-(ai, present part No
"' NO OBSTANTE.) L. 51.
I "'. adj., obvious. L. 43.
i - I'., occasion, oppor-
tunity. Tomar Hoc t<t/on por lo.s cabjllos,
to take time by the forelock. !
Occidente, Ok- -t/iS-daiii'-tui, s. m., th
L 51.
ita, o-C'iain'-fa, num. adj., eighty. L.
Ocho, o'-cho, num. ad)., eight. L. 11.
Ochocientos. 6-c,', . n:uu. adj.,
ci.'ht hundred. L. 11.
Octu-. .. ord. adj., eighth. En
. >vo. L. 15.
Octubre, oke-loo' -brai, s. m., October. L
34.
Ocult&r, o kool-tar', to hide. L. 43.
Oculto, o-kool'-lo, adj., hidden. !
Ocupacion, 6-koo-i -. f., occupa-
tion, business, concern. L. ."it.
Ocupar, o-koo-par'. to occupy, to enframe, to
lill ta post). L. 47.
Ocurrii-. f'-ku:,r-i;cr', to occur, to strike.
Leocurrt una idea, an idea strikes him.
L. t!2.
f.. 51.
. to offend.
'.cc, employ,
trade. L
Ofrecer. ,'i-f, ai-l!>air', to offer L. 40.
Oi I i. ,""-',. s. m., hearing, car. Hablar al
to whisper in one's ear. L. r,l.
Oir, -(,/', to hear. Qi'ja! just listen! L.
Ojala ! o-liah-la\ inter., would to God 1 L.
37.
Ojo, o'-ho, s. m., eye. L. 29.
Oler. o-lair'. to smell. L. 41.
Oli'ato, dte-foA'-lO. s. m., the sense of smell.
L. Gl.
Olla, Ole'-ya, n. f., earthen pot. Olla podri-
da, Spanish mixed dish of meats, vegeta-
ble!*. &c., cooked together. L. li->.
Olpr, 0-lun', s. m., odor, scent, smell. L. 0-2.
Olivar, u-le-car', s. in., olive ground. L. (y>.
Olvidar, dk-i-t-ilftr', to forget. 'L. 40.
Omnibus, oitie'-n2-booce, s. m., omnibus.
L. 51.
Once, 8ne'-thai, num. adj., eleven. Haccr
las. once, to lunch about noon. L. 14.
Opera, o'-pai-ra, s. f., opera. L. 25.
Opinion, I'l-pi'-ite-O/it 1 ', s. f.. opinion. L. 42.
Oponer, d-]M)-riai>'', to oppose. L. 51.
Optimo, Ope' le-mo, adj., best, extremely
good. L. 21.
Opuesto, !j-picai<$'-to, adj., opposite, op-
Eosed. (Irreg. past. part, of OPONI:U.)
. .V.'.
Oracion, o-raJi-th2-unt' , s. f., prayer, speech,
discourse. L. 45.
Orden. . m. and f., order. A la
de V., at your service, i
Ordenar, Dre-dOt-ndr 1 , to order, to com-
mand. L. 51.
Organista, ure-yah-neess'-ta, B. m., or: .
Oricnte, d-r2-ain'-tai. cast. L. 51.
Oro, o'-ro, s. m.. gold. Xo cs oro todo lo
quo reluce, all id not gold t:.
L. S.
Oi.-oce, pron., you (objective of verb.-). L.
Ostion, vct-(g-3ne', s. m. (SeeOsTRi.) L.C'l
Ostra, or-'-tra. s. f., oyster. L. <;:.
Otofio. .uimn. f:il!.
Otro, d'-tro, iudef. pron., other, ar.
L. IS.
Ovej.i. ', f., slice;). I.
Ox ! 5A-., inter, used to frighten oil' ,
Ac. L. 40.
P.
Paca. p^t'-ka. s. f., Fanny. L. -!!.
Pacir-i
L. 03.
Paco, pah'-ko, s. in., (contraction of FKAX-
cisco. FrancisK Frank. '
Padccer. paJi-dai- Utuir\ to suflcr pain. L.
47.
Padrai?tro, pali-drass'-tro, s. m., step :
L. Jit.
Padre, pah '-drai. s. m., father. Pa rlremivz-
tro. the Lord's pi, .1,145.
Pacrar. pah-r/ai-'. to pay. L. 14.
Pairnrc. paK-qaA-ral\ "s. m., (com:n.) prom-
:iote. L. 59.
Piunna, jnh'-he-iia, s. f, pae (of a book.
fcc.). L. 50.
Pai's. pa/i-<i^', 9. m.. country. ;.('
tRinpo hace que est:i V. en
how long have you been in tins co,
L. 10.
Pai.-ano. paJi-e-fah'-no. P. m.. conr.trvm.in
(one from the same country). L. GO"
''Aft, P. f., straw.
460
VOCABULARY.
Pajaro, pah'-hah-ro. s. ni., bird. L. 48.
Pajarraco, paA-har-rah'-ko, s. in., (aug. of
PAJAIJO). an ugly, clumsy bird. L. 49.
Palabra. pah-lalt'-bra, s. f." word, promise.
Palabras mayores, offensive words. L.
15 and 65.
Palacio, pah-lah'-the-o, B. m., palace. L.
48.
Palangana, pah-lan-gah'-na, s. f., washbowl.
L. 46.
Palo, pah'-lo, s. m., stick of wood. L. 62.
Pan. pan, s. m., bread, loaf. L. 7.
Panaderia, puh-nah-dai-re'-a, s. f., bakery.
it. 11.
Panadero, imh-nah-dai' -ro. s. m., baker.
L. 11.
Pantalon, pan-tah-lone\ e. m., pantaloons,
trousers. L. 17.
Paiio, pan'-yo, s. m., cloth. L. 62.
Paiiuclo, pan-yoo-ai '-to, s. m., pocket-hand-
kerchief. L. 5.
Papa, pah-pa', e. m., papa. L. 5.
Papel, pah-pail', e. m., paper, part (in a
play). Hacer papel, to cut a figure. L. 4.
Paquito, pah-ke'-to, s. m., (contraction of
FRANCISCO, Francis), Franky. L. 44.
Par, par, 6. m., pair, couple. L. 40.
Para, pah'-ra. prep., for, to, in order to,
toward. Tieue una carta/wra V.j he has
a letter for you. EstJi para partir, he is
about to set out. L. 19.
Parabicn, pah-mh-le-ain' , s. m., congratu-
lation, compliment. Dar el parabien, to
congratulate. L. 62.
Paruguas, pah-rah'-gwass, s. m., umbrella.
L. 50.
Parar, paJi-rar', to stop, to end (in). L. 51.
Parasol, pah-raft-sale', s. m.. parasol. L. 50.
Parecer, paJi-rai-thair 1 , to appear, to seem.
L. 30.
Pared, pah-wraith', s. f, wall. 'L. 50.
Paris, pah-ness', s. m.i Paris. L. 12.
Parque, par'-kai, s. m., park. L. 17.
Parte. par'-tat. s. f., part. AJguna parte,
somewhere. Ninguna parte, nowhere.
De echo dias a esta parff. for the last
eiirht days: s. m.. message, dispatch,
information. L. 27.
Participar, par-tt-iM-par 1 , to participate, to
partake. L. 57.
Participio, par-le-tlie'-ix.-o, s. m., partici-
ple. L. 43.
Particula, par-ie' -loo-la, s. f., particle. L.
50.
Particular, par-lc-koc-lar', adj., particular,
private. L. 10.
Partida. par-It' -da, e. f., departure. L. 42.
Partir. par-leer '. to depart, to set cut, to
divide, to split. L. 19.
Partitive, par-te-te'-vo, adj., partitive. L.
88.
Pasaje. pali-sah'-hal, e. m., passage, fare.
and 69.
Pasar. pah-sar'. to pass, to go (from place
to place). L 10.
Pacua. . f.. Easter. L. 59.
. s. m.. passer-by,
walker, promenader. (Pres. part, of PA-
SEAR.t 1-
TiiMjar. pafi-sai-ar 1 . to walk, to promenade.
L. 24.
Paaeo, pah-sai'-o, s. m., walk, promenade.
.L. 51.
Pasiva, pah-se'-va, s. f., the passive voice.
L. 50.
Pasivo, pah-tS'-ro, adj.. passive. L. C3.
Paso, pali'-so, s. m., step, pace. L. 54.
Patio, pah'-le-o, s. m.. yard, pit (in theatres).
L. 46.
Patronimico, pah-tro-nl'-me-ko, adj., patro-
nymic. L. 49.
Paz, path, s. f., peace. L. 43.
Pecho, pai'-cho, s. m., breast. A lo hccho
pecho, what is done cannot be helped. L.
65.
Pcchuga, pai-choo'-ga, e. f., breast of fowl.
L. 58.
Pedazo, pai-dah'-tho. B. m.. piece, morsel,
bit. L. 63.
Pedir, pai-decr'. to ask. to demand, to ask
for. A pedir de boca, as well as could be
desired. L. 39.
Pedro, pai'-dro, s. m., Peter. L. 19.
Pegar, pat-gar 1 , to stick, to paste, to beat.
L. 63.
Peinar, jxii-Z-nar'. to comb. L. 46.
Peine. pai-e'-nai, s. m., comb. L. 46.
Peligro, pai-K'-gro, a. m., danger, peril. L.
51.
Pelo, pui'-lo, s. m.. hair. A pelo, to the
purpose. L. 33 and 44.
Pelota, pai-lo'-ta, s. f., ball (for playing).
L. 54.
Pena, pai'-na. s. f.. pain, penalty. A duras
. with ranch difficulty. L. 59.
Pensamiento. pctin-saft-tae-ain'-lo, s. m.,
thought. L. 48.
Pensar, paiii-sa) J , to think, to intend. L.
34.
Pcnultimo, pai-nool '-ie-mo, adj., penulti-
mate, last but one. L. 50.
IVfiasco, pain-yass'-ko, B. m.. a large rock.
L. 56.
Peor. pai-ore'. adj. and adv.. worse. L. 20.
Pepa, pai'-pa, s. f., (contraction of I
CISCA. Frances i. Fanny. L. -14.
Pepe. (See PEPITO.) L. 44.
Pcpito. poi-pt'-tci. s. m. (contraction of
JOSE. Joseph), Joe. L. 44.
Pequeno, pai-kain'-yo, adj., small, little,
young. L. 7.
Per. pair, Latin prep, used in Spanish as a
prefix only: as. i^iiurbar. L. 50.
Pera. pai'-ra. s. L. pear. L. 59.
Pora!. pai-ral'. s. m.. pear-tree. L. 59.
Perdcr. pair-dair', to lose. L. ::?.
Perdonar, pair-dv-ttar' . to pardon. L
Perezoso, pai-rai-thij' -&o, adj., lazy, sloth-
ful. L. 33.
Perfeccionar. pair-faik-the-o-nar\ to per-.
feet, to improve, i
Perfeeto, pqir-faik'-to. adj., perfect. L. 29.
Pcrilla, pai-red'-ya, s. f. small pear. Ve-
nird;- it exactly. L. 6-1.
Periodico, pai-re-o'-dZ-ko. s. m., newspaper.
L. b.
Pennaneccr, pair-mah-nai-thair', to re-
main, to stop, to stay. L. 45.
Permanencia. pair-jnah-nain'-lhe-a, s. f.,
permanence, duration, stop.
Permitir, pair-inc-teer' . to permit, "to allow.
L. 44.
Pcro. pai'-ro. conj.. but. L. ".
Perpendicular, 7 . adj.,
perpendicular. L. 51.
Perro, pair'-ro, s. m., dog. L. 63.
VOCABULARY.
401
Perscverancia, pair-sai-vai-ran'-th2-a, s. f.,
perseverance. L. (>3.
Persistir, pair-f&xs*-leer' , to persist. L. 50.
Persona, pair-fd'-na, s. f., person. L. 3S.
Personal, pair^u-ual' , adj., personal. L.
63.
Pesa, pai'-sa, s. f., weight (for weighing).
L. 63.
Pi-same, pai'-sah-mai, e. m., condolence.
L. .
Pesar, pai-sar', to weigh, to regret. No le
peso, do ha"ber nocido, he has an excellent
opinion of himself. L. 31.
Pesar, s. in., regret, grief, sorrow. Apesar
dc, in spite of, notwithstanding. L. 31.
Pescado, patef-blfl'-do. s. m.. fish. L. 7.
Pescar. patss-kar 1 , to fish. L. 63.
Pesimo, pai'-SK-mo, adj., worst, very bad.
L. 21.
Peso, pai'-so, s. m., weight, heaviness, dol-
lar. L. 14.
Pianista, pZ-ah-neess' -la, s. m., pianist. L.
15.
Piano, pa-ah'-no, s. m.. piano. L. 15.
Picante, tit-Jean' -tat, adj., piquant, high-
mecl, pungent. L. 54.
Pirar, pc-kur', to prick, to bite, to pique.
L. 4(5.
Picaresco, pt-kah-raiss'-ko, adj., roguish.
Picaro, pe'-kah-ro, adj., rogue, rascal,
scoundrel. L. 32.
Pico, pi'-ko, s. m., beak, bill. Callarse el
to hold one's tongue. L. 61.
Pie, pS-ai' s. m., foot. A pie, on foot
Nacer do pita, to be born to good luck.
L. 39.
Pierna, pZ-air'-na, e. f., leg. L. 33.
Picza. ix-at'-llm. . f., piece. L. 64.
Pinar, jte-nar', s. m., pine-grove. L. 49.
Pino, />c'-/io, s. in., pine. L. 40.
Pintar, nctn-tar '. to paint, to represent. L.
5-1.
Pintor, peen-tvre', s. m., painter. L. 31.
Pintura, peen-too'-ra, s. ft, painting. L. 31.
Pipa, pS'-pa. s. f., pipe. L. 42.
Pique, pe'-kai, s. m., pique, offence. Esta-
bia ;#(/(/ do perdcrse, he was on the brink
of ruin. L. l>2.
Piropos (Decir), pS-ro'-poce, to say soft
things (to the ladies'). L. 58.
Pisaverde, pS-SCA-VOtr'-dal, s. m., fop, cox-
comb. L. 50.
Piso. yw'->, s. m., floor, story (of a house).
Tercer p&o, third floor. L. 5o.
Pistola, peess-(0'-la, . f., pistol. L. 44.
Pistoletazo, jmss-to-lai-ta/i'-tfio, s. m., pis-
tol-shot. L. 44.
Placer, plaJi-thair 1 ', to please. L. 31.
Placer, s. m., pleasure. L. 31.
Plata, plah'-ta, s. f., silver. L. 8.
Plato, plah'-to, s. m., plate, dish (of viands).
L. 57.
Plaza, plah'-tha, s. f, place, situation,
square, market-place. Plaza de toros,
Arena (for bull-fights). L. 17 and 54.
Plazo. plah'-tho, s. m., term (of payment).
L. (.
Plomo, plo'-mo, 8. m., lead. L. 63.
Pluma, ptoo'-ma, s. f., pen, feather. L. 5.
Plural, i>loo-ral', adj., plural. L. 57.
Pluscuamperfecto, jMxxx-kivam-pair-faik'-
to, s. m., pluperfect. L. 43.
Pobre, po'-bral, adj., poor, needy, wretched.
L. 13.
Pobreza, pd-lrai'-thq, !>. f., poverty. L. 59.
Poco, yw'-A-o, adv., little; pi., few. Poco a
;weo, gently, softly. L. 32.
Poco, s. m., little. L. 6.
Poder, po-dair\ to be able. No potfer mas,
to be exhausted. L. 32.
Poder, s. m., power, possession. L. 33.
Podrir, pu-diwr', to rot. L. 41.
Poesia, p5-ai-s3'-a, s. f., poesy, poetry. L.
31.
Pocta, jw-ai'-ta, s. m., poet. L. 31.
Poetastro, pu-ai-lass' '-tro, e. m., poetaster.
L 44.
Poetico, po-ai'-K-ko, adj., poetic, poetical.
JL. 3i>.
Polca. pf/le'-ka, s. f., polka. L. 23.
Politica, pd-K'-te-ka, s. f., politics; polite-
ness. L. 52.
Politico, po-le'-K-ko, adj., political; polite.
L. 52.
Politico, . m., man of politics. L. 52.
Polio, pole'-yo, 8. m., chicken. L. 5.
Polvo, pole'-to, s. m., powder, dust. L. 02.
Polvora. pole'-i'O-ru, s. f., gunpowder. I.. (;:'.
Pouderar, pfjne-dai-ra)'' , to exaggerate, to
cry up. L. 54.
Poner. pd-nuir'. to put, to place, to lay. to
set (as the sun). Pomnv. to become, to
get. Se puso serio, he became serious.
L. 41.
Por, pore, prep., by, for, in behalf of, in fa-
vor of, about, through. Por las calles,
through the streets. Ir por pan. to 1:0
for bread. Pur si acaso, in case, it by any
chance. L. 19.
Porcion, pore-thZ-one' ', s. f., portion, part,
lot, number, quantity. L. 03.
Pormenor, pur<.-ntui-n ore', s. m. (generally
used in the plural). P&nnenor&s, details,
particulars. L. 50.
Porque, pore'-kai, conj., because. L. 18.
Porque, pore-kai', couj., why? for vhat
reason ? s. m., reason wherefore. L. IS.
Portarse, pore-tar '-sai, to behave, to conduct
one's self. L. 55.
Portugal, pore-loo-gal', s. m., Portugal. L.
CO.
Portugues, jyore-too-ghaiss' , s. m. and adj.,
Portuguese (language), Portuguese (na-
tive oi Portugal). L. 34.
Poseer, po-sai-atr', to possess. L. 34.
Posesivo, po-sai-sv' '-w, adj., possessive. L.
63.
Posible, po-st'-blai, adj.. possible. L. 31.
Positive, jKi-fe-K' -ro, adj., positive. ]
Posponer, puce-po-nair' ', to postpone, to
place after. L. O.'J.
Potencial, po-lain-lhe-al ', adj., potential.
L. 63.
Practica, prdk'-fS-Jca, s. f, practice. L. 23.
Practicautc. prak-t' in., practi-
tioner. (Present part, ol PKAC-H'
L. 38.
Practicar, prak-tt-kar'. to practise. L. 23.
Practice, prak'-te-ko, adj., practical. L. (B.
Pre. /i7Y, Latin prep, used in Spanisl) as a
prefix only. L. 50.
Preceder, p'rai-thai-dair', to precede, to go
before. L. 03.
Precepto, prai-thaip' -to, s. m., precept. L.
53.
V O C A B U L A K Y .
Prccio. B. m.. price, prize. L. 50.
1'reci- . oblig-
atory, precise. Ks predso que la lean,
they must read it. L. Go.
Preferir, ;;/ to prefer. L. 38.
rre.'uma. pi\t;-'jw:i'-'d, s. f., question, in-
' >'i-tar', to ask questions,
Preliminar, "'', adj., prelimi-
nary. L. !.
Premiar. prat-mS-ar 1 , to reward. L. O).
Premio, pral'-mS-O, s. m., premium, reward,
prize. L
Proirh. . s. f., pledge, jewel ; pi.,
endowments, talents, part-*. L. 41. 03.
Prender, prain-<lair', to take, to take up, to'
arrest. L_
Preposicion, prai-pS-tZ-lkti-MS', preposi-
tion. L. 43.
V. 1 '-thl-a, s. f., presence.
-iici:t de aiiirno. presence of niiad.
L. (53.
Presentar, prai-sain-tar', to present, to in-
troduce, to olTer. L. 39.
Presente, ]>, -\ lj., present. To-
iler pr?.<en r ?, to bear in mind. L. 43.
Fre-sLlcnte, jtrai- . m., presi-
dent. L. 4,i.
"-0. s. m., state prison.
Pre-idir. ]';'>-*'- -l-er', to preside. L. 54.
Preso. pr>!i'-*t>, inv.'. past part, (of Pr.EX-
:i. L. 5i.
. to lend. L. 50.
adj., quick, ready,
prompt. I.
. quickly. L. -.' >.
PreH'i: '-'. t>> pretend, to
lay claim to, to claim, to solicit. L.
Pretension, . f., pretea-
i-lai'.n. tliiiiic solicited. L. 57.'
Pretciito, prai-tai' -re-to, adj., preterit. L.
63.
Pretesto, prai-iaiis'-to. s. m., pretext. L.
5S.
Prevenir, prai-ffti-nc-'r'. to prevent, to fore-
see, to warn, to prepare. L. 05.
Prcvcr. prut-rait-', to foresee. L. 39.
Primavera, jjrZ-mati-vai'-ra, e. f., Spring.
L. ->l.
Primero. prc-mai'-ro. adj.. first. -^De buenas
&prtmenu, all at once, rashly. adv., first,
rather, sooner. L. 15.
Primo. pre'-mo, e. m.. cousin. L. 13.
Principal. pretti-Uie-pal' . adj., principal,
chief. L. 3li.
Principiante, pre<- '?. g. m. and
jires. part, (of PBiXdPiAB), beginner. L.
Principiar, preen-tJrf-pe-ar', to begin, to
commence. L. 23.
Principio, preen-fhe'-pS-o, f>. m., beginning,
commencement, principle. L. 03.
Prisa. pre'-sa. e. f.. haste, hurry. Tener
. to he in a hurry. L. 30.
PrUionero, prS-se-c'-ttai'-ro, s. in., prisoner.
L. 4>\
Prisms. p>rf**'-mn. s. m., prism. L. 54.
Probable, pro-bah'-blai, adj., probable. L.
.r.
Probar, pr~>-b(ir'. to try. to prove, to tasfo.
El clima de efete pais le prueba bien, the
climate of this country agrees well with
him. L. 35.
Procesiou,pro-(hai<-l-(jn(', s. f., proce
L. 40.
Procurar. pro-koo-rar' . to procure, to en-
deavor, to try. L. 51.
Produccion, p'ru-diMk-lk'i-vnc' . s. f., produc-
tion. L. 4.).
Producir, prd-doo-lAeer 1 , to produce. L. 40.
Proeza, prij-ui'-tha. #. f., prowess. L. 54.
Profecia, pro-jai-the'-a, s. f., prophecy. L.
45.
Profesion, pro-fai-&l-ijne\ 6. f., profs
L. 38.
Profesor. pru-fai-sure' ', s. m., professor. L.
18.
Prohibir, pro-Z-beer', to prohibit. L
Projimo, prO'-ftZ-mo, e. m., neighbor c
creature). L. 28.
Promcsa. prd-mai'-sa, s. f.. promise. I- .",7.
Promoter./ i;> promise. L. x'5.
Pronombre, prit-nr ;a., prououu.
L. 43.
Pronominal, pro-nu-rrie-nal' ', adj., pronomi-
nal. L. 01.
Prontitud. prdne-tt-tooth', s. f.. prom;
promptitude, quicknes-;. 1,
Pronto. pi-'iif/'-fft.nClj.. prompt, quick.
adj., soon, promptly, quickly. I,
Pronunciacion. pro-noon-fkl-aA-l/il-dne', e.
f., pronunciation. L. 03.
Proiumciar, prd-noon-thS-ar 1 , to pronounce.
L. 15.
Propiedad, pri'-p'-ai-ctafh', s. f., propriety,
property. L. 03.
Propio, pr<y-p-~>, adj.. proper, own, self-
same, same. L. 49.
Proponer, prv-pd-nair'. to propose. L. 51.
F,. 31.
Proporcionar, pro-pTire-Uif-r.-nor'. to j)ro-
portion, to procure, to ofler. L. 4^.
Protestante. s. m., Prot-
estant. L. 49.
Protestantismo, pro-fa? .-o, s.
m.. Protestantism. L. 49.
Provecho, pr5-vai'-c/u>. s. m., profit, b
L. 04.
Proveer. prv-rui.-air'. to provide. L. 34.
Proverbio, , m., proverb.
L. 05.
Provincia, prd-veen'-thl-a. s. f., province.
L. 19.
Provisto. prri-r<f?*'-(n. past part, (of PKO-
VEERI, provided. L. 5->.
Proximo. pr~ ximo. next,
nearest. El sabado proximo, next Satur-
day. L. 23.
Proclencia, pi-oo-d?; :'.. prudence.
L. 31.
Pnidente, proo-dain'-tai, adj., prudent. L.
20.
Prueba. prov-cti'-?ii, s. f.. proof. L. 40.
Pru<ia. prnr>'-*7--rt. s. f . Prussia.
Publicar, p>. publish. L
Pftblico, poo'-ble-ko, s. m. and adj., public.
L. 51.
Pueblo. p>ra>'-Vo. s. m., town, people. '
Ptierta. pirair'-ta. s. f.. door. L. v>7.
Pnes. pwaiss. conj., then, the
much as, since, because : inter., v.
/'"-: que ? well, what of it* L. 41.
Pnesto que. p>rai*<<'-to. adv.. since,
much as, supposing that. L. 37.
V O C A D U L A K Y .
-'fa, s. f. inch. L. G3.
;(-<:,", s. in., kick. L. 50.
Yimt*.pov/i'-la, point, stitch. L. 50.
runt;. . I'., small point.
. oil tiptoe. L. 4-1.
PmUo, jioon'-to, s. in., point (of time or
space), spot, place. Al piinto, at oucc.
L. 51.
Puntuacion. poon-too-ah-tKZ-viu', s. f., punc-
tuation. L. ('<',.
Puntual, jxton-!oo-a!', adj., punctual, exact,
ate. 1>. (J.J.
Puntualidad, jwon-too-ah-K-duth' ', s. f.,
punctuality. L. 03.
Purista, poo-rsess'-la, s. m., purist. L. 33.
Q,
Quo, kai, rc-1. pron., that, which, who.
i (J'tt- bueno I how good '.;{>'/' dosgracia !
what a misfortune) ; , ' him
como. f.Qiie se dice de bneno? what is
the good news ? Tarde //</- temprano,
sooner or later. L. 3, 10, 17.
Quebrar, kai-brar', to break, to smash. L.
34.
Quedar, kai-dar\ to stay, to stop, to re-
main, to become. El campo qucdb por
los Amerieaaoa, the Americans were vic-
torious. L. 38.
Qu;-iarse. kai-har'-gai, to moan, to com-
plain. L. 48.
Qncniar. kai-mar'. to burn. L. 32.
(uerer. kai-rair', to wish, to desire, to will,
to love, to like, to be willing. L. 13.
Querido, kai-re'-ilo. adj., dear. (Past part.
ofOrnr.t:n.) L. 13.
Quoso. ki/i' -an, s. m., cheese. L. 7.
Quieu, kZ-in', rel. pron., who, whom. L.
17.
Quicnquiera. kS-ain-ke-ai'-ra, indef. pron.,
whosoever. L. 50.
Quicro, kl-ai'-io, adj., quiet, sti!!, at rest.
L. (W.
Qujjada, k?.-ha1i'-(la, s. f.. jaw. L. ,7).
Quince, keen' -thai, num. adj., fifteen. L. 1 1.
Qnlnicntos, t:e-/tS-ain'-toce. adj., five hun-
dred. L. 14.
Qninto, keen'-to, ord. adj. and s. m., fifth.
L. 50.
Quitar, ke-far', to remove, to take away,
off. out : to prevent. L. 53.
Quitasdl. tS-tah-sdl '. B. m.. parasol. L. 50.
t^uixa, quizas, kc-tftah', -Ways', adv., per-
haps. L. 31.
R.
Radical, rah-dt-kal' , adj., radical. L. 63.
I?aiz. rah-cffli'. s. f., root. L. t'>:;.
Ifcim.v. f., branch (of tree', fami-
lies Ac.) L. C,l.
Ramilleta, rah-mcd-yai'-tai, s. m., bouquet.
L. \:7.
Ramo, rah'-mo, s. m., branch, department.
1.. .-.U.
Rana'. rnh'-nrt, s. f., frog. Xo ger rana, to
he wide awake, expert. L. f>5.
Rnpaza. rali-pah'-tha, s. f., little Kirl. ; Mi-
ren la rapaxuela .' the little vixen ! L. 61.
Raro, rali'-m. adj., rare, odd, curious,
scarce. L. 03.
to tear, to scratch. L. (H.
i/o, s. m., trait, stroke, in-
stance. L. i;;;.
Rato, ra/t'-to, s. m., while, moment. A ra-
tw, from time to time. L. 44.
Raton, rah-ttne', s. in., mouse. L. 65.
Rava, mli'-ya. s. f.. stroke, dash. Tener a
to keep withln*boundfl. L. (M.
Riiyo. rah' -yo, s. m., ray, thunderbolt.
Echar rayos y ceutellas, to foam with
L. (J-i and 63.
. rah-thoite'i s. f., reason, riyht.
Tencr yazon, to be ri^'ht. L. 25.
Razonar, rc.h-Hw-iic.r', to reason. L. (-1.
.'iways used a-^ a prefix. L. 50.
Re;;!, rai-al\ adj., real, royal ; s. m., real
(Spanish coin). L. 47 a:
Realidad, rai-a/i-lS-dat/i', s. f., reality. L.
Rebajar, rai.-bcth-har\ to reduce, to abate,
to lower (prices, &c.). L. 64.
Rebanada. rai-ban-nali'-da, s. f., slice (of
bread, &c.). L. 63.
Rebanar, rai-bah-nar' , to slice. L. 04.
Rcbafio, rai-ixm'-yo, s. m., flock of sheep.
L. 40.
Reeado, rai-kah'-do, s. m., message, errand.
L. 63.
Reccpcion, rai-thaip-Uil-one' , s. f., recep-
tion. L. 54.
Recibimiento, rai-the-le-mZ-aln'-to, s. m.,
act of receiving, reception. 1
Recibir, rai-thl-Kccr' , to receive. L. 8.
Recibo, rai-tht-'-bo. s. m.. receipt. L. 63.
Rcciproco, rai-t/i&'-pr(hko, adj., reciprocal.
L. 03.
Recitar, rai-ihZ-tar' . to recite. L. 61.
Recomendacion, rai-kv 7 -one',
s. f., recommendation. L. 60.
Recomendar. mi-! . to rccom-
, mend. L. &4.
Reconocer, rai-i&nd-tAair', to recognize,
to acknowledge. L. :r.i.
Rccordar, rai-kore-dar' , to remember, to
remind. L. 35.
Recto, ruik'-to, adj., risht. En angnloa
rectos, at riirht angles. L. 55.
Rector, raik-tore', "s. m., rector, director.
L. 63.
Recurrir, rai-koor-reer 1 , to recur, to have re-
course. L. 50.
Recurso, rai-koor'-so, s. m., recourse, re-
source. L. 40.
Reducir, rai-doo-thccr' ', to reduce. L. 54;
Referir, rat-fai-reer', to refer, to relate. L.
01.
Reflexive, rai-jlaik-sZ'-ro, adj., reflective.
L. 63
Rcflexionar, ra>.-fiaik-s<--o-nar' , to reflect.
L. 48.
Reforma, r at- fore' -ma, s. f., reform, refor-
mation. L.' 03.
Reformar, rai-f ore-mar' . to reform, to form
anew, to discharge (from an employment
or office). L. 48.
Refran, rai-f ran', 8. m., refrain, proverb.
L. 63 and 65.
Reiralar, rui.-yaJt-lar'. to regale, to present
with, to make a present of. L. ('>:!.
Re^alo, rai-gaA'-io, s. m., gift, present. L.
63,
ra'irimcn. ra/.'-]i~'-mrtin. P. m., regimen, gov-
ernment, object (of verbs). L. 57.
-104
V O C A B U L A II T .
Regimiento, rai-hH-mZ-ain'-to, s. m., rei-i-
nient. L. 19.
Regir, rai-lteer', to govern. L. 57.
'j -'/. a. 1., rule, ruler. L. 63.
:;ir, rai-ijoo-lar', adj., regular, tolcra-
. moderate, ordinary : adv.. tolerably.
middling ; v., to regulate. L. 27, 57, and
61.
<)o-la}i-rl-dat!i' , s. f., regu-
larity. L. 53.
;/', to regu-
late. L. -is.
ir, rai-oo-sar'. to refuse. L. 01.
Rehia, rui-e'-na, s. t'., queen. L. 03.
Reinante. ntt-c-ua/i'-tai, pres. part., reign-
ing. L. 38.
Reinar, rai-S-nar', to reign. L. 15.
Ileli -. in., kingdom. L. -13.
Heir. nii-tcr, to laugh. L. 41.
Relation. i'ui-ltiii-tiil-unv', s. f., relation, ac-
..;. recital. I..
ii' -pah-go, s. m.. Hash of
lightning. L. O-'J.
ir, rai-lam-jKih-gai-ar' , to
- u, L. 30.
. rai-lal<-tr'. to relate. L. 45.
Religion, rai-le-he-one', s. f., religion. L.
Religioso, rai-le-he-o'-so, adj., religious. L.
Rcloj, rai-lo', a. m., watch, clock. L. 28.
Relojei-o, rai-lo-hai' -ro, e. m., watchmaker.
L. 63.
Relucir. rai-loo-thcer', to sparkle, to glitter.
Xo cs oro todo lo que relucc, all is not
gold that slitters. L 05.
R'-!!]. '.i:ir, ', to remedy. L. 64.
Remcdio, rai-mal'-dl-o, s. m.. remedy. L.
53.
Rcmcndar, rai-maln-dar' , to repair, to
mend. L. 04.
Remuuerar, rai-mco-nai-rar' , to remuner-
ate. L. 52.
Rendir. rd/n-'leer', to render, to subdue.
'/>, to surrender. L. 30.
Renir. rain-yter', to quarrel, to dispute, to
scold. L.'39.
Reo, rai'-fi. s. m.. culprit, offender. L. 53.
Repartir. rai-ixtr-t<-er', to divide. L. 58.
Repasar, rai-pah-sar,, to repass, to reex-
amine. to glance over again. L. 64.
Rcp.i- . s. in., revision, act of
coin 2 over anew. L. 61.
Repente. nt&pain'-tai.~De repcnte, sudden-
ly, on a sudden. L. 54.
Rcpcticion, ral-pai-K-t he-one', e. f., repeti-
tion.
Repetir. . to repeat. L. 39.
Reposar, rai-j/O-far', to repose, to rest. L.
so, rai-pv'-eo, e. m., repose, rest. L.
68.
Reprender. -/'''-iwii.-i-'tair', to reprehend,
reprimand. L. 4-,\
entar. r(ti-prai-fain-tar j . to repre-
sent, to make appear : to perform i,a part >.
to enact. L. 04.
Reprobar. rai-pru-bar' ', to reprove, to up-
braid. L. 80.
Republica, rai-poo'-ble-ka, B. f., republic.
L. :S5.
Reputacion, rai-poo-tah-th'e-vne' , s. f., repu-
tation. L. -Jl.
Resarcir, rai-far-thccr' ', to indemnifv, to
compensate, to make up for. i
Re?eii ;ij feel the
- t,of), to resent. ,
Resi'ri:. . m cold (dig.
ea-e caused by cold). !.
Resfriarse, / , catch cold.
-L. ()-J.
Resideute. rui-ft-i!* ','n' -!<!. adj. and past
part, (of RESIBIR), resident, residing.
L. 33.
Residir, rai-t-e-deer' , to reside. L. 9.
Resist ir. - . L. 31.
Resolucion, rai-to-lco-the-lne' 8. f., resolu-
tion. L. <;;.
Resolver, rai-eole-rair', to solve, to resolve.
L. 04.
Respecta. rae^-paek'-di.En lo que i <
with respect to. L. 51.
Respctable, rai-^-pal-tah'-llai, adi .
spectable. L. 39.
Rcspi '-/ar', to respect. 1
Respeto, re- m., respect, regard.
L. 56.
Respondcr. / to respond, to
answer. L. 38.
Respondon, raift-;
ready to reply. L. '?>.
Respuesta. , ' >. s. f., n>;
reply, answer. L. 30.
Restahtc. rc.w-tun'-fai. s. m.. and
part, (of RLSTAK), remainder, rest ; re-
maining. L. 46.
Resultar. rai-soot-tar 1 , to result, to turn out,
to occur. L. 43.
Rctirar. rai-te-rar', to retire, to withdraw,
to retreat. L. 03.
Retrato. rci-trah'-lo, s. m., portrait, like-
ness. L. 17.
Reumatismo, rai-co-mah-Ucss'-mo, s. 1:1. .
rheumatism. L. 03.
Reunir. rai-oo-neer' ', to reunite, to ;:-
ble. L. 52.
Reves. -. m.. back part, v
side. Al n rt-<. ou the contrary; n :
down. L. 03.
Revoltoso, rci-i'iJk-to'-fO. adj., turbulent,
rebellious. L. -54.
Rev. rai'-e, s. m.. kinir. L. 15.
Reyeznelo, rai-yai-th't'-ai-lo, s. m. (dim. of
REV), petty king. L. 44.
Ricacho. r-kah'-cno. adj.. very rich. L. 49.
Rico, re'-lo, adj.. rich. L. 13.
Ridicnlez, r2-d%-koo-laith' , s. f., ri< r
L. 45.
Ridiculizar, rZ-dZ-keo-K-thar' , to ridicule.
L. 48.
Ridiculo. re-iK'-7:oo-!o. adj. and s. m.. ridicu-
lous, reticule (sort of lady's basket). L. 5.
RL'odon. n-<j~i-;l~'in-' , s. m.', rigadoon, coun-
try dance. L. x:).
Rincon. / m., corner. L. 51.
Rio. TK'-U, s. m.. river. L. 40.
Riqueza, ri-kai'-Uia, e. f.. riches. L. 48.
lii>a. rt'-^a. s. f.. lautrh. laughter. L.
Rivalizar. rt-ruh-le-ihar', to rival, {
with. L. 51.
Robar, ro-bar', to rob, to steal. L. 44.
Rodar. ro-'Jar'. to roll. ]
Rodear. ri>-i/ui-rir'. to surround, to go r
to revolve. L. 54.
Rodea'
(of ROBE A K), surrounded. L.
VOCABULARY,
465
Kodilla, ro-deel'-ya, s. f., knee. DC rodillas,
on one's knees. L. 59.
Rodriguez, rd-dn-guitli', s. m., Rodriguez.
Tlo>'iir,')0-ff(tr'. to pray, to beg of. L. 35.
Roio, ro'-fio, adj., red. L. 54.
Romano, rtJ-moA'-nO, adj., Roman L. 54.
Romper, rome-jxiir', to break, to tear.
Bomper el silencio, to break the Bilence.
Rop'a \o'-i>a, s. f., clothes, wearing apparel.
L. 2S.
Rosa, nV-,w, P. f., rose. L. 03.
Roto, ro'-to, irr. past part, (of ROMPER),
broken. L. 52.
Rubio, roo'-te-o, adj., fair (of the complex-
ion), ruddy. L. 03.
Ruido, 'roo-c'-do, s. m., noise. L. 46.
Ruin, roo-een', adj.. mean, churlish. L. 63.
Ruindad, roo-etn-dalh', s. f., meanness,
churlishness. L. 4S.
Ruisenor, roo-2-sain-ydre' ', 8. m., nightin-
L. (53.
Rumor, roo-iiwre', s. m., rumor. L. 54.
Rutiua, roo-tS'-na, s. f., routine. L. 03.
S.
o, sah' -bah-do. s. m., Saturday. L. 9.
Saber, sah-bair\ to know, to have knowl-
edge of, to hear from; to savor, to taste :
s. m., learning, knowledge. L. 42 and
21.
Sabio, sah'-b2-o. adj., wise, sage, learned.
L. 21.
Sabor, sah-bore', s. m., savor, taste. A sa
unlnir. at his pleasure, taste. L. 02 and 06.
Sacacorchos, t-ah-kafi-kore'-chuce, s. m.,
corkscrew. L. 04.
Saeainuelas. soh-kah-mwai'-lass, B. m.,
tooth-drawer, dentist. L. 50.
Sacar, &i/t-k(i>-'. to take or draw out, to pull
out. L. 50 and 00.
. 8. m.. sack. bag. L. 01.
Sacudir, satt-koo-detr', to shake off, to shake.
L. 54.
Sal. s. f.. salt. wit. L. 55.
Saldo. xit>'-fti>, s. m., balance (of accounts,
AC.). L. 04.
Salida, sah-H'-da, a. f., going out, departure,
start. L. 03.
Salicnte, aoh-U-atn'-toi, adj. and pros. part.
(of SALIR). projecting, salient. L. :H
Salir, xfi't-f.-tr', to go or come out, to set
out. to leave, to start, to go out, to end or
finish, to rise (said of the sun, &c.) : to
turn out. to turn a.Tt.Sali6 a su padre,
he resembled his father. L. 20.
Salon, fa/i-lone', s. m., saloon, lar^ena!! L
Saltar. sal-tar', to jump, to leap, to bound,
to spring. L. 58.
Sal to. ?al'-to, s. m., leap, jump, bound,
spring. L. 5!t.
Salud, sah-looth' s. f. health. A la m'ud do
las senoras, to the good health of the
ladies. L. 25.
Saludar. safi-loo-rlar', to salute. L. 01.
Sanchez, san'-chottti, s. in.. Spanish family
name, si^nifyinu' son of Sanclio. L. 49.
San^re. san'-grait e. f.. blood. L. 6-1.
r, san-iS-/9-kar > , to sanctify. L. -15.
20*
Santo, san'-to, adj., holy, saintly. Santo y
bueiio, well and good. L. W.
Sastre. .>'-</(', s. in., tailor. L. 11.
Sastreria, SOtS-irai-rV-O, !' tailor's shop.
L 11.
Satirico, sah-W '-re-ko, adj., satirical. L. 35.
SatisfaccT, KfrtoasfOllrtAair', to sautly.
Satisfecho, fah-teess-fai'-cho, adj. and past
part, (of SATISFACEB), satislied. L. 44
and 52.
Sayo, sa/i'-yo, s. m., sort of loose coat or
jacket. L. 05.
Sazonar, tah-thv-nar\ to season. L. 02.
lie *, pers. pron. (instead of LE, LES, to
him to her, to them;. L. 20. Prou. (nmd
to form the passive voice). L. 32. Ke-
flective prou. L. 33.-impers. pron., we,
they people, Ac.-* dice, they say.-^
cree'it is believed. L. \A>.
Se prep., used as a prefix in composition.
L. 50. '
Secreto, sai-Tcrai'-to, B. m., secret, secrecy.
L. 65.
Sed, saith, s. f., thirst. Tener sed, to be
thirsty. L. 25.
Seda. sal' -da, s. f., silk. L. 5.
Seguir, sai-alieer', to follow: to continue.
f. 39.
Segun, sal-goon 1 , prep., according to. Se-
gun y como, just as. L. 40 and 06.
Segundo, sai-goon'-dn, ord. adj. and s. m.,
second. L. 15 and 23.
Seguro, sai-goo'-ro. adi., sure, secure. L. 43.
Seis, saP-fess, num. adi.. six. I
Seiscientos, xni-ee^-the-ain'-tvce, num. adj.,
sis hundred. L. 14.
Semana, sai-mah'-rta. s. f, week. L. 8.
Semblante, saim-blan'-tai, s. m.. counte-
nance, face, aspect, appearance, look. L.
59.
Sentar, xafn-far', to set down, to enter (in
a book) ; to fit. to become. L. 34.
Sentencia, Kain-tain'-tht-a, B. f., sentence,
phrase. L. 43.
Sentido, sain-tt'-do, s. m., sense. L. 65.
Sentir. sain-teer' to feel; to be sorrv for.
L. 38.
Sefior. sain-if~>re', 3. m.. Lord, sir. Mr.
Muy scnor mio, my dear sir. L. 1.
Seiiora, sain-yo'-ra, s. f., ladv, madam. Mrs.
L. 2.
Sefiorita, fain-yd-re'-ta, s. f., young lady,
miss. L. 2.
Sefiorito, fftifi-i/n-i-e'-to. p.m.. youncr crentlo-
man, sir (used generally by servants),
>rr. L. 2.
Septimo. saip'-tt-mo, ord. adj., seventh. L.
15.
Scr. snfr. to bo. to exist. (Not to be con-
founded with ESTAR, which see.) L. 11
and 22.
Ser, s. m.. boincr. existence. L. 5).
Servidor. ffrtr-rtt-dvre'. P. m., servant. Sfr-
ri'ior de V.. your servant. L. 39.
Servir. ffiir-rc'r'. to serve, to oblige, to do
a sen-ice SV ;;//>. to be <rood enoucrh,
kind enoucrh. to please. Sirrr>?f V. to-
mar asiento. please to take a seat. Ser-
rirw de, to use. L. 39.
Sesenta, t.-rtj-*arn'-/a^imm. adj.. sixty. T,. 1 f.
Setenta, sai-tain'-ia, num. adj., seventy.
L. 1 1.
466
V O C A B U L. A li Y .
Setecientos, sai-tai-lhe-airi-tuce, num. adj.,
seven hundred. L. 14.
Setierubre, sai-te-cutn'-brai, s. m., Septem-
ber. L. :. .
Sexo, saik'-ao, s. m., sex. El bello sexo, the
lair sex. L. 58.
Sexto, saiks'-to, ord. adj. and B. m., sixth.
L. 15.
Si, 6-ee, adv., yes. L. 1.
fc>i, iudef. pron., self, one's self. nablo
para {i, he spoke to himself. L. 20.
Si, couj., if; but. tii no viene, hoinbre,
but he is not coming, my dear fellow. L.
23.
Siempre, sS-atm'-prai, adv., always. Por
sieinpre jamas, lor ever and ever. L. ^o.
Siesta, st-axs'-la, s. f., siesta, afternoon
nap. L. 02.
Siete, te-ai'-tai, num. adj., seven. L. 14.
Siglo, seeg'-lo, s. m., century. L. 52.
Siguificado, seeg-ne-fe-kah'-do, s. m., signi-
lication, meaning. L. 49.
Siirniticar, seeg-ne-jS-kar', to signify. L. 64.
Bflaba. &'-lah-ba, s. f., syllable. L. 03.
Silencio, sl-lairi -tht-o, s. m., silence. L. 65.
Silencioso, st-lain -tlie-o' -so, adj., silent. L.
64.
Silla, t(d'-ya, s. f., chair. L. 14.
Simpatizar. seem-pah-K-thar' , to sympa-
thize. L. 51.
Simple, seem'-p7ai, adj., simple, single;
simple, silly. L. 43.
Sin, seen. prep., without. Sin embargo.
notwithstanding, however. Sin quo ni
** ara que, without any cause or reason.
L. 10.
Sinceridad, eeen-lhai-rt-datli' ', s. f., sinceri-
1y. L. 45.
Sincere, seen-ilmi'-r^. ad.i., sincere. L. 40.
Singular, seen-flO03ar', nd.i.. singular. L. 01.
Sino. fg'-wo, coni., but: if not. Xo e* el.
,z'<7 PU hermano, it is not he, but his
brother. L. 3.
Sin&nimo. se->w'-n?-mo, s. m., synonyme.
L. 05.
Sinrazon, ffen rah-tTione' , s. f., wrong, in-
iustice. L. 50.
Si'quiera, sc-ke-ai'-ra, conj., even, at least.
L. 40.
Sitio. &'-tt-o, s. m., place, position, siege.
L. 58.
Situado. &-too-ah'-do. past. part. ofSiTUAK.
L. 20.
Sitnnr. rt-foo-ar'. to situate. L. Gt.
. prep., under. So pretesto de, under
pretext of. L. 41.
Sobrar no-brar', to be over and above, to
have more of any thing than one needs. '
L. 01.
Sobre. fo'-hrai. prep., upon, above, over,
about. Vino fobre las ocho, he came
about fin-lit o'clock. L. 41.
Sobreesrrito, o-t>rn>-ai^-l'r~-'-tn. B. m., sn-
pcr~rription. address (of a letter). L. 56.
Sobrina. sr,-br?'-na, s. f., niece. L. 65.
Pobrino. so-br''-rio. s. m.. nephew. L. fio.
Socialismo. fD-the-afi-leess' -mo, s. m., social-
ism. L. 50.
Socied.Tl. ?r-1l7-n>-r1an>'. s. f.. society, firm,
partnership (commerciall. L. :>i.
Socio, so'-the-o, s. m., partner, companion.
T,. 0-2.
Sofi, fu-fa', s. m., sofa. L. 31.
Sol, sole, s. m., sun. L. 45.
Solas (A), so'-lass, all alone. L. 64.
Soldado, sdle-dali' -do, s. in., soldier. L. 52.
boledad, vd-tai-dutli' , s. f., solitude, loneli-
ness. L. 03.
Solenine, sd-laim'-nai, adj., eolemn; thor-
ough, downright. L. 01.
Soler, so-lair', to be accustomed to, to be
wont. L. 41.
Solicitar, s84i-tK8Jar', to solicit. L. 47.
Soliloquio, ao-le-lo '-kt-o, s. m., soliloquy.
L. 05.
Solo, 6-5'-/o, adj., alone; adv., only. L. -.5.
Soltar, sdlt-(a/-',to untie, to loose" to liber-
ate, to let go, to let free. L. W.
Soltero, sdle-tai'-ro, s. 111., bachelor, un-
married man. L. ul.
Sombra, sOme'-bra, fc. f., shade, shadow.
L. 58.
Sombrero, some-brai'-ro, s. in., hat. L. 10.
Son, *<//;, s. m., sound. Sin ton y sin son,
without rhyme or reason. L. 47.
Sonar, sd-nar', to sound. L. 45.
Sonido, f<J-ne'-do, s. m., sound. L. 47.
Sonreirse, sdne-rai-ctr'-fdi, to smile. L. 64.
Sonrisa. tv/ie-ri'-sa, s. f., smile. L. 5-1.
Sonrojar, tsDne-ru-har' ', to make one blush.
L. 64.
Sonar, sone-yar', to dream. L. 35.
Sopa, so'-pa. s. f., soup. L. 44.
Sopeton, sd-jxii-ione' . De sapeton, unex-
pectedly. L. 44.
Soplar, fd-plar', to blow-: to prompt. L. 64.
Sordo, t-ore'-clo. adj.. deaf. L. 64.
Sorprender, s&re-prain-clair', to Bnrprise.
L. 42.
Sorpresa. forf-prai'-M, s. f., surprise. L. 51.
Sospechar. sdc&pai-char', to suspect. L. 60.
Su. foo. poss. adj., his, her. its. their. L. 5.
Sub, f-noh, Latin prep, used in Spanish as
a prefix only. L. 50.
Subida, foo-be'-cfa. s. f., rising, rise; ascent.
L. 63:
Subir. ?oo-fe(r\ to go or come up, to ascend,
to mount, to riso. L. 50.
Subjnntivo, foob-hoon-te'-ro, adj., subjunc-
tive. L. 43.
Suceder. fOO-iJ>a>-rJair', to happen, to take
place, to succeed _(come after). L. 45.
Succsivo, soo-1hai-se'-w. En lo sucesivo, in
future. L. 32.
Sucio, too'-thc-o, adj.. dirty. L. 64.
Slid, food. s. m.. south. L. Sfi.
Suegra, sicai'-yra, s. f., mother-in-law. L.
63.
Suegro, sicai'-gro, s. m., father-in-law. L.
&3.
Pucla. sicai'-la* s. f., sole. L. 61.
Suclo. swai'-lo. s. m., ground, floor, soil.
L. 51.
Suelto. fsjrail'-lo, adj. and past part, (of
SOI.TAR\ loose, free. A rienda siiclla,
with loose rein. L. 64.
Sueiio. fn'^ain'-vo, s. m.. sleep, dream. Te-
ner (rueno, to be sleepy. L. 25.
Suerte, sirair'-tai, s. f..'lnck, chance, sort.
Echar ?n(rtes. to cast. lots. L. 58.
Suficiente, soo-fe-the-ain'-tai, adj., sufficient.
L. 49.
Sufrir. soo-frr-'r'. to suffer, to bear with, to
undergo! L. 64.
Stisreto, soo-hai'-to, B. m., individual, per-
son; topic, matter, subject. !
VOCABULARY.
467
Sujeto, soo-hai'-to, adj. and past part, (of
SSUJETAB). subject ; subjected, tied, last-
cued. L. 05.
Suma, soo'-ma, s. m., sum. En suma, in
short. L. 03 and 04.
Superior, wo-jMi-rt-vre', adj., superior. L.
%L.
Superlative, foo-pair-lah-te'-vo, adj., super-
lative. L. 5(J.
Supersticiuso, soo-pairss-tt-tM-o'-iO, adj., su-
perstitious. L. 45.
Suplicar. soo-pll-kar' , to supplicate, to beg,
to crave. L. 01.
Suponer, #oo-p6->tilir', to suppose. L. 01.
Supremo, foo-prai'-t/io, adj., supreme, high-
est, most excellent. L. 21.
Supuesto, sofrftoaiss'-to. past part, of SUPO-
M;K. Por supuesto, of course. L. 04.
Sur. (.See Suix) L. 00.
;--us ! us xv. iuter._, holla 1 L. 46.
Suspirar, tuoct-jti-rar', to sigh. L. 64.
SuHaucia, swce-tan'-lht-a, s. f., substance.
Jj. (JO.
utivo, sooce-tan-ll'-ro, s. m. and adj.,
substantive. L. 64.
Susteutar. arjoce-tain-tar 1 ', to sustain. L. 65.
Sutil, f,oo-ted', adj., subtle, thin, slender.
L. 01.
Sutilcza, ?oo-tc-lai'-tha, s. f., subtlety, cun-
ning, thinness, slcnderness. L. 03.
Snyo, soo'-yo, his, hers, its, theirs, one's.
L. 13.
T.
Tabaco, tali-bah'-ko, s. m., tobacco, cigar.
Ij .]_>
Tablero. tahJ>M'-ro. s. m.. a smooth board.
Tabk-rn de ajedrez. chess-board. L. 51 .
Tacto. tak'-to, B. m., the sense of touch.
Tal. adj.. such, po. Tal cnal. middling, so
so. Tal vez. perhaps. L. 32.
Talento, [ah-lain'-to, s. m., talent, abilities.
T,. 05.
Tambicn. iam-W-ain'. conj. and adv., also,
as well, morever. L. 29.
Tampoco, tam-po'-ko, adv., neither, not
either, nor. L. 29.
Tan. adv.. so. so much. as. as much. L. 20.
Tanto. tan'-to. adj., so. in such a manner.
Tfmfo mejor. so much the better. Por lo
trtiito. therefore. L. 20.
Tapar. tah-jxtr', to cover up, to stop up
(with a cover). L. 65.
Tapcte, tah-pai'-tai, s. m., table-cover. L.
Tardar, tar-rlar'. to delay, to put off. L. 60.
Tarde. tar'-<lai, s. f.. afternoon : adv., late.
Aliio tarrle. rather late. L. 20.
Tares, to&'-rai-a, B. f.. task, l
Tarjeta, tar-Jtai'-ta, s. f., card, visiting card.
T.i to! tah'-lai, inter., easy! take care! L.
18.
Taza. lah'-iha, B. f., cup. L. 55.
Tc, tat, s. m., tea. L. 55.
Te. pron., thee, to thee. L. 26.
Teatro, lai-ah'-tro, s. m.. theatre. L. 17.
Te.ia, tai'-ha. s. f.. tile. De tejas abajo, hu-
manlv speaking. L. 61.
Telegrftflco, lai-lai-grah'-fl-Ko, adj., tele-
graph. L. 65.
Tel^grafo, lai-lai'-grah-fo, B. m., telegraph.
L. 46.
Terna, lai'-ma, e. m., theme, exercise;
s. f., dispute, contention. L. 57.
Temer, tui-mair' , to fear. L. 28.
Temerario, tui-nuu-ruh'-rt-v, adj., rash, in-
considerate. L. 54.
Teuior, tai-mort' .For lernor de, for fear of.
L. 42.
Teuiprano, taim-prah'-no. adv., early, soon.
L. -M.
Teuacidad, tai-nah-t/tl-dafh', B. f., tenacity.
L. 05.
Tenedor, tai-nai-dore', s. m., fork. L. 65.
Tener, tui-nair'. to have, to hold: to be, to
take (place). Tener lii;inl>iv. frio. sed, to
be hungry, cold, thirsty. r j</ui- lunar, to
take mace. Tener quo hater, to have
something to do. Yo tturjo para mi it ia
my opinion. Tcwja V. la bondad de de-
cirme, be good enough to tell me. L. 10.
Tentacion, fain-td/i-t/it-dM', s. m., tempta-
tion. L. 61.
Tcfiir. lain-yeer', to dye. L. 89.
Teoria, ti<i-i,-ic'-u. s. f., theory. L. 23.
Tercero, ((rir-thai'-ro, ord. adj., third. L.
15.
Tercio, tair'-t/te-o, s. m., third, third part.
L. 40.
Terminacion, tair-me-nah-thl-vne' ', s. f., ter-
mination. L. 49.
Terminante. tair'-mt-nan'-tai, aoj., conclu-
sive. L. 65.
Terminar, tuir-mc-nar' , to terminate. L.
65. *
Termino. tair'-nu-no, 6. m., termination,
end: term. L. 65.
Termometro, tair-mo'-mai-'io, 6. m., ther-
mometer. L. 60.
Terrenal, tair-rai-nal' , adj., terrestrial. L.
49.
Terreno, iair-rni'-no. *. m., ground. L. 55.
Terrible, tair-rl'-llai, adj.. ten-ible. I
Ten-on, tair-jvne', s. m., turned up earth.
L. -19.
Terroso, tair-ro'-fo, adj., terrcous, eartliy.
L. 49.
Tcrrcstrc, tair-raizs'-trai, adj., terrestrial,
earthly. L. 49.
Tertulia", tair-too'-K-a, s. f.. party. I.
Ti te. pron., thee (governed by a prep.).
L.26.
Tiempo, fe-aim'-iw, B. m., time, weather.
Con el liempo, in the course of time. L.
TieHto^to-ain'-da. s. f., store, shop. L. <: I.
13erraJP<rfr'-ra, s. f.. earth, land, native
L. 45.
Tijeras, fe-fiai'-ra?, s. f. pi., scissors. L. (.1.
Tinta. to-n'-f". * f.. ink. L. 5
Tintero, tcen-tai'-ro. s. m.. inkstand. Pe-
jarse also CM el tinlcro, to forget to say
somethins. L. 4.
Tinto, tecn'-lo, adj., red (said of wines). L.
Tio. te'-o, s. m., uncle. L. G5.
Tirabuzon, K-rah-boo-thone' ', s. m., cork-
screw. L. 65.
Tiranico, te-rah'-ne-Ko, adj., tyrannical. L.
35
Tirar 1t-rar'. to throw, to cast, to take
(speaking of a road). Tire V. por aqui,
take yiis way. L. 54.
V O C A 1) U I, A II Y .
Tiro, te'-ro, P. m., throw, cast. A tiro dc
pistola, within a pistol-shot. L. ~3.
Titulo, K' -too-'.o, s. m., title. L. Do.
Tocante a., (O-kati'-tai a, prep., concern-
ing, relating to, touching. 1..
Tocar, td-];ar', to touch, to play (on an in-
strument). L. 15.
Todavia, (o-ilah-rt'-a, adv.. yet, still. L. 23.
Todo, to'-do, adj., all. Todos los dias, every
day. Del tpdo, entirely. Con todo, how-
ever, notwithstanding. L. 11.
Todo, s. m., the whole." L. (Jl.
Tolcrar, l'i-ld-rar' , to tolerate. L. f>5.
Toma! tO'-ma, inter., indeed! L. 45.
Tomar, t'l-timr', to take. L. 14.
Tomo, lo'-mo, e. in., volume. Un libro de
trea lomos, a book in three volumes. L.
15.
Tonel, fti-nail', a. m., cask, barrel. L. CO.
Tonto, toni'-to, adj., foolish. A ton/as y a
locas, at random. L. 00.
Tontera, tone-tai'-ra, 8. f., foolish action.
L. GO.
Toque, to'-kal, s. m., roll (of a drum), ring-
ing (of bells). AM esta el toque, that is,
where the difficulty lies. L. 05.
Torero, td-rai'-ro, s. m., bull-lighter. L. 53.
Tornar, ture-nar 1 , to return, to begin anew.
L. 65.
Torno, tore'-no, s. m., lathe. En torno,
round about. L. 05.
Toro, to'-ro, s. m., bull. L. 53.
Tos. t'/ce. s. f., eolith. L. 0">.
Trabajador, trah-baJi-hah-dOre', adj. and s.
in., hardworking, worker. L. 17.
Trabajar, trah-balt-har 1 ', to work, to labor.
L. 17.
Trabajo, trah-bah'-ho, s. m., work, labor,
occupation. L. 47.
Tratluccion, tra/t-Uook-the-one', s. f., trans-
lation. L. 61.
Traducir, trah-doo-theer'. to translate. L.
40.
Traer. trah-air', to bring, to carry, to wear.
L. 42.
Tragar. frah-fjar', to swallow. L. 05.
. s. f., tragedy. L.
62.
Tragico. // . . tragic. L. a"5.
-. m.. draught, drink.
Kchar un tru'in. to take a dram. L. 59.
Traje, trah'-h'ji, s. m., dress, costume. L.
54.
Trampa, fram'-ps, s. f.. trap, swindle.
Caer en la tramps, to fall into
L. 64.
Trampear, tram-p'ii-ar', to swiu'
pose upon. L. (J5.
TrampOBO, lram-pd'-w, adj.. deceitful,
swindling; s. m., cheat, swindler. L.
66.
Tranquilidad, tran-K-l?-^ath' P f, tran-
quillity. peac'\ quietness. L. 1(1
rranquilizar, tran-KS4?-tAar' to tranquil-
lize. L. 65.
Tranquilo, tran-Wlo, adj.. tranquil, quiet,
peaceful. L. 60
Trnpo. t rah '-m s.' TO .. ra"-. L. Ot.
Iras, prep., behind, after. L. 41.
irascurso, trn^-l-nor'-so. s. m.. course pro-
cess (of tim-t. i,. m
Trasnochar, fmss-no-char', to sit up all
night. L. Go.
Trasquilar, trass-J^e-lar' ', to shear (sheep). ^
Ir por laiia y volver trasyiiglaclo, tli
tit. L. <;5.
Tra.-t:cnda". ( ' /, s. f., backehop.
L. 01.
Tratado, trail-tali' -do. s. m., treatise, trcritv.
L. 40.
Trataute, trah-tan'-tai, s. m., dealer.
Tratar, trali-tar*, to treat, to have inter-
course or relations with, to trade, to
deal, to traflic, to try. I
Trato, irah'-to. s. m., treatment, dealings,
intercourse. L. 05.
Travcs, t rah-vaiss' , prep. Al (ravcj de,
through. L. 65.
Travesura, truh-rai-soo'-ra, s. f., trick, r.iis-
chicf, naughtiness. L. .">:;.
Travi'-- -"-.o, adj., tricky, naugh-
ty, mischievous. L. 52.
Traza, trah'-tha, s. f., trace. Tencr buena
traza, to look well. L. 01.
Trece. t rat' -thai, num. adj., thirteen. L. 14.
Treinta, trai-cen'-(a, num. adj., thirty. L.
14.
Trcs, fraiis. num. adj., three. L. 11.
Tribunal, tre-boo-nal', s. in., tribunal, court
of justice. L. 53.
Trigo, trt'-go, s. m., wheat. L. 05.
Triguefio, tt-e-gain'-yo, a dj-, brown, dark
(complexion). L. 66.
Trinchar, treen-char', to cut up, to carve.
L. 58.
Trineo, trl-nai'-d, s. m., sleigh. L. 05.
Trjnidad, trZ-ne-ita!/i', s. 1'., Trinity. L. 21.
Triptoniro, trr(-jt-tij>te'-yo, s. ui., triphthong.
L. 57. '
Tii-tc, trcess'-tai. adj., sad. mournful, dull.
L. 21.
Tristcza, trecss-tai'-lha, s. f.. sadness, dul-
ness. L. 41.
Tronar, tro-nar 1 , to thunder. L. 3).
Tropa, try -pa, . f.. troop. L. 1 ).
Trueco, trirui'-kr,. s. m.. barter, exchange.
A trufco, provided that. L. 61.
Trneno, tncai'-no, s. m., thunder, clap of
thunder. L. 30.
Trucque. (Sec TRCECO.) L. 48.
Tu, too, pcrs. pron., thou ; poss. adj.. thy.
Ij. 1.
Tnerto, twair'-to, adj., blind of one eve.
L. 65.
Tut ear, too-1ai-nr'. to speak familiarly (in
the second person sinenlar). L. 05.
Ttiteo. too-tai'-f). s. m.. thouing. L. C5.
Tuyo, too'-yo, poss. prou., thine. L. 13.
IT.
U. oo. conj., used instead of 6, before words
beginning with o or f/o. L. 8.
liter., mrh! L. 40.
Ultimo. ort'-fT-mo. adj., last. Por '
at last, finally. L. f.l.
Tn. ocm. ndj. and indef. art., one. a (alwaj-s
used before, never nfter. \vord<>. L. L
Tna. rx~>'-i)n. fern, of Uxo. which foe. Ij. J5.
Univcrsidad, m-n7 . e . f., uni-
versity. L. 55.
Vno. or>'-no. indef. art. and adj.. a, one.
T'in'1 a >/nn. one by one. I,. 14.
Fna. mn'-iju. s. f.. nnger-nail. L. 33.
I'sar, oo-far', to use. " L. 02.
V O C A B U L A K Y .
469
Uso, oo'-so, s. m.j use. L. 61.
Usted, Goas-tait/i, s. m. and f., you. (Con-
traction Of VUESTFvA. HEUCED, your WOr-
ship.) L. 1.
TJtil, oo'-ted, adj., useful. L. 13.
Uva, oo'-va, s. 1'., grape. L. 40.
V.
Vaca, iah'-'ka. p. f., cow, beef. L. 55.
Vacio, rah-l/te'-S, adj., empty. L. 58.
Valencia, rah-lain' -tlu-a, s. f., Valencia.
L. 55.
Vatentia. rah-lain-te'-a. B. f., valor, bravery.
L. 51.
Valor, ra/i-lair', to be -worth, to be good
for. Mas vale tarde^que nunca, bettor
late than pevcr. ",'dlrjame Dios! bless
me! L. 41.
Valicntc, rah-R-ain'-tai, adj., valiant, brave.
L. 47.
Valor, vah-lore\ s. m., valor, bravery;
worth, value. L. 25.
Yals, ralce, s. m., waltz. L. 23.
Vamos ! rafi'itioce, inter., come! come
along ! L. 49.
Vapor, I'dh-ypre', s. m., steam, steamboat,
steamer. L,. 37.
Vara, rah'-ra, s. f., rod; yard measure. L.
47.
Vario, rah'-rS-o, adj., various, variable;
pi., several. L. 43.
Varon, mh-rone\ s. m., man, male human
being. L. (i. 1 .
ongadaa, (LAS PROVTNCIAS), vass-kone-
ga/i'-:/'t--". s. f. pi., the three Spanish pro-
vinces of Alava, Guipuzcoa, and Biscay.
L. 55.
Yuscueiice, raxx-kirain'-thai, s. m., the Bis-
cayau dialect. L. 55.
Yasija. vah-se'-ha, s. f., cask for liquors.
L.'.V, 1 .
Vaso. rah'-oo, s. in., vase, glass (for drink-
ing, tumbler. L. 61.
Vaya ! rah'-ya, inter., come now ! indeed !
L. 42.
Vccino, vai-the'-no, s. m., neighbor. L. 28.
Veinte, vai'-een-tai, num. adj., twenty. L.
11.
Vela, rai'-la. s. f., sail (of a ship), candle.
L. 50,.
Veneer, rain-thair', to vanquish, to over-
come, to conquer. L. 59.
A'emlcr. rain-flair', to sell. L. fi.
'Venir. raj-neer'. to come: to fit. to suit.
Vtnir a pelo, to be just the thin?. No
hay mal qne por bien no rcnna. it's an ill
wind that blows srood to nobody. L. 18.
Ventaja, rain-(aA'-fia, s. f., advantage. L.
43.
Yentann. rnin-lali'-nn. s. f.. window. L. 28.
Vcr. 7-flr/i-. to see. to look. A rer. let ns
see. Verse negro, to be in CTeat distress.
L. 29.*
Venauvraf-raft'-fM, s. m.. summer. L. 24.
Verbal, rair-fxtl', adj., verbal. L. 49.
Verbo. rair'-lm. s. m.. verb. L. 41.
Verdad. rn/'r-ifaffi'. s. f., truth. A la rer-
flarl. truly: indeed. L. 43.
Verdaderamente, vair-daA-dai-rah-tnafn'.
tti>. adv.. trulv. veritably. L. 3-2.
Verde, ralr'-'lui. adj., green. L. 51.
Vcrdura, vair-doo'-ra, B. f., verdure ; vegeta-
bles. L. 34.
Vcrgiienza, voir-gwain'-tha, s. f., shame.
Tencr vergiienza, to be aehauied. L. 25.
Version, vair-st-o/te', . f., version. L. G4.
Verso, vair'-so, B. m., verse; line of poetry.
L. 52.
Vestido, vaiss-te'-do, s. m., dress, wearing
apparel. L. 39.
Vcstir, vaiss-teer 1 , to dress, to clothe. L. 25.
Vez, vaith, e. f., time. Una fez, once.
Dos ve<xs, twice. En tez de, instead of.
Hacer las veces de, to act as, serve as.
Tal rez, perhaps. A mi ve2, in my turn.
A teces, at times. L. 25.
Viajar, vS-ah-fiar', to travel. L. 21.
Vicerector, ve-t/tai-raik-lOre' , s. m., vice-
rector. L. 50.
Vice versa, ye' -thai vair'-sa, rice versa. L.
47.
Vicio, vy.-tMHf) e. m., vice. L. 41.
Victoria, oot-ro'-rt-a, B. , victory. L. 40.
Vida, ve'-da, s. f., life. L. 50.
Viejo, ve-ai'-ho, adj., old. L. 13.
Viena, ve-ai'-na, s. f.. Vienna. L. 12.
Viento, r3-ain'-to, B. m., wind. L. 30.
Vierncs, v?-air'-naia$, s. in., Friday. Vier-
ties santo, Good Friday. L. 9.
Visa, rt'-ga, s. f.. beam. L. C5.
ViDadiego. rct!-ya/t-de-ai'-go, s. m. Tomar
las de riUadiego, to run away ; to take to
one's heels. L. 50.
Vinacho, r.2-nah'-cho, s. m., bad wine. L.
49.
Yjno, re'-no, s. m., wine. L. 7.
Violado, i-e-d-lah'-do, s. m. and adj., violet
(color). L. 54.
Violeta, ve-ij-lai'-ta, B. f., violet. L. 54.
Violin, re-o-lem'. s. m., violin. L. 15.
Violinista, ve-o-te-neess' '-ta, B. m., violinist.
L. 36.
Virtud, ietr-tooth', s. f. , virtue. En virtud
de, by virtue of. L. 41.
Visita. r?-.M~Vff. s. f.. visit. L. 28.
Visitar, xl-sl-tar 1 . to visit ; to examine.
L. 5-2.
Vista, vetss'-ta, e. f., view, sight. -A rista,
at sight. Perder do tista, to lose sight of.
L. 29 and 51.
Visto, veess'-to, past part, (of VEK), seen.
L. 52.
Vistoso, reefx-to'-fo, adj., conspicuous,
showy L. 54.
Viva! 'rc'-ra, inter., long live! hurrah!
huzza ! L. 40.
Vivionte. rt-rt-a/'n'-tai. s. m. and pres. part.,
living bein?: living, animated. L. 38.
Vivir, rf-rtfr', to live. L. 9.
Vivo, re'-vo, adj., alive, lively, sprightly.
L. 20.
ViVcaino. refffi-l-rtfi-e'-no, s. m. and adj.,
Biseaynn. L. 55.
Vizcnvn. rrrtli-l-nh'-ya. s. f.. Tiscny. L. 55.
Vocabnlario, ro-kah-doolari'-rS-ij, s. m., vo-
cabulary. L. 58.
Vocal, vd-kal', adj. and 8. m., vocal ; vowel.
L. 58.
Volnr. ro-lar', to fly. L. 45.
Volumen. rnJno'-m'n/'n. s. m.. volnmo. L. 15.
Vohintad. r'l-fnnn-faffi'. s. f.. will. L. 15.
Volver. rrjf-ratr', to come or on back, to
return, to do arrain. to turn. Vrjrr-r en
si. to recover one's senses. Vclirr a Ins
470
VOCABULARY.
andadas, to return to one's old habits.
L. 30.
Vos, voce, pcrs. pron., you. L. 66.
Vosotros. vC^sO'-trdce, pers. pron., you, yc.
L. 1.
Voz, vOt/i, s. f., voice; word; rumor; re-
port. Corre la ws que . . . , it is
rumored that . . . L. 58.
Vuelta, vwail'-ta, s. f., return, turn, trip.
A vuella de correo, by return mail. Dar
uua vuelta, to take a walk. Dar la vuelta
al parque, to go round the park. L. 40.
Vuelto, vwail'-to, past part, (.of VOLVEK),
returned. L. 52.
Vucstro, vivaiss'-tro, poss. adj., your. L. 13.
Vulgar, vool-gar', adj., vulgar. L. 59.
Y.
Y, c, conj., and. L. 3.
Ya, adv., already, yet ; sometimes. Fa lo
uno, yd lo otro, sometimes one, some-
times the other. L. 25 and 37.
Yaccr, yah-thair' , to lie. L. 41.
Yerba, yair'-ba, s. f., herb, grass. L. 60.
Yerno, yair'-no, s. m., son-in-law. L. CO.
Yo, pers. pron., L To mismo, I myself
L. l.
Yugo, yoo'-go, e. m., yoke. L. 64.
Z.
Zafarse, thah-far' -sat, to escape, to get rid
Zaga, thah'-ga, s. f., rear. No irlc a uno
en zaga, not to be lar behind any one
L. 44.
Zapateria, thah-pah (ai-iZ'-a, K. f shoe
trade ; shoemaker's shop. L. 17.
Zapatcro, thali pah-tat -to, s. m., shoe-
maker. L. 8.
Zapato, thah-pah'-to, s. m., slice. L. 10.
Zape ! t/tah'-pat, inter., used to frighten
away the cats ; God forbid I L. 40.
Zas ! zas I tfiass, inter., used to imitate
the sound of repeated knocks or blows.
L. 62.
Zeca en Meca (ANDAB DE), thai' -la am
mai'-ka, to wander about from pillar to
post. L. 61.
Zutano, thoo-tah'-rtOi s. m., such a one. L.
03.
THE END.
JO. APPLETON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS.
SPANISH GRAMMARS,
Olleudorff's Spanish Grammar :
A New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Spaniai
Language, with Practical Rules for Spanish Pronunciation, end
Models of Social and Commercial Correspondence. By M. VE-
LAZQUEZ and T. T. SIMONS t. 12mo, 500 pages.
The admirable system introduced by Ollendorff is applied in this volume
to the Spanish language. Having received, from the two distinguished
editors to whom its supervision was intrusted, corrections, emendations, and
additions, which specially adapt it to the youth of this country, it is believed
to embrace every possible advantage for imparting a thorough and practical
knowledge of Spanish. A course of systematic grammar underlies the
whole ; but its development is so gradual and inductive as not to weary the
learner. Numerous examples of regular and irregular verbs are presented :
and nothing that can expedite the pupil's progress, in the way of explana-
tion and illustration, is omitted.
KEY to th.8 Same. Separate volume.
Grammar of the Spanish Language :
With a History of the Language and Practical Exercises. By M.
SCHELE DE VERE. 12mo, 273 pages.
In this volume are embodied the results of many years' experience on
*iio part of the author, as Professor of Spanish in the University of Virginia.
It aims to impart a critical knowledge of the language by a systematic
course of grammar, illustrated with appropriate exercises. The author has
availed himself of the labors of recent gntmmarhns and critics; and by
condensing his rules and principles and rejecting a burdensome superfluity
of detail, he has brought the whole within comparatively small compass.
Bj pursuing this simple course, the language may be easily and quicklj
mastered, not only for conversational purposes, but for reading it fluentlj
tod writing it with elegvnce.
JJ. APPLET ON cr CO.'S PUBLICATIONS.
Seoane, Neuinan, and Baretti's Spanish and
English, and English and Spanish
Pronouncing Dictionary.
Bj MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADEKA, Professor of tb
Spanish Language and Literature in Columbia College, N. Y., and
Corresponding Member of the National Institute, Washington.
Large Svo, 1,300 pages. Xeat type, fine paper, and strong binding.
The pronunciation of the Castilian language is so clearly set forth in
this Dictionary, as to render it well-nigh impossible for nuy person who
can read English readily, to fail of obtaining the true sounds of the Spanish
words at sight.
In the revision of the work, mgre than eight thousand words, idioms,
and familiar phrases have been added.
It gives in both languages the exact equivalents of the words in general
use, both ii> their literal and metaphorical acceptations.
Also, the technical terms most frequently used in the arts, in chemistry,
Dotany, medicine, and natural history, as well as nautical and mercantile
terms and phrases most of which are not found in other Dictionaries.
Also many Spanish words used only in American countries which were
formerly dependencies of Spain.
The names of many important articles of commerce, gleaned from the
price currents of Spanish and South American cities, are inserted for the
benefit of the merchant, who will here find all that he needs for carrying on
a business correspondence.
The parts of the irregular verbs in Spanish and English arc here, for the
Orst time, given in full, in their alphabetical order.
The work likewise contains a grammatical synopsis of both languages,
arranged for ready and convenient reference.
The new and improved orthography sanctioned by the latest edition of
the Dictionary of the Academy now universally adopted by the picas it
here given for the first time in a Spanish and English Dictionary.
An Abridgment of Velazquez's Large Dictionary,
INTENDED FOK SCHOOLS, Col LEGES, AND TRAVELLERS.
Tn Two Parts : I. Spanish-English : II. Ensrlish-Spaniak,
By MAKIAXO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA. 12mo, 888 pages
1). APPLETON & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS.
Elementary Spanish Reader
By M. F. TOLON. 12mo, 156 pages.
This is one of the best Elementary Spanish Readers, not only for the
purposes of self-instruction, but also as a class-book for schools, that has
!vcr been published. A full Vocabulary of all the words employed is ap-
rendering a large dictionary unnecessary.
Progressive Spanish Reader :
With an Analytical Study of the Spanish Language. By AUGUSTIH
JOSE MORALES, A.M., H.M., Professor of the Spanish Language
and Literature in the New York Free Academy. 12mo, 336 pages,
The prose extracts in this volume are preceded by an historical account
of the origin and progress of the Spanish Language, and a condensed,
scholarlike treatise on its grammar ; the poetical selections are introduced
with an Essay on Spanish versification. Prepared in either case by the pre-
liminary matter thus furnished, bearing directly on his work, the pupil
enters intelligently on his task of translating. The extracts are brief, spirited,
and entertaining ; drawn mainly from writers of the present day, they are a
faithful representation of the language as it is now written and spoken. The
arrangement is progressive, specimens of a more difficult character being
presented as the student becomes able to cope with them.
New Spanish Reader :
Consisting of Extracts from the Works of the Most Approved Authors
in Prose and Verse, arranged in Progressive Order ; with Notts
explanatory of tho Idioms and Most Difficult Constructions, and a
Copious Vocabulary. By M: VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA.
12mo, 351 pages.
This book, being particularly intended for the use of beginners, has been
prepared with three objects in view : First, to furnish the learner with pleas-
ing and easy lessons, progressively developing the beauties and difficulties
of the Spanish language ; secondly, to enrich their minds with valuable
knowledge ; and thirdly, to form their character, by instilling correct princi-
ples into their hearts. In order, therefore, to obtain the desired effect?, the
extracts have been carefully selected from those classic Spanish writers,
both ancient and modern, whose style is generally admitted to be a pattern
ef elegance, combined with idiomatic purity and sound morality
D. APPLETON d CO.'S PUBLICATION'S.
The Spanish. Teacher and Colloquial Phrase
^ Book.
An Easy and Agreeable Method of Acquiring a Speaking Knowledge oi
the Spanish Language. By Professor BUTLER. 18mo, 293
pages.
The object of the author is to make the Spanish language a living,
speaking tongue to the learner ; and the method he adopts is that of nature.
lie begins with the simplest elements, and progressively advances, applying
all former acquisitions as he proceeds, until the learner has mastered one of
the most perfect languages of modern times.
From the A T ew York Journal of Commerce.
" This is a good book, and well fitted for the purposes for which it Is designed. The
Spanish language is one of great simplicity, ami more easily acquired than any thei
modern tongue. For a beginner, we recommend this little 'book, which is smal' and
designed to be carried in the pocket."
An Easy Introduction to Spanish Comer-
sation.
By MARIAXO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADEXA. 18mo, 100 pag .s.
This little work contains all that is necessary for making rapid progress
in Spanish conversation. It is well adapted for schools, and for p< rsons
who have little time to study or are their own instructors.
Spanish Grammar.
Being a New, Practical, and Easy Method of Learning the Spanish Lan-
guage ; after the System of A. F AHX, Doctor of Philosophy, and
Professor at the College of Xeuss. First American Edition, re-
vised and enlarged. 12mo, 149 pages.
Prof. Ahn's method is one of peculiar excellence, and has met with great
success. It has been happily described in his own words : " Learn a foreign
language as you learned your mother tongue" in the same simple minncr,
nd with the same natural gradations. This method of the distinguished
German Doctor has been applied in the present instance to the Spanish
Language, upon the basis of the excellent Grammars of Lespada and Marti-
nez, and it is hoped that its simplicity and utility will procure for it th
&vor that its German, French, and Italian prototypes have already found la
the Schools and Colleges of Europe.
CATALOGO
D E LOS LIB B OS PUBLICADOS POR
D. APPLETOE Y COMPASlA.
Alfabeto en Piezas.
Juguote para ninos. Es una cnjita de sels pulgadas do alto, qne cncierra 27 dados
6 cubos perfectamente cortados 6 igualts, conteniendo cada uno en sus scis ca-
ras, una Ictra del alfabeto, trcs palabras que empiezan con csa letra, nnflnogra-
bado con colores y un niimero en cifra y en letra.
Bello. Compendio de la Gramatica Castcllana,
De D. Andres Bello, escrito para nso de las escuelas dc la America Espafiola,porJ.
Arnaldo M;"irqucz. Un tomo de 165 puginas, en 1S\
Burnouf. Elementos de Gramatica Latina,
Extractados del MOtodo para Estudiar la Lengua Latina, por J. L. Durnouf. Tra-
ducidos del Frances al Castcllano por Juan Vicente Gonzalez. Un tomo de
164 p:iginas, en 12.
Butler. El Maestro de Ingles y de Espanol, 6 Libro de
Erases Familiares. For Francisco Butler. Un tomo de 292 p:';gir.as. eu IS'.
Oarreno. Manual dc TJYbanidad y Buenas Maneras,
Para uso de la juvcntud de umbos sexos. Un tomo de 322 paginas, en 12'.
Oarreno. Compendio del Manual de Urbanidad y Buenas
Maneras. Arrcglado para uso de las escuelas. Un tomo de 120 puginas, en IS.*
Oervantes. El Ingenioso Hidalgo Don Quijotc dc la
JIancha, segun el testo corregido y anotado por el Sr. Ochoa. Un tomo de C95 pa-
ginas, en 12'.
Cervantes. El Ingenioso Hidalgo Don Quijote de la
Mancha, scgtin el texto corregido y anotado por el Sr. Ochoa. Edicion de lujo coa
catorce li'iminas y retrato de Cervantes. Un tomo de G95 puginas, en S.
Coe. Cartones de Dibujo para las escuelas.
En diez partes. Por Coc.
CATALOGO DE D. APPLETON Y CA.
Cornell. Cartones de Cornell para Estudio y Practica
del Dibujo de Mapas. Designados para acompafiar a cualquiera geografia. Un j ue-
go de 13 mapas.
Cornell. Mapas de Cornell.
Juego dc 13 Mapas Mudos con los lugares marcados con niimeros en vez de sus
nombrcs.
Cornell. Una Clave de los Mapas Mudos de Cornell.
Designada para el uso del profesor. Tin tomo de 59 puginas, en 12.
De Belem. Libro de Frases Inglesas y Espafiolas.
Por E. M. De Belcm. Un tomo de S3 paginas, en 18.
De Marcheiia. Corapendio de la Historia Antigua,
6 nistoria de los Principals Pueblos de la Antigiiedad. Ilasta la mucrte de Carlo-
magno. Escrita en Ingles, y traducida al Castellano, per A. It. De Marchena.
Uu totuo de 252 pagiuas, en 18.
Diccionario Mercantil, en Ingles, Frances, y Espafiol,
por D. 1. de Yeitelle. Esta diridido en trts partes. La primera contiene el Die-
CIONAEIO, propiamente dicho en Ingles frances espafiol, alternadamente, ea
el cual so hallan las voces mercantiles empleadas en dichas lenguas, la deno-
minacion de las mercancias que circulan hoy en el comercio, y tambien, los
tx-rminos de marina de mas frecuente uso en la correspondencia comercial ; la
segimda un gran ni'imoro de cartas arrcgladas al estilo moderno. con mode-
los de facturas, cuentas corrientes, pagares, ktras de cnmbio, conocimicntos,
etc.; la tercera un VOCABULAEIO GEOGKAFICO, y una lista de las principals
abreviaturas usadas en los tres idiomas. Un tomo de 305 paginas, en 12 r .
Dusseldorff. Perlas de la Galeria Dusseldoi-if,
Fotografias originates por A. A. Tiu-ner. Keproducidas por la vez primera bajo
la direccion de^J. Frodsham. Un tomo en folio crancle coatcniendo 52 foto-
grafias, elegantemente enciiadernado en tafilete.
Elementos de la Historia Universal.
Para uso de las escuelas hispano-americanas. Un tomo dc- 431 paginas, en S'.
El Lenguage de las Flores y de las Frutas,
con algunos Emblemas dc las Piedras y los Colon's. Un tomito may atractivo
de 140 paginas. en IS".
Galeria de Pinturas para Ninos.
Un tomo de 56 paginas en 4. mayor, en magnifico papel, contcnicndo cerca dc 300
flnos grabados. La misina obra con los grabados iluminados.
CATALOGO DE D. APPLETON T CA.
Grand. Compcndio de Aritmetica Elemental,
Para la Instruccion Primaria, por M. P. Grand. Un tomo dc CO paginas en 12'.
Le Sage. Ilistoria de Gil Bias de Santillana,
Publicada en Frances por A. I!. Lo Sage, traducida al Castcllano por el Padre Isla.
Un tomo en 12'.
Libro Primario de los Ninos.
Una cartilla adornada con laminas iluminadas. Un tomo de 14 paginas, on S.
Libro Primario de Ortografia,
Designado particularmcntc para uso do las escuclas dc prirnenxs letras. Un tomo
de 164 p;iginas en 12.
Los Miserables. Xovela por Victor Hugo,
Traducida del original francos al castellano por D. Jos6 Scgundo Flores. Dos to-
mes en S'. encuardernados en tela.
Mandevil. Libro Primario por el Doctor Enrique Man-
devil. Di'signado particularmente para las cscuelas do los ninos. Un tomo dc 78
paginas, con laminas, en 12'.
Mandevil. Libro Segundo por el Doctor Enrique Man-
devil Un tomo de 123 paginas, con luminas, oa 1J .
Mandevil. Libro Tercero de Lectura.
Un tomo en 12'. constando de mas de 250 paginas.
Marsh. Curso Practico de Teneduria de Libros.
Partida Sencilla, Por C. C. Marsh, contador. Un tomo de 144 p;'iginas, en 8'.
Marsh. La Ciencia de la Teneduria de Libros,
Bien calcnlada para cnsefiar completamcnte la Teoria y la Pr;iet ica de la Partida Do-
ble. Por C. C. Marsh, contador. Un tomo do 190 paginas, en 8%
Marsh. Juegos de Libros (en Blanco),
Para la Practica de la Teneduria. Seis libros, componen un juego.
Mi Abuela Facil, Coleccion Nueva de Historias para
Kiflos. Adornadas con bonitas laminas. Diez libritos, en paquetes surtidos.
Nueva Biblioteca de la Risa, por una Sociedad do
Literatos de Buen Humor. Obra capaz de haccr reir a una estitua de pic'":
critr. al alcance de todas las inteligencias, y dispucsta para satisfacer todos los
gustos. Un tomo de 49G paginas, en 12.
CATALOGO DE D. APPLET OX Y CA.
Nuevo Tesoro tie Chistcs, Maximas, Provcrbios, Re-
fiexioncs Morales, Historius, C'uentos y Leyendas. Extractados de las obras de
los mejores autores Ingleses y Americanos. Traducido al Castellano por Si-
mon Camacho. Un tomo dc 271 pi'iginas, en 12'.
Ollendorff. Un Metodo para Aprendcr a Leer, Escribir,
y llablar cl Ingles, segun cl Sistema de Ollendorff. Por Ramon Palenzucla y Juan
de la C. Carreno. Un tomo de 457 p;iginas, en 12".
Ollendorff. Claye de los Ejercicios del Metodo para
aprender a Leer, Escribir, y llablar el Ingles, segun el Sistema de Ollendorff. Tot
Eamon Palenzuela y Juan de la C. Carrefio. Un toino de 111 p;'iginas, en 12".
Ollendorff. Un Metodo para Apremler a Leer, Escribir,
y llablar el Frances segun el Sistema de Ollendorff. Por TeoJoro Simoaue. I'n
tomo de 341 pnginas, en 12.
Ollendorff. Clave de los Ejercicios del Metodo para
aprtnder a Leer, Escribir. y llablar el Francis, segun cl Sistema dc Olleadorff. Por
Teodoro Simonnt-. Un tomo de 80 pagiaas, en 12%
Omnibus, 6 Libro de Memoria, para todo el ano.
Contiene cl Omnibus: tablas de calculo de tiempo; tablas de intereses; tabla
de la eaatidad dc dias entre dos cpocas dadas; tabla comparativa do las eras
de las principales nacioaes del mundo ; lista de las fiestas movibles, cuatro
temporas, etc. ; computo cclesiistieo ; calendario de los Santos ; agenda para
cada dia del ano ; paginas pantadas para cuentas dc gastos, apuntes de vales a
pagar y a recibir, etc., etc. En tres estilos de encuadernacion. El Omnibus so
publica para cada ano, con 6 tneees de anticipacion.
Otis. Estudios sobre los Animales,
Con instrucciones para cl nso del Lapiz de Plorno y de Creyon. Por F. X. Otis,
A.M. Un tomo.
Otis. Lecciones Faciles de Paisaje,
Con instrucciones para el uso del Lupiz de Plomo y de Creyon. Por F. X. Otis,
A.M. Un tomo.
Ortiz. Principios Elernentales de Fisica Experimental y
Aplicada, inelnyendo la Meteorologia y la Climatologia. Por Pedro P. Ortiz. Un
tomo de 507 paginas y 366 grabados, en 12'.
Faez. Libro Segundo de Geografia Descriptiva,
Destinado a scguir al Primero de Smith. Adornado con Doce Grandes 'Map.is y
mas de cien grabados que sirvcn pai-a mcjor Intc-li^cncia del testa Edic;oa
CATALOG DE D. APPLETON Y CA.
Enterainente Nucva, Corrcgkla y aumentada conforme a los ultimos dato.s Ks-
tadisticos y Cainbios Politicos, y Arrcglada al nso de las Escuelas Hi:.;iam>-
Aincricanas. Por D. Ilauion Pacz. Un tomo do 90 pagiuas grandes.
Perkins. Lcccioncs de Aritmetica Elemental,
Basadas en ol uiu'vo sistema mental y practice adoptado en las principales escuclas
de los Estados-Unidos. Por Jorje 11. Perkins. Un tomo de 1C3 paginas en 18'.
Ripalda. Catccisino de la Doetrina Cristiana.
I'or el P. Geruiiinio Hipalda, du la Compafiia de Jesus. Un tomo do 90 paginas, en
18'.
Resales. Caton'Cristiano, Catecismo de la Doetrina Cris-
tiaua, para la cducaciou y buena criau/a de los nifios. Couipucsto por el P. Gero-
nitno Resales, de la Compafiia de Jesus. Nuevarnente corregido y afiadido el
compendio de la fe. del Catocisnio del P. Francisco Amado Pouget, al fin. Un
tomo de 851 paginas, en 18.
Robertson. Nucvo Curso Practice, Analitico, Teorico
y Sintetico de Idioma Ingles. Escrito para los Franceses por T. Robertson. Tra-
ducido y adaptado al Castellano sobre la ultima rdicion del original. Por Pe-
dro Josu Kojas. Un tomo de 351 paginas, en 8'., con una clave de los ejerci-
cios.
Roemer. El Lector Poligloto y Guia para la Traduccion,
Cinco tomos (quo se venden separadamcnte) por J. Iloemer, M. A. El tomo I. se
compone de una importante serie de Estractos Ingleses ; el II. sus traduceiones
en Frances, por el Profesor Iloemer; el III. en Aleman, por el Dr. Keinhard
Solger; el IV. en Espafiol, por Simon Camacho; el V. en Italiano, por el Dr.
Yincenzo Botta ; hacicndo do esta manera una mutua clave de cada lengua.
Cada tomo en 12.
Royo. Instruccion Moral y Religiosa,
Para las escuelas de la Repablica, Nociones irnportautcs tomadas del Frances.
Por Joso Manual Royo. Obra examinada y aprobada por el M. K. senor Arzo-
bispo de Bogoti'u Un tomo de 24-3 paginas, en 1S. con luminas.
Sarmiento. Aritmetica Prtictica, primera parte.
Sumar, Eestar, Multiplicar y Dividir Enteros y Quebrados. Publicada por <'>rden
del Jcfe del Departamento de Escuelas del Estndo dc Buenos Ayrcs, por Do-
mingo F. Sarmiento. Un tomo de 64 paginas, en 12''.
Sarmiento. Metodo de Lectura Gradual,
Por Domingo F. Sarmiento. Un tomo de 61 paginas, con cuarenta luminas, en 13.
CATALOGO DE D. APPLE TON Y CA.
Serie Nueva de Novelitas, para Diversion 6 Instruc-
cion de la Infancia :
Aladin 6 la Lampara Haravillosa, All Baba y los Cuarenta Laclroucs,
El Gato Calzado, Juan el Matador de Gigantes,
Beldad y la Bestia, Aventuras de Robinson Crusoe,
Viaje de Gulivero a Lilipueia, La Caperucita Roja,
Juanito y el Tallo de Haba, La Barba Azul,
Cenicentilla, 6 el Escarpin de Cristal, La Gata Blanca.
Expendense por separado en paquetes do 12 novelitas.
Smith. Astronomia Ilustracla,
Dispuesta para uso do las Escuelas de la America Espanola ; ilustrada con numero-
sos diagramas originales ; por Asa Smith, traducida al espafiol por Demetrio
Paredes. Un tomo en cuarto mayor, 6G p;'iginas.
Smith. Primer Libro de Geografia de Smith, 6 Geografia
Elemental, dispucsto para los Nines. Adornaflo con cien grabados y catorce ma-
pas, por Asa Smith, M.A. Traducido al Espafiol por Tcmistoclcs Pared
tomo de 131 pi'iginas, en cuarto manor, con mapas y muchas estampas.
Velazquez. Diceionario de Proriunciacion de las Len-
guas Espanola e Inglesa, por Mariano Velazquez de la Cadena, compuesto so! :
Diccionarios Espanolas de la Academia Espanola, Terreros, Salva y el Eaivtti
y Neuman por el Dr. Seoane, y los inglcses de "Webster, "Worcester, y Walker,
aumentado con mas do ocho mil palabras, idiotismos, y frascs familiares. las ir-
rcgularidades de los verbos y la sinopsis de ambas lenguas. En dos partes : I.
Espanol 6 Ingles; II. Ingles y Espanol. Tin tomo, en S\ mayor, de mas de
1300 pnginas, hermosamente impreso y bien cncuadernado.
Velazquez. Diceionario de las Lenguas Espaiiola e In-
glesa. Abrcviado del grande del autor al uso de los jovcnes cstudiantes y de
los viajeros, por Mariano Velazquez de la Cadena. En dos partes : Espanol e
Ingles ; Ingles y Espanol. Un tomo de 847 pr'iginas, en 12.
A 000 669 422 8
H